JP2018033926A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine such as a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) or a reel game machine (slot machine) having features in display means.SOLUTION: If a timer display becomes "00:00" after a first timer notice display TM11 was displayed, an SP ready-to-win presentation is started. After the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 showed the "00:00", a display of "SP on standby" suggesting that the SP ready-to-win presentation is to be started is performed in an area where the timer display has been displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 430

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known to have display means, and display effects on the display means tend to be diverse.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
Production means capable of executing timer production,
Display means capable of displaying a timer display;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is an effect configured to start a certain effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
The display means provides an indication regarding the certain effect (hereinafter, “first display”) in at least a part of the area where the timer display is displayed after the timer display indicates the certain time. May be displayed),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which entangled the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example regarding the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through a weak SP reach effect, and it makes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG.16 and FIG.17. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where it loses | hangs out while performing the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) through strong SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed through a strong SP reach effect, and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the chance button 136 which is the operation means A starts a vibration according to operation of the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in a step. It is a figure which shows an example which operated the chance button 136 which is the operation means A after operating the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in the step. It is a figure which shows an example in case the timing which operates the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is later than the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates when a housing | casing vibrates. It is a figure which shows the example which permeable part 191 itself rotates in the front-back direction, and vibrates strongly. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the scene where the enemy character wins is displayed once through a strong SP reach production, but becomes a big hit by a revival production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 28 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the notice effect produced in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the pseudo | simulation ream in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the other effect which entangled the pseudo-ream in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shake variation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 36 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th effect and a 5th effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example when the timing which operates button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39 in a step. It is a figure for further explaining the relation between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of the promotion effect. It is the figure which showed two other examples regarding a promotion effect. It is a figure for demonstrating general timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which may display the timer warning display T according to button operation in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the timing of back button operation, and the timing of a holding | maintenance increase. It is a figure which shows two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the method of the display including the timer announcement display T. FIG. It is a figure showing an example in case a timer notice overlaps with other effects accompanied by countdown of remaining time. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which the timer announcement display T is displayed on the device different from the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mode of the change display of the decoration symbol in which the animation of a holding | maintenance icon is performed in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in a design stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of a hold increase during a symbol stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of two hold increasing during a pattern fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case the holding | maintenance increases two while the symbol stops. It is a figure for demonstrating winning order fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case a holding | maintenance increases in winning order fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows an example when a hold | maintenance increases during a stop display in a winning order fluctuation | variation, and it becomes a hold full tank. It is a figure which shows the example by which a simultaneous change effect is not performed depending on the type of the hold icon currently displayed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change production when it becomes a reserve full tank in winning order change. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 2nd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.78 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 83 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 in stages. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 in stages. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. FIG. 110 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the hold change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 139 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the symbol fluctuation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 5-9 of this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the effect of the mini game applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 171. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 3rd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 64, (b) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation change notice. It is a figure explaining an example of the production using the production movable body. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the production | presentation by the continuous strike operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the production | presentation by the continuous strike operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the pending | holding change notice is performed during the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of the production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the continuous striking operation is performed in the production | presentation by long press operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure shown about an example of the production which operates a production button according to a rhythm. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example using two effect buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection effect performed during a symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of a back button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye effect. It is a figure explaining the other example of a display of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initial setting of a production | presentation movable body is performed. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button production. FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 248. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. FIG. 262 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of a pseudo-continuous production. FIG. 262 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows another example of a decoration symbol, (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the symbol used as the chance of a prefetch notice. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 274. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 277. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 278. FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. (A) is a figure shown about the other example of the button production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, and (B) is other than the pseudo-continuous production performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown about the example of. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 1000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. The game machine 5000 is shown, (e) has shown the data server 6000 which memorize | stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 4th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of the special figure X, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of the special figure Y, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures X and for special figures Y. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 304 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 304 in stages. 305 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 306 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button production in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. 337 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 340 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 346 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 349 in steps. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 350 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the production which continues from FIG. 350 (24). It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 step by step. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 360 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 360-361. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 360-361. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 363 step by step. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown to FIGS. 363-364. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 360-361. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 step by step. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 364 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369. 370 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 372 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in Drawings 373-374. 375 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 377 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 382 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the production | presentation which continues from FIG. 379 (18). It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 379-380. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 386 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the production | presentation in the jackpot game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of a display when an error display is displayed in the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated striking effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the description display applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. FIG. 409 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. 409. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another aspect of the production example shown to FIG. 154 (b-1)-the same figure (b-5). It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 425 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425; 427 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 428 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 432 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 435 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435; It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 436 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 439 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 441 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 458 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 449 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 452 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 455 step by step. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the reservation notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 458 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 460. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the carrying machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a ball ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. Pays out a ball to the person

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of performing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmission portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, a family crest character 247 (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) and a pair of combined characters 248 (see FIG. 22 and the like) to be combined with the family crest character 247 are prepared. The family crest character 247 corresponds to an example of a first effect movable body, and the combined character 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The family crest character 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When the operation starts, the family crest member 247 falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined objects 248 are disposed at the initial positions on the left side and the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the combined object 248 starts its operation, the left and right are advanced from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the family crest character 247 from the left and right, and merge with the crest character. Whether it is a family crest character 247 or a pair of combined characters 248, it is less visible to the player in the state of being in their initial positions than when overlapping with the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 that detects the operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Data is read out and displayed using the work area of VRAM 436. And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 performs drive control of various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a family crest accessory 247, and a combined accessory 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518. Furthermore, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbols change at a high speed for each symbol display area (scrolled). When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hit Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer numbers for special drawings and for universal maps, and these counters determine timer numbers that can take values ranging from 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). The pre-determination based on the start information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified (pre-reading notice). By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as the common figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in any one of the display modes (common figure B shown in FIG. 5C). In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the decoration pattern fluctuation pattern in the decoration symbol display device 208. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating information, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command displays a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image that informs the player that the big hit is to be ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the big win game Ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving the operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to the symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operation means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313, and the movable body control is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 according to the effect data read here. The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control processing here, various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 that can perform advancing and retreating operations, transmissive portions 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, family crests 247, combined roles are obtained from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of each of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a variation icon display region 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 208f is located on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A, four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during the period other than the execution of the animation (for example, the period during which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B, a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 and a fourth symbol 2082 of special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that.

  In addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 9 shows a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. ing.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lit” is used here, it may be “flashing” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display a stop symbol of the loss (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3). The star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 3) of an arrow display 136b and a “press” character display as a prompt display for prompting the user), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9D starts to light in red and prompts to be pressed.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice that suggests whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9G, the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. Yes. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (h), characters of super reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “decoration” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter FIG. As shown in (h ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” without developing into super reach. Has been. Even if “unfortunately” is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control for accepting only the acceptance period may be performed.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 is “movable”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 and the like. The LED and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as “Vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 is production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 is production data after operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used as the production data after operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, the decorative design display device 208 starts the judgment effect. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, before notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the decorative design display device 208 starts a judge effect. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs the user that the next winning round is aimed at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening). The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened notification execution period.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the decorative symbol variation display, and the operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) while the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the decorative symbol variation display, or a judge indicating the end of the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) in stages, and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  The description of the matters described above in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 is omitted. In each drawing of FIG. 14, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the chance button 136 that is the operation means A, a transparent portion 191 that is the operation means B is also shown. 14 and 15, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B is in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 14 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. Four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14 (a) are lit, and four decorative symbol display devices 208 are displayed with four black circle holding icons which are the holding indications of special Fig. 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 14B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B are lit, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14C, a reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  Here, as in FIG. 9, an example is shown in which the button effect is started when the reach effect is started. The button effect here is a kind of judge effect, and becomes a notice effect for judging whether or not to develop into a super reach. The button effect may be an effect of judging the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red as shown in FIG. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display that prompts the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and Three characters, “PUSH” and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid (operation effective period) are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X for operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the initial position display 136X may be used without including the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH”. For example, the initial position display 136X may not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

  FIG. 14 (e) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 14 (e). When the chance button 136 is operated, the red light up to that point is switched to white light or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 14F). The family crest character 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, covers a part of the change icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the change icon c. The fall of the family crest character 247 is a result of the judgment of the development to the super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14G, the decoration pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect and the background image changes. . After the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), the family crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the frog. In the super reach production, in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the first super reach production (weak SP reach production) having a relatively low possibility of a big hit and the second having a relatively high possibility of a big hit. The super-reach effect (strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the eyelid corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Even in this weak SP reach production, a judgment production is performed. Judge production here is an effect to judge whether or not it will be a big hit, it corresponds to the final judge production, and if the princess character appears from the inside when the kite opens, the display of the pattern change currently being performed It will be an indication of the judgment result that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 14 (i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. In FIG. 14 (j), although it is not understood, in FIG. 14 (j), a shadow of something appears thinly in the cloud-like effect display e1, and in FIG. 14 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the character display “Rescue the princess” is displayed on the upper right. It should be noted that the character display “Rescue the princess” may be displayed from the timing of FIG. The shade of something described in the explanation of FIG. 10J is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIG. 14 (i) and FIG. 14 (j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 14 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 14 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated again at the timing of FIG. 14 (l), and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (m) following FIG. 14 (l), there is no one in the bag that is open, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. . Even during execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is located at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  Even if the chance button 136 as the operation means A is not operated within the operation effective period, the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated and the chance button 136 is not operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when a different operation means (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same for the production that judges whether or not it will develop into the super-reach, or it may be limited to the production that judges whether or not it develops into the super-reach, It may be limited to the final judge production that becomes the direct judge for the jackpot.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  Eventually, when the special symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 is finished and finalized, the decorative symbol is also finalized. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "-" Decoration 4 "-" decoration 3 "is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is made, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. FIG.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), the family crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the leopard, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Also here, as shown in FIG. 16 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed, and in FIG. 16 (j), some shadows are visible in the effect display e1. . Further, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 performs an advance operation (protrusion operation) while vibrating. In addition, you may start a vibration after protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly halfway between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the middle position. Further, at the timing of FIG. 16 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and a chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in the state where it has advanced to the middle position in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Three simulated button images 136a1, an arrow display 136b, and a remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y for operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of a second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the intermediate position display 136Y may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 becomes zero or until the chance button 136 is pushed. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification It may be at the same time or after that. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples of the advancement start timing of the chance buttons 136 listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, Types may be applied. Further, the timing of completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, or may be simultaneously with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. Also good. The vibration start of the chance button 136 may not coincide with the start of advance of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advance. In the later case, for example, the vibration may be started at the same time as or after completion of the advance operation of the chance button 136 (stop). Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if it is pushed in even a little, or may continue to vibrate until it is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIG. 16 (i) and FIG. 16 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 16 (k) where the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 16 (i) that the final judge production has started, or it can be seen that the final judge production has been started from the point when the chance button 136 starts to advance, and the chance button 136. It can also be seen that the final judge production has started from the time when reaches the intermediate position.

  FIG. 16 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the intermediate position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. The result of the performance judge is displayed. In FIG. 17 (m) following FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position and is not vibrating, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character GC behind the bag. The judgment result here will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of a second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect started in response to an operation of the chance button 136 that is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time when the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated). It may be started when the first time elapses after the start of the weak SP reach production.

  Note that the effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured so that the chance button 136 vibrates without fail.

  In this example, the chance button 136 has advanced, but it may be in a state where it remains at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  When the final judge effect is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the fluctuations of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” as shown in FIG. ), “Decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are fixedly displayed and a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 15 from the shaking fluctuation display to the final display, the background screen has no pattern. However, in the case of a big hit, the background screen is a collection of lords. In the case of a big hit, a promotion type of jackpot type (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without probability change to a big hit with probability change) may be performed during the fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17.

  In FIG. 18, the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 16D to 16G). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i), an effect display e1 is displayed. In FIG. 18 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, lights in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. In addition, after advancing to the maximum advancing position, it may be stopped after returning by the first amount toward the initial position. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (k), a button image 136a2 simulating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in the state where it has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow display Three of 136b and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as a maximum advance position display 136Z for operation promotion notification. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the maximum advance position display 136Z may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

  The maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification hides a part of the character display “Rescue the princess” because the button image 136a2 is large. The chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, so that the expectation of jackpot is higher than when it has advanced only to the intermediate position or when it has not advanced but stays at the initial position .

  FIG. 18 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the maximum advanced position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. The judgment result of the judge performance is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (m), a princess character GC is displayed at the back of the bag, and it is confirmed that the judgment result here is a big hit. In FIG. 18 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 that has vibrated at the maximum advance position vibrates both during the push-in operation and after returning to the initial position, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by a pressing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may suspend vibration once it is pushed in, and resume vibration after returning to the initial position. Alternatively, the vibration is temporarily interrupted at the same time as returning to the initial position. May be resumed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 has advanced (protruded), and regardless of the amount of advance of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period during which the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears (all The chance button 136 vibrates during a period, or during a partial period such as the first period. In the example shown in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A vibrates in the notice effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  In this example, the chance button 136 has advanced, but the chance button 136 may remain in the initial position and vibrate. The chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  Moreover, the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice effect may be changed according to the type of jackpot or the expectation of jackpot with probability change. For example, when the degree of expectation of jackpot with probability variation is high, a display mode (second display mode) in which a fan is spread out and danced may be used.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a case where the player loses the effect while the effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the strong SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps.

  Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 19D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 19E, when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19H, the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the main character and the enemy character. The background image of this duel scene corresponds to a background image of strong SP reach production. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not it will be a big hit is performed, and if the main character wins, the judgment result will show that it will be a big hit in the current symbol variation display become. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), an effect display e2 such as a flash overlaps with a display in which the lord and the enemy are cut off. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains in the initial position. In FIG. 19 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 is not vibrated. The effect display e2 in FIG. 19 (i) and FIG. 19 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 19 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 19 (l) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 19 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (m) displays a scene where the enemy role has won, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. Note that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20 (m) is in an off state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 20 (n), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” are displayed in a swinging manner on the patternless background screen on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, as shown in FIG. 20 (o), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of loses, is finalized and lost.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which an effect involving the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is executed through a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is achieved, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  In the following, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Through a judge effect (FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)) indicating whether or not to develop into super reach, in FIG. 21 (h), a strong SP reach effect is started. A background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21 (i), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

  In FIG. 21, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down to the player side. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing of FIG. 21 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmission part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission part 191 is rotated forward, and the transmission part An arrow display 191b that suggests pressing 191 and a character display “push-in” and a remaining period meter display 191c that represents the remaining period for receiving the operation of the transmission unit 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” are collectively referred to as a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. This transmissive portion display 191X corresponds to an example of a first notification. It should be noted that the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” may not be included, but the transmission portion display 191X may be used. For example, the transmissive part display 191X not including the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. Note that the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission unit display 191X, or the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even when the transmissive portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Moreover, although the transmission part 191 rotated forward is not oscillating, it may be oscillated. The effect display e2 in FIG. 21 (i) and FIG. 21 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 21 (k) from which the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the effect display e2 has started, or it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the transmission portion 191 has been rotated forward. .

  FIG. 21 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pushed to the initial position at the timing of FIG. 21 (l). In this example, when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the family crest character 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 22 (m) following FIG. 21 (l). As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right toward the family crest character 247, and as shown in FIG. 22 (n), the pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the crest character 247 from the left and right, Combine with family crests. The effect that suggests that the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B has turned forward may be a big hit, or the effect that suggests that the crest member 247 has fallen becomes a big hit. It may also be an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of combined objects 248 with the family crest member 247 is a big hit. It should be noted that only one type of examples among a plurality of types of examples suggesting to be a big hit listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, All types may be applied. After that, first, the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (o)), then the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judge production is displayed in a state where there is no obstruction.The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 22 (q) displays the scene where Tono-sama won, and the judgment result here In this scene where the judgment result of the final judge performance is displayed, the decorative display of the decorative symbol reduced in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. However, it may be a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “333”), that is, the combination of decorative symbols is displayed with the display of the final judgment result. Ri, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  It should be noted that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22 (q) is in an unlit state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed as a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 described above, the family crest actor 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIG. 21 (f) to FIG. 21 (g)). Although the crest actor 247 operates in the final judge production (FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (o)), the crest actor 247 is not operated before the final judge production. The operation may be performed only in the judgment effect.

  In this example, there is a scene (FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (l)) in which the transmission unit 191 is operated. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 serving as the operation unit A starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 serving as the operation unit B. In FIG. 23, alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). After the operation promotion notification transmissive part display 191X shown in FIG. 23 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (l), the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate without permission (see FIG. 23 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts to vibrate simultaneously with the start of the final judge effect, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 23 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 23 (p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 23 (q), there is a case where it is not oscillating and attention can be paid to the judgment result. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect ends. In this case, the chance button 136 always vibrates during the entire period of the final judge effect. In addition, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect ends, and the initial position of the operation promotion notification to the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect ends. The display 136X may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is oscillating as part of the final judgment effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23 described above, the final judgment effect in FIGS. 23 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and the notice effect is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the chance button 136 that vibrates was not operated, but when the chance button 136 that vibrates during the execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued. In accordance with the operation, first, the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 return to the initial positions, and then the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the earlier the judgment result can be viewed. Note that when the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judgment effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the chance button 136 (second operation means) vibrates during execution of the final judgment effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 23, FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 18 (m) is not started. Also, the effects (second effects) shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) are configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. Production.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is also operated after the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B is operated. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transparent portion 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 24 (l)). That is, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  In this example, after the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation means A is pushed down this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts oscillating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts oscillating in response to the pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when the predetermined longest vibration time has elapsed since the start of vibration, the chance button 136 ends the vibration even if it is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 24 (r1)) even when the final judge effect is finished and the shaking fluctuation display is started, but the shaking fluctuation display is started. After a while, the longest vibration time has been reached, and the vibration has ended even if it has been pressed (see FIG. 24 (r2)). The longest vibration time corresponds to 6 frames in FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (r1). The fluctuation display continues for a while after that (FIG. 24 (r3) to (r4) in FIG. 24), and the first time (FIG. 24 (r2) to 3 (r4) in FIG. 24 (r4)) after the chance button 136 does not vibrate. As shown in FIG. 24 (s), “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are confirmed and displayed as a big hit. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIG. 24 (r1) to FIG. 24 (r4).

  In the example in FIG. 24, it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest member 247 falls. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 24 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 25, alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmission part 191 is operated with a delay of one frame from the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (l2)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judgment effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses is also 1. Shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the longest vibration time corresponds to six frames in FIGS. 25 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r1). The fluctuation display is continued for a second time after the chance button 136 does not vibrate (a time corresponding to two frames in FIG. 25 (r2) to FIG. 25 (r3)), and then in FIG. 25 (s). As shown, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is finalized and a big hit. As described above, the fluctuation display is a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 24, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 25, the display shown in FIGS. 25 (r1) to (r3) is performed. ) For three frames, and the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation display is shortened by a delay of the timing for operating the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B vibrates when the casing vibrates. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 26 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (k), the transmission part 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at the second position (front inclined position) rotated forward from the initial position (first position). Yes. Even though the transmission part 191 itself does not vibrate, the transmission part 191 vibrates when the casing to which the transmission part 191 is directly or indirectly attached vibrates. The casing here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmission unit 190. In this example, in addition to the transmissive portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 26 (k), the operation of the transmissive portion 191 can be urged by the vibration of the transmissive portion 191. In FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing is finished. This time, when the chance button 136 as the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

  Note that the vibration of the housing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may start when the transmission part 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission part 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may be started from the point in time, or may be started when the transmission part 191 is not operated even after the first time has elapsed after the transmission part 191 has reached the forward inclined position. Further, the vibration of the casing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed a little from the front inclined position. Even if it is pushed in, it may continue to vibrate during the first vibration period after the vibration is started or returned to the initial position, and there may be a period during which it vibrates together with the chance button 136.

  Similarly to the transmissive portion 191 in this example, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A is also, for example, a housing (for example, a chance button 136 attached directly or indirectly, even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate). The ball storage tray door 108) may vibrate when vibrated.

  Furthermore, the transmission part 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction.

  FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), 24 (m) to (q), 25 (m) to (q), and FIG. 26 (m) to (q) described above. ) Is different from the aspect of the judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) described earlier. That the mode of production is different means that the background screen is different, the characters appearing are different, or the colors of the displayed characters are different.

  Each of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 26 is an example of operating the transmission part 191, but instead of the transmission part 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmission part 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 27 shows different examples on the left and right sides.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect shown in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G). The state of FIG. 27A is the same as the state of FIG. 19K, and the initial position display 136X for the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (a) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 27 (a), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judgment result of the final judgment effect is not displayed immediately, and the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. As the image changes, the background image changes. Further, in this example, as the family crest member 247 falls, the transmission part 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 27C). Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the crest character 247 is sandwiched between the pair of combined characters 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined characters 248 and the crest character 247 are combined, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27 (o), the transmission portion 191 is rotated again from the initial position to the forward inclined position in a state where the pair of combined characters 248 is returned to the initial position and the crest character 247 remains. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position again.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, the final judgment effect is started, and at the same time, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B repeats the rotation between the initial position and the forward inclined position. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or can be seen as a production different from the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21J). The state of FIG. 27A is the same as the state of FIG. 24K, and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmission part 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. doing. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (i) is within the operation effective period of the transmissive part 191, but in this FIG. 27 (i), not the transmissive part 191, but the chance button 136 that remains unlit at the initial position is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, as in the example in which the transmission part 191 on the left side of FIG. 27 is operated, the final judgment effect is executed, and the transmission part 191 has the initial position and the forward tilt position. Strong vibration that repeats the rotation between. In other words, the transmitting portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position in FIG. 27 (b), rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in FIG. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27 (i) is operated, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a scene where the enemy role wins is displayed once through a strong SP reach effect but is a big hit by a resurrection effect. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and after the judgment effect (FIG. 28 (d) to FIG. 28 (g)) on whether or not to develop into super reach, FIG. 28 (h) Then, the strong SP reach effect is started, and in the same figure (i), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 28 (j), in the state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At this timing, the effect display e2 disappears, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 remains in the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 28 (l), the transmission part 191 is pushed. In FIG. 29 (α) following FIG. 28 (l), the scene where the enemy role similar to that of FIG. 20 (m), which seems to be the judgment result of the final judge performance, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, As shown in 29 (β), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 3” is temporarily started.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (γ), a sign is displayed when the restoration effect is started, and the restoration effect is executed from FIG. 29 (m) to FIG. 29 (p). The revival effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (p), and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 Appears.

  When the rebirth effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (r), the fluctuation variation display of the big hit combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is immediately started, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the big hit combination “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” is fixedly displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 29 (α), which was considered to be the judgment result of the final judge effect, is a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136 that is the operation means A nor the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B vibrate, but the display of the duel result (display of the judgment result of the final judge effect) is displayed, whether true or false. If it is certain that a big hit will be made at the displayed timing or after that, if the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191 vibrate, it will be a big hit for the advanced player. There is a case that the interest of the game is improved. That is, the judgment result (true result) of the final judgment effect may be notified using the vibration of the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191.

  In this example as well, there were scenes (FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l)) where the transmission part 191 was operated, but instead of the transmission part 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the third effect in stages. In FIG. 30, the alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, the reach effect is started. In this example as well, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation that is a kind of button effect is started. An effect involving the operation here is also a kind of judge effect, and is a notice effect that judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. In FIG. 30 (d), as an effect involving the operation, the transmission part 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmission part display 191X for the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. Note that the transmissive portion display 191X 'shown in FIG. 4D is a display having the same function although slightly different from the transmissive portion display 191X described so far. Note that the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position without vibrating.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the transparent portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period of the transparent portion 191, and in FIG. 30 (f), a family crest character 247 is placed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It will fall. Further, in FIG. 14F and the like, the background image has no pattern, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30F displays a shaded effect display e3. A part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest character 247. Here again, the fall of the family crest character 247 is an indication of the judgment result of developing into super reach, and then develops into super reach. The effect of FIG. 30F described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that starts in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 30 (d) to FIG. 30 (e)) where the transmission part 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission part 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the notice effect that starts in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 in a stepwise manner. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 31 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21F). The judgment effect on whether or not to develop to super reach ends in FIG. 31 (g), and the super reach effect is started from FIG. 31 (h '). This super reach production is different from the strong SP reach production and the weak SP reach production described so far, and is the production selected by the production lottery. However, the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains ½ or more of the transmission part 191 rotated to the forward tilt position shown in FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (k). 23, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed. When the operation is performed at a timing when only less than ½ remains, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is executed. Also good. That is, even if it is configured so that one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. Good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 31 (h ′), a background image in which the main character is chasing a bad merchant is displayed. In FIG. 31 (i ′), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed. The Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (j ′), the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the effect display e2 is displayed at the timing of FIG. 31 (k ′). Instead, an operation promotion notification transmission part display 191X is displayed. FIG. 31 (l ′) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position.

  The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission unit 191, and in FIG. 31 (m ′), the townscape of the castle town is different from the background image shown in FIG. 22 (m). In the same manner as FIG. 22 (m), a family crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (n ′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, a family crest character 247 is sandwiched between a pair of combined characters 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and a pair of combined characters 248 and The family crest character 247 unites. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (o ′), the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position, and the crest character 247 remains in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town. As shown in (p ′), the crest character 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the background image of the townscape of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state, the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (q ′), a scene where Tono-sama caught a bad merchant is displayed, and it is certain that the judgment result here is a big hit. The chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position without vibration during the execution period of the final judgment effect shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), which corresponds to an example of the third effect. . 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), the final judge effects are shown in FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), and FIG. 25 (m). Unlike the mode of the final judge production shown in (q), FIG. 26 (m) to (q) in FIG. 26, they are not executed simultaneously with these final judge productions. Also, unlike the judgment effect modes shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m), the judgment effect is not executed at the same time.

  Further, in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), the chance button 136 that is unlit at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is It is not a so-called back button. Note that an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 31 (j ′) to FIG. 31 (l ′)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, a second chance button 137 or the like described later is used. Other operation means may be operated.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples described so far. FIG. 32 shows different examples on the left and right sides.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21J). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136. This LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

  FIG. 32A is similar to FIG. 24K, etc., on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmissive portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmissive portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. It is moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136 as the operation means A does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judgment effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 32 (a), the final judge effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and the family crest character 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image changes. Until the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains unlit at the initial position without vibration, but after the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts to vibrate when operated. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be ended simultaneously with the end of the final judge effect, or may be ended before the end of the final judge effect. Even if the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 remains off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 is turned on or blinks here as well. Note that the lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (c), the final judgment effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a shaking fluctuation display. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judgment effect is finished, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, the LED lamp 139 is also lit or blinking here. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In this example as well, there is a scene (FIG. 32A) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32A, instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 that imitates the chance button 136 that lights in red and vibrates is included. An initial position display 136X ′ is displayed. The real chance button 136 is also lit red and vibrates. Even if the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is not vibrating is displayed, the real chance button 136 may be vibrating.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows four examples on the left side and one example on the right side. The example shown in the upper two on the left (the example shown in FIG. 33A and the example shown in FIG. 33A) also passes through a certain effect (the effects shown in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G). This is an effect that is not executed unless it is empty.

  First, in FIG. 33A, which is the first example, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene, and the lower left. The transmissive part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmissive part 191 is rotated forward is displayed. Moreover, the character display showing that the glass button which points to the permeation | transmission part 191 is waiting is also made | formed. These transparent portion rotation images 191a and the standby character display then become a notice display that the transparent portion 191 that is a glass button rotates to the forward tilt position. When this notice display is made, thereafter, the transmission part 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward tilt position.

  In the second example, FIG. 33A, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33A, and the remaining period is displayed by digital display at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a notice display that the transmissive part 191 rotates to the forward tilt position. When the remaining period by the remaining period display reaches 0.00 seconds, the transmissive part 191 that is a glass button is moved to the forward tilt position. Always rotate until.

  In FIG. 33A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display means 209 is a liquid crystal display device that has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 that is the first display means, and is movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is operated with a button effect such as a final judge effect, movable characters such as a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 operate, and the second display means 209 is moved to the initial position. The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display unit 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A may vibrate or the transmission part 191 may vibrate while the second display means 209 is operating or after the operation is completed. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 may be a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may vibrate in the overlapping state.

  FIG. 33A, which is a fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33A can perform stock display of the button image B, and here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B represents that one button effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 33A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B. The button effects corresponding to the remaining three button images B are executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the jackpot game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of jackpot rounds. Further, as the button effects corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

  Note that the second display means 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and the reliability of the pre-reading notice from the display mode of the button image B by the button operation. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also at this time, an operating means for receiving a button operation (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission part 191) may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (α), a button image 136a4 that imitates the chance button 136 in the off state, and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display that prompts the user to press and hold the chance button 136 for a long time. In addition, three characters are displayed as one set: a character display “Long press to save the meter” and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” will be collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification long press display 136L. The long press display 136L may be used even if the three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” are not included. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, a level display L1 is also displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. This level display L1 is a display that is leveled up according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 33 (α) is 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and the level display L1 reaches the full tank level before the remaining period of the operation effective period is exhausted, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full tank level. Here, a transmission part 191 (not shown) which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transmission part display 191X for notifying operation promotion as shown in FIG. It is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation, but here, even if the operation is to repeatedly press a short period of time that cannot be said to be a long press (single press), Even a so-called continuous hitting operation that handles or repeatedly presses for a short period of time is treated as a long press operation. Note that even when a continuous hit operation is required, a long press operation or a single press operation may be treated as a continuous hit operation (the same applies to the following examples). Although not shown in the figure, when the transmissive portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period, the judgment effect is started.

  Next, an effect involving a so-called pseudo-ream will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-ream is also executed when “execute” is won by the execution possibility determination lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the special symbol variation display. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, for one special symbol variation display (that is, one start prize). The decorative symbol display is temporarily stopped in some or all of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the decorative symbol update is stopped but not yet confirmed, and is shaken. Or the like, the display may be re-variably displayed once or a plurality of times. For example, while the decorative symbols are updated (variable display) in the middle symbol display region 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. Variation display may be started, or variation display of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in all symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then re-variation display may be started. In addition, when temporary stop is performed, symbols and designs other than decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo-continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for the symbol variation display of one special chart (that is, one start winning prize) is determined by lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Is done. The pseudo-rendition effect may be a jackpot notice effect (so-called normal notice effect) of the change, which predicts that the symbol change display of the special figure currently being performed will be a big hit, or the special effect currently being performed. It may be a reach notice effect for notifying the development to super reach with the symbol variation display in the figure. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big win will be given by the symbol variation display of the special symbol starting after the symbol variation display of the special symbol currently being performed. Regardless of the notice effect, as the number of re-variable displays increases, the degree of expectation (the reliability of the notice) increases, resulting in a hot effect. In addition, when a re-variable display is performed for the first number of times (for example, four times), a big hit decision or a super reach decision may be made. In the case of a pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variable displays increases as the symbol variation table of the special figure to be noticed approaches. For example, when the symbol variation table of the special chart after 3 times is targeted for the notice, the re-variation display is performed once in the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table of the first special diagram, and the second special diagram is displayed. In the quasi-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variable display is performed twice, and in the pseudo-variable effect in the symbol variation table of the third special diagram, the re-variable display is performed three times. In the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variation display is performed four times.

  In the pseudo continuous effect, the first pseudo continuous notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. The first pseudo-continuous notification here is to notify that the pseudo-continuous production is started or that the pseudo-continuous production is continued. For example, any one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-continuous symbols”) among the combinations of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspond to an example of the first pseudo-continuous notification. To do. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) shown in FIG. 5B or a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 2”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 6”). , So-called chance eyes), or other patterns or patterns. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of types of examples of the pseudo-continuous patterns listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be. The first pseudo-continuous notification may be a character display, lamp lighting, or sound output that is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. Only one of the multiple types of examples of the first pseudo continuous notification enumerated here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied May be.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving pseudo-ream step by step.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, a transparent display 191X for notifying the operation promotion is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 34A, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 34C shows that the operation is within the effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position. Then, according to the operation of the transmission part 191, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the transmission part display 191X disappears, and this time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts to vibrate at the initial position. In FIG. 34 (d), a pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 34 (d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous pattern N that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 34 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo continuous pattern N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the effective period of operation, and when the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, the pseudo-continuous symbol N remains, and the temporary stop is made. In some cases, the pseudo position symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X, and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects shown in FIGS. 34D to 34F are judged effects indicating whether or not a temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 34 (f), the pseudo continuous symbol N remains, and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 34 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the fluctuating display, and the fluctuation icon c is also displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (g), the pseudo continuous symbol N disappears, and the update (revariation display) of the decorative symbol is started in all the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of the special figure is still continued, the first special symbol display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special Fig. 1 are in the variable display, and the variation icon c is also displayed. However, the start of re-variation display here seems as if the start of special symbol variation display has been performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (g) displays characters “× 2”. Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when viewed as a special symbol design variation display, it looks like the second special symbol design variation display due to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. In the meaning of representing, “× 2” is displayed. That is, the character display “× 2” is a notification representing the number of times related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. This character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of a second pseudo continuous notification.

  In FIG. 34 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop is performed in FIG. 34 (f) is continued, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position by rotating to the forward inclined position, the second temporary stop judgment effect is started.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 34 (b) to FIG. 34 (c)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing in stepwise examples of other effects involving pseudo-ream.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, a transparent portion display 191X for notifying the operation promotion is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 35A, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. Further, the transmissive part display 191X whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b) overlaps the gray temporary pseudo-continuous pattern N ′ whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b). As a result, in FIG. 35B, a part of the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ is also displayed.

  FIG. 35 (c) is within the operation effective period, and when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, a judgment effect is started according to the operation of the transmission part 191. The judgment effect here is when the transmissive part 191 is operated, the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary tentative pattern N ′ is changed from the gray tentative pseudo continuous pattern N ′, and the temporary stop is performed. Even if the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ does not change to the pseudo-continuous symbol N, but disappears to the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′, and temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG. 35 (d), the temporary stoppage is changed to the white pseudo-continuous pattern N and the first temporary stop is performed. Although the change from the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N 'to the pseudo-continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, it may be changed to a completely different symbol. It should be noted that both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35D and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are displayed during the change, and the change icon c is also displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission unit 191 is operated, that is, the result of the judgment effect shown in FIG. 35D is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is extinguished at the initial position without vibrating. However, the chance button 136 may start to vibrate at the initial position according to the operation of the transmission part 191, or may start to vibrate while moving forward, or start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned on or blinked.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. 35 (c)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′) are modified examples of FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′) show the roaring effects that the temporary stop has not yet started and the pseudo-continuous effects may be started. That is, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo continuous symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35 (b '), the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c'). The chance button 136 may start to vibrate before FIG. 35 (b ′). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d '), and the temporary stop is performed. On the contrary, in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. As described above, the effects shown in FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′) involving the chance button 136 as the operation means A are a kind of judge effect and correspond to an example of the second effect.

  FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″) are modified examples of FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′). In FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A vibrates, but in FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″), the chance button 136 is. Is not oscillating, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a transparent portion display 191X for an operation promotion notification. Further, also in FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″), as in FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), the roaring effect that may start the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. ing. Then, the transmission portion 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transmitting portion 191, the second pseudo-continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo continuous symbol N. On the contrary, here, the pseudo-continuous symbol N may disappear in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started. Also in this example, when the judgment effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transmission portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the temporary operation is temporarily performed according to the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo continuous symbol (second pseudo continuous symbol N2) different from the pseudo continuous symbol to be stopped temporarily stops.

  The description of the specific example of the effect so far has been an example in the symbol variation display of the special symbol, but the same applies to other than the symbol variation display of the special symbol.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which a big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shaking fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game, and FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 36 (a), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” with no probable big hit (normal big hit) is performed in the center area of the background screen where the lords gather. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the shaking fluctuation display. The promotion effect here is a jackpot type promotion effect (probable change promotion effect), and as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left on the background screen where the lords are gathered. At the same time, an operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed in the central area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. The probable promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect.

  FIG. 36 (c) is within the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the fluctuation variation display of the combination of decorative symbols is redisplayed. In this example, the probability change promotion has failed and, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), a jackpot without probability change (ordinary jackpot) of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which is an even combination of decorative symbols The fluctuation fluctuation display of the combination of is displayed. On the other hand, when the probabilistic promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of the odd-numbered decoration symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) is redisplayed. The However, whether or not it is a big hit with probability change is determined by the determination of winning or not (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether success or failure of the probability change promotion here is according to the determination of whether or not winning (winning) at the time of winning The same applies to the probable promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. After that, the display is fixed and displayed in the combination of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the swing variation display in FIG. 36D (see FIG. 36E).

In FIG. 36 (f) following FIG. 36 (e), a big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested to make a right-hand hit, and a hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the number of consecutive big hits is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “first time” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of FIG. 36 (g), the probability variation promotion effect is started again. The probable promotion effect here is also a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect. In FIG. 36 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position and prompts the user to press it. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display for prompting a continuous operation of the chance button 136, and “continuous hitting”. Three characters are displayed as one set, a character display of “shiro” and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Let's hit repeatedly” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification repeated hitting display 136R. Note that the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Randomly hit” may not be included, but may be displayed as a continuous shot 136R. For example, the continuous hitting display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.
In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L2 is a display that is leveled up according to the number of consecutive hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 36 (h) is 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the remaining period of the operation effective period disappears in FIG. 36 (i). In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the level display L2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached three levels, but has not reached the MAX level. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (j) following (i), the continuous hitting display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and a character display of “defense failure” indicating failure of probability change promotion is displayed.

  Furthermore, during the jackpot game started in FIG. 36 (f), as shown in FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 36 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. In addition to the display, a character display “Push it in and return to life” is also made, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect is also started here. This button effect is an effect of judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) can be aimed at a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is ready for winning. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 37 (l) is within the operation effective period of the transmission part 191, and the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position. In response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to vibrate at the initial position. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Further, although the chance button 136 has started to vibrate, there may be cases where the vibration does not start.

  Furthermore, the production movable body (movable accessory) operates in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191. That is, the family crest character 247 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. The pair of combined characters 248 and the family crest character 247 are combined with each other.

  Next, the family crest character 247 and the pair of combined characters 248 return to the initial position, and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (n) displays the result of the judgment effect. A character display of “successful survival” indicating that a winning is possible is displayed. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 37 (m), it may be vibrated at this timing. In addition, an asterisk with a letter “GET” is also displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 37 (n) following FIG. 37 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and aims at a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening). Character display is made. In FIG. 37 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of “V Aim”, and the game ball passes the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in (q) in the figure, the letter “V” is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, wins the specific winning opening V, and shifts to a certainty state (for example, after the big hit game is over). ) Is informed. Then, an end effect of the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 37 (r)), and the jackpot game ends.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 37 (k) to FIG. 37 (l)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

In the above description,
“First operation means [for example, transparent portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
A second operating means [for example, a chance button 136];
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. (M) to the final judge production shown in (q) of FIG.
The first production is configured to start according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first production, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 24 (p), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 26 (r1), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Whether it is the first operation means or the second operation means, a button, such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel may be used. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers, and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only those that are operated by direct contact, but also those that can be operated by holding the hand even if direct contact is not possible.

  The first operation means includes a chance button (for example, a chance button 136), another chance button (for example, a button B (second chance button 137)), a cross key (for example, a cross key 181a), a transparent button. It may be any one type selected from button-like parts such as the unit 191, lever, touch sensor, and touch panel, only one type is applied, and the others are not Application is also possible. For example, a chance button (for example, a chance button 136) may be applied to the first operation means, and the remaining chance buttons, cross keys, etc. may not be applied.

  Furthermore, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only a direct contact operation but also an operation means that can be operated by holding a hand even if the direct contact is not possible (for example, a non-contact type).

  Moreover, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the modes may differ depending on the operation means such as the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, and pitch. For example, the first operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the second aspect.

  The notice effect may be one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects. The notice here may be a jackpot notice, a advance notice to Super Reach, a pseudo-continuous start notice, or a pseudo-continuous notice. . Alternatively, one or a plurality of the notice effects of the plurality of kinds of the notice effects may be applied, and the others may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of the plurality of types of notice effects may be applied, and the others may be all unapplicable.

  Further, the execution period of the notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of the display of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or confirmation of the decorative symbol It may be up to display. Alternatively, it may be until the movable means starts moving from the first position to the second position and then returns to the first position again, or until it starts moving to the first position. Also good. Also, only one of the multiple types of execution periods exemplified here may be used, or multiple types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods may be applied. May be. More specifically, when the first effect is the final judge effect, the decorative symbol temporarily stops (fluctuates and fluctuates) in combination with the big hit symbol pattern from the start of the notification or the like that is performed for the first time after the button operation. The execution period of the first effect may be until the end of the button operation or until the end of the button operation (particularly the result of success) is displayed.

  Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at the second position (for example, the final arrival position), for example, when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. Alternatively, it may vibrate in a state where an effect display or the like executed in accordance with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the movable means is located at the second position and the effect is displayed. You may vibrate in the state where the image is displayed. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Furthermore, “the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operation means” means that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operation means. Then, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means and other conditions (operations of other operation means, etc.) being satisfied. In addition, the first effect may be started only in response to an operation of the first operation means, and if other conditions are satisfied even if the first operation means is not operated, The first effect may be started. For example, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first effect may be started even if the first operation means is not operated, and conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation means, the fixed time Even if it passes, the aspect in which said 1st production may not be started may be sufficient.

  The first effect may be configured to be able to start in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be always started, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or only by the operation of the first operation means. It may be started.

  In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the first state, the first effect may be executed. Here, the first state may be a state in which notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means is performed, or a state in which such notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed. The establishment of the first condition here includes that the first operating means has been operated.

  Further, “in the first effect” may or may not extend over the first effect.

  In addition, “in the first effect, the second operation means vibrates” includes not only starting to vibrate arbitrarily but also starting to vibrate when a condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one that does not vibrate unless it is operated continuously, may be one that vibrates continuously without being pressed, and is not continuous and intermittent. May vibrate. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Further, even after the first performance is finished, the second operation means may be capable of vibrating, and in this case, the second operation means may always vibrate or vibrate. There may be cases where the vibration is not performed, the vibration may be performed other than the vibration, or only the vibration may be performed.

  Furthermore, it may continue to vibrate from the first effect, or may be temporarily stopped and restarted. Alternatively, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is finished.

  Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. Alternatively, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect executed at intervals among the multiple effects, and the second operation means may be configured to perform the first operation in all of the multiple effects. The two operating means may be configured to vibrate.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect. Furthermore, “the second operation means is configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect” means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. It may be configured to be performed regardless of whether or not to do so.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m), etc.]
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second effect is configured to start in response to an operation of the second operation means [for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l)],
The second operating means is configured to vibrate before the second presentation is started [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. 18 (k), FIG. 18 (j) to FIG. (K) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the display of the image prompting the operation is started, or configured to start vibration after the start of the operation reception state. Also good.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. In addition, it may be configured to vibrate after the end of the second effect.

  An effect (second effect) that is started in response to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects. There may be a case where the second operation means may vibrate before the second presentation is started.

  Furthermore, everything performed by the operation of the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, all of liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking, and the like. However, the second effect may target only the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means performed in the first effect continues until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the second operation means is operated, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may end, or when the second operation means is operated, it may end, or when the first effect ends, it may end together, or the first effect ends. However, it may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (it may end immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol or at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means that is performed before the start of the second effect may end when the second operation means is operated, or the second effect starts. May be terminated at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration end condition is determined when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed before the second effect is started. Will be different.

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means performed before the start of the second effect is continued until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the first operation means is operated. However, it may end when the vibration time elapses, or may continue until the first effect ends, and may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol) Or it may end simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol). In these cases, the vibration end condition is the same when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed before the second effect is started.

Also,
“A second display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The first effect is an effect by displaying the image,
The second effect is an effect by displaying the image,
If the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where no new effect is started even if the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for music output from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  Further, the second display means may always display an image.

  Further, the second operating means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Furthermore, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.

Also,
“In the second performance, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 18 (m)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The second operating means may vibrate before the start of the second effect, and may continuously vibrate in the second effect, or may be resumed after being temporarily interrupted. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operation means before the start of the second effect may be executed during a reception state period of the second operation means.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes a first operation means and a second operation means, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one effect among the plurality of effects is The first effect is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, and the second effect is a notice effect. Yes, the first production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means, and the second operation device is configured to vibrate in the first production. In the second production, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.

Also,
“When the second operating means vibrates rather than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. FIG. (L) etc.] is configured to make it easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state or a subsequent probability change state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “favorable state for the player” means a big hit (small hit) or a big hit gaming state, a probability change state between probability change and short time, 15R big hit and 4R big hit. Of these, a gaming state of 15R big hit (big hit with a larger number of rounds) or a state in which 100 times of 100 times and 50 times of electric support are given.

  Further, “so that it is easy to shift” may be that the game is surely shifted to the big hit gaming state if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit decision, and the second operation means may necessarily vibrate in the first effect.

In addition, it includes first display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,
When the second operation means vibrates [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. 16] than when the second operation means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. (L) etc.] may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be associated with a jackpot, and further may be configured to be more likely to be associated with a jackpot with probability variation.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), etc.]
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, a mode in which all are different, or a mode in which only a part is different. May be. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  The second operating means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes vibration when the third effect ends. It may be a thing.

Also,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that during the period in which any one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

  Furthermore, it may be configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect is started in accordance with the operation of the first operation means.

Also,
`` It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification urging the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 23 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 24 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 25 (k)]. ~ Transmission part display 191X etc. of the operation promotion notification shown in (l2), FIG. 26 (k) and (l) of FIG.
The first effect is the first period [for example, the period from FIG. 23 (k) to (l), the period from FIG. 24 (k) to (l), FIG. 25 (k) to FIG. In the period of (l2), the period of FIG. 26 (m) to the period of (l), etc.], the production starts when the first operating means is operated,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.

Also,
“The second operating means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being executed [for example, the whole period in the examples of FIGS. 24 to 25 and 26, and the example of FIG. 23. It is means configured to vibrate in part of the period etc. because it does not vibrate in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first operation means is a means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate,
The second operation means is a means [for example, a chance button 136] configured to be capable of vibrating.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that “vibration” means direct vibration when the operation means itself vibrates, and does not include indirect vibration in the case of indirect vibration due to vibration of other members. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

  Even in a state where the first effect is not executed [for example, a state during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 34D to 34E, not the final judge effect, etc.] The operating means may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to vibrate without fail.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  Next, the back button effect in which the start timing is changed by an operation will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38A is a diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those described above. In addition, description of items that have been described so far may be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38A has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance buttons described so far are referred to as a button A or a first chance button 136, and a chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as a button B or a second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position separated by LA from the ball launching handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), while the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball launch handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another point of view, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the horizontal center of the pachinko machine 100 than the button A (second chance button 136). Yes.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Similarly to the first chance button 136, the button B (second chance button 137) is a kind of movable means, can be vibrated, and can be advanced (protruded). On the contrary, only the button B (second chance button 137) is not a movable means and may not vibrate and may not advance (protrude). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not include a chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons such as a third chance button, or an operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, the button B (second chance button 137) illustrated in FIG. 38A can be applied instead of the transmission unit 191 described as an example of the operation unit B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied in place of the transmission portion 191. However, since the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, it is necessary to provide a vibration function. There is.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed.

  In FIG. 38 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212. The decorative symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. In FIG. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, notification that the operation is in an effective state (for example, red lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138) or operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, initial position display 136X). ) Is not performed, and the player cannot know that the operation is in an effective state. However, a person who knows from the information such as a bachinko magazine that the operation may be in an effective state when the reach production is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. This corresponds to a so-called back button.

  Note that not only the button A (first chance button 136) but also the button B (second chance button 137) or the image C of the cut-in notice by the character is displayed in response to the operation of the transparent portion 191. You may be made to do.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect in stages.

  In each figure in FIG. 39, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are arranged vertically on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), four black circle hold icons, which are the hold display in FIG. 1, are displayed, and no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. .

  In FIG. 39 (b), the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. Further, the hold icons are reduced by one and displayed three (hold icons h1 to h3), and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 39 (c), reach production is started. Here, the button effect is started in response to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39 (d) starts to light red. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (d), a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has begun to light red, and a button B (second chance button 137). ) As a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of), a character display of “PUSH”, and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation effective period of the button B (second chance button 137) Are displayed as a set. Hereinafter, the three images 137a, 137b, and 137c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification button B display 137X.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the operation promotion notification button B display 137X is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X for promoting operation is reduced by about 1/5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 39 (f)). ). Note that when the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, the state returns to the off state. The effect in which the image C of the cut-in notice is displayed according to the operation of the button B is the button effect and corresponds to an example of the fifth effect. The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character is an effect display displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbols. Further, the button B display 137X for the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of a third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e)) is the first. It corresponds to an example of three periods.

  The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character (fifth effect) may be an effect that does not start unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, when the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, when the effective operation period of the button B has elapsed, it may be an effect that starts when the button B has elapsed, The effect to be started may be used. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Further, after the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. In other words, the second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137). Here, after the operation of the button B is performed for a while (time for one frame). Is started) and from FIG. 39 (g). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g), an image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character is still displayed, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button A (first chance button 136). The initial position display 136X is not displayed. Further, the button A is in a state where the light remains off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. In response to the operation of the button A here, a character image G of “Intense heat” is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is certain that a big hit will be made in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and will show the judgment result of the final judgment effect. In addition, since it is an effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fourth effect that starts in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is different from the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. Note that the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of being lost in the currently displayed symbol variation display is a character image of “sorry”.

  The second period started from FIG. 39 (g) is the operation effective period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the notification that the operation is effective is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display (fourth effect) of the image G of the characters “Intense heat” is an effect that does not start unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the cut-in notice image C (fifth effect) by the Tono-sama character may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button is displayed. If is not operated, the fourth effect is not started. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing at which the button A is operated and the timing at which the operation effective period ends.

  In this example, the execution period of the button effect in FIGS. 39D to 39G partially overlaps the execution period of the back button effect in FIGS. They may all overlap. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap at least in a part of the period. On the contrary, the effect period after the button operation for the back button effect and the operation effective period for the button effect may overlap at least in a part of the period.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 40, the timing of the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses coincides with the timing of the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the operation promotion notification button B display 137X is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40 (f)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 39, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period that starts after the passage of time is also shifted backward by one frame. In the example shown in FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. 40G, the button A is operated following the operation of the button B. At the timing shown in FIG. The operation of the button A here is accepted but is not treated as valid. Even if the player operates the button A at the timing of FIG. 40 (g), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all. Therefore, the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 40 (h). . In response to this second operation, the image G of the character “Intense heat” is cut-in displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 39 (FIG. 39 (g) corresponding to an example of the first time) is the start timing of the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 39 (b)). ) After four frames have elapsed (corresponding to an example of the first time), whereas the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (FIG. 40 corresponding to an example of the second time). (H)) is after the passage of five frames of time (corresponding to an example of the second time) from the start timing of the decorative display of the decorative symbols (FIG. 40B), and the start timing of the second period is Variable (undefined).

  Note that although both the example of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 are examples of effects related to the operation of two types of chance buttons, these effects are different from the operation means ( For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transmission unit 191 or the third chance button.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between the button A (first chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137).

  FIG. 41 shows two examples. In the example shown in the upper part, the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red and the button B (second chance button 136) is lit red. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a function to vibrate (first function), and the button B has a function to rotate (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts to vibrate. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

  In FIG. 41B, only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button B exhibits the second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of button B). Further, in this example, even when the button B137 is operated in the state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 41, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts vibration, and also exhibits a second function and starts rotating. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

  In FIG. 41 (B), only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. Even if the button B is operated, the button B remains lit and neither vibration nor rotation starts. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one of the functions (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed only by one operation (here, the operation of the button B). In this example, even if the button B137 is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with second operation means [for example, button A (chance button 136), etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect [e.g., a cut-in notice of “hot heat” shown in FIG. 39 (h) to FIG. 39 (i) and FIG. 40 (i), respectively]]. And
The fourth effect is configured to start according to the operation of the second operation means,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,
The second notification is a notification [for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification] that prompts the operation of the second operation means,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be performed in a decorative symbol change display [for example, 3 ↓ 3 displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, respectively]. ,
The fourth effect is an effect that starts when the second operation means is operated in the second period [for example, FIG. 39 (g), FIG. 40 (h), etc.]
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,
The second period is a period that may start at the first time in the variable display [for example, the time of FIG. 39 (g), etc.]
The second period is a period that may start at a second time in the variable display [for example, the time of FIG. 40 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may be always executed or may not be executed, other than a plurality of types of effects may be executed, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. .

  In addition, the fourth effect may be an effect that is always executed in the decorative display variation display.

Also,
[Equipped with third operation means [for example, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
The second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the third operation means [for example, after the button B operation, the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character display starts, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect [for example, cut-in notice by Tono-sama character display starting from FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.]
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,
The third notification is a notification [for example, an operation promotion notification button B display 137X] that prompts the operation of the third operation means,
The fifth effect is configured to start in response to an operation of the third operating means,
The fifth effect is the third operation means in the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e), the period of FIG. 40 (d) to FIG. 40 (f), etc.]. Is operated [for example, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f), etc.],
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the third period is a period in which the third notification is performed.

Also,
The aspect of the fifth effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the fourth effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The fifth effect is an effect that may be performed in a variation display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The fifth effect is an effect that does not start unless the third operation means is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The fifth effect is an effect that starts even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started when the third period elapses, or may be an effect started after the third period elapses.

Also,
The fourth effect is an effect that does not start unless the second operation means is operated in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  By doing so, the fifth effect is clearly different from the case where the third operation unit is not operated in the third period even when the third operation unit is not operated. It becomes possible to give a width to the entangled production.

Also,
“The first time is a time after elapse of a first time [for example, four frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 39 (b)],
The second time is a time after elapse of a second time [for example, five frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 40 (b)],
The second time is a time different from the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.

  FIG. 42 shows three examples of promotion effects.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, during the display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 42A, the promotion effect is started simultaneously with the start of the reach effect or after the reach effect is started. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), a display item AT (first display) of noteworthy items appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42 (a), it is informed that attention is paid to the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the state (“2 ↓ 2”) of the variation display of the decorative pattern in the reach state currently being performed is directly displayed to notify that attention is paid. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), the display item AT to be noted disappears, “decoration 7” is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. A state of being displayed is displayed. The symbol combination (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) in which the same even three decorative symbols are arranged is a normal jackpot symbol combination with no probability change, whereas the same odd ornamental three symbols are arranged. Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with probability variation, it is likely that the promotion with probability variation will be successful here. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, the attention object in the display AT of the matter to be noticed and the thing that changed after that match in the decorative design. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (a)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) match. In an effect in which a design such as a decorative design changes, a prior notice display related to the design may be configured so that the actual change display always matches.

  In addition, in the display AT of noteworthy items, the state of the variation display of the decoration pattern in the current reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed, but the variation display of the decoration symbol after the change is displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of the noticeable matter in the promotion effect, it is notified that the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons is focused. The four icons displayed in the notice item display AT are icons corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a kind of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. 42B, it is notified that the rightmost fourth hold icon h4 is noticed among the four hold icons displayed. It should be noted that, in the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42B, four hold icons are displayed, but no change icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, only the three black circle (default display mode) hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed, but in the variable icon display area 208e, a black circle (default The display mode) variation icon c is displayed. Further, in the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42B, the notice mode of the fourth hold icon h4 to be noticed is changed to the hatched display form (the first display form and the display form of the pre-reading notice). It has changed. Next, in FIG. 42C, while still in the reach state, the display item AT to be noted disappears, and only the three black circle hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed. However, in the variation icon display area 208e, a variation icon c in a hatching display mode (normal notice display mode) is displayed. The display mode of hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display item AT of note in FIG. 42B, but in this example, the display item of attention is displayed in the display AT. The object (fourth hold icon h4) is different from the object (change icon c) changed thereafter. That is, in FIG. 42 (b), while the advance notice that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) is changed, the change icon c actually changes in FIG. 42 (c). Are different. In addition, the change icon itself is not displayed on the display item AT of note in FIG. 42B, while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Inadvertently, there is an inconsistency that is not displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 42B) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C) do not match. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual fluctuation shown in FIG. The icon c corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 42C corresponds to an example of the second display. In FIG. 42D, the decorative symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is displayed in a definite manner. In the variation icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the variation icon c returns from the hatched display mode to the black circle display. Further, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT (FIG. 42B) of the noticeable matters of the promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, and one of the four displayed icons. It is reported that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4). Further, the icon to be noted (fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatching display mode (first display mode). This hatching display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively low jackpot reliability. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons h1 to h4 having default display modes and a variation icon c having the same default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number of hold icons is the same between the display AT of the noticeable matter of the promotion effect and the actual hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42C, while still in the reach state, the display item AT to be noted disappears, and only three hold icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. Although there is no, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is changed to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. This Tono-sama's face display mode (second display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, notable items (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of noteworthy items and those changed thereafter (first hold icon h1) are not only different, but also the change contents are hatched display modes. The first display mode is different from the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. Note that the fluctuation icon c of the default display mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 42 (C ′) is a modified example of FIG. 42 (C) and shows a state where the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing a state when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, following FIG. The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42C 'and (D') is the same as the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. The display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in (C ') and (D') 42 is not different from the display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in FIG. FIG. 42 (D ′) following FIG. 42 (D ′) shows that the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 has been digested and a new variation display of the decorative symbol has started. FIG. When a new variation display of the decorative symbol is started, a moving animation of the hold icon shift display is executed, and the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 so far moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Displayed as a variation icon c. Further, the hold icon that has been the second hold icon h2 so far is displayed as the first hold icon h1, but at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or at the same time as the end of the movement animation. Or after the movement animation ends, the display mode changes to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) started after the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) in which the notice AT is displayed AT is performed. Promotion display is executed in the second symbol variation display). The first hold icon h1 that has changed to the display mode of the face of Tonosama may be displayed in the display mode during the execution of the second symbol variation display (for example, during the execution of the reach effect), and the display mode also changes. Or it may disappear when the super reach production is performed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 42B) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C or FIG. 42E ') do not match.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 42C or FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in ') corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42C or FIG. 42E ′ is an example of the second display. It corresponds to.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples relating to the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed on the hold icon. This mini-icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and a notice of the effect executed in the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is digested or the big hit in the symbol variation display. Represents a pre-read notice. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and (B), a mini icon of A display is placed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 among the three displayed hold icons. Two mA are stacked. For example, the A-displayed mini-icon mA is for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production is started once. In the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 43B, one C-display mini-icon displayed on the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons. It is reported that attention is paid to mC. The C-displayed mini-icon mA is a pre-reading notice that suggests, for example, that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 43 (C), the display AT of the noticeable item disappears while the reach state is still present, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the mini icon mA and C display of the A display on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini-icon changes from the A-display mini-icon mA to the C-display mini-icon mC, but the lower mini-icon does not change, and the A-display mini-icon does not change. The icon mA remains. As a result, while the number of pseudo-continuations decreases from two to one, it is foretold that it will be a symbol variation display that is determined to be a big hit, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the attention object in the display AT of the attention item is a mini icon that displays only one item, but in fact, two mini icons that are displayed after that are displayed, Changes in the first stage mini-icon (C-displayed mini-icon mC) and the first-stage mini-icon (A-displayed mini-icon mA) that were the target of attention in the display AT of the noticeable item The contents are also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the C display mini-icon mC in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual first-stage A-display mini shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the display AT of the noticeable item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 43C corresponds to an example of the second display.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 43 executes a promotion effect selected from three types of promotion effects in the reach state. The three types of promotion effects here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D, and FIG. (C) or FIG. 42 (A) to (C ′) to the promotion effect shown in FIG. In addition, all of a plurality of types of effects (in this case, three types of promotion effects) for which one effect is selected are displayed in advance as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (c). )) And the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be of the same type, or a prior notice display (as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (d)). 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be an inconsistent type effect, or both a matched type effect and an inconsistent type effect are included. Also good.

  In FIG. 43 (b), a noticeable item display AT1 marked "promotion chance A" as promotion effect A, and a noticeable item display AT2 marked "promotion chance B" as promotion effect B; As a promotion effect C, a noticeable item display AT3 labeled “promotion chance C” is displayed, and any one type of promotion effect is selected and executed by internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed as if the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137) is operated.

  In the above description, the promotion effect has been described as an example. However, the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42B, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42B, and FIG. ), Etc.]
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the change icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′). , Mini-icon mA shown in FIG.
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display may be displayed after the display of the first display starts,
The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon is changed [for example, attention should be given to each of FIGS. 42 (b), 42 (B), and 43 (B). Item display AT, etc.]
The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon is changed [for example, in each of FIG. 42 (c), FIG. 42 (C), FIG. 42 (E ′), and FIG. 43 (C). The actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, may be means for displaying the icons, or may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.

  Moreover, after the display of the first display starts, the second display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“The second icon [for example, the fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is a different type of icon from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"With symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The first icon is a hold icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG.
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.
The second icon is a fluctuation icon [for example, a fluctuation icon c shown in FIG.
The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display when the hold represented by the suspension icon is digested and the symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed.

Also,
“It is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG.
The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′)],
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are icons having different times when the hold is made.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a pre-reading preview mini icon mC that suggests that it will be a big hit]
The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [e.g., a mini icon mA for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started once],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second display is a display that is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second display is a display displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, a timer notice for starting notification with a button effect will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a general timer notice.

  In each figure in FIG. 44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed beside the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 and the like has a circular operation surface, but the button B here has a square operation surface. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137 ′), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be named a chance button.

  In FIG. 44 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. 44A. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 44B, the special symbol variation display of the special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B are lit, and only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives a special symbol change start command or a special symbol hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol variation start command includes information representing the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started. Moreover, even if the information indicating the variation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. In the special figure hold increase command, when the main control unit 300 prefetches up to the variation time, information indicating the prefetched variation time is included. The first sub-control unit 400 can know the variation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. When the variation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to perform timer notice.

  When the lottery for whether or not to execute the timer notice is won (when the lottery result is a result to be executed), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is a kind of notice effect that suggests that a new effect is started. The new effect here may be a jackpot notice effect or a notice effect as to whether a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect or the like) is started. Note that the jackpot notice effect includes a normal notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the following symbol variation display. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example is a numerical display. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the display representing the remaining time listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. In FIG. 44D, a timer notice display T is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and it is informed that the remaining time is 30:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (f), a Tono-sama character is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. Note that the variation icon c in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the variation icon display area 208e in FIG. Further, a timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) here is the end of the timer notice. Production. However, the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) can also be viewed as the start effect of a new effect that has been predicted to start with a timer notice. In particular, the timing when the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment when it becomes 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. Alternatively, the timer notice is ended when the time reaches 0:00 seconds, but the timer notice display T may be in a mode that continues to be displayed for a certain period even when a new effect is started.

  In FIG. 44 (f) following FIG. 44 (f), although the timer notice display T has disappeared, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N 1) is still displayed on the change icon display area 208 e. A normal notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this normal notice effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, has changed to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit with the symbol change display currently continuing in the reach state Is foretold.

  In FIG. 44 (h), the first effect display (tono character display) also disappears, and the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face continues to be displayed in the change icon display area 208e. continuing. After this, it evolved into a super reach production, and the change icon c disappeared with the hold icon (disappeared), and it was a big hit or lost, and further, it was lost without developing into a super reach production. To do. Even in the case of development to a super reach production, the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may continue to be seen without disappearing.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which a timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the timer advance notice execution lottery is won, internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol or may be before the start of the symbol variation display. In the example shown in FIG. An internal count is started. The counter timer is set with a count value before starting and is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 45, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 45, a value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal count is started from FIG.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state (operation valid state) where the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received simultaneously with the start of the internal count or immediately after the start. However, even when the operation shifts to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the button A operation promotion notification (for example, initial position display 136X) is also performed. However, the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed in accordance with the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated a while after the reach effect is started (see FIG. 45C). The display of the timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, but is irrelevant in this example. Also, the button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Note that the timer notice display T is not displayed even when the button B (the operation button 137 ') is operated, but it may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e), a timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time is 20:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is immediately displayed, so that the player starts counting down the remaining time as if the button A is operated. Internally, the countdown of the remaining time starts before the button is operated.

  In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button, but an operation promotion notification that promotes the operation of the button A may be performed. Ends when is operated. Therefore, when a certain period is provided between the time when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the time when the timer notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is not made during that period. Will not be done.

  In addition, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the button A operation, the length of the remaining time at which the display starts is different depending on the timing of the button A operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 45A, if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the timer notice display T is displayed from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, even if the button A operation is performed after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 is less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A operation is not performed. May be. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  Since FIG. 45 (f) and subsequent figures are the same as FIG. 44 (e) and subsequent figures, description thereof is omitted. However, since button A (first chance button 136) is a back button, the beginner does not press button A. In some cases, the remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time elapses, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face without performing the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1). Similarly to the case where there is an operation, after the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the back button operation timing and the hold increase timing.

  In FIG. 46 (b), when the symbol variation display is started, the number of holdings in FIG. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, it is determined that the timer notice is to be executed, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is enabled.

  In FIG. 46C, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In a state where the timer notice display T is displayed (remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in 46 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. These three hold icons h1 to h3 are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 46F), and as shown in FIG. 46G, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Also, in this example, on the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1), a new effect to be started, that is, a new effect in which the start is announced by the timer notice is suggested, and a pre-read notice is given. It has been reported that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the prefetch notice is also determined in a control manner at the stage of determining whether or not the button notice can be executed. Therefore, if the second hold of special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display currently being performed, the look-ahead notice target is The winning portion after the timer is scheduled to be held for the second time (in this case, the third hold) cannot be subject to the look-ahead notification, but for the player, before the start of the new production It appears that all three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed on the screen are likely to be subject to a pre-reading notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 among the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from a black circle display mode (default display mode) to a ton-like face display mode. The pre-reading notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) continues to be displayed until the currently displayed symbol variation display is completed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (c ′), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and the number of holds in FIG. When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 46 (d) when the number of buttons is increased by one (see FIG. 46 (e ′)), this is a button operation after the increase in hold. Therefore, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which was increased before the button operation, will also be subject to the pre-reading notice, but the hold increase after the timer notice is decided to run even before the button operation. However, in terms of control, the third hold cannot be a prefetch notice target, and in this example as well, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the prefetch notice display mode.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display that is currently being performed, if the first hold is increased together with the second hold of the special figure 1, the first hold icon h1 There is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and in this case, it is not known in advance whether the prefetch notice target is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  Further, if the control for determining the pre-reading notice target is adopted according to the operation of the button A, the number of the pre-reading notice objects changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the pre-reading notice, but in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (e ′), from the first hold to the third hold. Will be subject to pre-reading, and the target that can be expected will differ depending on the timing of button operation.

  Furthermore, the pre-reading notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing two examples of button effects in stages.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the reach state from FIG. 47 (a) to FIG. 47 (d) is shown, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (b) is a button that imitates the chance button 136 in the off state at the initial position. 3 of an image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of “press” are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47C, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state where the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, an image C1 of a cut-in notice displayed as a chance is displayed.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of timer notice is waited. 47A to 47C are the same as FIGS. 47A to 47C, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer notice is not executed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, each variable time is calculated from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol included in each command. If there is a hold whose fluctuation time is longer than the first time among these three holds, stock the timer notice until the hold is consumed and the symbol change display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 47C, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, the timer notice is not started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. As a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol change display to be started, as shown in FIG. 4D, the display T ′ “waiting” is set to the position where the timer notice display T is displayed. When the timer notice starts, the remaining time is displayed instead of “waiting”.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side, and two examples are shown on the right side.

  First, in FIG. 48A as the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter referred to as a time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T at the button A. (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also displayed as a countdown with the passage of time. In FIG. 48A, 10:00 seconds are displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48 (a) is 30:00 seconds, and they do not match. The button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated at the timing of FIG. 48 (b) when the counter timer 412 becomes 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the time display T1 is displayed. The timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

  48A, which is the second example, similarly to FIG. 48A, which is the first example, the time display T1 is positioned at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 has reached 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 48B is the same as the counter timer 412 at 25:00 seconds. On the timer notice display T, the difference between the time displayed on the time display T1 and the time displayed on the timer notice display T newly displayed is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 48B, the time displayed on the time display T1 should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, a difference display T2 of “+20” is made.

  48A, which is the third example, similarly to FIG. 48A, which is the first example, the time display T1 is positioned at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), and again here is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the characters “LOCK” are displayed so as to overlap the upper portion of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown at the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display “LOCK” is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds of the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display “LOCK” disappears and the time display T1 is replaced with the timer preview display T. Thereafter, the countdown as the timer preview display T is continued. The In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, eventually reaching 0:00 seconds, The process ends without replacing the display T.

  In the fourth example shown in the upper right, FIG. 48 (α), an arrow indicating the passage of time is displayed, indicating a state in which the symbol variation is being displayed. In general, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. In addition, when the timer notice notifies the start of the final cut-in notice in the current symbol variation display, the longer the timer notice execution time (remaining time), the longer the various notices are executed. Is possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-continuation. In addition, after the normal reach is started, the development to super reach (SP) and the effect of changing the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a chance-up production during the reach that raises the expectation of the big hit. For these reasons, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed internally, but the display of the remaining time in the timer notice display T is initially displayed slightly, and the countdown is temporarily displayed. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved by stopping or adding the remaining period later. In addition, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48 (a) is displayed, the number of times that the expectation is changed in the production when the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds increases. There are cases where the interest of games is improved. In the final cut-in notice, a character that is determined to be a big hit is made to appear. Note that even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds when the counter timer 412 becomes 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to make a false timer notice.

  In the fifth example shown in the lower right of FIG. 48A, the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here. In this case, a timer notice display T displaying “30:00 seconds” is displayed. In FIG. 48 (i), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in the second mode (for example, a double frame). Note that the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

  FIG. 49 shows two examples, and the example shown above is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the island simultaneous performance. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), “25 seconds until the simultaneous island effect” is displayed large. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (b), “20 seconds until the simultaneous production of islands” is displayed in the same size as before. In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer notice becomes 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous effect is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer notice is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous effect. The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412 without receiving any.

  The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, the mission display M is displayed on the upper right side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the remaining time is displayed as 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49A, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 49A, it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display form surrounded by a single frame, so there is a risk of misunderstanding at first glance. It also has the effect of being viewed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer notice display is not a numerical display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red. And urge you to operate. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (b) has a tutorial-like description about the display of a chance up meter, which is a kind of timer notice display. In FIG. 50 (c), the button A is operated in response to the red lighting, and the chance display meter 208 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation. The chance up meter CM has a start S at the left end and a goal G at the right end, and the arrow mark moves from left to right as time elapses. This arrow mark represents the current time point, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Furthermore, this chance up meter CM not only shows the remaining time, but also various changes such as pseudo-ream and hold icon changes, reach title color change effects, and chance up effects during reach as shown in FIG. The execution timing of the production is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the production is marked, and it may be hidden until what kind of production is executed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red, prompting the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N is marked with a mark JI. When the remaining period meter reaches the mark JI and operates the button A, a special mode effect is produced. Be started. In FIG. 50A, the operation of the button A is too slow, and the special mode effect is not started, and as shown in FIG. Has been. In FIG. 50 (a), the operation timing of the button A matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (a), an image C2 of the cut-in notice displayed in gray letters with the chance is displayed. ing. The cut-in notice image C2 shown in FIG. 50 (a) differs from the cut-in notice image C1 shown in FIG. 50 (B) in that the typeface and background of the character are the same and only the character color is different. Different types of fonts and backgrounds may be used, or images such as characters may be added. In FIG. 50A, the button B (operation button 137 ') for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to a back button. The operation timing of the button B is also in time with the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (i), a special cut-in notice image C3 in which a princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operating means to be operated. In addition, the display type of an effect is not restricted, and the kind and start timing of an effect may differ. Further, even when the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether or not the button is the back button.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209 'with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. A panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209 '. In the shutter timer notice display means 209 ′ shown in FIG. 51 (a), the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209 ′.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 'becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed not on the timer notice display means 209 ′ but on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the decorative symbol display device. In the variation icon display area 208e of 208, the variation icon c changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and the normal notice effect is started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'continues to display 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A) displays the same display as “standby” shown in FIG. 47 (D). “During standby” shown in FIG. 47 (D) is a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol variation display started after this, but “waiting” shown in FIG. This corresponds to a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. In FIG. 51 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 ′ opens, and the remaining time set to the counter timer 412 not shown here is the same as the remaining time. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The cancellation of “waiting” may be canceled automatically when the cancellation time comes, or may be canceled by operating the button A or the button B again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51A, the timer is in the reach state, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (here 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. A notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display means 209 ', the shutter is opened and the characters "chance" are displayed. As described above, the timer notice display unit 209 'can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208. Instead, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (here, 20:00 seconds) is replaced with the timer notice display means 209 ′. Is displayed. In this way, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped by the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209 '. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 ′ displays 24:95 seconds, both of which are not shown in the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although the remaining time is supposed to be displayed, there is a slight difference. This is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ′, so that some time lag occurs in display control or the like, and this is the difference due to this time lag. Note that a difference may be intentionally generated as part of the production between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 '.

  Here, the timer notice display means 209 'is used here, but instead of the timer notice display means 209', a second display means 209 capable of operation (up and down) shown in FIG. 33 may be used. The second display means 209 may always operate (elevate), may not operate (elevate), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or performs only the elevating operation. It may be a thing.

In the above description,
“Second operation means [for example, chance button 136 etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209 ′, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is configured to display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [eg, timer notice display T, etc.]
The third display is a display corresponding to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e), 25:00 shown in FIG. ) And the cut-in notice image C1 displayed in black letters and the chance and the special-form cut-in notice image C displayed in gray letters shown in FIG. Display
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is equal to or less than the first remaining time or the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. No.] display mode [e.g., 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e) and non-display shown in FIG. The display may be started with the image C1 and the special mode cut-in preview image C displayed in gray characters and the chance shown in FIG.

  Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, may not display, may display other than a plurality of types of display, or may display a plurality of types of display. May be displayed.

Also,
'One of the plural types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, a normal display 136N of an operation promotion notification, etc.]
When the second operation means is operated, the display of the third display is started [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period], and when the display is not started [for example, the operation valid period In the case of an operation before or after the operation valid period elapses, etc.]
In the second case, the fourth display is a display that is not displayed during the period from when the second operation means is operated until the display of the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.

Also,
‘The first notice display is a timer notice display,
The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like] indicating a first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like]
After the first remaining time becomes zero, a notice effect [e.g., a normal notice effect in which the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess's face, or FIG. 46 (g) Pre-read notice effect etc. in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.
The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the notice effect is started.

Also,
“The notice effect is a notice related to the symbol variation display performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. Is a regular notice that changes to the aspect, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  More specifically, as the notice effect, a so-called pseudo-ream effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect [for example, a super reach effect, etc.], or an improvement in the expectation of a big hit in the reach effect is suggested. Such as a change in the character color of a title or dialogue, a cut-in effect [for example, a cut-in effect just before the symbol stops], or the like.

Also,
'One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing the number of holds depending on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
The advance notice effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode [for example, the pre-read that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Notice production etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display means may always display a display indicating the number of holds, may not display it, may display other than the number of holds, or displays only the number of holds. You may do.

Also,
“When the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the held icons representing the number of held icons before increasing is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. [For example, the change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the hold icons is displayed. The display mode of a plurality of hold icons may be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
“When the number of holdings increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the holding icons representing the number of holdings after the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice May change to,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or a plurality of hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed. May be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, time display T1 shown in FIG. 48, etc.]
The sixth display includes a display including a display representing a second remaining time different from a display representing the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 48B] [for example, In the timing of FIG. 48 (b), it is 5:00 seconds]
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third display may be a display that is always displayed together with the sixth display.

Also,
[Counting means [for example, counter timer 412 etc.]
The display representing the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the symbol display means [for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing the symbol variation display, the first control means [eg, the main control unit 300, etc.], and the second Control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400], the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is control means that can control the symbol display means [for example, control means that executes a special symbol state update process], and the second control means is control of the display means [for example, , Production control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be a means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means constituted by a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402, the VDP 434, the VRAM 436, etc.].

  The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed. The second control unit may be a unit that always executes control according to a command from the first control unit, or may be a unit that may execute the control. Other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.

Also,
“The third display indicates that the operation timing of the second operation means matches the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. A display that starts to be displayed in a display mode [for example, a special mode displayed in gray letters and chances shown in FIG.
The third display is displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the chance and black characters shown in FIG. 50 (B) when the operation timing of the second operation means does not coincide with the first timing. The display starts with the cut-in preview image C1 etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Third operation means [for example, button B (operation button 137 ′) shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the third operation means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. Display of the image C3 of the cut-in notice of].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“It is provided with a third display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means [for example, timer notice display means 209 ′ etc.] is a separate means from the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third display means may or may not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may execute other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Only the variation display of the decorative design may be executed.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Finally, an example in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively start changing will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step-by-step how the decorative symbols are varied and displayed with the hold icon animation being executed.

  In FIG. 52 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (a) are lit three times, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a state immediately after the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variable display) is continuously started in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. While only two first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (b) are lit, there are three hold icons (hold icon) in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. h1 to h3) are displayed, and the fluctuation icon is not yet displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is a result of a time lag that occurs because it is immediately after the start of fluctuation. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the movement animation of the hold icon is started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then moves diagonally to the lower right, and the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until now moves toward the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2 so far, moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 is displayed, and the hold icon which has been the third hold icon h3 so far is the second hold icon h2. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (d), the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

  Here, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. Are lit. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts an increase animation of the hold icon, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (e) starts to see the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi from the bottom of the display screen.

  In FIG. 52 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon continues and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 52 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation is finished, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (h), the stop symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1, which is a round display, is changed to a stopped display (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. In 208e, the variation icon c still remains. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 52 (i), the final display of the stop symbol of the losing is performed, and the decoration design display device 208 also displays “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative pattern of the lost is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c is also disappeared.

  52 (j) to 52 (l), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is performed, and in FIG. 52 (m), the stop display is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Here, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed.

  52 (a) to 52 (n) described above are castle town stages, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the streets of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. At the same time as the symbol variation display of the next special symbol 1 is started in the diagram (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image as a mesh. It changes temporarily to a background image in which a princess character is displayed at the center of the tone background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to a stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon that has been displayed, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the variation icon c itself disappear, and the variation display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition to being displayed, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are only displayed on the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (p), the background image is switched to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, the castle town stage has been switched to the darkness stage. When the stage change is completed, the hold icon, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the display of the variation icon c itself are restored, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right This is performed in the symbol display area 208c. In the castle town stage, the hold icon or the change icon whose default display mode is a round shape has a default display mode in a square shape in the dark stage. In FIG. 52 (p), the black square first hold icon h1 is displayed. Similarly, a black square variation icon c is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may change depending on the stage. In addition, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol may be changed according to the stage.

  The stages described above have multiple stages in addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage, and stage changes according to the control state (eg, probabilistic state / non-probable state, electric support state / non-electric support state) Or a stage change is performed according to the number of symbol fluctuation displays.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon while the symbol is stopped.

  During the symbol variation of Special Figure 1, after the movement animation is completed, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is increased by one to three. In other words, the third hold is increased here. 53. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is increased by one and is lit three. Further, although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation for increasing the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53B has three hold icons h1. ~ H3 is displayed. The increased third hold is subject to a pre-reading notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (black circle display mode) during symbol variation in FIG. 53 (b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted, but unless otherwise specified, the increase animation is executed.

  In FIG. 53 (c), stop display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 15 (f), the decorative pattern of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” is lost. The combination of is displayed. During this fixed display, the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) increased during the symbol variation display is executed. In this effect, the display mode of the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h2) displayed when the third hold is increased is changed together with the increased third hold icon h3. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 53 (d) are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode), but in FIG. 53 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the effect display e4 overlaps these three hold icons h1 to h3, so that the three hold icons h1 to h3 cannot be visually recognized for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), all three hold icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). The change in the display mode here is simultaneous and the same change in the display mode. However, the display mode may change one by one or may change to a different display mode (hereinafter referred to as “display mode”). The same applies to the simultaneous changes described.)

  In FIG. 53 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 53 (h), the hold icon of the display style of Tonosama's face has started moving animation. Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the display mode of the face of the Tono-sama is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the form of the face of Tonosama are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the hold icon movement animation corresponds to an example of the first period. An effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed within one period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the period during the fixed display (FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 53 (f)). Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when there is a hold increase while the symbol is stopped.

  In FIG. 54 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (d) to FIG. 15 (f), the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” are lost. The combination of is displayed. Since the fixed display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, the fixed display is also referred to as the stop display. During the stop display, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, the third hold is also increased here. 53. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 53 (f) are increased by one and three are lit. The third hold increased here is also subject to the pre-reading notice. In the case of the increase of the hold during the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation is cancelled. However, only a part of the increase animation may be executed, or the whole may be executed.

  In FIG. 54 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. It becomes invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 increases as shown in FIG. 54 (g). The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the display mode of the Tono-sama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, both of which have been displayed in black circles (default display mode) so far, are the display modes of the Tono-sama face (display mode of the pre-reading notice) Are changing at the same time. That is, all of the three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the face display mode (display mode of the pre-reading notice). In FIG. 54 (g), symbol variation display is started, and the subsequent processing is the same as the example in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, and the simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased hold icon is displayed. In other words, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the hold increase or with the hold increase.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases by two during the symbol variation.

  FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c) show that the symbols are changing. Among these, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. 55 (b) after the moving animation ends. The number of holdings in FIG. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and this third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the prefetch notice execution lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is increased by one and is turned on three, and the third hold icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, and three hold icons are displayed. h1 to h3 are displayed. Further, at the timing of FIG. 55 (c) thereafter, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is further increased to 4 (full tank). That is, the fourth hold is increased here, but as a result of the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, the fourth holding is not subject to the pre-reading notice. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 55 (c) are increased by one and turned on, and the fourth hold icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, resulting in four hold icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 55 (d) to (g), the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, the simultaneous change effect is executed as the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice increased during the symbol variation display, and the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 55 (f). After the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize, the effect display e4 disappears and the hold icon display resumes as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold) that was already displayed when the third hold increased, together with the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode of the Tonosama's face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold is increased is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the black circle display mode (default display mode) remains unchanged. Thus, even if it is a simultaneous change effect, not all displayed hold icons change.

  Even in this example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the hold icon movement animation is equivalent to an example of the first period. Simultaneous change production is performed within the period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period immediately before FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the stop display period (FIG. 55 (d) to FIG. 55 (g)).

  Also, the first half of the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, the period before the start of reach production) is the first period, and the second half of the period until the end of the variable display (for example, the first period). The period of the latter half portion following (2) may be the second period. Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  Further, the first period may be a period from the start of display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, the period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e. It may be a period until one of a plurality of decorative symbols temporarily stops (so-called first stop or first temporary stop in pseudo-continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of variable display May be a period until the reach state is reached. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases while the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 56 (c) to FIG. 56 (g) show that the symbol is stopped, and among these, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. Increases by 1 to 3. In other words, the third hold is increased here, and this third hold becomes the target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (f) is increased by one and is lit three, but the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon The entire display area 208f is difficult to visually recognize. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase of the third hold is cancelled.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 56 (g), there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is further increased to 4 (full tank). In other words, the fourth hold is increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect that is the prefetch notice effect, but the fourth hold is not a target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (g) is increased by one and is lit four, but the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding is held. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the fourth hold is also canceled.

  In FIG. 56 (h), the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (h), the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display form), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon The icon h2 also changes to the display mode of the Tonosama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold has increased is a black circle display mode. (Default display mode). In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as a pre-reading notice effect. However, if there is an increase in hold during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, the hold The increase is excluded, and the hold icon before the simultaneous change effect is executed is changed all at once. While the symbols are stopped, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately when the special figure hold increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the start of the simultaneous change effect, the third hold If it is the target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, if the fourth hold is a target of the prefetch notice, the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in FIG. 56 (f) and FIG. 56 (g), the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect that is the pre-reading notice effect is reserved. An icon increase animation may be performed. In FIG. 56 (f ′), as in FIG. 56 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect due to the third hold being a pre-reading notice target, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed. It has become difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since it is after the start of the simultaneous change effect, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56 (g1 '), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is behind the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. 56 (g1 ′) following FIG. 56 (g1 ′), an increase hold icon hi having a black circle display mode partially hidden by the effect display e4 is shown.

  As an increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold, an increase hold icon hi in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) may be displayed together with the effect display e4.

  Next, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon in the winning order variation machine will be described.

  The explanation so far has been the explanation in the special figure 2 priority fluctuation. That is, it was an explanation of the increase in the holding of the special figure 1 in the case where the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 is given priority. Note that the same holds true for the increase in suspension in FIG.

  Here, about the case of the winning order variation machine which starts the symbol variation display from the winning timing among the winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the winning at the second special figure starting port 232. explain.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining winning order fluctuations.

  In the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight holding icons including the four holdings in the special figure 1 and the four holdings in the special figure 2 can be displayed. The variation icon display area 208e is provided in the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 57 (a), six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. All of these six hold icons h1 to h6 are in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 57 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. Here, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but the illustration is omitted. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIG. 57 (c) to FIG. 57 (d)). In this example, the simultaneous change effect of the losing and holding icon is not started in the lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice for the seventh holding is executed.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started. In FIG. Is completed, and a variation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing, in stages, examples of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the hold increases in the winning order variation.

  In FIG. 58 (a), seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. All of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 are in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 58 (a) is a state after the movement animation ends.

  In FIG. 58 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change after the movement animation ends, and the eighth holding icon h8 is added to the holding icon display area 208f, and the holding is full. In this way, a full display F as a pending MAX is also made. In this example, the lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice for the eighth hold is won, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is executed thereafter.

  Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the stop display is in progress (FIG. 58 (c) to FIG. 58 (d)). In this example, during the stop display, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started. In FIG. Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and a change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode) regardless of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the variation icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the moving animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears, but the effect display e5 here is a display that overlaps the variable icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f, as shown in FIG. In addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the fluctuation icon c is also difficult to visually recognize. In the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58 (h), the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed does not overlap, but may overlap to this position. Further, an effect display that does not overlap the variation icon display area 208e may be used.

  In FIG. 58 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon can be visually recognized, and the variation icon c can also be visually recognized. The simultaneous change effect here was a look-ahead notice targeting the eighth hold at the time of the increase in the hold (FIG. 58 (b)). In the first place, the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed. Accordingly, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the fluctuation icon c are displayed, and the display mode of all these displayed icons is changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display mode is not changed to one type of common display mode, but is changed to a plurality of types of display mode. In addition, the display mode of all the held icons that have been changed simultaneously may be different.

Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. FIG. 58 (d ′) is in a stop display as in FIG. 58 (d), and in FIG. 58 (e ′), as in FIG. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the previous example, the hold icon moving animation is started immediately after this, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display or immediately after the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Simultaneous change production has been started. In FIG. 58 (f ′), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are displayed, and all these displayed icons are displayed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example when the hold increases during the stop display in the winning order variation and the hold is full.

  59 (a) to 59 (b), a stop display is performed. At the timing between FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 1, the number of holds increases by 1 and the number of holds reaches 8 (full tanks) For the increase in hold during the stop display, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, as shown in FIG. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 increases by 1 and lights up four, and the eighth hold icon h8 of the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased. 58, the full tank display F described with reference to Fig. 58 is not displayed, that is, the full tank display F is displayed only while the symbol is changing. Is short and the full tank display F in a certain amount of time In this way, the next symbol variation display is started without displaying the full display F (see FIG. 59 (c)). After that, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started and the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59D). In FIG. 59E, the effect display e5 disappears and the seventh hold icon h7 is displayed. The first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6 and the variation icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all these redisplayed icons is changed.

  Note that the full tank display F may be displayed during the stop display even for a short time. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Furthermore, if the number of holdings does not increase during symbol variation or the holding full state is not reached, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icon may not be started.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the hold icon being displayed.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60 (b), the second hold icon h2 changes to a hold icon in the display form (second display form) of the characters “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a prefetch notice with the highest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. The rare display mode with the lowest appearance rate may be used. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the second display mode listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. Even if the hold increases while the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, it changes into the hold icon of the display mode (1st display mode) where the 2nd hold icon h2 is shining in FIG. 60 (B). This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a pre-read notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed at the same time. The display mode having the next highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the first display mode listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. When the hold increases in the state where the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 60C), if the increased hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice, simultaneous change An effect is executed (see FIG. 60E).

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a simultaneous change effect in a case where the reserve is full in the winning order variation.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) has changed to the display mode of the number-long character. The third hold icon h3 has a display mode changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, a case where a character with the longest character appears from the beginning at the time of winning a prize, or a case where the display mode of the character with the longest character is changed at the start of the next change. In FIG. 61 (d), the eighth hold icon h8 increases during the symbol change, and the reserve is full. If the reserve full tank is reached during symbol fluctuation, the full tank display F is displayed from the time when the tank is full to the stop display of the current symbol fluctuation display (FIG. 61 (c) to FIG. 61 (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the full tank display F disappears when the confirmation display is obtained. And even if it is a case where the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon is changing by another production, after a holding full tank, after the movement animation (refer FIG.61 (g)) of the holding | maintenance icon in the next fluctuation is complete | finished, The simultaneous change effect is started as shown in 61 (i), and the display mode of all the icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon c is changed as shown in FIG. . In this example, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. 60A to 60E, the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the hold full condition. . Accordingly, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is the display mode of the longest character, but even in the display mode of the “heat” character shown in FIG. 60 (b), When the reserve is full, simultaneous change effects are executed. However, even if the reserve is full, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed if the hold icon in the display form (second display form) of the characters “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 61 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the face of Tonosama by the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full tank display F is displayed when the reserved full tank is reached during the symbol fluctuation. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again in response to the reserved full tank (see FIG. 61C). In other words, if the reserved icon whose display mode has been changed by the simultaneous change effect becomes full before all the held icons are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

  The example of the winning order variation machine described in FIG. 58, FIG. 59, and FIG. It is an example.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative display variation display [for example, immediately before FIG. 52 (b) to FIG. 52 (h)],
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the first period of the variation display [for example, the period from the start of symbol variation until the hold icon moving animation ends]. Yes,
When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period in the variable display, the second period in the variable display [e.g., until just before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)]. In the period, the period from FIG. 55 (a) to the period immediately before FIG. 55 (d)], the first effect display is configured not to start displaying,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively change” may be an effect display in which the display modes of all of the plurality of held icons change all at once, or an effect display that changes one by one. It may be an effect display that changes by a plurality. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples of the effect display listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the number of suspensions increases during the first period, the first effect display may be started during the first period. In addition, when the hold increases during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started during the first period in the variable display started following the stop display of the decorative symbol. There is a case.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying a plurality of hold icons without fail, means for displaying the hold icons, or displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

Also,
“The first period is a period [for example, the period of the first half including FIG. 52 (b)] whose start is the time when the variable display starts.
The second period is a period [for example, a period of the second half until immediately before FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the display of the first effect is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect is not started during the display of the variable display. In other words, the display of the first effect is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.

Also,
'The end of the first period is the start of the second period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative design,
The first effect display is an effect display that may occur when the display is started during the display of the stop display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or the case shown in FIG. 55 (f), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the suspension increases during the display of the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display. Further, even when the hold increases during the display of the variable display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol without fail, or may be a means for displaying the display of the decorative symbol, or may display other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first effect display is displayed when the number of hold increases during the display of the variable display, and when the display starts after the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or FIG. f), etc.] is a presentation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect display is the first period in the variation display started after the variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first variation display ”) in which the number of holdings is increased [for example, FIG. In the first half of the period including (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that always starts to be displayed in the first period in the variable display that is started next to the first variable display.

Also,
“The number of the plurality of hold icons whose display modes change according to the first effect display is the number before the increase of the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. Example]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [for example, an animation shown in FIG. 52 (k), etc.]
The moving animation is an animation in which display is completed before the second period starts.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of the characters “heat” of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (b)],
Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is configured to start displaying in the first period,
When at least one hold icon of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the display of the first effect display is not started even in the first period. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode. Is different from the jackpot reliability (expected degree), the second display mode may be a display mode having a higher jackpot reliability (expected degree) than the first display mode, Conversely, a low display mode may be used.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display form.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display form.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition,
"A game machine equipped with effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may start to be displayed in a first period [for example, a period from the start of symbol variation until the moving animation of the hold icon ends]
In the case where the display of the first effect is not started in the first period, the second period [for example, the period from FIG. 53 (a) to immediately before FIG. 53 (c), FIG. In the period until immediately before (d) in the figure], the first effect display is configured not to start displaying,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

further,
"A game machine with stage display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative pattern,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of decorative symbols,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may not start during execution of the variable display.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display may be an effect display that is not necessarily displayed during execution of the variable display.

further,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display when the suspension increase is performed during the stop display.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the variation display when the suspension display is increased during the variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is surely started during execution of the stop display when the suspension display is increased during the stop display. Further, the first effect display is an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the change display when the hold display is increased during the change display. Also good.

  9 to 61 described above may be an example of a single pachinko machine, or may be an example executed by different pachinko machines.

  FIG. 62 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 63), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 200 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 64 to 200 in principle, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 200, the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at an amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor is provided for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, Chance button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 64, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing of the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 67) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, The launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 67) that performs the control processing related to, and the power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 67) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are constructed. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 65), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 66 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding devices 246 overlap each other so that the player can hardly see the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 66 correspond to the effect means. Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specs of the gaming table is attached to the game board 200 at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received payball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls has been paid out, or paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68A to 68D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 68 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 68 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 68A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. In FIG. 68 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown, and five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 65 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 67 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a prize at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 67. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set, indicating that data is set) in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (common figure A shown in FIG. 68 (c)) or the lost symbol (common figure B shown in FIG. 68 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, a door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). Is output in a storage state of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 72A to 72C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 72B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 72B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, see FIG. 73 for the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 73A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination high probability table, and FIG. 73B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. In the case of determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if it is in the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 73A, and if it is in the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 73 (b). Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 73C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 74A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical value range of random numbers Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 75A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 75B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 75C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 75D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 76A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 76B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 76C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  77, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  77 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 in FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 77 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 77 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 77 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 77 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started in FIG. 77 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 77 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 77 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P as shown in FIG. 77 (j). . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 77 (k), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 disappears and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the vehicle enters the reach state as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 77 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size. , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be the advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 in stages.

  In FIG. 78 (p) continuing from FIG. 77 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 78 (s). In FIG. 78 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 78 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the 15R probability variation big hit decision of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 78 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 78 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 78 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is made along with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. In 78 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 78 (v ′) following FIG. 78 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 78 (w ′) following FIG. 78 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 78 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 79 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 79 (c), as in FIG. 78 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 79 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 80A is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 80B is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 81A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 81B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a carton box is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 80A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 80A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 80A) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 80 (a) is started, a Tono-sama effect appears to increase the notice icon on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 81 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icon for the first shrine icon I1 and the notice icon for the second shrine icon I2 are shown in FIG. 81 (a). And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 81 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), for example, a notice icon for a hat, a notice icon for a shuriken I7, a notice icon for a shuriken I7, and a ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura) In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation acceptance period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 81B: erasure effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  82, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77. For example, the display result of the 4th symbol is displayed by the light emission mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 82 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Also, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 82 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-like character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (10), In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 82 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 in stages.

  In FIG. 83 (14) following FIG. 82 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 83 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the carton box at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 83 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 83 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  After that, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 83 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  84 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 in stages.

  In FIG. 84 (28) continuing from FIG. 83 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watcher character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol display area 208b displays a pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208 a, the middle symbol display area 208 b, and the right symbol display area 208 c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (34). That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 84 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 84 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, in FIG. 84 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  85 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 in stages.

  In FIG. 85 (43) following FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), the above-described super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, has moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (45) shows a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the advance notice icon I9 of the carton box together with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 85 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 85 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 85 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach production is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 85 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (55), as shown in FIG. 85 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the button image 136a. It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in stages.

  In FIG. 86 (58) following FIG. 85 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 86 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. In addition, when adding a character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 86 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 86 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 86 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 87 to 89 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 87 to 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  87 (8a) to FIG. 87 (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which not the hat notice icon I 6 but the first lord's notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (9a-2), after the first icon of the notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 87 (10a) is displayed. Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  87 (8b) to FIG. 87 (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8b), an effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9b). If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 87 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 c), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display is performed in which the hat warning icon I 6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 87 (9c), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  87 (7d) to FIG. 87 (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 87 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 82 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (8d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three hats thrown becomes the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2, and notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. Further, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (pre-stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d ′), a part or all of the three icons of the thrown three hats do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 87 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7e), unlike the example of production shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (8e), an effect display is performed in which a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notification icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notifications can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notifications can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9e ′), some or all of the three thrown notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  87 (12f-1) to FIG. 87 (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), as with FIG. 82 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state where the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 88 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display form (display form by the Sabohani character), Tono-sama character YM displays the hat notice icon I6 as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 88 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. This production hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 88 (8 h), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  88 (8i) to FIG. 88 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 88 (8i), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9 i-2), the preview icon I 6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the pre-reading notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  89 (9 i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  FIGS. 88 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 88 (8j) is different from FIG. 82 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the hat icon I6 held by the DJ character BY is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  88 (8k) to FIG. 88 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in the carton box so as to overlap the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 88 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (12l ′) and FIG. 88 (12l ″), a part or all of the characters added and displayed on the notice icon is changed to a “question mark” to clearly show the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is determined is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a jackpot confirmation (or that there is something that will be a big hit in the hold).

  In the production example described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM and DJ character BY. However, in the production example shown in FIG. 89, an effect of increasing the notice icon by displaying a decorative symbol is provided. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 89 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the display moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 89 (B1), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first icon notification icon design imitating the first icon notification icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the character designation “stock” is added to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the first icon of the notice icon changes to the first icon of the first notice icon I1 and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, but may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 93 are diagrams showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 90 to 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  90 (38m) to FIG. 90 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38) to (40). In FIG. 90 (38m) to FIG. 39 (m), the same effects as in FIG. 84 (38) to FIG. 39 (39) are performed, but in FIG. 90 (40m-1), the medium symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 90 (40m-2), the variable display becomes high speed immediately before the pseudo continuous symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol, and the pseudo continuous symbol appears. Is scrolled out to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-3), the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  90 (23n) to FIG. 90 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (23) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 90 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  90 (23o) to FIG. 90 (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1). 90I is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 90 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 90 (22p) to FIG. 23 (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (22) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 90 (23p), the leftmost (notice icon) in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the order in which the notice icons are digested. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 90 (24q-1) to FIG. 90 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  91 (Aa) to FIG. 91 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing shown in 91 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 that has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 91 (B) shows an effect example when the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area as a plurality of notice icons are digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 91 (C) shows an effect example in the case where the digest effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), before the start of the effect of digesting the notice icon, an effect is given that indicates whether or not the notice icon is digested. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan warning icon I10 may be digested or the fan warning icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is deleted without being digested, the result is a stop display with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols, which is a display result of out-of-range. You may alert | report.

  91 (59s) to (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59 s), two notice icons I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, it will be a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, they will be lost. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  91 (23t) to FIG. 91 (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this effect example, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 91 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 91 (28t) to (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed after digestion, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digest notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 85 (44), or only the digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 92 (Aa) to FIG. 92 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 92 (Aa), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the Princess Chibi character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. 92 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in accordance with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the chord character BC Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  92 (66u-1) to FIG. 92 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used for, for example, a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that informs that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 92 (Ba) to FIG. 92 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and then the hold is digested and the symbol variation When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 92 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 92 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-2), a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (hat notice icon I6) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 92 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted, for example, so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in combination, and a combination notice may be executed when a plurality of characters appear correspondingly. In addition, a specific effect for digesting multiple notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit if multiple notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested The reliability may be high.

  Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. After that, at the timing of FIG. 93 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 digests is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 93 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 in stages.

  In FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 95 (14), the notice icon used for the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. Also, for the effects performed between FIG. 95 (14) and FIG. 95 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon of the first notice icon I1. 83 is the same as FIG. 83 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 95 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 95 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 95 (22), the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 95 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 95 (25), a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I 6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  95 (27) to 96 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. This is the same as FIGS. 83 (27) to 84 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34), the display of digesting the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 96 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged icon of the hat notification icon I 6.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents shown in FIG. 96 (38) to FIG. 45 (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 84 (38) to FIG. 85 () except that the notice icon displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46), the display that the first icon of the first icon displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is erased and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 96 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 97 (49). In this production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display in which a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display “Is it a chance?” Is performed on the darkened background. In FIG. 97 (50-2), a character “NO” is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), a character display of “striking” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), as shown in FIG. 97 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 97 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 97 (59), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1” (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth display area YA4 of the notification icon is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. In addition, when adding a character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 98 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 98 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 98 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit is confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon increase effect. 99 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 99 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 99 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 99 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 b), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 99 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I 1 but also three first lord notice icons I 1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown are notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is difficult to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 99 (9c ′), a part or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 99 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode by the Sabohani character), the Tono-like character YM displays the notice icon I1 of the first Tono-sama. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 99 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display is performed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  99 (8g) to FIG. 99 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8g), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the first lord's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9 g-2), the first lord's notice icon I 1 acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetching notice An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  99 (12h-1) to FIG. 99 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), as in FIG. 94 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 100 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 100 (8i) is different from FIG. 94 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (9 i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and uses the first icon of the first lord with the notice icon I 1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 100 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 100 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with a third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 100 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified in text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ″), all or part of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is changed to the notice icon after change, and the notice icon after change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  FIGS. 101 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 101 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 101 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notification icon I9 of the Thousand Box is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notification icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 101 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 101 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with a first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after being overwritten is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 102, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the prefetch notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but it is displayed in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  And as shown in FIG.102 (C), in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the Princess Chibi chance effect is performed. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character chooses one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102 (D2), at least one of the hold icons of the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case of power interruption / recovery during display of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power interruption / recovery occurs while the notice icon is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 103 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 103 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (C) displays a character display “Resume for a while” as a return display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 step by step. 104 to 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, in FIG. 104, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 104 (1) shows a display corresponding to the above-described FIG. 82 (5). However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. This is different from FIG. 82 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display region is formed above the reserved icon display region 281 and a three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 82 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (4). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (5), the thrown “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (7) to (8), a display is performed in which the character-like character YM is out of the frame toward the bottom of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is circled.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIG. 104 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIG. 104 (7) to FIG. 104 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18), the “home” notice icon I21 and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. Display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “mon” move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Since the contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 106 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 106 (a1) differs from FIG. 104 (5) in that the “print” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 106 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be enlarged and displayed in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 106 (b1) to FIG. 106 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest actor 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The crest dropping effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 106 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 106 (c1) to FIG. 106 (c2-3) show other examples of the notice icon digestion effect. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 106 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺”, the notice icon I32 for “princess” and The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and a face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “Tono” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “爺” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with the face of the eyelid is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, although this example of an example demonstrated the example in which all three notice icons were displayed, only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a samurai character may appear and the Tono & Samurai Reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, there is an example in which a presentation may be performed when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “mon” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM successfully draws the “monkey” notice icon I22, the family crest character 224B falls as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by the character YM of Tono-sama is cut and the pulling of the “monkey” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the pull-in notification icon I22 of the “print” is successfully pulled. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the Tono-sama character YM is cut and the pulling of the “print” notice icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested, for example, “House” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is an increase in the notice icon and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 108 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). The hold icon h11) is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-read notice, shows how various parts are given. In FIG. 108 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows the state. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and a mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e4), the effect display in which the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-like character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 108 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of the special figure 1 that is held is digested and the symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan-Sullet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is the first imitating the body part constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display form of a snowman. Attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1 As shown in FIG. 108 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted, for example, when a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 108 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 5, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach and is attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a variation of the digest effect in stages, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in stages. 109 to 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 109 to 110 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 109 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (3), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed in the notification icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled. For example, the first decorative design display device The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which Tono-sama's character YM has succeeded in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect production may be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  FIG. 109 (7) is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208A with the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 109 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208 A displays -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (12). Is done. It should be noted that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (11) is displayed in the first decoration symbol display at the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. The timing may be the time when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (12) is enlarged.

  In FIG. 110 (13) continuing from FIG. 109 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 110 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B provides a notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  Thereafter, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which the Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that the pseudo-continuous production may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Note that in the case shown in FIG. 110 (16), the longest character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display across” is displayed in cooperation with the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and display is performed that moves downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19). Thereafter, for example, pseudo-continuous effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams showing another modification example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 111 to 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  111 (a1) to FIG. 111 (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. The notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111 (a3) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a4), after the notice icon I6 for the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the fluctuation display of FIG. 1 is terminated, and the display is stopped with a combination of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2” as a result of the loss. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, and “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is a result of the loss of both the first ornamental symbol and the second ornamental symbol. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 111 (a6-2) shows a state in which two pending reservations have been consumed and the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b4), the number of notice icon display is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of two 7-segments, for example, and can display the number of notice icons displayed (stock number).

  111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b3) are the contents of the effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 83 (17) to (19). A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. That is, in FIG. 111 (b1), only one hat warning icon I6 is displayed in the warning icon display area 285, so that the warning icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. Yes. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b2), Tono-sama character YM throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, and fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. For example, the operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  112 (c1) to 112 (c9) are produced using two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 109 to 110. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 112 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is put on hold. The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. In addition, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. FIG. 112 (c1) At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 112 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 112 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 for the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . At the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c3), since the number of holdings is one, in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1, “1” indicating that fact is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 112 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. When the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the long-length character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (c9), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 112D shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 112D, the first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (d), a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed on is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 113, the first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 113 (e1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 85 (47), which covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. That is, in FIG. 113 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and a notice is given to shift to a more reliable production. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move in directions close to each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decorative effect as shown in FIG. 85 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 113 (e7), the “decoration 1-decoration 2— The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” that fluctuated and fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 113 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 113 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 113 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also rotates. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to this embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 114, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 114, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 114, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-1). At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. In other words, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be terminated after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chamberlet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides the light. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (f3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the thrown hat's notice icon I6 in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 114 (g) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 114 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 114 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of symbols is performed in the Chanletlet display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 114 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 114 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 115 (1) to FIG. 11 (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 85 (44) to FIG. 85 (54), only the parts different from those described above with reference to FIG. 85 will be described in detail, and descriptions of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 115 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 115 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. 115 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using the movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  116 (a1) to FIG. 116 (a3), when stocking the notice icon, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 116 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 104 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 116 (a2) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to a visually recognizable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visually recognizable position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 116 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 116B, effect movable bodies 224 </ b> Da to 224 </ b> Df that can rotate about the depth direction as a rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  FIG. 116 (c1) to FIG. 116 (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode is set. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 116 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display “Preparing for special training” on the right side in the strip-shaped scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 116 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 116 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is ended, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that the special training reach is started is performed. Also, the effect movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, and then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise example showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. 117, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  FIG. 117 (1) is the same display as FIG. 104 (1) described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of production, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (3), but the hat's notice icon I6 is still not thrown, and FIG. 117 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (5), the hold symbols h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 117 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 118, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 118, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  118 (a1) to FIG. 118 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 118 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 118 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing a bowling effect as shown in FIG. 118 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the striked scene is displayed together with the text display of “Strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it has been stocked. In this way, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 118, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed, for example, the state shown in FIG. 118 (a2) may be displayed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c), if a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another modified example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game concerning the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. Also, in FIG. 119, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, has been suspended. This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 119 (a 1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), the SB character SB is placed at any one of the three horizontal starting points of the horizontal line. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the character moves up to the next vertical line. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 119 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 118 (c) and (d), for example. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), it reaches the middle of the middle horizontal line.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the savohani character SB follows the rule of Amida lottery from the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. After the display indicating the acquisition is performed, the AMIDA effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 119 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is arranged at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit is confirmed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), the hat icon IX is not arranged, the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are arranged at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end of each horizontal line. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player goes to the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-6), the notification icons of the lords who are not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notification icon I1 of the first lord, the notification icon I2 of the second lord, 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is a notice icon for the red lord, is more likely to be changed to a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is confirmed than a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is not confirmed, and the white lord The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. For example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2), during the execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then the area shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX has been changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the Amida effect has been promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. For example, FIG. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), before the smoke was extended, it was suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 could be acquired. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan warning icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 119 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 119 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating an example of another effect of the notice icon increase effect in a stepwise manner. is there. 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch notice display mode (sabohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 120 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display. In response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 120 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 120 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (10), In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 120 (11) to (12), a display in which the Tono-sama character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the movement animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 120 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notification symbol is displayed in the first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. In FIG. 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 121, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a pre-reading symbol variation display hold, but the display mode is For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  121 (a1) to 121 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is provided to notify in advance that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown at 121 (a 3-1), the hat notice icon I 6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 in the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed so that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  When the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, no effects relating to the stock of the notice icon are performed as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  121 (b1) to 121 (b3) show that the prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b1), the game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, so that the third hold icon h13 is displayed as a prefetch notice. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display is finished, and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, a ton-like effect or the like is performed and a notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

  121 (d1) to 121 (d3) show how the notice icon stock and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, as shown in FIG. 121 (d2), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon. The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 (e1) to (e2), the hat notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 122, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 122, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  122 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. Yes. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice and the description of the appearance character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 122 (b1) to (b3), without changing from the stage display area 289 to the notice icon display area 285D, the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to Tono-sama's production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  122 (c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display region 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display region is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  122 (d1) to 122 (d3) show other examples of the notice icon increase effect.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed small on the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed on the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced-size hat displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d3), the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 122 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  122 (f1) to FIG. 122 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  FIG. 122 (f1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  122 (g1) to FIG. 122 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that produces the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 81 (b), and which notice icon is included. It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.

  Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to the advance notice item. It is.

  123 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 123 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have a holding number of zero. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 123 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (e) is reached, the notice icon icon It and the princess notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so that the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (h). The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the display is stopped with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), after the suspended symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, the Tonen notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 123 (j), a bad servant notice icon Id is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 123 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is a big jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50 Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  Further, when the result of the jackpot determination executed when the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started is out of place, as a result of the hold prefetching in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50. Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of special figure 1 , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 137.

  125 to 137 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 125 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 125 to 135 and 137 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  125 is a diagram showing step-by-step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 126 is a diagram showing step-by-step the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are given. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 125 (d), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. In addition, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) having a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon having a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation are used. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (f), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I 61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the bomb icon I61 that bursts changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a sound “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 125 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the Tono-sama character. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 125 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display related to the notice icon and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (l), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation as shown in FIG. 125 (n), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested is expressed. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I62 of the swinging swordsman moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a) following FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L performs a display notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and the swordsman reach is highly reliable for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 126 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 126 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the main character, Tono-sama, was defeated by the enemy swordsman. In FIG. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. 127 (a) to FIG. 127 (l) are the same as FIG. 125 (a) to FIG. 125 (l), and description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS as shown in FIG. 127 (n), and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is arranged (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is displayed. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 is adjusted. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (a) following FIG. 127 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 128 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 128 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 128 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the state that the swinging-up chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward and is digested is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. If the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 128 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (m), the main character, Tono, wins over the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 128 (n), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to move the display of the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR as will be described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “The swordsman is the nemesis of Tono-sama”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or before the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR is ruptured. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a6), a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 (b1) to FIG. 129 (b8), another example of a notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b6), a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol table while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 129, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 130 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 130 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (e) to (j), FIG. 130 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 130 (a10). The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation display “Due to digestion of notice icon ...”, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b1) to FIG. 130 (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. Since FIG. 130 (b1) to FIG. 130 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIG. 125 (p) to FIG. 125 (q), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 131 shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Ton-sama is an 8th general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1). In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that “gold is hotter than red”, and a description regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative design, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a2), the balloon TT2 is erased together with the Chibi princess character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 131 (a4), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with the explanation “swordsman reach is hot”, and explanation about a specific super reach is made. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the state where the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda intrudes”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. Note that the timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon part TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon part TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 131 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  131 (c1) to 131 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 131 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 132 shows that the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display part TT4, and a stage name display part ST2. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. A hold icon display area is formed at the center of the UI portion shown in FIG. 132 (a1). The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a2), a third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to (k) and described above.

  FIG. 132 (a5) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to a princess notice icon I64 and is moved to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. In the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the state where the predetermined display position (stock position) has not been reached is shown. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed up to now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 132 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display part ST2, and then the tutorial display part. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display is displayed. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed in the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed in the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this production example, reference is made to the above-described example shown in FIG. 125 as an example of the throwing animation, but it is needless to say that modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 132 (b1) to FIG. 132 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 131 (b2). In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other effects according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  133 (a1) to (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 133 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by Fig.125 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 133 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. In other words, the UI part in the space stage has a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and a hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. Note that the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage shown in FIG. 125 and described above. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a3) shows a state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is not displayed immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 133 (b1) to (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (b1), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. For example, the number of times that a button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows another effect example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  FIG. 134 (a1) to FIG. 134 (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked are changed by the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Ton-sama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (a1), a haten notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a3), the state where the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the warning icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the Hatena notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a6), what is displayed as “with notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is the enemy of the lord”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (b1) to FIG. 134 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (b1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and FIG. 134 (b3) is the same as FIG. 134 (a6); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 134 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 134 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the Hatena warning icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. Accordingly, at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 134 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (c1) is the same as FIG. 134 (b1), and FIG. 134 (c2) is the same as FIG. 134 (b2); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c2), as shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new notice icon.

  FIG. 134 (d1) to FIG. 134 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (d1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 134 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 that is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 135 (a1) to FIG. 135 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 135 (a1) to FIG. 135 (a3) are the same as FIG. 125 (h) to FIG. 125 (j), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 135 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 135 (a4). As shown in FIG. 135 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1-decoration C—decoration” is displayed. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least a part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. In addition, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at predetermined intervals. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap with the achievement display part KM1 by the notice icon may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 135 (b1) to FIG. 135 (b3), for example, an example of operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to super reach or a big hit is shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 135 (b1) shows a state where super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen, and the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in the direction of approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated with each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  In FIG. 135 (c1) to FIG. 135 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 135 (c1) shows a state where a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 135 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 126 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 135 (c2), the duel scene animation continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c3), as shown in FIG. 135 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-announce notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for advancement is an icon for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  136 (a1) to FIG. 136 (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “swordsman is Tono-sama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. 136 is overlapped with a notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 136 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tono-sama” is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a4) is reached, the entire text “Swordsman is Tonen-Sama's nemesis” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tono-sama” part is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” portion scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and the “I am the enemy” portion is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that, when scrolling the explanation display is repeatedly performed, these periods are also repeatedly generated.

  136 (b1) to FIG. 13 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 136 (b1) to FIG. 136 (b3) and FIG. 136 (b6) to FIG. (B7) are respectively shown in FIG. 136 (a1) to FIG. (A3) and FIG. 136 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 136 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 136 (b4) to 136 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 136 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (b7) is reached, the scrolling display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  136 (c1) to (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 136 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 which is a notice icon scheduled to be digested first and a swordsman notice icon I62 which is a second notice icon scheduled to be digested are a chance-up notice icon I63. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 136 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. As a result, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects applicable to the present embodiment. In the example of production shown in FIG. 137, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon is shown enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI1 has a hold icon display area on the left side where four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame, and four notice icons are displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. A notice icon display area that can be displayed on the right is formed in the upper right, and a tutorial display section TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed at a position above the UI unit UI1 and close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 137 (a), “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed. In addition, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (a), both of which are referred to as a normal display form (in this example, “first display form”). It may be displayed in (). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative design, it does not overlap with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also displayed. Do not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 137 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character throws a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (d), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may overlap the decorative symbol that is displayed as a variable symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed display frame is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. This notifies the user that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. If the display frame to be displayed and the notice icon are stocked in the display frame, the display icon overlaps the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with flame. For this reason, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 are also difficult to view together with the notice icon displayed on the UI part UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, make it possible to visually recognize at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5. It may be difficult to see only.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon enlargement animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is a flame effect. A state of appearance from EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, a swordsman notice icon I62 is newly displayed to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is These are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are further enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to view. In addition, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, so that it may be easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon displayed in an enlarged manner may overlap the decorative design. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, in this effect example, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other indications (for example, notice display) (overlapping). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon with a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display form (in this example, “first display”) that is larger in size than the normal display form (first display form). It may be referred to as “second display mode”). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed. Are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to view. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in a state where the third notice icon is in an enlarged display mode. In addition, since the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (j), the notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and is easily visible. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-continuous displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is visible. That is, in this effect example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increased by the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icons (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 and I65) displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed. All the swordsman notice icons I62) are visible. That is, it can be said that although the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, all of the notice icons are visible.

  Thereafter, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, the notice icon display area shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in addition to the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro" has been changed to "Panda is a master of Tosama". Here, after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, the flame effect EF1 may be erased, or after the flame effect EF1 is erased, the notice icon display frame YF may be erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased simultaneously. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be a timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased or may be a timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Moreover, the display change of the tutorial display part TT5 does not need to be performed. Further, the change icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the increase in the number of holdings is firmly reflected.

  In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the notice icon enlargement animation described above ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. In this case, since there is no notice icon that is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, no notice icon that is difficult to view is generated.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, a flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (i) without passing through the notice icon enlargement animation. For example, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed in FIG. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

  Moreover, in this production example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduced animation after being enlarged and displayed. For example, the notice icon is digested in the state of being enlarged and displayed. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in a normal display mode.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to display the stock notice icon in an enlarged manner. However, when the notice icon is digested, as described above, The notice icon to be digested is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the digest icon is enlarged (displayed in the second display form) when digested. You may do it.

  Further, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation that is performed when stocking the notice icon may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the notice icon stock by the character's action (for example, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by Tono-sama character), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the second half part) May be canceled), for example, it may not be canceled in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  Further, the display mode of the enlarged display may be different depending on the number of already-announced notice icons and the number of the previously-stocked notice icons. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the hold is increased while the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. There may be. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increase in the hold that is a target of prefetching at the time of starting winning. Even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. Or the like, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. In this way, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be made easier.

  Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

  In the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “extreme heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ream”, etc.), it may be called a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. Yes. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumping into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and the decorative symbol display device 208 or between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to a collision with the effect movable body or the like arranged on the screen.

  FIG. 138 (a-2) shows a state in which effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a family crest character 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the decorative design display device 208, and between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. It is displayed in a mode accommodated in a frame FL1, and a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is displayed in a blinking manner. It is the display mode of the notice. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. Note that the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2) is in a non-display state. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), the Chibi princess character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and along with the spear character GY1 on the right side of the display screen, A balloon part TT3 is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, a line “Where is the bag?” Is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, a line “here is” is displayed. Note that the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state that they are not overlapped with the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Further, a part of the UI portion (the hold display frame FL1 and the change icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the princess Chibi character CH1 overlap the transparent protective member CL, and are transparent. The visibility may be lower than when the protective member CL does not overlap.

  FIG. 138 (a-3) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), the family crest member 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlap state with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-4) shows a state in which the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the up and down direction in the extended display frame FL1. Has been. Note that the balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1, and is difficult to see compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. The balloon portion TT3 is not overlapped because it is displayed above the hold display frame FL1. In addition, the decorative symbols during the variable display are overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where the decorative symbols are not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display up above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-2). FIG. (B-1 a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-1a), between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative design display device 208 is substantially the same as the size of the decorative design display device 208 in addition to the above-described family crest character 224E. A light guide plate IL is disposed. The light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest member 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b-1), the family crest actor 224 E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. Note that the configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 114, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 13 (a-3). FIG. 138 (b-2a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-2a), the family crest character 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the crest character 224E is provided between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where it is not interposed between them.

  FIG. 138 (b-3) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-4). FIG. 138 (b-3a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-3a), the crest character 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player can move the crest character 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. As compared with the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easily visible through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 138 (c-1) and FIG. 138 (c-2) are diagrams for explaining an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c-1), the above-described hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. In the example shown in FIG. 138 (c-2), the second layer arranged rearward of the first layer layer LY1 with respect to the portion (extended portion) that extends upward in the hold display frame FL1. Arranged in the layer LY2. Note that a ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, and for example, a serif notice, a decorative symbol, a notice display (for example, an arrow flying display) Or any other display can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. It may be.

  The display mode of the UI unit may be configured so as to be different depending on the production mode (hereinafter referred to as “production stage, etc.”) depending on the production stage and the gaming state.

  In addition, at least a part of the production stage or the like may be selectable by the player's operation, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, every fluctuation). Also good.

  In addition, the operation of “the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward” which is a characteristic operation of the present invention is at least a part of an effect stage (for example, an effect stage in a non-electric support state, It may be performed at a part of the stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is displayed during the change, or may be performed at all stage stages or the like.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 154.

  FIG. 139 to FIG. 154 are diagrams showing stepwise variations of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 139 to 154, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 139 to 150, 152, and 154 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, FIGS. 139 to 150 and FIGS. 152 to 154 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a hold change notice effect as a pre-reading notice effect using a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are given. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, the UI unit may be always displayed or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that blinks in white). At this time, a sound output “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice is made by a hold display. Note that audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before audio output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of outputting the sound from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), an explanation display “This change is ...” is made on the balloon portion TT 2, and a suggestion regarding the notice to be performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. The balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, Princess Chibi character CH1 and balloon part TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, balloon part TT2 may be displayed after Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, and balloon part TT2 is displayed. After being done, Princess Chibi character CH1 may be displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon part TT2 is changed to an explanation display "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be the same timing as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped by a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped by a plurality of arrows. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. Also good. Further, it may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased and the timing when the display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. It should be noted that the left symbol stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” is displayed so as to overlap a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. The plurality of arrows and the Princess Chibi character CH1 are deleted. The timing at which the arrows are erased may be after the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, may be before the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, or the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”, the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is combined. After shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” at the timing of the first decorative symbol confirmation stop display. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or may remain displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may erase | eliminate before the fluctuation variation state of a decoration design is started.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the symbol stop display is continued from FIG. 139 (g).

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140B starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed along with the princess Chibi character CH1. It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”, And a conversation notice is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows again fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of times of symbol variation display. In this example, as in FIG. 139 (c), Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, but other characters may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (d), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the balloon TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper portion of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows a state where the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the rear side. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. This effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 140 (i), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown. As shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. Thereby, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (k) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (an LED built in the family crest member 224E, an LED provided at a special drawing start port, etc.) is held on the hold icon before the hold icon to be read ahead changes. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in FIG. An animation display (reduction animation) is performed to reduce the image to the shape shown. The reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1, and in this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. It is also possible to erase the data finally by overlapping with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 is in a default display mode.

  In the example of the above-described effects, the start timing of each effect such as Princess Chibi character CH1, Samurai character GY1, notice display of a plurality of arrows, family crest character 224E, decorative symbol variation display, expansion operation of hold display frame FL1, etc. The end timing can be performed in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1, but an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the image which respond | corresponds the hold icon after a change (corresponding to the hold icon after a change) may be displayed.

  Next, in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an effect example when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

  FIG. 140 (i ′) corresponds to FIG. (I) and has the same effect content as FIG. 140 (i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is in the second hold. As shown in FIG. 140 (k ′), the shuriken SH1 frames out to the lower part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the change in the display mode of the hold icon has failed. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains white and flashing.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 141 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed in response to the stop of the decorative design in which “change” is displayed on the middle symbol. That is, it can be said that the decoration pattern of “change” is a display suggesting the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, a change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a prefetch notice. It is displayed in a manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the fluctuation varies with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 3-change-decoration 1”. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 141 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 141 (b), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest character 224E may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the hold display frame FL1 extends upward and appears above the family crest member 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. Note that the expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display indicating the content of the effect (the decoration pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (f) shows a state in which the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (h) shows a state in which the emission color of the crest character 224E changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is more easily visually recognized as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 142, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame at normal time, and when the explanation display is performed, the state of entering the frame from below is shown. 142 (a) to (n) are the same as FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation in and out of the tutorial display unit TT1. Only the portion will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 142 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the character display of “Panda is a master” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the character display of “Panda is the Master of Panda” in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (f) (for example, For 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), when the crest character 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display part TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (f) to FIG. 142 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation is performed to frame out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the extended animation The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is the same as the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this presentation example, it may be an example of the first extended display) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative design. It can be said that it differs in that it does not overlap the notice, there are few overlapping areas, and the frequency of overlapping is low.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 143 shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an explanation display and the frame is out, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 enters the frame again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 performs a notice display. 143 (a) to FIG. 143 (n) are the same as those in FIG. 142 except that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again after the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preview. Since it is the same as (a) to (n) in the figure, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 142 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial starts from the lower right side of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (j). The display is displayed. That is, a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed is performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a preview display can be performed. The character display of “pseudo-ream” may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The completion timing of the frame-in animation in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or the timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be the same timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 143 (j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In this example, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured to be longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed. Alternatively, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be longer when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. In addition, the character color may be different between the explanation display and the notice display. Thus, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a success / failure pattern are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that changes the other display such as a change in hold (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, the stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-run, the display mode of the serif notice Change (for example, a line in blue or blue background changes to a line in red or red text), a step up in a line advance notice (for example, in the state where a line advance notice for character A is displayed, then the line in character B For example, a notice display may be performed)).

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a super reach effect applicable to this embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 144, for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed after the effect display shown in FIG. 140 is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is a pre-read notice display mode that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is deleted. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 shows a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” and an explanation display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 144 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. The family crest member 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display for informing the development to super reach (swordsman reach) is performed.

  And as shown in FIG.144 (c), the light emission means corresponding to light-guide plate IL light-emits, and the pattern imitating the effect image is formed, and it produces that the reliability with respect to the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon. These displays may be difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. Note that the character display erasure timing in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the hold icon erasure timing, or may be a timing after the hold icon erasure timing. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Although the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, the fluctuation icon h0 may also be erased.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (d) to (g), the UI part frames out by the UI part FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the light emission color of the family crest character 224E. In other words, as described above, the display is performed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by extending the hold display frame FL1. In some cases, the display mode after the change of the hold icon can be confirmed even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is accommodated is not displayed.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, for example, after the duel scene animation is displayed by the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 126 (c) to (h), the first decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208L, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” ornamental patterns is derived for both the first ornamental symbol and the second ornamental symbol. Is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144 (j) to (n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen is performed. The hold icon is displayed again after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed. However, the hold icon may be displayed when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes the decoration “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is stopped by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. Further, the family crest character 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased when stopped. Further, the timing at which the family crest character 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration The timing may be after the symbol stop display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the change icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode before the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed and then deleted, or after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be changed after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or it may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the decorative symbol stop display timing.

  In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after being expanded, being expanded, and being reduced may be configured to be displayed. All the hold display frames FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, the cut-in of the ally character and the cut-in of the enemy character). Or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of lines displayed in red, or the like may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. One of a plurality of types of display may be displayed.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 145 (b- 1) to (b-6) show a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed in a state where the notice icon is stocked, and FIGS. FIG. 6C-6 shows a state in which an effect that changes the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially in common with the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 145 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1, and therefore a detailed description will be given. Omitted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-1), the treasure chest notice icon BX is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E and not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E. It is considered difficult to visually compare. Also, in this production example, description will be given using a treasure chest notice icon BX as an example of a notice icon, but the present invention is also applicable, for example, to displaying various notice icons shown in FIGS. 81 and 136 (d). Needless to say.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the treasure chest notice icon BX that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged so that visual recognition is easy.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 145 (a-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced, or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. This suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. In other words, a pre-reading notice is performed using the treasure box notice icon BX.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), except that a treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIG. 145 (a-1) to FIG. (For example, an effect or the like performed by stopping the chance symbol) may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 145 (b-3) shows a state where the shuriken SH1 overlaps the treasure box notice icon BX. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX, or may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX. That is, for example, even when the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed as described above in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is more than the treasure box notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side, or may be displayed on the back side.

  FIG. 145 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure box notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. Thereby, it is not known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-5), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 145 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12. There is no change in appearance. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest member 224E.

  FIG. 145 (c-6) following FIG. 145 (c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. The player may not be able to change the display mode of the hold icon, but the advance notice of the treasure box BX may change the appearance of the game and make the production more surprising and may further increase the expectation of the big hit. is there. Note that the change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to a change in size. For example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination may change. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), the speaker 120 performs audio output for notifying that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the audio output is not performed. It may be.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 146 (a-1) to (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, blinking in white). In FIG. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 and the display mode of the hold icon is displayed. FIG. 146 (c-1) to FIG. 146 (c-5) show the effect of changing the display mode of all displayed hold icons. Is shown.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, as shown to FIG. 146 (a-1), the 3rd hold | maintenance icon h13 is displayed by the default display mode.

  In FIG. 146 (a-1) following FIG. 146 (a-1), a state in which the family crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position is shown. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent thereto, not the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 146 (a-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 is shown moving toward the third hold icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13 and the third hold icon h13 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-read notice display mode (blinking in white).

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (a-5) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h <b> 13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the same as the display mode of the pre-read notice. According to this production example, not only the second hold icon h12 but the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h13 changes, so that the production can be surprised and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 may be dramatically improved. . In addition, although this example of production demonstrated the example performed with respect to the 3rd holding | maintenance icon adjacent to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon which is the object of a prefetch notice, you may make it perform with respect to the 1st holding | maintenance icon. When there is a fourth hold, the fourth hold icon h14 may be performed.

  146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-4) show the example in which the head character BC1 is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the thrown object. Except for the point that is changed, it is the same as FIG. 140 (g) to FIG. 140 (j), so only the different points will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1, not the ninja character NJ1 but the bancho character BC1 appears. It should be noted that the chief character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character crest character 224E is not partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  FIG. 146 (b-2) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged to facilitate visual recognition. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the chief character BC1 emits a Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown object. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made. It should be noted that the effect display of the Qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side rather than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 146 (b-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. And in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, a mode that Qigong wave KK1 is heading to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. At this time, the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, by allowing characters other than the ninja character NJ1 to be displayed, for example, there may be a case where the reliability of the big hit can be changed by the appearing character.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 146 (c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-3) except for the above, only the differences will be described in detail, and detailed description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c-3) following FIG. 146 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 is overlapped with the second hold icon h12 and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in display mode. This may give a sense of expectation that reliability may increase for all holds. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. The effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the chief character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the longest character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may always be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased and the first hold icons h11 to 3 are compared with the state where the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 is easily displayed again. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this production example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the production can be given unexpectedness and the In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it carry out.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 147 (a-1) to (a-5), the expanded display range of the hold display frame FL1 is shown, and FIGS. 147 (b-1) to ( b-5) shows a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened, and a character relating to the hold change notice effect appears there, and FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4). In the figure, a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed is shown.

  An example of the effect shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (g) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) following FIG. 147 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. Further, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E, and is easier to visually recognize than the state where it is overlapped with the family crest member 224E. In addition, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT3, and the display of the balloon part TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where it does not overlap the balloon part TT3. Also, the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 throws three shurikens SH1. These three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon part TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the family crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes the effect EF2. The display is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Tono. At this time, a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. At this time, the light emission mode of the family crest member 224E is not changed, but may be changed. As described above, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward, and the contents of the effect are also partially different. It should be noted that the production content may be the same even if the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. Further, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. Thereby, there may be a case where a change in the expectation for the big hit can be given by the amount of change of the hold display frame FL1.

  Note that the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3 ′), the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched in addition to the upward expansion. Good. Further, the extended range in the vertical direction of the hold display frame FL1 may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 140 (g), and the extended range in the width direction may be up to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched. In addition, when a third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 147 (b-1), the crest character 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the extended portion. A state in which the family crest member 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. The other contents of the production are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the holding display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background is visually recognized. A state in which various types of display are performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened and the ninja character NJ1 appears. A plurality of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened may be prepared, and the color may be varied depending on the expected degree of change in the display mode of the hold icon. As shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. Note that the timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be after the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully open. It may be a timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. At this time, a closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is lowered like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. Note that the start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the start timing of the display of the effect EF2, or may be the same as the start timing of the display of the effect EF2. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  The production example shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0. This will be described in detail, and description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF3 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variation icon h0 and the variation icon h0 explodes. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variation icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, and the reliability of the change with respect to the big hit may be increased. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 147 (c-3) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In other words, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the variation icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, prior to the notice that the display mode of the change icon changes, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest member 224E or an LED provided at the special drawing start opening) is changed to the change icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 148 shows a state where a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is out of the frame from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon part TT2, suggesting that a UI part FO animation will be performed in which the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 described later is out of frame. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon part TT2 shown in FIG. 148 (a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by frame-out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 148 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the state that the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and special diagram of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are shown. The 4th symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows a state in which the UI part FO animation is performed and the UI part is framed out together with the hold display frame FL1 below the display screen. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to darkening effects or SP reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative design and also overlaps the balloon portion TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the exploding effect EF2 is displayed. Yes.

  Thereafter, FIG. 148 (e) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, but the UI portion is still out of frame, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which an animation (UI part FI animation) in which the UI part enters a frame is performed and the UI part FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this production example, the UI portion including the hold display frame FL1 is out of frame, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. For example, FIG. 148 (a ′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI portion may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148 (a ′) is the same as that in FIG. 148 (a), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 148 (a ′) following FIG. 148 (b ′) shows a state in which the UI unit FO animation has been completed. As shown in FIG. 148 (b ′), in this production example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part frames out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being out of frame. The state is maintained.

  In FIG. 148 (c ′), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (c ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the extended portion of the holding display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second holding icon h12. There is an effect of throwing it to the position where it was done. In other words, in this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 149 (a-1) to (a-7), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are shown at the same time. FIGS. 149 (b-1) to (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (f) and described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) following FIG. 149 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the character of Tono-sama is started, and the state of the character of Tono-sama trying to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-3), the crest character 224 </ b> E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 starts to be thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or before the start of throwing the shuriken SH1. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-4), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative symbol and also overlaps the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the spear character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, may be the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-6), a notice is given that the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green and the display color of the second reserved icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-6), the ruptured bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62, and the swordsman reach is notified. Here, at the timing when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, a sound notifying that may be output from the speaker 120. In addition, the timing at which the swordsman notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green, or before the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I 62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display section TT 1 while being reduced in size, and then the bomb icon I 61 by the Tono-sama character. The throwing animation ends. In addition, you may alert | report by the audio | voice output that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arrange | positioned in the tutorial display part TT1. In this way, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, it is compared with the state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is not arranged at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1. As a result, at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. In other words, according to this production example, it can be said that the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display part TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this production example, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, so that it is easy to attract the player to display the tutorial display unit TT1 and the swordsman notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) is the same as FIG. 139 (a) except that the text “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, and thus the detailed description is given in detail. The explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) following FIG. 149 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and the Tonosama character becomes the bomb icon. A state of trying to throw I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (b-3), the character of Tono throws the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of doing is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 explodes. Is shown. The display of the ruptured bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode flashing in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the prefetch notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Moreover, you may make it change the display aspect of a holding | maintenance icon by another change production like this production example. Moreover, the effect which changes the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon mentioned above may be performed in a state where the UI unit is out of frame, for example.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 150 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub display device (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  The effect example shown in FIG. 150 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 150 (a-2) following FIG. 150 (a-1) shows a state in which the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the samurai character GY1, the balloon part TT3, the tutorial display part TT1, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Compared with the state where TT3, tutorial display part TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize each.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-4), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and a variation icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the change icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an expanded display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the overlap with the character GY1 of the heel has been eliminated, but each part of the right symbol of the balloon TT3 and the first decorative symbol is still displayed as the third decorative symbol. It is overlapped with the device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon h0 accommodated therein, and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In comparison with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has finished moving, with its center aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol all overlap the third decorative symbol display device 208N, together with the middle symbols and the hold display frame FL1. The fluctuation icon h0 becomes invisible in front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped. Compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped, it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed and the hold display frame FL2 is expanded upward, and the extended portion is displayed with the ninja's extension. A state in which the character NJ2 appears is shown. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed is further displayed in an extended manner. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a state in which the ninja character NJ2 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 for which a prefetch notice is being made. It should be noted that the shrine sword SH1 effect display may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-10) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E is changed from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and these light emitting means notify that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. It should be noted that the timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest character 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by animation out of the frame from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-13) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves rightward toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped, and part of the state is visible along with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one in comparison with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to visually recognize compared to the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-14), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), the overlap is eliminated for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far. As compared with a state where the is not solved, both displays are in a state of easy visual recognition.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-15) shows a state in which the LEDs emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N are turned off. In addition, you may make it light by a default light emission mode (For example, the light emission mode lighted in white), without turning off. On the other hand, the family crest member 224E still emits light in green corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this effect example, one of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol display device. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), both of the two sub display devices are connected. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are connected to the first decorative symbol when performing the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other at the center. The hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And a ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon part TT2, the balloon part TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 and Princess Chibi character CH1 are overlapped.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 151, instead of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and this sub-decorative symbol display device 208P has an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon. Is shown.

  151 differs from the above-described embodiment in that a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device are provided. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the ornamental symbol display device 208. ing. As shown in FIG. 151 (a), on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and below these are the tutorial display section TT1. Is displayed, a change icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with a princess Chibi character CH1. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”. In addition, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the frog character GY1. A speech display “here is” is displayed on the balloon portion TT3. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 151 (a), a conversation notice is performed. Note that the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the balloon parts TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 151 (b), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and a state where the ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decoration symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decor symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. The state of moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 151 (c) shows a state in which the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P and moves toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Yes. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again more easily than when the effect EF2 is not erased. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 152 (a-1) to (a-6), a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the error display is being performed is shown. FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect display performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is performed. (C-1) to (c-3) in FIG. 15 show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136, and FIG. 152 (d-1) to FIG. FIG. 6D-3 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is performed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136, is shown.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 152 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 140 (d) except that error display is performed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of the others are omitted.

  In FIG. 152 (a-1), when the lower pan is full, a letter “please pull out the ball” is displayed to notify that the lower pan full error has occurred. A state in which the tan error display ER is displayed is shown. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the lower pan full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the blowing portion TT2. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 152 (a-2), since the family crest character 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which a part of the crest member 224E is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, so that it is more than the crest character 224E. A state of appearing upward is shown. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Is difficult to visually recognize compared with a state where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

  FIG. 152 (a-5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja is compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. The character NJ1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 152 (a-6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlap state of the family crest character 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the change icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continued, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the bottom plate full tank error display ER. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 152 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is scrolling to the left. Has been. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “enemy invades” is displayed, and contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display in the display mode of the hold icon over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed.

  FIG. 152 (c-1) shows a state in which the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display form imitating the effect button 136, as an example of the display form of the prefetch notice. In this production example, Princess Chibi character CH1 and Samurai character GY1 are not displayed, and tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the button hold icon is a non-overlapping display even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is moved from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 152 (c-3). It changes into the hold icon of the display mode of Tonosama character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a state where it can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Also good.

  FIG. 152 (d-1) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, a button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. In addition, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is a button effect. It can also be said that the production is not overlapped. At this time, when the error display described above is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. May be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (d-2), the cut-in displayed with the Tono-sama character up and displayed as shown in FIG. 152 (d-3). Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. . At this time, when the error display described above is performed, it is displayed with priority over the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the production examples shown in FIGS. 153 (a-1) to (a-5) do not include the sub display device, and the production display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show how the error display is performed. FIG. 153 (c) shows that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIGS. 153 (d-1) to (d) -2) shows a state in which a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  FIG. 153 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen In the upper right of, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

  Further, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and an eight-yield character 224Fa and a general character character 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”, and fluctuations are performed. In addition, variable display is performed on the second decorative symbol. In the UI section, a hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon h0 is accommodated is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this effect example, images simulating a heel are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and an effect display that closes the heel is performed as the wipe display. Here, the term “wipe” refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of techniques for wiping, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the fluctuation variation is started by the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the fluctuation variation is finished and the display is confirmed. May be performed. Further, for example, it may be performed when a stage change is performed, or may be performed when a transition is made to a super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap the UI part and the first decorative symbol, while they overlap the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display, and the fourth symbol. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that the change icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Here, the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. The timing may be after the timing at which the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  FIG. 153 (a-3) shows that the wipe images WP 1 and WP 2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the state in which the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2 and is finally displayed with the lost symbol. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The display is stopped, and the special figure 1 figure 4 is also stopped and displayed as a lost pattern.

  Thereafter, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the horizontal direction of the display screen, respectively. Is called. As a result, the UI part is visible and the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed so as to be visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed.

  FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show a state in which the wipe display is performed during the error display. The production examples shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 153 (a-3) to (153) except that the lower pan full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the lower pan full error display ER described above overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), the lower pan full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower pan full error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as a lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows a state in which the display positions of the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153 (c) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanation is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 153 (c), for example, when the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward along with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. An effect such that a ninja character NJ1 appears is performed. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variation icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 153 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward, and the extended portion has the ninja's display. A state in which the character NJ3 is displayed is shown. 153 (d-1) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 140 (D) except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is the same as b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed descriptions of the other will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, and is moved in from the lower part of the display screen to the position surrounding the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 expands upward is performed in the manner described above by the extended animation. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed on the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. You may make it overlap, and you may make it the time when both productions are performed not overlap.

  In addition, when an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed, when the symbol is stopped and the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended hold display frame FL4 is reduced and changed to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is also moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded with the extended animation so that the hold display frame FL4 is directed upward. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such a manner. Further, at the time of symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be once erased, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Also, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state during the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved according to the movement display by the moving animation of the second hold icon h12.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the tutorial display section TT6 as the hold display frame is expanded, and FIG. 154 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), a state is shown in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated is expanded and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variable icon h0 at the center of the hold display frame. It is displayed in the form accommodated in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is disposed below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. . In the tutorial display section TT6, a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this example effect, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 154 (a-2) shows that the range of the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded by pushing the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area upward by an animation in which the tutorial display section TT6 expands upward. ing. In the expanded tutorial display section TT6, the drinker showdown reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative symbols is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern that is variably displayed, for example, the display of a dialogue such as a conversation notice, the display of the notice, or the effect of changing the display of the hold icon. It can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of “SP development by victory” is performed, and the contents of the effect performed when winning by the drinker confrontation reach effect are notified. In the drinking confrontation reach directing, the main character's Tono-sama is confronted with drinking, and if the intoxication is drunk, the main character's Tono-sama will win and it will be announced that it will develop into SP reach. When the drinker confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 is displayed and the hold icon display area is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 154 (a-3) shows a state in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is continuously performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4), when moving to the SP reach, the effect that the frog is drunk and the protagonist wins is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of losing is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4 ′), the main character's lord is drunk, and the hero's lord is defeated by the trap. Is done. Note that the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) may be configured so that the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) is not performed. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) may be configured so that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) is not performed. In the state shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the hold icon and the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and one of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The second hold icon h12 is a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are set to the default display mode. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays a character display of “With notice icon digestion ...”, suggesting that a notice effect is to be performed. In the tutorial display unit TT7, an explanation display may be performed. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this effect example, the stage name display section and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the family crest member 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment replaces the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 with a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device. Display device 804. The first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, liquid crystal display devices are employed as the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but various effects and various games are possible even if they are not liquid crystal display devices. It is sufficient that the information can be displayed. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, Other display devices including a projector may be employed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments includes a production movable body 806, a production movable body 808, and a production movable body 810. The effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  Here, the positional relationship among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. . Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther away from the “front” than the player. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. The side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right) , Right end, etc.).

  66. The first display device 800 is disposed approximately at the center in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 66, the second display device 802 is disposed on the left side of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 is disposed. Is arranged on the right side of the first display device 800. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are arranged in front of the first display device 800. The position of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 in the front-rear direction is the same position.

  The effect movable body 806 is disposed on the upper left side of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is disposed on the upper right side of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged adjacent to each other. The position of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the front-rear direction is the same, and is the front side of the first display device 800.

  The effect movable body 810 is disposed below the first display device 800. The position of the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

  These display device and effect movable body are the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 806, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 from the rear side. Arranged in order. It should be noted that the production movable body 806, the production movable body 808, and the production movable body 810 may have the same position in the front-rear direction, and the production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 are arranged in front of the production movable body 810. It may be. Further, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be arranged in front of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

  The first display device 800 has a horizontally long display area. The first display device 800 includes “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → It is possible to execute a variation display of the decorative symbols for switching the display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the order of. During the stop display of the decorative symbols, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order in a horizontal row from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed on the first display device 800.

  A game information display area a is provided below the display area of the first display device 800. The lower end side of the game information display area a coincides with the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, the left end side of the game information display area a coincides with the left end side of the display area, and the game information display area The right end of a coincides with the right end side of the display area. In the center of the game information display area a, a variable icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area b. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area b when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon, it is possible to notify (predict the variation) of the special figure variation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree). In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the variation icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area c is provided in the game information display area a and to the left of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area c, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of the holding icons of the special figure 1, and the special figure related to the holding by the display mode of each holding icon. It is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) whether or not one variable game is successful with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree).

  The special figure 1 hold icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly displayed in the second to fourth areas. The hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the hold of can be displayed respectively.

  An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth areas. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the hold icons g1, g2, g3 in the first area, the second area, and the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Are displayed. The hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes. Note that a special figure 1 hold icon indicating a hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default display mode. In this case, the reliability of the default display mode is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icon is displayed in a smaller display size than the variation icon. This may facilitate the identification of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area d is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, the number of hold icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of the hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure related to the hold by the display mode of each hold icon. The success or failure of the two-variable game can be notified (pre-reading advance notice) with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation).

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon in the special figure 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. When the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a horizontally long rectangular display area e is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. It is done. In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, description of effects, description of characters, etc. as a character image. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), during the decorative symbol stop display, no character image is displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display and the notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, the tutorial display or the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e during the stop display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 1 or more, or when the gaming state is the electric support state, the display area e may not be provided, or within the display area of the first display device 800 The display area e may be provided at a position that does not overlap the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), a castle town stage is set as an effect stage. The first display device 800 displays a castle town background image (hereinafter referred to as “castle town background”) corresponding to the castle town stage. The background image is displayed on the backmost surface of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and gaming state.

  The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 is the same as that of the first display device 800. It is smaller than the display area. On the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802, a mini decorative design having a display size smaller than the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed. In FIG. 155 and subsequent figures, the mini decorative pattern is illustrated more simply than the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800. In addition, the display mode of the mini decorative pattern may be different from the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800. The second display device 802 can display three mini decorative symbols, left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, arranged in this order from left to right. During the execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the left middle right are “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → The variable display of the mini decoration symbols that are switched in the order of “decoration 1” →... Is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display device 802 has a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying of the hit, similar to the first display device 800. Stop is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the center of the display area of the second display device 802. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), a character string image reception count display 850 of “0 more times” is displayed, and the number of receptions of the operation of the chance button 136 is zero. A button image 852 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the reception count display 850. The button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), all four areas of the button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero. Specific contents of the effect using the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

  A horizontally-long rectangular frame image is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, and information about the current effect stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the effect stage is the castle town stage, a character string image of “castle town” is displayed in the frame image.

  The second display device 802 displays a background image of the castle town background. The background image is displayed on the rearmost surface of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and gaming state.

  A full color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect or notification.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the third display device 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area having the same size as the second display device 802. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left part of the display area of the third surface device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of holds in FIG. 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of holds in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, “3” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third display device 804. And the number “0” is displayed.

  In the upper right part of the display area of the third display device 804, the fourth symbol is displayed. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The square 4th symbol displayed on the left is the 4th symbol for the special figure 1, and the circular 4th symbol displayed on the right is the 4th symbol for the special figure 2. During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the 4th symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in white, and during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the 4th symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in black. Similarly, the 4th symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in white while the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, and the 4th symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in black when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed. . In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), both the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variable games are not being executed, so that both the fourth figure for special figure 1 and the fourth figure for special figure 2 are Displayed in black. In addition, when the special figure 1 of the big hit symbol form is stopped and displayed, the fourth figure for the special figure 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 of the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

  In the lower part of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of a lord riding on a cylindrical stage is displayed. A predetermined effect or notification can be executed using the character image of Tonosama.

  The third display device 804 displays a castle town background. The background image is displayed on the rearmost surface of the display area of the third display device 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, game state, and effect mode.

  A full color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect or notification.

  The second display device 802 may display a decorative symbol, a variation icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a number-of-holds display, or a fourth symbol, or the third display device 804 may display a decorative symbol or a variation icon. Or a hold icon, a tutorial display, a reception count display, a button image, a mini decoration pattern, and information on the current stage may be displayed. The first display device 800 may display a mini-decorative symbol, a reception count display, a button image, information on the current stage, a fourth symbol, and a number-of-holds display with numbers.

  Display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. In addition, you may provide the control part (for example, liquid crystal control part) which performs display control of the 1st display apparatus 800, the 2nd display apparatus 802, and the 3rd display apparatus 804 separately. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are each located at the initial position. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and in the plane parallel to the display area. It is possible to move from left to right. Driving control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions that are bilaterally symmetric with respect to a virtual straight line that passes through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and extends in the vertical direction. Further, the second display device 802 and the second display device 802 are arranged at positions where a virtual straight line passing through the display region center of the first display device 800 and extending in the horizontal direction passes through the display region centers of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end portion of the second display device 802 located at the initial position overlaps with a part of the left end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 as viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end portion of the third display device 804 located at the initial position overlaps with a part of the right end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial positions. The effect movable body 806 is disposed relatively on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is disposed relatively on the right side. The vertical positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 at the initial position are the same. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have horizontally-long rectangular plates of the same size, and are arranged so that the plate surfaces are orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The character “Yatsushiro” is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 806, and the character “General” is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 808.

  The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions. It is movable. In addition, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 may operate integrally during the operation, or may operate individually. In addition, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have full-color LEDs, and can execute predetermined effects and notifications by causing the full-color LEDs to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape and is decorated with a family crest on the surface. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The effect movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and is movable in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. In addition, the effect movable body 810 has a full color LED, and can execute a predetermined effect or notification by causing the full color LED to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 emits light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  The drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Moreover, in each figure after FIG. 155 (a), the structure required for description is extracted and shown in the area | region on the paper surface divided | segmented with the dashed-dotted line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 155 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left part of the figure, and the general prize is shown in the lower right part of the figure. A mouth 226 is schematically illustrated.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each diagram of FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “3” and “0”. The variation icon f1 displayed in the variation icon display area b is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the variation display of the next decoration symbol.

  During the game, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 emits light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  FIG. 155 (b), which continues from FIG. 155 (a), is accompanied by the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (first special figure display device 212) not shown in FIG. This shows a state in which the decorative display variation display and the mini-decoration variation display are started. In each figure, the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decoration symbol variation display are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the change icon deletion animation is executed, and the change icon f1 is deleted. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon is moved to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 155 (b), the animation of decreasing the hold icon is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 is completed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image “Panda is a master of the panda” is displayed in the display area e, and the panda character is described.

  FIG. 155 (c) continuing from FIG. 155 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155 (d) continuing from FIG. 155 (c) shows a state where the meter of the button image 852 is increased by one in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost region of the four divided regions of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by cross hatching with diagonal lines). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, each time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green. Increases by 1.

  The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 155 (e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (d). In this example, the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b) is being executed, and two game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 155 (d).

  FIG. 155 (f) shows a state after two game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. In response to the winning of two game balls at the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by two. At this point, the meter value is 3.

  After the time shown in FIG. 155 (f), one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155 (g) shows a state continued from FIG. 155 (f). In response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by 1, and the meter becomes full. In this example, when a total of four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (hereinafter may be referred to as “the number of times accepted”) increases by one. The reception number display 850 updates the display content to a character string image of “one more time”, and informs that the number of receptions of the chance button 136 has increased from zero to one. In the button image 852, after the meter is full, all four areas change from green to white, and the meter value is reset to zero. The meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the reception count display 850 is updated, or before the display content is updated, It may be after the display content is updated. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases from zero to one. Note that when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the chance button 136 may emit red light. The red emission start of the chance button 136 may be simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, may be after the start of the operation effective period, or immediately before the start of the operation effective period. May be.

  The five vertical dots shown in FIG. 155 (h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (g). In this example, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b), eight more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 155 (g).

  FIG. 155 (i) shows a state after eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. In response to the winning of eight game balls in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases by two. The reception count display 850 updates the display content to a character string image of “3 more times”, and informs that the reception count of the chance button 136 has increased to three. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white, and the meter is reset to zero.

  FIG. 155 (j) following FIG. 155 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b) is completed. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, no character image is displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing at which the character image in the display area e is erased may be the same as the start of the stop display of the decorative design, may be immediately before the start of the stop display of the decorative design, or the stop display of the decorative design may be in progress. May be.

  In FIG. 155 (k) following FIG. 155 (j), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decoration symbol and the variation display of the mini decoration symbol are started. Shows the state. In each figure, the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decoration symbol variation display are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a change icon deletion animation is executed and the change icon f2 is deleted. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and changes. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 155 (k), the decrease animation of the hold icon is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 and the hold icon g3 is completed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image “Tosama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the display area e, and the character of Tosama is explained. Thus, the display contents of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

  The second display device 802 displays a reception count display 850 with a character string image of “3 more times”. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the last special figure variable game can be carried over to the next special figure variable game transition.

  FIG. 155 (l) following FIG. 155 (k) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. FIG. 155 (m) following FIG. 155 (l) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the effect is not executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted decreases to two. Thereby, the display content of the reception count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “2 more times”.

  The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 155 (n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (m). In this example, the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during execution of the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (m) and started in FIG. 155 (k).

  FIG. 155 (o) shows a state after the chance button 136 has been operated twice by the player. In this example, the effect is not executed in response to any of the two operations of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated twice, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted is reduced to zero. Thereby, the display content of the reception number display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “0 more times”. In this example, when the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted decreases from 1 to 0, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. For example, in the case where the result of determination as to whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is out of date, the chance button 136 may be operated or the presentation may not be executed in response to the operation.

  FIG. 155 (p) shows another pattern of the effect example continued from FIG. 155 (k). In this pattern, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In FIG. 155 (p), the chance button 136 is operated by the player. The variation icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the fluctuation icon or the hold icon is displayed in a predetermined color, the big hit reliability is set to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability is white, the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is blue, the display mode with the next highest jackpot reliability is green, and the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is the highest. It is red. For this reason, the white circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (k) is displayed when the green circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (p) is displayed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form in the symbol variation display than the case. Note that the display mode of the variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (p) may be changed from white to green during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the display mode from white to green at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be changed, the display mode may be changed from white to green in the period displayed as the hold icon f2 before the change icon, or the hold icon f2 is displayed in the green display mode from the beginning. It may be.

  FIG. 155 (q) following FIG. 155 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. In this example, a notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As a notice effect of the change, a notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the light emitting colors of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 are displayed. Changes from white to red (indicated by vertical and horizontal cross-hatching in the figure), and a sound effect of “Kean” is output from the speaker 120. The notice image is displayed so as to overlap the entire reception count display 850. Note that the reception count display 850 may be erased during the display of the notice image. In addition, either the timing at which the display of the notice image starts and the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red may be first or simultaneously. Good. The production movable bodies 806 and 608 may perform a moving operation as a notice production. For example, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward simultaneously with the emission color changing to red, may move downward after the emission color changes to red, or the emission color is red. You may move down before changing to.

  Moreover, either the timing when the notice image starts to be displayed and the timing when the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120 may be first or may be simultaneous. In addition, either the timing at which the emission color of the production movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120 may be first, or at the same time. There may be.

  In this example, the preview image including the character image of “celebration” is a preview image for determining the big hit, and is displayed only when the determination result regarding the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. When the determination result regarding the symbol variation display being executed is out of place, as shown in FIGS. 155 (m) and (o), even if the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136, For example, a notice image including a character string image of “chance” may be displayed as the notice of the change. The notice image including the character string image of “chance” can be displayed even when the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol variation display is being executed is a big hit. The preview image including the “chance” character string image has a lower jackpot reliability than the preview image including the “celebration” character image, and the preview image including the “celebration” character image is displayed during the symbol variation display. In the case of the display, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case where the preview image including the character string image of “chance” is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits red light is set to be relatively high. The emission color of the effect movable body at the time of the notice effect is set such that the big hit reliability is high in the order of white, blue, green, and red. During the execution of the symbol variation display, when the effect movable body emits red light and the announcement effect is executed, the symbol variation does not occur when the effect movable body emits blue light and the announcement effect is executed. In the display, there is a high probability that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed.

  In this embodiment, the change notice effect is executed in response to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the change notice effect may be executed in response to the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, the change notice effect may be executed in response to the third operation, or the change notice effect may be executed every time the chance button 136 is operated. Note that. The effect executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a prefetch notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, every time four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases by one. It should be noted that every time one game ball is won at the general prize opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one, or every time two or three game balls are won at the general prize slot 226. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one, or the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased by one every time a predetermined number of five or more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. May be. The upper limit of the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted may be three times, less than three times, or four times or more.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a chance button 136 as an operation means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 in the effect (first button effect) related to the chance button 136 based on the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 can be increased and decreased, and the number of times of reception when the game ball enters the general winning opening 226 May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player can grasp the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226 by increasing the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. There is a case.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c) are diagrams showing the present example in time series. FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the decorative display variation display is executed, and in the second display device 802, the mini decoration display variable display is executed. On the third display device 804, a white 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. On the upper left of the screen, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “2” and “0”. The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  In FIG. 156 (a), a button image 854 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 indicating the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the button image 854. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in a predetermined color (light ink color in the drawing). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed overlapping the decorative symbol variation display (medium symbol variation display). The button image 854 has a larger display size than the button image 852.

  In addition, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received in response to the 12 game balls having won the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 156 (a), the second display device In 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed as a character string image of “3 more times”. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the value of the meter is zero.

  In the present embodiment, an effect relating to the chance button 136 based on the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect A”), and an effect relating to the chance button 136 based on the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”). B ") is executed in duplicate. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds. The remaining time is informed. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is started, or the button image 854 is prior to the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. And a gauge image 856 may be displayed. In the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, a notice effect is executed in accordance with the operation. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. If the chance button 136 has not been operated once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are deleted at the end of the operation valid period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not executed. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. Also good.

  FIG. 156 (b) following FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 once. FIG. 156 (c) continued from FIG. 156 (b) shows a state in which an effect has been executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect B. The first notice effect and the second notice effect are started at the same time. The first notice effect is the same as the notice effect of the change shown in FIG. 155 (q), and the first notice effect is within the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , The notice image including the character image of “Holiday” is displayed, the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red, and the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120. The second notice effect is the notice effect of the change, and as the second notice effect, a cut-in image 858 that is a horizontally long parallelogram and includes a character image of the lord is displayed on the first display device 800. The cut-in image 858 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol variation display and variation icon display area b. In this example, if the first notice effect and the second notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second notice effect is output. May be.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second notice effect can be executed. Button effect A and button effect B are separate and independent effects, and even when the character image reception count display 850 of “0 more” is displayed, chance button 136 is operated in button effect B. Then, the second notice effect can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and (b), the button effect A and the button effect B can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel. It is.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the second notice effect may be started after the first notice effect is started. In this case, when the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit green light as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light red as the first notice effect and then as the second notice effect. The production movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the first notice effect may be started after the second notice effect is started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit red light as the first notice effect. In this way, the emission color of the effect movable body may be overwritten with a color corresponding to the notice effect that was started later.

  In this example, the button effect B is an effect requesting a single operation of the chance button 136, but the button effect B may be an effect requesting a repeated operation of the chance button 136. For example, when the button effect B is an effect requesting ten consecutive hit operations of the chance button 136, the button effect B is operated seven times by the button effect B even after the number of times of accepting the button effect A becomes zero. Is accepted and the chance button 136 is operated 10 times, the operation effective period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

  The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap. The red light may be emitted only during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, or the red light may be emitted only during the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B.

  In the button effect A, a period other than the decorative symbol stop display and the wipe effect display described later with reference to FIG. 158 may be set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A may be reset to zero.

  Next, a modified example of the effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 156 (d) and (e) are diagrams showing an example of the production of this modification in time series. FIG. 156 (d) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the first display device 800, the decorative display variation display is executed, and in the second display device 802, the mini decoration display variable display is executed. On the third display device 804, a white 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. On the upper left of the screen, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “2” and “0”. The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display mode. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  The hold icon g <b> 2 is displayed in a pattern display mode that imitates the chance button 136. Further, the hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The hold icon g2 has a smaller display size than the button image 850. In addition, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted in response to 12 game balls having won the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 156 (d), the second display device In 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed as a character string image of “3 more times”. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the value of the meter is zero.

  In this example, the button effect A based on the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect related to the chance button 136 based on the hold icon g2 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect C”) are executed in an overlapping manner. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is a period in which the hold icon g2 is displayed. This is continued until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started simultaneously with the start of the display of the holding icon g2 of the pattern imitating the chance button 136. It should be noted that the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may be started after the display of the hold icon g2 starts, or the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C before the display of the hold icon g2 starts. May be started.

  FIG. 156 (e) following FIG. 156 (d) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first notice effect is the same as the notice effect of the change shown in FIG. 155 (q), and the first notice effect is within the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A notice image including a character image of “Holiday” is displayed, and the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third notice effect is a look-ahead notice effect, and the third notice effect in this example is a look-ahead notice for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. As a third notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes from a pattern imitating the chance button 136 to a character pattern of Tono. In the hold icon, the big hit reliability of the display mode of the Tono-sama character pattern is set higher than that of the red circular display mode. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed, a hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, if the first notice effect and the third notice effect overlap, a sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but a sound effect corresponding to the third notice effect is output. May be.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, the third notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect C are separately independent effects, and even when the character image reception count display 850 of “0 more characters” is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C. Then, the third notice effect can be executed. As shown in FIG. 156 (d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first notice effect are executed as the notice effect of the change, and the button effect C and the third notice effect are executed as the pre-read notice effect. Note that the button effect B shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 156 (d) may be executed in parallel. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state in which are executed in parallel, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in parallel.

  In the first and second embodiments, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased. Start port 230), special figure 2 start port 232 (second special figure start port), even when a game ball enters the general view start port 228, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased. Good.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226, and the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted when the game ball passes through the sensor. The number of times may be increased.

  It should be noted that the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased only in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, a big hit game not being executed).

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to each drawing of FIG. Each figure in FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “3” and “0”. The variation icon f1 displayed in the variation icon display area b is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the variation display of the next decoration symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a horizontally-long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the first display device 800. A still image, a moving image, or the like different from the still image or the moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed in the wipe display screen wpa, and a predetermined effect is executed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. The wipe display screen wpa is provided on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is executed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), on the wipe display screen wpa, a character image of a disappointed expression is displayed. The character image is a default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end) exceed the decorative symbol (the right symbol) being stopped. Wrapped and displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (b) following FIG. 157 (a), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. Shows the state.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the change icon deletion animation is executed, and the change icon f1 is deleted. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon is moved to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 157 (b), the decrease animation of the hold icon is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 is completed.

  During the variation display of the decoration symbol, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end portion) are not overlapped with the variation display of the right symbol of the decoration symbol. In other words, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) are displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the right design of the decorative design. Note that the lower end of the variation display of the right design of the decorative design may coincide with the upper end side of the wipe display screen wpa.

  FIG. 157 (c) continuing from FIG. 157 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 157 (d) continued from FIG. 157 (c) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed as the wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the game ball winning in the general winning opening 226. Even if a game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, when the special figure is on hold, when the decorative symbol is stopped (when the symbol variation is stopped), or when the big hit game is being executed, When the remaining variation time of the special figure variation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini game effect display may not be performed. Further, the mini game effect display may be executed as many times as the number of game balls won in the general winning opening 226. For example, a mini-game effect display is started in response to one game ball winning in the general prize opening 226 while the mini-game effect display is not being executed. When the ball wins, the start of the mini game effect display may be put on hold. In addition, the mini game effect display is started only when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not executed, and the game ball is won in the general pay hole 226 while the mini game effect display is being executed. In this case, the start of the mini game effect display may not be suspended.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), a mini-game effect display is performed in which Tono-sama and Tsuji are confronting each other for drinking. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which Tonosama and Tsuji are confronting each other for drinking is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. The mini game effect display may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 157 (e) following FIG. 157 (d) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (f) following FIG. 157 (e) shows a state where the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, Tono-sama wins the contest against drinking alcohol, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of “win” and a moving image of the scene to which Ton-sama won. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, Tono-sama wins the confrontation compared to drinking alcohol.

  FIG. 157 (g) subsequent to FIG. 157 (f) shows a state in which the notice effect that is executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. A part of the hold icon change animation in this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. The arrows in FIGS. 157 (g) and (h) indicate the locus of movement of the effect image 860.

  FIG. 157 (h) following FIG. 157 (g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. Note that the effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold icon change animation (for example, the hold icon g2).

  FIG. 157 (i) following FIG. 157 (h) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is finished. When the hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased, and the entire hold icon g3 becomes visible again. Due to the hold icon change animation, the hold icon g3 is displayed with the display mode changed from white to green.

  FIG. 157 (j) following FIG. 157 (i) shows a state after the mini game effect display is completed. In this example, the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends. On the wipe display screen wpa, the same default display as in FIG. 157 (b) is executed.

  FIG. 157 (k) shows an example of the effect of the pattern that failed in the mini game. When the mini game fails, Tono-sama is defeated in the confrontation of drinking, and on the wipe display screen wpa, a character string image of “losing” and a moving image of the scene in which Tosama is defeated are displayed. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  FIG. 157 (l) shows an example in which the mini game effect display is displayed overlapping another effect display. In the lower right part of the display area of the first display device 800, a conversation notice image 862 including a Chibi princess character image and a balloon image including a character string image is displayed. A part of the conversation preview image 862 is overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, in the conversation preview image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the entire character string image, and the portions other than the upper end portion and the right end portion of the balloon image are visually overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. It is impossible. In other words, in this example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed on the conversation notice image 862 without overlapping. Further, in this example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as the notice image of the change. Note that the conversation preview image 862 may be displayed as a prefetch preview image.

  FIGS. 157 (m) to (r) show another example of mini-game effect display in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of mini game effect displays. FIG. 157 (m) continuing from FIG. 157 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 157 (n) subsequent to FIG. 157 (m) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (n), a mini-game effect display is performed in which Tono-sama challenges to throw a thousand boxes. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which Tono-sama is about to throw a thousand boxes is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. The mini game effect display may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 157 (o) following FIG. 157 (n) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (p) following FIG. 157 (o) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, Tono-sama succeeded in throwing a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene in which Tosama succeeded in throwing a thousand boxes. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, Tono-sama wins a Thousand Box throw.

  FIG. 157 (q) subsequent to FIG. 157 (p) shows a state in which the notice effect that is executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. The arrow in FIG. 157 (q) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The hold icon change animation in this example is the same as the hold icon change animation shown in FIGS. 157 (g) to (i). In this example, as in FIG. 157 (j), the mini-game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

  FIG. 157 (r) shows an effect example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. If the mini game fails, Tosama fails to throw a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene where Tosama failed to throw a thousand boxes. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini-game effect display. The jackpot reliability may be set according to the type of mini game effect display. For example, the mini-game effect display (hereinafter referred to as “mini-game effect display A”) of the drinking and drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 157 (d) to (l) is shown in FIGS. 157 (m) to (r). The jackpot reliability may be set higher than the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display B”) for challenging the thousand-throw box throw. In this case, when the mini game effect display A is executed, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol change table to be notified than when the mini game effect display B is executed. Conversely, the mini-game effect display B may be set higher in the jackpot reliability than the mini-game effect display A. In this case, when the mini game effect display B is executed, it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern in the symbol variation table to be notified than when the mini game effect display A is executed. The case where the mini game effect display A is executed may be easier to succeed in the mini game than the case where the mini game effect display B is executed, or the case where the mini game effect display B is executed. However, it may be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display A is executed. Note that only one type of pending icon change animation may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. In the case where a plurality of types of hold icon change animations are provided, the hold icon change animation to be executed for each mini game effect display may be determined in advance, or the hold icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a general winning opening 226 as a first area, and display means of a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 226, a mini game effect display may be executed, and the mini game effect display is not overlapped with the decorative pattern that is changing. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the winning ball based on the winning at the general winning opening 226 but also the player is given a sense of expectation for the big hit by the effect display based on the winning at the general winning opening 226. May be possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a mini game effect display as a wipe display within the wipe screen wpa which is a part of the display area of the first display device 800. Note that the mini game effect display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation as a wipe display within the wipe screen wpa. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a part of the variation icon change animation for changing the variation icon in the wipe screen wpa as the wipe display. Note that the mini game effect display does not have to be started during the execution of the decorative symbol stop display.

  In this embodiment, a mini-game effect display is executed when a game ball wins the general winning opening 226. However, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, The mini-game effect display may be executed when a game ball enters the figure start port 228.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a through) that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226 so that the mini game effect display is executed when the game ball passes through the sensor. It may be configured.

  Note that the mini game effect display may be executed only in a predetermined game state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a big hit game is not being executed).

  Note that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation that only starts the display of the effect image 860 and erases the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. 157 (g) and (h) is because the change of the hold icon. It may be an animation.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each drawing in FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the present example of production in time series. FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 6”, which suggests a shift during the super reach production, is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). In each drawing of FIG. 158, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the mini decorative symbols displayed on the second display device 802 and the numbers displayed on the third display device 804 in the production examples shown in FIGS. A number display and a fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini decoration symbol is displayed at the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number of reserved numbers and the fourth symbol are displayed at the upper right part of the display area. Further, during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, since the decorative symbol is being changed, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed overlapping “decoration 6” of the right symbol.

  At the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the upper right portion of the display area of the first display device 800, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”.

  FIG. 158 (b) following FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started. The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased so as to be wiped from the edge of the display area of the display device. In this example, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 starts to appear from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts to appear from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 have started to appear at the same time, and the wipe effect display is started when the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 start to appear. The display mode of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is a pattern of strawberry. Note that the wipe effect display may or may not be executed on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  The wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed so as to overlap with the mini-decorated symbols, the number-of-holds display, and the display other than the fourth symbol. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed so as to overlap with a display other than the mini decoration symbol, and the wipe display wpb2 is overlapped with a display of the number of on-hold numbers and a display other than the fourth symbol. Is displayed. In other words, the mini decoration symbol, the number of held numbers and the fourth symbol are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  Further, the fluctuation icon f1 is deleted simultaneously with the start of the wipe effect display. Note that the change icon f1 may be deleted prior to the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed after the start of the wipe effect.

  FIG. 158 (c) following FIG. 158 (b) shows a state where the wipe effect display is being executed. The change icon f1 may be deleted at the time shown in FIG.

  FIG. 158 (d) following FIG. 158 (c) shows a state where the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed in a display mode in which the eyelids are closed by the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this example, the mini-decoration symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display (design variation display) are completed simultaneously with the completion of the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, a mini-decorative symbol of a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. The 4th symbol for use is displayed. Note that the symbol variation display may end after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. Note that the wipe display wpb1, wpb2 is withdrawn after the symbol variation display is finished, and the stop display of the decorative symbol of the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6” becomes visible.

  FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 shrinks toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 is erased from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 shrinks toward the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb2 is erased from the display area. The timing of completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display wpb1 and the timing of completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 158 (e), the animation of decreasing the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (e), since the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are erased, the wipe display area wpb, the change icon f2, the hold icon g2, and the castle town background can be visually recognized. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to refresh the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next change when the super reach effect shifts.

  FIGS. 158 (f) and (g) show another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158 (c) except that the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 158 (f), the lower pan 128 is full of game balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. At the bottom of the center of the display area of the first display device 800, there is displayed a lower pan full error display 864 in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower pan full tank error display 852 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols and the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  FIG. 158 (g) following FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158 (d) except that the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. Thus, the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. In other words, the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment are not overlapped with the lower pan full tank error display 864.

  FIG. 158 (h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 158 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 158 (g) except that the hold icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 158 (h) shows a state where the effect image 860 of the pending icon change animation is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrow in FIG. 158 (h) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The moving effect image 860 is not overlapped with the lower pan full error display 864. In other words, the lower pan full error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the moving effect image 860.

  Thus, the notice effect display may be displayed overlapping the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of losing. In this example, the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation as a pre-reading notice effect is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a wipe effect display before executing the next change in the case of a shift in the super reach effect, and renews the player's mood, while displaying a pre-reading notice on the wipe effect display. In some cases, it can be expected after the next symbol variation display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth examples of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 again.

(A1)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, a general figure start opening 228),
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The number of times of receiving the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (for example, the effect relating to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 155, button effect A) (hereinafter referred to as “the number of times of reception”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, the player may be able to grasp the number of game balls entering the first area by increasing the number of times the operation means is accepted and the number of times the operation means is operated.

(A2)
The game stand according to A1 above,
Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804),
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plural types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display” (for example, a notice display including a character image of “celebration” shown in FIG. 155 (d))). ,
In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A3)
The game stand according to A2 above,
One of the plural types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display” (eg, cut-in image 858 shown in FIG. 156 (c), hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (e)). And)
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed.
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A4)
The game stand according to A3 above,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A5)
The game table according to A3 or A4 above,
In the first button effect, the display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display” (for example, a button image 852)),
The display means is an image simulating the operation means in the second button effect (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display” (for example, the button image 854, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (d))). Can be displayed,
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A5 above,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A7)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A6 above,
When a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A8)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A7 above,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A9)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A8 above,
A second region (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A10)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is satisfied.

  There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if a game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied.

  In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more, the first display may be displayed.

  In the first button effect during the execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more.

  In the first button effect during the non-execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may not be displayed even when the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more.

  When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

  Even when the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may not be displayed.

  Even when the number of times of reception is 0 when operating the operation means, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  The second display may be displayed only when the number of receptions is 0 when operating the operation means.

  The second display may not be displayed even when the number of times of reception is 0 when operating the operating means when operating the operating means.

  When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.

  The number of receptions may be reduced only when the operating means is operated.

  Even if the operation means is operated, the number of times of reception may not be reduced.

  When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.

  Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may not increase.

  A game ball that has passed through the second area may necessarily enter the first area.

  Only game balls that have passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may not enter the first area.

  When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is satisfied.

  There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if a game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied.

  In order to increase the base (number of winning balls / number of game balls fired) in the low probability state of special charts, it is possible to increase the winning rate to the general winning opening. Since there is no means for the player to recognize that the winning rate to 226 has become high, the number of winning balls based on winning at the general winning port 226 increases, so the total number of winning balls is not won. There was a risk of distrust to the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and increases the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is performed and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated by increasing the number of times the chance button 136 is operated based on winning in the general winning opening 226. In some cases, the player can be made aware of the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226.

  Each time one game ball is won in the first area, the number of receptions may be increased by one.

  In a so-called right-handed machine that has a normal start opening and an attacker on the right side of the game area, when right-handed (during electric support or big hit game), the game ball wins the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area. In this case, the number of receptions may not be increased.

  In case of right-handed, the number of receptions may or may not increase even if the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area is won. Good.

  When a game ball enters the first area, an effect that the operation means is operated at least once may be started. For example, in a configuration in which an operation means is always accompanied by operation of a certain effect, the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) may be indicated.

  The display of the first display (for example, the first notice effect) may be configured such that a plurality of operations of the operation means are required even if the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.

  The number of receptions may be configured to increase at other occasions (the number of wins for a big hit or the number of executions of a predetermined reach).

  Even when the first display is in progress, the number of receptions decreases when the operating means is operated.

  When a game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of receptions may or may not increase.

(B1)
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, a general figure start opening 228),
Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804);
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display” (for example, mini-game effect display)),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the game stand having the above structure, not only a winning ball based on winning in the first area but also a first display based on winning in the first area gives the player a sense of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to.

(B2)
The game stand according to B1 above,
One of the plural types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display” (for example, conversation notice image 862)),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B3)
The game stand according to B2 above,
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means (for example, the wipe screen wpa).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B4)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third display” (for example, a hold icon, a change icon)),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
As the display for changing the display mode of the third display, the first display (for example, a wipe effect display as a hold icon change animation or a change icon change animation) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B5)
The game stand according to B4 above,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
Display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol (for example, display of a wipe effect display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol),
A game stand characterized by that.

(B7)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B6 above,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, in the general winning opening 226 during the execution of the wipe effect display). When the game ball wins, the wipe effect display is continuously executed)
A game stand characterized by that.

(B8)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B7,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B9)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B8 above,
A second region (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B10)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be displayed whenever a game ball enters the first area.

  The first display may be displayed only when a game ball enters the first area during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Even if a game ball enters the first area during the non-execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may not be displayed.

  A game ball that has passed through the second area may necessarily enter the first area.

  Only game balls that have passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may not enter the first area.

  The first display may always be displayed when a game ball enters the second area.

  The first display may be displayed only when a game ball enters the second area.

Even if a game ball enters the second area, the first display may not be displayed. To increase the base (number of award balls / number of game balls fired) in a low-probability state Although a means of increasing the winning rate to the mouth is conceivable, there is no means for allowing the player to recognize that the winning rate to the general winning port 226 is high in the conventional game stand. Due to the increase in the number of winning balls based on winning, there was a risk of distrust to the player about the increase in the total number of winning balls even though he did not win a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a mini-game effect display based on winning in the general winning opening 226, thereby notifying the player that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 226, while mini game In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big hit by the effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game in the wipe screen wpa that displays the mini game effect display in preference to the decorative symbol or other effect display (for example, the conversation notice image 862). In some cases, it is possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 with the frequency of the effect display effect display, and not to give distrust to the player.

  On the wipe screen wpa, not only the mini game effect display, but also the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted (for example, the number of times received 850) and a button image (for example, the button image 852) may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160A to 160E. FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e) are diagrams showing the present example of production in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e), the gaming state is a non-electric support state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is within the game information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800, and has a digest icon on the right side of the variable icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digest icon display area i is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. In the digestion icon display area i, a variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure variation game (design variation display) can be displayed as a digestion icon. A horizontally long pedestal image indicating the display position of the digestion icon is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth regions.

  Further, in each drawing after FIG. 159 (a), the configuration necessary for the description is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 159 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, and the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left part of the figure.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game has not been executed since the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 displays “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a default symbol combination, on the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 after the power is turned on. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (a), the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon is not displayed on the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 has no hold icon. The number of holds is indicated by the numbers “0” and “0”. The third display device 804 displays a black 4th symbol for special figure 1 and a black 4th symbol for special figure 2.

  On the second display device 802, a button image 870 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed. The display color of the button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The production movable bodies 806, 808, and 810 are located at the initial positions, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 159 (b), which continues from FIG. 159 (a), shows that the holding of FIG. 1 is increased by 1 in response to the winning of one game ball at the starting opening 230 of FIG. Then, in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started is shown. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a fluctuation icon f1 having a white circular display mode is displayed. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  In FIG. 159 (b), when the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the special figure 1 hold is increased by 1, and the increased special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is played. Has been started. In this case, a command including information that the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 has increased by one is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute an increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon gradually rises from below toward the first region of the special figure 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the symbol variation from the main control unit 300 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Receive commands. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to stop the increase animation of the hold icon, to display the decorative symbol variation display and the animation between the hold / variation icon movement Is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon corresponding to the reserved hold of the special figure 1 becomes a change icon and moves to the change icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command during execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to display the increase animation of the hold icon. Stop halfway through and start moving animations between hold and change icons. When the number of holds in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0, and the number of holds in Special Figure 1 increases by 1, an increase animation of the hold icon, a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold, and hold / variation Instead of displaying a movement animation between icons, a fluctuation icon corresponding to a special figure fluctuation game (symbol fluctuation display) that is started immediately after the increase in holding may be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. Note that after the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold has been moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c (after the increase animation of the hold icon has been completed to the end), the movement animation between the hold and change icons May be executed.

  In FIG. 159 (c) following FIG. 159 (b), four game balls win the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 1 hold is increased by 4 and the increase animation of the hold icon is executed. The state where the icon increase animation is finished is shown. In the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white and circular. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from below toward the first area to the fourth area. On the third display device 804, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “4” and “0”.

  FIG. 159 (d) subsequent to FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (e) following FIG. 159 (d), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative pattern fluctuation display and the mini decorative pattern fluctuation display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a movement animation between fluctuation / digestion icons and a reduction animation of a hold icon with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, the icon displayed as the variation icon becomes the digestion icon and moves to the digestion icon display area i. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons of this example, the variation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game ended in FIG. 159 (e) becomes the digestion icon j1 simultaneously with the start of the movement, and the digestion icon j1 is the digestion icon display area. Gradually move toward the first region of i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The movement animation between the change / digestion icons ends when the movement of the digestion icons is completed. Moreover, the display mode of the digestion icon j1 changes from a white circle to a gray ninja character pattern after the movement is completed. Note that the display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change during the movement of the digestion icon j1, or may change simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the digestion icon j1. In this example, the digest icon in the display mode of the character pattern of the gray ninja may be displayed as a pre-reading notice or a notice icon as a notice display of the change. For example, a notice effect such as an on-hold change animation can be executed by the digestion icon in the display form of the character pattern of the gray ninja. Note that there may be a case where the notice effect such as the hold change animation is not executed even if the digest icon in the display mode of the character pattern of the gray ninja is displayed.

  The decrease animation of the hold icon is an animation including a movement animation between the hold / change icon and a move animation of the hold icon. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed. The movement animation between the hold / change icons ends when the change icons move. Further, the display size of the fluctuation icon f2 is gradually enlarged during the movement to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  The hold icon moving animation is an animation in which each hold icon moves to an area corresponding to the hold order one level higher. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes. 1 moves to the third area of the hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the hold icons g2 to g4 is completed. The hold icon movement animation ends when the hold icon movement is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are started at the same time. Note that the three animations may be started in any order, and two of the three animations may be started simultaneously.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / change icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished at the same time. Note that the animation of the three may end in any order, or two of the three animations may end simultaneously.

  FIG. 159 (f) following FIG. 159 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 2—decoration 9” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (g) following FIG. 159 (f), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative symbol fluctuation display and the mini decorative symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a movement animation of a digestion icon when one or more digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i at the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The digestion icon movement animation is an animation in which the digestion icon moves to the right by one area. In the digest icon movement animation of this example, the digest icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digest icon display area i in FIG. 159 (f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The digestion icon movement animation ends when the digestion icon movement is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the change / digestion icons and a decrease animation of the hold icons are executed. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game ended in FIG. 159 (f) becomes the digestion icon j2 at the start of the movement, and the digestion icon j2 is the first icon in the digestion icon display area i. Move gradually toward one area. During the movement, the display size of the digest icon j2 is gradually reduced so that the digest icon j2 has the same display size as the hold icon at the same time as the movement to the first area of the digest icon display area i is completed. The display size of the digest icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular hold icons (for example, the hold icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 159 (g)), and the display color of the digest icon j2 is gray (the horizontal line in the figure). (Shown in a striped pattern). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon in the default display mode is not used as a notice icon.

  In this way, the digest icon in the default display mode has the same display size and shape as the fluctuation icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the digest icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game.

  In this example, the digestion icon j1 is moved to the second area as if the digestion icon j1 is pushed out of the first area of the digestion icon display area i by the digestion icon movement animation and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons. To do.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 is completed. In the hold icon moving animation, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon display is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon is started simultaneously with the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may be started in any order, and two or three of the four animations may be started simultaneously.

  Also, in this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon ends at the same time as the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may end in any order, and two or three of the four animations may end.

  FIG. 159 (h) continued from FIG. 159 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 9 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  Five points arranged vertically in FIG. 159 (i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 159 (g), two special figure 1 variable games are executed. It is assumed that there is no game ball winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the two special figure 1 variable games. In addition, since the special figure 1 floating game is started twice, the digestion icon movement animation, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are 2 respectively. Executed once.

  The digestion icon j1 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). It moves to the 3rd area | region of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then digestion icon display by the digestion icon movement animation performed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next Move to the fourth area of area i.

  The digestion icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). It moves to the 2nd area | region of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then digestion icon display by the digestion icon movement animation performed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next Move to the third area of area i.

  The variation icon f3 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) was executed with the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The digestion icon j3 is moved to the first region of the digestion icon display region i by the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, and then the digestion icon executed when the second special figure 1 variable game is started. The movement animation moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i.

  The hold icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The change animation f4 (not shown) is moved to the fluctuation icon display area b by the movement animation between the held / fluctuation icons executed, and then executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game started next. The movement / digestion icon moves to the digestion icon display area i in the digestion icon display area i as a digestion icon j4.

  The hold icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). It moves to the 1st area | region of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c by the movement animation of the hold icon performed, and then between the hold and change icons executed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next As a result of the moving animation, the icon changes to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  FIG. 159 (j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variable game is completed from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  Five points arranged vertically in FIG. 159 (k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (j). In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the non-execution of the special figure variable game shown in FIG. In response to the winning, the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases by one, an increase animation of the hold icon is started, and a hold icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased hold is the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. It is displayed in a mode that gradually rises from below toward. In this example, during the execution of the increase icon of the hold icon, the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Therefore, the increase animation of the hold icon is stopped and the movement between the hold icon and the change icon is performed. Animation starts. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, in the second display device 802, the mini decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the third display device 804, the white special symbol 1 is displayed. The 4th symbol for use is displayed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon and a movement animation between the change / digestion icons are executed.

  In this example, a maximum of four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. When the digestion icon movement animation is started in a state where four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, the digestion icon display area i is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the digestion icon movement animation. The digestion icon is moved to the right, and the digestion icon is gradually erased in such a manner that the digestion icon moves toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, the digest icon movement animation is executed, so that the digest icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area c in FIG. 159 (j) moves to the right, and the digest icon j1 The first display device 800 is gradually erased so as to move out of the display area. In addition, when the digest icon movement animation is executed, the digest icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i moves to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, and the digest icon display area The digest icon j3 displayed in the second area of i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the digest icon j1 has been deleted, the digest icons j2 and j3 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed. In this example, the digest icon j1 is erased without the notice effect being executed by the digest icon j1 in the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f5 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 159 (j) becomes the digest icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has been completed.

  Also, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, two game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special balls 1 is increased by 2, and an increase animation of the hold icon is started. The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased according to the winning of the eye is displayed in a mode of gradually rising from below toward the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c, and according to the second winning The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner that gradually rises from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended. The display mode of the hold icons g6 and g7 is a default display mode.

  FIG. 159 (m) following FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (n) following FIG. 159 (m), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. Shows the state. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i. The digest icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the digest icon j2 has been erased, the digest icons j3, j4, and j5 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f6 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 159 (m) becomes the digest icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) becomes the change icon f7 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the variation icon f7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To do. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the hold icon g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 159 (o) following FIG. 159 (n) shows a state in which the display mode of the digest icon j4 is changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digestion icon j4 after the display mode change is displayed as a notice icon.

  FIG. 159 (p) subsequent to FIG. 159 (o) shows a state in which a change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a pre-reading notice effect. In this example, the hold for the pre-reading notice target is the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon g7 (the hold order is the first special figure 1 hold), and the change animation of the hold icon corresponds to the pre-reading notice hold. This is executed to change the display mode of the hold icon (the hold icon g7 in this example). In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken image k (hereinafter referred to as “shuriken k”) toward the hold icon g7 whose display mode is to be changed. The moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 159 (p) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the display of variation of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7.

  FIG. 159 (q) subsequent to FIG. 159 (p) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 159 (r) subsequent to FIG. 159 (q) shows a state where the change animation of the hold icon is finished. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire holding icon g7 is deleted, the entire holding icon g7 whose display mode is changed to a blue circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change animation of the hold icon is ended. In addition, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue prior to the end of the hold icon change animation. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. Note that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue simultaneously with the end of the hold icon change animation, or the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the hold icon change animation ends. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time that the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again, and the effect is made after the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. Thus, when the change animation of the hold icon is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a prefetch notice effect. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the hold icon. Note that the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the pre-reading notice effect when the change animation of the hold icon is executed may be at least one effect movable object among the effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810.

  In this example, the change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon g7 by the digest icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern is executed. In FIGS. 159 (o) to (r), the digest icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display. It should be noted that the change animation of the hold icon only starts the display of the effect image 872 and deletes the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is an animation for changing the hold icon It is good.

  FIG. 160 (a) following FIG. 159 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The decorative design displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame image. When the decorative design is an odd number, the inside of the frame image is displayed in red, and the decorative design is an even number. In some cases, the frame image is displayed in blue. It is assumed that the display pattern of the decorative design includes the display color in the frame image. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbols as odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the prefetching notice with the combination of the odd number of decorative symbols is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the prefetching notice with the combination of the even number of decorative symbols. In other words, the big hit reliability is set higher in the prefetching notice by the combination of the red decorative symbols than in the prefetching notice by the combination of the blue decorative symbols. For this reason, when a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed in a stoppage display in the symbol change display for the pre-reading notice rather than when an even (blue) decorative symbol combination is displayed. Easy to be. The combination of the odd number, even number, and the decorative pattern of the same color is a so-called chance.

  In FIG. 160 (b) following FIG. 160 (a), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons are executed. When only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the hold icon is not executed with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digest icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i, and the first of the digest icon display area i. The digest icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the digest icon j3 has been deleted, the digest icons j4, j5, and j6 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f7 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 160 (a) becomes the digest icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 160 (a) becomes the change icon f8 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the variation icon f8 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons has been completed.

  FIG. 160 (c) continuing from FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the change icon change animation for changing the display mode of the change icon is executed. The change animation mode of the variation icon in this example is the same as the change animation mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 159 (p) to (r). As shown in FIG. 160 (c), the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the variation icon f8, and the moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits the variation icon f8 is displayed. The arrow in FIG. 160 (c) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the display of variation of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k hits the variation icon f8.

  Note that the change animation mode of the variation icon may be different from the change animation mode of the hold icon. For example, in the change animation of the change icon, a moving image of a scene where the digest icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

  FIG. 160 (d) continuing from FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the change icon change animation is being executed. In the change icon change animation, similarly to the hold icon change animation, after the shuriken k hits the change icon f8, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the change icon f8. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 160 (e) continuing from FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the change icon change animation has ended. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire variation icon f8 is deleted, the entire variation icon f8 whose display mode has changed to a red circle can be viewed again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change icon change animation ends. Further, prior to the end of the change icon change animation, the light emitting color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red before the entire variation icon f8 becomes visible again. Note that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red simultaneously with the end of the change icon change animation, or after the change icon change animation ends, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time as the entire variation icon f8 becomes visible again, and the effect is produced after the entire change icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. As described above, when the change icon change animation is executed, the display color of the change icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as the notice effect of the change. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the change icon. It should be noted that when the change icon change animation is executed, the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the notice effect of the change is at least one effect movable object among the effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810. Good.

  In this example, the change icon change animation is executed by changing the display mode of the change icon f8 by the digest icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern. In FIGS. 160 (b) to 160 (e), the digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice of change notice. The change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only the start of displaying the effect image 872 and erasing the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene in which the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is for changing the change icon. It may be an animation. In this example, the digest icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display and then as a notice of the change.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the variation display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f) after the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d). It is. The first display device 800 can display a variation icon f1 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to 159d. The icon displayed as the variation icon f1 is displayed in FIG. 159 (e). ), And can be displayed as the digestion icon j1 in the decorative symbol variation display shown in (f). The digest icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digest icon display area i where the digest icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the variation icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a symbol pattern that is not in the symbol variation display is stopped, in the next symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the previous symbol variation display is displayed as a notice icon. Therefore, there is a case where expectation can be given to the symbol variation display immediately after the loss.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the variation icon f2 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the variation display of the decorative symbol illustrated in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f). The first display device 800 can display both the change icon f2 and the digest icon j1.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the variation icon f4. The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as the first display mode. It is a display mode. The gray ninja character pattern digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

  The gray ninja character pattern digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the change icon f8 (for example, a change icon change animation).

  In addition, one display mode among the plurality of types of display modes of the digestion icon is, for example, a display mode of a Banchou character pattern (a display mode of the hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 160 (E) described later). The digest icon of the gray Bancho character design may be displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon). It is an icon related to a change (for example, a change icon change animation).

  It should be noted that the display mode of the Banchou character design may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the ninja character design. For example, when the notice icon of the display style of the Banchou character design is displayed, the jackpot design is stopped in the symbol variation display of the notice target than when the notice icon of the display style of the ninja character design is displayed It may be easy to be displayed.

  In this example, the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i is changed from the digestion icon displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i to the second area by executing the digestion icon movement animation. Move as if being pushed out of. Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i moves so as to be pushed out of the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. The display of the first display device 800 is such that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is pushed out of the second area by the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i. Erase from area.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area is changed from the third area to the digest icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c by executing the hold icon moving animation. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c moves so as to be pushed from the second area to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c is moved to the variable icon display area b so that the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is pushed out of the first area. .

  As described above, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in an animation mode in which the icon moves to an area opposite to the adjacent area so that the icon is pushed out to the adjacent area icon.

  In the present embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon movement animation, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and the movement animation of the movement animation between the hold / variation icons are executed, they are displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. The timing at which the digested icon is pushed and erased by the digested icon displayed in the third region of the digested icon display area i, the timing at which the change icon becomes the digest icon, and the timing at which the hold icon becomes the change icon Is the same. These three timings may be different, and the order can be arbitrarily set. Note that two of the three timings may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a mode in which the hold icon rises from below, but may be executed in a mode in which the hold icon descends from above.

  The effect of displaying the fluctuation icon as a digest icon or a notice icon after the next symbol fluctuation display is executed only in the non-electric support state. For this reason, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons are executed only in the non-electric support state. Note that the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons may be executed without fail in the electric support state.

  The number of digestion icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In this embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 is changed in FIG. 159 (o). May change. When the display mode of many digest icons changes at a time, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display of the notice target than when only the display mode of one digest icon changes. In this case, there is a case where the player can be entertained with a lively production having a relatively high jackpot reliability. On the other hand, when only the display mode of one digestion icon changes, the jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol change display for the notice target than when the display mode of many digestion icons changes at once. It may be easy to be displayed. In this case, the player may be able to impress the digestion icon displayed as the notice icon by changing the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display in FIGS. 159 (m) to 160 (a), the notice target hold is the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order (the hold 1 of the special figure 1). When the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is the object of the notice, the icon indicating the symbol change display of the notice object is displayed as the hold icon in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the change icon is displayed. There is an opportunity for two changes in the display mode (promotion to a display mode with high jackpot reliability) compared to the case where the region b is displayed as a variation icon. In FIGS. 159 (o) to 160 (a), the digest icon j4 as the notice icon is displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i. In FIGS. 160 (b) to 160 (e), the notice icon j4 is displayed. The digestion icon is displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region i, and the digestion icon j4 can be displayed over two symbol variation displays. Since the change animation of the hold icon and the variation icon is executed only once in one symbol variation display, the digest icon as a notice icon related to the variation animation is displayed over two symbol variation displays. In some cases, it may be possible to predict that the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display when the digestion icon starts to be displayed is the subject of the notice.

  For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the second special figure 1 (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in display mode three times (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is an opportunity for promotion to mode. A digestion icon as a notice icon related to the icon change animation may start to be displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, the digest icon is displayed over the three symbol fluctuation displays, and when the digest icon is displayed, the third symbol fluctuation display including the symbol fluctuation display being executed is the subject of the notice. Sometimes it can be predicted.

  As described above, there may be a case where the target change of the prefetching notice can be predicted based on the display start position of the digest icon as the notice icon. Note that the greater the chance of promotion of the icon display mode, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. The jackpot reliability may be suggested by the number of opportunities for promotion of the display mode of the icon.

  For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the second special figure 1 (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in display mode three times (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is an opportunity for promotion to mode. The digest icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i. Thereby, since the said digestion icon is displayed over the pattern change display of 1 time, it may be able to estimate that the opportunity of the promotion of the display mode of an icon is 1 time.

  Note that the digest icon as the notice icon can be displayed in the first area to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, regardless of which one of the reservations is reserved. It should be noted that the digest icon as the notice icon can be related to the promotion of the icon display mode up to four times when the display is started in the first area of the digest icon display area i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the 4th area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has five opportunities for promotion of the display mode, and one digestion icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can't. The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c does not have to be the object of change animation of the hold icon (target of promotion of the display mode).

  The display on the first display device 800 in the present embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, on the second display device 802 the mini ornamental symbol variation display is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 is displayed. It is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 160 (f), the gaming state is a non-electric support state, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 2. On the third display device 804, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “4” and “2”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold are displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not have a display area dedicated to displaying the hold icon of the special figure 2 in the non-electric support state, and when the hold of the special figure 2 becomes 1 or more in the non-electric support state, The hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 shown in FIG. 2 partially overlaps the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. The hold icon m2 corresponding to the hold 2 shown in FIG. 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 1 and displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Is done. For this reason, some of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. Note that the hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display mode. The display mode of the white square is the default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. The hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  Thus, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. In other words, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed without being overlapped with the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  The hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol variation display executed when the corresponding hold is digested, and the digest icon or the advance notice in the symbol change display next to the symbol change display. It is not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is erased at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, when the special figure 2 hold remaining at the end of the electric support is digested after the electric support ends, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol change display. In the next symbol variation display, it is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon.

  In addition, in the non-electric support state, when the suspension of the special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the game information display area a is deleted, and the digestion icon or the special figure 1 is displayed. Is also deleted, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided in the display area of at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, or the third display device 804. May be. In addition, in the non-electric support state, when the special figure 2 hold becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the digest icon or the notice icon may be deleted.

  In the non-electric support state, by using a device that distributes the winning game balls to the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 for each ball, it is possible to play the game with a maximum number of eight holds. In the forward variation configuration, since the maximum number of the hold icons and the digest icons can be displayed, when the digest icon is mistaken for the hold icon, the number of the hold icons appears to be 16, and the maximum hold number is It may be mistaken for 16 pieces. Thereby, a fresh feeling may be given to a player. In addition, in the electric support state, since the hold icon and the digest icon in FIG. 1 are not displayed, the maximum hold number may appear to be four.

  It is possible to display a maximum of four hold icons and digest icons in FIG. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two parts, and a display is performed in one area by displaying a hold icon and a variation display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure variation game, A fake effect may be executed by displaying a change display of a fake decorative pattern that does not correspond to the digest icon and the special figure change game in the region. The false effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (E). Each of FIGS. 160A to 160E is a diagram showing this production example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 160A to 160E, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, a pre-reading notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. In this example, the pre-reading notice target is the hold in FIG. 1 having the second hold order.

  On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed in the digestion icon display area i. The display mode of the digest icons j1 to j4 is a gray round default display mode. In the variation icon display area b, a variation icon f5 of the display mode of the ninja character design is displayed. The fluctuation icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon of the display form of the ninja character pattern may be displayed not only in the digest icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. When the icon of the display form of the ninja character design is displayed in the variation icon display area b or the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In this example, the change icon f5 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display for the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order.

  In FIG. 160 (B) following FIG. 160 (A), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. The digest icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i and moves to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i. The digest icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the digest icon j1 has been deleted, the digest icons j2, j3, and j4 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f5 displayed in the change icon display area b becomes the digest icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended. The digest icon j5 is displayed with the same display size as the variation icon f5. Thus, the display size of the icon of the ninja character pattern display mode is the same when displayed as a variation icon and when displayed as a digestion icon. In addition, the digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray simultaneously with the start of the movement of the digestion icon j5 to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, or may be changed to gray during the movement to the first area. Alternatively, it may be changed to gray simultaneously with the completion of movement to the first region, or may be changed to gray after completion of movement to the first region.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the variation icon f6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the hold icon g6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 160C continuing from FIG. 160B shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 160C, the shuriken k thrown by the digestion icon j5 hits the hold icon g6. The icon displayed as the variation icon in FIG. 160 (A) may be used as a notice effect after becoming the digest icon.

  FIG. 160D, which continues from FIG. 160C, shows a state where the change animation of the hold icon is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The display mode of the icon corresponding to the symbol change display to be notified (in this example, the hold icon g6) may be changed when it is displayed as a hold icon.

  FIG. 160 (E) following FIG. 160 (D) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is finished. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire holding icon g6 is deleted, the entire holding icon g6 whose display mode is changed to a red circle becomes visible again. Prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to red. Thus, when the change animation of the hold icon is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a prefetch notice effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the change icon as a notice icon for a notice other than the change. Note that the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon with a hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order as a notice target. In addition, the icon of the display form of the ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice of change notice in the change icon display area b, and may be displayed as a pre-read notice display in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. is there.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (e). Each of FIGS. 160A to 160E is a diagram showing this production example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 160A to 160E, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, a decorative pattern of a combination of “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. On the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. Further, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digestion icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digestion icon is not displayed. Further, unlike the variation icon display area b in the above embodiment, the variation icon display area n of the present embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image, and the display position of the variation icon is displayed below the variation icon display area n. A horizontally long pedestal image is displayed. Also, in FIG. 160 (a), a variation icon f1 of the display mode of the ninja character design is displayed. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in color. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon that takes notice of the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order.

  FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed from a white circle to a display pattern of a character pattern with a long length. The display mode of the Banchou character pattern is the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, a change icon f1 animation including a scene in which the change icon f1 throws the shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. An animation in which the character of the ninja faces the hold icon g1 may be displayed. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, an animation including a moving image of the change icon f1 may be displayed, and the change icon f1 may be related to the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1.

  FIG. 160 (U) following FIG. 160 (I) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, a pre-reading notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. The hold for the pre-reading notice is the hold in FIG. 1 having the first hold order.

  In FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (u), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative display variable display are started. Shows the state. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, in this example, in addition to the movement animation between the fluctuation icons, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icons, the movement animation of the fluctuation icons is executed.

  By executing the movement animation of the fluctuation icon, the fluctuation icon f1 moves from the center of the fluctuation icon display area n to the right side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variation icon related to the change display of the hold icon display mode is displayed in the variation icon display area n even after the corresponding special figure variation game is finished. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f1 has been completed, and the movement animation of the fluctuation icon has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area n. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is finished.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (e), the movement of the holding icon g2 is completed, and the moving animation of the holding icon is finished.

  In the present embodiment, two variation icons may be displayed in the variation icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 160 (e), the variation icon f1 is displayed in the upper right part of the pedestal image in the variation icon display area n, and the variation icon f2 is displayed in the upper left part of the pedestal image. The fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 are displayed in different areas in the fluctuation icon display area n so that either one does not overlap the other. A part of one of the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 may be overlapped with a part of the other icon. Above the variation icon f1 and the variation icon f2, a character string image of “joint fighting” is displayed, and the variation notice f1 of the character pattern of the ninja and the variation icon f2 of the character picture pattern of the chief character provide a notice effect of the variation. Executed. In this way, the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 may be displayed integrally and function as one fluctuation icon. In FIG. 160 (e), the variation icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digest icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 160 (e) may be only the variation icon f2.

  As in this embodiment, there are cases where two icons are integrally displayed as one variable icon. When two icons are displayed together as one variation icon, the jackpot symbol is easier to confirm and display in the symbol variation display during execution than when one icon is displayed as one variation icon. Also good.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, on the second display device 802 the mini ornamental symbol variation display is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 is displayed. It is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 160A, the gaming state is a non-electric support state, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons g1 and g2 is a default display mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is provided with a horizontally long rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 155 (a) in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. . In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, the contents of the effects and the description of the character as a character string image. In FIG. 160A, a tutorial display is executed by displaying a character string image of “With notice icon digestion ...” in the display area e.

  A notice icon o is displayed overlapping the upper part of the character string image of “notice” in the display area e. The display mode of the notice icon o is a character pattern of a swordsman. The icon displayed as the change icon is displayed as a notice icon o after the corresponding special figure change game (symbol change display) ends. In this example, the notice icon o is an icon that has been displayed as a change icon in the special figure 1 variable game one time before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. Note that the notice icon o may be an icon displayed as a variation icon in the special figure 1 variable game two or more times before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. The notice icon o may be a swordsman character design or a circular display mode of a predetermined color during the period displayed as the variation icon. The notice icon in this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. 125 (i). Note that the notice icon in this example may be displayed as the notice icon shown in FIG. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed when the notice icon of this example is digested. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be applied to the production examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 154.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160 again.

(C1)
Display means (for example, first display device 800, second display device 802, third display device 804 generic name, special figure 1 display device 212)
A game machine equipped with
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212)
Is a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display” (for example, a variation display of a decoration symbol, a variation display of a special diagram 1, a variation display of a mini decoration symbol, shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d)). Symbol variation display, symbol variation display terminated in Fig. 160 (A), symbol variation display shown in Figs. 160 (A) to (U))), and the following symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol"). Variation display "(for example, variation display of decorative symbol, variation display of special symbol, variation display of mini-decorative symbol, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) The symbol variation display shown, and the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 160 (e))).
In the first symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation icon” (for example, the variation icon f1 illustrated in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), FIG. 160 (A) and a change icon f1) shown in FIGS. 160A to 160U) can be displayed.
Icons displayed as the first variation icon (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), variation icon f5 shown in FIG. 160 (A), and FIGS. 160 (a) to (u). Is a notice icon (for example, digest icon j1 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), digest icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to 160 (E)) in the second symbol change display. , And can be displayed as a fluctuation icon f1) shown in FIG.
The area where the notice icon is displayed (for example, the notice icon display area i) is a different area from the area where the first change icon is displayed (for example, the change icon display area b).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, even if the off symbol pattern is stopped in the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is performed in the second symbol variation display. Since the corresponding variation icon can be displayed as a notice icon, there may be a case where expectation can be given to the second symbol variation display immediately after the deviation.

(C2)
The game stand according to C1 above,
In the second symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation icon” (for example, the variation icon f2 illustrated in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), FIG. 160 (B) to (E), which is referred to as a fluctuation icon f6)).
The second fluctuation icon (for example, the fluctuation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), the fluctuation icon f6 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 159 (e) ) And (f) and digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to 160 (E) can be displayed (for example, FIG. 159 (e), (f), FIG. 160 (A) to (E)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C3)
The game table according to C1 or C2, wherein
The icon displayed as the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159 (l) to (r) and 160 (a)) is used as the change icon (for example, the change icon f8 shown in FIG. 160 (b)). Can be displayed,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a gray circular display mode, a gray ninja character design display mode),
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode (for example, a display mode of a character pattern of a gray ninja),
The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, the digest icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r), FIGS. 160 (a) to (e)), and the digest icon shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E). The icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159 (l) to (r), FIG. 160 (a), the hold icon g6 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)). (For example, see FIGS. 159 (p) to (r) and FIGS. 160 (C) to (E)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C4)
The game stand according to C3 above,
The notice icon (for example, the digest icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r) and FIGS. 160 (a) to (e)) of the first display mode is the change icon (for example, FIG. 160 (b)). ) Is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the change icon f8) shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C5)
The game stand according to C3 or C4 above,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a character pattern with a gray dress length),
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon),
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon (for example, a change icon change animation).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C6)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C5 above,
The display mode of the notice icon (for example, the display color is gray) is different from the display mode of the variable icon (for example, the display color is a color other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C7)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C6 above,
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon (for example, a movement animation between fluctuation / digestion icons, a movement animation of digestion icons)
A game stand characterized by that.

(C8)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C7,
The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) includes an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C9)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C8,
In the non-electric support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C10)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, and the notice icon may be different from each other, the display form of the hold icon and the change icon is the same, and the notice icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and the change icon. Alternatively, the notice icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the change icon.

  The display mode of the fluctuation icon and the notice icon is the same, and the hold icon may be different in color only from the change icon and the notice icon, and the hold icon may be different in color and shape from the change icon and the notice icon. It's okay.

  Note that the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon is the same, the change icon may be different from the hold icon and the notice icon only in color, and the change icon may be different from the hold icon and the notice icon in color and shape. It's okay.

  In addition, the animation which changes the display mode of a digestion icon by a hold icon may be performed. The hold icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digest icon. On the contrary, even if the animation which changes the display mode of a digestion icon by a hold icon is not performed. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to a change in the display mode of the digest icon.

  In addition, the animation which changes the display mode of the digestion icon different from the said digestion icon by the digestion icon may be performed. The digestion icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon different from the digestion icon.

  When a special figure variation game is being executed (in the case of symbol variation display) and a display suggesting a divergence (for example, a temporary stop display of a detachment symbol aspect) is executed, the variation icon of the default display aspect is a ninja. It may be displayed as a notice icon after the symbol change display is finished, for example, after changing to the character pattern such as the character number.

  The digest icon may return to the default display mode after the end of the notice effect related to the digest icon (for example, the change icon change animation or the change icon change animation). The digestion icon that has finished the role of production may return to the default display mode. It should be noted that the hold icon of the ninja character design does not return to the default display mode even after an effect of changing another hold icon, a variation icon, or a digestion icon is executed by the hold icon of the ninja character design.

  At least a part of the same aspect of the effect of changing the display mode of the notice icon and other effects (for example, change of the display state of the hold icon, acquisition of the mini item (notice icon), stop of the middle symbol) It is feasible.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments has the first display device 8 as a display unit.
00, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the pachinko machine 100 may include only the first display device 800 of these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above-described effect example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In Examples 1 to 9, the display on the first display device 800 may be displayable on at least one display device of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. The display on the second display device 802 may be displayable on at least one of the first display device 800 and the third display device 804, or the display on the third display device 804 may be displayed. The image may be displayed on at least one of the first display device 800 and the second display device 804. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments replaces the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 as display means, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above effect example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 125 to 154 is the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. It may be displayed on the third display device 804. The game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) part in FIG. The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.

  In addition, the matter demonstrated in the said Examples 1-9 can be combined.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 170.

  161-170 is a figure which shows the modification of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment in steps. 161 to 170, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 161 to 170 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 161 to 170, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 161 to 170 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect of a mini game applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), no display is performed and no display is performed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”, and it is notified that it is lost. Yes. The UI unit is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative design, but may overlap with the display area of the first decorative design. In addition, the UI unit may be displayed constantly or there may be a period during which it is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a loss. It has been reported.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (b) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed, and the relationship between the panda and the character of the lord is described. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (c), the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the button hold icon display mode. In the present embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to always be performed at the same timing after the symbol variation display is started, or may be configured to have a different timing depending on circumstances. Good. Further, audio output may be performed from the speaker 120 at the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (c), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the operation is not enabled and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed, but the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled. The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the effect of the mini game. When the mini game is started, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed above the stage name display unit ST1 in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”. The explanation of the mini-game mission is displayed. In the mission explanation display shown in FIG. 161 (d), “button push” and “3 chance” are displayed together with the display of “3” on the dice, and the mini game starts. After that, it is explained that something good happens when the production button 136 is operated and the dice “3” is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In other words, the display area on which the mini game is executed is a liquid crystal frame formed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is partitioned by (bezel).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol variation display is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is started, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter may not be displayed. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

  Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a dice symbol. Is stopped and displayed, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 in the display form of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and it is notified that the mission has been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. That is, it is notified in advance that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is increased by one level. In other words, it can be said that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of jackpot notice. Since the reward for mission achievement functions as a notice of jackpot notice, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. In addition, at the timing when the mini game is finished, an operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the change icon display of the hold icon is started. At this time, a button reception time meter may be displayed. FIG. 161 (i) shows a state in which the mission achievement reward is continuously displayed. In addition, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 remains in the display mode of the button hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (j), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display form changes to a circular and blue display form as shown in FIG. 161 (k). Change. That is, the display mode of the prefetch notice is changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green, and red, and the reliability of the big hit is high in the order of red> green> blue. . In other words, when the hold icon in a circular and red display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol than when the hold icon in the green and green display mode is displayed. When the hold icon with the green display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to confirm and display than when the hold icon with the blue and blue display mode is displayed. When the display mode hold icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the default display mode hold icon is displayed. In this effect example, by operating the effect button 136, the hold icon h12 in the display form of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the blue display form, which is the first rank of the prefetch notice, but the green icon The hold icon may be changed to a display mode or a red display mode. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which it is combined with an aura, so that the hold icon may be expected to change to a higher display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (l), the display of “pending 1UP” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and changes to a blue display mode. A state of moving toward the second hold icon h12 of the changed special figure 1 is shown. In this embodiment, the timing at which the display of “hold 1UP” starts moving is the timing after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of “hold 1 UP” starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of “pending 1 UP” starts moving is within the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed. The symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display may be being executed.

  Thereafter, when the display of “hold 1 UP” overlaps the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to green, as shown in FIG. 161 (m). That is, the result of the mini game is reflected, and it is produced that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon h12 is increased by one level. Note that even if the display of “hold 1UP” overlaps the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 161 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the mini-game mission is achieved, so that the display state of the pre-reading notice on the hold icon is increased by one level. For example, the mini-game mission is achieved. As a result, one of the mini items shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 135 (d) is stocked, and the contents of the effect (notification effect) to be performed thereafter may be notified in advance, or timer stock may be performed. May be. Here, the timer stock is, for example, one aspect of a notice that displays a timer and suggests that a special effect is started when the time indicated by the timer has elapsed. In addition, as a result of the mini-game mission being achieved, it may be possible to acquire rare items that are not related to the determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game is started at the timing after the hold icon is changed to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change effect of the hold icon is started. However, the mini game is started. The change icon change effect may be started later. In the present embodiment, the period during which the hold icon change effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the mini game is performed. However, the periods may not overlap. The mini-game may be started after a change effect of the hold icon is performed in the display and the hold icon is changed to a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a blue display mode). That is, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  Also, in this embodiment, as a reward that the mini-game mission has been achieved, the hold icon that has changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice due to the change effect of the button hold icon will be notified in advance, As a reward for the achievement of the mini game mission, it may be notified that the hold icon changes to the display mode of the pre-read notice by the change effect of the button hold icon. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the prefetch notice may be notified in advance. Moreover, you may make it notify in advance that the change effect of a button holding | maintenance icon is performed.

  In this example, the mini game is played on the sub liquid crystal (second decorative symbol display device 208M), but may be played on the main liquid crystal (first decorative symbol display device 208L).

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing in stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (j) are the same as FIG. 161 (a) to FIG.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (j), as shown in FIG. 162 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode is displayed. The display mode changes to a circle and green, and the display of “pending 1 UP” is erased in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As described above, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 shows the case where the change of the hold icon of the button hold icon display mode and the change of the hold icon display mode due to the achievement of the mini game mission are simultaneously performed. . In other words, in this effect example, the change of the display state of the hold icon by the change effect of the button hold icon to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice and the result of the mini game mission achievement are reflected. The rank of the pre-reading notice of the display mode of the hold icon is simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing in stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game. In addition, since FIG. 163 (a)-the figure (b) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the figure (b), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Unlike FIG. 161 (c), FIG. 163 (c) does not start the change effect of the hold icon, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 remains in the default display mode. Thereafter, the production of the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (d), and the mini game is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 161 (d) to (h) (FIG. 163 (d)). (H) in FIG.

  In the state where the change effect of the hold icon is not started, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (i), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 changes to a blue display mode in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the display mode changes to the first stage of the pre-reading notice. That is, in this production example, the change in the display mode of the hold icon due to the change display effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon is not performed, but only the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a reflection of the mini game mission achievement result. Has been done.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game. In addition, since FIG. 164 (a)-the figure (l) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the figure (l), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 164 (l), the display of “hold 1UP” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of “hold 1UP” is displayed. When it overlaps with the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to red as shown in FIG. 164 (m), and the reliability of the pre-reading notice is increased by two levels. ing. In this production example, as a result of accomplishing the mission of the mini-game, a one-step rank increase in the reliability of the pre-reading notice was foretold, but a result more advantageous than the noticed content (a two-step rank increase in the reliability of the pre-reading notice) Is reflected.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 164 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and then the result of the mini game mission achievement is obtained. As a reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is further changed. However, after the change mode of the button hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of two or more ranks of the pre-reading notice, You may make it rank-up the display mode of a hold icon as reflection of the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is the highest-ranked display mode (for example, the red display mode, or the premium display mode (for example, the rainbow) When the display mode is changed to the color display mode)), the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even when the rank of the display mode of the hold icon is notified as a result of achievement of the mini game mission. Further, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the achievement result of the mini game mission.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing steps of another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIG. 165 (a) to FIG. 165 (e) are the same as FIG. 161 (a) to FIG.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 165 (g), the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L changes to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice. . That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the button hold icon change effect are performed simultaneously by one operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 161 (k) to (l) (FIG. 165 (h) to (k)).

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game. In addition, since FIG. 166 (a)-the figure (c) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the figure (c), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, before the start of the mini-game effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are replaced by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M starts to slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208M, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a position where the left end side of the display region substantially matches the left end side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol display device 208N stops at a position where the right end side of the display area substantially matches the right end side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the mini game is performed, and compared with the state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The hold icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. In other words, it can be said that the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation is overlapped with the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation. The change effect of the button hold icon is performed by the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1, and the hold icon h14 of the fourth special figure 1. In this case, it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and when it is performed with the hold icon h11 of the first special symbol 1, it is not overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Even when the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is used, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be overlapped. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), a part of the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. All the hold icons h12 may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this effect example, if only one of the change notice of the display mode of the hold icon and the mini game is being performed, the effects of each other do not overlap, Even when the period in which the display mode change notice is performed and the period in which the mini-game is performed do not overlap, the effects of each other do not overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display unit is compared with the state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the character displayed on TT1. In addition, the first decorative symbol has a left symbol and a right symbol overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. It is not overlapped by the display device and is visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the mini-game effect as described above with reference to FIG. 161 (d).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (f), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol variation display is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (g) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 166 (h), the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button hold icon is not accepted, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (h), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating “3”, and it is notified that the mission has been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to slide in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 166 (j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 has a hold icon compared to the state in which it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible. Note that the timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial positions may be after the mini game has ended or during the derivation of the mini game result. May be.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 161 (j) to (n) (FIG. 166 (k) to (n).

  In this effect example, the display device that performs the change effect by the button hold icon is different from the display device that performs the effect of the mini game, and the button is displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the effect of the mini game is performed. Although the state in which the change effect by the hold icon is overlapped is shown, the display device in which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed may be the same as the display device in which the mini game effect is performed. In this case, for example, the mini-game effect may be displayed so as to overlap the change effect by the button hold icon.

  Further, in this effect example, a change effect by a button hold icon is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a mini game effect is performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A change effect by the button hold icon may be performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a mini game effect may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the change effect by the button hold icon is performed. The effect of the mini game may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Further, when the display device that performs the change effect by the button hold icon and the display device that performs the effect of the mini game are the same, for example, the change effect by the button hold icon overlaps the effect of the mini game. You may make it display.

  In addition, in this production example, an example in which the production of the mini game overlaps with another production is shown, but for example, in addition to the mini game production, other than the mini game such as the customer waiting demonstration production and the decorative symbol variation display The effect may be performed, and this effect may overlap other effects. More specifically, for example, the big decorative effect is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it overlap with the production | presentation displayed on the display apparatus 208L. According to this, there may be a case where an effect other than the mini-game is performed, and the effect can be more noticed.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game. In addition, since FIG. 167 (a)-the figure (g) are the same as that of FIG. 166 (a)-the figure (g), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (g) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 167 (h), the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the effect of the mini game is performed. The hold icon h12 changes to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the prefetch notice. That is, in this effect example, button operation reception in the mini game and button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon overlapped with the mini game effect are simultaneously performed by operating the effect button 136 once. Is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to slide in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 167 (j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 has a hold icon compared to the state in which it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 165 (i) to (k) (FIG. 167 (k) to (l)).

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing another example of the mini-game effect in stages. In addition, since FIG. 168 (a)-the figure (g) are the same as that of FIG. 166 (a)-the figure (g), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (g) after the mini game is started, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 168 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M performs the operation. The design of the dice in the production of the mini game is not stopped and displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L, and is overlapped with the second decorative design display device 208M in which the production of the mini game is performed. The hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the pre-reading notice. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation in the mini game is not accepted, and only the button operation in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapped with the mini game effect is accepted. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the button operation is accepted in the button suspension icon change effect in preference to the button operation accepted in the mini game.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to slide in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 168 (i). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the effect of the mini game is still continuing, and the state where the gauge of the button reception time meter is reduced is shown together with the display of the button image 136a in order to promote the operation of the effect button 136. . On the other hand, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 is compared to the state in which the overlap is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is easily visible.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (j), as shown in FIG. 168 (k), in the second decorative design display device 208M, the result of the dice symbol “3” is displayed. The stop is displayed in the mode shown to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 165 (h) to (k) (FIG. 168 (l) to (n)).

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the mini-game effect. Note that FIGS. 169 (a) to (f) are the same as FIGS. 161 (a) to (f), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 169 (g), the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. On the other hand, the display mode of the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 169 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and it is notified that the mission has not been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “sorry” informing that the mini game mission has failed. Therefore, in this production example, the notice of jackpot notice is not performed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the achievement of the mission is derived than when the achievement other than the achievement of the mission is derived. Yes.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (i), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to the default display mode as shown in FIG. 161 (j). . In other words, it is indicated that the change effect of the button hold icon is the effect of changing the display state of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 169 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect. 170 (a) to 170 (e) are the same as FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 170 (f) shows a state in which the mini-game has been started but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Therefore, the change display of the dice symbol is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, when the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (g), as shown in FIG. 170 (h), the notification of the mini game result is not performed and the effect of the mini game ends. To do.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (i), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to a blue display mode as shown in FIG. 170 (j). A pre-reading notice will be made.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 161, in the mini game, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the mini-game mission is achieved and the display state of the hold icon changes. However, in this effect example, since the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the mission is not achieved, and the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is not performed. Also, in this production example, since the mission has not been achieved, the production that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level is not performed. For example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second stage. If it is determined in advance, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as previously set regardless of the result of the mini game. For example, the hold icon may be changed to the second stage. After changing the hold icon to the first stage with the change effect of the hold icon on the button, the mini game effect is executed so that the result of the mini game is achieved, and the mini game is derived. Even if the result of the mini-game is not derived when it is planned to change the hold icon to the second level according to the result, The end to hold the icon may be changed to a second stage. Regarding the change mode, for example, in the change effect of the button hold icon, the hold icon is changed from the button hold icon display mode to the green display mode in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode may be changed, or the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the first display mode which is the blue display mode in response to the operation of the effect button 136. Later, during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation is stopped, or during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display being executed, the second stage which is the green display mode The display mode may be changed. In other words, a notice corresponding to the result of executing the mini game may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, the notice corresponding to the result that was scheduled to be derived is given. It may not be performed. Even if it does in this way, since the result of a symbol fluctuation display does not fluctuate, it is possible to perform suitable production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon may be configured to have a green display mode more easily when the mini game is played than when the mini game is not played. That is, it can be said that when the mini game is started, the advance notice is easily performed in an advantageous manner as compared with the case where the mini game is not started.

  In this production example, if the mini-game is started and the result of the mini-game is not derived in the state where the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read notice display mode, the rank-up of the display mode of the hold icon is Although it is not performed, the current state is maintained, but even when the mini game result is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon may be ranked up. In this case, the ranking may be increased in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed, or may be ranked in the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed.

  In this example, the example of changing the display mode of the hold icon has been described as an example of the pre-reading notice. However, a known form such as a continuous notice can be applied to the pre-reading notice. .

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 179.

  FIGS. 171 to 179 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 171 to 179, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIGS. 171 to 179, a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display form of the sabotani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the hold in FIG. 1 (first hold) is digested, and the hold icon h12 in the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is started. At this time, after the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (c), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (d), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (e), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the “decoration 5—decoration 7”.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 171 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (g), a step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice that sequentially switches and displays a plurality of display modes in a predetermined display order. In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display form has a number indicating the number of steps of the display form. It is displayed. The number of steps is a display showing the level of reliability of the big hit. For example, when displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed and the possibility of a big hit is increased. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may be missed, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when displayed up to step 5, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. As the number of steps increases, the display size also increases. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171B (g), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 updates the step-up notice and displays the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 further updates the step-up notice and displays the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (k), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 forms a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed in the lower right part of the display area. The mini game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super reach effect display, and the super reach effect display is difficult to see compared to the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. Yes. The mini game in this production example is a game whose mission is to continuously perform the production button 136 during the operation valid period and finally derive “Daiyoshi”. In other words, the mini game in this production example requires multiple operations of the production button 136 in order to derive the result. FIG. 171 (m) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and a description of play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136 a to prompt the player to press the effect button 136 repeatedly. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained. Note that the mini game display area MN1 may not be partitioned by a frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (n), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Koyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”, and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been informed that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation has been started.

  FIG. 171 (r) shows a state in which the player performs a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  FIG. 172 (a) following FIG. 171 (r) shows a state in which the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a star effect image is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but may not be decreased. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows a state where the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and further, the display of “Koyoshi” is erased by the operation of the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the possibility of deriving “Nakayoshi” or “Daichi” as a result of the mini-game is increased. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous firing of the production button 136, the display of “Kokichi” once erased may be displayed again, but once it is erased, it is not displayed again. Also good.

  FIG. 172 (c) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and “Daiyoshi” and “Nakayoshi” are displayed continuously. Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the characters “continuous hit”, the characters “2 seconds remaining” are displayed, and it is informed that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows a state where the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (d), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and “Daiyoshi” and “Nakayoshi” are displayed continuously. The display for notifying the operation effective period is “1 second”, and it is notified that the operation effective period is 1 second.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows that the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display for notifying the operation valid period. It is informed that the display of “Nakayoshi” is erased by the operation of 136, and there is a high possibility that “Daiyoshi” will be derived as a result of the mini game. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous firing of the production button 136, the display of “Nakayoshi” once erased may be displayed again, but once it is erased, it is not displayed again. Also good.

  FIG. 172 (f) shows a state in which “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the player has continuously performed the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has been achieved. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense hot notice will appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of “Daikichi”, a notice may be given that an intense notice will always be executed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is deleted at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (g), the button notice effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and “Push” is displayed together with the button image 136a. Is displayed, and a state in which a single operation of the effect button 136 is promoted is shown. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases. In this production example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates, the button image 136a is displayed in a final state, compared to when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. Therefore, the big hit symbol is configured to be easily stopped. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode that neither vibrates nor rotates. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect related to the variation display of the decorative symbols). In this example, in the mini game, an effect is performed by repeatedly operating the effect button 136. In the main effect, an effect is performed by operating the effect button 136 once. However, in the mini game, the effect button is used in the main effect. An effect by 136 continuous hitting operations may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 172 (h), the super reach effect is continuously performed, and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation effective period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of “Push”, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (h), when the production button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 172 (i), a character “game is won” is displayed in a balloon together with an up image of the Tono-sama character. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of face length faces (for example, nine) are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon. In the game, a display of “Daiyoshi” is derived and displayed in accordance with the result of the achievement of the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “Daiyoshi” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, a weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 172 (i ′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that is smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission is not achieved in the mini game. It should be noted that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is performed more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is considered difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with a decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (j), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 172 (k), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  In this production example, the mini-game requests a continuous operation of the production button 136 in order to achieve the mission, while the main production requires a single operation of the production button 136 to make a notice appear. The mini-game may require one operation of the effect button 136, and the main effect may require a continuous operation of the effect button 136.

  Moreover, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in this production example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 173 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), showing that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (b), the state of development to super reach (subjugation reach) is shown. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this production example is also performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173 (c) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and a description of play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136 a to prompt the player to press the effect button 136 repeatedly. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, the button operation effect that requires the operation of the effect button is started even in the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the letters “Push” are displayed together with the button image 136a. It shows how the operation is promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period in the main effect has not started and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relationship between the minigame and the main performance in the minigame display area MN1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (f), in the mini game display area MN 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period does not start as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter does not change.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continuous hit” is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”. It is notified that acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player starts to hit the effect button 136 continuously after seeing this notification. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. Thus, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially accepted. It should be noted that the button operation for the main effect overlapped with the mini game display area MN1 may be accepted with priority.

  FIG. 173 (h) shows a state in which the player has repeatedly operated the effect button 136. In the mini game display area MN1, a state is shown in which the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 173 (i) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (i), the display of “Koyoshi” is erased by operating the production button 136 a predetermined number of times, and “Nakayoshi” or “Daiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been reported that the possibility has increased. Note that the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 173 (j) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the characters “continuous hit”, the characters “2 seconds remaining” are displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period does not start as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter does not change.

  FIG. 173 (k) shows a state in which the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is interrupted. Then, the star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 is zero. The situation is shown. In addition, the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakakichi” are continued, but the display for notifying the operation effective period is “1 second”, and the operation effective period is the remaining 1 second. Informed.

  FIG. 173 (l) shows a state in which “Nakayoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the operation effective period in the mini game has elapsed. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has not been achieved. Originally, “Daikichi” should have been derived when the continuous hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the production button 136. It is due to that.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is finished, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is resumed, and the gauge of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is restarted. Decrease display starts. Thereby, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the production button 136 in the main production is started. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 173 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini-game is not “Daichi”. At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. If it is determined in advance whether to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b, if it is determined in advance to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, FIG. As shown in o ′), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation situation (operation situation) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of “Daiyoshi” may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (p), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 173 (q), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variable game is completed. In this way, the result of the success / failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the success / failure is derived. Therefore, the midway effect may be changed as appropriate. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 174 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 174 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of development to super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. . Specifically, the characters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a to prompt the operation of the effect button 136 once. In addition, below that, there is a character display of “Take out the Daikichi and see a super hot appearance in Daikichi”, and it will be announced that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Koyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daiyoshi”, “Nakayoshi” and “Koyoshi” is started. In the lower part where the effect of the high-speed loop rotation is performed, the letters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires repeated operation of the effect buttons is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates. Along with the button image 136a, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, an effect requesting continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect requesting one operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is smaller than the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. In this effect example, an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a mini game and an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Moreover, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button reception time meter MT starts to display a decrease in gauge, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are performed simultaneously. Note that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts to repeatedly perform the effect button 136. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. Thus, in this production example, both the main production and the mini-game production can be operated with the same operation means (production button 136). For this reason, for example, when an effect in which the acceptance of operation is given priority is an effect requesting repeated operations, and an effect in which the acceptance of operations is non-priority is an effect requiring one operation, the momentum of the operation means is repeated. A result may be derived for a non-priority effect, and an effect in which operation acceptance is given priority is an effect requiring one operation, and an effect in which operation acceptance is non-priority is a repeated hit operation. In the case of the requested effect, the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, so that there may be a case where the result can be reliably derived for the priority effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. The situation is shown. Then, the word “achievement” indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also displayed to notify that effect. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is accepted in preference to the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the continuous operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, a state in which a cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the repeated operation effect in the main effect is shown. And the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by this cut-in image, and it is in a state that it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, a “Mission Completed” display for notifying that the mission in the mini game has been achieved is scrolled from the right end to the left end. Thereby, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is continued. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, as a result of the player's continuous operation of the effect button 136 being performed, as shown in FIG. 174 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the weak cut-in image CI1b with the strong cut-in image CI1a. The state where is displayed is shown. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous hitting gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the hitting gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. When the image is displayed and full, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous hitting gauge may not be filled no matter how many consecutive hits are performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (k), in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Mission accomplished” is displayed instead of “ “Intense notice notice” is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is the notice notice, has been displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), the mini-game mission is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 174 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous operation of the effect button 136. However, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to, for example, the player stopping the continuous hitting operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (j ′). May remain. That is, as shown in this example of production, even if the mission is achieved, there may be a case where the law breaks up so that the intense warning notice does not appear depending on the operation state of the production button 136. In order to match the achievement of the mini-game mission, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation state of the effect button 136, or other strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. You may make it display an intense hot notice. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 174 (m), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  Thus, in this production example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in is performed when the number of operations of the production button 136 is less than a predetermined number. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this production example, when it is determined in advance whether the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini- In the game, the display of “Daichi” can be derived. In addition, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1b can be displayed, the display of “Daiyoshi” is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, in the button repeated operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b. It may be. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the button continuous hit operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image is not displayed. Although CI1b can be displayed, strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 175 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), showing that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (b), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 175 (c) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and a description of play in the mini game is displayed. More specifically, the text “Let's make a big hit with repeated hits” is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the player to repeatedly press the effect button 136. Note that the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 175 (c) is larger than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171 (m). However, they may be the same size. Further, the small button image 136a and the large button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be varied depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. . That is, when the large button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small button image 136a is displayed. Also, below that, there is a character display of “Daiyoshi's strong cut-in occurrence”, and when “Daiyoshi” is derived, it is predicted that a strong cut-in notice with high reliability of big hit will occur. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, the description of the game of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 175 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakakichi”, “Kokichi” is displayed in this order, the display of “Daikichi” is overlapped with the display of “Nakakichi”, and the display of “Nakakichi” is “Kokichi” It is displayed so as to overlap the display of.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”, and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been informed that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation has been started. A button reception time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this effect example, it is shown that the display relating to the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

  FIGS. 175 (f) to (g) show a state in which the effect button 136 continues to be struck continuously during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result corresponding to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 175 (h), “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game, and the text “Mission accomplished” is displayed below it to notify that the mini game mission has been achieved. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mission achieved by deriving “Daiyoshi” as a result of the mini-game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (j), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175 (k), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), as shown in FIGS. 175 (f ′) to (g ′), the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has passed in a state where the number of times determined in advance is not reached, as shown in FIG. 175 (h ′), the mini game display area MN1 displays the result of the mini game. While “Koyoshi” is derived, the text “Mission Failed” is displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the determination.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is based on the result that the mission was not achieved because “Koyoshi” was derived as a result of the mini-game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (j ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character, Tono-sama was defeated by the enemy swordsman and defeated, is displayed. “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” decoration symbol is scheduled to be stopped. The

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Then, the one-time special figure variable game is completed.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 176 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (d). In the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is a combination of losing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display form of Sabohani, that is, is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 176 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c), a state in which the mission as the main effect is started is shown. Specifically, a “mission mission” character is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. In addition, at the lower edge of the display area, “cut out” and “big hit if you go out” are displayed together with the image of the face of the bancho, and the contents of the mission are informed. That is, it is informed that if the image of the face of the chief leader appears during the mission, the mission is achieved and the jackpot is confirmed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Mission” is displayed to indicate that the mission is continuing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (e), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Also, “Mission” is displayed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 176 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed. Even after the development of Super Reach, “Mission” is still displayed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area and the mini game is started. This production example shows a state in which a mission as a main production and a mission in a mini game are performed simultaneously. In other words, a state in which a mini-game mission is overlapped with a mission as a main performance is shown. Here, in this production example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (g) to (l) are shown in FIG. 175 (c) to FIG. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 176 (j) to (k), part of the display of “in mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT. The "Mission" display is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (l), after the “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is achieved, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (m). A strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mission achieved by deriving “Daiyoshi” as a result of the mini-game described above. Note that the mission continues while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of “in mission” continues, but is overlapped with the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is considered that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with CI1a.

  As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a speech balloon in which a number of face-length faces are arranged around the character “game”. For this reason, the appearance of the face of the chief who is the mission in the main performance is achieved, and therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (n), the character display of “Mission accomplished” exceeds the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is informed that the big hit is fixed when the mission in the main performance is achieved. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (o), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character, Mr. Tono, defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 176 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variable game is completed.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 177 (a) to (k) are the same as FIGS. 176 (a) to (k) and will not be described.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (l), when “Kiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game, the text “Mission Failed” is displayed below it, and the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the success / failure determination is a loss. Therefore, when the mini game mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136, it is determined in advance so that anything other than “Daichi” is always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed because the mission has not been achieved as a result of the above-described mini game. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of “Mission” continues, but is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. Although it is considered that it is more difficult to view than when not overlapped with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a. The case where it overlaps with weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to visually recognize than the case where it overlaps with CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the chief who is the mission in the main performance has not been achieved, the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (n). It is displayed overlapping. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect has not been achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama lost the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 177 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variable game is completed.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 178 (a)-the figure (i) are the same as that of FIG. 176 (a)-the figure (i), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the acceptance of continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (i), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as shown in FIGS. When the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has passed in a state where the number of times determined in advance is not reached, as shown in FIG. 178 (l), the mini game display area MN1 displays “Koki ”And“ Mission failed ”are displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been achieved. In this production example, the result of the determination of success or failure is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived as the result of the mini game. However, since the operation valid period has passed since the number of operations of the production button 136 has not reached the predetermined number of times, “Kiyoshi” is derived without deriving “Daikichi”. Note that if the mini game has started but the production button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini game may not be derived even if it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived. . If it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived, “Daikichi” may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the operation button 136 is not operated. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed because the mission has not been achieved as a result of the above-described mini game. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of “Mission” continues, but is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. Although it is considered that it is more difficult to view than when not overlapped with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a. The case where it overlaps with weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to visually recognize than the case where it overlaps with CI1a. Note that the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the mission result is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho. For this reason, the appearance of the face of the chief, which is the mission in the main production, has not been achieved, so that the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (n). It is displayed overlapping. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect has not been achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this production example, the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, so as shown in FIG. 178 (o), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the hero Ton defeated the enemy swordsman and won In addition, “decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the approximate center of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the ornament symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed. It is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 178 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variable game is completed. That is, in this production example, the number of operations of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mini game mission fails. Therefore, although the main production mission related thereto cannot be achieved, A state in which the big hit symbol is determined and displayed according to the determination result is shown.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect movable body 224 is also shown.

  FIG. 179 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of development to super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), a button operation effect requesting repeated operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates. Along with this button image 136a, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the gauge reception display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been. Then, the player sees this and starts to strike the effect button 136 continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a to prompt the operation of the effect button 136 once. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission in the mini-game and the results of the mission achievement are explained. Thus, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The button reception time meter MT changes in display mode according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. It should be noted that the player has continuously operated the effect button 136 continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In this production example, the production movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit announcement, but for example, the production movable body 224 operates to notify that there is a high possibility of achieving a mission in a mini game. You may make it notify in advance that the possibility of mission achievement in the main performance is high. It should be noted that the player has continuously operated the effect button 136 continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Koyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”. In addition, the display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is difficult to view. On the other hand, the effect of continuous operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (g) responds to the repeated operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which a cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the repeated operation effect in the main effect is shown. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side thereof so as not to overlap the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daiyoshi”, “Nakayoshi”, and “Koyoshi” is started. In the lower part where the effect of the high-speed loop rotation is performed, the letters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. The display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect that requires repeated operation of the effect buttons continues. In this effect example, an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a mini game and an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136, but when the reception of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-dot chain line. It is configured. Note that a single operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. The situation is shown. Then, the word “achievement” indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also displayed to notify that effect. However, since the mini game display area MN1 is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the characters “achievement”. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (i), the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has elapsed, and the player has ended the repeated operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (j), the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. For this reason, the overlap with the mini game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the characters “achievement” to the effect that the mini game mission has been achieved are also easily visible. Note that the timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main performance ends may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main production ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the production movable body 224. After the forearm 224b has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (k) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the display is not performed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini-game is achieved regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. . Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the variation game of one special figure is completed.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184.

  180 to 184 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 180 to 184, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 180 to 184 show a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 180 (a) shows a state in which a mini game is started during decorative symbol variation display. In this production example, the mini game is played without being divided into regions. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right sides of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is informed that when the main character appears from the treasure chest, it shifts to super reach (SP reach). In addition, “select with the cross key” and “determine with the button” are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box selected by the operation button 136 and the treasure box selected by the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is reported that it is possible. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operation means is performed is shown. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a mini game is performed using an area wider than the effect related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (b), the appearance of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL, and it is indicated that the treasure chest surrounded by the cursor CSL is the currently selected treasure chest. Further, the remaining time of the operation effective period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and “3” indicating that the operation effective period is 3 seconds is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Has been. FIG. 180 (b) also shows a state in which the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), a state in which the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR and surrounds the right treasure chest image BXR is shown. . The display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “2”, which indicates that the operation effective period is the remaining 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (d), as shown in FIG. 180 (e), the selected right treasure chest image BXR is determined as a treasure chest to be opened. The treasure chest image BXL is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 180 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “1”, indicating that the operation effective period is the remaining 1 second. In addition, after the player has operated the effect button 136 to determine the treasure chest that can be opened, a display may be made to determine the treasure chest that will be opened when the operation validity period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period has passed without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed, it may be determined as a treasure box for opening the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation valid period has passed without any treasure box selected, the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, the willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 may be improved for the player.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (f), the character YSM of the protagonist appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the mini-game mission is achieved. As a result, the advance to SP reach is foretold. Note that a pre-reading notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (h), the state of development to SP reach is shown. As described above, in this effect example, in the case of the mini-game executed before the transition to the SP reach, when the decorative pattern variation pattern determined based on the result of the determination is a transition to the SP reach, Character YSM of the main character who is informed of the transition to SP reach is displayed. Accordingly, there is a case where the transition to the SP reach can be announced by causing the Tono-sama character YSM to appear in the mini game.

  In this production example, if the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, the Tono-sama character YSM appears regardless of which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and the transition to the SP reach is not performed. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM may be configured not to appear regardless of which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is selected. Further, on the condition that the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be the hit is selected. In this case, a Tono-sama character YSM may appear. In addition, when the variable time during which SP reach can be executed is selected, the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is randomly determined and the treasure chest image determined to be a winning is selected. In the case where the Tono-sama character YSM appears, when the Tono-sama character YSM appears, the SP reach is developed later. However, when the Tono-sama character YSM does not appear, the SP reach is subsequently developed. However, it may be configured to perform a reach with lower reliability than the SP reach such as the normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. Further, whether or not the Tono-sama character YSM appears at the timing when the treasure box image is selected may be randomly drawn. In addition, even if Tono-sama character YSM appears, there may be a case where it does not shift to the SP reach. In this case, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed as a broken law.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 181, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the mini game is started during the decorative symbol variation display. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right sides of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is informed that when the main character appears from the treasure chest, it shifts to super reach (SP reach). In addition, “select with the cross key” and “determine with the button” are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box selected by the operation button 136 and the treasure box selected by the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is reported that it is possible. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, and no treasure chest image is displayed in a selected state. Has been.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (b), the operation reception period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed on the center right side of the display area. The At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (b), “3” indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 3 seconds is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a state in which no operation is performed after the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “2”, showing that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, no treasure chest image has been selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state in which no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “1”, showing that the operation valid period is 1 second. Therefore, no treasure chest image is selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state in which no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “0”, indicating that the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, no treasure chest image is selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, none of the treasure chests are selected and none of the treasure chests are opened, that is, the mini game result is not derived, and the decorative symbol display device 208 reaches the reach state as shown in FIG. 181 (f). It is transferred to.

  In this production example, when the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even when no treasure chest is selected. Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the determination, whether or not any treasure box is selected, SP reach is not performed. It may be. According to this, the willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 may be improved for the player.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 182, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown. Note that FIGS. 182 (a) to (d) are the same as FIGS. 180 (a) to (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (d), as shown in FIG. 182 (e), the selected right treasure chest image BXR is determined as a treasure chest to be opened, and the right treasure chest image While BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure chest image BXL that has not been selected is reduced and displayed. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 182 (e), an error message “Error game ball” or “Please call a clerk” is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error Notification) is performed, and it is notified that a ball clogging error, which is a state where game balls are clogged in the payout route, has occurred. Specifically, for example, a payout condition for a winning ball or a rental ball is established, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 65, etc.) is driven. However, a payout of a game ball is not detected, and a retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, (3 times) When the game ball is not paid out, the ball clogging error notification is issued. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. In addition, when the cancellation of the error that is the subject of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout device 152 is normally paid out of the game ball), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

  Since FIG. 182 (f) to FIG. 18 (h) are the same as FIG. 180 (f) to FIG. 180 (h) except that error display is performed, description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, in this production example, a state in which the mini game is continued if the game is an error that is not interrupted is shown.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 183, the appearance buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137 are shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits a magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, stops the game, and disables the game. To control. After deactivation, the main control unit main process (see FIG. 69) is configured so that it cannot return until the initialization process in step S113 is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetism detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, or performs a predetermined error mode by using various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp 542, for example. The lamp can be blinked or a predetermined error display can be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 182 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 180 (a) to (c), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (c), the right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. The display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “2”, which indicates that the operation effective period is the remaining 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, for example, when a player performs a fraud using a magnet, and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “magnet” on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the characters “sensor error” is displayed overlapping the display shown in FIG. 180 (d), for example, and the game stops. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and also shown in FIGS. 180 (d) to (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is shut off without visually recognizing the effect display (FIGS. 183 (d) to (h). )). The magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 183 is different from the error display shown in FIG. 182 in that the area overlapping the effect of the mini game is different. In other words, it can be said that the display area of the mini game has different areas that overlap the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 184 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it develops into a bowling reach which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as a main production. After shifting to the bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and ten bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape are displayed. There is an effect display where the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin, and in the upper right part of the display area, the character “Strike with big hit” is displayed, and if you achieve the mission of strike, it will be a big hit Informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (c), it is shown that the ball reaches a position close to the ten boring pins and tries to defeat the boring pins. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right part of the display area and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. . In the mini game display area MN1, an explanation of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 184 (c), the “1” on the dice and the “get out” display are displayed below the “mini game” display. It is described that the mission button 136 is operated after the start of the operation, and a mission to stop and display the “1” of the dice is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (d), the nine boring pins are shown to have fallen. That is, a state in which one boring pin remains without falling is shown. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of “Push”, and it is notified that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, dice symbols may be displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 184 (e) shows a state in which the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1 by operating the effect button 136. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since the strike did not occur in the bowling reach, the word “sorry” is displayed, and it is informed that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the game is lost. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, when the effect button 136 is operated, the result of the mini game is stopped, the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped, and the mission is achieved. A display of “+1” for notifying that the book will fall is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini game is accompanied by a reward for mission achievement “ After “+1” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 184 (g), the state that one boring pin that has remained without falling down has fallen and strikes is shown. That is, it is shown that an effect that is a revival hit from the loss is being performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (h), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game has an influence on the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 192.

  FIG. 185 to FIG. 192 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 185 to 192, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 185 to FIG. 192, a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. Also, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are both in the default display mode. It is displayed. In addition, a multifunction display area MF1 partitioned into a substantially square shape is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The multi-function display area MF1 can perform the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the hold (first hold) in FIG. 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 in the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1. The hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the change icon may be displayed as described above.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (c), a state in which the tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Mini game starts at various timings” is displayed, which suggests when the mini game starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking, as shown in FIG. -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the “decoration 5—decoration 7”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (e), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second special figure 1 hold icon h12 is the first special figure 1. The hold icon h11 is displayed, and the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (f), a state in which the tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Yoshimune is an 8th general” is displayed, and information about the main character is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “1” on the dice and a display of “1 on hold 1UP” are displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the long face. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is explained that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the outcome of the “1” of the dice as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display mode is notified to change to the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (j), as shown in FIG. 185 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. After the result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and blue display mode. Also in this production example, the hold icon has a high jackpot reliability in the order of red> green> blue. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In addition, a fortune game may be started instead of the dice game as the mini game described above with reference to FIGS. 185 (g) to (k). Here, FIG. 185 (g ′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 185 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 185 (g ′), the mini-game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Be started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the “fortune game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the bancho, and the fact that the fortune game as a mini game is started is notified. Is done. In this example, even when different types of mini games are started, the face image BCH having the same head length is displayed. In other words, in this production example, the same character (banchou face image BCH) can appear and a plurality of types of mini games can be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Nakayoshi” is displayed along with “Nakayoshi” on the right side of the face-length face image BCH, and “ It is explained that when “Nakayoshi” is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the “Nakakichi” Omikuji as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display form is changed to the hold icon in the pre-read notice display form.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started. Note that the mini game in this effect example is one in which no operation is performed by operating means such as the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and the fortune of “Nakayoshi” is derived and displayed to show that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is erased, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that the mission is rewarded is displayed. Yes. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (k ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timing of the right symbol stop display may be the same as the timing at which the mission achievement reward display starts, or the mission achievement reward display starts after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission completion display is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l ′), after the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and blue display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  As described above, the example of production shown in FIG. 185 shows an example in which different types of mini-games can be performed when the mini-game start conditions are satisfied, and on the other hand ( In the mini game of the dice game), the operation of the effect button 136 is required, and in the other mini game (the fortune game), no operation by the operating means is required. Are the same (both are changing the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). In other words, FIG. 185 shows an example of an effect where the same target is influenced in the main effect as a result in any mini game. In this production example, which of the dice game and the fortune game is to be executed may be determined at random or may be determined based on the determination result, for example, the dice game is executed. In the case where the fortune game is executed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the fortune game is executed.

  Further, in this mini-game, in a mini-game, a character that is smaller than a character that appears during execution of a decorative symbol variation display (sometimes referred to as a “small character”), for example, in a tutorial display or the like An appearing character (sometimes referred to as “navigator character”) may appear. These characters may be configured to be displayed in a tutorial display or other notice when the mini game is not performed, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Further, these characters may be displayed constantly. Further, it is preferable that the character appearing in the mini-game and the character appearing during execution of the decorative pattern change display are visually different, for example, the size may be different, or the 3D character and the deformed character may be deformed. There may be differences in expression, such as

  In this example, the fortune game (second mini game) may use a larger area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a certain display area (multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini game is performed), and further displays another display area (a display area in which the multifunction display area MF1 is enlarged). ) May also be used.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 186 (a)-the figure (e) are the same as that of FIG. 185 (a)-the figure (e), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (f) shows a state in which a mini game start notice is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “attention” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the longest face, and it is predicted that a mini game will be started from now.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “3” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face, and “3 on hold” is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is predicted that the hold icon in the default display mode changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice by deriving the “3” roll of the dice as a mission. It becomes. Moreover, in this production example, the contents of the mission and the reward for completing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (j), as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the achievement of the mission. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. After the result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Further, when the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 186 (g ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face, and it is notified that the Omikuji game is started as a mini game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiichi 3UP” and “Daiichi” are displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the bancho face. It is explained that when “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the “Okichi” Omikuji as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Moreover, in this production example, the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the fortune game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and a fortune-telling of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed to show that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is erased, and “3UP confirmed” is displayed to indicate that the mission is rewarded. Yes. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (k ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timing of the right symbol stop display may be the same as the timing at which the mission achievement reward display starts, or the mission achievement reward display starts after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission completion display is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l ′), after the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  As described above, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 186 shows an example in which the mission content and the reward for accomplishing the mission can be varied even in the same type of mini-game. It should be noted that the mission achievement rewards may be made different with the same mission contents, or the mission achievement rewards may be made different with different mission contents.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 187 (A1) to (A6) show examples of effects performed in the heel mode, and FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6) show examples of effects performed in the princess mode. Yes. Note that the samurai mode and the princess mode are names of effect modes, respectively, and are configured such that an effect specific to each mode is performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the cocoon mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, it may be determined at random whether to shift to the samurai mode or the princess mode, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to the spear mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), it shifts to the princess mode. For example, the current gaming state may be estimated by the player.

  FIG. 187 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (A1), the “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display region, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display region. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that the dice game as a mini game is started. In this production example, in the heel mode, the dice game is more easily started than the fortune game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the heel mode, the dice game may be always started and the fortune game may not be started. 187 (A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 186 (h) to (l) except that the display of the heel mode and the display of the heel character BA are performed. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 187 (B1) shows a state where the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B1), “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “fortune game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started. In this effect example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the princess mode, when the mini game is executed, the fortune game may be always started and the dice game may not be started. 187 (B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 186 (h ′) to (l ′) except that the display of the princess mode and the display of the princess character HM1 are performed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 188 (A1) to (A6) show an example of an effect performed in the heel mode, and FIGS. 188 (B1) to (B6) show an example of an effect performed in the princess mode. Yes.

  FIG. 188 (A1) shows a state in which the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A1), the “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display region, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display region. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 188 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that the dice game as a mini game is started. In this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main effect. For example, if it is decided to execute a step-up notice, it is easier to start a dice game than a fortune game as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute a pseudo-ream If it is, the symbol variation display is configured such that the fortune game is easier to start as a mini game than the dice game. In addition, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and when it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream, In the symbol variation display, the fortune game may be surely started as a mini game. Further, in this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed without depending on the current effect mode is determined, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “3” on the dice and a display of “3 on hold” are displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even when the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “with hold 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 is started, and the display start timing of the step-up notice SU1 is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the indication of the “3” of the dice and the display of “with hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. It should be noted that the timing at which the button image 136a and “press” display in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 starts to be displayed, or in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 is started. And “Press” may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A4), as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. As shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the step-up notice is finished. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 188 (B1) shows a state where the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “fortune game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started.

  After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B2) shows a temporary stop with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”. In this production example, for example, it is informed that there is a case where a pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”. That is, there is a case where the combination of the decoration pattern of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3” becomes a chance. In addition, you may make it alert | report the start of a pseudo-ream by displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiichi 3UP” is displayed together with “Daiyoshi” on the right side of the face-length face image BCH, and “Daiichi” is derived and displayed in the mini game. It is explained that the display mode of is increased by three ranks. It should be noted that the timing at which the “daikichi” display and the “delay 3 UP” display start in the multi-function display area MF1 may be the same as the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbols, or the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of “Daiyoshi” and “hold 3UP” is started, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, “Daiyoshi” in the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed. "And" hold 3 UP "display may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol has been started, and the first variation display of the pseudo-ream is shown. Here, you may make it display the frequency | count that the pseudo | simulation ream was performed. It should be noted that the start of the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) and the start of the treasure chest BXS display may be at the same timing, or after the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) starts, the treasure chest BXS display. May be started, or after the display of the treasure chest BXS is started, the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-continuous) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and the “Okichi” fortune is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop is made with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and it is informed that pseudo-ream may be further performed. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the decorative symbol temporarily stops. The decorative design may temporarily stop after the result is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that the mission is rewarded is displayed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the second variation display of the pseudo-continuation is performed. Note that the start of the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) may be the same as the start timing of the mission achievement reward, or after the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) is started. The display of the mission achievement reward may be started, or after the display of the mission achievement reward is started, the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to the circular and red display mode as the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is obtained. Here, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream may be further performed. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In this example, it has been described that the result of the mini-game affects the display mode of the hold icon. However, as a result of the mini-game, it may be announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for accomplishing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times that the pseudo-reams are started may be notified, or the number of times of the pseudo-reams may be increased.

  Further, as a result of the mini-game, it may be notified that the step-up notice will be performed as a reward for accomplishing the mission, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be notified. You may make it alert | report that a number will increase.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 189 (A1) to (A6) show an example of an effect performed in the heel mode, and FIGS. 189 (B1) to (B6) show an example of an effect performed in the princess mode. Yes.

  FIG. 189 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (A1), the “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display region, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display region. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this example, a Sabohani character image SBH is displayed in place of the Banchou face image BCH, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the Sabohani character image SBH. It is shown that the dice game is informed. The Sabohani character image SBH is an image that may be displayed only in the dice game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune game, but may be displayed in the fortune game. In this production example, the reward for mission achievement in the dice game is more advantageous when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed than when the face length BCH image is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission as compared to the case where the image BCH of the face length is displayed. It is easy to make a notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the third stage of the pre-reading notice is made, and when the face length BCH image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the first display form (blue display form) of the prefetch notice is easily performed. More specifically, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the outcome of the mini-game is more easily derived as a result of the minigame than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the outcome of “1” is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. Further, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. 189 (A2) to (A6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 188 (A2) except that the face image BCH of the longest length displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the Sabohani character image SBH. Since it is the same as (A6) in FIG.

  FIG. 189 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (B1), “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this example, the princess character image HM2 is displayed in place of the Banchou face image BCH, and the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the princess character image HM2. It is shown that the fortune game is informed. The princess character image HM2, for example, is an image that may be displayed only in the fortune game, and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the fortune game is more advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared to the case where the image BCH of the chief face is displayed. It is easier to make a notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the third stage of the pre-reading notice is made, and when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the first display form (blue display form) of the prefetch notice is easily performed. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, “Taichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. When BCH is displayed, “Nakayoshi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. Note that, as in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character (princess character HM1) displayed in the princess mode and the character (princess character image HM2) displayed in the mini game are the same. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be achieved more easily than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. FIGS. 189 (B2) to (B6) are the same as those in FIG. 188 (B2) except that the face image BCH displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. Since it is the same as that in FIG.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 190 (A1) to FIG. 190 (A6) show an example of effects performed in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and FIG. 190 (B1) to FIG. In addition, an example of the effect performed in the probability variation state (special drawing high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is shown. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the type of mini-game started depending on the current gaming state is different. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the dice game is likely to be started as a mini game, and in the probability variation state, the fortune game is likely to be started as a mini game. In the normal game state, the dice game may be started as a mini game, and in the probability change state, the fortune game may be started as a mini game. Also, the appearance frequency of mini-games may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in a probabilistic state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit. Therefore, the occurrence probability of the mini game may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. Also, the probability of occurrence of a mini game may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state. Further, the mini game may be executable only in the probability variation state, or the mini game may be executable only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for a certain mini-game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be higher in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state, or appears only in the probability variation state. May appear, or may appear only in the normal gaming state. Also, with regard to a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be higher in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state, or appears only in the probability variation state. There may be a case, and it may appear only in a normal gaming state.

  FIG. 190 (A1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. 190 (A1) to FIG. 190 (A6) are the same as those in FIG. 189 (A) except that the display of the samurai mode and the display of the samurai character BA are the normal mode indicating that they are in the normal gaming state. Since this is the same as (A1) to (A6) in FIG.

  FIG. 190 (B1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (B1), the “probability change mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the probability change state. ing. In the upper right part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “right-handed” is displayed, and a hitting suggestion display is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 190 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are both in the default display mode. Displayed on the lower right side of the display area. In this effect example, the multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the gaming state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the princess character image HM2 to notify that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. 190 (B1) to FIG. 190 (B5) show that the game state is the performance mode in the princess mode, and the hold display in FIG. 1 becomes the hold display in FIG. 189 (B1) to (B5), except that the number of hold displays is different and the position of the hold display and the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 are switched. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (B5), after the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that the reward is a mission achievement is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 190 (B6) In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is deleted. In this production example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 in the second special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the pre-reading notice. The third display mode is changed to a circular and red display mode. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is obtained. In this manner, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 191 (A1) to (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded. FIGS. 191 (B1) to (B6) show the multi-function display area MF1. An example in which a hold display area for displaying a hold icon is also used is shown. Note that FIG. 191 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, but it can also be applied to the above-described fortune game.

  FIG. 191 (A1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the area is enlarged. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed so that the visibility is improved. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “3” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, and “Delay 3UP” is displayed. It is explained that when the item “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed by operating 136, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Here, the display showing the Sabohani character image SBH and the dice “3” is enlarged. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping the multi-function display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. Note that the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 starts to be displayed, or after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be displayed, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is displayed. Further, even when the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “with hold 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 is started, and the display start timing of the step-up notice SU1 is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the indication of the “3” of the dice and the display of “with hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. Also, the timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the “3” on the dice in the multifunction display area MF1 is started and the display of “Delay 3UP” is started. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may be necessarily expanded or may not be expanded. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini game is started in the probability changing state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is played in the normal gaming state. When started, the multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded. When the mini game is started in the normal gaming state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is started in the probability change state. In this case, the multifunction display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative pattern, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative pattern, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded. It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. In addition, the multifunction display area MF1 that is not expanded may be overlapped with the decorative pattern, or may be overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1 that is not expanded.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the large-displayed button image 136aL is displayed together with this button image 136aL to display “press”, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is informed that the operation valid period has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the multifunction display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunction display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 is overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 is not overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1. It should be noted that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, or the step-up notice may be overlapped even when the multifunction display area MF1 is not expanded and displayed. In addition, the timing at which the button image 136aL and “press” display in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of the button image 136aL and “Press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136aL in the multi-function display area MF1 is started. And “Press” may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 is overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 is not overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. Has been. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. For this reason, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A4), as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the enlarged dice symbol shows the achievement of the mission. Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. In the multi-function display area MF1, the Sabohani character image SBH is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), the step-up notice is finished. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 is reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game result is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, The result may be erased, or after the result of the mini game is erased, the multi-function display area MF1 may return to the default size.

  FIG. 191 (B1) shows a state where the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this effect example, a multi-function display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-described tutorial display, notice display, and mini-game effect display, a hold icon is also displayed. The hold icon shown in FIG. 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 191 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon in FIG. 2, and the “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH. It is notified that the dice game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, the display of “3” of the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, along with the display of “3 on hold”. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even when the display of the "3" roll of the dice and the display of "with hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU1 is started is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started or the step-up notice may be started after the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the multi-function display area MF2. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3UP” may be started in the multi-function display area MF2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and “press” in the multi-function display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multi-function display area MF2. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the step-up notice SU2 may be displayed, or after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2 is started. And the display of “press” may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B4), as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the design of the dice is the outcome of mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In the multi-function display area MF2, a savory character image SBH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the step-up notice is finished. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 192 (a) shows a state where the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default t display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 192 (a), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in this mini game display area MN2, the mini game is started, and the “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH, thereby informing that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (c), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, the mini game display area MN2 is erased, and the mini game effect is displayed. A state in which the display is greatly enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display indicating the outcome of the “3” of the dice and a display of “Delay 3 UP” are displayed in a greatly enlarged manner, and an effect is produced after the mini game is started. It is described that when the button 136 is operated and the "3" roll of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the period in which the mini game is being performed. In addition, when the mini-game is not started, the step-up notice is scheduled to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3, but with the expansion display of the mini game effect display, Has been censored. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without being terminated. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may overlap and be displayed on the mini-game effect display, or the mini-game effect display may overlap and be displayed on the step-up notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (d), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. Are displayed. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is “3” indicating the achievement of the mission. "Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of". " At this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with an outcome of “3”. In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. In addition, in the mini game display area MN2, a Sabohani character image SBH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Note that the timing of the derivation display of the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the redisplay of the mini game display area MN2, or after the mini game result is derivation displayed, the mini game display area MN2 The result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (f), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the size of the decorative design returns from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position also returns to the default display position. Also, with the end of the mini game, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the pre-reading notice from the default display mode. The display mode has been changed. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbols may be finalized after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed. The timing at which the mini game display area MN2 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or after the mini game display area MN2 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Alternatively, after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the mini game display area MN2 may be deleted.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 192, the dice game is described as an example of the mini game, but the present invention can also be applied to the above-described fortune game.

  Moreover, although the dice game and the fortune game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed as the mini-game described above, it is configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 193 to FIG. 200 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 193 to 200, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 193 to FIG. 200, a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (a), a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. This customer-waiting demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which no special drawing is displayed, and is an effect display for promoting the player's willingness to play the game. In the lower part of the display area, “display menu with push button” is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demonstration display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed in the standby state. It is informed that the menu screen is displayed when is operated.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 193 (c). In the menu screen, each item of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini-game, and end is displayed in a column, and below it is displayed a text of “select” along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137, and OK. It is shown that the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

  Here, when the item “member registration” is executed, the screen shifts to a member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the management server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history or customizing an effect. The player reads the two-dimensional code and obtains the URL of the initial registration page, for example, with a portable terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the portable terminal. The management server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the portable terminal or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the management server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

When the item “2D code issuance” is executed, a 2D code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The two-dimensional code issuance is prepared on the assumption that the player selects the game when the game in the original mode is set.
The two-dimensional code here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in increments of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can do. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. In place of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the number of character strings increases, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be completely written. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points. In addition, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of jackpots, the number of jackpots, store identification information, information specific to the game machine, operating status, number of errors, and the like may be included. Information representing the game result, mission achievement status, accumulated value of original mode points, number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the management server.
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, when issuing a two-dimensional code, a warning screen is displayed to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.
When the player photographs the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the barcode reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, “http: //www.˜/jp” representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the management server, personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code, A URL to which an argument representing history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information that has been stored in the operation server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is Updated to the history information contained in the argument part.
In the present embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the gaming table as it is, the history information stored in the gaming table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be erased based on the player's operation after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not erase the history information, the game can be returned to the game reflecting the history information. You may comprise as follows.

  When the item “game history” is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

  When the item “mini game” is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  Further, when the “end” item is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “member registration”, as shown in FIG. When "2D code issuance" is instructed and the down button 137b is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 193 (e), the cursor CSL instructs "game history" and the down button 137b is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (f), the cursor CSL instructs the “mini game”.

  When the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), the mini-game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 193 (g). Specifically, the title “Today's fortune telling” is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area. A character “select” is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and a character “decision” is displayed below the button image 136a. The cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137. Then, it is informed that one of the four treasure chests (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed and the treasure chest designated by the cursor CSL can be opened by operating the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 193 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure chest BX1 in the upper left. In this mini game, a player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chests. The contents of the treasure box are the results of fortune-telling fortune telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Evil, etc.), and a plurality of types are prepared. In addition, in this production example, a word advice is added together with the result of fortune telling. The fortune-telling results and the word advice are not related to the result of the determination. In other words, it does not at least indicate whether or not the decision is correct. Also, which result is associated with each treasure chest is determined at random. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents change every time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (the result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (h), the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure chest BX2, as shown in FIG. 193 (i).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure chest BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL as shown in FIG. 193 (j). The upper left treasure chest BX1, the upper right treasure chest BX3, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. Thereby, it is notified that the lower left treasure chest BX2 has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 193 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure chest BX2 in the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a spear character BA appears from the treasure chest, and a fortune telling result. “Kokichi” is displayed as a message, “moderately ...” is displayed as a word advice, and a state of calling attention so as not to be too absorbed in the game is shown. In other words, in this production example, “Kokichi” is associated with the samurai character BA, and it may be understood that the fortune telling result is “Kiyoshi” by looking at the samurai character BA.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (l), a character display “Other results are now” is displayed, and the contents of the treasure chest that has not been opened are notified. Note that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 193 (l) differs depending on the character that has appeared. For example, when a princess character HM3 to be described later appears, a character display such as “Other results are here” is displayed. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest BX1 at the upper left, the face image BCH of the chief face appears from the treasure chest BX3 at the upper right, and from the treasure chest BX4 at the lower right. The appearance of the Panda face image PND is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the Banchou face image BCH is a character corresponding to Nakakichi, and the panda face image PND is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the fortune-telling results and the character can be set as appropriate, and the combination of the fortune-telling results and the character may be changed each time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure chest displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (k1), a princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest, and as a result of fortune telling, “Daiyoshi "Is displayed, and as a word of advice, there is a display of" Today's premonition of big catch ", which gives a sense of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 193 (k2), an image BCH of the chief's face appears from the treasure box, “Nakayoshi” is displayed as a result of fortune-telling, ”Is displayed, and there is also a thing that gives a sense of expectation that it may be necessary to play slowly while sitting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 193 (k3), an image PND of a panda's face appears from the treasure box, and “bad” is displayed as a result of fortune telling. ”Is displayed, and some of them are shown to call attention so as not to be overly engaged in the game.

  In addition, for example, a mini-game result that can appear depending on the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. When the setting to increase the appearance rate of the premiere notice promised to be made is made, as shown in FIG. 193 (k4), the display of the word advice “Today is a premonition of big catch” You may make it change to the display "Premiere notice is easy to come out." That is, there may be a case where a result that is not related to the result of the success / failure determination, such as an indication of the appearance rate of the notice, is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think as if it is indirectly related to the influence of the determination. Even when the appearance rate of the notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (k4) may be displayed. Thus, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a single word advice, may be changed.

  Further, in this production example, instead of a single word advice, a tutorial display such as a game description or a model character description may be performed.

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A6) are effects following FIG. 193 (f), and show examples of effects of another mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A1) displays “Today's Fortune-telling-Draw Daikichi- ”Is displayed, and a mini game whose mission is to select a treasure box inside“ Daichi ”is started. Note that FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A4) are the same as FIGS. 193 (g) to (j) except that the display of the titles is different, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 194 (A5) shows a state where the lower left treasure chest BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box and as a result of fortune telling. “Taichi” is displayed. Since the “Daiyoshi” is displayed, the mini-game mission has been achieved, and accordingly, “Mission accomplished” is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A6), instead of displaying “Mission accomplished”, the message “Today is a good feeling today” is displayed as a single advice, and the player is awarded with It gives an expectation. This one-word advice can also be said to be a display that is not related to the result of the determination.

  FIGS. 194 (B1) to (B6) are also effects following FIG. 193 (f) and show that the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 194 (B1) has the same display as FIG. 194 (A1).

  When the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure box BX3 as shown in FIG. 194 (B3).

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B3), the upper right treasure chest BX3 is surrounded by the cursor CSL in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 194 (B4). The upper left treasure chest BX1, the lower left treasure chest BX2, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. Thereby, it is notified that the upper right treasure chest BX3 is determined as the treasure chest to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 194 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a spear character BA appears from the treasure chest and a fortune telling result. "Koyoshi" is displayed. Since the “Daiyoshi” is not displayed, the mini-game mission has not been achieved. Therefore, “not achieved…” is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (B6), instead of displaying “not achieved…”, a message “moderately ...” is displayed as one word advice, It shows how to call attention so as not to overdone.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), the above-described customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 195 (c). In the menu screen shown in FIG. 195 (c), the members registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end items are displayed in a column, and below that, along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p, “select” "Is displayed, and the OK button operation promoting image 137q and the button image 136a are displayed together with the" OK "character display. The cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

  When the “customize” item is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of customizable settings will be described later.

  In addition, when the item “Clear Personal Data” is executed, information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent data from being cleared accidentally.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “member registration”, as shown in FIG. 195 (d), the cursor CSL Indicates “customize”. Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL indicates “customize”, the screen shifts to a customization menu screen as shown in FIG. 97 (e).

  On the customize menu screen, various settings for auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, tutorial display on / off are displayed in a column, and the direction below “Select” characters are displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and “decision” characters are displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. The upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL to move up and down and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

  Here, the “auto button mode” is an effect mode in which each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the button operation timing is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous hitting operation effect that requests a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at every appropriate timing (for example, every 200 ms). In this production example, when the “auto button mode” is set to ON, the buttons are set to full auto in which the various buttons are automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which the button is automatically operated by long press. Here, the long press auto is an operation in which a plurality of operations are continuously performed when a long press operation by the operation unit is performed in an effect (including a mini game) that requires a plurality of operation units. It is a pseudo operation that has been done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is handled as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hit operation effect is executed, by pressing and holding the effect button 136 for a long time, control is performed so as to perform a pseudo continuous hit operation. The full auto is an operation that is performed when the operation unit is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation unit even when the operation unit is not operated.

  In addition, the “eco mode” restricts driving of one or a plurality of driving devices, for example, turning off various lamps 418 in order to reduce power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Or it is a mode to stop. In this embodiment, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied after the eco mode is turned on, various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced. Note that a device whose drive is to be limited or stopped can be set as appropriate.

  In addition, “Premier notice appearance rate” indicates the appearance rate of the notice that it is guaranteed that the jackpot symbol will be finalized and displayed when it appears. The normal probability table where the premier notice appears with a probability is used to draw the premier notice, and if it is set to high, the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first The high-probability table is used, and the lottery for the appearance of the premier notice is controlled.

  Further, when “Tutorial” is set to OFF, the above-described tutorial display is controlled not to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates the “auto button mode”, as shown in FIG. The “Auto Button Mode” setting that has been instructed is changed to “On”.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once in a state where the setting of the “auto button mode” is “on”, the setting of the “auto button mode” is set to “on”. To be confirmed. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen shifts to the menu screen as shown in FIG. 97 (h). In addition, when the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the setting of the “auto button mode” is “on”, the result of the setting of the “auto button mode” is not reflected. The menu screen may be displayed, or the result of setting the “auto button mode” may be reflected (confirmed) and then the menu screen may be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (h), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “customize”, as shown in FIG. Instruct the mini-game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL indicates “mini game”, the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 97 (j). The Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bancho character is displayed, the name of the mini-game “bancho wake-up game” is displayed, and below that, a mission of “breaking clothes with button hits” is displayed. Is displayed. In other words, in this mini-game, when the mission button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation reception period of the production button 136 and the mission is achieved on the condition that the production button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the dresser's clothes are broken. To indicate the mission completion.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the long character, and the character display of “START” is displayed above the button image 136a. The state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, as described above, although the “auto button mode” setting is set to “on” and set to full auto, in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective, and the production button The automatic operation 136 is not performed. When the “auto button mode” setting is set to “on” and the long press auto is set, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the long press auto setting is not effective. Only the one manually operated is effective, and thereafter the production button 136 is not automatically operated. In this example, the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game executed during the symbol variation display. For example, as in this production example, it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game executed during the symbol variation display. The change speed of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game executed during the execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of the default display mode). (For example, the default display mode, the vibrating display mode, the rotating display mode, the vibration mode and the rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display May be the same.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 195 (l) to (n), when the operation valid period elapses without any pressing operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 195 (o), The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the dress of the watchmaster character has not been achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (o), “Bancho Awakening Game” and “End” are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

  In this production example, the player may be able to select the mini-game execution. For example, in the customized menu screen that shifts from the menu screen, whether or not the mini-game can be executed is set. It may be possible to select the type of mini-game that can be executed.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if an effect with an extremely low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini game May be improved.

  FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 are diagrams showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  196 (A1) to FIG. 196 (A6) are the effects following FIG. 195 (i), and show that the mission is achieved as a result of the player operating the effect button 136 repeatedly. Note that FIG. 196 (A1) to FIG. 196 (A2) are the same as FIG. 195 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of star effect images corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 196 (A3) to (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and the number of star effect images approaches the number of operations to achieve a mission. As shown in FIG. 196 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is further struck and the number of operations at which the mission is achieved is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. You will be shown that your clothes have been broken, and you will be informed that the mission has been accomplished by displaying “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in good condition”.

  FIG. 196 (B1) to FIG. 196 (B6) show the examples following the effect of FIG. 195 (i), in which the long press auto is effective in the mini game. It shows how the mission was achieved as a result of the pseudo-hit operation. Note that FIG. 196 (B1) to FIG. 196 (B2) are the same as FIG. 195 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (B3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only one star effect image in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous hitting operation has not yet started. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, when one press operation is desired, the long press of the effect button 136 is performed in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of pseudo continuous hitting. When a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the quake, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is small, and the star effect image is also displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the manner in which the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes is different depending on whether a normal continuous hitting operation by the player is performed or a pseudo repeated hitting operation by long press auto is performed. .

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 196 (B4) to (B5), an operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of star effect images to be displayed also increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is approached, as shown in FIG. After that, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is further performed with the effect button 136, and when the number of operations at which the mission is achieved is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The clothes worn by the character are shown to be broken, and “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in good condition” are displayed to inform that the mission has been accomplished.

  FIGS. 197 (C1) to (C7) are effects following FIG. 195 (i) and show an example in which the long press auto is invalidated in the mini game. It shows that the operation was not performed and as a result the mission was not achieved. Note that FIG. 196 (B1) to FIG. 196 (B2) are the same as FIG. 195 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, the pseudo continuous hit operation is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197 (C4), the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, so that the star effect image does not increase, and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) since the effect button 136 was last operated. ), The number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the display mode of the number-length character does not change, and the mission of breaking the number-length character's clothes It is shown that it was not achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (C7), “bancho awakening game” and “end” are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 198, the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is enabled for effects (including mini-games) that require a single button operation or multiple operations, but the operation key unit 137 With regard to effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example in which the function of full auto (or long press auto) is disabled is shown.

  FIG. 198 (A1) to FIG. 198 (A6) are examples following the effect of FIG. 195 (i), and show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. As a result of the pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, a state in which the mission is achieved is shown. Note that FIG. 198 (A1) to FIG. 198 (A2) are the same as FIG. 195 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A2), the full auto functions and a pseudo continuous hit operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of star effect images corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 198 (A3) to (A5), the star effect image is displayed as the number of operations by the pseudo operation increases. 198 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations at which the mission is achieved is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown to be broken, and the display of “Bancho Awakening” and “Today is in good condition” is displayed to inform that the mission has been achieved.

  FIG. 198 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (f), and shows another example effect of a mini game. That is, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1) displays the title “Today's Fortune-telling-Draw Daikichi-” at the top of the display area. A mini game whose mission is to select a treasure chest inside is started. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and the treasure chest to be opened is determined by operating the effect button 136. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini game is determined. Since this is done, the full auto function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

  On the other hand, in such a mini game, the full auto may be made to function. For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B1 ′), as soon as the mini game starts, the full auto functions and the effect button 136 is activated. Is operated in a pseudo manner, and as shown in FIG. 198 (B2 ′), the upper left treasure box is automatically selected. That is, in the mini game in which the treasure chest is selected by the buttons of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure chest to be opened by the effect button 136 is determined as described above, when the full auto function is activated, the treasure chest that the cursor CSL indicates first. May be arbitrarily determined as a treasure chest to be opened, and the player's intention to operate may not be reflected at all.

  In the present embodiment, a mini-game for deriving a result that is not related to the result of the determination as to whether or not the game is in the standby state is performed. And / or at least one of the symbol variation display) may be executed in a mini game to be executed, or may be executed at any time regardless of the gaming state for the purpose of killing the player's time. .

  FIG. 199 and FIG. 200 are diagrams showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, the appearance movable effect body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, a state in which the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is shown. It should be noted that the mini game may be always started during the execution of the big hit game, or may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and a state where a big hit is shown is shown. Also, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 All the hold icons h24 are displayed in a default display mode. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  FIG. 199 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and has shifted to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit start” to notify that the big hit game has started, and the upper right of the display area indicates that it is the first round of the big hit game. “1R” is displayed, and “0GET” is displayed to indicate the current number of winning balls in the big hit. In addition, you may make it display the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the ream. In addition, the number of winning prize balls won (over winning) just before the variable winning slot 234 is closed when the number of winning balls in the variable winning slot 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10). The number of prize balls based on game balls may be included or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (b), a child panda character may appear and perform a comical action to entertain the player. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing a right-handed hand may be performed.

  FIG. 199 (c) shows a state where the fifth round of the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “5R” indicating the fifth round of the jackpot game and “735GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (c), the display “Mini game starts in the next round” is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (sixth round). I foresee that.

  FIG. 199 (d) shows a state in which the sixth round is started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “6R” indicating the sixth round of the jackpot game and “750 GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (d), a display “Mini game is about to start” is displayed, and it is predicted that the mini game will be started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chief character appears, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” of the dice and a display of “actual action UP when it appears” are performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that after the start, the effect button 136 is operated and when the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and a display based on winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes. In addition, if the production movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is ensured that the reserved consecutive villa is generated. That is, it can be said that the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game is an example of a prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the variation of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. Is displayed, and a state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and display based on winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (g), as shown in FIG. 199 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a dice symbol “3”. It is shown that the mission was stopped in the manner shown, and the mission was not achieved. Note that the number of winning prizes displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 199 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (i), the display indicating the outcome of “3” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and the mini game mission is not achieved. The display of “sorry” to be notified is performed. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and no notification is made as to whether or not the reserved consecutive resort is performed. In this production example, if the result of pre-reading results in a reserved consecutive resort, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game, and the production movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate. In addition, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may always operate or may not operate. In addition, the number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. Display based on.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 199 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit end” to notify the player that the big hit game has ended. Also, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “16R” indicating that it is the 16th round and “2400 GET” indicating that the number of winning prize balls is 2400 are displayed. Yes.

  In the mini game of this production example, the game is performed by operating the production button 136 once. For example, the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. 97 is started and a privilege is given when the mission is achieved. (For example, the advance notice of the effect movable body 224) may be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a description will be given of a situation where a mission is achieved in a mini game executed during the execution of a big hit game. 200 (a) to 200 (d) are the same as FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (e), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chief character appears, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” of the dice and a display of “actual action UP when it appears” are performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that after the start, the effect button 136 is operated and when the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Here, the chief character is displayed in a manner in which clothes are broken, suggesting that the mission is likely to be accomplished. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and a display based on winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the dice symbols in a variable manner, and displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT, and “press” above it. Is displayed, and a state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be accomplished. In addition, the number of winning balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and display based on winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (g), as shown in FIG. 200 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the outcome of the dice symbol “1” is displayed. It is indicated that the mission was achieved by stopping the display in the manner shown. The acquired winning ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 200 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i), the display indicating the outcome of “1” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is achieved. The message “Yet's done” is displayed. In addition, a display of “attention to arms” is displayed below, and it is predicted that there is a possibility that the effect movable body 224 may operate. Note that the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are awarded to the variable winning opening 234. Display based on.

  FIG. 200 (j) shows a state in which the seventh round is started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “7R” indicating the seventh round of the big hit game and “900 GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 after the big hit.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a large number of star effect images are displayed, and a display as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Yes. Note that the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and display based on winning of 61 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “confirmed reserved resort” and informs that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of “holding villa confirmation” in FIG.

  In this production example, it may be informed that the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above can be combined and executed.

  In the embodiment described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

  Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using other display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other production means (for example, movable means such as production movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, etc. Other devices) may be used for notification.

  Further, the above-described mini game may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In addition, as in the mini game described above, when the mini game is started, it is preferable that the result is always notified, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the case of a symbol variation display in which the number of suspensions of the variation display of the special figure is four, generally the variation time may be short. You may make it interrupt without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the effects of the game.

  Further, the above-described mini game may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden big hit (for example, a combination of a big hit decorative pattern is displayed without going through a reach effect). Mini-games when an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, or when the RTC effect starts, the effect display being executed switches to a display such as a wipe, etc. May be interrupted. For example, if a mini-hit occurs suddenly during a mini-game and the mini-game is interrupted, the player suddenly becomes a big-hit during the period when he is looking forward to the results of the mini-game. There are cases where you can give. If the mini-game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to entertain the link on the effect with other game machines by the RTC effect.

  Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may be configured such that the position and size thereof change depending on the gaming state, the effect mode, and the stage.

  In addition, as an operation mode required in the above-described mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a one-time operation, a continuous hitting operation, a long press operation, and a timing operation can be employed. Thereby, the result of a mini game may be able to be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, when the mini game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini game may be started before reaching the reach. When reaching reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variation display. Therefore, by starting a mini game before reach, the effect of effect before reach may be enhanced.

  In addition, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the above-described mini game is for notifying that the advance notice is performed, but the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be the advance notice or the prefetch notice. For example, the change notice or the prefetch notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the prefetch notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 201 to 285. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are used only in the description using FIG. 201 to FIG. 285 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, In the description using FIG. 285, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, an effect button 136 as an example of operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 203) by the player's operation, An effect button lamp 138 that is incorporated in the button 136 and emits the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in many colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting unit that can emit light from the inside of the operation unit. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of the operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operation means, and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operation means. A specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  202 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 203 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 174, a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. ing.

  FIG. 203 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an effect unit capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 225, and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced to a position where it is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position where it overlaps on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position).

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding devices 246 overlap each other so that the player can hardly see the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Here, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured not to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 also controls a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, an effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136). A drive circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and various buttons included in the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 (for details) An operation unit sensor 426 that detects the pressing of (described later), a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a signal from the CPU 404 that is stored in the ROM 406. Read image data, etc., and use VRAM 436 work area to generate display image And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. This voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 402 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the output circuit, game control is started (first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current positions of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 A frame lamp drive circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 205A to 205C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 205 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is arranged. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 205 (c) shows an example of a normal stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main process of the main control unit executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 206 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates a RAM clear switch 180 provided on a power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 204, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If the first special figure starting port 230 is won and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is received from the winning counter value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 205 (c)) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 205 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 205A are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag is on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when the special figure I is turned on and the second off-flag is turned on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. Update processing is performed.

  In step S311, when it is detected that the various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 have been pressed, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the press of the various buttons is performed.

  In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, a mission achievement determination process (details will be described later) is performed. In step S325, an original mode control process (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process ends.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  In step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-described low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 210A is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 201, and FIG. 210B is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), the operation key unit 137 has six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, and a clear button 137f. Yes. In the following description, in order to simplify the description, among the components of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e are shown in FIG. It may be expressed in the form shown in b).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function that performs a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state where the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer. Yes, the continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effects using the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 100 ms interval) while the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed. Is configured to be performed in a pseudo manner. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137, the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to appropriately perform the single operation, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is used until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the start of the pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. It is configured not to start the pseudo continuous hitting operation.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the display example on the menu screen illustrated in FIG. 211. The following figure shows how the screen changes in alphabetical order in parentheses. 211 and 212 show how various settings are performed on a menu screen that can be executed when the symbol variation display is not performed, for example.

  Note that the menu screen in the present embodiment allows a player to change the setting. In addition to this menu screen, for example, a setting menu screen for a game store side is displayed. It may be configured such that various settings can be changed by the side, for example, a master volume, a store name, or the like may be input. Further, in the slot machine, for example, a setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB, etc. may be made on the menu screen.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen can be displayed in the standby state, but for example, the menu screen cannot be displayed in the power support state (probability change, time reduction). Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are both stopped and displayed in an out-of-display manner, and the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed with a display result that is not corresponding to the display results of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, respectively. Although not shown in the figure, the number of hold of the variable display in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is both zero. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), the effect display in the standby state is performed.

  Also, at the bottom of the display screen, an icon representing the effect button 136 is displayed along with the characters “display menu screen”, and it is notified that the screen can be shifted to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the effect button 136 is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen (“setting screen” as shown in FIG. 211 (b). Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Specifically, on the menu screen, “volume light intensity adjustment” for adjusting volume and light intensity, “member registration” for registering a player's game history by entering a password, appearance frequency of effects such as notices, etc. Four menus are displayed so as to be selectable: “Production customization” for setting the button, and “Operation assist setting” for setting the long-press auto-strike function and the auto button function to be described later. Below these menus, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the OK button 137e on the right side thereof. Further, on the right side, a character “Return by” is displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Thus, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. In FIG. 211 (b), it is also notified that when the effect button 136 is operated, the display returns to the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 211 (a).

  In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set, for example, from 11 levels of 0 to 10, respectively. The volume and amount of light are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to “5”, for example. Needless to say, the default value can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the setting of the volume and the light amount by the setting operation on the menu screen. However, the player may not be able to change the setting of at least one of the sound volume and the light amount. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the volume and light amount settings can be changed only on the setting screen on the menu screen. However, for example, the volume and light amount settings can be changed without going through the setting screen. For example, during the decorative symbol variation display or immediately after the decorative symbol stop display, the operation key unit 137 can be operated to change the volume and light quantity settings without displaying the setting screen. Good.

  In the present embodiment, on the menu screen, the cursor CL can be moved one by one for each operation of the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b, and the long press automatic repeated hitting function described later is invalid on the menu screen. Therefore, the cursor CL cannot be moved by two or more by performing a long press operation. Note that when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is pressed and operated on the menu screen, the cursor CL may be moved by two or more.

  In addition, when the effect display in the standby state is performed, in addition to the effect button 136, any of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, an OK button 137e) is pressed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed. When the menu screen is displayed, in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed, the menu screen may return to the effect display in the standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the down button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 As shown in FIG. 211 (d), a display indicating that “member registration” has been selected with the cursor CL is performed.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the down button 137b once more, the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL as shown in FIG. 211 (e). Display is performed. That is, in this effect example, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “effect customization” menu operates the lower button 137b twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). This is a display that can be selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “production customization” menu is displayed only when the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can be said that there is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the display (an example of the second display) in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL, the lower button 137b (up button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (for example, twice). This is a display that may be displayed in response to (operated in the first operation mode), and that the lower button 137b (up button 137a) has been pressed (operated in the second operation mode). In other words, it can be said that the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is not started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL can be said to be a display when one of a plurality of options is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL may be a display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display for instructing selection of one option from among a plurality of options, and a display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL (first display). When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode) when the third display example) is displayed, “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL. Display (an example of the second display) may be started, and a display (an example of the third display) in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. When the down button 137b (up button 137a) is operated for a long time (operated in the second operation mode), a display (an example of the second display) in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. Started It can also be referred to have.

  In the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed when the display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. It can also be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N ≧ 2) by 137a).

  In the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL may be a display that does not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when the player clicks the OK button 137 e once in the state where “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL on the decorative symbol display device 208, On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 211 (f) is displayed. On the effect customization setting screen, “normal mode” where the appearance frequency of notices and other effects is set to the default setting, only the notice of jackpot confirmation that is determined to be a big hit by appearing without making a false jackpot notice notification The “Premium Up Mode” menu, which is set to improve the appearance frequency of the pre-announcement of the jackpot confirmation with a low appearance frequency in the “One-shot Notification Mode” and “Normal Mode”, are displayed to be selectable. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (g), when the “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL and the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the figure. As shown in 211 (h), along with Princess Chibi's character, "Normal mode" and "You can see the usual performance" are displayed to notify that the normal mode has been set, and the appearance of the announcement, etc. The frequency is set to the default.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL. In this case, even if the player presses the OK button 137e for a long time, the “normal mode” is not set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen transitions to the effect customization setting screen. “Normal mode” is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 211 (f), when the “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL, when the down button 137b is pressed twice, as shown in FIG. 211 (g1). The display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, when “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of “premier up mode” The display can be selected by operating the down button 137b twice. In other words, the display can be selected only when the down button 137b is operated twice. That is, in this embodiment, the display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL can be considered as an example of a second display, and “Normal Mode” is selected with the cursor CL. It can be said that the display indicating is an example of the third display.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (g1), when the “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL, if the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 As shown in FIG. 211 (h1), along with Princess Chibi's character, the message “You can see a lot of premier performances” is displayed to inform you that the premier up mode has been set, and the appearance frequency of the premier notice will increase. Set to

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL, when the down button 137b is pressed once more, as shown in FIG. 212 (e2). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, when “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “operation assistance setting” menu is displayed. The display can be selected by operating the down button 137b three times. In other words, the display can be selected only when the down button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL can be said to be an example of a second display.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (e2), when the “operation assistance setting” is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 212 (f2) is displayed. On the operation assistance setting screen, “no assistance” that does not assist the continuous operation of each button constituting the production button 136 or the operation key unit 137, and each button constituting the production button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is pressed and operated. Even if the operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the operation of the effect button 136, etc. Three menus of “auto buttons” for performing a single operation, a long press operation and a continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner are displayed in a selectable manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 212 (f2), when “no assistance” is selected with the cursor CL, if the player presses the down button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the figure. As shown in 212 (g2), a display indicating that “long press auto-strike” is selected with the cursor CL is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (h2), when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Is displayed to notify that the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, and the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is set to be enabled. In the present embodiment, on the condition that the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid in this way, the continuous hitting assist function by the long press operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137. Is configured to activate. In the embodiment described in this specification, it may be configured such that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is always effective without setting the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured such that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. However, the menu screen may be configured such that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. When the button 137a or the down button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous hit operation. At this time, the interval between the pseudo continuous hitting operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which it can be easily recognized that the menu that is the selection target of the player has been changed. In this case, for example, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e is kept pressed before the setting screen is switched, such as a transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is displayed. After switching, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed, and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed again by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e after the setting screen is switched. May be. Further, at least one of the movement of the cursor CL and the transition of the setting screen may be such that the pseudo continuous hit operation by the long press operation is not performed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect that the long press automatic continuous hit function described later functions. For example, it is possible to set the difficulty level for the effect of performing the continuous hit operation on the menu screen, and when the difficulty level is high, it is easier for the effect that the long press automatic continuous hit function is performed more easily than the continuous hit operation. Can do. In addition, the volume and light amount set on the volume light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect that the long press auto-strike functions.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 213 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the special symbol variable display. The decorative pattern variation pattern in which the re-variable display is performed once or a plurality of times after the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in all of the symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. Point to. In other words, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo-variation that makes it appear that the decorative symbol is fluctuated a plurality of times with respect to a variation display of one special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 that is variably displayed in accordance with the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 and the 4th symbol t1, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color shown in the circle changes into a plurality of types. Yes. In FIG. 213 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized for convenience of explanation. The displayed symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern t1 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In addition, a hold display area is provided at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this hold display area, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 and the second special figure 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold in FIG. h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold in FIG. 1, and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold in FIG. Has been. In FIG. 213 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the number of the hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 is turned on. Is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode (default hold icon), and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-pending mode (for example, a grayed-out hold icon). In addition, it is good also as a mode which replaces with the display in the aspect which is not on hold, and does not display a hold icon.

  In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying a variable icon is provided. The variation icon has, for example, a display form related to the special figure hold display, and is displayed in the same display form as the hold display. For example, the change icon can execute a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) according to the display mode. The variation icon is deleted after the variation display is started. Note that the erase timing of the change icon is not limited to this. For example, the change icon may be deleted when the change display ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (b), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (c), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the manner of fluctuation fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG including the character display of “continue” is stopped and displayed in the manner of fluctuation fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. This pseudo-continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed, so that the player can expect whether or not pseudo-ream will occur.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (e), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and the remaining period for receiving the effect button press is left. A remaining time meter MT representing time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous pattern GG. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 213 (g), results from the operation of the effect button 136. An effect display is performed to the effect that the effect display is started and the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Specifically, the display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed is displayed above the decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 213 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c change again, respectively. The first pseudo-continuous production is started. That is, the second variation display of decorative symbols is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative design display device 208, after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. The third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. By stopping and displaying this pseudo-continuous symbol GG, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the second pseudo-ream will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as shown in FIG. Meter MT is also displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (k), as shown in FIG. 213 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, An effect display is made to the effect that the display of the variation of the decorative pattern for the third time by the pseudo-ream starts after the effect is successful. Specifically, a display of “× 3” indicating that the third variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed is displayed above the decorative symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213 (m), the second pseudo-continuous production is started.

  In the above-described effect example, the effect button image BT is displayed every time an effect (sometimes referred to as a “pseudo continuous generation effect”) that indicates whether or not to generate a pseudo continuous generation is executed, and the pseudo continuous generation effect is generated a plurality of times. Since the effect button image BT is also displayed a plurality of times because it is executed, the effect button image BT displayed at a time is one, and the display of the effect button image BT is intermittently generated every time the pseudo-continuous effect is generated. Indicates that it will be done.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the effect button 136 has been pressed and the effect has been successful. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, for example, the effect of the effect button 136 is that the effect has failed. The effect display may be executed, and the stop display may be performed with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols. In addition, after the effect display indicating that the effect has failed is executed, the display may be stopped with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even when the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Further, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in blue) different from the light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of a first operation mode. Further, the long press operation for a predetermined time or longer by the effect button 136 is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode.

  In this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the production display by the pseudo-run that is executed as a result of the operation of the production button 136 generated after the second operation is the first operation. The first production that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the mode, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said an example.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect display by the pseudo-continuous executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second operation is the second operation. It is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation means is operated the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means. be able to. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect display by the pseudo continuous execution executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an example of a chance eye effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 214 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Here, the chance eye is an aspect in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of symbols having the same color), and is an aspect of the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (a), after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are chances is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 214 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode, and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-hold mode.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (b), together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The characters “PUSH” are displayed, and a remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the left symbol display area 208a as shown in FIG. 214 (d). The chance symbol “A” that has been made is changed to a Tono-sama symbol YM1 that imitates Tono-sama's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM1, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 that are displayed in a superimposed manner on the Tonama symbol YM1 are deleted, and the Tonama symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. Note that the timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set as appropriate. For example, the timing is before the timing at which the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing when the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. The same applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  Further, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a stop in the middle symbol display area 208b as shown in FIG. 214 (f). The chance symbol “B” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM2, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 214 (e), a state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased and a state in which a press operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be simultaneously performed, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 that are displayed in a superimposed manner on the Tonama symbol YM2 are deleted, and the Tonama symbol YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  Further, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (g), as shown in FIG. 214 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM3, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 214 (g), a state in which the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased and a state in which a press operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be simultaneously performed, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT2 and The remaining time meter MT2 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 that are displayed superimposed on the Tonama symbol YM3 are erased, and the Tonama symbol YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. Then, as shown in FIG. 214 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen, and super reach is achieved. “SP reach” is displayed to indicate the transition. Even when the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be deleted.

  In the above-described effect example, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative symbol, and a plurality of these effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and each time the effect button 136 is operated, the effect button images BT1 to BT1 are displayed. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the production button 136 is pressed and the production is successful, and all the chance symbols are changed to the Tono-sama design and transition to super reach. However, after the chance eye production is performed, In the case of not shifting to the super reach, for example, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, Change the display from a chance symbol to a symbol different from the Tono-sama symbol (for example, an evil agent model that imitates the face of an evil agent), inform you that you will not move to Super Reach, and then use a combination of decorative patterns You may make it display a stop.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. However, for example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tonosama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tosama symbol YM3. The production can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and also when the one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first production that can be started.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the effect that the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the first operation mode and the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a second effect that is easily started. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the effect in which the chance symbol is changed to the ton-like symbol as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136 is operated in the first operation mode. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the means, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Can do.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 215 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times during the decorative symbol variation display. In this effect example, a cut-in effect is displayed in which a cut-in image is displayed each time a pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the text “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and a remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and a remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Also, in FIG. 215 (a), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, so the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold in the second special figure hold lamp 220. All lamps are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  When a single press operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT1 displayed on the central left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is deleted and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Will be resumed.

  After that, for example, at the timing when one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 indicate that one second has passed, that is, the gauge is Furthermore, it is displayed in a mode of decreasing by 1 second.

  When a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (h), “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT2 displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. And the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. In addition, the second cut-in image CI2 has a larger display range in the vertical direction than the first cut-in image CI1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is resumed. Is done.

  After that, for example, at the timing when one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 215 (m), the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that one second has passed, that is, the gauge is further reduced by one second. Is displayed in the manner described above.

  Then, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (n), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT3 displayed on the central right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. "And the remaining time meter MT3 are displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of production described above, an example is shown in which the cut-in image is displayed as a successful production every time the production button 136 is pressed and the production button 136 is pressed. The cut-in image may be displayed for only one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136, and the cut-in image is displayed in any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

  Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the depressing operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. At this time, it is good also as a different display mode by the case where pressing operation of the production button 136 is performed, and the case where it is not performed, and it is good also as the same display mode.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. However, for example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. At this time, as soon as the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state where the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. In some cases, three cut-in images can be displayed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and the effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed are The first operation mode can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations, and the second operation mode can be started even when the operation unit performs one operation. It can be said to be an example of one production.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and an effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is easier to start when a second number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operating mode than when a single operation is performed by the operating means in the second operating mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second production. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, an effect in which a cut-in image is displayed as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 216 (a-1) to (a-6) show a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 during the decorative symbol variation display, and FIGS. 216 (b-1) to (b−). 6) shows a state where an effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 when the auto button function is in an effective state. Here, the auto button function is a function of performing a single operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner even if the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In addition, in a state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of the single operation, the long press operation, and the continuous operation are enabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (a-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. If the operation button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 may emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color of light emission is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the second state when it is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins at the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Note that the light emission color is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the first state when it is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-4), as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5), the effect button image BT is displayed. The characters “PUSH” are erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are deleted. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, but such display may not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light indicating that the auto button function is enabled. Note that the light emission color is not limited to green, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the third state when the auto button function is enabled.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed.

  After that, when half of the reception period for pressing the effect button 136 has elapsed, a single operation with the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-4) by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is 0 seconds remaining. The

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5) after the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function. Is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge is 0 seconds remaining, but such display may not be performed.

  In the production example described above, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed and a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when the single operation is performed is shown, but even if a single operation is performed, The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is performed by a single operation by the effect button 136. The content of the effect that is executed when the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is the same as the effect content that is executed when the effect button 136 is operated. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed in the case of, or may be different.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between a state in which the normal operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the single operation can be accepted and a state in which the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pending change notice. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In FIGS. 217 (a-1) to (a-7) and FIGS. 217 (b-1) to (b-8), a hold change notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 217 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. Is displayed. Note that a variable icon display region 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-2), the number of the variable display hold of the special figure 1 is increased to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp The four hold lamps at 218 are lit. Then, in the reserved display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-3), animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In FIG. 217 (a-3), an animation in which a hold icon displayed in a circle extends in the horizontal direction and changes to an ellipse is displayed. At this time, the effect button image BTH is continuously displayed, but may be deleted when the effect button 136 is operated. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 217 (a-3) to (a-5), the hold icon extends in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction only for a predetermined effect execution period (for example, 2 seconds). The animation continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-6), after the animation that the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-7), the hold icon Changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  On the other hand, FIG. 217 (b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is being displayed. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when the symbol stop display timing is reached, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is “decoration 2” − “decoration”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols. 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”is finalized. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been.

  In this state, for example, even if a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-3), the animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is displayed. Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbol. Here, the stop display of a symbol may be a stop display of a special figure or a stop display of a decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-4), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is erased after moving to the variable icon display area 284, and the second special figure 1 hold display h12 is displayed. The animation icons for moving the hold icons respectively displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed.

  After the symbol variation display is started as described above, when a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-5). The animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 217 (b-5) to (b-6), the hold icon is extended in the vertical direction only for a predetermined effect execution period. Animation display that extends in the horizontal direction is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-7), after the animation that the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (b-8). It changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  In the above-described production example, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed, and when the single operation is performed, a display is performed in which the hold icon is changed as the production is successful, but the single operation is performed. For example, when the production button 136 is changed, the display of changing the hold icon may not be performed. For example, when a single operation with the production button 136 is performed, the display of the hold icon is deformed and then the default display is displayed again. You may make it perform the effect display used as an aspect.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. In this case, for example, when the symbol variation display ends and the stop display is displayed during the long press operation, after the next symbol variation display starts, the effect button 136 is pressed again to perform the long press operation. It may be necessary to continue the long press operation even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. In this case, for example, when the symbol change display is terminated and stopped during the long press operation, the effect button is displayed to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function after the next symbol change display is started. 136 may be required to be pressed again, or the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be continuously effective even when the long-pressing operation is continued even during the symbol stop display. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. Further, the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed in a pseudo manner by enabling the auto button function.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect movable body. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 218 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the super reach. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are decorated. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 218 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state in which none is held.

  In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the first special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and corresponds to this. Thus, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1.

  Then, after the transition to super reach as shown in FIG. 218 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Press the button” prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d). Display is performed.

  Then, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (e), as shown in FIG. 218 (f), the effect movable body 224 is moved to the initial position (the first position indicated by the chain line). (Position) to a position (second position) indicated by a solid line.

  In the above-described production example, the single operation by the production button 136 is performed, and when the single operation is performed, the production movable body 224 is moved as if the production was successful, but even if the single operation is performed, If the production fails, the production movable body 224 may be prevented from moving. Further, when a single operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the movement because the effect has failed.

  Moreover, in the example of the production described above, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136. However, for example, the result of the operation is produced by performing a long press operation with the production button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be produced by performing a continuous hitting operation with the production button 136. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, or the position may be moved at the first position, or from the first position to the second position. You may make it move gradually toward. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. For example, the display as shown in FIG. 218 (d) is performed and the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. If the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from the front, the effect movable body 224 is moved as if the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 becomes possible. It may be configured to. After that, in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, when another effect for operating the effect button 136 is generated, the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or produced (in other words, the operation result is displayed or produced even when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation is performed when the button is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or produced), or the long-press auto-strike function may be disabled so that the production button 136 is not pressed in a pseudo manner. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 219 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. Also, in this effect example, a special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the second special symbol display device 214, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color represented in the square mark changes into a plurality of types. It is. As shown in FIG. 219 (a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. Is displayed in a definite manner with a display result of deviation (for example, a white square mark). In FIG. 219 and subsequent figures, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol that is stopped can be recognized. The symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player. In FIG. 219 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 219 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. In this production example, the timing at which the variation icon h00 is deleted is the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may also be before the start of reach production. Note that the change icon h00 is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode when displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 219 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (d). “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 219 (f). The

  In the production example described above, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed and a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when the single operation is performed is shown, but even if a single operation is performed, The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Moreover, in the production example described above, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 220 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, in the state where the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation accepting state may be basically set. In this case, the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, or the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned on. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, the operation is not always not accepted. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 220 (a), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, so that the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 220 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (d)”. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. At this time, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to once cancel the press of the effect button 136 and press the effect button 136 again.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) to (f), the effect button 136 continues to be pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, and then the timing is as shown in FIG. 220 (g). When an operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes a mode in which the remaining time is 0 seconds. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), a cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, and is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219 (f). A cut-in image in a display mode may be displayed.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 221 shows a state in which an effect by a single operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 221 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the auto button function is in a valid state, and a character display of “auto setting” indicating that is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 221 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (d). “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In addition, the green light emission mode which shows that the auto button function is in a valid state may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 221 (e) to (f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136 is displayed at the timing of FIG. 221 (g)). When 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation was accepted, the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), a cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

  In this effect example, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner, the display differs from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIGS. 219 (f) and 220 (h). The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by repeatedly operating the effect buttons. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 222 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a continuous operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 222 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 222 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 222 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (d). The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hit operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This repeated hitting meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136, and when the gauge is full, it is configured that the notice effect is executed assuming that the effect is successful. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 222 (e) to (g), when the repeated operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the repeated hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, an indication to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the repeated hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when the striking operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. For example, even when a continuous hitting operation is performed by an OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means), a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that a big hit will be made. It may be performed. At this time, the long-pressing automatic hitting function by the OK button 137e is disabled, and the long-pressing operation by the OK button 137e does not perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be given. Good. In addition, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e may be validated, and a notice display informing that a cut-in image or the like will be a big hit is also performed by a long-pressing operation by the OK button 137e. In this case, since there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e, such as a difference in button size or stroke, the player can select and operate a favorite button. There is. Further, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and is not provided with light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138, it is difficult for the player to know whether the OK button 137e is in an operation valid state, and the OK button 137e. For example, it can be said that the operation is for advanced users who have obtained the information from a strategy magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or the lower side of the effect button 136 so that the OK button 137e can be easily operated with the left hand.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when the striking operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. The notification is performed, but, for example, only by operating the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit is given is performed. You may do it. In this case, it may not be notified that an effect is performed by a single operation of the OK button 137e. As a result, there may be a case where superiority can be given to a skilled player who knows the existence of the back button effect.

  In this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed, and is an example of a third effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto repetitive strike function is disabled, the effect that is executed when the gauge of the repetitive strike meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Note that, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be in the second state during the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In other words, the effect button lamp 138 may not emit light, or may emit blue light.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a long press auto-strike is performed in the rendering by the striking operation of the rendering button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 223 shows a state in which the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (a), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 223 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 223 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 223 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (d). The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 223 (d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 223 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the press of the effect button 136 is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 223 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the production example described above, an example in which a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, the display indicating that the production has failed is shown. If the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full after 4 seconds, it may be possible to give a notice of a cut-in image or a notice of a big hit, assuming that the production has been successful. In other words, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first operation mode. It can be said that the production of is configured to be able to start.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result of the operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation result (first effect) is displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. It can be said that it is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation) for a notification display such as a cut-in image that is displayed successfully in a repeated hitting operation effect or a notification that a big hit is expected. It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated in a mode, and when a long press operation of the effect button 136 (operated in the second operation mode) is performed, the continuous hit operation effect is displayed successfully. It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it will be a big hit may be started.

  In the present embodiment, a notice display such as a cut-in image that has been successfully displayed in a continuous hitting operation effect or a notification for notifying that it will be a big hit may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. It can also be said.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a long press auto-tapping is performed in the rendering by the striking operation of the rendering button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 224 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 224 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 224 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the effect button 136 before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 224 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 224 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this effect example, since the player has already started the long press operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo continuous hit operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 224 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 224 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long-press auto-tapping function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. That is, when the operation means is being operated for the second time, the first effect can be started as if the operation means was operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times. It can be said that it is composed.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by repeatedly operating the effect buttons. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 225 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 225 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 225 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 225 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (e) to FIG. 225 (h), when the repeated operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the repeated hit meter RD increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off each time the effect button 136 is pressed, and emits red again when the press operation is released. Therefore, it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. Sometimes it can be recognized. In addition, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, a different color (for example, blue) may be emitted.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, an indication to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the repeated hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  Also, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 blinks only once when the effect button 136 is first pressed. Also good.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the hold change notice is performed during the production by the continuous operation of the production button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 226 shows a state in which the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed and the hold change notice is simultaneously performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 226 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 226 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 226 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (d). The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 226 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the press of the effect button 136 is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Further, in this production example, a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the above-described repeated hitting production, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is increased to 4, FIG. 226 (f). As shown in FIG. 4, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the pending change notice is started. However, in this effect example, priority is given to the continuous hit effect that was being executed, and the operation of the effect button 136 accepts only the hit operation related to the repeat hit effect, and the operation of the effect button 136 related to the pending change notice is at least the repeat hit effect. Will not be accepted until.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 226 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In this effect example, after the continuous hit effect is completed in this manner, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice is accepted. At this time, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is continuously enabled and the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the hold change notice may be started by a pseudo operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the continuous hitting effect is finished, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled and the effect button 136 needs to be pressed again. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous hit effect, the continuous hit effect and the hold change advance notice may be executed simultaneously so that the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the hold change advance notice can be accepted. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice may be accepted by the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, or after the hold change notice is started, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is temporarily performed. It may be configured to be able to execute the hold change notice by canceling and depressing the effect button 136 again.

  In the above-described production example, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long-press auto-tapping function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful.

  Also, in this effect example, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted in the repetitive strike effect, and are held only by the operation of the first effect button. You may be comprised so that a change notice can be started. In this case, for example, for the second effect button, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the first effect button is operated to hold and change while holding the second effect button for long press operation. A notice can be started.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 227 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 227 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 227 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 227 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (d). “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. This long press meter NO is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the accumulated time that the production button 136 is pressed. It is configured to be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to (g), when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the press time of the effect button 136. . The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 227 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 227 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the example of the effect described above, an example is shown in which a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the long press operation being performed, a display to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In the case of a tan, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. Whether or not the gauge of the long press meter NO can be filled is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to make the gauge of the long press meter NO full, the gauge will not become full no matter how long the effect button 136 is kept pressed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 228 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 228 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 228 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 228 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The text “Hold the meter by pressing and holding” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted, and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order to accept the operation, it is necessary to once cancel the press of the effect button 136 and to operate (long press) the effect button 136 again.

  As shown in FIGS. 228 (e), (f),..., After the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the timing of FIG. When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is zero. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the above-described effect example, when the long press effect is started in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not handled effectively. Even when the long press effect is started while being continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be handled effectively.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a continuous hitting operation is performed in the effect by the long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 229 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 229 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 229 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 229 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (d). “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 229 (e) to (g), the player performs a continuous hitting operation instead of a long press operation using the effect button 136. Even when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases in accordance with the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 227, since the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the increase amount of the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 229 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the production example described above, an example of performing a continuous hit operation with the production button 136 in the long press production, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. However, the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. 230 (a-1) to FIG. 230 (a-4) illustrate a state in which the conversation notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 136. FIG. 230 (b-1) to FIG. b-2) shows a state in which a hold change notice is made in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect based on the conversation contents of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. .

  In FIG. 230 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in a default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a non-held state. Has been.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-1), an effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, since the effect button 136 is in an operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this example, the remaining time meter is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the depressing button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, “A reach is expected to develop. A balloon FD1 including the characters “yo” is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. Note that the confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 (the display timing and the audio output timing may vary depending on the display control, audio output control, and signal transmission / reception timing, etc.) May be output at a timing before the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1, or may be output at a timing after the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1. May be. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. In this example, the princess Chibi character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character image CH is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that an effect by operating the effect button 136 is further performed.

  Then, when the pressing operation is further performed once by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-4), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image GY of the spider, A balloon FD2 including the characters “is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. The confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a later timing than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. In this example, the character image GY of the frog and the balloon FD2 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the character image GY of the frog is displayed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  Needless to say, the contents of the character image and the speech balloon that appear in the conversation announcement effect are not limited to those described above, and various kinds can be adopted. In addition, the number of conversation notices executed in one conversation notice effect is not limited to two, but may be executed only once, or may be executed three or more times.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, conversation notices may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo continuous hitting operations. Further, when the conversation advance notice is executed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the confirmation sound described above may not be output. Further, the deviation width between the timing at which the character image and the speech balloon are displayed in the conversation announcement effect and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

  In the above-described production example, the character image and the speech balloon are added and displayed every time the conversation notice is executed, but only the characters included in the speech balloon are added without adding the character image and the speech balloon. May be changed. For example, the first operation button 136 displays the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters “A reach is expected to develop”, and then the second operation button 136 is operated. Thus, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to “Let's get a chance when the bag appears”.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the second stage conversation notice is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  Also, in this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the second stage conversation notice is more than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, the conversation notice executed as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, FIG. 230 (b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is being displayed. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. . In this effect example, the effect button 136 is in an operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. The effect button lamp 138 may be lit in red, for example.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (b-1), when one press operation is performed by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the fourth operation at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (b-2). The special figure 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode imitating the face of Tono-sama. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In FIGS. 231 (a-1) to (a-4) and FIGS. 231 (b-1) to (b-4), the effect of operating the effect button 136 during the variation display of the decorative symbol is shown. It shows how multiple events are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 231 (a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 231 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (a-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 231 (a-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Moreover, in this example of production, since the production button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first production button production and the second production button production, the operation of the production button 136 is not treated as being effective. As shown in 231 (a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any production button production. The first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. And it may be started at a timing later than the start of the second effect button effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (b-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 231 (b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 231 (b-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 231 (b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but the long press auto-strike function is enabled. As shown in FIG. 231 (b-4), only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the first effect button effect is displayed among the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. The result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to which effect button effect is displayed, for example, may be performed only for the effect that started earlier, or an effect that is preferentially executed is determined in advance. It may be.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 232 shows a state in which another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started during the execution of the effect of operating the effect button 136.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 232 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 232 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed at the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation with the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. In the device 208, a balloon FD1 including characters “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 232 (e), the number of holdings of the variable display of the special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure holding lamp 218 Four hold lamps light up. Then, in the reserved display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed with a hold icon in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of a second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, since the second effect button effect is an effect started after the first effect button effect, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, The result of the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the button image BTH is not displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the balloon FD2 including the character “Gear up the chance with a spear appearance” together with the spear character image GY at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  In this effect example, only the conversation notice effect is executed and not the hold change notice. However, the hold change notice is continuously executed after the conversation notice effect is ended by the long press auto-strike function. Alternatively, the hold change notice may be executed by once releasing the pressing operation of the effect button 136 and then pressing the button again after the conversation notice effect is finished.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which an effect button is operated in accordance with the rhythm. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 233 shows a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the first special symbol display device 212 executes the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the variation variation of the decorative symbol. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol “7”. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is still performed and the reach state is reached. FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the state is shifted to super reach after reaching the reach state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, “Princess Dance SP Reach” indicating the type of the super reach that has been transferred, and “Press the flowing button at the right timing” to explain the contents of the effect are displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Mode 3” indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels. For example, the difficulty level is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

  Further, in FIG. 233 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is two, the two hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In this production example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Then, after the “princess dance SP reach” is started, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image HM of the princess dances to the music on the left side of the display screen. The animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed to move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. The hit image HT is displayed on the screen. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT according to music.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (c), when the player depresses the effect button 136 at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the timing image TM is displayed as shown in FIG. 233 (d). The result display RS is changed according to the operation timing 136. The result display RS is displayed in a manner including a character display of “PERFECT”, for example, when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at a timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly shifted. When the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at a timing that is displayed, it is displayed in a form including the character display of “GOOD”, and when the press operation of the effect button 136 is received at a time greatly deviated, A mode including the character display is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 136, and a notice effect according to the final point is executed. If the operation with the effect button 136 is not performed at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT, the result image is not scrolled to the result display RS but is scrolled down to the lower side of the display screen.

  In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the pseudo effect button 136 may be repeatedly operated at regular intervals. Other than the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing, the points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility of executing the notice effect. Thus, the player can be incentive to operate the effect button 136 at the player's own timing without relying on the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect can be improved. In addition, by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, only when the timing image TM completely coincides with the hit image HT (timing that becomes “PERFECT”) or slightly shifted (timing that becomes “GOOD”), The effect button 136 may be configured to be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 234 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the auto button function is released, and FIG. 234 (b) shows how the auto button function is set. FIG. 234 (c) shows a state in which a preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136 is notified, and FIGS. 234 (d-1) to (d-3) show that the auto button function is effective. In this state, the back button effect is being executed. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. A specific production. The player may be able to know the existence of such a back button effect on a strategy magazine or the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly as a notice effect, but is not limited to this. Here, the mode for notifying that the operation is valid is, for example, that the effect button lamp 138 emits light, or the light emission mode indicating that the effect button lamp 138 is effective, One or a combination of two or more of outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound “press the button”) or displaying a predetermined image (for example, a character display “press”) That means. On the other hand, the mode that does not notify that the operation is valid is, for example, the light emission of the effect button lamp 138 or the light emission mode indicating that the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is valid, That is, at least one or all of outputting a sound and displaying a predetermined image is not performed. In addition, the aspect of not notifying that the operation is valid may be that at least a predetermined image is not displayed. In the case where N notification means notifies that the operation is valid, an aspect where the notification is not notified by the N notification means may be an aspect where the operation is not valid. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of losing, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t 1 is also displayed in the first special figure display device 212. In correspondence with the display result of, the display result of the deviation (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Yes. In other words, FIG. 234 (a-1) represents a standby state in which symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In this production example, for example, the auto button setting is performed as described above with reference to FIG. 212, and the auto button function is enabled by simultaneously pressing the left button 137c and the right button 137d in the standby state. Can be set to state.

  When the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light as shown in FIG. 234 (a-2).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234 (a-3), for example, when a button other than the effect button 136 (for example, the left button 137c) is operated when the auto button function is enabled, As shown in 234 (a-4), the auto button function is canceled. That is, the auto button function is disabled. The auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 in a state where the auto button function is valid, or the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed simultaneously. Thus, the auto button function may be canceled. In addition, the auto button function may be canceled even when “no assistance” or “long press auto-strike” is set as described above with reference to FIG. 212.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “auto button is being set” to indicate to the player the auto button function. You may make it alert | report easily that it recognizes that a button function is an effective state.

  The operation when the auto button function is in effect is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), when the effect related to the effect button 136 is being executed, the auto button When the production button 136e is operated at this timing, an advantageous timing for operating the production button 136 is notified rather than when the production button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner by the function. An effect different from the effect executed by operating the effect button 136 in a pseudo manner may be executed.

  In this embodiment, when an effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. For example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Without performing this, the back effect may be executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (d-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in accordance with the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation. Further, in FIG. 234 (d-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In FIG. 234 (d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, indicating that the auto button function is in effect.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (d-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and in response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 The decorative display of the decorative design is started, and the display of the special design 1 and the fourth design t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, no display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 is performed. However, when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect is executable. Note that the back button effect can be executed on the condition that, for example, whether or not to execute the back button effect is determined based on the result of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined auto button function is activated, a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (d-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as a back button effect.

  The effect example described above indicates that the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is performed even when the auto button function is enabled.

  In the example of production described above, the back button effect is executed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the back button effect is performed. Also good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136. On the other hand, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed down before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is not possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect contents (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is a single operation by the effect button 136. The effect content executed when the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function may be the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is operated. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed when it is interrupted.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect using two effect buttons. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 235, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are provided as effect buttons, and the effect related to the effect button is executed in accordance with these operations. It is configured. Here, FIGS. 235 (a-1) to (a-7), 235 (b-1) to (b-4), and 235 (c-1) to (c-6). Shows a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B during the decorative symbol variation display. In this example, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B have different button shapes, but the same shape may be used.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-3), the first presentation button 136A is pressed once, but as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4), the result of the operation is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, the first effect button 136A is operated so that an effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 235 (a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. Thereby, the player may recognize that the result of the operation is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-6), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation with the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function, The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed, FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. , After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136A and the second production button 136B are once released and the second production button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b-1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (b-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is turned off. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-3), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136B in which the effect button lamp is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-3), as shown in FIG. 235 (b-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed. In this way, in this effect example, the effect button lamp of the effect button whose operation result is to be displayed is turned off, and the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if operated is emitted. In some cases, the player can have an unexpected performance, and the effect can be improved.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation with the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. In addition, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (b) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the operation result is displayed. You may do it. Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the effect related to the effect button is started, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are once released and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (c-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-3), the first presentation button 136A is pressed once, but the operation result is not displayed as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4). The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, the first effect button 136A is operated so that an effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 235 (c-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), in this effect example, both effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) with the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation with the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (c) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136A and the second production button 136B are once released and the second production button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 236 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 236 (a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. For example, when the performance button 136 is operated when the character image Y of Tono-sama is selectable, the character that appears after the end of the jackpot game is determined as the character of Ton- sama, and the character image H of the princess is selected. When the production button 136 is operated when it becomes possible, the character that appears after the end of the jackpot game is determined as the princess character, and when the character image G of the samurai is selectable, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character that appears after the end of the big hit game is determined to be a samurai character. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the right button 137d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (b), as shown in FIG. 236 (c), Tonosama character image Y, princess character image H, Display that rotates counterclockwise so that the character image G draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the heel character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the heel character image G is in a selectable state. Thereafter, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 236 (c) to (f). As shown in FIG. 236 (f), the character image G of the heel is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Rotation display ends when the display screen is centered. Making the princess character image H selectable can be realized by further pressing once with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 236 (f). In other words, in this effect example, the princess character image H is displayed in the first operation mode as compared with the case where the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. When the left button 137c is pressed once, the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the samurai character image G are displayed to rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

  In this production example, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated while each character image is being rotated, only the character image remains at the position where the character image is displayed at the time of the operation. The character selection cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Further, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the animation of the rotation display is omitted, and the character image that is in a selectable state is displayed as the position of the front of the display screen. For example, when a single pressing operation with the right button 137d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (c), FIGS. 236 (d) to 236 (e) are displayed. ) May be omitted and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 236 (f).

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the character selection effect is the first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In addition, in this production example, the production by the princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fourth production that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, and even if a long-press operation is performed, only one character image that can be selected is transferred, so the first selection display During execution of the operation means, even if the operation means is operated for more than the first time, the operation means is configured to be operated once. be able to.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 237 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 237 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. In this effect example, the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, and the player continues to press the right button 137d before the start of the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the Tonosama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this effect example, since the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the continuous operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 237 (b) to (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed every time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, if the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (b), the display positions of the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G are maintained. As shown in FIG. 237 (c), a spear character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y was displayed, and a lord's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess's character image H was displayed. The princess character image H is displayed at the position where the frog character image G was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the frog character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is continuously hit, and the princess character image H is selected even when the right button is pressed for a long time.

  In this effect example, even if the long-press auto-strike function is valid, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long-press auto-strike function In the case of performing the pseudo continuous hit operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is pressed after the character selection effect is started. It may be necessary to press it again. Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be limited. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective for each button constituting the operation key unit 137 in addition to the effect button 136.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the character selection effect is the second that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In this production example, the princess character image H can be selected when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display.

  In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 238 shows a state in which a character selection effect performed during, for example, a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. In this effect example, the auto button function is enabled, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the Tonosama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this production example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the repeated operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 238 (b) to (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed every time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). When the auto button function is enabled, the left button 137c may be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 239 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed at the start of a big hit is performed. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “Select a character” is performed, and an explanation display in a character selection effect is performed. Also, Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Princess character image H is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and Samurai character image G is displayed slightly darkly on the left side of the display screen. . The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in a state in which a part is covered by the character display described above. In this production example, the character that can be selected by the operation of the production button 136 can be changed, and the character that can be selected at the end timing of the character selection production (a character corresponding to a brightly displayed character image) ) Is determined as a character appearing in the big hit game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “START” and then starts a character selection effect as shown in FIG. 239 (c). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (c), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen along with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button image 136e below these character images. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. A balloon including a character display “Press the button to select a character” is displayed on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 239 (d), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Is displayed.

  Then, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (e), as shown in FIG. 239 (f), Tono-sama character image Y, princess character image H, and 爺The display of rotating in a counterclockwise direction so that the character image G of the character draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable. Thereafter, the character images are rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 239 (f) to (i). As shown in FIG. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time the depressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character image is replaced without changing the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation is performed. Cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

  In the case where the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be enabled. For example, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed after the character selection effect is started, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function, and as a result, the pseudo effect button is displayed. The character selection cancel display described above may be performed every 136 operations (for example, every 200 ms). Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in this effect example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display until the character selection effect ends (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is not stopped). However, while the rotation of the character image is being performed, the gauge update display may be stopped (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any of the character image Y of Tonosama character image Y, princess character image H, and spear character image G is stopped and displayed in front.

  Further, while the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge update display of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, it may be possible to suppress the operation of the useless effect button 136 by the player.

  Moreover, in this production example, the present invention is applied to the selection of a character appearing in a big hit game. For example, a selection of a piece of music to be output in a big hit game or a normal game state from a plurality of types of music, The present invention can also be applied to selecting a story to be executed during a big hit game from a story.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection effect executed during symbol variation display. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 240 shows an example of the selection effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display. The effect of selecting one of the treasure chests by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d (the treasure chest selection effect) is executed. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), when the treasure chest selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. The icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed side by side between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the left treasure chest image BG2. The right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 are represented by, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are represented by, for example, white. Then, on the upper part of the display screen, a character display “Select a treasure box that can be opened with a direction key” is performed, and it is notified that a treasure box selection effect has been started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this treasure chest selection effect, the left treasure chest image BG1 or the left treasure chest image BG2 is selected by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d until the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure chest selected when the operation acceptance period elapses. An effect in which an item may appear from the image is executed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 240 (b), the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode indicating that 1 second has passed, that is, in a mode in which the gauge is decreased by 1 second. Is done. At this time, the operation using the left button 137c and the right button 137d has not been performed yet.

  When a single pressing operation is performed with the left button 137c, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 changes the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c from white to red, The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure chest image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button has been operated. The audio output timing may be the same as the display change timing, the timing after the display change timing, or the timing before the display change timing. Also good. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (c), for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation acceptance period started.

  Thereafter, when the operation reception period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 240 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode where the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, and the left treasure chest image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. . The items appearing in the left treasure chest image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as a princess character HM as shown in FIG. 240 (e1) can also appear. In addition, as shown in FIG. 240 (e2), the treasure box image is selected, but the lid may not open and the item may not appear. The same item may appear when the left treasure chest image BG2 is selected and when the right treasure chest image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

  In the production example described above, one of the left treasure chest image BG2 and the right treasure chest image BG1 can be selected by one press operation of the left button 137c or the right button 137d. For example, the selection target is a loop. It may be. Specifically, for example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 240 (c), the right treasure box image is displayed because the selection target is a loop. In the state where BG1 is selected and the left button 137c is further pressed once, the left treasure chest image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the selection target is matched with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. These treasure chests may be changed sequentially. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure chest as a selection target has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the treasure chests to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo consecutive hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d after the treasure box selection effect is started.

  Also, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 240C, the selection target is left. It may be configured not to change from the treasure box image BG2. In this case, only a confirmation sound by a single pressing operation of the left button 137c may be output. Further, in this case, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be in an effective state. If the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo repeated hit operation is performed. The treasure chest image that is the target of the above may be configured not to change. Furthermore, in this case, only a confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous hit operation.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by repeatedly operating the effect buttons. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L and the front of the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 are positioned in front of the left end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right image display device 209R is disposed at a position overlapping with the right image display device 209R. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R each function as fourth rendering means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a slide drive motor (not shown) via link members, and are close to each other along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is possible to move on. In addition, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to a rotation driving motor (not shown) via a link member, for example, and when the positions are close to each other, the decorative image display device 208 It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Furthermore, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting unit LL in which full-color LEDs are arranged on the outer periphery thereof, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting unit LR in which LEDs are arranged on an outer periphery thereof. ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of second rendering means. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting portions LL, LR functions as an example of third rendering means (movable means). In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected toward the front by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region can appear to emit light with a predetermined pattern. In addition, the light-emitting body which comprises the light emission parts LL and LR is not restricted to LED, For example, a lamp may be sufficient and other light-emitting devices, such as EL, may be applied. In the example of production shown in FIG. 241, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown for convenience of explanation. Omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in the production example shown in FIG. In other words, the effect by the repeated operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241 can be said to be an example of the second effect. Note that the long-press auto-strike function may be validated in the effect by the repetitive operation of the effect button shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the bottom of the display screen of the right image display device 209R. Then, the continuous hitting effect by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 and a remaining time meter MT below the effect button image BT. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (a), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. In addition, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are all turned off in the normal state. However, the light emitting units LL and LR may emit light in a predetermined manner. You may make it blink. In the present embodiment, a mode in which all LEDs in the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off is also included in one mode of the light emitting mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (b), the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed on the top of the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. It is notified that the effective period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts a continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

  When the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of LEDs that emit light from the lower portion according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The timing shown in FIG. 241 (c) shows that the LED emits yellow light from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL, LR to a height of about 1/4. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the elapsed time is performed. In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR simultaneously emit the same number of LEDs. However, for example, the light emitting unit LL emits light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL emit light. Later, the light emitting unit LR may start to emit light, or the light emitting unit LR may emit light first, and after all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LR emit light, the light emitting unit LL starts to emit light. May be. Moreover, you may make it increase the number which light-emits LED by the light emission part LL and the light emission part LR alternately.

  Thereafter, the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 241 (d) is reached, the LED emits green light from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR to a height of about 2/3. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if the light from the LED has an influence on the image. As described above, the light emitting portions LL and LR change the light emission color according to the number of light emission of the LEDs, that is, the number of operations of the effect button 136. Note that only the number of LEDs emitted may be changed, and the emission color may not be changed. Further, only the emission color of the LED may be changed, and the number of light emission may not be changed. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the LED color of the light emitting units LL and LR changes, or the LED color may change after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. In the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the light emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may be associated with each other or may not be associated.

  After that, the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if light from the LED has an influence on the image.

  Thereafter, when the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character and indicates that the effect by the continuous operation is successful. A mode in which the light emission color changes for all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR so that the light emitting units LL and LR appear to emit light in rainbow colors (hereinafter referred to as “rainbow color light emitting mode”). It may light up. In response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image that is a display mode that is visible in a rainbow color in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR. The timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image is displayed such that the effect image is visually recognized in rainbow colors, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier or the timing when the princess character is displayed may be later.

  Thereafter, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move toward each other at the timing shown in FIG. The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are the closest positions. In addition, as for the light emission parts LL and LR, all LED continues lighting in the rainbow color light emission aspect.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (h), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrally rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, At the timing shown in FIG. 241 (i), a “celebration” character congratulating that it is a big hit is displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative design during the variable display is displayed in the lower left part of the right image display device 209R according to the orientation of the right image display device 209R.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 241 (j), the light emitter disposed near the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Thereby, there may be a case where the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transmissive plate member 118 can provide a deep effect. It should be noted that the effect that a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIGS. 241 (b) to (f), the light emission mode of the light emitting units LL and LR is determined by the number of operations of the effect button 136. You can see effects and effect images that change accordingly, but for example, if the player does not perform the continuous hit operation after the start by the continuous hit operation, these effects are not performed, As shown in FIG. 241 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move at the timing when the operation effective period elapses. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (g) to (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation, but the light emission modes of the light emitting units LL and LR change. Since the effect and the effect image cannot be visually recognized, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect that the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the manner shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e) corresponds to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times. It can be said that the effect is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can also be said that the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e) is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are close to each other corresponds to the repeated operation of the effect button 136. It may be related to the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting portions LL and LR that have been changed or may not be related. In addition, when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are positioned close to each other, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR is successfully achieved by the repetitive operation, and the repetitive operation is performed. It may be different from the case where it is not performed or may be the same.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means from which a position changes according to the content of production other than the light emission parts LL and LR mentioned above. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed in relation to the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. 241, or may not be changed, or the light emission is related to the effect by another continuous hit operation. The aspect may be changed. Moreover, you may not provide the light emission means from which a position changes according to the content of production other than the light emission parts LL and LR mentioned above.

  In addition, the light emitting units LL and LR also perform a predetermined light emission mode (first light emission mode) during execution of an effect other than the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. 241 (for example, an effect during symbol variation display or a big hit game). However, it may be configured to be lit only during the performance by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the first light emission mode is different from the second light emission mode, but may be the same light emission mode.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, instead of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 203) that does not include an image display device may be applied. It is good also as an aspect which provided the light emission parts LL and LR in the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding apparatus 246, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be rotatable together, but may be configured not to rotate. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be configured not to move.

  In this embodiment, two image display devices (the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means. However, the second image display device may be configured by one image display device. You may be comprised by three or more image display apparatuses.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200. However, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided in addition to the effect device 206 of the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. For example, an effect button lamp 138 may be applied instead of the light emitting units LL and LR. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may have a configuration in which light emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may be changed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. Moreover, the structure provided in both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106 may be sufficient as the light emission parts LL and LR. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the light emission unit provided on the game board 200 is linked to the light emission unit provided on the front frame door 106, the effect effect may be improved. In addition, any of the light emitting units in these modes may be movable by a movable unit or may not be movable. In addition, when the light emitting unit provided in the movable means and the light emitting part that is not movable are provided, the light emitting part that is not movable is first caused to emit light, and then the step-up is performed to emit the light emitting part provided in the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so that Further, instead of the light emitting portions LL and LR, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 241 (j) is applied, and the light emission in the pattern formed in the transmission region is applied. You may make it implement | achieve by changing an aspect.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back button effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, effect lamps SL1 to SL4 that function as second effect means are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208, and each lights up. It is comprised so that control can be performed. The effect lamps SL1 to SL4 each have a built-in full color LED as a light emitting means and are covered with a lens cover. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL1, the letter “eight” is drawn. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL2, the letter “Yo” is drawn. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL3, “ The characters “General” are drawn, and the characters “Military” are drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL4. In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected toward the front by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region can appear to emit light with a predetermined pattern. In addition, as a light emission means which comprises effect lamp SL1-SL4, not only LED but a lamp | ramp may be used, for example, and other light-emitting devices, such as EL, may be applied. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are illustrated. Omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, in the example of production shown in FIG. 242, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the back button effect can be executed (the operation reception period for performing the back button effect), it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid. For example, you may perform a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as “If you operate the button at the time of ...”, and this tutorial display may cause the back button effect to happen. It may be displayed during a feasible period or may be intentionally displayed. When such a tutorial display suggests a back button effect, the effect performed by operating the effect button 136 or the like may be referred to as a back button effect, and is not included in the back button effect. There may be.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach title TT “Find a family crest” is displayed in a square frame to notify that a super reach effect is started. For example, a green color scheme is provided in the frame of the reach title TT. In addition, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are all turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be turned off in a normal state, or may be caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white color).

  Thereafter, when a player who knows the existence of the back button effect is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (b), as shown in FIG. 242 (c), the frame of the reach title TT is displayed. The inner color changes from green to red. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, but the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) in which the reach title TT is displayed. By operating 136, a back button effect is performed. Note that the change in the color scheme within the reach title TT frame may be performed by a single pressing operation of the effect button 136 or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. Alternatively, it may be performed when a long press operation is performed for a predetermined time. Further, when the production button 136 is operated, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT is changed as a back button production. For example, the color of the character is changed, the background color and the display mode are changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed every time the effect button 136 is pressed. Further, by operating the effect button 136 while the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may or may not be performed. For example, the effect button 136 may be operated. A lottery may be performed each time the game is performed, and a back button effect may be performed when the winning is made. In the example shown in FIG. 242 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in the color scheme within the reach title TT. In the example shown in FIG. 242 (c), the color scheme in the reach title TT frame may change from green to red even when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, the color may change to a color other than red. In this case, when the effect button 136 is further pressed, the color scheme in the reach title TT frame may be further changed (for example, green> yellow> red).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), the super-reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the super reach production is started, the character display “Development by dropping the family crest” is performed on the left end of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the production movable body 225 imitating the family crest is displayed above the decorative design display device 208. It is notified that the development effect with higher reliability of the big hit is started by falling from.

  After the super reach production is started, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), the player who knows the existence of the back button production (back button repeated production) starts the continuous operation with the production button 136, and the predetermined number of times. As shown in FIG. 242 (e), the effect lamp SL1 is lit in green. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, but the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period when the super reach effect is performed (second period). By repeatedly operating 136, the back button continuous striking effect is performed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as the effect lamp SL1 lights in green, a green effect image is displayed in an area along the lower edge of the display screen, and the light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect is displayed as if it were. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 is lit in green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be lit after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may be associated with each other or may not be associated. Further, the effect image may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect lamp SL1 is turned on by the continuous operation of the effect button 136, and the effect image is displayed along with it. However, the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136. The effect lamp SL1 may be lit in association with it.

  Thereafter, when the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are lit in green according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. To start. FIG. 242 (f) shows a state where all the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. The effect image display mode is not changed, but may be changed. For example, the display area of the effect image may be increased according to the number of lighting of the effect lamps. The lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, you may make it perform a big hit notice by changing the lighting order of effect lamp SL1-SL4 from the normal case.

  Thereafter, the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 242 (g) is reached, the light emission mode of the effect lamp SL1 changes from green to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area also expands upward.

  Thereafter, when the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are changed in order of green according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 242 (h) shows a state where all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are changed in light emission mode from green to red. In the present embodiment, in the back button continuous striking effect, the long press automatic repetitive striking function is disabled, so that the lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not started when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time. In this way, in the back button repeated striking effect, the effect in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit and the effect image are displayed can be considered as an example of a second effect. In addition, the effect image in the back button repeated striking effect can be said to be an example of the second display. In addition, in the back button repeated striking effect, a mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is lit can be said to be an example of a second light emitting mode.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined production time elapses after the start of the super reach production, as shown in FIG. 242 (i), the production movable body 225 arranged above the decoration design display device 208 is lowered, and the decoration design is displayed. The display device 208 moves to a position overlapping the front in the center. At this time, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are in the rainbow light emission mode. The descending operation of the effect movable body 225 is not an effect of the back button effect but an effect executed in the super reach effect. Moreover, the rainbow-colored light emission mode by the production lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emission mode accompanying the movement of the production movable body 225, and is separate from the back button production. It should be noted that the timing of starting the lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the rainbow light emission mode may be simultaneous with the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225 or before the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225. The timing may be later, or may be later than the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (j), the light emitters disposed near the side end portions of the transmission plate member 118 emit light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image changes, and the pattern formed on the transmissive plate member 118 is emphasized. Thereby, there may be a case where an effect with a depth can be performed by the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118. It should be noted that the effect that a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h), as the back button continuous hitting effects, the lighting modes of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are changed. Although the effects and effect images that change according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 can be seen, if the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation, these effects are not performed and the operation valid period elapses. As shown in FIG. 242 (i), the effect movable body 225 is lowered. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 242 (i) to (j) without performing the continuous hit operation as the back button operation, but visually recognizes the above-described back button effect. Since it is not possible, repeated hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means from which the light emission aspect changes according to the content of production other than production lamp SL1-SL4 mentioned above. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed in relation to the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. 242, or may not be changed, or the light emission is related to the effect by another continuous hit operation. The aspect may be changed. Moreover, you may not provide the light emission means from which the light emission aspect changes according to the content of production other than production lamp SL1-SL4 mentioned above. Moreover, the structure which the effect lamps SL1-SL4 move according to the effect content may be sufficient.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a configuration other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. Moreover, the structure by which production lamp SL1-SL4 was provided in both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106 may be sufficient. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the effect light provided on the game board 200 is linked to the effect lamp provided on the front frame door 106, the effect effect may be improved. In addition, any of the effect lamps in these modes may be movable by a movable means, or may not be movable. In addition, when an effect lamp provided on the movable means and an effect lamp not movable are provided, the effect lamp that is not movable is first caused to emit light, and then the step-up is performed to emit the effect lamp provided on the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so that Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 242 (j) is applied, and the light emission in the pattern formed in the transmission region is performed. You may make it implement | achieve by changing an aspect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button repeated striking effect may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode). It is a certain effect, and it can be said that the light of the effect lamps SL <b> 1 to SL <b> 4 is not started when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time (operated in the second operation mode).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button repeated striking effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode), It can be said that the display of the effect image is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and operated (in the second operation mode).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can be said that the effect that the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on and the effect image is displayed in the back button repeated hitting effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 243, an effect button unit 1360 is provided instead of the effect button 136. The effect button unit 1360 includes a button part 136P and a jog dial part 136J. The button part 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, for example, and the position thereof is displaced according to the contents of the effect. The jog dial part 136J is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the outer side of the button part 136P. The jog dial part 136J can be rotated in the forward / reverse direction along the circumferential direction by the player, and a signal corresponding to the operation amount is sent to the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub-control part 400 (see FIG. 204). Is input. In the example of production shown in FIG. 243, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown for convenience of explanation. Omitted. The special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. In response to, the display is stopped with a display result of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the reach state is formed by “decoration 3”. Production is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (a), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. Is shown. In addition, in order to easily recognize the contents of the effect, what is the effect result that is a big hit may be displayed (for example, a character such as “big hit if you win the swordsman” is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT simulating the effect button unit 1360 over the animation of the duel scene. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification that prompts the user to operate the button unit 136P is provided. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits red light. Note that FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the operation valid period started. Then, when the player presses down the button part 136P, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display indicating that the main character has been defeated by the swordsman as shown in FIG. 243 (b).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the revival effect is started, along with the effect button image BT, the characters “Rotate the jog to rewind the time” are displayed, and the jog dial 136J. Informs that it is rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player rotates the jog dial 136J in accordance with the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the animation is rewound to the display of the duel scene in the swordsman reach production. There is a case. Here, in accordance with the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J, a predetermined effect such as an effect image or lamp emission may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the duel scene animation again, and displays a big button image LBT that is a large image imitating the production button unit 1360. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the deca button image LBT to notify that the button portion 136P is pressed. In addition, the production button unit 1360 produces the fact that the button portion 136P protrudes and the degree of expectation for the big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. The timing at which the button part 136P protrudes may be the same as the timing at which the display of the big button image LBT is started, may be after the display of the big button image LBT is started, or the display of the big button image LBT is started. It may be before. In this embodiment, when the display of the big button image LBT is started, the operation effective period of the button part 136P is started. However, when the button part 136P protrudes, the operation effective period of the button part 136P is increased. It may be started. In FIG. 243 (e), the effect button image BT may be displayed instead of the display of the big button image LBT. In this case, the button part 136P may not protrude.

  FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the big button image LBT was started. When the player presses the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 243 (f), the effect movable body 225 disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered as shown in FIG. 243 (g). Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to a position overlapping the front in the center. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image in order to enhance the fact that the effect movable body 225 has been lowered.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R disposed on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 move to positions close to each other, and the effect movable body 225 is moved. It will be a form that surrounds both the left and right sides. The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate-like member in an arc shape, and have a shape that substantially follows the outer periphery of the effect movable body 225. In the present embodiment, the fact that the effect movable body 225 is operated is informed that the game will be a big hit, and the player may be able to recognize that it will be a big hit by looking at this effect. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (g) to (h) are not necessarily performed. For example, even if the button part 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 is not lowered, and the effect is not achieved. The result may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are retracted to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 225 is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 243 (i), In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display showing that the main character has won the swordsman is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the swordsman reach production, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. After the production shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the jog dial 136J is not rotated, and FIG. As shown in d ′), there is a case where the effect shown in FIG. 243 (e) is performed by rotating the button portion 136P as if the jog dial 136J was rotated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing a long press operation with the button portion 136P, it is configured to start a predetermined effect even if the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the predetermined operation by the operation device other than the effect button is replaced by the long press operation of the effect button. Examples of operation devices other than the effect buttons include a touch panel and a touch sensor. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, when performing an operation such as rubbing a hand on the sensor and performing an effect requesting repeated detection / non-detection of the sensor multiple times, this operation is pressed and held for a long time. You may make it substitute by operation.

  Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled by a long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button. You may comprise so that a long press automatic continuous hitting function may be exhibited by long-time detection of a sensor.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of production shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are illustrated. Omitted. FIGS. 244 (a1) to (e1) show a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, the reach state is formed by “decoration 3”, and the super reach (princess dance) is performed. SP Reach) is being performed. In the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Step 1” indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of levels of difficulty, and for example, the degree of difficulty is configured to change according to the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of success of the performance in this princess dance SP reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (a1), the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” on the right side of the display screen is displayed moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen. A hit image HT is displayed on the moving path of the timing image TM. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT according to music. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 244 (b1), the player starts a long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, and the pseudo effect button 136 is repeatedly operated at regular intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. Note that during the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the pseudo effect button 136 may be operated only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. On the other hand, an experienced player does not perform a game for beginners such as operating the long press automatic continuous hitting function by long pressing the effect button 136, and the effect button at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. A high score can be aimed at by playing a game of operating 136. The play method of this “princess dance SP reach” is the same as that shown in FIG. 233 and described above.

  Thereafter, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach is completed, and the result of the game in the first turn is determined. If the determination result is a level-up determination result, as shown in FIG. 244 (c1), the characters “NICE” are displayed, and it is notified that the difficulty level shifts to “Step 2”. . Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c1), since the operation is not valid, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off.

  Thereafter, a game with a difficulty level of “Step 2” is started. FIG. 244 (d1) shows a state in which a game with the difficulty level “step 2” is being performed. Thereafter, when the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e1), the long press automatic continuous hit function is activated again, and the pseudo hit operation of the pseudo effect button 136 is resumed. .

  In the present embodiment, the period in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled is repeatedly performed. For example, a first period in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective (for example, FIG. 244 (a1) to FIG. The second period (for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid across the interval period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 244 (c1)) in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated from the period shown in b1). 244 (d1) to the period (e1) shown in FIG. 244), when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the second after the long press automatic continuous hitting function is once invalidated. In this period, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not effective unless the effect button 136 is pressed again. When the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed from the first period to the second period across the interval period, the long press auto is performed in the second period without pressing the effect button 136 again. The continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  FIGS. 244 (a2) to (d2) show an example of the operation when the premium up mode is selected on the effect customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG. 211.

  FIG. 244 (a2) shows a state in which the premium up mode is set as described above with reference to FIG. 211 (h1).

  As described above, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started after the premier up mode is set, as shown in FIG. Along with the BT, a character “Let's hit repeatedly” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In this continuous hitting operation effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is validated. When the player recognizes that the continuous hit operation effect has been started, the player starts the continuous hit operation using the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation is performed a plurality of times by the continuous operation of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image composed of the character of Tono-sama and the characters “iron plate” as shown in FIG. 244 (c2). There may be a premier notice that is displayed and informs that the jackpot is confirmed. In this embodiment, since the premier up mode is set, this premier notice is likely to occur. When the non-premier up mode is set on the effect customization setting screen, a notice other than the premier notice is given. Is likely to occur.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display of “decoration 5” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 5”, which is a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols. In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mission achievement display indicating mission achievement is displayed. The mission accomplishment display is like a history of the effect occurrence display that has been displayed so far (here, the effect occurrence display that is displayed as “NO92: I saw the iron plate notice”). Note that an effect occurrence display corresponding to an effect with a high expectation may be displayed for a longer time. On the other hand, the effect occurrence display corresponding to the effect with low expectation disappears immediately, and when the effect is executed from the next to the next, it may be overwritten from the next to the next. Furthermore, the effect generation display may be provided with a display indicating the degree of expectation or the appearance frequency of the effect, for example, a rank display of rank A to rank C may be attached. Further, this mission completion display may be a display for opening a hidden effect for the membership service. That is, for example, when the premiere notice shown in FIG. 244 (c2) is performed, a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected) can be executed, and this mission is achieved. You may make it display by display.

  As described above, in this embodiment, setting the premier up mode makes it easy for a premier notice to occur. In some cases, missions can be easier to accomplish.

  In the present embodiment, on the menu screen described above with reference to FIGS. 211 to 212, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL and change the setting screen. And premiere notice (premier production) is easily generated as a benefit of labor such as setting to premier up mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can be said that the result set in the menu screen mentioned above is reflected in the effect that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance eye effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 245 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. In the example of production shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are illustrated. Omitted. Further, in this chance effect, even when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), the decorative symbol display is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that are chances. Then, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period of the effect button press is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. In this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. In other words, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the start of the chance eye effect. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled for an effect that allows the player to recognize in advance the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a1), the ton-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbols. There is a case. FIG. 245 (b1) shows a state in which three decorative patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged in this way is an example of the second display (second effect). On the other hand, displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, for example, a display in the form of the Tono-sama pattern YM1 only, a display in which the Tono-sama pattern YM1 and the Tono-sama pattern YM2 are displayed together, and the aspect in which the Tonosama pattern YM3 is not represented Is a display other than the second display. That is, for each operation of the effect button 136, some effect (output of sound effects, etc.) is performed, and the second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed) after being performed a plurality of times. It can be said.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the cut-in effect including the character display of “heat” is performed, the super reach effect is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (d1). Be started. In addition, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are arranged. Or, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) is started without the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1). Further, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are arranged. , After the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1) is performed, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) may be started.

  In this way, in the chance eye effects shown in FIGS. 245 (a1) to (d1), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. In some cases, the display in the form of three is visible. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is impossible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same can be said for the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1).

  In addition, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an advanced user can quickly view the effect more quickly than the beginner by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times. So there may be a sense of achievement.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that are chances. Then, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period of the effect button press is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), it may be possible to recognize that the presentation button 136 should be pressed three times. In other words, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the start of the chance eye effect. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled for an effect that allows the player to recognize in advance the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a2), the tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbols. There is a case. FIG. 245 (b2) shows a state in which three decorative patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed further once. A button operation additional effect is urged. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), the characters “Push and press” are displayed above the display in a state where three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. A predetermined effect image is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation effective period has started.

  Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (c2-2), as shown in FIG. 245 (d2), a super reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display measure 208. However, at this time, a character display of “Katsuatsu” is added to indicate that the reliability of the super reach effect is big. In addition, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are arranged. Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d2) is started without the button operation addition effect shown in FIGS. 245 (c2-1) to (c2-2) being performed. In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of “Gekiatsu”.

  Thus, in the chance eye effects shown in FIGS. 245 (a2) to (d2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the display in the form of three is visible. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is impossible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same can be said for the button operation addition effects shown in FIGS. 245 (c2-1) to (c2-2).

  Further, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an advanced user can quickly view the effect more quickly than the beginner by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times. So there may be a sense of achievement.

  Further, in this production example, after the number of operations of the production button 136 is notified in advance so as to be recognizable, the production button 136 is further produced and the production button 136 is operated, so the number of times that the production button 136 should be operated is clear from the beginning. In some cases, the player may have a higher expectation for the player.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 246 shows a state in which various settings are performed on a menu screen that can be executed, for example, in a standby state where symbol variation display is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the figure, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a display result of detachment, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed on the first special figure display device 212. In response to, the display is stopped with a display result of deviation. Moreover, since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is 0, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state where none is held. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), a special figure 1 hold number display unit 281A that represents the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 in numbers is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 hold number display section 281A, “0” indicating that the hold number is 0 is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), an effect display in the standby state is performed.

  Further, at the top of the display screen, an icon representing the effect button 136 is displayed together with a character “display menu screen”, and it is notified that the screen can be shifted to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  Then, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 246 (b). Specifically, on the menu screen, “volume light intensity adjustment” for adjusting volume and light intensity, “member registration” for registering a player's game history by entering a password, and player's game history are acquired. Three menus of “game history” to be selected are displayed so as to be selectable. Below these menus, the characters “Selected” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determined” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136. In this production example, the “game history” menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice. When the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the first game During execution of the selection display, when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, compared to when the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of a first image that is easily selected. Further, in this effect example, the menu screen can be said to be an example of a first selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In this menu screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the menu screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the menu screen.

  When “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected as described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. That is, an “adjustment screen” is displayed at the top of the display screen to the effect that the volume and light amount can be adjusted, and below that, 11 levels of gauges 0-10 indicating the volume, 11 levels of 0 to 10 gauges indicating the brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light amount of the game board lamp 532 and the game table frame lamp 542 are displayed. Below these gauges, the characters “changed” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “determined” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136 on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the setting for the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed. By operating the effect button 136, the volume setting after the change is made. In addition, it is informed that the adjustment screen can be terminated while determining that the effect is executed by the light amount setting. In this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. After that, every time the left button 137c is pressed, the setting can be changed in the direction of decreasing the volume or the amount of light, and every time the right button 137d is pressed, the setting is changed in the direction of increasing the volume or the amount of light. be able to.

  In this adjustment screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed down, the volume and light amount are adjusted in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. It may be possible to change the setting. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the volume and light quantity settings may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, after the transition to the adjustment screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be in a valid state or an invalid state in the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said that it is an example of the first selection display. For example, when the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is set to one time by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed, and the volume setting The audio output executed when “10” is “10” can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

  When “member registration” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. In other words, at the top of the display screen, the message “Please enter your password” is displayed to indicate that you can enter your password, and below that is a 4-digit input that displays the entered characters. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets A to Z and a cursor UB which is an underline display mode are displayed. The cursor UB indicates only one of the alphabets A to Z, and “S” is indicated on the display screen shown in FIG. In this password input screen, the cursor UB moves when the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are pressed, and the cursor UB indicates when the effect button 136 is pressed. The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as an input target character. If the input password is correct as a result of the alphabet being input to the 4-digit input character display area, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. Note that the password input screen can be terminated by, for example, pressing the cancel button 136f.

  In this password input screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, It may be possible to move the cursor UB in accordance with a repeated hitting operation. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d. May be. In the case where the long press automatic hitting function is enabled, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d continues to be pressed before shifting to the password input screen. The pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous hit operation. May be.

  In this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the password input screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. In the first operation mode, when the second operation is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, the first image is more easily selected than when the operation unit performs one operation by the operation unit. Can do.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, the password input screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations, and when the second operation mode is performed and the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a selectable second image. In other words, the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is displayed even when the left button 137c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time.

  When “game history” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issue screen as shown in FIG. 246 (e). That is, on the upper part of the display screen, a “code issuance screen” is displayed indicating that a game history can be acquired by reading a two-dimensional code with a portable terminal equipped with an imaging means, The two-dimensional code CD in which the game history of the player is coded is displayed, and the text “Please read” for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is displayed. In this effect example, the code issue screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the favorite selection screen, a “favorite selection screen” indicating that a character can be selected is displayed at the top of the display screen, and below that “character A” for causing character A to appear. , “Character B” for causing character B to appear and “Character C” for causing character C to appear are selectable. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the character indicated by the cursor CL can appear by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136.

  In this favorite selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed down, the cursor CL is synchronized with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the favorite selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. Then, the effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. The effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, “Song A” for outputting song A, “Song B” for outputting song B, and “Song C” for outputting song C can be selected from three selection items. Is displayed. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136.

  In this music selection screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is adjusted in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the song selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

  Note that the song selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (g) may be executed in a big hit start effect, for example.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the music selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Song C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. Then, the song C that is output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in a valid state, the song selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “Song C” can be selected when the operation is performed a third number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. Then, the song C that is output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, at the top of the display screen, a “customization screen” is displayed indicating that various settings in the game can be individually set, and below that, function 1, function 2, and function 3 are displayed. ... And setting contents for each setting item are displayed. Below these displays, the characters “Selected” are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and “changed” together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed on the right side thereof. Is displayed, the function for changing the setting can be selected by pressing the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the setting for the function selected by the left button 137c and the right button 137d can be changed. Informed. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

  On this customization screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is added in accordance with the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting is enabled, when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is kept pressed before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b again after shifting to the customization screen.

  In addition, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the setting can be changed according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long-press auto-strike is enabled, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed from before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo-strike operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the customization screen.

  When various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to (h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, or the effect button 136 is pressed and held. In the state where the decorative symbol variation display is started and the effect related to the operation of the above-described effect button 136 or the like is started, the long-press auto-strike function is enabled and the operation is performed. You may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous hit operation of a button, and you may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous strike operation by a long press auto-continuous strike function on the condition that the button is pushed again after the said production | presentation is started. Then, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to (h) are configured to be displayed on the full display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, FIG. 246 (b) to FIG. The various setting screens shown in FIG. (H) may be made smaller than the entire display screen so as to be superimposed on the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246 (a).

  In addition, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246 (a), when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the menu screen display shown in FIG. For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 246 (c) to (h) may be directly displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not it is possible to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function. For example, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 246 (b), an ON / OFF setting menu for the long press automatic continuous hitting function is provided. On this setting menu, the effect button When long-pressing 136, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. When the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is turned off, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the production button 136 is pressed long. You may do it. Further, ON / OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be set by a predetermined operation by the operation key unit 137.

  Further, in the production examples described so far, when executing the continuous hit operation production, if the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, a video in which the production button image is also hit in accordance with this may be displayed. Further, when the long press operation effect is executed, if the effect button 136 is pressed and held, a moving image as if the effect button image is also pressed for a long time may be displayed. In addition, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled and a long-pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, a pseudo-strike operation is performed. You may make it display the moving image which is doing, and may display the moving image as if long-pressed. The moving image display according to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136 but may be applied to, for example, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 246, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. You may apply to the icon.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 247 is provided with the effect movable object GM1 on the game board 200, and the position indicated by the chain line (of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the figure). It is configured to be able to move from a position above the position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208) to a position indicated by a solid line (a position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208). As shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The effect movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the rotation axis side of the front frame door 106 as a support axis, and the effect movable member GM3 is supported along the upper end side of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided, and is attached to the support shaft so as to be pivotable upward. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

  These effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 need to perform an initial operation and recognize an initial position in order to operate normally. However, the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game store clerk when operated at an unintended timing of the game store clerk performing the store opening work, for example. These production movable members GM2 and GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game clerk.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided in the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the game shop clerk. Is done. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), when a long press operation is performed with the effect button 136 within one minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), The initial operations of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 are performed. Thereby, during the opening of the game shop clerk, the possibility that the game shop clerk may collide with the effect movable member performing the initial operation may be reduced.

  Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3, a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and the decorative symbol variation display starts in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. Then, when the production related to the operation of the production button 136 described above is started, the pseudo-continuous operation of the production button 136 may be performed with the long-press automatic continuous stroke function enabled. On the condition that the effect button 136 is pressed again after the effect is started, a pseudo continuous operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function may be performed, or the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled. Good.

  The initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by a long press operation with the effect button 136, but the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. May be started, or the initial operations of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 may be started by a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136.

  Further, only a part of the selection effects described so far may be activated by the long press automatic repeated hitting function, or the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be enabled by all. Further, only a part of the selection effects described so far may not be enabled for the long press automatic repeated hit function, or may not be enabled for all of the long press automatic repeated hit functions.

  In addition, when the front button 106 is operated a predetermined number of times while the front frame door 106 is opened, a specific menu for setting by the game clerk may be executable. In this case, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled or may be enabled.

  In addition, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function described above may be enabled over a plurality of symbol variations, or may be disabled when a symbol is stopped and displayed, and straddled over a plurality of symbol variations. May not function.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one effect button is repeatedly pressed with a pseudo effect button by the long press automatic repeat function, an operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, reception of an operation for one effect button may be temporarily stopped, and an operation for the other effect button may be resumed after receiving an operation for the other effect button.

  Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, an effect lever, a touch sensor, and the like may be provided, and the long press auto-strike function and the auto button function may be enabled for the effect lever and the touch sensor.

  In addition, for example, it may be possible to give regularity to an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. For example, after the start of the super reach production, an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled is not performed. It may be. Further, after the start of the super reach production, the continuous hit production may be performed.

  In addition, among the executable repetitive striking effects, there may be more or fewer effects in which the long press auto repetitive strike function is disabled than effects in which the long press automatic repetitive strike function is enabled. May be.

  In addition, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled than in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

  In addition to the second effect, the Nth effect may be an effect in which the long press automatic repetitive strike function is disabled.

  In addition to the first effect, the M-th effect may be an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

  In addition, the second effect may be the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  In addition, the first effect may be the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Further, for example, what is displayed as a result of the operation may be made effective by the long press automatic hitting function.

  Further, the long-press auto-strike function may be validated in the effect in which the character display of “continuous hit” is performed.

  In addition, the long-pressing automatic repetitive function may be validated for a repetitive hitting operation effect (or a multi-operation effect) regarding whether or not the big hit is successful.

  In the embodiment described so far, for example, an effect or the like may be performed in accordance with the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. It can be said that the production is different from the first production in the invention. In other words, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that is displayed as a result of the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In addition, in the continuous hit operation effect in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled, for example, an effect effect may be performed in accordance with the continuous hit operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136 by the player. Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect in the present invention. In other words, it can be said that the second effect is an effect displayed as a result of the repeated operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In addition, the long press auto-tapping function is made effective for a repetitive operation (multiple operation) effect whose execution is determined mainly by a control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not it is correct. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the execution is determined mainly by the control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500) other than the control means (for example, the main control section 300) for determining whether or not it is correct. The long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled with respect to the repeated hitting operation (multiple operations) effect.

  Further, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136 is illustrated as follows.

  (1) After a button effect (single operation effect) for executing a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 is started, when a single operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The

  (2) In the case where a single operation effect is executed a plurality of times in succession, if a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

  (3) After a button effect (sequential hit operation effect) for executing a plurality of pressing operations (sequential hit operation) by the effect button 136 is started, if a continuous hit operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The When a long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed when the long press automatic continuous hit function is valid.

  (4) When a continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 may be executed. . When a long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be performed, so that the presentation may proceed as it is, or it is assumed that the presentation button 136 has been pressed for a long time. May be accepted.

  (5) If the single operation effect is started in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed (continuous pressed state), the operation by the effect button 136 is accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed, and the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed. The In this case, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed from the time when the continuous hit operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single shot operation is performed. May be. Further, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous press state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (8) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these single operation effects is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect with a high priority determined beforehand is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (9) In the continuous pressing state, when a single operation effect is started and then a continuous operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (10) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (11) When a continuous operation effect is started in a continuously pressed state, and then a single operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (12) When the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the results of the operations for these consecutive hit operation effects are executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when a continuous hit operation effect is started and then a long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect and an effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (14) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (15) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result about the long press operation effect and the effect related to the operation result about the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the long press operation effect is started, when a continuous operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is determined according to, for example, the accumulated time of the press of the effect button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production relating to the result of the operation for the single operation production is executed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of the operation about the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, in accordance with the accumulated press time of the effect button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production related to the result of the operation for the continuous hitting operation production is executed.

  (19) When the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in this state, the result of the operation on the long press operation effect started first is related to As long as the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation for any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started, and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the effect button 136 For example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 is executed for a long press operation effect that is started later. There are cases where the production proceeds as it is.

  (20) After a continuous hit operation effect is started, when a long press operation is performed and a single operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic repeat function is enabled, and the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the operation result related to the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed, and the single operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result for the continuous operation effect and the result of the operation for the single operation effect Both productions are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the continuous hitting started first. Only the effect related to the operation result for the operation effect is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect related to the result of the operation for any continuous operation effect is executed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the continuous hit operation effects is also executed.

  (22) When the long press operation effect is started after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled, Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the long press operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once canceled. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the long hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, an effect related to the operation result of the continuous hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. For example, for example, an effect corresponding to the cumulative time of pressing the effect button 136 may be executed.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 272. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 248 to FIG. 272 are diagrams illustrating staged effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 248 to 272, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 Although shown, the illustration display device 210 and the illustration holding lamp 216 are not shown. In FIG. 248 to FIG. 272, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the stop symbol forms shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and (b). Has been. In addition, in FIGS. 248 to 272, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but as illustrated in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. The special symbol 1 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 4th symbol t2 are symbols for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped). As for the special symbol 1 and the symbol t1, the symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special symbol 1 is displayed while the symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped. During the change, the symbol “−” is displayed blinking. The special symbol 2 4th symbol t2 displays the symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special symbol 2 while the symbol of the special symbol 2 is stopped. During the change, the symbol “−” is displayed blinking. In this way, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position from the decorative symbol, but also has a different display mode (in this case, the shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice and the notice regarding the symbol variation display may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 248 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. Note that the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state.

  The number of holdings in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side, and the left hold icon is the older hold icon.

  In FIG. 248 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are all displayed in the default display mode (round shape). In a white and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, no hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 248 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold-up icon that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. . In other words, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 248 (1), the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is also a round, non-patterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon in FIG. Alternatively, the display mode (in this case, the shape) may be different. By doing so, the player may be able to make a determination at first glance.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → start moving animation of the hold icon → start variation of the decorative symbol. This order may be reversed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is consumed and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. Are displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, and a state in which the hold notice is started is shown. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display state of the button reception time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. This button reception time meter MT is a display showing the maximum time during which the operation of the effect button 136 can be received after the operation valid period starts. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but is arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and is superimposed (overlapped) by the decorative symbol. ) May be displayed in this manner. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, when the operation button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 248 (6). The At this time, the button reception time meter MT is deleted together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice in which switching display is performed in a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high as the step proceeds. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a prefetch notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 in step 1 is a display represented by the face of the longest character. In this production example, after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display of step 2 is performed more than the display of step 2 after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Are configured so as to be likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Note that the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed overlapping the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but may be displayed so as to be arranged behind the decorative symbol and superimposed by the decorative symbol. Further, the step-up notice may not be started even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, the step-up notice is finished, and the display SU1 in step 1 is deleted. In other words, in the current step-up notice, the display SU1 in step 1 ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 248 (10). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (11), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the variable icon display area 280 without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 248 (4). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (12), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), the operation shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Here, the rate at which the gauge decreases may be faster, the same as, or slower than the rate at which the gauge is displayed before the performance button 136 is operated. In addition, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH having a face-length face (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (15)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. Yes. The number of mini-characters BCH having the longest length displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time from the start of the operation valid period). In this effect example, the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the production button 136 is operated, the display of the step-up notice starts and the display of the miniature character BCH having the longest length on the button reception time meter MT (the notice display using the button reception time meter MT) starts. The step-up notice display may be started after the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is started, or the step-up notice display start and button The start of the notice display using the reception time meter MT may be at the same timing. The same applies to the following description. The notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation effective period until the time corresponding to the maximum operation effective period elapses, but ends at an earlier timing. Alternatively, it may be terminated at a later timing. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the miniature character BCH having the longest length may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, in this effect example, the case where the miniature character BCH with the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT is likely to be a big hit than the case where the miniature character BCH with the longest length is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is configured. Further, a mini character (for example, a princess mini character) other than the mini-character BCH may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, after the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, a step-up notice that the displayed mini-character is changed may be performed. For example, the display mode of the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is changed. It may be easier to win a big hit. In this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is the same regardless of the number of miniature characters BCH displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot depends on the number of minicharacters BCH displayed. For example, the greater the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a deca button or a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates). When the button image 136a is displayed, when the effect button 136 is operated, the princess mini character may easily appear in the button reception time meter MT, and the princess mini character appears in the appearing mini character. When it is included, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when only the mini-character BCH having the longest length appears. On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, only the mini-character BCH having the longest length may appear easily. Also, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the mini-character BCH of the head length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. The notice display may be performed by changing the color of the gauge of the reception time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red), or the notice display may be performed by changing the shape of the button reception time meter MT. You may do it. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button reception time meter MT may differ depending on the timing when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation effective period starts. For example, the operation effective period starts. When the effect button 136 is operated at an early timing, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is easily displayed, and when the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the operation valid period starts, the timer display is performed. A notice may be given. Further, a notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed on display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a display device provided on the sub display device, the front door frame 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, or the like). You may do it.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (16), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. The display SU2 in step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the watch character. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the display SU2 in step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to win than when the display SU1 in step 1 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH having the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The display SU3 in step 3 is a display showing that the watch length character is breaking clothes. Further, along with the display SU3 in step 3, the word “Super Hot” is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to hit a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is one at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (17). The button reception time meter MT may be erased before the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3 (that is, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is ended). The button reception time meter MT may be deleted at a timing when the display SU2 in Step 2 changes to the display SU3 in Step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is performed even when the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT runs out, but a notice may be given when the gauge remaining amount runs out. Further, in this effect example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is not related to the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, but for example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT. If the princess mini-character is included, it may be easy to display up to the display SU3 in step 3, or conversely, the mini-character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is only the mini-character BCH with the longest length. The display SU3 in step 3 is difficult to be displayed, and the step-up notice may be easily ended by the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button or a display mode that vibrates and rotates). When the display mode is the display mode of the big button, the display SU3 of step 3 is more easily displayed than when it is the default display mode, and the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. The step-up notice may be more easily ended in the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the step-up notice is finished and the button reception time meter MT is also deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT runs out, or may end before the remaining amount of the gauge runs out.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (19) following FIG. 248 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Super Hot” and is notified that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. Normally, when the reach state is formed, “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached. In other words, when the reach state is formed and the “extremely hot” display is performed, it can be said that the big hit is more likely than when the “reach” display is performed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 249 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into super reach (subjugation reach). When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (21), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “ja” are arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of face length faces (for example, 9) are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is This suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the displayed case. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (24), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5” is performed, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the big win is obtained in "Special figure A" is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of “Special figure A”.

  FIG. 250 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 250 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 250 (1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed. Of these, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (pre-reading notice). The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Then, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (5), the operation shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, and a timer notice display TM is displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. The timer display in the timer notice display TM displays a time corresponding to the time after the operation valid period is started (that is, the remaining time of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated). At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (6), “03.87” indicating 3.87 seconds is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, in the timer display, the timing at which the notice effect that is performed when the countdown in the timer notice display TM is completed is shown, and the time indicated by the timer display when the timer display is started is It differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period is started. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice is performed by the timer notice display TM displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. In this example, the timer notice display TM is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but the timer notice display TM may not be displayed. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM, the time displayed in the timer display is further reduced in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (7), it is 2.49 seconds. “02.49” is displayed indicating that

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (8), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. The display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes to a red display color and is displayed in bold to notify that a notice is generated due to completion of the countdown. The change from the display SU2 in step 2 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted up. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice for the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are related to each other. From another viewpoint, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are separate notices. In this example, the contents of the effect of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display TM, for example, the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. When the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 in step 3 is performed from the display SU1 in step 1 through the display SU2 in step 2, but the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. In the case where the number is small (for example, 1 second), the display SU1 in step 2 is not in time after the display SU1 in step 1 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 in step 3 may be displayed without displaying the display SU1 in step 1 and the display SU2 in step 2. Further, in this production example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is set to the time (for example, 1.13 seconds) after the operation effective period is started from the time corresponding to the operation effective period (for example, 5 seconds). When the deducted remaining time is 3.87 seconds, “03.87” indicating this is displayed. However, according to the gauge remaining amount of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated. The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the displayed initial value of the timer to “00.00”. . Specifically, for example, “04.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer within a period of 1 second (first period) after the operation valid period is started, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second. In the period (second period), “03.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer.... In the period within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds (the fourth period), “01 .00 "may be displayed. In addition, when a certain period is exceeded after the operation valid period is started, the timer notice may not be started.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (10) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (10) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 252 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (1) to (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 250 (1) to (5), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (4), as shown in FIG. 251 (6). At the same time, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. Yes. In other words, the notice display is performed by displaying the mini-character BCH of the bancho. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the timer notice display TM shows a predetermined value regardless of the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. Is displayed (for example, “30.00” indicating 30 seconds in the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 251 (6)). At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM may be varied according to the time when the operation valid period is started, so that the timing at which the countdown ends is the same. The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by varying the time during which the reach effect is started and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach or the time for temporarily stopping display due to fluctuations in the fluctuation. Further, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be displayed according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that it is one notice display in which the notice by the display of the miniature character BCH of the head length in the button reception time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated. In other words, in this effect example, at least the remaining time when the effect button 136 is operated in at least the time set as the operation effective period is notified by the button reception time meter MT, and some notice (a minimaster of the bancho) It can be said that the character BCH display and timer notice are being performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest number is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (7). In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM has a countdown that proceeds in accordance with the time since the timer notice was started. At the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, along with the display SU3 in step 3, the word “Super Hot” is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is one at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8). In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM has a countdown that proceeds in accordance with the time since the timer notice starts, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8), “26.00” indicating 26.00 seconds. Is displayed. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 250, the result of the countdown by the timer notice does not affect the step-up notice, and the countdown is still continuing in FIG. 251 (8). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the step-up notice ends and the button reception time meter MT is also erased, but the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed and the timer notice is continuously performed even after the step-up notice is completed. In addition, the period for which the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from the start of the operation valid period until the gauge remaining in the button reception time meter MT starts decreasing until the gauge remaining amount becomes zero. It can also be said that it is a long period. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to (13) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 249 (19) to 249 (22), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (13) after the button notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 251 (12), the decorative symbol display is displayed as shown in FIG. 251 (14). In the device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the Tono-sama character. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the head is not displayed around the characters “game” in the balloon, and is larger than the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. This indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the cut-in image is not displayed. At this time, the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (14), “10.50” is displayed, indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM is 10.50 seconds remaining.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (15), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama lost the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. The “decoration 6” scheduled to stop display is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. On the other hand, at this time, the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (15), “05.50” indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM is the remaining 5.50 seconds is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 251 (16) to 17 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Thus, the timer notice continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (17), the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00”, and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice is shown in FIG. 251 (18). As shown in the figure, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the long-length character BC appears backwards, and the timer notice display TM displays a character “Resurrection” to notify that a resurgence effect is performed. That is, it is reported that the big hit is confirmed. Note that in the revival effect, an effect that fails to revive is performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (19) following FIG. 251 (18), the back-length character BC faces forward and the decorative symbol “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Are displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. The timer notice display TM also displays the word “congratulations” and congratulates you on the big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 252 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 253 (1) is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). In this production example, a long-length icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. And the button reception time meter MT in this production example is different from the above-described mode, and, as shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (7), according to the time after the operation effective period is started. Thus, the display mode changes so as to gradually become shorter. As the button reception time meter MT becomes shorter, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves so as to follow the right end portion of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the position of the longest icon arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT is fixed and has not moved. In the following description, an icon that is arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT is referred to as a fixing icon, and is arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT. The icon that is displaced in accordance with the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be referred to as a movement icon. Therefore, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the bancho icon as time passes. In this production example, it is predicted that something will happen when the panda bites into the watchmaster, that is, the display of the button reception time meter MT itself functions as a notice display. From another point of view, when the button reception time meter MT is displayed, the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is started before the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect. It can also be said. In this production example, a step-up notice may be performed in which icons displayed on both ends of the button reception time meter MT change according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. For example, the operation effective period When the button starts, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. When the time elapses, the panda icon changes to the longest icon one by one, and the greater the icon changes, the greater the trust of the jackpot A high-priority notice may be easily displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed as the icon changes. In this example, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the icon of the character is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. For example, the notice display is performed by changing the color of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a notice display by changing the display mode of button reception time meter MT.

  FIG. 253 (4) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation effective period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 253 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change. At this time, a mini-character (for example, a mini-character BCH, a princess mini-character, or the like) may be displayed on the button reception time meter MT and a notice display may be performed. In this case, for example, when the two icons added to the button reception time meter MT are both icon numbers, the princess mini-character is easily displayed, and the 2 icons added to the button reception time meter MT When the two icons are a combination of a bancho icon and a panda icon, the bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (7), the panda icon is close to the Bancho icon. By displaying the characters “Gabu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, may have a sense of expectation for the big hit. In this production example, the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is performed within the range of the period from the start of the operation effective period until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the display SU2 in step 2 is covered with a number of star symbols in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is an effect that is performed when the panda bites the Bancho, that is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT affects the step-up notice (the notice that is started by operating the effect button 136). It can be said that it is something to give. Thereby, it may be possible to have an expectation that the step-up notice will change. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed by pretending that the step-up notice is over, the step-up notice may be surprising. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of the display of the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is determined. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, when the effect button is not operated during the operation effective period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 in step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of “Premier yo” and the jackpot is confirmed. A state of being informed is shown. In other words, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. It should be noted that if the production button 136 is not operated in the button operation effect described above, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore the premier notice is not performed. It may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” jackpot decoration symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this production example, the state of the production performed when the production button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period in the button operation production is shown. The effects shown in FIGS. 254 (1) to (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 254 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation effective period starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 254 (4) to (6), when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the step-up notice is started after the operation effective period has elapsed even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period is shown. In this case, since the button reception time meter MT is deleted as the operation effective period elapses, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Further, in the case where the above-described auto button mode is set, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the operation effective period is started. At the same time as the step-up notice is started, a notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed, or only the step-up notice is performed, and the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only the notice using the button reception time meter MT is performed, and the step-up notice may not be performed. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 254 (7), the step-up notice is developed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 254 (8) to (9). In this case, the step-up notice may end at the display SU2 at Step 2 without displaying the display SU3 at Step 3, or the display SU1 at Step 1 without displaying the display SU2 at Step 2. The step-up notice may end. The effects shown in FIGS. 254 (8) to (9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (16) to (17) except that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed. Is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (11), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Super Hot” and is notified that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  After that, after the reach effect as described above is performed, if it is a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to fluctuation fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The display is confirmed with a combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. The effect shown in FIG. 255 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this effect example, a character display “Pseudo-ream when three people are gathered” is displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is predicted that a pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 253 (3), and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself shortens with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this effect example), and the desired display results are displayed (Echigoya character ECG, Tonosama character YSM, and princess character HME. Display), it is predicted that a pseudo-ream will be performed. When the pseudo-ream is not performed, the three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation. You may make it increase a character one by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation. Further, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) before the operation effective period elapses, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream is performed. May be.

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Echigoya at the top of the display screen as shown in FIG. 255 (5). The character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (5), as shown in FIG. 255 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (6), as shown in FIG. 255 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), the numbered icon and the panda icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the characters “all members” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed and it is predicted that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (9), the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is displayed, and a state in which a temporary stop by the fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. It is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. That is, in this effect example, the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, thereby informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this example, “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the same time, but may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (10) shows a state in which the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “Pseudo-ream when three people are gathered” is displayed, and a second pseudo-ream effect will be announced.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 253 (3). However, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this production example, it is easier to generate a pseudo-ream when two watch icons are displayed than when a watch icon and a panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. When two icons are displayed, a pseudo-ream may always be performed. In addition, when two long icons are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a big button, a display mode of vibration and rotation, etc.). On the contrary, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easy for two button icons to be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. .

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (12), as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. When the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (13), as shown in FIG. 255 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), as shown in FIG. 255 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  Then, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 255 (8), the pair of numbered icons displayed along with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the button reception time meter MT indicates “all members”. Characters are displayed, and it is predicted that a second pseudo-ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), a combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is displayed, and a state in which a temporary stop is performed by the fluctuation variation display is shown. It is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), a state is shown in which the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “It is a hot battle when three people are gathered” is displayed, and it is foretold that a high-reliability advance notice will be made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (18) following FIG. 255 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (18), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to a certain notice effect being performed. In the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 256 (18), number-length icons are displayed at both ends. In this production example, a higher-priority notice is more likely to occur when two icon icons are displayed than when a button icon and a panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , By displaying two icons of the head of the number, it is easy to make a big hit (a big win symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed).

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (19), as shown in FIG. 256 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (20), as shown in FIG. 256 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (21), as shown in FIG. 256 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character TSM, and the princess character HME are arranged so as to overlap the front side of the middle symbol, and in the button reception time meter MT displayed below, The word “Gekiatsu” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach. The effects shown in FIGS. 256 (24) to (30) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 249 (20) to (26) except that the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are different. To do.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state in which three characters are not arranged in the button operation effect and no pseudo-ream is performed is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 255 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (6), a button operation effect is performed. As a result of the effect button 136 being pressed twice, the Echigoya character ECG and the Tono-sama character YSM are displayed. It is shown. When the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (6), the princess character HME is not displayed on the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG. 257 (7). A “x” is displayed to indicate that the princess character HME has not appeared.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (8), the number-length icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT and the panda icon are separated, and the button reception time meter MT has a character of “sorry”. Displayed, it is notified that the button operation effect has failed and no pseudo-ream is performed. Note that there may be a case where a pseudo-ream is performed even though three characters are not displayed and a character of “sorry” is displayed. In this case, for example, a big hit may be determined as a premium effect of breaking the law.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 257 (9) to (12), the decorative symbols stop in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, Confirmed in combination. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (9) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. As described above, in this effect example, the icons displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are the bancho icon and the panda icon, and the two bancho icons in the effect examples shown in FIGS. The big hit symbol is harder to be displayed than when it is displayed.

  FIG. 258 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 258 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (10) to (13), description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4), as shown in FIG. 258 (6). At the same time, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 258 (5), the timing when the effect button 136 is operated is a timing later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), and is a timing slightly before the end of the operation effective period. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is small, and the number of mini-characters BCH of the number length displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays “decoration 5” on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The step-up notice ends at a timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the timing at which the step-up notice ends is determined in advance (for example, in this production example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed). It will vary depending on the timing at which 136 is operated. For this reason, the later the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 is operated at a timing just before the operation effective period ends, after the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 in step 1 is started, the display SU3 in step 3 is started. Even though there is not enough time to perform the development effect, and the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, the step-up notice is ended in the display SU1 in step 1. Note that the display of the step-up notice to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as shown in this production example, the execution time of the step-up notice is short. In this case, the display may be started from the display SU3 in step 3 without displaying the display SU1 in step 1 and the display SU2 in step 2.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 258 (8) to (15) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 258 (7) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 248 (10) to (13), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (4), as shown in FIG. 259 (6). At the same time, a step-up notice is started. In this production example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 in step 2, and then, as shown in FIG. 259 (7), the step is started. 3 display SU3 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 259 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14). Since it is shorter than the execution time of the effect scheduled to be executed in the up notice, when the display is started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display SU2 in step 2 and the display SU3 in step 3 cannot be displayed sufficiently. . Therefore, in this effect example, the display of the step for starting the display in the step-up notice is determined from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 in step 2, and the display is performed up to the display SU3 in step 3. . Thereby, for example, when the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, there is a case where it becomes impossible to see the display button 136 due to a delay in the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, the above-described character icons may be added to both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, when a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed, the production button 136 is operated. In this case, the mini-character BCH of the bancho is likely to appear on the button reception time meter MT, and when the icon of the bancho is displayed, the princess mini-character is more likely to appear than the mini-character BCH of the bancho. When a princess mini character appears, it may be more likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed) than when a bancho mini character BCH appears.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) to (16) are the same as those in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 260 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), “remaining 5.00 seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is gradually reduced by the countdown method according to the time after the operation effective period is started. In this countdown display, the countdown may be advanced in accordance with the passage of actual time, the countdown may be advanced faster than the passage of actual time, or the countdown may be advanced later than the passage of actual time. You may make it. In this production example, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation effective period starts. However, the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation effective period starts. When the maximum duration is 5 seconds, display the remaining time, for example, “3.00 seconds left” is displayed when the remaining operation is 3 seconds after the operation valid period starts. Also good.

  Thereafter, the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5) (for example, in this production example, 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period started, and the remaining time is displayed as “3.00 seconds”). When the effect button 136 is operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 260 (6), and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the countdown display is deleted together with the button image 136a.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (7), the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253 (3) is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The button reception time meter MT starts to be displayed with the same length regardless of the timing from when the operation effective period is started until the effect button 136 is operated. On the other hand, the execution period of the step-up notice depends on the timing from when the operation effective period is started until the effect button 136 is operated, so the period during which the button reception time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button reception time meter MT is shortened varies depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the button reception time meter is increased as the operation button 136 is operated earlier after the operation valid period starts. The rate at which MT becomes shorter is slower.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is shortened according to the time after the button reception time meter MT starts displaying, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (8), the panda icon is close to the number-long icon. , By displaying the letters “gabutsu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 260 (9) to (13) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 260 to 13 (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 253 (8) to (12), and thus the description thereof is omitted. Thus, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation valid period (display of the remaining time and display of the button reception time meter MT) is changed before and after the operation of the effect button 136. Yes.

  FIG. 261 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 261 (1) is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), the button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (4), “5 seconds remaining” indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is reduced by a countdown method according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 260, since there is no display for less than 1 second, it can be said that the remaining time is roughly displayed. In this countdown display, the countdown may be advanced in accordance with the passage of actual time, the countdown may be advanced faster than the passage of actual time, or the countdown may be advanced later than the passage of actual time. You may make it.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (5) (for example, in this presentation example, 1 second has elapsed since the operation effective period started, and the remaining time is displayed as “4 seconds remaining”). When the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 261 (6), a step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the countdown display is continuously displayed, and the countdown is continuously performed. At this time, the countdown display is erased from the “after” portion, indicating that the display has been switched from the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period to the display of the timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 261 (7) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a countdown as a timer notice. At this time, the display of the numerical part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. When the display of the numerical value portion of the countdown display changes to multiple colors, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the numerical value portion of the countdown display may be displayed in another color, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be varied depending on the display color. Further, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the countdown display may be changed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by the displayed typeface. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed and the display SU1 of step 1 remains as it is.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 261 (10), when the countdown display becomes “0 second” and the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays step 1 as shown in FIG. 261 (11). The display changes from SU1 to display SU3 in step 3. Also, the countdown display is erased. The change from the display SU1 in step 1 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as a timer notice is completed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice for the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are related to each other. From another viewpoint, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are separate notices.

  Then, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to (19), the reach state is reached, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 261 (12) to (18). Is done. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 261 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 249 (20) to (26), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 262 (1) is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Also, in this production example, the character display “Chance is a chance when three people gather” is displayed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high when three characters appear. Has been.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 253 (3), and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself shortens with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (in this effect example, three times), and desired display results are displayed (Echigoya character ECG, Tonosama character YSM, and princess character HME. Display), it is notified that the advance notice with high reliability of the jackpot is performed. That is, when all three characters are displayed, the notice is displayed more easily than when all three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation. You may make it increase a character one by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Echigoya at the top of the display screen as shown in FIG. 262 (5). The character ECG is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the operation valid period continues. That is, a state is shown in which a hidden button effect that accepts the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in a state where the display that prompts the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (5), as shown in FIG. 262 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. That is, a state where the Tono-sama character YSM appears by the hidden button operation is shown. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (6), as shown in FIG. 262 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed. That is, a state in which the princess character HME appears by the hidden button operation is shown. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the hidden button effect is performed during the execution of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (8), the numbered icon and the panda icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the characters “all members” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is informed that a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high will be performed thereafter.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (9), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the princess character HME are arranged so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below the character symbol is displayed. On the time meter MT, the word “chance” is displayed, and a notice display is provided to suggest that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In the button operation effect, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient and three characters are not displayed or the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of the three characters If the above characters do not appear, instead of “chance” characters, for example, “sorry” may be displayed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Further, when reaching a specific symbol (for example, “decoration 7”), the big hit symbol may be displayed more easily than when reaching another symbol.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 262 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into the above-described subjugation reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (12), as shown in FIG. 262 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen where the main character's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 262 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is performed, FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 250 (1) to (3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (3), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (4) after the button operation effect is started, the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed, and it is notified that the step is advanced in the step-up notice by the repeated operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (5), a step-up notice is issued in response to the first operation of the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 263 (6). The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. At this timing, the button reception time meter MT is arranged with a plurality of mini-characters BCH (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (6)) side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. . Even in this production example, the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (6), the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the production button 136, but the step-up is performed when a predetermined number of continuous operations of the production button 136 are performed after the operation valid period is started. A notice may be started. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is being performed while the effect of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is being executed is shown.

  After that, the effect button 136 is continuously operated, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the steps from the display SU1 of step 1 to the step SU1. Step up to display SU2 of 2. As described above, in this effect example, the display may be stepped up in the step-up notice on condition that the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly. In other words, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient. If so, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge.

  After that, the effect button 136 is continuously operated, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the steps from the display SU2 of step 2 to the step SU2. Step up to 3 display SU3. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to hit a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge.

  Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (9) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (9) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of the button continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 264 (1) is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (2), the special symbol 1 hold is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (3), a state in which a button repeated operation effect is started is shown. More specifically, a long-length character BC1 is displayed at the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character “Wake up the long-length by continuous hitting” is displayed. That is, in this button-hit operation effect, it can be said that it is a mission effect for the purpose of displaying the mode in which the dresser's clothes are broken within a predetermined time by repeatedly pressing the effect button 136.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (4), the state in which the operation effective period in the button repeated operation effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “Wake up the pitcher by repeated hits” displayed on the right side of the long-length character BC1 is changed to the character display of “start consecutive hits” and “ A continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT is displayed below the character display of “start”. The button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hits has a display form different from the button receiving time meter MT described above, and is configured by an indicator composed of a plurality of blocks (9 in the effect example shown in FIG. 264 (4)). Yes. The display mode of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT changes in such a manner that it is deleted one by one from the rightmost block according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 264 (5) to (7), when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly, the number of star symbols displayed over the number BC1 as the number of operations increases. It will increase.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined number of operations of the production button 136 are performed, as shown in FIG. 264 (8), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the character of the watchmaster is breaking clothes (final form). Is displayed), and the text “Awakening” is displayed to notify that the purpose (mission) of the button striking operation effect has been achieved. At this time, the button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hitting is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner in which the displayed blocks change to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this effect example, it can be said that the notice display is being performed due to the change in the display mode of the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT does not change and may indicate that the reliability of the big hit is low, or the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is erased when the mission is achieved. The notice display may not be performed. Further, the display color of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT may be changed to any one of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot may be varied depending on the changed display color. Thus, in this effect example, after the purpose of the button hitting operation effect is achieved, it is shown that the notice display using the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits is performed. It should be noted that, in the button repeated operation effect, the number of operations of the effect button 136 during the operation effective period is determined even when it is determined in advance that the mission is not achieved or the mission is determined to be achieved. If the number of times necessary for the mission to be achieved is not reached, the longest character is not displayed in the final form (that is, the final form of the longest character BC2 is not displayed), and the button for continuous hitting Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, the notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is not performed. If it is determined in advance that the mission is to be achieved, even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times necessary for the mission to be achieved in the operation effective period, The final form may be displayed. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT are erased, the notice display using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT is not performed. In addition, after the operation effective period has started, the number of operations of the effect button 136 has reached the number necessary to achieve the mission. For example, since the predetermined period has not elapsed since the operation effective period started. If the mission achievement condition is not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the effect button 136 is continuously operated until the predetermined period elapses. Further, in the button repeated operation effect, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the effect button 136 after the operation effective period starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (9), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining number of blocks is four. Has been. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (10), the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (11), the decorative symbol is set to the normal display state, and the decorative symbol “decoration 7” that forms the reach state on the left symbol and the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The state in which the middle symbols are displayed in a manner that they are variably displayed is shown. Then, the final-length character BC2 moves to the position where it overlaps on the front side of the middle symbol, the character “SP” is displayed, and it is notified that the shift to super reach is made.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 264 (12) to (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the display shifts to super reach (decision reach) and the jackpot symbol is determined and displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 264 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 256 (24) to (30), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 264 (1) to (4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 265 (4), after the operation effective period in the button repeated operation effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 265 (5) to (6), the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly. As the number of operations increases, the number of star symbols displayed overlaid on the longest character BC1 increases.

  After that, when a predetermined number of operations of the production button 136 are performed, as shown in FIG. 265 (7), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the final length of the character BC2 and “ The text “Awakening” is displayed to inform you that the mission has been accomplished. At this time, the button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hitting is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner in which the displayed blocks change to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this production example, as compared to the production example shown in FIG. 264, the production button 136 is repeatedly hit and the number of operations per time is large, so that the number of blocks of the button reception time meter RMT for consecutive hits remains large. The mission has been completed with (7 left). Thereafter, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (8), a state is shown in which the Tono-like mini character YM is displayed in the blank portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT. Yes. This Tono-sama mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early (when the mission is accomplished within the predetermined first mission achievement time). It can be said that it is an example of a notice display using the button receiving time meter RMT for repeated hits together with a change in the display mode of the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits. That is, it can be said that the mode of the notice using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT varies depending on the time from the start of the operation effective period to the completion of the mission. As described above, when the notice is displayed by using the blank portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous button accepting time meter RMT, the effect is improved and the interest may be improved. This Tono-sama mini character YM may be displayed whenever a mission is achieved, regardless of the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission, Even if the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early, it may not be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama mini character YM appears, the big hit may be confirmed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), a state is shown in which two more blocks are erased and the remaining number of blocks is three according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing. In addition, the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT also shows that the Tonosama mini character YM moves to the left side as the blank portion from which the block is erased is enlarged. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), a state in which the character “Big” appears along with the Tono-sama mini character YM is shown. In this effect example, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by the appearance of the characters “large board behavior”. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been. At this time, the display of the characters “Ohban behavior” displayed along with the Tono-sama mini-character YM is completely displayed. In this production example, only “large board” of “large board behavior” may appear, and “behavior” may not appear. In this case, the entire “large board behavior” character may appear. The big hit symbol may be made harder to display than when the symbol appears. By doing in this way, until the Tono-sama character YM is completely displayed, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not it is a high-priority reliability notice. In addition, a display of characters that appear different from “behavior” may be displayed. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (11) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 264 (11) to (18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of the reserved consecutive resort notice effect executed during the big hit game. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In FIG. 266, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the state of the effect movable body 224 is shown. Is also illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 266 (1), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a “special figure I” which is a lost symbol, and the second special figure display device 214 is a jackpot symbol “ The special figure “a” is stopped and displayed, and in this production example, the special figure 2 shows a big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are “special symbol I”. The symbol “x” indicating that it has become “stopped” is displayed, and the symbol t2 of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the symbol “A” indicating that it has been a big hit with “special figure a”. Yes.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the example of production shown in FIG. 266, since a big hit is made in the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280. In FIG. 266 (1), four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of special figure 2 are displayed, and any of these four hold icons h21 to h24 of special figure 2 has a default display mode ( It is displayed in a round patternless and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0, and no hold icon in the special figure 1 is displayed. In this production example, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the electric support state, but the hold icon may be displayed when the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1 or more. Good.

  In the effect movable body 224, the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are both in the initial positions, that is, they are not movable.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (2), a state where a big hit game is started and a big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the big-decorative decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” displayed when the big hit is displayed is the upper left of the display screen. In the center of the display screen, it is displayed in the corner, and a co-panda character with a fan is celebrating the big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (3), the state where the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started is shown. It should be noted that, in the performance during the big hit game, the number of hits in the big hit, the number of balls gained during the big hit this time, and the number of balls played during the big hit may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (4), a state in which the seventh round is started is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 266 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “super-hot when the arm comes out with the button” are displayed on the right side of the copanda character, and the effect movable body 224 is operated by operating the effect button 136. In such a case, there is an explanation that it is notified that there is a high possibility that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display that is being held (that is, there is a high possibility that a suspended consecutive resort will occur). Has been done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of a look-ahead notice effect during a big hit game. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Then, after the operation effective period of the production button 136 is started, when the production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (7), the forearm portion of the production movable body 224 is shown in FIG. 266 (8). 224b operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a plurality of star symbols in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 266 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the reserved extended resort is confirmed to occur. The “holding villa confirmation” is displayed. In this production example, when the production movable body 224 is operated, the reserved villa is always generated. However, even if the production movable body 224 is operated, the reservation villa may not be generated. Good.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the reserved consecutive house notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 266 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 267 (8), the effect movable body 224 The operation is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a “chance” character that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved resort will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini-characters PND composed of a panda face (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (8)) are arranged side by side on the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini characters PND displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time from the start of the operation valid period). In this effect example, the panda mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display that suggests that the expected degree of occurrence of the reserved villa is not so high. Note that even if the effect button 136 is operated, the panda mini character PND may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. In other words, when the panda mini character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the reserved resort is more likely to occur than when the panda mini character PND is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, a mini character different from the panda mini character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation that a reserved resort may be generated may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be displayed together. In this production example, the degree of expectation that a reserved villa is generated is the same regardless of the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, but depending on the number of panda mini characters PND displayed. The degree of expectation that the reserved resort may be generated may be different. For example, the greater the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, the higher the expectation that the reserved resort may be generated. Further, the type of the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT may change depending on the timing after the operation effective period starts. For example, the operation timing of the effect button 136 may be the operation effective period. If it is an early timing after the start of the character, a mini character other than the panda mini character (for example, a mini-character of a long length) may be easily displayed. In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a character display of “chance” is displayed, and thereafter, the panda mini character PND in the button reception time meter MT is not operated by operating the effect button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of “chance” and the display of the panda mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT may be simultaneously performed with the operation of the effect button 136 as an opportunity. In other words, in this effect example, the target displayed by operating the effect button 136 is “chance”, and the display of the panda mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT is displayed by operating the effect button 136. A non-example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Further, the number of displayed panda mini characters PND is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is two at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (9).

  FIG. 267 (10) shows a state in which the eighth round is started. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (10), a state is shown in which the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT has become zero. That is, a state is shown in which the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the operation effective period was started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 267 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star graphic is displayed, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 267 (12). As described above, the display of the word “sorry” is made, and it is notified that the button operation effect has failed and the possibility that a reserved resort will be generated is low. In this production example, even if a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the button operation presentation may fail, and this configuration impairs expectations for the reserved villa. May be reduced.

  FIG. 268 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the reserved consecutive house notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 267 (1) to (7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268 (8), this effect example also produces an effect. Although the operation by the movable body 224 is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character “Atsui” that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved resort will occur. When this “hot” character is displayed, the effect movable body 224 is more likely to operate than when the “chance” character is displayed, that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved resort will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Furthermore, in this effect example, the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT includes a plurality of mini-characters BCH and Panda mini-characters PND each having a chief face (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 268 (8)). In the device 208, two mini-characters BCH having the longest length and three panda mini-characters PND are arranged side by side. In this production example, when the mini character BCH of the chess length is displayed rather than the case where only the panda mini character PND is displayed, the reserved game is more likely to occur ( The design is easy to be confirmed). In other words, when the reserved consecutive resort is scheduled to occur, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is easily displayed. Note that the mini-character BCH with the longest length is arranged on the right side of the mini character PND of the panda, and the mini-character BCH with the long length is erased earlier than the mini-character PND of the panda in accordance with the decrease of the remaining gauge. Therefore, the player may be able to pay attention to a change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT in order to confirm the miniature character BCH of the watchmaster. Further, since the number of mini characters displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation effective period is started), the operation effective period is started. When the operation timing of the production button 136 is late and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is less than the space for placing the miniature character BCH, the panda mini character PND alone is displayed. In some cases, the mini-character BCH of the bancho may not be displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve his willingness to press the effect button 136 quickly in order to confirm the mini-character BCH of the watchmaster. In this production example, the expectation level that the production movable body 224 operates is the same regardless of the number of Bancho mini characters BCH displayed, but depending on the number of Bancho mini characters BCH displayed. Thus, the expectation degree that the effect movable body 224 operates may be different. For example, the effect movable body 224 may be more easily operated as the number of mini-characters BCH having a longer number is displayed. In addition, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 268 (6) may be displayed in a display mode of a big button or a display mode that vibrates and rotates, and when such a display mode is displayed. May be displayed more easily than the case of being displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Further, all the mini-characters BCH with the longest length are erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the panda mini-character PND is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (9), two panda mini characters PND are displayed.

  FIG. 268 (10) shows a state in which the eighth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), the remaining time of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0, and the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the operation effective period started. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the forearm portion 224b has an effect as if the decorative symbol display device 208 is affected. The display is done. As described above, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not immediately operate in response to the effect button 136 being pressed, and it operates for the first time when the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT becomes zero. An example of an effect to be performed is shown.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 268 (12), the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that a reserved extended resort will occur. The “holding villa confirmation” is displayed.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 269 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (1), the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 shown in FIG. 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 to h13 shown in FIG. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display positions of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. Are displayed as a hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display mode of the button reception time meter MT in this production example is the mode described above with reference to FIG. 253 (3), and the longest icon and the panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT.

  FIG. 269 (4) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation effective period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (5), a step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 269 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (7), the panda icon is close to the Bancho icon. By displaying the characters “Gabu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, may have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (8), after the number-long icon displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a panda icon, the pair of panda icons are separated from each other. In the button reception time meter MT, a character “change icon” is displayed to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (9), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the symbol variation display is notified in advance. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged in the display SU2 in step 2. As described above, in this effect example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 in step 3, the change icon changes to the notice display form by the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT. In some cases, a sense of expectation for the jackpot can be maintained. In this effect, the ease of display of the display SU3 in step 3 may be different depending on the characters displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter are displayed. In the case of a bancho icon and a panda icon, it is difficult to display the display SU3 in step 3, and the step-up notice is easily ended by displaying the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2, and the button reception time meter When the icons displayed at both ends are two icons with the longest length, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed, and when the “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into the above-described subjugation reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (12), the button notice effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (13), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 269 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (15), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama lost the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 6 -decoration 5”, FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 270 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 269 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (5) and the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 270 (6), FIG. 270 (7) shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the step-up notice is continuously performed, but the display SU1 in step 1 is not changed to the display SU2 in step 2, but remains as the display SU1 in step 1. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 270 (7), the panda icon is close to the bancho icon, and the panda However, as shown in FIG. 270 (8), the panda returns to the Bancho and encounters it. In this production example, when the production where the panda returns to Bancho is performed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol than when the production where the panda bites into the Bancho is performed (this In the production example, as will be described later, the suspended symbol variation display is likely to be a big hit).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (9), after the panda icon displayed on the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a number-length icon, a pair of number-length icons are separated from each other. In the button reception time meter MT, a character “change icon” is displayed to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 in step 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the grandfather, and a hold notice is performed. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged in the display SU1 in step 1 here. As described above, in this production example, even when the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display is a result that the expectation for the big hit cannot be expected, the pre-read notice using the button reception time meter MT may be performed. In some cases, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit in the suspended symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect by the button reception time meter MT being performed in the same display mode, either the change icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 changes, so the notice effect of the symbol change display is given. It can be said that at least a part of the production is performed in the same manner in the production of the pre-reading notice, and thereby, the expectation can be maintained until the change icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 change. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 270 (14). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 7”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 272 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 271 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 271 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed, and both of the two held icons h11 and h12 of FIG. Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (4), the button image 136a is deleted as shown in FIG. 271 (5). At the same time, the button reception time meter MT is enlarged and a mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (5), the characters “stock chance” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and in the enlarged button reception time meter MT, the operation effective period is displayed. The display mode changes so as to decrease the gauge according to the time from the start of. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button reception time meter MT has three treasure chests (treasure chests TR1, TR2, TR3) arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge, and the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes. It is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the user passes through the center of each treasure chest. That is, it is notified that a timing-pressed mini game is started. In this effect example, the mini-game by the button reception time meter MT may not be performed, and the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT described above may be performed. Further, the number of treasure chests to be displayed may be different depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time after the operation effective period when the effect button 136 is operated, for example, the effect button Since the remaining amount of the gauge increases as the operation timing of 136 starts earlier after the operation valid period starts, the number of treasure chests may be increased by that amount, and as the operation timing of the production button 136 is delayed, The number of treasure chests to be displayed may be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), the effect button 136 is displayed at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes substantially the center of the treasure chest TR1 arranged at the rightmost of the three treasure chests. When operated, as shown in FIG. 271 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened and a savory notice icon I71 to which “change” is added may appear. . This Sabohani notice icon I71 is an aspect of a prefetch notice, and when the Sabohani notice icon I71 is stocked, it is informed that the change icon or the hold icon changes to the notice display form. Thus, in this production example, when the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure box arranged in the button reception time meter MT, the production button 136 is operated with good timing, A notice icon may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be called a notice item or a mini item. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure chest TR1, the notice icon may not appear. Other than the notice icon may appear, for example, a notice character appears and gives a notice of the symbol change display or a pre-read notice, or a simple presentation without notice (for example, an explanation display). May be performed. Further, there may be a case where the display mode of the change icon or the hold icon does not change even if the Sabohani notice icon I71 is stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (7), when the savory notice icon I71 appears from the treasure chest TR1, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (8), the savory notice icon of the appeared savory is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially the center of the treasure chest TR2 arranged on the right side of the remaining two treasure chests (treasure chests TR2 and TR3). When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 271 (10), the treasure chest TR2 is moved upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened and the character icon “subjugation” is added to the notice icon I72. May appear. This Tono-sama notice icon I72 is an aspect of a look-ahead notice, and when the Ton-sama notice icon I72 is stocked, a strong cut-in CI1a is displayed in the subjugation reach that is scheduled to be executed with the symbol variation display being held. It is predicted that it will appear. That is, when the notice icon I71 of Tono-sama is stocked, a look-ahead notice that the subjugation reach will be performed in the reserved symbol variation display and a look-ahead notice that the strong cut-in CI1a will appear are performed. It can be said. It should be noted that the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear even if the lord's notice icon I72 is stocked, or the strong cut-in CI1a may appear.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (10), when the Tono-sama notice icon I 72 appears from the treasure chest TR, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (11) displays the Tono-sama notice icon in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed to show that the notice icon is stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing greatly delayed from the timing at which the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the remaining one treasure chest TR3. As shown in FIG. 271 (13), the treasure chest TR3 moves upward, but is not opened, and “failure” is displayed, indicating that the timing push has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure chest TR3 are not displayed, and the treasure chest TR3 is deleted as it is as shown in FIG. 271 (14). If the timing push fails, the contents of the treasure box are displayed, but may not be stocked if the contents of the treasure box is a notice icon. Further, in this effect example, when the function of the auto button is enabled for the effect button 136, the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is an abbreviation of each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure chest may be opened assuming that the production button 136 is operated at the center timing, or the auto button function may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini-game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (15), the state where the button reception time meter MT is deleted and the mini game using the button reception time meter MT is completed is shown. The Sabohani notice icon I71 and Tonosama notice icon I72 are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is shaken. Temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button reception time meter MT A state in which the notice display using the symbol has an influence on the subsequent decorative symbol variation display is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (18), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. And displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The Sabohani notice icon I71 and Tonosama notice icon I72 are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (19) following FIG. 271 (18), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (20), the Sabohani notice icon I71 moves to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged, and the Sabohani notice icon I71 is digested. .

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (21), the change icon h0 of the default display form displayed in the change icon display area 280 changes to the display form of the savory, and the notice display by the change icon h0 is displayed. Is shown. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may change when the Sabohani notice icon I71 is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (21), after the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (22) deletes the enlarged Sabohan notice icon I71. As shown in FIG. 272 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (24), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (25), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (26), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Super hot” are displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is shown. It is suggested that it is expensive. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (27) shows a state where a normal reach effect is being performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (28), the state that the Tono-like notice icon I72 is enlarged and displayed is moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the Tono-like notice icon I72 is digested. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (30), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (31), as shown in FIG. 272 (32), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 272 (28), the strong cut-in image CI1a appears as a result of digestion of the lord's notice icon I72. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. Even when there is no strong cut-in image CI1a, the operation effective period may be displayed. In addition, in the above-described mini game, Tonen-sama's notice icon I72 is scheduled to appear. However, if the presentation button 136 fails to be pressed and the Ton-sama's notice icon I72 does not appear, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 272 (33), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is performed, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  In this effect example, as a result of the mini game, a notice icon indicating that a button operation effect that performs the notice display using the button reception time meter MT described above is executed may be stocked. That is, a pre-reading notice of the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 285. In FIGS. 274 to 285, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are used. Although shown, the illustration display device 210 and the illustration holding lamp 216 are not shown. In addition, also in FIGS. 274 to 285, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the stop symbol forms shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and (b). Has been. Further, in FIGS. 274 to 285, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but as illustrated in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as for the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 274 to 285, it can be applied that the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 to 272 can be applied as it is or appropriately changed. Nor.

  First, with reference to FIG. 273, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. Here, FIG. 273 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 273 (b) is a diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that becomes a chance of pre-reading notice.

  As shown in FIG. 273 (a), the decorative symbols of the present embodiment include two special types “special 1” and “special 2” in addition to the ten types of decorative symbols “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol “special 1” may be referred to as a replay symbol. For example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which “special 1” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, or “special 1” is displayed in all symbols. This is a decorative design for which a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed in the case of a stop display mode. The “special 2” decorative pattern may be referred to as a chance button pattern, and is a display mode that simply represents the button. The display mode is different from the button image 136a displayed in the button operation effect as described above. Yes. The decoration pattern of “special 2” includes, for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which “special 2” is stopped and displayed in middle symbols, a mode in which “special 2” is stopped and displayed in all symbols, etc.) In this case, it is a decorative design for which a button operation effect will be performed. Note that “special 1” and “special 2” are not always included in the variation display of the decorative symbol and appear as necessary, but they always appear in the variation display of the decorative symbol. It may be included. In addition, “special 1” and “special 2” are not fixedly displayed by a combination of decorative symbols including these, and function as a notice display for notifying the content of the effect performed thereafter. It should be noted that a combination of decorative symbols including “special 1” or “special 2” decorative symbols is displayed and functions as a pre-reading notice that an effect corresponding to “special 1” or “special 2” will be performed. It may be. Further, one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and one symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, but there may be two or more types each. In this embodiment, a “special 1” decorative symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and a “special 2” decorative symbol related to the button operation effect are prepared. Alternatively, a special decorative design corresponding to an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice, a special decorative design that specifically suggests the content of the subsequent effect, and the like may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

  As shown in FIG. 273 (b), in the present embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols composed of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”, which is a combination of a reach and a combination of a jackpot decorative symbol. The pre-reading notice can be displayed by confirming display with a combination of decorative symbols (sometimes referred to as “chance eyes”). Specifically, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7”, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7”, “decoration 7—decoration 3—decoration 3” The combination of the decorative pattern of “Lose” and the combination of the decorative pattern of “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3” are determined and displayed, so that the symbols that are likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display are displayed. It is informed that the variable display is included.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 275 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 274. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. A special symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss is displayed for both the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 274 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon in FIG. 1 represents the number of hold in FIG. 1 by the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side, and the left hold icon is the older hold icon.

  In FIG. 274 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, no hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 274 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold-up icon that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. . That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 274 (1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed and the hold icon of FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is also a round, non-patterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon in FIG. Alternatively, the display mode (in this case, the shape) may be different. By doing so, the player may be able to make a determination at first glance.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → start moving animation of the hold icon → start variation of the decorative symbol. This order may be reversed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is consumed and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol “decorative 3-special 2-decoration 4” is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, in this effect example, it is notified that the button operation effect is started when the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Specifically, the decorative pattern “special 2” is deleted, and a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display form in place of the decorative pattern “special 2”, together with the button image 136a. A button reception time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, above the button image 136 a, a text “Press the chance button” is also displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted. At this time, the middle symbol may remain erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative pattern of “special 2” is displayed in a mode in which buttons are simply displayed as described above, whereas the button image 136a has a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, the button reception time meter MT is accompanied by a display, and it can be said that these display forms are different. Note that the “special 2” decorative symbol is not animated at least when it is stopped and displayed, but may be animated while stopped.

  After that, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 274 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as shown in FIG. 274 (8). The button reception time meter MT is erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display that influences them is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (9), after the sliding variation display is performed in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on each of the symbols, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in shaking. Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 274 (11), the ornamental symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of losing. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decoration symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a chance and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify you. In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274 (11), it is predicted that the first symbol variation display hold in FIG. 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), when the temporary stop is made at the chance, a character “Chance” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance It is informed that a pre-reading notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (12), the holding of the special figure 1 (first holding) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13), the characters “mini game” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed. A state in which the treasure chest TR is arranged is shown. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

  FIG. 274 (14) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially at the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. 274 (16), the treasure box TR is enlarged and moved above the timing meter, and a replay icon RP appears from the treasure chest TR. The replay icon RP displays a display in which a question mark is added to the characters “continue”, and informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the replay icon RP functions as a notice of the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation display. That is, in this production example, the replay icon RP is configured to be started more easily when the replay icon RP appears than when the replay icon RP does not appear. Here, the replay icon RP does not appear, and for example, a button icon may appear. By the appearance of the button icon, the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display. The user may be notified that a button operation effect may be performed. Here, when the icon of the button appears, it may be configured such that the “Special 2” decorative symbol is displayed and the button operation effect is more easily started than when the icon of the button does not appear. In addition, the timing meter is continuously displayed, and a long-length icon is displayed at both left and right ends of the gauge. The watch length icon displayed on the right follows the gauge reduction display and moves toward the watch length icon displayed on the left. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure chest TR1, other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon By appearing, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect is performed in the symbol variation display. That is, the button operation effect may be configured to start more easily when the button icon appears than when it does not appear. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure chest TR1, nothing may appear.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (17), the treasure chest TR is erased, the replay icon RP is displayed substantially at the center, and the effect of whether or not pseudo reaming is performed is performed. This roaring effect is continued until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses after the operation effective period is started. Until then, the gauge continues to display the gauge decrease.

  Thereafter, when the remaining time of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed after the operation effective period has started, the decorative symbol holding display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the question mark on the icon RP is changed to an exclamation mark, and the characters “I will continue” are displayed on the timing meter to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed. Thus, in this effect example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by displaying the icon related to the pseudo-continuous effect (replay icon RP) before the “special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There is a case where an expectation for can be given at an early stage.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (19) following FIG. 274 (18), the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (21), the second stop is performed and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (22), after the decorative symbol “special 1” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), “special 1” The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-special 1-decoration 4”. This “special 1” decorative symbol is a symbol in which the character “Replay” is displayed on an approximately oval shape with a moon pattern, and the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game is a graphic. Although the same in common, the displayed characters are different.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), the decorative symbol “special 1” stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. The appearance of this “special 1” decoration symbol is an effect performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini game shown in FIGS. 274 (13) to (18). Can do. If the above-described mini game fails, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream may be performed even if the mini-game fails.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (25), a state in which the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-continuation is started is shown. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (26), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into a super reach. When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of “Chance” notifying that a chance eye has appeared has been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (29), a state in which the button notice effect is started is shown. In this button notice effect, a deca button image 136aL is displayed instead of the default button image 136a. The deca button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, but has a larger display form than the button image 136a in the default form. The display mode of the big button image 136aL is the display mode of the “special 2” decorative pattern shown in FIG. 274 (5), which was displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decorative symbol variation display). It is also different. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of types of button images are prepared as button images to be displayed in the button operation effect, and the display pattern of the button image (decoration pattern of “special 2”) displayed as the decoration pattern. It can be said that it has more display patterns. Note that the default button image 136a may be displayed instead of the big button image 136aL. In this case, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the big hit symbol may be displayed more easily than when the default mode button image 136a is displayed. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (30), the strong symbol image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 275 (31).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 275 (32), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, and then, as shown in FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A. As shown in FIG. 275 (33), when the decorative symbol is in the default display mode, the display of the “Chance” character for notifying that the chance eye has been displayed is resumed. It does not have to be.

  In this example, the button operation effect and the pseudo-ream are performed when the decoration pattern of the third stop is “special 1” or “special 2”, but “special 1” or “special 2” When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, a button operation effect or a pseudo-ream may be performed. In addition, a button operation effect or a pseudo-continuation may be performed when two of the three special symbols “special 1” or “special 2” are included.

  Further, in this effect example, the description has been made in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect that is executed by displaying the decoration symbol “special 2” in one decoration symbol variation display. The present invention also includes a comparison between the “special 2” decorative symbol displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the “special 2” decorative symbol. It can be applied as a concept.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, the button operation effect is performed when three “special 2” decorative symbols are arranged, but the button operation effect is not started without three “special 2” decorative symbols being arranged. It shows how the production is being performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 276 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "Is stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (4), the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when “Special 2” is stopped on the left symbol, “Special 2” is more likely to be stopped on the right symbol than when “Special 2” is not stopped on the left symbol. Also good. This makes it difficult for the player to quickly give up on the start of the button operation effect, and allows the player to expect a sense of expectation for the button operation effect until the timing of the third stop of the decorative symbol. There are cases where it is possible. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the special symbol “special 2-decoration 4-special 2” is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed in combination, and three “special 2” s are not prepared, and it is notified that the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 276 (6), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 3” is displayed on the right symbol. ”Is displayed in a stopped state, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns of“ decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 3 ”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 276 (7),“ decoration 4 -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 3”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 278. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, a pseudo-continuous production is performed when three “special 1” decorative symbols are arranged, and a button operation effect is produced when three “special 2” decorative symbols are arranged. It shows what happens. The effects shown in FIGS. 277 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 276 (1) to (4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 277 (4), after the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (5) performs the third stop. The decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in a form in which three “special 2” are arranged.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), the decorative symbol starts to be displayed again and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing a state where the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 also starts to vibrate and rotate the internal mechanism. It should be noted that when the effect button 136 is vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated, the effect button 136 is likely to be a big hit (the big win symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed) than when the effect button 136 is not vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated. ) Is configured as follows. This button operation effect can be said to be a notice effect that a chance eye appears in the symbol variation display, and is a pre-reading notice effect that predicts that there is a high probability of being a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It can be said. The button image 136a having the default display mode described above may be displayed instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be blinked, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, it may be displayed in another display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button). At the timing shown in FIG. 277 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective. Thus, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 (at least one of vibration and rotation) can be displayed, and the display mode of “special 2” Can be said to have a different display. In this effect example, the effect button 136 may only vibrate, and a button image showing a state corresponding to the vibration may be displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136 may be displayed. And a button image showing a state of rotation corresponding to this may be displayed. Further, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which the effect button 136 is neither in vibration nor in rotation. In addition, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, in the state where the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. May be displayed. Conversely, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, but the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (7), the decorative symbols are displayed as default as shown in FIG. 277 (8). In addition to the variable display as a mode, multiple star symbols are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, and a display that influences the decorative symbol that is variable is displayed. Is called.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), after a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, then FIG. 277 (10) The confirmation is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decoration symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a chance and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify you. In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (10), it is predicted that the first symbol variation display hold in FIG. 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277 (9), when the temporary stop is made at the chance, the character “Chance” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. It is informed that a pre-reading notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (11), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special figure display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12), the characters “mini game” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed. A state in which the treasure chest TR is arranged is shown. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

  FIG. 277 (13) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially at the center of the treasure chest TR, as shown in FIG. 277 (15), the treasure chest To the display showing the appearance of the face pattern BF of the Bancho face. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), after the character “continue” is displayed, the character “continue” is added to the variation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 277 (17), and the symbol variation display is performed. It is notified in advance that a pseudo-ream will be performed at. The variation icon h0 to which the “continuation” character is added can also be said to be an example of a display pattern of an effect design for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, a plurality of types of notification modes for performing pseudo-continuations may be prepared.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18) shows a state in which the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (20), the second stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (21), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the three “special 1” are temporarily arranged. Stop display (temporary stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), a copanda character appears, the character is displayed “one more time”, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. As described above, the decorative symbol for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed has one display mode (decorative symbol of “special 1”). However, the design of the effect for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. A plurality of display modes are prepared, and variations are increasing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), a state is shown in which the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), a state in which the selection effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side on the left and right, and a button reception time meter MT is shown below the boxes. Here, the box arranged on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box arranged on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Above the two boxes BXL and BXR, an operation key image 137p schematically representing the operation key unit 137 is displayed in a manner in which the left and right button portions are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. “Select” characters are displayed to prompt the user. The left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXR is displayed in a manner surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this production example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d of the operation key unit 137 between the start of the operation effective period and the end of the operation effective period. When either one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, an appearance corresponding to the selected box is shown. The operation key image 137p is an image that is displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative symbol for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, no special symbol for notifying that the operation effect is performed is not prepared. Note that an image simulating the operation key unit 137 may be separately prepared as a special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed.

  Then, after the operation reception period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (25), as shown in FIG. 278 (26), The cursor CSL surrounding the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXL.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (27), when the operation reception period has passed and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT runs out, it is not selected in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28). The left box BXL is deleted, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and a replay icon RP appears in a state in which a question mark is added nearby. That is, the replay icon RP is different from the display pattern of the “special 1” decorative symbol in that a question mark is added. Thereby, it is notified that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, since a question mark is added to the replay icon RP, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. For this reason, there is a case where the pseudo-ream is not performed and ends with a gas. In addition, there may be a case where the question mark is not attached and the display is performed in a manner that guarantees that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. When the replay icon RP appears from the box, the pseudo-ream is always performed. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 278 (29), the characters “continue” are added to the change icon h 0, and the change icon display area 280 is displayed in response to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed at the top, and this also informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (30), the state where the selection effect is finished and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (31), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (32), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), the enlarged “special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. At this time, the special symbol “special 1” may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect, or the special symbol “special 1” may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the characters “one more time” are displayed below the decorative symbol “special 1”, and the question mark displayed above the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. The exclamation mark is changed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. As described above, in this production example, after reaching the reach state, the “special 1” decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed to start the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the quasi-ream is not performed, the reach effect may be performed after the “Special 1” decorative symbol is scrolled down without stopping, and the reach effect may be performed. One of the decorative symbols other than the special symbols may be stopped and displayed on the symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols for the losing pattern or the combination of the decorative symbols for the jackpot may be derived.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (35) shows a state where the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (36), a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the variation icon h0, and a display as if the variation icon h0 is affected is performed. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (37) following FIG. 278 (36), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. That is, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the notice. In the example of production shown in FIGS. 278 (36) to 279 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may change instead of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (38), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (39), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “super hot” to notify that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 279 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of development to super reach. When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), the button notice effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), instead of the button image 136a, a protruding button image 136aS schematically representing a state in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward is displayed. This suggests that it is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed) than when the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. In the protruding button image 136aS, a spear character is added to the front side, and a character “Please push” is displayed below the character to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the production button 136 does not have a function of projecting upward, the state of the production button 136 does not correspond to the display mode of the projecting button image 136aS. 136 may be provided with a function capable of projecting upward. In this case, the effect button 136 may be projected upward in accordance with the display of the projecting button image 136aS, or may not be projected. . In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (42), as shown in FIG. 279 (43), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 279 (44), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 279 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3 -decoration 3 -decoration 3”, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6), when the notice using the button reception time meter MT is not performed, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button reception time is reached. Although the meter MT is erased, for example, the button reception time meter MT may be continuously displayed even when the effect button 136 is operated, and the effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display or an effect display that is not a notice display.

  FIG. 280 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 280 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (3), “decoration 3” is displayed on the left symbol from the top of the display screen. It shows scrolling in and moving downwards. At this time, “decoration 3” is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols fluctuate and display at a high speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (4), the “decoration 3” of the left symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, the “decoration 3” of the left symbol is moved to the front side of the “decoration 3” of the left symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display is performed as if it affects the “decoration 3” of the left symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (5), after the “decoration 3” on the left symbol is changed to the “design 2” ornament symbol, the display is stopped. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the design is changed to a “special 2” symbol that simply represents the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (6), the right symbol “decoration 1” is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving downward. . At this time, “Decoration 1” is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (7), the “decoration 1” of the right symbol moves at an extremely low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, the “decoration 1” of the right symbol is moved to the front side of the “decoration 1” of the right symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display is performed as if it affects the “decoration 1” of the right symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (8), after the “decoration 1” on the right symbol is changed to the “design 2” ornament symbol, the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (9), the middle symbol “decoration 6” is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving downward. At this time, “decoration 6” is moving at a low speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (10), the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol moves at an extremely low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol is moved to the front side of the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and an effect display as if affecting the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (11), after the middle symbol “decoration 6” is changed to the “special 2” ornamental symbol, it is stopped and displayed in a state where three “special 2” s are arranged. Displayed (temporary stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (12), the decorative symbol starts to be displayed again and the button operation effect is started. The effect shown in FIG. 280 (12) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In this production example, a state is shown in which the decoration button is changed to a “special 2” decoration design that simply imitates the production button 136 immediately before the decoration design is stopped. A mode in which “special 2” is interrupted in the order in which the decorative symbols are arranged, and the “special 2” is stopped and displayed immediately before the display is performed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of “decoration 1”> “decoration 2”>...> “Decoration 10”, “decoration 1” and “decoration” immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decoration pattern of “special 2” may be inserted between “decoration 2”, and “special 2” may be stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 281 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (3) performs the first stop and displays “decoration 3” on the left symbol. "Is stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (4), the second stop is performed and “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), a state where a decorative symbol “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and is scrolled downward is shown. This “special 2” decorative design is an extra large display mode that is larger than the normal display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are deleted, and only the special symbol “special 2”, which is the middle symbol, is stopped (temporarily stopped). It is shown. Thus, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode based on the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed in the stop display mode based on one decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), a simple button image 136aX simulating a “special 2” decorative symbol is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. In other words, the simplified button image 136aX has a button display portion in common with a decorative symbol whose display mode is “special 2”, but it has a special symbol “special 2” in that it is displayed together with at least the button reception time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different. The display form of the simplified button image 136aX may be a form in which the character display of “Chance” is omitted from the display form of the decoration pattern of “Special 2”. In this case, although the shape of the button is common, It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX and the display mode of the “special 2” decorative symbol are different depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol is not displayed, but it may be displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen, for example.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), the decorative symbol “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and is scrolling downward, but a button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decorative symbol “special 2” is scrolled downward without displaying the stop, and then “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 281 (6 ′). Then, after the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed, the display may be fixedly displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3—decoration 6—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 282 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 282 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 282 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (3) performs the first stop and displays “Special 1” on the left symbol. "Is stopped. In the example of the effect, the “special 1” decorative symbol is added with characters for informing the number of pseudo-reams. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282 (3), the “special 1” decorative symbol is displayed. Is added with a character “× 1” for notifying that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (4), the second stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. For the “special 1” in the right design, the character “× 1” is added to notify that there is a possibility that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “special 1” is temporarily arranged in the form of three. Stopped display. Also here, the character “× 1” for notifying that “special 1” in the middle symbol may be subjected to the first pseudo-ream is added.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (6), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is an extra large size display mode is displayed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Thus, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode based on the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed in the stop display mode based on one decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (7), a state is shown in which the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The special symbol “special 1” shown in FIG. 282 (8) is also added with a character for informing the number of pseudo-reams, and “× 2” for notifying that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. Is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. For the “special 1” in the right design, a character “× 2” is added to notify that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the three “special 1” symbols are temporarily displayed. Stopped display. Also here, the character “× 2” is added to notify that “special 1” in the middle symbol may be subjected to the second pseudo-ream.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (11), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is deleted, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is an extra large size display mode is displayed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (12), a state is shown in which the third variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  As described above, in this production example, the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the “special 1” decorative symbol, but the display mode of the “special 1” decorative symbol itself is changed according to the number of pseudo-reams. You may do it. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo-reams.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 283 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 283 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3) performs the first stop and displays “special 2” on the left symbol. "Is stopped. The decorative pattern “special 2” in this production example is displayed in a form in which a mini-character BCH is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4), the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Unlike the “special 2” decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the decorative symbol “special two” in the right symbol is displayed in a form in which a panda mini character PND is added. In this effect example, even with the same “special 2” decorative symbol, since the added symbol is different, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition that reach has occurred. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The decorative symbol “special 2” in the middle symbol is displayed in the same manner as the “special 2” decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol, with a mini-character BCH of the number length added. As a result, the “special 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a form in which three “special 2” s are arranged. In this production example, the type of mini character added to the “special 2” stopped and displayed on the right pattern is different. . That is, in this production example, even when three “special 2” s are arranged, the display mode of at least one of “special 2” is different from the display mode of other “special 2”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent misidentification that a big hit has occurred. In this production example, the display mode of “special 2” stopped and displayed on the right symbol is the same as the display mode of “special 2” stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. All of the display modes may be different. In addition, the types of mini characters added to the three “special 2” may all be the same (for example, all three “special 2” are added with the mini character BCH of the head length) In this case, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the types of the mini characters added to the three “special 2” are not all the same (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Also good.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6) shows a state in which the button operation effect is started by stopping and displaying three “special 2” decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing a state where the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Further, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is added with a mini-character BCH having a long length, and in this respect, it can be said that the display pattern is the same as the above-mentioned “special 2” decorative symbol. At this time, the effect button 136 is not vibrated or rotated and is in a normal state, but the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism may be started. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that the mini character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini character other than the mini-character BCH (for example, a panda mini character PND). At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of additionally displayed mini character. For example, the miniature character BCH having a longer length is displayed than when the panda mini character PND is displayed. In some cases, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher. Further, as in the example of production shown in FIG. 280 (12), there may be a case where the mini character is not additionally displayed. When the mini character is additionally displayed, the big hit is greater than when the mini character is not additionally displayed. May have a high reliability (a big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the above-described default display button image 136a may be displayed. At this time, a long mini character BCH or a panda mini character PND may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 283 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  After that, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 283 (7), the character “× 1” is displayed as shown in FIG. 283 (8). Is displayed in a state where three decorative symbols of “special 1” with “” added are arranged, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Note that the above-mentioned mini character may be added to the “special 1” decorative symbol and displayed. In this case, at least one of the three “special 1” decorative symbols may be displayed as another “special one”. It may be different from the mini-character with the decorative pattern "" to prevent misperception of the big hit or the reach state.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (9), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is deleted, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is an extra large size display mode is displayed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (10), a state is shown in which the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 284 (1) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 284 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are deleted, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second hold icon h12, and a display that affects these is performed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, “decoration 4” is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving toward the stop position of the middle symbol due to the low-speed fluctuation.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9) shows that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button preview display mode. In other words, this button notice display mode is a pre-read notice display mode. The display mode of the button notice differs from the display mode of the “special 2” decorative pattern in that the characters “Chance” are not displayed and an animation for prompting button operation is displayed. . The middle symbol continues to fluctuate at low speed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, the display is confirmed and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 4”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. The second hold icon h12 that has changed to a button image has not yet changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12, which has been the button notice display mode, continues to move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the button notification display mode to the display of savohani as shown in FIG. 284 (14). It is changed to a mode. This suggests that the first symbol variation display that is reserved is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 285 (A) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 285 (B) is a simulation executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure shown about the other example of a continuous production.

  FIGS. 285 (A1) to (A2) show a state in which the contents of the button operation effect are suggested by the decorative pattern “special 2”. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A1) shows that the special symbol “special 2” is stopped on the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. In this effect example, the display mode of “special 2” stopped on the middle symbol is different from the display mode of “special 2” stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the effect button 136 is simulated. It is considered as an embodiment. In the middle symbol “special 2”, the word “pending change” is displayed on the upper surface, and when the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect, the holding icon (or variation icon) is displayed. It has been notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, it can be said that the decorative symbol “special 2” of the middle symbol is a dedicated display mode for notifying that the change icon of the hold icon due to the button hold is performed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A2) shows that the button operation effect has been started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the decorative symbol having three “special 2” s, and displays a button image 136a represented in an extra large size instead. The state of being done is shown. On the upper surface of the button image 136a, a character “change on hold” is displayed to notify that the change icon of the hold icon due to the button hold is being notified. The button image 136a is different from the special display mode "special 2" in that the display mode is the same, but an animation that promotes button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that the button image 136a shown in FIG. 285 (A2) and the “special 2” decorative symbol of the special display mode shown in FIG. 285 (A1) share a part of the display mode. On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h <b> 11 in the button hold display mode has a character “push” displayed on the upper surface thereof, and prompts the operation of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is deleted, and the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode is changed to another display mode (for example, the display mode of Sabohani, the default display mode, or the like). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), a pseudo-run announcement icon acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. This pseudo-renewal notice icon is a notice icon that is displayed with the character of “pseudo-ream” added to the Tono-sama character, and may be displayed as both a pre-read notice and a notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), a state is shown in which three “special 1” decorative symbols are arranged to generate a pseudo-ream. Note that in FIG. 285 (B), the pseudo-announcement icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen is not related to the display in which three decoration patterns of “special 1” are arranged. Both may be related. Here, the display mode is different between the display mode of the pseudo-reminder notice icon and the display mode of the “special 1” decoration symbol, and the player can clearly distinguish the notification icon from the decoration symbol. There is.

  In the embodiment described so far, the main display device having a large screen size and one or a plurality of sub display devices having a smaller screen size than the main display device may be provided. For example, a symbol displayed on a sub display device having a screen size smaller than that of the main display device than a symbol (decorative symbols, button images, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device having a large screen size. May be displayed larger.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. The image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means provides a fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the notice aspect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach-shift effect, etc., which is a big hit] A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the [for example, pseudo-annual notice that will be out of reach or reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holdings,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 82 (4). The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. And the like, which are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), a digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and an increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are performed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542”. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and FIG. 97 (49)],
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is not necessarily displayed after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. Further, the display according to the number of holdings may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), a digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and an increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are performed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same Good.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542”. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)]. It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design variation display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means may include a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, and the like]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol change display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 82 (1) As shown in FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, in the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be displayed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 for the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [e.g., a thousand box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 85 (47) or FIG. 96 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 92 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 82 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may start [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 82 (9) to 83]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started displaying at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14). ],
Symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)” The first notice icon that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 82 ( 9) to 83 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching, as shown in FIG. Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 83 (25), the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching is such that the hat notice icon I6 that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (23). A hat stand icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [e.g., hat notice icon I6] is digested, the first notice display [e.g., pseudo shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31) is used as the notice display. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place,
When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 81 (b), etc.]
A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 82 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of a decorative symbol, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 82 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “a game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 104 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 105, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32), When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIG. 85 (46) to FIG. May start, etc.]
The first combination of the displayed warning icons [for example, the combination of the “home” warning icon I21 and the “mon” ”warning icon I22 shown in FIG. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 105 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

“The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 104 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 105 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested], etc. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 83] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. 84 (28 ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons have been consumed from the time a symbol variation display is put on hold until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is finished]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]
Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112],
A game machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 109 (10) to 110 (13) digests, and FIGS. 110 (16) to (19). ) Shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,
The second display means displays the notification icon [for example, the notification icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to 110 (13) and the display of the notification icon shown in FIGS. 109 (5) to (9). The display of the notification icon I6 of the hat or the display of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 112 (c6)]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 may function as a prefetch notice display],
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 112 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 112 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112]. There is a case in which a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to (5), a notice that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A is displayed. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

Further, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

Further, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display form according to the type [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81, etc.]
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 110 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which 208 is displayed over the screen, and the number BC character pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons have been consumed from the time a symbol variation display is put on hold until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is finished]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 109. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 etc.) shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
First moving means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. 115, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 115 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. The first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81, the notice icon I21 of “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 115 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 115 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
Of the displayed notice icons, a sixth notice icon [e.g., "Home" notice icon I21 etc.] is digested, and the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may necessarily execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons have been consumed from the time a symbol variation display is put on hold until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is finished]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 117 (1), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display is terminated. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 117 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. During the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9 and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 117 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in 119 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons have been consumed from the time a symbol variation display is put on hold until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is finished]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 117. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (the hat notice icon I6 etc. of the hat shown in FIG. 117) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.]” ”) Is put on hold, and the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 120 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,
A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the prefetch target is displayed after the display of the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended. Until the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the two hat notice icon I6, the thousand car box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of symbol variation display is on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, the on-hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 120 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third suspension that is a prefetch target shown in FIG. 120 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetch display form [for example, the prefetch notice display form (sabohan display form shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.], etc.] May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetch notice display [for example, an effect display in the prefetch mode shown in FIGS. 121 (b2) to (b3), etc.],
The third pre-reading notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. 121 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. ")" Is suspended, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display etc. shown in Figs. 120 (4) to (13)]". ) May start,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to 86 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended is started after the symbol variation display is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), A game stand characterized in that, for example, four notice icons are digested after a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is terminated. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, No explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a7), displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 129, etc.]
The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132],
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. 2 pseudo-announce notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In a state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

Further, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.]] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a7), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132. A display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display that is displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means when displayed,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the second display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display of “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG.
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 129, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 129 (a2) to (a4) and a swordsman notice icon I62 Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

Further, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.]] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a9), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine comprising display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137]
The notice icon is configured to be displayed in multiple types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a display mode of the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l), etc.]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, display of the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i). Aspect etc.],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display form than in the first display form [for example, from the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l). In addition, the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) is larger in size, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked. [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is enlarged, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in other than a plurality of types of display modes. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the size of the notice icon may necessarily be larger in the second display form than the first display form, and the notice icon may be larger in the second display form than in the first display form. There may be no cases.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ) And displayed in the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 137 (l) after being enlarged as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. Thus, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. The display mode may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. In addition, it may be displayed in the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. It may be displayed in the display mode.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a variation of a decorative symbol. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display form [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the normal display form displayed in the notice icon display area The pseudo-announcement icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are not overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may not be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may be not overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in any display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. .

In addition, “the decorative symbol variation display is a display that does not overlap the notification icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. It is not overlapped with the pseudo-recurring notice icon I65 or the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area]
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may be overlapped with the notification icon in the second display mode [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc., which are overlapped with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 of the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not be overlapped only with the notice icon of the first display form, or may be non-overlapped other than the notice icon of the first display form. . In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display form. There may be something. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when digested,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when digested, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than when digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when digested.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137 (a)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in a normal display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, and other than the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. The display mode may be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when displayed in the hold display area, or the first display mode may be displayed in a case other than when displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed.

Further, “when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 137 (i) As shown in FIG. 4, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when a notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, the second display mode is a display mode in which the preview icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the swordsman's preview icon I62 of the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137 (i) The enlarged display of the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 137 (l)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Also good. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon in the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or may be a display form in which the notice icon in the first display mode is not enlarged.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] Yes,
The display means can display a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (25). In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 84 (28) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of kinds of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only a notice display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon is digested. There may be a case where a notice display other than the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the kind of notice notice corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the kind of the notice icon that is digested. There may be cases where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Also, only when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or in cases other than when the notice icon is digested A type of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed.

“The display means is means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as“ hold number ”) [for example, FIG. In the hold icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that have been suspended for]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Game table provided with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display Because
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a), etc.]
Among the icon display frames, an icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “icon”) can be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter referred to as “in-frame region”) [for example, As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the change icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a), etc.]
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc.]
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i) is shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.]
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a first decorative symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b) or a second decorative symbol display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Design variation display etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.] so,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the icon display frame that is displayed with priority is expanded, and the player is aware that the effect is being performed by performing an effect such as a notice or a pre-read notice in the expanded part. There is a case that can be made. In recent game machines, a plurality of various effect displays are performed at the same time, so there is a tendency that they are complicated and difficult to visually recognize. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying “”, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  The first display may include only an icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may necessarily include an icon display frame, or may not include an icon display frame.

  Here, the “icon display frame” may be referred to as “hold display frame”, “hold frame”, “UI”, “hold icon display area”, or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like. Further, since the “icon display frame” is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. In addition, the “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or a hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be said to be a display frame that is overlapped by at least a part of the hold icon or the like. Further, the “icon display frame” is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative design.

  Here, the “icon display frame” is a part that can be recognized by the player as the part where the icon is displayed without being caught by the word “frame”. This is an example and is not bound by this.

  Further, only the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame, or other than the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon is always displayed in the frame inner area, or the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the frame inner area. Good.

  Here, the in-frame region constitutes an icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

  Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. The icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  The icon display frame may be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode may be displayed. It may be a thing. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Also good.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a part in which only a part of the first display mode is expanded, or a part in which all of the first display mode is expanded.

  Here, the “display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  Here, “expansion” can be said to be a display of “icon display frame” in a broad sense, or an area of an image or a region can be increased.

  Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. There may be.

  Here, the “decorative symbol variation display” may include a stop display of the ornamental symbol, a display in a state where the symbol can be identified at the start of variation, or, for example, during a high-speed variation, And display in a state that is difficult to identify than the display state at the start of change or the display state at the start of change (for example, semi-transparent display during high-speed change), or a decoration with a reduced size displayed during SP reach It may include a variable display of symbols.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Production display etc.],
Of the second display mode, a portion extended from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expanded part [for example, an extended part in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc. The third display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the extended portion in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The expanded portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the hold display frame FL1 in the expanded display mode has a variable display. 1 and the second decorative pattern are not overlapped]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the icon display frame is expanded and displayed at least in preference to the variation display of the decorative pattern indicating whether or not the variation is appropriate, and the expanded portion is displayed as a notice or a pre-read notice. The effect may be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Here, “effect display” includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is changed, and the like.

  Further, only the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed by being overlapped with the extended portion, or the display other than the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed being overlapped with the extended portion. Further, the third display may be displayed so as to always overlap the extended portion, or the third display may be displayed so as not to overlap the extended portion. Good.

  Here, the “extended portion” may be a difference from the portion before expansion, or may refer to itself when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or enlarged). .

  The extended portion may not be overlapped only by the second display, or may be not overlapped by a display other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may be overlapped with the second display.

Further, “the effect display is a display of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l)”,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc., which are overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a line display [for example, a line display by the princess Chibi character CH1 in the balloon TT2, a line display by the frog character GY1 in the balloon TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 140 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Frame FL1 does not overlap with balloon TT2 or balloon TT3, etc.]
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. Etc., which overlaps the display of lines by Princess Chibi's character CH1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, the “line display” may be referred to as “line advance notice” or “conversation advance notice”, and may include, for example, a change notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, and the like.

  The fourth display may not be overlapped only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, and may be overlapped with other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that do not happen. The fourth display may not necessarily overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

  Here, “the fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode” does not overlap the display position. It is a concept that includes what is configured.

  In addition, the fourth display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

  The “line display” includes a display of the first line and a display of the second line, and the display of the first line may be overlapped with the extended portion. The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. 147 (c -1) to (c-4) shown in the same figure, such as an effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0]
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. Etc., which overlaps the extended part of the hold icon display area FL1]
The third display and the fifth display are partly the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l) As for the display, the effect display which changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) is also shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c−). As for the effect display which changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm whether or not the change is appropriate with a decorative design, an icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with an expanded icon display frame. You may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if the third display and the fifth display are all different, it may be clear whether the change should be expected or whether it should be expected for the subsequent symbol change display. By making a part of the display and the part of the fifth display the same mode, it may be possible to increase the expectation until it can be recognized which of the expected symbol variation displays is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in the expanded portion, a display other than the fifth display may be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be what was done. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner in the extended portion, or the fifth display may not be displayed in the extended portion in an overlapping manner. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the fifth display may be configured so that the fifth display overlaps only in the extended portion, and the fifth display overlaps and can be displayed in portions other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

  Here, the “notice display” may be a change effect of a variation icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or the like.

  Further, “the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display” is a concept including, for example, the same animation until the character appears.

In addition, “the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ the area within the first frame [for example, the area within the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 140 (a) ”). Etc.] ”)) is the first area,
The region in the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second frame region [for example, a region in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i)]”. .) Area is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The extended portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame region and the first in-frame region.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second in-frame area is an area including the first in-frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode The area within the frame is configured to include the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. There may be.

In addition, “the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” according to claim 1 is “the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “Even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame is configured to be able to be displayed in the first display mode [for example, there is no hold and symbol variation display is not performed. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayed only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured to be able to display in a display mode other than the first display mode. The icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in a region other than the icon display frame.

“The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), a variable icon h 0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL 1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon as the icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold icon as the icon. The display means may always display a hold icon as an icon, or may not display a hold icon as an icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended, or corresponding to the number of the symbol variation display starting being suspended. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons to be displayed may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended. May not be displayed.

Further, “the first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap the second display [for example, FIG. 140 (f) to FIG. The extended display mode hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 4 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol variation display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display mode, or may be overlapped with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
One effect of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect button generated after the second time shown in FIG. 213 when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Production display by a pseudo-run performed as a result of the operation of 136],
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. [For example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, execution is performed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time shown in FIG. 213. The effect display by the pseudo ream is not started by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Here, for example, the first effect may be an effect corresponding to “Le” in “Doremi”, and the second effect is, for example, “I” in “A”. It can be said that it can be said to be a corresponding production.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state where the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time [for example, a state where the production button 136 is pressed. Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be able to be started when the operation unit performs two or more operations in the second operation mode.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] in a state where the operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One effect of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full]
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 236],
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. When the second number of operations is performed by the means, the image is easier to be selected. [For example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the princess character image shown in FIG. H is not selected by the long press operation with the production button 136],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  The effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing display other than the first selection display. The display means may always execute the first selection display or may not execute the first selection display.

  Further, the first selection display may be capable of selecting only one image among a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. Other than one of the images may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game]
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 becomes full]
The fourth effect is when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]. It is a production that can start,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be possible to start other than when it is selected. Further, the fourth effect may be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation unit is operated for the first time period [for example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is 0.5 seconds. The operation mode maintained above]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “during the execution of the first selection display, even if the operation means is being operated for more than the first time, one operation is performed by the operation means. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be selectable when two or more operations are performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (f)],
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of “Character C”],
The second image can be selected when the operation unit performs a third number of operations [for example, twice] in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Image
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image among a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit, or a plurality of types of display can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit. An image other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the second selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or may display a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

  Further, the second image is displayed when the second selection display is performed, when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the second selection display. , It may be selectable only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected other than when the third number of operations are performed and when the second selection display is performed and the operation means is operated once by the operation means during the second selection display. It may be. In addition, the first production is performed when the third selection operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, and during execution of the second selection display. In the second operation mode, the selection may be made when one operation is performed by the operation unit, or during the execution of the second selection display, the operation unit in the first operation mode. Even if the third number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the second selection display, even if there is a case where the selection is not performed when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Good.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth effect may be one that can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be possible to start even in cases other than the case where it is selected. In addition, the fifth effect may be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] during execution of the first selection display.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One display among the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. 213 Indication display by a pseudo-run that is executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time shown in FIG.
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [eg, shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)”). Is called a continuous hit operation effect] ”),
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the character “Please hit repeatedly” is not displayed together with the effect button image BT]. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display. The display means may include a first display and a second display. Further, only the third display may be executable, or a display other than the first display, the second display, and the third display may be executable. The display means may always execute the first display, the second display, and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display, and the third display. Some or all may not be executed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started and when the operation means is long pressed. It may be possible to start other than when the is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. The first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a first light emitting state [for example, a state in which red light is emitted]
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second light emitting state [for example, a light emitting state or a blue light emitting state].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.

In addition, “the first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-3) and (a-4)] In the state of accepting the operation of the operation means, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state]
When the light emitting means is turned off, this indicates that the operation means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, when the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first light emitting state is a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in red]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, light is emitted in blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol],
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol]
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 222 (d) to FIG. Will be repeatedly operated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The second display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The third display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display may always start display during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operating means. [For example, the display shown in FIG. In the case where the effect button 136 is not operated twice, it is not displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display that is not started other than when the operation means is pressed and held down.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is displayed as a pseudo 20-operation display (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]”).
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The first image is an image that is more easily selected when the operation unit is operated a plurality of times than when the operation unit is pressed for a long time [for example, a state where the long press auto-strike function is disabled , The princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  The display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may always execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is continuously hit by the operation means and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. It may be possible to start other than the case where it is done. The first display may always start when the operation means is continuously hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, an effect by a princess character appearing after the end of the jackpot game]
The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 becomes full]
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236] is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth display may be started only when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the fifth display may be performed during the execution of the fourth display. It may be possible to start other than when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may always start when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or the first display may be performed during execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as“ third display [for example, FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. ), Which is a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG.
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  The first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit, or may not start when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by long-pressing the operation means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 236, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled. In some cases, the princess character image H is not displayed unless the production button 136 is operated twice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected other than when the operation means is pressed for a long time.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is displayed as a pseudo 20-operation display (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full” Etc.] ”), and
One display among the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, FIG. In the chance eye production shown in Fig. 3, the display of the three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3]] ”
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [eg, shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)”). , Etc. "
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, shown in FIG. 214 (b) to FIG. 214 (h)). , Chance eyes production etc.] "),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, three times] after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. 214 (i) The display in the form in which three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed is not displayed unless the production button 136 is operated three times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, it includes “light emitting means that can emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting states [for example, an effect button lamp 138,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One light emission state among the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red, etc.]
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-3) and (a-4)] In the state where the operation of the operation means is accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state, etc.]
When the light emitting means is turned off, this indicates that the operation means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, when the operation means operation is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode [for example, light is emitted in red, etc.]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, blue light emission].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first display is a notice display [e.g., a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification for notifying that a big hit will be made]
The second display is a notice display [e.g., as shown in FIG. 214 (i), forewarning the transition to Super Reach when all three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a display instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options (hereinafter referred to as“ selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 236 ”). Or a display when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 246 (c), or a display when the amount of light is indicated by the cursor CL].
One of the plurality of types of display is a first option of the plurality of options [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236, the volume “10” setting, or the light intensity “10”. Displayed on the display screen (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display [for example, a display in which the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Display in a display mode with a setting of “10” or display in a display mode with a light intensity setting of “10”, etc.] ”).
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, twice or five times] after the selection display is started. Display,
The fifth display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the selection display is displayed [for example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. In the case of the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected only by the long press operation by the effect button 136, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. The display in the display mode in which the volume setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is “10” is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In the case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is “10” is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the fifth display starts when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Display,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “when the operation unit is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the operation unit is repeatedly hit. The display of the first display may be started as a thing [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is simulated. Display regarding the result of the operation as if it has been operated 20 times (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced, etc.)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “long press” means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. Etc.]
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters “PUSH” are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 214 (b) to (h). Displayed display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state of accepting an operation for starting display of the first display [in other words, the first state is a state of accepting an operation of the operation means. In the first state, the display of the first display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the second display is received [in other words, the second state is a state in which an operation of the operation unit is received. In the second state, the display of the second display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds or the like] has elapsed since the first state was reached.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time indicated by the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 214] has elapsed since the second state was reached. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display includes a second number of times of operation of the operation means after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, three times, and the first number ( Display is started when the number of times is different from 2 or 5)
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the third display is a display including the first image,
The first image is an image including an image [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 223 (d)] showing an appearance of the operation means [for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 223 (d). The image including the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” together with the button image BT]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image [for example, effect button images BT1, BT2, BT3, etc. shown in FIG. 214 (b)] showing the appearance of the operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 214 (b). Thus, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT1, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT2, and the image including the images including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT3]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a first operation means [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect that is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, as shown in FIG. 222 and FIG. 223, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the repeated operation effects shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e)). Yes,
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the gauge of the continuous impact meter RD becomes full. As a result of success, there may be a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated multiple times], the second effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (e). When the player performs a continuous hitting operation on the effect button 136, all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR may emit red light.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When a long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cut-in image Etc., and notices may be given to announce that it will be a big hit]
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started. [For example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 241, the long press automatic continuous hit function is invalidated. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit red light, etc.]
The second effect is an effect executed by a second effect means [for example, the light emitting units LL, LR, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by production.

  Here, the first performance may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on a thing other than being operated in one operation mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on other than the operation in the operation mode. In addition, the second performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation. It may be executed in cases other than the case of being operated in a mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even if the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. The operation may not always start when operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

  The second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means. The effect may be executed including the effect means other than the second effect means. When the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed simultaneously. Good. The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

In addition, the second rendering means is a light emitting means,
“The effect performed by the second effect means” means “the second effect means is the second light emission mode [for example, approximately 1 / from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL, LR shown in FIG. 241 (c)”. A mode in which the LED emits yellow light up to a height of 4, a mode in which the LED emits green light up to a height of about 2/3 from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. ), An effect executed by emitting light in a manner in which all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit light in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “second rendering means is a means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode [for example, a predetermined light emission mode during a symbol variation display or a big hit game, etc.]
The first light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode different from the second light-emitting mode [for example, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. 241 (c) to FIG. Etc., which is different from the light emission mode during the display or during the big hit game]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second rendering means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emitting mode, or may be capable of emitting light in modes other than the first light emitting mode. Further, the second rendering means may necessarily emit light in the first light emission mode, or may not emit light in the first light emission mode.

  In addition, the first light emission mode may be partially different from the second light emission mode, or all may be different.

In addition, “first rendering means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first rendering means is first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 222, the repetitive operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the repetitive hitting meter RD becomes full. In such a case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, and a notice that a big hit is made is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. In addition, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed simultaneously. Good.

In addition, “
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second effect means is means provided in the third effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L provided with the light emitting portions LL and LR and the right image display The device 209R is a means that can be moved by a slide drive motor, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third rendering means may be composed only of movable means, or may include means other than the movable means. Further, the third rendering means may necessarily include movable means, or may not include movable means.

  Further, the second effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the second effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, “fourth effect means [for example, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R shown in FIG. 241],
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth effect means is a means provided in the third effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. Movable means, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect means may consist of only the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. Further, the fourth effect means may necessarily include the second image display means, or may not include the second image display means.

  Further, the fourth effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the fourth effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, in the repeated operation effects shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e), the light emitting units LL, The effect that the LR lights up is started during the symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  The first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not be started while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. In some cases, the first effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be surely started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When one operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in “the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” It is a continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started” “operation in the first operation mode” Means multiple operations,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [eg, 4 seconds],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect aspect of the second effect may be partially different from the effect aspect of the first effect, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a first operation means [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect that is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, as shown in FIG. 222 and FIG. 223, etc.]
One of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect [for example, in the back button repeated striking effects shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red. And the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the gauge of the continuous impact meter RD becomes full. As a result of the successful performance, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated multiple times], the second effect may be started [for example, FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. h) When the player repeatedly operates the effect button 136 in the back button repeated effect shown in h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red, or an effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When a long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cut-in image Etc., and notices to announce that it will be a big hit]
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started. [For example, in the back-button repeated hitting effect shown in FIG. 242, the long press automatic hitting function is invalid. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208].
The second production is a back button production,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by production.

  Here, the first performance may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on a thing other than being operated in one operation mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on other than the operation in the operation mode. In addition, the second performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the production mode of the second production may be partly different from the production mode of the first production, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation. It may be executed in cases other than the case of being operated in a mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even if the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. The operation may not always start when operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, “first rendering means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 222, the repetitive operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the repetitive hitting meter RD becomes full. In such a case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, and a notice that a big hit is made is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. In addition, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed simultaneously. Good. The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

In addition, “the first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means” means that “the first effect is the first display by the first effect means [for example, As shown in FIG. 222, when a continuous hitting operation is performed with the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed when the effect is successful, is a big hit. It is an effect that is executed by displaying a notification etc. for notifying that ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h)”. Effect images displayed on the
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. The second effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. In addition, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, ““ the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means ”means that“ the second effect is the second display [for example, 242 (e) to FIG. 24 (h) is an effect executed by displaying an effect image or the like displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back-button repeated hitting effect shown in FIG. 242 (e) ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it includes “second effect means [for example, effect lamps SL1 to SL4, etc.]
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, an effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h)). Etc.)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means. The effect may be executed including the effect means other than the second effect means. When the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed simultaneously. Good.

In addition, ““ the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means ”means“ the second effect is that the second effect means is the second light emitting mode [for example, 242 (e) to FIG. 24 (h) are the effects executed when the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit light in green or red, etc. ” Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.]
The notification means is a notification that prompts an operation to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation notification [for example, an effect button that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (d). The display of the image BT, the display of the character “Let's hit repeatedly,” the display of the remaining time meter MT, and the red light emission by the effect button lamp 138].
The back button effect refers to the second period during which the operation notification is not performed [for example, the operation reception period related to the back button repetitive effect shown in FIGS. 242 (d) to (h)]. It is an effect that may be started in response to one operating means being operated in the first operating mode [for example, continuous hitting operation, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notification means may perform only notification for prompting an operation for the first operation means, or may perform notification for prompting an operation other than the operation for the first operation means. Further, the notification means may always perform notification that prompts an operation to the first operation means, or may not perform notification that prompts an operation to the first operation means.

  In addition, the back button effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the second period when the operation notification is not performed. Alternatively, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation unit may be started in response to operations other than the operation in the first operation mode. Further, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation unit may be surely started in response to the operation in the first operation mode, and the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operation means may not be started in response to being operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, in the first period during which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation reception period related to the repeated operation effect shown in FIG. 222 (d) to FIG. The first performance may be started in response to being operated in one operation mode [for example, continuous hitting operation, etc.]
In the first period, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. Alternatively, in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, there may be a case where the first operation means may be started in response to something other than being operated in the first operation mode. . In addition, the first effect may be always started in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, there may be a case where the first operation unit is not started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, or the first period The first operating means may be started in cases other than when operated in the second operation mode. In addition, the first effect may be always started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period. In the first period, There may be a case where the operation is not started in response to the first operation means being operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, effect lamps SL1 to SL1 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h). An effect in which SL4 emits light in green or red, and an effect in which an effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started during symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  The first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not be started while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. In some cases, the first effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be surely started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When one operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in “the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” It is a continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started” “operation in the first operation mode” Means multiple operations,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds or the like,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
In the above description,
“First operation means [eg, production button 136, etc.]
A second operation means (for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, a clear button 137f, etc.);
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to display multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a display displayed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL shown in FIG. 211 (e), FIG. , Etc., indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL]
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full. If the presentation is successful in some cases, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, continuous hit operation or multiple times operation], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. 211 (b) ) To (e), in the case where “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is as follows: When the button 137b is operated twice, and “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. The display indicating that the “up mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed by operating the down button 137b twice, etc.],
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, When a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, a continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cutting is successful. In-image notifications, notifications to notify you of a big hit, etc.]
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. When “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed when the down button 137b is operated for a long time. As shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g1), when “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, the “premier up mode” is selected with the cursor CL. Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is operated for a long time, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in display, but according to the present invention, a game machine having a display characteristic can be provided.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be displayed in response to things other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed in response to an operation performed at.

  The second display may be displayed only in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means may be the first operation means. It may be displayed in response to things other than being operated in the operation mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed in response to an operation performed at.

  The display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  The first display may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation mode. The display may be started in cases other than the case of being operated in the operation mode. The first display may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. There may be a case where the display is not started when operated.

The second display may be a display that may not start even if the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the second operation means may be the second operation means. It may be that the display is not always started when operated in the mode, or the display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.
The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

“The second display is a display when one of a plurality of options is selected [for example,“ volume light amount adjustment ”in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e), "Normal registration" of "member registration", "production customization", and "operation assistance setting" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected, "normal" on the production customization setting screen shown in the same figure (g1) Mode "," single announcement mode "," premier up mode "of" premier up mode "is displayed when the cursor CL is selected, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display is a display displayed on a setting screen [for example, a menu screen shown in FIG. 211, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed on a screen other than the setting screen. The second display may be displayed on the setting screen without fail, or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

In addition, “the setting screen is a screen including a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options [For example, the menu screen shown in FIG. Includes a display to instruct you to select one option from “Registration”, “Production customization”, and “Operation assistance settings”, and select one option from “Normal mode”, “One notification mode”, and “Premier up mode” Including a display to instruct you to select],
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display that is displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e)”, “ Display when “Volume light intensity adjustment” of “member registration”, “production customization”, “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL, or in the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. [Display when the “normal mode” of the “normal mode”, “single notification mode”, and “premier up mode” is selected with the cursor CL]
The second display is a display that is displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e)”, “ The display when “Production customization” of “Member registration”, “Production customization” and “Operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL, or “Production customization setting” screen shown in FIG. Display when the cursor CL is selected as the “premier up mode” among the “normal mode”, “single notification mode”, and “premier up mode”
If the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed, the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. 211. As shown in (b) to (e) in the same figure, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, when the down button 137b is operated twice, “production customization” is displayed as the cursor. When the display indicating that the item is selected by CL is started and “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g1), When the down button 137b is operated twice, a display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is started, etc.],
When the third display is displayed, if the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [for example, FIG. 211 (b). As shown in FIG. 5E, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, if the down button 137b is operated for a long time, “effect customization” is set with the cursor CL. When the display indicating that it is selected is not started and “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g1), When the lower button 137b is operated for a long time, the display indicating that the “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the setting screen may include only a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or an instruction to select one option from the plurality of options. Display other than the display to be included may be included. In addition, the setting screen may necessarily include a display for instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options. There may be no indication.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed other than the case. Further, the third display may be displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed other than the case. Further, the second display may be displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed.

  The second display may start only when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. Alternatively, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Further, the second display may be a display that is surely started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed, When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

  Further, the second display may be one in which the display is not started other than when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed, When the third display is displayed, the display may not always start when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the third display is displayed. In some cases, the display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, the second display is performed when the second display is operated N times (N ≧ 2 [for example, twice, etc.]) when the third display is displayed. [For example, on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (e), the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is “volume”. When the display indicating that “light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when the down button 137b is pressed twice, or on the effect customization setting screen, The display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed when the display indicating that “Notification Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. 7b will start the display when there are two pressing operations, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display that may be started only when the second operation means performs N operations when the third display is displayed. In addition, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even in a case other than the case where the second meeting is operated by the second operation unit. The second display may always be started when the third display is displayed and the second operation means has been operated N times. May be displayed when the N operation is performed by the second operation means.

In addition, “image display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first display is a display displayed by the image display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 222, a notice display such as a cut-in image or the like in a repetitive operation effect, or a notice that a big hit is announced. , Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, “production customization” in the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to (e) is selected with the cursor CL. The display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” in the effect customization setting screen shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. 211 (g1) is selected with the cursor CL is a decorative symbol display device. 208, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. In addition, the first display may be displayed by the image display unit without fail, or may not be displayed by the image display unit.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. In addition, the second display may be displayed by the image display unit without fail, or may not be displayed by the image display unit.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 becomes full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second display is a display that does not start during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, “production customization” on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. The display indicating that the “Premier Up Mode” in the effect customization setting screen shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. 211 (g1) is selected with the cursor CL is shown in FIG. It will not start while it is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first display may start only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may start the display other than during the display of the symbol variation display. May be. In addition, the first display may always be started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display may be one that does not start displaying only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be one that does not start displaying other than during the display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may not always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. The first display may be started as a result of the operation [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first display may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display other than the first display is started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be cases. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be surely started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may not be displayed as the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started” as “operation in the first operation mode”. Is a continuous operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started”. “Operation” means multiple operations.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [eg, 4 seconds],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the change effect of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 161 (c) to (n), FIG. 172 (g) to FIG. i) Button notice effect shown in FIG.
The second effect display is a mini-game effect display [for example, the mini-game shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to (k) or the button notice shown in FIGS. 171 (m) to 172 (f). Production etc.]
The first effect display is a first operation promotion display [for example, the button hold icon display shown in FIGS. 161 (c) to (j) or the display of FIGS. 172 (g) to (h). And a button image 136a that is rotating and a display of “Push”, etc.]
The second effect display is a second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (f) or the display of FIGS. 171 (r) to 172 (b). Button image 136a and display of “continuous hit” etc.]
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (k)], the hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display form (circular and blue display form). Or the like, or a notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i) or the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 172 (i ′)]. It is a certain production display,
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (h) to FIG. , A notice that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be increased by one level, and as shown in FIG. Notice announcement etc.] ”)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to focus on the second notice that affects the first notice.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where the operation means can be actively operated in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. The first effect display may always be related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include displays other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may necessarily include the first operation promotion display, or may not include the first operation promotion display.

  The second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include displays other than the second operation promotion display. Further, the second effect display may necessarily include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect display may be such that only the notice related to the first notice may be derived, or other than the notice related to the first notice may be derived. There may be something. In addition, the second effect display may be such that a notice related to the first notice is always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

Further, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (d) to FIG. 161 (k)]. , A state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, or a state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (o). Etc.] ”)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be informed that the first notice and the second notice are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, there may be cases other than the first state, it may be the first state, or the first state. It may not be possible.

In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 161 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) to the same figure (l), if the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly in a state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc.]
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. 161 (j As shown in (), when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game result is derived, as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game result is derived as shown in FIG. 173 (n), as shown in FIG. 173 (n), as shown in FIG. Depending on the result, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, there are cases where the operation means can be actively operated with respect to the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. If the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first condition. In the case where the operation means is operated in step 2, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the start of the second notice, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the notice is started, a notice other than the first notice corresponding to the second notice may also be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may not be executed.

  Further, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be executed. Even in a case other than when the operation means is operated after the operation is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed.

Further, “in the first state, when the operation means is operated, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 165 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed and the result of the mini game is displayed. , Or as shown in FIG. 168 (g), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. But the mini-game results are not derived, etc.]
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change [for example, FIG. 165 (g) to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 168 (h) to (m), after the result of the mini game is derived and “hold 1UP” is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of, a configuration other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state When the operation means is operated, the first notice and the second notice other than the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated in this state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, it may be configured such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  In addition, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, A notice other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. In addition, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may be changed, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice is changed. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

  In addition, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change only after the second notice is executed, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

In the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 166 (e) to (i), the first decoration is displayed. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, attention may be paid to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and the expectation for the first notice may be increased.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where the mini game side can be prioritized in time series.

  In addition, according to this game table, a notice that affects a notice that may occur in the future is displayed with priority, so that it may be easy to understand even if operation means overlap.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may be overlapped only with the second effect display. In the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. The display may be overlapped. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may be necessarily overlapped with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is not overlapped with the second effect display. There may be cases.

  In addition, the first effect display may be overlapped with the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display is also the second effect display in a state other than the first state. May overlap.

In addition, “second effective period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (f) and FIGS. ], When the operation means is operated, the second notice is started,
The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (f), 175 (e) to (g), etc. ] Is a production display including
The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of the second effective period [for example, FIG. 161 (e) to FIG. As shown in the figure (g) etc., the button reception time meter MT has a display mode that is changed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation reception time has started],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the second effective period, it is possible to prompt the player to derive the result of the mini game early, and thus it may be possible to focus attention on the first notice. .

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, A configuration in which a notice other than the second notice is also started may be used. Further, the second notice may be surely started when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, The second notice may not be started.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started only when the operation means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operation means is operated during the second effective period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

  Further, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display, or may include displays other than the second effective period display. Further, the second effect display may necessarily include the second effective period display, or may not include the second effective period display.

In addition, “the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o), etc.] And
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i), etc.] And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the event that the first notice is executed in the second mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the first notice is executed in the first mode. Configured,
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more easily executed in the second mode than when the second effect display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the first notice can be expected by starting the mini game.

  Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be necessarily executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  The first notice may be executable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be performed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. Also good. Moreover, the first notice may be necessarily executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

  Further, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed and the first notice is executed in the second mode. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be displayed in a definitive manner in the end.

  Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second mode. When the second effect display is started, the second mode is displayed. The first notice may be executed without fail.

In addition, the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [e.g., display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 177 (l), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, display of “Daiyoshi” shown in FIG. 176 (l), etc.]
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second mode [for example, “Mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 176 (n), etc.], the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since it becomes the second mode in the first notice, the jackpot symbol will be finally displayed, so that the expectation of the derived result for the second notice is further improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the second notice may be executed only in a plurality of modes, or may be executed in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  The second notice may be executable only in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may be performed in modes other than the third mode and the fourth mode. Also good. Further, the second notice may be necessarily executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

In addition, the first notice is a pre-read notice [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k) or the green display mode in FIG. 161 (m). Icon display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. The three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.
The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon [For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (k) and FIG. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or green display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Game table provided with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of executing decorative symbol variation display Because
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
It is configured to run multiple types of mini-games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 185 (g) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game [for example, the fortune game shown in FIG. 185 (g ′) to FIG.
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a)]
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the display area of the mini game is fixed to “a certain display area”, so that the player may be easy to understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be constituted by one display means or may be constituted by two or more display means. Further, in the case where the display is composed of two or more display means, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed only on a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol variation display is performed on all the display means. May be used.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or a game other than a plurality of types of mini games can be executed. Further, a plurality of types of mini-games may be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed.

  Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or a mini game other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. In addition, the first mini game and the second mini game may be executed without fail, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed. .

  In addition, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The first mini game may be displayed without using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

  Further, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The second mini game may be displayed without using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

In addition, it includes “notification means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of preliminary notifications,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [e.g., a look-ahead notice according to a blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 185 (l) or (l ′)],
The first mini game is referred to as a result (hereinafter referred to as “first result [for example, display of“ 1UP confirmed ”shown in FIG. 185 (k)]” indicating that the first notice is performed. ) Is a mini-game that can be derived,
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [for example, “1UP confirmation” shown in FIG. 185 (k ′), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the relationship such as the notice can be easily understood while the variation of the mini game is enjoyed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice or may not execute the first notice.

  In addition, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. The second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

In addition, “one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a pre-reading notice in a red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 186 (l) or FIG. (L ′)]. ,
The case where the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter referred to as “second result [for example,“ 3UP confirmed ”shown in FIG. 186 (k)]” indicating that the second notice is to be performed. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini game is a mini game from which the second result [for example, “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 186 (k ′), etc.] can be derived,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that a result suggesting that the second notice is performed by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice or may not execute the second notice.

  In addition, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. The second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 185 (g), etc.] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [e.g., a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 185 (g ′)] may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the type of mini-game is different, the same notice may be given, so that the player may have various expectations.

  Here, the first mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 185 (g), etc.] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [e.g., a face image BCH or the like shown in FIG. 185 (g ′)] may be displayed.
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, a savohani character SBH shown in FIG. 189 (A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 189 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the expectation for the second result can be given depending on the type of characters appearing in each mini game.

  Here, the first mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first mini game may be one in which only the second character is displayed, or may be one in which a character other than the second character is also displayed. In the first mini game, the second character may be displayed without fail, or the second character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the third character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the third character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the third character may be displayed without fail, or the third character may not be displayed.

  Note that the third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  Further, the first mini game may be one in which the second result is not derived when the first character is displayed, or the second mini game when the second character is displayed. The result may be always derived.

  In addition, the second mini-game may be one in which the second result is not derived when the first character is displayed, or the second mini-game when the third character is displayed. The result may be always derived.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [e.g., the heel mode shown in FIG. 187 (A1) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIG. 187 (B1) to FIG.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (A1) to (A6), the heel mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [e.g., a dice game] is a mini game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune game, etc.] is a mini game that is more easily executed during display of the second effect display than during display of the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the main effect and the mini game can be associated with each other.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. The display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. In addition, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be not displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be not displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  Further, the first mini game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be executed without fail during the display of the first effect display.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be always executed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, “It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (such as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)],
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [e.g., probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first gaming state and the second gaming state have different probabilities of executing the plurality of types of mini games.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the execution probability of the mini game differs depending on the gaming state, the expectation for the mini game to be executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to transition only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to transition to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Moreover, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to transition only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to transition to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Moreover, it may be configured to make a transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, and there may be cases where the transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state does not occur.

  In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games, or the second gaming state may The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

  In addition, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (including latent probability change, the same applies below), special figure low probability normal figure low probability At least one of the state and special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure high probability state common figure low probability state is the first gaming state The special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state The high probability state in the figure may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the normal high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the normal probability state, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Moreover, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the second gaming state.

In addition, the probability of executing the plurality of types of notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, “It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (such as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)],
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [e.g., probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game] is a mini game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. As shown in (A1) to (A6) in the same figure, the dice game is more easily executed in the normal gaming state than the probability variation state, etc.],
The second mini game [for example, fortune game] is a mini game that is easier to execute in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [for example, FIG. 190. As shown in (B1) to (B6) in the figure, the fortune game is more easily executed in the probability variation state than in the normal game state, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the gaming state and the type of mini-game can be associated with each other.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to transition only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to transition to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Moreover, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to transition only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to transition to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Moreover, it may be configured to make a transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, and there may be cases where the transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state does not occur.

  In addition, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability normal figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state ordinary figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state ordinary figure high The probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state is the second gaming state. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the normal high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the normal probability state, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Further, the first mini game may not be executed when in the second gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second mini game may not be executed when in the first gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

“The first gaming state [for example, normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state) etc.] and the second gaming state [for example, probability variation state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) etc. ] And the probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games is different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the execution probability of the mini game differs depending on the gaming state, the expectation for the mini game to be executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games, or the second gaming state The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a normal low probability state, etc.]
The second gaming state is a power support state [for example, a normal high probability state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

  Further, the power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, in the certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. Display [For example, a tutorial display “Mini-game starts at various timings” shown in FIG. 185 (c), a tutorial display “Yoshimune is an 8th general,” etc., shown in FIG. May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When one of the plurality of types of mini-games starts to be displayed in the certain display area, the displayed non-mini-game effect display is erased [for example, FIG. 185 (f) to FIG. As shown, when the mini-game starts when “Yoshimune is an 8th general”, the display of “Yoshimune is an 8th general” is erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since a non-mini game effect display can be performed using a display area from the normal time, there are cases where the player is likely to pay attention.

  Here, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of the multiple types of mini-games are displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area where none of the mini games are displayed. Further, when none of a plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area, or any of a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini game effect display may not be displayed in a display area that is not displayed.

  In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area only when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a display area. There may be a case where a non-mini game effect display is displayed in a display area other than when no game is displayed.

  Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any one of a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. When one of them starts to be displayed, the display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games starts to be displayed in a certain display area, the displayed non-mini-game effect display may be necessarily deleted, and any one of the plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. When one of them starts to be displayed, the displayed non-mini game effect display may not be erased.

  In addition, the non-mini-game effect display that is being displayed may be deleted only when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games starts to be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even in cases other than when one of the displays is started.

  In addition, as a display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, an original mode parameter display (LV display, etc.), a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC, etc. is adopted. Is possible.

In addition, the certain display area is a frame [for example, the liquid crystal frame of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 161 (d), the outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. , The outer frame of the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 175 (a), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by other than the frame.

In addition, “the display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the multi-function display area MF1 is an Etc. formed in the right half of the lower end portion]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the display area is an area that is expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is the start of the dice game. Etc. are expanded in relation to
The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the second mini game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where a player can focus attention on the mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

  Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Also, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game.

  Also, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the second mini game. . Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in relation to the start of the second mini game.

  In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in connection with the start of the first mini game, and may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini game. The expansion may be performed only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

In addition, the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the mini game is executed on the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the mini game may be more focused.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, “display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M etc. "
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In the above description,
“A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208);
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 175 (i ′),
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 175 (i), etc.]
The case where the second notice is performed than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed and confirmed,
The mini game is a game capable of deriving a plurality of results,
One of the plurality of results is a first result [e.g., display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 175 (h ′)],
One of the plurality of results is a second result [for example, a display of “Daichi” shown in FIG. 175 (h), etc.]
The second notice is more easily performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the notice means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game so as to derive the second result.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the mini game display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the mini game display. Further, the display means may always display the mini game display, or may not display the mini game display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. . Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  In addition, when the first notice is made, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed, and when the second notice is made, the jackpot symbol will always be confirmed and displayed. You may be comprised so that.

In addition, at least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be performed when the result of the mini-game becomes the second result before the result of the mini-game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the mini-game is started, the message “strong cut-in at Daikichi” is displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where attention can be paid to the trend of mini-games toward the occurrence of an advantageous notice.

  In addition, by incorporating a so-called mission effect into the mini-game, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes where the player can achieve a sense of accomplishment.

  Here, before the result of the mini game is derived, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be performed by the result of the mini game being the second result. At least, it is suggested that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the mini game result is derived, so that a notice other than the second notice is likely to be performed. It may be configured. In addition, before the mini game result is derived, it may be configured to at least suggest that the second notice is always performed when the mini game derivation result becomes the second result. However, before the result of the mini-game is derived, the result of the derivation of the mini-game becomes the second result, so that at least it may be suggested that the second notice is not performed. May be.

  In addition, before the mini game result is derived, the second game may be configured to be notified in advance that the second notice is likely to be performed when the mini game derivation result becomes the second result. .

  The suggested mode is, for example, a mode in which at least the effect of mission achievement is suggested, such as “If successful”, “Take out”, or “When ... stops”. Any embodiment can be applied.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [eg, mission effects shown in FIG. 176 (c) to FIG.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the mission effect shown in FIGS. 176 (c) to (n) is a decorative symbol. Etc. during the change display of
The first effect display is an effect display from which a plurality of effect results can be derived,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [for example, display of “Mission failure” shown in FIG. 177 (n), etc.]
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, display of “Mission Achievement” shown in FIG. 176 (n), etc.]
Before the result of the first effect display is derived, it is at least suggested that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result. [For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), when the mission effect starts, the contents of the mission such as “Cut out” and “If you come out” are displayed, etc.]
The second effect result [for example, in the first effect display than the case where the second result [for example, the display of “Daiyoshi” shown in FIG. 176 (n) is configured such that the display of “Mission Achievement”, etc.] is derived, so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes where the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by incorporating a so-called mission effect in addition to the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where variations in mission effects can be increased by providing a difference in the mission results.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the difference between the mission of the main effect and the mission of the mini game may be clarified.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  The first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be able to derive results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

  Further, the first effect display may be such that only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, or an effect result other than the first effect result and the second effect result is also derived. It may be possible. In addition, the first effect display may necessarily derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or the first effect result and the second effect result may not be derived. Also good.

  Further, before the result of the first effect display is derived, the fact that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result is easily notified in advance. May be.

  Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a definite manner. In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, “when the second effect result is derived, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the mission effect can be clearly identified.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed, and also in cases other than when the second effect result is derived. The jackpot symbol may be finalized and displayed.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (g) to FIG. It may be said that both the production and the mini-game are displayed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to hold that the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, there may be cases other than the first state, it may be the first state, or the first state. It may not be possible.

In addition, “the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 176 (g) to FIG. 11 (l) and FIG. 177 (g). As shown in (l) of the figure, when the production button 136 is operated repeatedly in a mini game, “Daiichi” or “Koyoshi” is derived, etc.]
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
When the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 177 (m)] than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176 (m)]. The weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG.
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the mini game is derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and even when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the mini game may be derived. The result may be derived. Further, the configuration may be such that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the mini game is not derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, and the mini game is also provided in a case other than the case where the operation means is not operated in the mini game. The game result may not be derived. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

  Also, it may be configured such that the first notice is easier to perform than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or the result of the mini game is not derived In other cases, the first notice may be more easily performed than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be more easily performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be performed than the second notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be performed. When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always performed. May be configured.

  Further, it may be configured such that the second notice is easier to be performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, or other than when the result of the mini game is derived. In this case, the second notice may be easier to be performed than the first notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured so that the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, It may be configured such that the second notice is less likely to be performed than the first notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be performed. When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always performed. May be configured.

Further, even if “the second notice is scheduled to be performed (hereinafter referred to as“ first case ”), if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, if it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived as a result of the mini game but the result of the mini game is not derived, as shown in FIG. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, since the notice does not affect the judgment of the success / failure, even if a notice different from the schedule is generated, the result of the judgment of the success / failure is not affected, and the notice that is forcibly scheduled is displayed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to participate in a mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be performed only when the result of the mini game is not derived. It may be configured such that the first notice is performed even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, it may be configured such that the first notice is always made when the result of the mini game is not derived. If the result is not derived, the first notice may not be performed.

In addition, it includes “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of on-hold icons is a first on-hold icon [for example, the on-hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m), etc.]
The first notice is a notice made when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice made when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where a change in the display mode of the hold icon can be expected while enjoying the mini game. For example, the button hold icon is displayed and the effect that the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means is monotonous only in the conventional effect, but according to this game stand, the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Later, since there may be a further change, there is a case where the expectation in the change display of the hold icon can be further increased.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  In addition, the first notice may be performed only when the first hold icon is displayed, or may be performed other than when the first hold icon is displayed. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the first hold icon is displayed. .

  Further, the second notice may be performed only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be performed by other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily performed when the second hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the second hold icon is displayed. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to start only during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state of being performed. Further, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured not to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the current state, it may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon. In the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. In the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, Even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to be changed to the second hold icon. In this case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon when the mini game result is not derived.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon. When the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon, or the first case If the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. In other cases, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon.

In addition, it includes “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of on-hold icons is a first on-hold icon [for example, the on-hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m), etc.]
The first notice is a notice made when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice made when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is not changed. The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display that starts after the change display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon can be changed depending on the participation situation of the mini game.

  Also, according to this game table, there is a case where the relationship between the notice and the reliability can be maintained even if the mini-game is not finally joined.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  In addition, the first notice may be performed only when the first hold icon is displayed, or may be performed other than when the first hold icon is displayed. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the first hold icon is displayed. .

  Further, the second notice may be performed only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be performed by other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily performed when the second hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the second hold icon is displayed. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to start only during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state of being performed. Further, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured not to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the current state, it may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is surely changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured.

  In the first case, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display even when the second result is not derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Even in cases other than the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold icon is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display that starts after a certain symbol variation display. The icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold icon is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display that starts after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the icon may not change to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display started later. In the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation icon other than during the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display is performed. The hold icon may be changed to a second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If the symbol change display is not executed, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon, and the first change icon is displayed after the symbol change display is started. The hold icon may be changed to a second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a certain symbol variation display Alternatively, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during symbol variation display that is started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. In addition, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the case other than the first case, the result of the mini game Is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during symbol variation display that is started after a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The derivation result of the mini-game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 176 (i) to (l), the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the number of operations is When the condition is satisfied, “Daiyoshi” is derived. However, as shown in FIGS. 178 (i) to (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, Etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In addition, only the mini game derivation result may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means, and other than the mini game derivation result may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means. . Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation state of the operation means, and the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation state of the operation means.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 177 (i) to (l). In this way, when it is determined in advance that “Nakayoshi” is derived, “Kokichi” is derived even if the production button 136 is operated continuously or not, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In the mini game, only the same result may be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. There may be a case where a result other than the same result is derived when the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may be always derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated. In the mini game, the operating means is operated when the operating means is operated. There may be a case where the same result is not derived in the case where there is no case.

  In addition, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated, or the operation means is operated in other than the mini game. In some cases, the same result may be derived when the operation means is not operated.

In addition, the display means includes first display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like] and second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the like. And means configured to include:
The first display means and the second display means are separate display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be configured by. The display means may be configured to include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be a thing.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (m) or the mini game shown in FIGS. 195 (j) to (o)]. Possible means,
The mini game is a game capable of deriving a plurality of types of results,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (k), a treasure box is opened by the operation key unit 137. When the selection is made and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined, a samurai character BA appears from the treasure box, and “Komikichi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, or FIG. 196 (A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the directing button 136 is operated repeatedly, it is shown that the clothes worn by the bancho character are broken, and “banchou awakening” and “today is in great condition” are displayed. ,
One of the plurality of types of results is derived in accordance with the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. When the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected with the key unit 137 and the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and “Daiyoshi” is displayed as a result of the fortune telling. FIG. 194 (B1) As shown in FIG. 6B6, when the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the character BA of the frog appears and “Komikichi as a result of fortune telling” ”Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 196 (A1) to (A6), when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the condition of the number of operations is satisfied, The appearance of the clothes worn by the long character is shown, “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in great condition” are displayed, and the production button 136 is operated repeatedly, but the condition of the number of operations is not satisfied In such a case, as shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the clothes of the Bancho character are not torn, and the “Bancho Awakening Game” is completed]
One of the plurality of types of results is a third result [for example, the display of the character BA and “Kokichi” as shown in FIG. 193 (k), or the number length shown in FIG. 197 (C7). Display that the character's clothes are not torn]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest a result of the success / failure determination [for example, at least one of the determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate or not]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game table, there are cases where a player can be entertained in addition to a pure game.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the mini game display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the mini game display. Further, the display means may always display the mini game display or may not display the mini game display.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be other than the plurality of types of results. The mini game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

  Further, only the mini game result may be derived by operating the operation means, or other than the mini game result may be derived by operating the operation means. May be. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. May be.

  Further, it may be configured such that only one of a plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means, or of the plurality of types of results according to the operation status of the operation means. It may be configured such that anything other than any one is derived. Further, it may be configured such that any one of a plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operation means, or any one of the plurality of types of results according to the operation status of the operation means. One of them may not be derived.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result. The mini game may always derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

  In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the determination, and is not intended to notify.

The “mini game is a game for deriving a result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. The mission is to select the treasure chest of the contents]
The certain result can be derived according to the operation status of the operation means [For example, in the case shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. If the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and “Daiyoshi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, there may be only one result, or two or more results.

  Further, only a certain result may be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means, or a result other than the certain result may be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means. Further, it may be configured such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operation means, or may be configured such that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means.

Further, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepared,
The mini-game is started in a first period [for example, a period in a standby state (including a state in which a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed) in which no special figure is displayed) (hereinafter, Is called "the first case")
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [for example, a period in which both of the suspensions of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are 0],
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to entertain in a mini game during the first period.

  Further, according to this game table, there are cases where the operation means can be actively operated even during the original game by prompting the operation means to operate in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. The decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be started only during the first period, or may be started during a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or there is a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Also good.

  Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, or other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device). 214 etc.) may be a period in which there is something that has not been executed.

In addition, “automatic operation of the operation means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,
In the first case, the mini-game is configured such that the auto operation cannot be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (g) and FIG. Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Banchou awakening game, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, in the first case, since it is a mini game that is not related to the determination of success or failure, the automatic operation cannot be executed, and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operation means may be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operation means may not be executed.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the auto operation cannot be performed, or may be configured such that operations other than the auto operation cannot be performed. In the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation cannot be performed, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be performed.

  Further, the mini game may be configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed in cases other than the first case. Also good.

“The mini-game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as“ second case ”) [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (d) to FIG. The mini game shown in FIGS. 171 (m) to 172 (f) and the mini game shown in FIGS. 185 (g) to (k) are started during the display of the decorative symbols. 200 (e) to (i) are started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.]
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period;
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game,
The first result is more easily derived in the mini-game than in the second case,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to entertain with a mini-game during the game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be always derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Also good.

Further, “the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case is configured to be different [for example, today's fortunes shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (m) Fortune-telling and the Banchou awakening game shown in FIGS. 195 (j) to (o) are mini-games that are started in a standby state, and are dice games and diagrams shown in FIGS. 185 (g ′) to (l ′) shown in FIG. 11 (l ′) are mini-games that are started during the display of decorative symbols, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a simple game depending on the type of mini-game.

  Here, the first case and the second case may be configured so that only the type of the mini game started is different, or the mini game started in the first case and the second case. You may be comprised so that there may be different things besides a kind. In addition, the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other. The types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured. May be configured so that they may not differ.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first valid period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the Banchou awakening game shown in FIG. 195 (k), etc.] is displayed. Configured to be
In the mini game started in the second case, a second effective period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 176 (i)] is displayed. Configured,
The first effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes with the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (k) to (n). As described above, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],
The second effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes with the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIGS. 176 (i) to (k). As described above, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],
The speed at which the display mode changes is different between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the type of mini-game can be distinguished by looking at the validity period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first An effective period display other than the effective period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display is displayed. You may be comprised so that a period display may not be displayed.

  Further, the first valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the first case. The first validity period display may be displayed.

  Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second valid period display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be displayed. An effective period display other than the period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be always displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that a period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second validity period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. The second effective period display may be displayed.

  The first effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period for which the operation of the operation means is effective, or other than the elapse of the period for which the operation of the operation means is effective. Further, the display mode may be changed according to the above. The first effective period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled, or the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled. Accordingly, the display mode may not change.

  Further, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective. Further, the display mode may be changed according to the above. In addition, the second effective period display may be one in which the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is made effective, Accordingly, the display mode may not change.

  Further, either the first effective period display or the second effective period display may not be displayed.

  In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be faster in the display mode change, or the second effective period display is the display mode. The speed of change may be fast.

  In addition, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may be different display modes or the same display mode. In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be larger, or the second effective period display may be larger. The size may be the same between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.

Further, in the mini game started in the first case, a first operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the Banchou awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] are displayed,
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. Configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [for example, one, etc.] of a display pattern [for example, a default display mode, etc.]
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two, etc.] of display patterns [for example, a default display mode and a display mode that vibrates and rotates, etc.]
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, in a mini game started in the second case, there is a case where a sense of expectation for a big hit can be increased by a variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first An operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be always displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first operation is displayed. You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

  In the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation An operation promotion display other than the promotion display may also be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be displayed without fail. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation is displayed. You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that prompts only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that prompts other operations than the operation means. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only with the first number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed with a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation promotion display may always be displayed with the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the first number of display patterns.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only with the second number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed with a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may always be displayed with the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the second number of display patterns.

  Further, the first number may be 1 or a number of 2 or more.

  In addition, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size, and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have the same size.

  Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least some of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a first result [for example, display of“ Koyoshi ”shown in FIG.
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the determination as to whether or not it is correct [for example, the display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 177 (l) is the same as the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. At least suggest indications, etc.]
The first result is more easily derived in the mini-game than in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the determination, or may also indicate at least other than the result of the determination. In addition, the first result may necessarily at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the determination.

  In addition, the first result may indicate a result of the determination of success or failure, or may notify the result of the determination of success or failure.

  In the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be necessarily derived in the mini game.

In addition, the first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. As shown in the above, in the mini-game that is performed while the decorative symbols are being displayed, a notice or look-ahead notice is given when the hero's character YSM appears from the treasure box.
The first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the jackpot game is a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the mini game can be functioned as a notice.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, button operation effects shown in FIG. 173 (c) to FIG.
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o), etc.]”) may be executed. And
A notice related to the first notice may be executed as the first result derived when the mini-game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. c) to (l), the display of “Nakayoshi” derived in the mini-game that is started during the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is foreseeing the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to focus on the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  The first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. The first effect display may always be related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  In addition, as a first result derived when the mini-game is started while the decorative symbol variation display is being executed, only the notice related to the first notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may also be executed. In addition, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be always executed, or the decoration symbol variation display is executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started, a notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a second result [for example, display of“ Daiyoshi ”shown in FIG.
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is correct [for example, the display of “Daiyoshi” shown in FIG. At least suggest indications, etc.]
The second result is more easily derived in the mini-game than the first case,
If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the success / failure determination, or may be a result of informing the result of the success / failure determination beforehand.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game. In the second case, the second result may be necessarily derived in the mini game. Good.

  Further, when the first result is derived, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed. When the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always finalized. It may be configured to be displayed.

In the first case, the mini-game only has the third result [for example, the result of the mini-game shown in FIG. 193 (k), FIG. (K1) to FIG. (K4)]. A game to derive,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plural types of results is a fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and“ Daiyoshi ”shown in FIG. 193 (k1)” or the display shown in FIG. 196 (A6). The display of the state that the clothes of the Bancho character were torn, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest a result of the success / failure determination [for example, at least one of the determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate or not]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where variations can be given to the result of the mini game.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. . The mini game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

  Further, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the determination of success / failure, nor is it intended to notify.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position that can be operated by the player [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 17 (17)],
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14)],
The operation effective period display is a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14) is an effect button. 136 shows the remaining time of the operation valid period, etc.]
The first display is a first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter having a mode in which a miniature character BCH having a long length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17). MT display etc.] may be included,
The first display is a display in which the operation effective period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (12) to (17) in the figure, the button reception time meter MT is operated by the effect button 136 when the display in the mode indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is performed. Then, the display is switched to a mode in which the mini-character BCH with the longest length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge]
The first notice display is a notice display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (7), the button reception time When the operation valid period elapses without the production button 136 being operated, the meter MT is not notified using the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is deleted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become various. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game machine. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where the operation means can be operated quickly.

  Further, according to this game table, there is a case where expectation can be given even after the operation means is operated.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player cannot operate.

  Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  A configuration in which the operation unit itself includes a display unit may be applied, or a configuration in which the display unit itself includes an operation unit may be applied.

  Further, the first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may necessarily include an operation effective period display, or may not include an operation effective period display.

  The operation valid period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that is switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

  Further, the first display may be one in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display only in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started. Further, the operation effective period display may be the first notice display according to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where the operation valid period display does not become the first notice display according to the operation means being operated later.

  In addition, the first notice display may not be displayed only when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period, and also when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may not be displayed. In addition, the first notice display may not always be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period, or may be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. There may be.

  Further, the first notice display can be applied to a notice effect by output of sound, a notice effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and a notice effect by light emission of the lamp, in addition to the display by the display device.

In addition, the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display shown in FIG. 253 (3) in which a number-length icon and a panda icon are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT, and the like]. The display may be
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (3) to FIG. The button reception time meter MT in a display mode with a panda icon is displayed since the button operation effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to focus attention on the first display even before the operating means is operated.

  Here, the first display may include only the second notice display, or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the second notice display or may not include the second display.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. There may be. The second notice display may be displayed before the operation means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. There is a notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.]
The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which number-length icons and panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3), etc.]. There is a notice that may be,
The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which number-length icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11), etc.]. It is a notice display,
The case in which the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form is more in accordance with the third display form than the case in which the second notice display is displayed in the second display form. The first notice display is configured to be displayed more easily [for example, the button reception time than the case where the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a long-length icon and a panda icon. When the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are both icon numbers, the princess mini character is more likely to be displayed on the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT],
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in the final display than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. [For example, when the princess mini-character is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, the princess mini-character is displayed more easily and the big hit symbol is displayed more easily] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, there are cases where the first notice display can be focused by operating the operation means.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or a display mode other than the first display mode may be displayed. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Also good. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or a display mode other than the second display mode may be displayed. Also good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or a display mode other than the fourth display mode may be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, only the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed. When the previous notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display in a display form other than the third display form may also be displayed. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display in the third display form may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. Is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form. Even when the previous notice display is not displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. In the event that the symbol is displayed, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in the final display, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display form. In some cases, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. Even in cases other than the case where the symbol is displayed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.

“One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), the decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), 277 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc.]
The fourth display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12), etc.]
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)].
In the fourth display, a sixth display mode [for example, a decabutton image 136aL having a larger display mode than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29) or an effect button 136 shown in FIG. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV etc. of the rotating aspect] may be displayed in advance,
The first notice display may be displayed in a first display form [for example, a form in which a miniature character BCH with a long length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15), etc.] Display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.]
The first display according to the third display mode is more effective when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. [For example, the button reception time meter is displayed when the deca button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed rather than when the button image 136a is displayed. The princess mini character is easy to be displayed on the remaining display part of the MT gauge]
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in the final display than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. [For example, when the princess mini-character is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, the princess mini-character is displayed more easily and the big hit symbol is displayed more easily] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Further, the fourth display may be composed only of the operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the operation promotion display. The fourth display may necessarily include an operation promotion display or may not include an operation promotion display.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Also good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Also good. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, only the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be necessarily displayed, or the fourth display may be When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode. Even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed in some cases.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. In the event that the symbol is displayed, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in the final display, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display form. In some cases, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. Even in cases other than the case where the symbol is displayed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that starts to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, in FIG. As shown, the gauge length of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH having the longest length when the effect button 136 is operated is a length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display mode of the first notice display varies depending on the timing when the operation means is operated, the display of the first notice display can be varied, and the production effect is improved. There is a case.

  Here, the first notice display may be capable of starting display only in the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation effective period is started. The display may be started even in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operating means is operated. In addition, the first notice display may always start display in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or after the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where the display does not start in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH with the longest length is displayed is displayed until the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses after the production button 136 is operated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operating means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, and thus the operation of the operating means may be facilitated.

  Here, the first notice display may be able to be displayed only in a period according to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or after the operation effective period is started. The display may be possible even during a period other than the period according to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may be displayed for a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means after the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where it is not displayed in a period corresponding to the operation timing of.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. The button reception time meter MT on which is displayed is such that the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, so there are cases where the first notice display can be focused.

  Here, the first notice display may be capable of changing the display mode only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed depending on other than the passage of time. There may be. In addition, the first notice display may always change in display mode with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

Further, “the operation valid period display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT is The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the display mode of the operation valid period display changes with the passage of time, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the operation valid period display.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be one in which the display mode can be changed only with the lapse of time, or the display mode can be changed with other than the lapse of time. May be. In addition, the operation effective period display may be a display mode that always changes with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. 5 (5)],”
The second display is the operation effective period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)],
The second display is a display that is deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6), The button reception time meter MT is erased when the presentation button 136 is operated while the display in the mode indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period of the presentation button 136 is performed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the second display when the operation means is operated.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may be configured to include only the operation effective period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation effective period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation effective period display, or may be configured to exclude the operation effective period display.

  Further, the second display may be deleted only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means is displayed after the operation effective period is started. It may be erased in cases other than when it is operated. In addition, the second display may be always deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. However, it may not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. 5 (5)],”
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The second display is a display that may include the operation effective period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)],
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display,
The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to focus attention on the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may include only an operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may necessarily include an operation effective period display, or may not include an operation effective period display.

  Further, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. The second display may necessarily include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be partly different from the first notice display or may be all different.

  Further, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started. In addition, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display is always the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started. Depending on the operation means being operated after the effective period is started, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display.

In addition, “the operation effective period display is a display by a gauge [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5) and FIGS. Indication of the gauge on the button reception time meter MT to show],
The first notice display is a display by a gauge [for example, a display of a gauge in the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH of the number shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the operation valid period display and the first notice display may be easily visible.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be constituted only by a gauge, or may be constituted including other than the gauge. In addition, the operation valid period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured to include no gauge.

  Further, the first notice display may be constituted only by a gauge, or may be constituted by including other than the gauge. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured to include no gauge.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative symbol variation display, etc.]
The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (20), The decorative symbol variation display has been developed into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the operation valid period is originally used, it may be possible to pay attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there is a case where the first notice display including the display related to the operation effective period can function as a timer notice concerning the development of a certain effect.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during execution of an effect other than during the execution of a certain effect. There may be. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed during execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may be developed other than later. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to always develop after the display of the first notice display is started, or develop after the display of the first notice display is started. You may not.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17)],
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17), the operation is effective. When the effect button 136 is operated after the period starts, a step-up notice is started, etc.]
The third display is a notice display,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , Has evolved into super reach after the start of the step-up notice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the third display is displayed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period, or in a case other than when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period, or may not be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period. Also good.

  The third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include displays other than the notice display. In addition, the third display may be configured to always include a notice display, or may be configured to include no notice display.

  Further, a certain display may be configured to develop only after the third display is started, or may be developed even after the third display is started. It may be configured as follows. Also, a certain display may be configured to always develop after the third display is started, or may not be developed after the third display is started.

In addition, the third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (9). In addition, after the operation effective period starts, the step-up notice is started even when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first notice display cannot be seen while the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated even if the operation means is not operated. There are cases where the operation of the operation means can be promoted in order to see the notice display.

  Here, the third display may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period, or when the operation display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. There may be.

Further, when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds from the start of the operation effective period] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, the operation effective period ends. Configured as
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second after the operation effective period starts] after the operation effective period starts. The period to be performed is a fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.]
When the operation means is operated after a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds after the operation effective period starts] after the operation effective period starts, the first notice display is displayed. The period to be performed is a fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.]
The third period is longer than the second period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the operation effective period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or after the operation effective period starts. It may be configured such that a period other than the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated. Further, the operation effective period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or the operation effective period starts. If the first period elapses without the means being operated, the operation valid period may not end.

  Here, the operation effective period display may be a display for performing notification regarding the first period.

  Further, the operation effective period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or the operation effective period starts. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  The second period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. In addition, the second period may be a period longer than the fourth period, may be the same length period, or may be a short period. Further, the third period may be a period longer than the fifth period, may be the same length period, or may be a short period.

Further, the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period,
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third period and the fifth period is the first period. It may be longer than the length of.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position that can be operated by the player [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 17 (17)],
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14)],
The operation effective period display is a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14) is an effect button. 136 shows the remaining time of the operation valid period, etc.]
The first display is a first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter having a mode in which a miniature character BCH having a long length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17). MT display etc.] may be included,
The first display is a display in which the operation effective period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (12) to (17) in the figure, the button reception time meter MT is operated by the effect button 136 when the display in the mode indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is performed. Then, the display is such that the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge]
The first notice display is a notice display configured to include the operation valid period display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17), a mini-character BCH having a watch length is displayed. The button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the length of the gauge decreases corresponding to the time after the operation valid period starts],
A game stand characterized by that.

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become various. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game machine. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by display means.

  Further, according to this game table, there is a case where expectation can be given even after the operation means is operated.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player cannot operate.

  Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  A configuration in which the operation unit itself includes a display unit may be applied, or a configuration in which the display unit itself includes an operation unit may be applied.

  Further, the first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may necessarily include an operation effective period display, or may not include an operation effective period display.

  The operation valid period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that is switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

  Further, the first display may be one in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display only in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started. Further, the operation effective period display may be the first notice display according to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where the operation valid period display does not become the first notice display according to the operation means being operated later.

  Further, the first notice display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation valid period display. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include an operation valid period display, or may be configured to not include an operation valid period display.

  Further, the first notice display can be applied to a notice effect by output of sound, a notice effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and a notice effect by light emission of the lamp, in addition to the display by the display device.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that starts to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, in FIG. As shown, the gauge length of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH having the longest length when the effect button 136 is operated is a length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display mode of the first notice display varies depending on the timing when the operation means is operated, the display of the first notice display can be varied, and the production effect is improved. There is a case.

  Here, the first notice display may be capable of starting display only in the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation effective period is started. The display may be started even in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operating means is operated. In addition, the first notice display may always start display in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or after the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where the display does not start in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH with the longest length is displayed is displayed until the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses after the production button 136 is operated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operating means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, and thus the operation of the operating means may be facilitated.

  Here, the first notice display may be able to be displayed only in a period according to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or after the operation effective period is started. The display may be possible even during a period other than the period according to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may be displayed for a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means after the operation effective period is started. There may be a case where it is not displayed in a period corresponding to the operation timing of.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. The button reception time meter MT on which is displayed is such that the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, so there are cases where the first notice display can be focused.

  Here, the first notice display may be capable of changing the display mode only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed depending on other than the passage of time. There may be. In addition, the first notice display may always change in display mode with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

Further, “the operation valid period display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT is The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the display mode of the operation valid period display changes with the passage of time, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the operation valid period display.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be one in which the display mode can be changed only with the lapse of time, or the display mode can be changed with other than the lapse of time. May be. In addition, the operation effective period display may be a display mode that always changes with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. 5 (5)],”
The second display is the operation effective period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)],
The second display is a display that is deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6), The button reception time meter MT is erased when the presentation button 136 is operated while the display in the mode indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period of the presentation button 136 is performed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the second display when the operation means is operated.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may be configured to include only the operation effective period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation effective period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation effective period display, or may be configured to exclude the operation effective period display.

  Further, the second display may be deleted only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means is displayed after the operation effective period is started. It may be erased in cases other than when it is operated. In addition, the second display may be always deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. However, it may not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. 5 (5)],”
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The second display is a display that may include the operation effective period display [for example, display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)],
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display,
The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to focus attention on the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may include only an operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may necessarily include an operation effective period display, or may not include an operation effective period display.

  Further, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. The second display may necessarily include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be partly different from the first notice display or may be all different.

  Further, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started. In addition, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display is always the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started. Depending on the operation means being operated after the effective period is started, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display.

In addition, “the operation effective period display is a display by a gauge [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5) and FIGS. Indication of the gauge on the button reception time meter MT to show],
The first notice display is a display by a gauge [for example, a display of a gauge in the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH of the number shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the operation valid period display and the first notice display may be easily visible.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be constituted only by a gauge, or may be constituted including other than the gauge. In addition, the operation valid period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured to include no gauge.

  Further, the first notice display may be constituted only by a gauge, or may be constituted by including other than the gauge. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured to include no gauge.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative symbol variation display, etc.]
The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (20), The decorative symbol variation display has been developed into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the operation valid period is originally used, it may be possible to pay attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there is a case where the first notice display including the display related to the operation effective period can function as a timer notice concerning the development of a certain effect.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during execution of an effect other than during the execution of a certain effect. There may be. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed during execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may be developed other than later. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to always develop after the display of the first notice display is started, or develop after the display of the first notice display is started. You may not.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17)],
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17), the operation is effective. When the effect button 136 is operated after the period starts, a step-up notice is started, etc.]
The third display is a notice display,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , Has evolved into super reach after the start of the step-up notice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the third display is displayed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period, or in a case other than when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period, or may not be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period. Also good.

  The third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include displays other than the notice display. In addition, the third display may be configured to always include a notice display, or may be configured to include no notice display.

  Further, a certain display may be configured to develop only after the third display is started, or may be developed even after the third display is started. It may be configured as follows. Also, a certain display may be configured to always develop after the third display is started, or may not be developed after the third display is started.

In addition, the third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (9). In addition, after the operation effective period starts, the step-up notice is started even when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first notice display cannot be seen while the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated even if the operation means is not operated. There are cases where the operation of the operation means can be promoted in order to see the notice display.

  Here, the third display may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period, or when the operation display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. There may be.

In addition, the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display shown in FIG. 253 (3) in which a number-length icon and a panda icon are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT, and the like]. The display may be
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (3) to FIG. The button reception time meter MT in a display mode with a panda icon is displayed since the button operation effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to focus attention on the first display even before the operating means is operated.

  Here, the first display may include only the second notice display, or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the second notice display or may not include the second display.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. There may be. The second notice display may be displayed before the operation means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. There is a notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.]
The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which number-length icons and panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3), etc.]. There is a notice that may be,
The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which number-length icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11), etc.]. It is a notice display,
The case in which the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form is more in accordance with the third display form than the case in which the second notice display is displayed in the second display form. The first notice display is configured to be displayed more easily [for example, the button reception time than the case where the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a long-length icon and a panda icon. When the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are both icon numbers, the princess mini character is more likely to be displayed on the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT],
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in the final display than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. [For example, when the princess mini-character is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, the princess mini-character is displayed more easily and the big hit symbol is displayed more easily] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, there are cases where the first notice display can be focused by operating the operation means.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or a display mode other than the first display mode may be displayed. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Also good. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or a display mode other than the second display mode may be displayed. Also good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or a display mode other than the fourth display mode may be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, only the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed. When the previous notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display in a display form other than the third display form may also be displayed. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display in the third display form may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. Is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form. Even when the previous notice display is not displayed in the fourth display form, the first notice display according to the third display form may be displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. In the event that the symbol is displayed, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in the final display, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display form. In some cases, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. Even in cases other than the case where the symbol is displayed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.

“One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), the decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), 277 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc.]
The fourth display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12), etc.]
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)].
In the fourth display, a sixth display mode [for example, a decabutton image 136aL having a larger display mode than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29) or an effect button 136 shown in FIG. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV etc. of the rotating aspect] may be displayed in advance,
The first notice display may be displayed in a first display form [for example, a form in which a miniature character BCH with a long length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15), etc.] Display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.]
The first display according to the third display mode is more effective when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. [For example, the button reception time meter is displayed when the deca button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed rather than when the button image 136a is displayed. The princess mini character is easy to be displayed on the remaining display part of the MT gauge]
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in the final display than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form. [For example, when the princess mini-character is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, the princess mini-character is displayed more easily and the big hit symbol is displayed more easily] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Further, the fourth display may be composed only of the operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the operation promotion display. The fourth display may necessarily include an operation promotion display or may not include an operation promotion display.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Also good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Also good. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, only the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be necessarily displayed, or the fourth display may be When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode. Even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed in some cases.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. In the event that the symbol is displayed, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in the final display, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display form. In some cases, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in the third display form. Even in cases other than the case where the symbol is displayed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.

Further, when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds from the start of the operation effective period] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, the operation effective period ends. Configured as
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second after the operation effective period starts] after the operation effective period starts. The period to be performed is a fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.]
When the operation means is operated after a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds after the operation effective period starts] after the operation effective period starts, the first notice display is displayed. The period to be performed is a fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.]
The third period is longer than the second period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the operation effective period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or after the operation effective period starts. It may be configured such that a period other than the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated. Further, the operation effective period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or the operation effective period starts. If the first period elapses without the means being operated, the operation valid period may not end.

  Here, the operation effective period display may be a display for performing notification regarding the first period.

  Further, the operation effective period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or the operation effective period starts. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  The second period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. In addition, the second period may be a period longer than the fourth period, may be the same length period, or may be a short period. Further, the third period may be a period longer than the fifth period, may be the same length period, or may be a short period.

Further, the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period,
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third period and the fifth period is the first period. It may be longer than the length of.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, a decorative pattern of “special 2” shown in FIG. 274 (5), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display combining the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6), etc.]
The first display is a display related to a button effect [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8)],
The second display is a display related to the button effect,
The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display constituting at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, “decoration 3 shown in FIG. 274 (5)”. -The special 2-decoration 4 "decorative symbol combination or the" Special 2-special 2-special 2 "decorative symbol combination shown in FIG.
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are different from each other. [For example, the decorative pattern “special 2” shown in FIG. 274 (5) simply represents a button, and the word “Chance” is displayed at the top. The button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) is a display imitating the effect button 136, and the button reception time meter MT is added, and the display mode is different. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become various. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game machine. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be discriminable whether it is once displayed as a symbol or it is generated as an effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the first display may be a display related only to the button effect, or may be related to an effect other than the button effect. Further, the first display may always be related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

  Further, the second display may be a display related only to the button effect, or may be related to an effect other than the button effect. Further, the second display may always be related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only as a display constituting at least part of the combination of the decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation display may be performed. It may be displayed as a display other than the display constituting at least a part of the combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the first display may be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of the combination of the decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed during the decoration symbol variation display. There may be a case where it is not displayed as a display constituting at least a part of the combination of symbols.

  Further, the second display may not constitute only a combination of decorative symbols, or may not constitute anything other than a combination of decorative symbols. The second display may not necessarily constitute a combination of decorative symbols, or may constitute a combination of decorative symbols.

  In addition, the first display and the second display may be partially different displays or may be all different displays.

  The display difference between the first display and the second display includes, for example, a difference due to a different color, a difference due to a lighting mode, a difference due to a blinking mode, a difference due to an animation mode, Differences due to the presence or absence (for example, the presence or absence of an animation of pressing a button) can be mentioned, but are not limited thereto.

“The button effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed [for example, the button operation effects shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8) are shown in FIG. 274 (5). ) Is started after the decorative symbol “special 2” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG., And the button operation effects shown in FIGS. 277 (6) to (8) are shown at the timing shown in FIG. Etc., which starts after all three "special 2" decorative symbols are displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the button effect will be performed by displaying the first display.

  Here, the button effect may be started only after the first display is displayed, or may be started other than after the first display is displayed. The button effect may be always started after the first display is displayed, or may not be started after the first display is displayed.

In addition, the first display is a display that can be displayed in a first number of display modes [for example, one display mode (for example, a display pattern of a decorative pattern of “special 2”, etc.)]
The second display is a second number of display modes [for example, five display modes (for example, the display mode of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6), the display of the big button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29)). Mode, display mode of vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6), display mode of protruding button image 136aS shown in FIG. 279 (41), and button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 281 (7). Display mode of the simplified button image 136aX), etc.]
The second number is greater than the first number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first display can be made easy to understand by reducing the number of patterns, while the second display can be shown as various variations such as a notice.

  Here, the first display may be displayable only in the first number of display modes, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the first number of display modes. . Further, the first display may always be displayed in the first number of display modes, or may not be displayed in the first number of display modes.

  Further, the second display may be displayable only in the second number of display modes, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the second number of display modes. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the second number of display modes, or may not be displayed in the second number of display modes.

  Further, the first number and the second number may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the first number.

And the first number is one,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where it is easy to understand as a symbol once displayed by making the number of patterns of the first display one.

  Here, the first number may be greater than one or may be zero.

In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 277 (10), as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the left symbol -A decorative symbol is displayed for each of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed]
The button effect is started when a combination of the three first displays is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). [For example, in the button operation effects shown in FIGS. 277 (6) to (8), a decorative symbol “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively. 2) Special 2 ”is displayed when the display is temporarily stopped with the combination of decorative symbols, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that there is a possibility that a button effect will be performed.

  Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be configured such that only the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, combinations other than the three decorative symbol combinations are also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be configured to always stop display. As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be stopped. It may be configured to be.

  Further, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped only by the result of the decorative symbol variation display, or the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped other than the result of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, the button effect may be started only when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decoration symbols during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation display. During the execution of the above, it may be started also in a case other than the case where the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the button effect may be always started when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decoration symbols during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation display. During the execution of the above, there may be a case where it is not started when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols.

  Further, the button effect may be started when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decoration symbols only during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. Other than during execution, the display may be started when displayed as a combination of three first displays as a combination of decorative symbols.

In the first case, the display mode of the first display of at least one of the three first displays is at least partially different from the display mode of the other first display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 283 (5), a mini-character BCH is added to the left symbol “special 2” decorative symbol and the middle symbol “special 2” decorative symbol. Panda mini character PND is added to the “special 2” decorative pattern]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to prevent a user from misunderstanding that the symbols are a big hit.

  Here, in the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other two first displays, In the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be entirely different from the display modes of the other two first displays.

  Further, in the first case, the display mode of the two first displays among the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other one of the first displays, In one case, the display mode of two first displays among the three first displays may be entirely different from the display mode of the other one of the first displays.

  In the first case, some of the display forms of all the first displays among the three first displays may be different from each other. In the first case, the three first displays All of the display modes of the first display may be different from each other.

  In the first case, the display modes of all the first displays among the three first displays may be exactly the same.

In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, a combination of three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (34), the left symbol・ A decorative symbol is displayed on each of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed with a combination of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, etc.],
In the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols are displayed in order [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (26), first, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (27), “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and finally “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 275 (33). Etc.],
The button effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, The button operation effects shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8) are shown in FIGS. 274 (3) to (5). Is started when is stopped, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that there is a possibility that a button effect will be performed.

  Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be configured such that only the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, combinations other than the three decorative symbol combinations are also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be configured to always stop display. As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be stopped. It may be configured to be.

  Further, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped only by the result of the decorative symbol variation display, or the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped other than the result of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol variation display, only three decorative symbols may be displayed in sequence, or in the decorative symbol variation display, symbols other than the three decorative symbols may be displayed in sequence. Also good. Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may always be sequentially displayed. In the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may not be sequentially displayed. Good.

  In addition, only in the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may be displayed sequentially. In addition to the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed. Good.

  Further, the button effect may be started only when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be started also in cases other than the case where the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols. In addition, the button effect may be always started when the first display is displayed as the decorative pattern displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. However, during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, it may not be started when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols.

  It should be noted that the button effect may be started when the first display is displayed as the first decorative symbol of the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation may be started. The display may be started when the first display is displayed as the decorative pattern that is displayed secondly among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the display. It may be started when the first display is displayed as two of the decorative symbols.

In addition, “the display means notifies the user that the first display may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third notice display [for example, figure In the mini game shown in FIG. 274 (13) to FIG. 15 (15), when the mini game is successful and the icon of the button appears, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display Etc.] ”), which may be displayed,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed more easily when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation for the display of the first display.

  Here, the display means may display only the third notice display during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the third notice display during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. Other displays may also be displayed. The display means may always display the third notice display during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may display the third notice display during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the display means may display the third notice display only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the display means may display the third announcement notice even during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. The display may be displayed.

  In addition, when the third notice display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed. When the third notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed. A display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, when the third notice display is displayed, the first display may be displayed without fail, and even when the third notice display is displayed, the first display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that the first display may be displayed only when the third notice display is displayed, or in cases other than when the third notice display is displayed. The first display may be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the decorative symbol variation display is configured such that after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the determination is determined and displayed [for example, FIG. 274 (1) As shown in FIG. 11 (11), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, if the result of the determination in FIG. 1 is that it is lost, the “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7” The combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed]
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent being misunderstood as being included in a combination of decorative symbols.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured such that only the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure may be fixedly displayed after starting the variation of the decorative symbol. A combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed after the symbol change is started. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured such that after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the determination result is always displayed, or the variation of the decorative symbol is started. After that, it may be configured such that the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the determination result is not always displayed.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured so that the combination of the decorative symbols according to the determination result is only displayed after the decorative symbol variation is started, or the decorative symbol variation is started. In addition to the above, it may be configured such that a combination of decorative symbols according to the determination result is determined and displayed.

  Further, the first display may not be fixedly displayed only as a combination of decorative symbols, or may be not fixedly displayed as a combination other than the combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the first display may not necessarily be fixedly displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, or may be fixedly displayed as a combination of decorative symbols.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The button effect is an effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (5), the special symbol “special 2” simply represents a button, etc.]. Yes,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), the button image 136a is represented in a form imitating the effect button 136, etc.]. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, it may be recognized that the presentation by the operation means is performed by displaying the first display and the second display.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player cannot operate.

  Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means. Here, for these operation devices, the first display is not prepared, but the second display may be prepared. For example, the first display imitating a lever as an operation means. Is not prepared, but the second display may be prepared.

  Further, the button effect may be an effect using only the operation means or an effect using a means other than the operation means. The button effect may be an effect that always uses the operation means, or may not use the operation means.

  Further, the first display may be a display including only a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display other than the display imitating the operation means. The first display may always include a display imitating the operating means, or may not include a display imitating the operating means.

  In addition, the second display may be a display including only a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display other than the display imitating the operation means. The second display may always include a display imitating the operation means, or may not include a display imitating the operation means.

In addition, the first display is a display that does not include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG.
The second display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect [for example, a button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the first display and the second display can be easily distinguished.

  Here, the first display may not include only the display relating to the operation effective period of the operation means, or may include no display other than the display relating to the operation effective period of the operation means. The first display may not necessarily include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means, or may include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means.

  The second display may include only a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect, or may include a display other than a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect. Also good. Further, the second display may necessarily include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect, or may not include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect. .

Further, “the first display is a display that is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started [for example, in FIGS. 274 (5) to (8) As shown, the special symbol “special 2” is stopped on the middle symbol before the button operation effect starts, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it can be easily recognized that a button effect is performed.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may be displayed other than before. The first display may be displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may not be displayed before.

Further, “the operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, a default (normal) state of the production button 136, etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, a state where the production button 136 is vibrating and rotating, etc.]
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode of “special 2” shown in FIG. 274 (5), etc.]
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode (default display mode) of the button image 136a shown in FIG.
The second display is a third display mode [for example, a display mode of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6) (a display mode showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating), etc.] It may be displayed with
The second display mode and the third display mode are different display modes,
The first display mode is a display mode according to the operation means in the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode according to the operation means in the first state,
The third display mode is a display mode according to the operation means in the second state,
The first display is a display that is not displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 277 (5) to (7), the effect button 136 is displayed. Even when the state of vibration and rotation is taken, the display mode of “special 2” has not changed, etc.]
When the second display is displayed in the third display mode in the button effect after the first display is displayed in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second case [e.g. After “special 2” is displayed in FIG. 277 (5), the button operation effect starts in FIG. 277 (6), and in this button operation effect, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be displayed. Etc.] ”)
The operating means is means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of taking only one of a plurality of states, or may take a state other than any of the plurality of states. It may be anything. Further, the operating means may always take one of a plurality of states, or may not take any one of the plurality of states.

  Further, the operation means may be capable of taking only the first state and the second state, or may be taken in a state other than the first state and the second state. There may be. The operation means may always take the first state and the second state, or may not take the first state and the second state.

  Note that the first state and the second state are not limited to those indicating only the external state of the operation means, and for example, those indicating the internal control state relating to the operation means are also included in the present invention. For example, the states applicable to the first state and the second state include a state in which a single press of the operation unit is accepted, a state in which continuous operation of the operation unit is accepted, and a long press operation of the operation unit. The state of accepting is also included. More specifically, for example, even if the first state is a state in which a single press of the operation means is accepted, and the second state is a state in which a continuous hit operation or a long press operation of the operation means is accepted. Good.

  Further, the first state and the second state may be different in a part of the state, or may be different in the whole state.

  Moreover, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  The second display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the second display mode and the third display mode may be different in part of the display mode, or may be different in all of the display modes.

  Further, the first display mode may be a display mode corresponding to only the operation means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to other than the operation means in the first state. Also good. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation unit that is in the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation unit that is in the first state. Good.

  Further, the second display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operating means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to other than the operating means in the first state. Also good. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode always corresponding to the operation unit in the first state, or may be a display mode not corresponding to the operation unit in the first state. Good.

  Further, the third display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operation means in the second state, or a display mode corresponding to other than the operation means in the second state. Also good. In addition, the third display mode may be a display mode always corresponding to the operation unit in the second state, or may be a display mode not corresponding to the operation unit in the second state. Good.

  The first display may not be displayed only in the display mode corresponding to the operation unit in the second state, or the display mode other than the display mode according to the operation unit in the second state. However, it may not be displayed. In addition, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation unit in the second state, or may be displayed in a display mode according to the operation unit in the second state. There may be.

  Further, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be displayed only in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode may be displayed. After the first display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode in the button effect. In addition, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be always displayed in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode may be displayed. After the first display is displayed, the second display may not be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

  Moreover, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect only after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, or the first display mode. Other than after the first display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

  Further, the operation means may be one that is likely to be only in the second state in the second case, or may be one that is liable to be in a state other than the second state in the second case. Further, the operation means may be in the second state in the second case, or may not be in the second state in the second case.

  The operating means may be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state only in the second case, or in the case other than the second case than in the first state. It may be easy to be in a state.

  Appropriate display modes can be used as the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. For example, the display mode of the big button, the display mode of different colors, A lighting display mode, a flashing display mode, an animation display mode, or the like can be adopted.

In addition, in the case where the operation means is in the second state than the case where the operation means is not in the second state, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be a sense of expectation that the operating means will be in the second state.

  Here, when the operating means is in the second state, only the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. When the operating means is in the second state, the final In some cases, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed. In addition, when the operating means is in the second state, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. When the operating means is in the second state, the big hit symbol is finally determined. It may not be displayed.

In addition, only when the operating means is in the second state, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed, or in cases other than when the operating means is in the second state. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
It may be displayed.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  FIG. 286 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching unit 1001 to the game area 1002 is discharged from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching unit 1001 again. In addition, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 201 are not provided.

  In addition, the aspect in which the display unit 1003 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIG. 201 may be adopted, and the display unit 1003 may be provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 1003 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286 encloses a sphere, circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  In addition, the term “notice icon” described so far is simply named for convenience and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

  Moreover, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced if it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 287, “a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 288 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 289 to 336. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 289 to 336 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 336, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 4th Embodiment from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at an amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor is provided for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 291) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 Chance button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 289, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 290 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 289 as viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing for the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of the game ball 292) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a sphere, and a power supply control section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 292). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 291 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any as long as the game ball can be won by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding devices 246 overlap each other so that the player can hardly see the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 289, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 291 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specs of the gaming table is attached to the game board 200 at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the bell member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as an ordinary electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect depression of various buttons constituting the production button 136 and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, using FIGS. 293 (a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 293 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 293 (a) shows nine types of special drawings “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 293 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 293 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 293 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 293 (b), six types of special charts "Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f" are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols ("Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f"). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 293 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 293 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol pattern. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 293 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 294 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 290 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 290. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 292 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a prize at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 292 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 293 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 293 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 293 (a) is turned on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, a door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). Is output in a storage state of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main process in the main control unit shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 297 (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Also, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 296, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 297 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 297 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (a), "Special Figure I" (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 1", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 2". "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (b), “Special Figure f” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 297 (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 297 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 297 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 298 for the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the high / bad determination high probability table, and FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the low / probability determination probability table. In the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 298 (a), and in the case of the special figure low probability state. Referring to FIG. 298 (b), the low / probability determination probability table. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not the special figure 2 is true, if the special figure high probability state is obtained, the special figure low probability state is obtained by referring to the high or negative judgment table shown in FIG. 298 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 298 (b). Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 298 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 298 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 295 A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 299 (a) shows an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 299 (b) shows an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical value range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 300A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 300A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 300B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 300C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 301 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 301 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown), and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 301B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 301 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, other effects random number update processing and the like are performed.

  FIG. 301D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 sets information on image data (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 302A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 302B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. The first UI unit 280 can display the variation icon h0 on the left side in a state where it is placed on the pedestal. If the variation icon h0 is displayed, the first UI unit 280 notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. ing. Note that the change icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and symbol variation display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 302 (a), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. The fluctuation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design smaller than the first decorative design is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. . Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 302 (a), the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative design display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral role 224Gd and thousand carton box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 302 (a), the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. In FIG. 302 (b), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed as the game progresses. Aspect may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In addition, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 302 (b) is the upper end of the family crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 302 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) or FIG. 302 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 303 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable in the present embodiment.

  303 (A1) to FIG. 303 (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 303 (A1), when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H operate, the mode shown in FIG. 303 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand box action 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd, and the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd is the thousand box machine. Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Further, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap with the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  In FIG. 303 (B1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  303 (C1) to FIG. 303 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 303 (C1) to (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body in place of the family crest member 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box actor 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 303C1 shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 303 (C2), the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the lifting arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  FIG. 303 (C3) shows a state in which the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 303 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the letters “heat” are displayed, and a state in which a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed is shown. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 303 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  303 (E1) to FIG. 303 (E2) show how the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 303 (E2), the family crest character 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a).

  FIG. 303 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand-box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (F1), the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped due to the overlap of the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H. In this effect example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is prevented from operating so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 303 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 303 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  303 (I1) to FIG. 303 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 303 (I1) to (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest member 224E. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 303 (I1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 303 (I2), after the POV display 224I has moved from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and is rotated at a constant speed. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 303 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  303 (K1) to FIG. 303 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 303 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the region is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 303 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  FIG. 303 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 303 (K2), the crest character 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 303 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  303 (K3) to 303 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. In FIG. 303 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  FIG. 303 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 303 (L1 ′), a display image (background image, Sabohan character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 303 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position that is in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position that is approximately the front side. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 307. Here, FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 305 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 305 step by step, and FIG. 307 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 306 step by step. .

  304 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and a general map hold. A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) is applied, but the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (a coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 302A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 304 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 304 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 304 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 304 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are indicated by broken lines. However, the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 304 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 304 (1), the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display device by the start of variation → the start of blinking or extinction of the fourth symbol → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 304 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 304 (3), the second number-of-holds display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. The update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or after the update display of the second reserved number display is performed, the change of the second decorative symbol is displayed. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 304 (4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. In this movement (decrease) animation, the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 304 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 304 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the base of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Thereafter, the change display of the first decorative symbol Is started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 304 (7) shows a state in which the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (8), a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is being performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the word “opportunity” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (9) shows a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where you can. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 304 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image CI1 is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama does not have to be reduced (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 304 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 304 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (13) A state in which the person is pressing the effect button 136 is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (12), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon display has been erased. When the production button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the character “I'm intensely hot” is displayed in the strawberry conversation image CI2 instead of the operation promotion notification image, as shown in FIG. 304 (14). There is a case. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice text display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the effect button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the bag are deleted, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (16), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, and then “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 304 (17). 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 304 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 304 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, and the first UI unit 280 is changed. The icon h0 is left and the frame is framed below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the production example shown in FIG. 304 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 304 (22), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral thing 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 304 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 304 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 305 (25), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd return to the initial positions, respectively, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the second large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 304 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  FIG. 305 (26) shows a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (27) shows a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect has been started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (30), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing is shown. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 305 (32), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. Note that Tonosama's cut-in image C13 may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene continues is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (36), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (37), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the duel scene animation display to the effect image display as shown in FIG. The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the effect button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period, the effect display shown in FIG. 305 (38) may not be performed, and an effect display that may be lost may be performed. After being performed, a revival effect may be displayed to produce a jackpot effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 305 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 305 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 305 (41) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305 (42), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 305 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 305 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each move toward the initial position. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 305 (46). In FIG. 305 (46), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 305 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 306 (51), each of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game starts and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing a right hand is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 306 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 306 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 306 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 306 (56) shows a state where the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will be shifted to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 292) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a gaming state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 306 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is over and the state is shifted to the probability change state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. In FIG. 306 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown with a broken line. Further, in FIG. 306 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (58), mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below the display. ing. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, the display of “bonus × 1” to that effect is performed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60) instructs the player to make a right stroke. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that left-handed has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variable display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, the right-hand notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 306 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 306 (63) shows a state in which the number of symbol fluctuation display suspensions of special figure 2 is four. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 307 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 305 (48). In FIGS. 304 to 305, the case where “decoration 7” is reached and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols in which “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a). In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has become.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 307 (52a). Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 307 (38b) shows another effect example following FIG. 305 (37). FIG. 307 (38b) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 307 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM are displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 307 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started with a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the special figure I display mode. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continuously fluctuates, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (45b), a variable icon deletion animation is displayed. In the fluctuation icon deletion animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 307 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  In FIG. 308, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (2), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 starts from the right side of the display screen, whereby the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown starts when the timer preview display TM1 starts, but after the timer preview display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 308 (3)). You may make it start a countdown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 308 (3) to (7), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continued until “00:00” is reached. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. "Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. In this way, a cut-in display composed of the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit. Note that the pseudo-continuous symbol may be out of the frame without stopping, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol is out of the frame, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the decorative pattern of the loss is not changed. The combination may be displayed in a stopped state, or a reach effect may be started in a reach state. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice is given to notify that the pseudo-ream starts after the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 308 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 308 (3a) shows another effect example following FIG. 308 (2). In this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, suggesting that a notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 308 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 300 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. 308 (10a), (11a), and (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 308, (11), and (14), respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 308 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 308 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice instead of the timer display is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the right design changes from “decoration 6” to “decoration 7”. The right design may remain unchanged as “decoration 6”. Then, as shown in FIGS. 308 (16a) to (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 308 (3a) to (17a) notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. In addition, the fact that the second quasi-run is forewarned can be said that the start of the first quasi-run is also foreseen. In other words, in this production example, It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-ream is foretold. Note that in the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but another kind of notice or notice of the production of an effect may be given.

  FIG. 308 (7b) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 308 (6). Note that FIGS. 308 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 308 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (8b-1), instead of the “notice” character display in the timer notice display TM1, the face image of the Tono-sama character with a balloon line “Ikuze” added. YMF is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 308 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. In this way, attention to the notice may be urged by a display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed, and means for prompting attention to the notice is not limited to display, but may be performed by voice or lamp, or by combining two or more of display, voice, and lamp. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 308 (9 b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the Tono-sama character is deleted, as shown in FIG. 308 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 308 (12), a cut-in display including the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous) starts, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. However, there may be a case where an effect corresponding to this is not performed.

  Further, another notice may be performed while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer notice display TM1. In this case, the notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 309 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIG. 309 (a1) shows another effect example following FIG. 308 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 309 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed with the sword pointing toward the variation icon h0. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 309 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Note that the pre-reading notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by “decoration 7” occurs as shown in FIG. 309 (a7). Thus, it can be said that the timer notice effect in this effect example is an effect for notifying that the notice is to be performed.

  FIG. 309 (b1) shows a state after the timer notice effect starts. In the timer notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started as “30:00”, that is, the notice effect that 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Is suggested to start. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “29:69”. As described above, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the countdown time. The shorter the jackpot, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the higher the jackpot reliability, regardless of the countdown time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and the reach effect of “decoration 7” has started in the first decorative symbol. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 309 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays the change icon h0. The frame is framed out at the bottom of the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 309 (b4), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4), an image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. Animation display of duel scene with swordsman begins. During this time, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with a notice. The word “attention” is displayed in order to prompt attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b <b> 7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which “fever” is added to the variation icon h <b> 0. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the state where the timer notice effect is continuously performed after the transition to the reach state is shown.

  FIG. 309 (b4′-2) illustrates another effect example following FIG. 309 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4′-2), after the start of the duel scene animation display, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37”. Yes. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have elapsed after the countdown by the timer notice effect is started is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer notice effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5 ′), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ′). "Attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters “heat” are added to the variation icon h0. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is performed during the execution of the button effect.

  In the above-described effect example, the example in which the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed as an effect performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect has been described. For example, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to make a notice.

  FIG. 309 (b6 ″ ″) shows another effect example following FIG. 309 (b5). When the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ′ ″), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ″ ″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed and a notice is displayed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit trust. It is shown that the display has been switched to a cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed in large size on the right side of the display screen, and the characters “Cushion” suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display in which a big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which two or more notice displays are performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown. Note that the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (c1) to (c2) show a state where the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the notice of the notice is urged instead of the timer display. The “Attention” characters are displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, the production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production buttons 136 as production operation means.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the lever effect is started is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the lever effect is started as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

  Note that there may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, a button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). A button image 136a in which a character notation (for example, “Intense heat” or “Expectation large”) or a character is added to the default mode, and a button image 136a having a different size from the default mode (for example, a deca button effect or a mini button) The button image 136a (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed more than the default mode) is operated as many times as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times). The number of operations may be different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.). In addition, the response display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a or a number different from the number of button images 136a. etc).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (d1) to (d4) show a state in which the effect movable body operates as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. As shown in FIG. 309 (d1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the reach is “decoration 7” in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is being performed. Note that, in the first UI unit 280, the change icon h0 is left and framed downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed downward. In addition, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (d1), a state in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (d2), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” characters for urging attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (d3), the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production, it is shown that the first large board acting character Ga to the fourth large board acting machine Gd as the production movable body operate. The thing 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H may be operated, and two or more of the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd, the family crest character 224E, and the thousand car box role 224H are operated. May be.

  FIG. 310 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 310 (1), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2) shows a state in which a timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-ream effect, a chance-up notice, a pre-read notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 310 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4), an effect is added in which time is added by displaying a count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Note that the count-up animation display need not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 310 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is difficult to visually recognize, After the effect image shown in FIG. 310 (4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 310 (4) may be displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and a state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of adding the timer. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 310 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and then a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after completion of the timer addition effect) elapses, the first pseudo-continuous effect Is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In this production example, when a timer addition effect is performed and time is added to the timer display, it is easier to win a big hit than when time addition is not performed. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

  310 (1b) to FIG. 6 (b) show a state where the timer addition effect by the conversation notice is performed in place of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 310 (1b), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 310 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and a conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in which a character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. Note that the timing at which the timer notice effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation notice is started, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2b), the conversation notice has been updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 is displayed on which a character display of “I will add 10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM. Note that the timer display countdown in the timer notice effect is continued. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the habit conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4b), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased and the conversation preview ends, as shown in FIG. 310 (6b), the count-up animation display ends, and the timer display in the timer preview display TM is displayed. It is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (4b′-1) to (4b′-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing when the conversation notice ends and the timing when the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  310 (1c) to FIG. 6 (c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 310 (1c), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 310 (1c), a conversation announcement has started, and a conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in which a character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. Note that the part of the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the conversation advance notice has been updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The frog conversation image CI2 on which the above-described operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the execution of the conversation notice.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. FIG. 310 (2c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation effective period has started, and the length of the remaining time display meter MT according to the elapsed time. It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136 being performed, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears and the player is informed accordingly. The Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the frog is changed to a character display “10 seconds added” indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. In addition, when the production button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period, the time display in the timer display may not be added. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then may be changed to a character display of “I will add 10 seconds”. You may make it change into the character display of "it is an addition for 10 seconds", without performing the display which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT lose | disappears. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the character display “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed after the operation effective period elapses. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display in which 10 seconds is added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed may be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4c), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The timing when ending and the timing when counting-up animation display ends may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased and the conversation preview is finished, the count-up animation display is finished as shown in FIG. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. The timing shown in FIG. 310 (6c) shows a state in which the timer display counts down to “09:85” after adding 10 seconds to the time in the timer display.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the operation valid period. After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3 ′), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not performed during the operation effective period. (With the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ′), The time measurement result (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ')) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Update display of may be allowed to resume.

  Further, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3 ″), the countdown update in the timer notice effect is performed during the operation effective period. No display is performed (the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, the result of the internal timing is not reflected, and as shown in FIG. 310 (3c ″), the display of the frog conversation image CI2 indicates the time that is added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing when the display is changed to the character display, the internal time measurement result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (3c ″)) is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The update display of the countdown may be restarted.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIGS. 311 (1d) to (2d) show another example of the effects of FIGS. 310 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 311 (1d), the character display displayed in Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is “Attention to timer notice”. Thereby, attention may be paid to the effect (preliminary notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”. That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 in FIG. 311 (1d).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in a reduced size and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned habit conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this way, after the timer notice effect is noticed, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

  FIG. 311 (1e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 311 (1d). In FIG. 311 (1e), the timer display is “00” by performing a scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 instead of the conversation image CI1 of Tono. You may make it pay attention to the production performed as a result of becoming 0:00. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 311 (1e), the characters “attention to timer notice” loop and scroll from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 311 (1f) to (6f) are another example of the timer addition production, and the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Show. FIG. 311 (1f) is an example of an effect following FIG. 310 (3), and after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed on the display screen below the timer notice display TM1. It shows the frame in from the right end. In this extra timer display TM2, “10:00” indicating the extra time is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. Note that the extra timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap. Further, the extra timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 311 (2f) shows a state in which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 has been completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the navigation character YM balloon may be deleted after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, or after the navigation character YM balloon is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. May be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 311 (2f), the added timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 and the added timer display TM2 may be arranged in an overlapping manner, for example, As shown in FIG. 311 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 311 (2f ″), the timer preview display TM1 You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 311 (2f) to (4f), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continued until “00:00” is reached. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be framed out to the right end of the display screen. . Here, after the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, a frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (5f), when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is framed out. However, the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (5f ′), a “notice” character display may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (6f), in response to completion of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1, a pseudo-continuous symbol may appear in the middle symbol and a pseudo-continuous may be performed. This indicates that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo continuous symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed on the added timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. ing. The notification of the added time may be notification of the sum of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time is displayed on the add timer display TM2. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The added timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice that is newly displayed as the timer is added, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the timer is added.

  FIGS. 311 (3fa) to (8fa) show another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows a state. FIG. 311 (3fa) is a production example following FIG. 311 (2f), and after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer preview display TM1. The state of starting is shown. In other words, in this production example, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but an additional 5 seconds is actually performed. The timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to 10 seconds that is the additional time so that an additional 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 311 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIGS. 311 (3f) to (6f), and in FIG. 311 (7fa), the pseudo-symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream is performed. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), the first decorative symbol variable display is started again, and the first pseudo-ream is being performed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “× 2” below the second decorative symbol indicating that the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word “attention” is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa ′), a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as an effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, it may be suggested that a notice effect or a big hit other than the pseudo-ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the addition timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the addition timer display TM2. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change in the display form of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.

  FIG. 312 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “2” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 2 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the watch warning icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that the time will be added in the timer notice effect. Note that the timer notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed along with the decorative pattern, but various kinds of notification such as temporary stop of the notice icon pattern, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display by the effect, a pre-read notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows a state in which the stand on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas where the notice icons are displayed are arranged in the horizontal direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (4), the watch notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and stocked. In the first decorative design, a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right design is shown. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops may be the same as the timing at which the watch warning icon MI1 starts moving, or the warning icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (5), the watch notice icon MI1 is reduced and stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the watch notice icon MI1 is stocked. ing. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols in which the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. The state of being confirmed and displayed is shown. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, or the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be fixedly displayed, or after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the clock warning icon MI1 may be stored in the warning icon display area 285.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (6) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed after one reservation of the special symbol 1 is consumed. Also, the timer notice effect has started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notice display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of the notice icon). Conversely, there may be an effect display for overlapping the timer notice only during execution of an effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (7), the effect is displayed around the clock notice icon MI1 stored in the notice icon display area 285, and the use of the clock notice icon MI1 is announced. . In the timer notice display TM1, “07:31” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (8), the clock notice icon MI1 pops out of the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at the approximate center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (9), the watch warning icon MI1 is deleted, and the display of the count-up animation is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation is displayed, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The watch notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (10), the notice icon display area 285 frames out downward.

  FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 313 (A1) to (A4) show other examples of timer addition effects. A decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A2), a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. Further, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A3), a balloon with the characters “added” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. It should be noted that even if the “addition” character display is performed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-1), after displaying the characters “attention” to urge attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-2) Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this production example, the production to be displayed as “attention” is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters “still still” indicating that the timer preview effect continues, the display of the timer preview display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters “still yet” on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and “+10” indicating the time to be added to the balloon. “Second” may be displayed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 313 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 313 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to “10:00”, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”. The situation is shown. Note that the timing at which the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 313 (B1) to (B5) are examples of effects in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a balloon with a character “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for the timer notice effect is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display indicates “05:89”. Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is “−3 seconds” indicating the shortened time instead of the character display of “subtraction”. That is, the timer notice effect may be shortened by 3 seconds, and it may be recognized that the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the originally displayed time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed is performed. Note that the shortened animation display need not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the state in which the time in the timer display is reduced (subtracted) by 3 seconds is shown. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of shortening the timer. While the timer shortening effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5), a “notice” character is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. A pine symbol CC as a chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol, so that a notice is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and notification that the pseudo-continuation is started may be provided. It should be noted that the timing at which the “notice” character on the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped, or the “notice” character may be displayed. After the start of display, the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the characters “attention” May start displaying. In addition, the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or the timer display in the timer notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and the pseudo-continuous notification is easily performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer notice effect, the above-described pine symbols CC, etc. You may make it easy to make a high-reliability advance notice. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-continuous notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (C1) to (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and a countdown is performed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a balloon with the characters “timer notice level UP” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is high. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display countdown being performed, it is notified that a highly reliable notice may be given as a notice to be executed.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 313 (D1) to (D5) are examples of effects in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a balloon displaying “stop” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the timer display countdown is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the balloon with the word “stop” starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is interrupted, or the balloon with the letter “stop” started to display. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the timer display countdown is interrupted, a balloon with the word “stop” added may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains “06:99”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo-continuous. Has been. Note that “× 2” is displayed below the second decorative symbol, which indicates that the second variation of the decorative symbol is displayed by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), a balloon displaying “Resume” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D4), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 313 (D5). As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect ends. Has been.

  As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice displays TM1 may change (increase or decrease) than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, if it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more. When three notice displays TM1 are displayed and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may decrease to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 informing 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10 The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 for notifying 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 for notifying 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may be started to count down at the same timing or at different timings.

  FIG. 314 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step. In the effect example shown in FIG. 314, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302A, a sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest character 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the illustration of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box machine 224H is omitted for easy explanation.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (A1) to (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. A decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), a balloon with a character of “+10 seconds” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and its upper right corner overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and the time in the timer display is added by 10 seconds. It is shown. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A6), in the sub display device 208S, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Note that, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (B1) to (B7) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters “+10 seconds”, and is added to the timer display in the timer / notice display TM1. The time to be notified is informed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The production will add time. Note that at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped. The timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, or the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display. The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 314 (B4) to (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the extra time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by 1 second. . In this example, while the countdown display of the extra time is being performed, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S reaches “0 seconds”, the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. Updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the timer display time in the timer preview display TM1 is difficult to specify. Also good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (B6), the sub display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of “Restart” indicating that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display device 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 314 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. In the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display countdown is resumed, and the timer display is “14:23” at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B7). Thereafter, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 314 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S begins to descend. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be resumed after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. In addition, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is resumed, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the timer display countdown may be resumed, or after the timer display countdown is resumed, “Restart” may be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (C1), a balloon with a character of “+10 seconds” is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the display of the sucking animation in which the timer preview display TM1 sucks out the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S has started. An effect image showing how the image is being displayed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a surprised expression.

  FIG. 314 (C3) shows a state in which the sucking animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” sucked in the timer advance notice TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer advance notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to the sub display device 208S. Are displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 starts displaying the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed in the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. The state of heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced is shown. While the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (an animation accompanying the sucking animation) by looking at the sucking animation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely sucked into the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C6), the timer is displayed. The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer notice effect may be performed only by one decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 315 (A1) to (A4) are other examples of timer addition effects. In the production example shown in FIGS. 315 (A1) to (A4), explanation will be made using the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). A part of the 1 large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd and the thousand carton box playing 224H will be described without description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (A2), the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is time-added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd out of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, so that the timer display shows 10 Although it is informing that the addition of the second is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the activated actuating items among the first enormous acting item 224Ga to the fourth enormous acting member 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Moreover, in this production example, the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated only once, thereby notifying that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. Depending on the number of times, the extra time may be different. For example, when the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth big board acting 224Gd are operated three times, an additional 30 seconds is added to the timer display. May be.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 315 (B1) to (B4) shows an example of a timer addition effect using the family crest member 224E. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 315 (B1) to (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) is used for explanation. The description of 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (B2), the family crest actor 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Operate in the direction. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the overlapped crest character 224E. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be displayed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the crest character 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. However, the additional time may be varied depending on the number of operations. For example, when the family crest actor 224E operates three times, an additional 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 315 (C1) to (C6) show other examples of timer addition effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 315 (C1) to (C6), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decoration member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (C1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, “1” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, and a timer display is counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), “05:00” is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes “05:00”, the countdown is interrupted, and “05:00” The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interrupting the countdown.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters “additional 10 seconds” are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the direction of approaching each other, As shown in FIG. 315 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time added by 10 seconds to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving. After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions, the timer display countdown in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. The Note that the timer display countdown is performed in a state where the display of “15:00” is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 315 (C4)). May be resumed. If the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, it may be configured to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of winning big hits may be the same, or it may be configured so that it is difficult to win big hits.

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The effect example shown to FIG. 316 (A1)-the same figure (A4) has shown about the other example of the timer addition effect using the some decoration symbol display apparatus. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 316 (A1) to (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decoration member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect provided on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), “05:89” is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and “15:89” is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction close to each other. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but may be interrupted. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 316 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The times indicated by the respective timer displays displayed on 208N are added together, and the display of “20:00” indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed at a position corresponding to the display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, they are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 316 (A3) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of “20:00” displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In accordance with the movement of 208N, the displayed coordinates are scrolled while being maintained. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of “20:00” to the right according to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. Scrolls the display of “20:00” to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol. When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, the screen shown in FIG. 316 (A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 316 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first one. It is likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the likelihood of a big hit may be the same or a big hit may be difficult).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to (B3), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) is applied. In this effect example, instead of the crest character 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In the example of production shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to (B3), for ease of explanation, a part of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and a part of the thousand carton boxes 224H. The description is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In FIG. 316 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotational speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I causes all of the first decorative symbols and the change icons h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 to be displayed. It overlaps the rotation area and is considered difficult to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316 (B2), the character “+10” displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display “+10” displayed on the POV display 224I so far is displayed. Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character “+10” may be in a decorated display mode. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “+10” so as to match the display of the characters “+10” on the POV display 224I. Accordingly, there may be a case where display with a sense of unity can be performed between the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, as shown in FIG. 316 (B3), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

  The example effects shown in FIGS. 316 (C1) to (C5) show other examples of timer addition effects using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIGS. 316 (C1) to (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 316 (B1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to the position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture state, and is not rotated. Note that all of the variation icons h0, the first decorative symbols, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which is more difficult to see than when they are not overlapped.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotational speed and is rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 316 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. The timer displayed on the POV display 224I is “05:17”, and the countdown continues. Further, at this time, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is notified that the addition of is performed.

  Thereafter, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 316 (C3), the effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316 (C4), “15:00” which is the timer display after being added. Is displayed. In this production example, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C5), the robot stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is “15:00”, and then the countdown is resumed. Note that the countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. May be the same, or may not be a big hit.

  In addition, in the timer notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change until the end of the countdown after the change ends. The total time may be counted down. Internally, the time until the change before the change may be counted down, and the change time after the change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after starting the countdown, When counting down 10 seconds and displaying “attention” 5 seconds after the change, count down 5 seconds, etc.). Further, the countdown display may coincide with the time for counting down internally.

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 317, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. In this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 317 (1) shows another effect example following FIG. 305 (25). FIG. 317 (1) shows a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current reach production progress is roughly determined by the position. Is informed. Here, the traveling speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 317 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the display of the state developed into the super reach shown in FIG. 317 (1) is started. Display may be started at the same time, display may be started when the reach state is reached, display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative pattern changes The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (3), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that this Boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (5), a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by the character display of chance up. We are informing you. It should be noted that the timing at which the Boyi character BOY starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the Savohani character SBH starts to display the balloon, and the Sabohani character SBH starts to display after the Boyi character BOY starts displaying. The balloon character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the Boyi character BOY is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 317 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the check point, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or only the relevant check point may be displayed in an enlarged manner. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (7), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts to move is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (9). Displayed and button production starts. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player performs a button operation or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (11), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (12), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 317 (13), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this production example, Tono-sama's cut-in image CI3 is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode that shows wearing a sunglasses and riding a large motorcycle while turning a cigar. It is informing that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 317 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 305 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be. The cut-in image CI1 shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, or the effect button 136 is operated effectively. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. In addition, this Tono-sama cut-in image CI1 shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (14), a balloon with the characters “chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in surrounded by a golden frame is displayed. It is informing that a notice has been made by displaying an image. Note that the display start timing of Tonosama cut-in image CI3 may be the same as the display start timing of balloons of Sabohani character SBH. An SBH balloon may be displayed, or after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started, the Tono-like cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the Tono-sama character image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after the arrival, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, when it is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation effective period has passed without the operation button 136 being operated, the effect button 136 is also operated when the operation button 136 is not operated. As in the case of operating 136, it may be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or it may not be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or a chance-up notice may be issued. Only a part of the occurrence may be reported (for example, only displaying “UP” without displaying a balloon).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 317 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (16), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (18) displays the lever image 136Va and the Sabohani. A balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH, notifying that the advance notice by lever effect has started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. It should be noted that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon with the letters “chance up lever” added thereto. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, all may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be possible to overlap a part or all of the time up meter, and while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, part or all of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap. The up meter CMT may overlap part or all of the remaining time display meter MT, and during the display of the chance up meter CMT, part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may overlap. Also good.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. Note that the Sabohani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or until the operation valid period elapses.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (21), a state is shown in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (22) within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 317 (23), the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth The large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H operate, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, the effects (first large board acting part 224Ga to fourth large board acting part 224Gd and thousand box box part 224H which are performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 317 (23) is operated are operated, and the light guide plate IL emits light. And the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 305 (40) is operated is the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 317 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H return to the initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design On the display device 208, the effect image fades out. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT fades in along with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. . The operations of FIGS. 317 (23) to (24) are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 305 (38) to (44), for example.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (25) shows a state where the fade-in of the duel scene animation display has been completed and resumed. Specifically, in the duel scene animation display, the enemy swordsman shows a faint expression and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character “V” indicating that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP and the placard is a big hit is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (26), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, thereby notifying that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 316 (28), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the SBBO character SBH and the placard) may be displayed.

  In the above-described effect using the chance up meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or may not be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be easier to win the game than when the chance up meter CMT is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when not displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be deleted during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

  In addition, during the performance of the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past), or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

  The effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, an effect that increases the chance may be performed. In addition, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a checkpoint, and an effect may be performed that increases the chances of winning a battle against a teammate character.

  Further, an effect using a chance up meter CMT may be performed as an effect of a chance up (for example, a rank-up bonus, a probability change promotion, a promotion to a jackpot game with more balls) during execution of the big hit game.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption / recovery. The chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, but the check point timing and the history that the chance up effect before power interruption has occurred may be hidden.

  Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 318 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  FIG. 318 (3a) is another effect example following FIG. 317 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 317 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the first check point CP1, no advance notice is given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 318 (5a) to FIG. Passing through CP1 as it is, neither marking at the first check point CP1 nor display of the characters “UP” is performed. Thereby, at the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has not been completed. Note that, when the advance notice is not given at the first check point CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a '), the display of the first check point CP1 may be deleted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a ″), in place of the characters “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, “x” indicating that no chance up notice has been given. May be performed. Further, even if the chance-up notice is not actually made, it is assumed that the chance-up notice is made after the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint. For example, after marking at a checkpoint or non-display of the “UP” character, the marking or the “UP” character may be displayed. The savohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance increase and display the marking or the characters “UP”. In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and then the check point is passed by the Sabohani character SBH, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or “UP” characters are displayed. May be displayed.

  FIG. 318 (17b) is another effect example following FIG. 317 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 317 (17) is performed. Note that at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the final point GP, some event may occur. Has been suggested.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (18b), not the lever image 136Va but the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it seems that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 318 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is displayed at the third checkpoint. Passing through CP3 as it is, the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the characters “UP” are not performed. FIG. 318 (19b) shows a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 318 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (21b) within the above-described operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Along with the line “I removed it ...” and a display showing that the victory or defeat is not decided. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a letter “Development” on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach effect is developed.

  Then, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 318 (23b), as shown in FIG. 318 (24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the savohani character SBH rides on the flying carpet and moves toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 318 (25b) to (29b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while the Sabohani character SBH overlaps with the Sabohani character SBH on the way to the start point SP. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 318 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIGS. 318 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the red mark is not attached and the character display of “UP” is not performed). It has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Figure 318 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b), the co-panda cheering team KPD composed of three co-panda characters cheer at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4. A notice display indicating that the SP swordsman has reached is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. It can be said that this co-panda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The co-panda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (31b), a balloon with the words “chance up copanda cheering party” is displayed near the savohani character SBH, and a warning is displayed with the chance up character display. It is informing that it has been broken. Note that the timing at which the copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying may be the same as the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to display the balloon, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts after the copanda supporter KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the co-panda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the co-panda cheering party KPD is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (32b) shows that the SBBO character SBH has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, “Collaboration Special” indicating that the chance-up effect is performed is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 318 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of “one blow”. Is done. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by lever effect has been started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed and the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Thereafter, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 318 (23c) is another example of the production following FIG. 317 (22). In the lever production shown in FIGS. 317 (18) to (22), the production lever 136V is operated by the player. It shows how the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing.

  FIG. 318 (5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 317 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (5d), a state is shown in which a large number of boyi characters BOY (a group of boys) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . In other words, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of a bouy group. When this boyfriend character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boyie character BOY appears alone. Also, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY group” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, notifying that the advance notice by the chance up character display has been performed. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed even at the same chance up point, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance up point.

  FIG. 319 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 319 (7e) is another effect example following FIG. 317 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 317 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 319 (8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 to reach the third check point CP3, It waits at that place until the advance notice of the chance corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is given. While the effect that the savohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 317 (9) to FIG. 317). The button effect or the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the text “UP” may be displayed as being performed.

  FIG. 319 (2f) is another example of the effect following FIG. 317 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 319 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green bar shape, and the progress of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK instead of the savohani character SBH. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. In addition, the progression speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but may be constant. Further, the display modes of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance up notice will be given. The start point and the final point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 319 (3f) following FIG. 319 (2f) shows a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (4f), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (5 f), a balloon with a letter “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the advance notice by the chance up character display has been made. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 319 (5f) to (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 319 (7f-1) to (7f-2), the marker MRK starts to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is out of frame from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (7f-2).

  FIG. 319 (4g ′) shows an example of the performance in the case where after the performance shown in FIG. 319 (3f) is performed, the Boy MOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. Has been. More specifically, if the boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (4f), the chance up meter CMT at the first check point CP1 as shown in FIG. 319 (4g ′). In place of the question mark display, an “x” is displayed indicating that the advance notice did not appear. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4g ″), the question mark display at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4g ′ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

  FIG. 319 (2h) is yet another example of production following FIG. 317 (1). The production example shown in FIG. 319 (2h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 319 (2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It is different in point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and the player may have a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice starts.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (5 h), a balloon with a letter “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice by the character display of chance up has been performed. At this time, a part of the characters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 319 (6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden character “UP” is changed. Appear.

  FIG. 320 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  320 (A1) to FIG. 320 (A11) show an example in which the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which a pseudo-run is generated and the number of times the pseudo-run is generated during execution of the pseudo-run effect. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and a state in which a chase effect as an example of a pseudo-continuous effect is started is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 320 (A3) shows a state in which the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is started where the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant. In addition, a chance up meter CMT having the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (A3), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are respectively reached on the path of movement of the marker MRK, a pseudo sequence may occur. It is also suggested that reaching the final point captures unscrupulous merchants and makes it easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. This production example is configured so that the larger the pseudo-ream occurs, the easier it is to win a big hit. In addition, when the pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. Note that the jackpot may be determined when the number of pseudo-continuations is other than four. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is one and four, the jackpot may be determined. The number of pseudo-runs that is a big hit is less likely to occur than other pseudo-runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A4), the marker MRK starts to move from the start point.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A5) shows that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. Note that even when the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant, the timing at which “continuation” is displayed is the same as the timing at which the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of “continuation”. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the “continue” character after the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant, After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continue”, the character “continue” may be displayed together with the display in which the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7) shows that the distance between the protagonist and the unscrupulous merchant is decreasing.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A8), the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A9) shows that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates depending on the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle that shows how the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the unscrupulous merchant that has been available up until now has become an impatient expression.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A10), the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character chase the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (A11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “Secure” is displayed and a state in which the protagonist has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the pseudo-ream is performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time because the marker MRK has reached the final point. At this time, in the first decorative symbol, the “decoration 7” is reached and the reach effect is started.

  320 (B1) to FIG. 320 (B14) show an example in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal display of the decorative symbols and the timing at which the chance up notice is generated is shown. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B3) shows a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a balloon displaying the “opportunity” character is displayed, and the navigation character YM provides a navigation character notice. In this production example, the announcement by the balloon of the “opportunity” character of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be an advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “Opportunity” to “No”. In response to this, a balloon with the words “chance up not accepted” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to inform that the navigation character YM has announced the chance up. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. This conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is in the first stage of conversation notice. Further, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Also, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, so that the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Although the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. The character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “No” to “Intense heat”. In this production example, the notice of the navigation character YM with a balloon of “Intense heat” is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice. In addition, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the second decorative symbol. Here, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation advance notice, along with the habit character, the habit conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 304 (10) is displayed is displayed. Note that the cocoon conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the candy. Also, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Tono-sama's conversation is more than the case of the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the heel is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 320 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Thereafter, when the player depresses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B9), in the conversation image CI2 of the strawberry, instead of the operation promotion notification image, “Intense heat” is displayed as shown in FIG. 320 (B10). May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Furthermore, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the strawberry conversation image CI2 is a display mode that is highlighted with a golden thick line, and it is easier to hit a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the spider conversation image CI2 in gold. , It is informed that a chance up notice has been made in the conversation notice. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, when there is no operation of the production button 136 within the operation effective period, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not notify that the chance up notice has been generated, may notify, or may notify only a part thereof. (For example, only the characters “UP” are displayed).

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B11), a state in which the position of the balloon has changed is shown. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps with the conversation image CI2 of the bag, and the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to view than when the balloon does not overlap. Note that the position of the balloon may not be changed from the position illustrated in FIG. 320 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position illustrated in FIG. 320 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The balloon display may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B13) shows a state where the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7” and the reach state is reached. At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point and the production by the chance up meter CMT has been completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. Note that the timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance The reach effect may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

  The production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is finished when the reach state is reached, but the production may continue even if the reach state is reached, or it will continue even if the transition is made to super reach. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display ends. At this time, for example, when super reach is started, an effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT being continuously executed may be started. Further, the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT may be always started during normal symbol variation display, or may not be started. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started or not started. However, in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always be started. In addition, when it becomes possible to produce an effect using the chance up meter CMT, when the production button 136 is operated, the production using the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to allow the player to recognize.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  In FIG. 321, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A5), the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but the production is erased in the middle.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a situation where a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of reach production, and the Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first one. Although the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased because the corresponding chance up notice has not occurred. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), a state where the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second check point CP2 is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2), a cut-in display showing that the character of the frog having an energy drink crawls “Fight” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super-reach that is being executed. When this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in display may be a premier notice, and if it is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. When the cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, a state in which the production by the chance up meter CMT has been finished is shown because the announcement that is likely to be a big hit is performed rather than the chance up notification related to the chance up meter CMT. Yes. The cut-in display is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, it can be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the check point. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily terminated in the middle, or the chance up meter CMT may be terminated in the middle or may not be terminated. At this time, for example, depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or not, the content of the effect performed thereafter may be different, or the same content effect may be performed. . Further, the chance that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle when a chance up notice is generated at all of the checkpoints. It may be. Alternatively, the chance that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of “blow”, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 321 (A4). It is notified that the combination of big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained. In the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 321 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. Is done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, showing that the hero's lord has subjugated the enemy swordsman, and is informed that it will be a big hit. .

  FIG. 321 (A2a) shows another example of effects following FIG. 321 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), a cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the effect of other contents is performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The cut-in display is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, this production example also shows that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), the variation icon h0 is also erased, but may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 321 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each of them is red. And “UP” are displayed. That is, in reality, the chance up notice corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the chance up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not made, but both are expressed as having been done, and the jackpot It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 321 (A3a′-1) shows another production example following FIG. 321 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1) shows a state where the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 318 (30b) instead of the swordsman reach. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), a chance-up is shown that shows that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohan character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. An advance notice is displayed, notifying that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. In addition, the child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. In FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is deleted.

  FIG. 321 (A3a′-2) is an example of an effect following FIG. 321 (A2a), and shows an example of an effect different from FIG. 321 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the princess character's cut-in is displayed. As shown in 318 (30b) and described above, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2), it is shown that the co-panda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that has passed and passed to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that a chance up notice is being made. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be positioned at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

  FIG. 321 (A3a ″) shows another example of effects following FIG. 321 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a ″) shows a state in which full rotation reach is started. The full rotation reach is a reach where the big hit is fixed, and it is not necessary to give the player a higher expectation, so the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 321 (A3a '' ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that the big hit is confirmed at the time when the full rotation reach is started, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth checkpoint CP5. The placard may be displayed with “V” indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or after the full rotation reach has started, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach has started. Then, the full-reach reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT displays again.

  FIG. 321 (A2b) to FIG. 321 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 321 (A1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. Thereafter, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior part 224Gd are operated and the effect of overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 321 (B1) to (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT is started. However, since the result of the loss is displayed on the way, the production by the chance up meter CMT is finished. It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B1), it is developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of reach production, and the Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is Since the first checkpoint CP1 has been reached, but a chance up notice corresponding thereto has not occurred, the first checkpoint CP1 is not marked with red markings and “UP”. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first check point CP1 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B2), a swordsman's cut-in image CI5 is displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of being lost. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B3), the main character, Tono, is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, thereby notifying that the player has lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a display is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 321 (B3 ′), despite the fact that “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol and it has been notified that it will be lost, the chance-up meter CMT displays the SBHani character SBH as the final character. A state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 321 (B4), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is changed by the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 322 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 322, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 322 (A1) to (A5) show that the chance up meter CMT is once erased during the production by the chance up meter CMT and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (A1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Sabohani character SBH is shown starting to move from start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 322 (A2) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of a chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make it easier to see the pattern on the light guide plate IL. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A3), the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by the dark display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the letters “chance up illuminating light emission” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance up notice has been made. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

  FIG. 322 (A4) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the duel animation display is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown.

  FIG. 322 (A5) shows a state where the fade-in of the duel scene animation display has been completed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving.

  In this production example, the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance increase in the reach production. However, the production is not limited to the above, but, for example, the Sabohani character SBH is at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and hits whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the effect of whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to an effect that tells whether it is a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) May be. Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 322 (B1) to (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the player's operation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and a notice of a chance up notice is being made. Further, in this effect example, guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, icons indicating the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 and characters “meter not displayed by arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, when the swordsman reach is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed. However, after the swordsman reach is started, it may be displayed by a display operation by the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B2), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the savohani character SBH, and the advance notice by the chance up character display has been made. Is informed.

  When the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 322 (B4). . Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 322 (B6). At this time, the Sabohani character SBH is a position that should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the speech balloon shown in FIG. 322 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from where it is clear. Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (B6 ′), when the presentation between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be positioned in front of the second check point CP2 and wait at that position until the timing for the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 322 (B6) and (B6 ′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” is displayed due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY. Characters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B6), the character “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, which is difficult to view.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 322 (B1) to (B6), display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times according to the player's operation. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next presentation by the chance up meter CMT.

  Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed, but for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. You may be comprised so that it may be in the state performed.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 323 shows an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

  In FIG. 323, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 323 (A1) to (A2) shows how two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this effect example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is called a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is called a second chance up meter CMTb. These chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 319 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (A1), the first check points CP1a and CP1b, the second check points CP2a and CP2b, and the third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first check point CP1a (CP1b) to third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance up notice will be given. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeted for the same chance up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed. However, only one chance up meter may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed rather than only one chance up meter. When displayed, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of making a big hit may be the same. In addition, when the production by the chance up meter is performed, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are made the same, but may be different, for example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2), when the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first check points CP1a and CP1b and the boy ’s character BOY appears, “in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb”. A balloon with the words “chance up BOY passed” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb to notify that a chance up notice has been made by character display.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2 ′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “chance up BOY passed” are displayed in the balloon, and the reliability in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2 ″), when the appearance of the boyi character BOY is displayed and the boyi boyy is singing a nose as a rare notice, the first chance is given. The letters “Chance Up BOY Passed” are displayed in the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the letters “Chance Up Rhythm” are displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb to indicate that a rare notice has occurred. Also good.

  In this production example, the traveling speed of the markers MRKa and MRKb is the same in the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may travel at different speeds. Further, in this effect example, the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

  FIGS. 323 (A2a-1) to (A2a-2) show another example of the effect following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, one of them may be deleted. For example, when one of two chance up meters is deleted, it is not deleted. It may be more likely to be a big hit or may be more likely to be a big hit if not erased. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Further, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  FIGS. 323 (A2b-1) to (A2b-2) show yet another example of the effect following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is a higher-reliability notice display. It can be called an aspect. Note that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed only in one of the two chance up meters, or both may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which a low-reliability balloon is displayed from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb in which only the erasure is deleted and a highly reliable balloon is displayed is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Further, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 323 (B1) to (B2) shows a state in which two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, and third check point CP3a). Is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoint. The timing of the advance notice and start of the chance up corresponding to any of CP1a to third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a are in this order.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boyi character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b and that the boyie character BOY has started nasal singing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the letters “chance up nose singing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb to notify that the chance up notice has been made.

  In this example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is displayed. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint in a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that is not notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even a checkpoint that is notified. Good.

  The example of production shown in FIGS. 323 (C1) to (C4) shows how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been. The development point CPA indicates a point where the reach production may develop. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the period from the start point to the check point in the second chance up meter CMTb, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point is shown. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to a display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this effect example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this effect example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 319 (2f). The display mode is set, and the second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that described above with reference to FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and includes three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are the starting points.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C2) shows a state where a button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased, and a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effective period starts is shown. Further, on the first chance up meter CMTa, a character “UP” indicating that a chance up notice has occurred at the first check point CP1 is displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a certain chance up notice that appears as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , The cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. Note that when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTa may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C4), a state where a panda cut-in image is displayed and transition to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check It is shown that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

  FIG. 324 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 324 (A1) to (A7), the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which a pseudo-run occurs and the number of occurrences of the pseudo-run while performing the pseudo-run production. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed to show that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A2) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. A chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged on the chance up meter CMT. It has been reported that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may occur at each check point. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A4) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second decorative symbol variation display) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant has missed it, it is shown that it has developed into a reach by regaining the thousand boxes. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 has changed from the question mark to the reach state. The display is switched. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is ended halfway, and the pseudo-continuous effect display fades out together with the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 324 (A6).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the change icon h0. As a result, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the pseudo-continuous effect display. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit may vary depending on the checkpoints reached.

  In addition, as an example of the effect of not displaying the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 324 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 324 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated halfway, as shown in FIGS. 324 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by a frame-out outside the display screen.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 324 (B1) to (B7) show that the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed from the start of the reach production to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B1), a state is shown in which a reach effect is performed in which “decoration 7” is reached and a transition is made. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In this effect example, when the reach effect starts, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The production using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift is made to the super reach or the losing is displayed without moving to the super reach. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 324 (B1), in the reach effect, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a chance up notice corresponding to each check point is given. "UP" is displayed to that effect. Moreover, the chance up meter CMT overlaps with a part of 1st decoration design.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed respectively in the upper left and right directions, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the change icon h0 below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out while being out of frame. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (B3), the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. Furthermore, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior object 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to advance while the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operating, but the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board. While the behavioral accessory 224Gd is operating, the progress of the marker MRK may be stopped. Further, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd are operating. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 324 (B3), a balloon with the words “chance up big board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first big board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board acting part. The fact that the advance notice of the chance increase by the object 224Gd has been made is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. Return to position. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the final point at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. However, after the marker MRK has reached the final point, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol is left. Although the design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, the first decorative design is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT before the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior 224Gd are operated. After the 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative design is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative design is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may make it do. In addition, before and after the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, the front and back relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd return to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (B7), it develops into super reach.

  FIG. 325 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  325 (A1) to (A5) in the example of production shown in FIG. 325 (A5), other productions unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during the production using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or other effects may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state where a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the treasure chest BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice effect that is not related to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure chest BX and continues to proceed.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding chance up notice is generated, and the second check point CP2 notifies “UP” "Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the appearance of the characters “Intense heat” appears from the inside. The character display of “Intense heat” is also a notice effect unrelated to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a chance up notice corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 325 (A5), the treasure chest BX that is displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is easily visible.

  FIG. 325 (B1) shows a situation in which other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance up meter CMT during the performance using the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (B1), during the execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap at least part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous effects are performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous performance is the same type of pachinko machine 100 attached to the same game island using, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a timekeeping means. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when it ends. The wipe screen WP may also be displayed when an effect other than a simultaneous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 325 (C1) to (C2) show how the error display is displayed during the performance using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 325 (C1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and it is shown that a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is being performed. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the marker MRK moves to the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is traveling from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output by a radio device such as a transceiver. When detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2), an error display is displayed by displaying the characters “Radio wave detected” to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 325 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a doffing error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 289) is full, the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289) and the like, it is also applicable to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened. Further, depending on the type of error, error display may not be performed, and error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 325 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. You may make it display so that it may overlap with at least one part. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2b) is configured so that a plurality of error displays can be performed at the same time, and when an error occurs, it is displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. In the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), an error display is shown on the entire display screen. Specifically, it is detected by, for example, a magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 289) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), an error display is displayed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters “magnetic detected” indicating that fact. Thereby, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and other effects are also not displayed. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is turned off, for example, not making a big hit determination. . If the power is shut off while the error is displayed and then the power supply is restored, the symbol variation stop command is issued after the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen.

  FIGS. 325 (D1) to (D2) show how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. Note that in the effect example shown in FIGS. 325 (D1) to (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (D1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. In addition, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the marker MRK is moved to the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown. In the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs swordsman” indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed, and a change icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 325 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. Further, in the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character is displayed with a balloon with the word “game” displayed.

  In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display unit. However, the chance up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display unit. For example, display means constituted by a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like is applicable.

  Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. It may be. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this production example, the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described. can do.

  FIG. 326 is a diagram for explaining a change mode of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 326, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  326 (A1) to (A9) show an example of presentation, in which the change time of the remaining time display meter in the button presentation performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button presentation performed in the conversation notice. Is shown differently.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A3) shows that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect is being performed by the navigation character YM. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 that simulates the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 that indicates the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where you can. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 326 (A4), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Tono-sama's conversation is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. Further, part of the habit conversation image CI2 is overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). The operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, and is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 326 (A5) to (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is slower than the speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), as shown in FIG. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed is changed to the character display of “Intense heat”, so that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, a state in which an effect corresponding to the button operation result is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM by one operation of the effect button is shown. ing. It should be noted that the character display of “It is intense heat” displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the bag and the character display of “Intense heat” displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started first. An effect according to the result may be performed. That is, in this effect example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation notice, the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM is shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1). Only in accordance with the operation (character display of “Intense heat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed in the conversation image CI2) (Indication of “It ’s intense heat”) is not performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-2), when the player operates the second effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 316 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. In other words, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect based on the conversation notice (character display of “It is intense heat” in the conversation image CI2 of the bag) is performed.

  In addition, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the effect is given with priority to the button effect with a high gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. An effect according to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 is performed with priority given to a button effect with a small gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. Also good.

  Further, in this effect example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different, but for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the heel notice image CI2 until a certain time. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when it reaches a certain time. .

  Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is 5 seconds. For example, the remaining time display meter is prepared at a speed corresponding to each of 5 seconds and 10 seconds. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change rate of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Also, in this effect example, “Intense fever” is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that has started to be extended later than when “Intense heat” is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier. ”Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is easier to display when the jackpot is displayed, and the notice display displayed later is displayed more easily. The player may be surprised by displaying while the degree of attention is relatively lowered. In addition, “Intense fever” was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that started to be extended later than when “Intense fever” was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect was displayed earlier. In that case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 326 (B1) to (B11) show that both the timer notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and it is shown that a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is being performed. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, it is shown that a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B2), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect has started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer notice effect functions as a chance-up notice. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B4), a balloon with the word “chance up timer notice” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, indicating that the chance up notice has been made. We are reporting. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and “09:17” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B4).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B6), the Sabohani character SBH starts to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:31” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B7), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second check point CP2 is shown. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, a chance up notice (for example, occurrence of cut-in) is made, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. In addition, the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the advance notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “04:14” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B8), a state where the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 is shown. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (B9), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” characters for urging attention to the notice instead of the timer display. According to this production example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohan character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the letters “chance up lever” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH. It is informing that the advance notice has been started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a chance-up notice displayed in response to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice made as a result of completion of the count-down of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. Alternatively, it can also be said that the advance notice of the chance-up performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the advance notice indicated by the characters “attention” shown in the timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. For example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va is a chance-up advance notice made when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the point CP3, and the advance notice made as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. (For example, changing from red to gold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  FIG. 327 is a diagram showing other examples of button effects in stages.

  In FIG. 327, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (2) shows that the button effect has started. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion notification images composed of combinations of button images and remaining time display meters are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged on the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. A second operation promotion notification image consisting of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image consisting of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged at the upper right and includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged at the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining image are displayed. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of a time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation prompt composed of a sixth button image 136a6 and a sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (4), all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 show that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Has been. In this production example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation effective period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have the same operation effective period length. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (5), as shown in FIG. 327 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the panda. The state changes to KP and a notice is being shown. Note that the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among a plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion notification are displayed. The display mode is changed one by one in priority in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. Note that the order of the operation promotion notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 once.

  In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes most preferentially when the effect button 136 is operated). It is assumed that the gauge decreases faster than the remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) The remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 is a decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes in the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4b), a sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification having the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated). The decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for quickly reducing the gauge is not limited to the above-described meter, and can be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, in this production example, all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are configured with the button images 136a1 to 136a6, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are used. Any one or more of the operation promotion notification images may be displayed in place of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image is replaced with the sixth button image 136a6 as the image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meter of any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same speed at which the gauge decreases, or as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), The remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is made to decrease the speed of the gauge faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images. Or you may make it slow. By configuring in this way, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 327 (4c) is performed, it is promoted that the effect lever 136V is operated once after the effect button 136 is operated five times. You may be able to.

  Moreover, in this production example, the remaining time display in the other operation promotion notification images is used to indicate the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), there may be two or more ones with different speeds at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), the speeds at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease are the other operation promotion notifications. The remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, and MT6 of the image are different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and correspond to the fifth operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

  FIG. 328 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 328, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 328 (A1) to (A6) show a state in which a plurality of timer notice productions are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 328 (A1) shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer notice display. Is different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as a first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as a second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A2) shows a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 has been completed. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster in countdown than the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the actual passage of time. The countdown speed of the first timer notice display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “06: 00”, that is, the state when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown of the timer notice display is started is shown. Can do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and the timer display is “05:87” at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A5). Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be performed. Note that the second timer notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, going out of the frame after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be performed. Thereafter, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, out of the frame.

  In this example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described. However, the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect that has been started first is used. The timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display that is started later.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 328 (B1) to (B4) show that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one of the timer notice effects is added. Show.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 328 (B1) shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display (the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2) enters the frame from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display is the same.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B2) shows a state where the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down as the actual time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are “09:73”. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), a state in which a timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is performed is shown. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “+10 seconds” indicating the added time in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies the added time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (B4), the timer display in the first timer preview display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer preview display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is 10 seconds. Has occurred. For this reason, two timer notice effects are started, but time is added to one timer display on the way, and therefore the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays. However, the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the timer notice effect. The time until the countdown is completed after the countdown of any one of the timer displays may be temporarily changed.

  Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice that has been started first is used. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the performance and completing the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. The timer display countdown in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later is shortened, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed when two timer notice effects are performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time or pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display It may be changed.

  In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer notice effect are performed, and thereby the timer notice related to the timer notice effect is provided. An addition of time to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after two timer notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed. For example, for one timer notice effect of two timer notice effects The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects, etc. are performed, for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects, or only by one of the three timer addition effects, etc. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 328 (C1) to (C4) are the effects of prompting the user to operate any of the plurality of operation means, and the remaining time display timer indicating the operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means. The state of being displayed is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1), a button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Also, corresponding to the right door image DRR, a right key image 137aR simulating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the right door image DRR, and below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the operation key unit 137.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C2), the remaining effective time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR respectively start the operation effective period and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation effective period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation effective period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation effective period elapses earlier. It has become. For this reason, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 328 (C3) shows a state where the left key image DRL is selected by the player operating the left key. Specifically, the left door image DRL moves to the center of the display screen and is enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are deleted. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This notifies that the left door image DRL has been selected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and a state where the replay symbol RP appears. Thereby, for example, it is foretelling that a pseudo ream will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 328 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right door image as shown in FIG. The DRR door may open and a pine symbol CC may appear. This pine symbol CC has the letter “Gekiatsu” added, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this production example, when one of the two remaining time display meters whose gauge decrease is faster is selected, a warning display with higher reliability is performed. Even if is selected, the same display may be displayed. In addition, when the slower remaining gauge of the two remaining time display meters is selected, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

  Also, in this effect example, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation effective period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the system waits until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0 and operates the right key. The operation of the right key may be invalidated during standby.

  FIG. 329 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 329, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 329 (A1) to (A12) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed after the timer notice effect is started. . Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer preview display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in size, may be displayed in other sizes, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A2).

  As shown in FIG. 329 (A3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the display position is also decorated. The symbol display device 208 is changed to substantially the center. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap the timer notice display TM1 by which the 1st decoration symbol was expanded and displayed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is performed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may be enlarged without changing the size of the timer display portion. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged when the timer display becomes “03:00”. However, the timer notice display TM1 may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A4) to (A7), the count-down in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continued until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A9), the timer preview display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Note that the timer preview display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, and the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 329 (A12). Thereby, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating the remaining 3 seconds in the timer notice effect, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened to the timer display, or the timer table may be displayed. Countdown may be stopped, the timer display countdown speed may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewinded), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and renewed. A timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

  In this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size. However, the size may be changed to three or more sizes. When the “notice” character display is displayed in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when the timer display or the “attention” character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. You may make it display by size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

  Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size. However, for example, it may be changed from the small size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “05:00”, the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the medium size, and when it becomes “03:00”, the size changes from the medium size to the large size. You may make it change to size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, it may not change to large size.

  Moreover, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, the size of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the “notice” character display is displayed, The size may be changed to a large size.

  In this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may vary depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). ). The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display or the “attention” character display in the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo-continuous design is likely to stop. You may do it.

  Also, in this effect example, when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect is likely to be performed when the countdown is completed, and it may be easy to make a big hit.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts. However, at the start of the countdown or when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is good also as a display mode of a large size.

  In this example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, and the timer display is changed. The size of may not be changed. Alternatively, the size of the timer display may be changed to a small size without changing the size of the timer display. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the frame portion or background color of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, but the color of the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame part (and / or the background part) of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, but the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed in form by animation. In this case, for example, when the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, the form of the timer display may be changed by animation. In addition, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, but the timer display may not be changed. In addition, although the form of the timer display changes due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  329 (B1) to (B4) show another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “00:31” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are in a variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 329 (B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In this way, not only during the timer display countdown, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged when a “notice” character is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 330 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer notice effect.

  330 (A1) to FIG. 330 (A3) are examples in which the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display form is displayed on another display means when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. Show. 330 (A1) to FIG. 330 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S is replaced with the crest character 224E by the sub display device 208S. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the second reserved number display, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. Also, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 330 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A2), the decorative symbol variation display is still performed. In the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the sub display device 208S after the timer notice display TM1 has completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative design display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or before the timer preview display TM1 extends over the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed.

  330 (B1) to FIG. 330 (B3) show another example in which the timer preview display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means when the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as a timer display, and a countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B2), the decorative symbol variation display is still performed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B2). At this time, the sub-display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative symbol and timer notice display TM1 and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. The sub display device 208S may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (B3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, and the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208S, or may be enlarged before the timer preview display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed. In this production example, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged, the timer preview display TM1 is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Alternatively, the timer preview display TM1 may be displayed. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with a reduced size. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 330 (C1) to (C9) show another example of the display mode after the timer notice display TM1 is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (C3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change is a mode in which a timer display is arranged inside a circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 330C3 to C6, the display state of the circular meter portion changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Note that the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, but the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. The timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed. For example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter portion is enlarged. You may make it display. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be constituted by only a circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that the first decorative symbol may overlap the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the change display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is performed. Further, when changing the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the timer display part may not be changed, but only the frame part of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 330 (C4) to (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display in the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 330 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a “continues” indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Note that characters other than “continue” may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the system shifts to SP reach, “SP reach” or the like is displayed to display the SP reach. You may alert | report that it transfers. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “attention” may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character in the middle symbol on the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-simulated symbols that have been moved moves at a low speed from above to below is started. Thereafter, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous is executed.

  In this example, the “continuation” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. For example, a pseudo-continuous effect is provided by adding a question mark to the “continuation” character. You may display so that there may be no effect. In such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

  Also, in this effect example, when a timer display targeting the same effect is displayed in a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Also, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer display of “03:00”, and the other timer notice display is displayed in a different display mode, for example, “3 seconds remaining” is roughly displayed. A countdown display may be performed.

  FIG. 331 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 331, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 331 (A1) to (A8), the timer notice display is shown enlarged in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A2) shows a state in which a timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 adds time. It will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “05:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 5 seconds, and the display position is also displayed as a decorative symbol. It is changed to the approximate center of the device 208. In this example, the countdown is once interrupted when “05:00” is reached, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed when the remaining time of the timer display is the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is displayed by adding the time to the timer display. Is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. You may make it overlap with TM1. In addition, the condition for the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display. For example, when the timer display changes, such as when the timer display is shortened or the countdown is stopped. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 331 (A5), in the timer preview display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. . While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display position is also changed to the original position. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  In the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 331 (B1) to (B7), the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped on the left symbol and “decoration 7” is stopped on the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and “00:00” is displayed. Yes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to approximately the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the same time, “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol represented by the Tono-like character in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. This pseudo-continuous effect based on the pseudo-continuous design is continuously performed from FIG. 331 (B3) to FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (B4), in the timer preview display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state where 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1 restarts the countdown of the timer display. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B7), cut-in display composed of Tono-sama character and “continuation” character display is performed, and then the second variation display of decorative symbols is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B7), the timer display is “14:92”.

  FIG. 332 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 332, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 332 (A1) to (A8) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display form of the timer notice display is changed and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and a state where it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the second number of holds display indicates that the number of holds in FIG. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A2).

  FIG. 332 (A3) shows a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A3).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 332 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds, and the timer notice display TM1. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is further increased is added. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed in an enlarged manner because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of “LvUP” is deleted. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 332 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display as shown in FIG. 332 (A7). The word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, the character “Slash Ats” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high is displayed together with the princess character. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), in response to the timer notice display TM1 being ranked up, a character display of “expected size” is added. As a result, it is easier to hit a big hit than when a cut-in display without a character display of “expected large” is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of “Long Expectation” may be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, or may not be displayed. In addition, the text display of “expected large” may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this effect example, the character display of “Large Expectation” is easier to display when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when the timer is not ranked up. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the display of the change icon h0 is also changed and the notice is displayed. The change in the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect, or may be made regardless of the timer notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

  As described above, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice made as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect is promoted, or the timer notice. The rank increase of the display TM1 itself may function as a chance increase notice. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the degree of expectation that the notice with high reliability of the jackpot is displayed in advance has increased.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice that is made as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative symbol It may indicate that there is a possibility that the design of reach will be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach effect is performed with “decoration 2” where the probability variation big hit is not fixed, and the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and the big hit is achieved, May be changed to reach of “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 332 (B1) to (B7) show that the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer notice effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second reserved number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B3), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B3).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 332 (B4), when the boyi character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size so that the boyi character BOY is conspicuous. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to obstruct the display of the boyfriend character BOY. It can be easily recognized. Note that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even if it is reduced, and “15:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B4). Note that the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 332 (B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of the chance increase by the Boy character BOY is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance increase by the boyi character BOY ends, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

  In this production example, while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to notify that the advance notice of the chance increase is being performed. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer advance notice TM1, the enlarged display of the timer advance notice TM1, the change in the frame of the timer advance notice TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer advance notice TM1, the timer advance notice The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.

  FIG. 333 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 333, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 333 (A1) to (A3), the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when the shift to the super-reach is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A1), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A1), the state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes its display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 333 (A3 ′), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to make the effect of super reach stand out.

  In this example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts. However, when the effect of transitioning to the super reach shown in FIG. 333 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed when the super reach title shown in FIG. 333 (A2) is displayed. Also good. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 has a chance to increase), It may be displayed as it is. Also, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, the timing of 3 seconds ago or 0, the chance of the timer preview display TM1 being increased, etc.). Or a larger display than the size initially displayed).

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 333 (B1) to (B7) show how the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the production movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), a state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “27:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In FIG. 333 (B2), a state is shown in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partly overlapped by the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the case where it is not overlapped. TM1 is considered difficult to see.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior object 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center portion on the right end of the display screen is changed to the center upper end portion of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd do not operate | move, although a display position does not need to be changed, a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 333 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, but the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is not changed. Note that the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the center portion on the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B7). Note that the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd start returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first board action 224Ga to the fourth board action 224Gd start returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1. After starting movement to the original position, the operation of returning the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd to the initial position may be started.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 333 (C1) to (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “29:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C2), the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, and the variation icon h0 is displayed. The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are out of the frame and are not displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative design, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right design of the first decorative design. Note that the timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), the title of the super reach where the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

  FIG. 334 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 334, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 334 (A1) to (A10), the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A1), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1) shows a state of transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown of the timer display, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A3), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A3). In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is displayed in which a character “shrink timer” is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137. It is informed that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the guide display may be displayed from the start of the timer notice production, or the reach state is reached. May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 334 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the player operates the up key. Then, it is displayed that the original size is displayed, and that the display position returns to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 334 (A7). The display position returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “17:81” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A7), a guide display is displayed in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 334 (A3), when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated when the timer preview display TM1 is the default display position with the default display size, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A8), a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is continued is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A8).

  As shown in FIG. 334 (A9), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. This indicates that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. Note that the display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes “03:00” and is displayed in a reduced size, the display returns to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display position may remain at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A10), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 334 (B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second reserved number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B2).

  FIG. 334 (B3) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (B4), the effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer indications in the timer notice indications TM1L and TM1R indicate the same time, and “13:56” is indicated in the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B5). In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame may not be changed, and when the color of the frame is changed to red, You may make it easier to hit big hits than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may change to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (B6), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 334 (B7), in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R, the timer display Instead, the word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. Yes. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the timer display countdown in one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed. This is to inform you that you will be promoted to a higher reach production. In addition, the effect performed when the countdown of the timer display in both timer preview displays of the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1R is completed may be used.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 334 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the protagonist. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9), a notice display indicating that the co-panda cheering team KPD composed of three co-panda characters is cheering is performed. It is informing that the reliability for the big hit has increased dramatically. The co-panda support group KPD is a notice character displayed when the timer display countdown in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

  In this production example, a chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is produced corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that a chance-up production is being performed in the developed reach production.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 335, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 335 (A1) to (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 335 (A1) to (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest role 224E and the Senryo box role 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. . Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second reservation number display. “1” is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, “15:47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (A2), the duel scene animation is continuously performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “15:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A2).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “14:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are reciprocated left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, a state in which the timer notice display is divided into two is shown. Note that the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each show the same time. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A4), “13: 56 ". Note that the timer display countdown continues while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. The timer display countdown may be interrupted. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, the timer display may be performed not only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M but also on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial position. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “12:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A5).

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 335 (B1) to (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 335 (B1) to (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-view state and a difficult-to-view state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), it is developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “18:19” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, “6:19” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes “0” in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the timer display is “0” in the timer display effect in the mini display device 208P, the effect such as the chance increase notification may be performed. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (B2), at the timing when the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes “15:00” indicating that the remaining 15 seconds, the timer preview display is displayed. An effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing “3:00” indicating that the timer display remains for 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the timer display time displayed on the mini display device 208P. The characters “UP” indicating that the timer display of TM1 is added are displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B4), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer display for 3 seconds and updated to “18:00”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer display countdown is resumed in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer display is “17:99”. On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen due to the shutter member. In this example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM in the device 208, the timer display in the mini display device 208P may not be ended, and thereafter the timer display may be counted down.

  FIG. 336 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 336, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 336 (A1) to (A10) are informed by performing a display indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared before the timer notice effect is started. Show. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A2), a state in which the timer notice preparation effect is started is shown. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. The timer notice preparation effect is an indication that preparation is in progress until the timer notice effect starts, so that the player has a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, “STANDBY” to be described later may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A3) shows a state in which the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the timer preview display TM1 is completed, the timer preview display TM1 displays “STANDBY” indicating that the timer preview display is being prepared, thereby notifying that effect. In other words, in this effect example, the effect is performed as one aspect of the pre-reading notice that notifies that the timer notice effect is to be performed within the hold. In addition, the change notice for notifying that the timer notice effect is performed in the changing symbol display may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and has a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 need not be reduced and the display position need not be changed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A5) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A6), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the first hold of the special symbol 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. Thus, it can be said that the timer notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A7) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A8), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A9), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position. From the display of “STANDBY”, the timer display is displayed. The state of switching to the display of “10:00” is shown. This notifies that the timer notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer preview display TM1 moves while being enlarged may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be enlarged after being changed, or the display position may be changed after being enlarged. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed. May be switched to a timer display. The timing at which the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A10) shows that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 has started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may make it change from small size to large size.

  336 (B1) to (B8) in the example of production, a plurality of clock notice icons MI1 functioning as prefetch notices are stocked, and timer notice effects are performed by the number of stocked watch notice icons MI1. Shows about. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B2), a state where “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This “decoration 3” is added with a watch notice icon MI1 and indicates that one watch notice icon MI1 is stocked. Note that two or more clock notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B3), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. Also, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of watch notice icons MI1 stocked is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the watch notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the watch notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B4) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is also performed is shown. The navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon displaying a “get” character together with a clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this example of the function functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect will be performed within the hold. In this way, the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one and may be two or more. There may also be a plurality of types of effects that are performed when the watch warning icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of clock notice icons MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B5), a state in which the display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is shown. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 3” indicating that the notice icons MI1 of three clocks are stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B6) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B7), one of the three watch notification icons MI1 stocked is digested, and a state in which the timer notification effect is started is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In this example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. However, two timer notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 336 (B7 ′), a watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The timer notice effect may be started without digesting.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the countdown of the timer display is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the timer notice icon TM1 may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end of the display screen from the beginning. .

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 390. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 337 to FIG. 390 are diagrams showing staged effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 337 to 390, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 337 to 390, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 337 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 337 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 337 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 337 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 337 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the subject of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (3), a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is being performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “chance”, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (6), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. A “continuation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (8), after the “Ikuze” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. ing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 337 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 337 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a savory group announcement is made across a large number of savory characters SBHN. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a great expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is performed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not performed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of savohani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the jackpot, and a strong savohani group notice in which the savohani character SBHN is the second number and the sabohani character SBHN is the first number. In some cases, a weak savory group notice is executed (number less than the second number). The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 337 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which can be developed into super reach. Informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 337 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (16), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, a button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (17), as shown in FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a “game” in the balloon together with the up image of the Tono-sama character. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “ja” are arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the head is not decorated around the characters “game” in the balloon, and is larger than the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. This suggests that the reliability of is low.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, Then, “decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 5 -decoration 6 -decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 338 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Yes. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 339 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339. is there. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 339 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Here, the timer notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal fraction less than one second.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), “04:25” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1. . That is, it shows that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo ream may” are displayed, and it is suggested that a pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM being performed. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:52” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (8), a “continuation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “00:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (9), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and “Ikuze” is displayed near the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. Is displayed, and the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream. “2” is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 337 (10) to (17), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (18), as shown in FIG. 340 (19) following FIG. 339 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image of the upside-down character. Then, a cut-in image including a speech balloon image in which the characters “game is won” are arranged in the speech balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of face length faces (for example, 9) are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is This suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the displayed case. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (20), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (21), a state in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol. In addition, in this production example, even if the timer notice production is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, it may be lost.

  FIG. 341 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 341 (1) to FIG. 4 (4) are the same as FIG. 339 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the pseudo-ream is performed was a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before “00:00”, and a state where a certain effect (pseudo-ream) is not performed is shown. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that a jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed when a true timer notice effect is performed than when a false timer notice effect is performed. Note that the present embodiment is configured such that even when a false timer notice effect is performed, there may be a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (6), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, the “sorry” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is deleted.

  Thereafter, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the reach state is formed. As shown in FIG. 341 (8), the ornament symbol display device 208 displays the navigation character YM. “Reach” is displayed in the vicinity to notify that a reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In this production example, the pseudo-annual advance notice by the timer advance notice effect is a false notice, but it may be said that it has functioned as a reach notice by shifting to reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak savory group notice is performed in which the number of savory SBHNs is smaller than the strong savory group notice described above. The weak savohani group notice is more reliable than when the savohani group notice is not made, but is less reliable than when the strong savohani group notice is made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 341 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 337 (15) to 338 (21), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 342 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another display example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 342 (1) to FIG. 6 (6) are the same as FIG. 339 (1) to FIG.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 342 (6), after “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” as shown in FIG. 342 (7). The third stop is performed at the timing of “00”, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Thus, there may be a case where the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped. Or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the same time as the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”.

  Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 342 (8), and a “continuation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed. Note that the “continuation” character may be displayed after the timer advance notice TM1 is deleted, the timer advance notice TM1 may be deleted after the “continue” character is displayed, or the timer advance notice. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the “continuation” character is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 342 (9), the character “Ikuze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variation display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 342 (7a) to (9a), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the second variation display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts. Until then, the display may be maintained without deleting the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (9b), after the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer preview display is started at the timing when the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous starts. The characters “Done” may be displayed on TM1 to notify that a timer notice effect has succeeded and a pseudo-ream as a certain effect has started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), after the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer preview display is started at the timing when the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous starts. The characters “pseudo-ream” may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer reaming effect has been successful and that a pseudo-ream as a certain effect has started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), by displaying a face-length face icon BCHO on the timer notice display TM1, it is possible to produce the fact that a pseudo-ream as a certain effect has started. Also good.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 343 (1) to FIG. 3 (3) are the same as FIG. 339 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (4), the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is shown as “04:25”. Further, in this effect example, the character “Leach may” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that there is a possibility of reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (6), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (6).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 343 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “00:52” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 343 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A notice is given. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a strong savory group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, the strong savory group notice is an example of a certain effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (10) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (10) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 339 (15) to 340 (22), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Thus, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong savory group notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the strong savohani group notice is not started. In (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed. In addition, in this production example, even when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong sabotani group notice is started, it may be lost.

  FIG. 344 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 344 (1) to FIG. 8 (8) are the same as FIG. 343 (1) to FIG.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 344 (8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. An example where no notice is given is shown. In other words, in this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM shows that the notice that the strong savory group notice is made is a false notice. . In other words, even if the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, it can be said that a certain effect (strong sabotani group notice) is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (10), “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 343 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof is omitted. In this example of the effect, an example in which the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started is shown.

  FIG. 345 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 345 (1) to FIG. 8 (8) are the same as FIG. 343 (1) to FIG.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 345 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. Is done. That is, in this production example, a state is shown in which a notice (weak savory group notice) different from a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, it can be said that when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, an effect (weak savohani group notice) different from a certain effect (strong savohani group notice) is shown. This timer notice effect can also be called a fake timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 345 (11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 345 (11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 343 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof is omitted. In this example, the timer notice display based on the timer notice display TM1 is false, and there is a case where a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started. is there.

  FIG. 346 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 347 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 346 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 346 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer preview display TM1A is a high reliability display mode that indicates that the possibility of a false timer preview is lower than the default display mode. When the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. In addition, when the timer announcement display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than the case where the timer announcement display TM1 in the default display mode is displayed (the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed). May be easy to do). “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (4), “00:24” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “change on hold”, and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1A being performed, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It has been suggested. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (5), the state in which the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A is “00:00” is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (6), the character “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1A. In addition, a “first hot” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, the character display of “first hot” may be performed, or after the character display of “first hot” is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. Alternatively, the character display of “Previous” may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (10), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the “first hot” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14) shows a state in which a navigation character notice is being provided by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, the characters “hot” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in this effect example, the timer display time displayed when the countdown is started is a long time of “20:00”, and the reliability of the big hit is more dramatic than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is growing. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (17).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the timer advance notice TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (18).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 347 (19) following FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the strong savory group notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “15:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19). Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the Sabohan character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. At the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the display of the second timer notice display TM1 is started at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notice displays are performed in the timer notice effect is shown. The newly displayed timer preview display TM1 is a default display mode, and “5:00” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Then, it is suggested that a certain production starts. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is shorter than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is displayed. Is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 that has started to be displayed later is digested first. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (20), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which can be developed into super reach. Informed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “14:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20). Further, the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later continues to count down, and “4:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 347 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “10:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (21). Also, the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later continues to count down, and “1:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (22), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. A state in which 136a is displayed in a default mode is shown. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later is digested before the timer notice display TM1A that has been displayed first. In this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later is not the start of the button notice effect but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect. In this production example, a notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is given, but the occurrence of the button notice effect itself is given in advance. May be.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 347 (24). On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 that has already been counted down continues to display “0:00” until the effect button 136 is operated and a cut-in image is displayed. Note that, when the countdown is completed and “0:00” is displayed, and the button notice effect starts, it may be deleted. In this production example, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later is a fake notice. It can be said that a certain state is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is shown. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, it is shown that an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. This timer notice effect can be called a fake timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (25), the state in which the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later is deleted is shown. Note that, in the timer notice display TM1A that has started to be displayed first, the countdown continues, and “5:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (26), a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “3: 77” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (27), the display position of the timer notice display TM1A is moved from the right center of the display screen to the upper left corner. Note that the timer notice display TM1A still continues to count down, and “2:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (28), a state in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continued, and “1:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (28).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (29) shows that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and a character BC3 having a broken dress appears along with the characters “Revived”, and the navigation character YM An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity, which shows how surprised the sudden appearance of Bancho's character is. Then, three decoration symbols of “decoration 5” are displayed, and it is notified that three “decoration 5” are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a resurrection effect is provided in which a big hit is given as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1A.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (31), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 347 (32), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the display of the change icon h0 and the characters “Yataze” are also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the resurrection effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the resurrection effect is not started. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol.

  In this production example, when the timer notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the time displayed first on the timer display is “3:00” or “20:00”. When the notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode or in the special display form, the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time displayed in the timer display when the timer preview display is displayed in the default display form. It may be configured so that the time (second time) is longer than the time (first time) to be displayed. Thereby, there is a case where a certain notice display to be executed can be given a sense of expectation depending on the display form of the timer notice display.

  FIG. 348 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 348 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “change on hold”, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is performed. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a prefetch notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains “03:00”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 348 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. That is, it is notified that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice that is false. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (6), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the character of “sorry” displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (9), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 348 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 350 in stages. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 349 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1R are respectively framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer preview displays are started simultaneously. Three or more timer notice effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are both default display modes. In the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Yes. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side displays “45:00” as a timer display, which suggests that a certain notice effect starts when 45 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. doing. In this example, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start counting down simultaneously, a certain notice effect is produced both when 10 seconds have elapsed and 45 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Has been suggested to start. Here, a certain notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same, May be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added with a face-length face icon BCHO, which suggests that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. . In addition, you may alert | report that the reliability of jackpot is improving by adding this face length face icon BCHO. Note that a plurality of types of icons to be added to the timer notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the kind of the added icon, or a kind of notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of timer display (time display) in the timer preview displays TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), the timer preview display TM1L displayed on the left side includes “9: "25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it shows that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (5), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), “9:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “44:00” is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6), “8:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “43:75” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7) displays the character “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7), “4:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “39:00” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. A character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert attention to the contents of the treasure chest. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (8), “3:67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “38:67” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and the character “activate activation” is displayed to show that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been. As a result, in the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that a certain effect is promised to be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, when the princess character HME appears, it is predicted that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the princess character HME is a pseudo-continuous notice item (sometimes referred to as a “notice icon”). At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, “41:67” is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, “1:67” is displayed, and the countdown continues here. Note that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side may not be added. In the present embodiment, the countdown by the timer notice effect is performed in this way, and there are cases where the effect can be boosted by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until “0:00”).

  Thereafter, the mini-game is ended, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the characters “Preparing for production” are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and a pseudo-ream is performed. The notice is informed. In addition, a “pseudo-ream” character is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice that a pseudo-ream is performed is also made here. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (10), “1:33” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “41:33” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (11), a state in which the countdown in the timer notice effect is continued is shown. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed with the princess character HME added, that is, it is visually indicated that the pseudo-ream is performed by displaying the pseudo-ream notice item. May be easier to understand. In this way, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (11), “1:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “41:00” is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes “0:00”. When the countdown is completed, the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6”. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and “40:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 349 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Here, after the timer notice display TM1L is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-continuous may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-continuous is started. The notice display TM1L may be erased, or the second variation display of decorative symbols may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character HME is displayed, and the display of an icon notifies that a pseudo-ream has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues and “39:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (13).

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a new timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the newly displayed timer preview display TM1N is a default display mode. For example, a frame-in is performed from the left side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. In this timer notice display TM1N, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts counting down after the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown is started first, but the timer notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown is completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues and “38:15” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (15), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer announcement displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (15), “9:25” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1N displayed on the left side, and “37: 40 "is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (16), a state in which the second mini game is started is shown. When the mini game is started, as described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image on the left and right of the center of the display area. BXR is displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Select with cross key” is displayed. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (16), “9:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “37:15” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (17), “8:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “36:90” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini-game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18) displays a character “open right” near the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (18), “4:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “32:15” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) following FIG. 349 (18), the effect production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and selected. The left treasure chest image BXL that has not been deleted is deleted. A character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (19), “3:67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “31:82” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), a spear character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character “Uhihi” is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. Thereby, it is informed that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a fake timer notice effect. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (20), “1:67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, “29:82” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), the disappearance animation is started in the timer preview display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer preview display TM1N displayed on the left side is deleted. That is, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect is to be performed is a false notice as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect is not performed. Note that the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right continues to count down, and “29:49” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (21). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times of the decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is two. When the princess character HME is displayed, the display of “× 2” may not be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (22), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues to count down, and “27:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (22).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM. To reach the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong scallop group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Moreover, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the right center of the display screen to the upper left corner. At least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with a savory character SBHN constituting a strong savory group notice. It should be noted that the strong savory group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong savory group notice is started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong Sabohan group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong savory group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the strong savory group notice is started. Alternatively, the strong Sabohan group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “25:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (24).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (25), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “24:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), a state in which the display screen is darkened and a blackout effect is performed across the lightning is shown. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “21:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (26).

  When the blackout effect ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, a character “strong cut-in-chance” is displayed together with the face-length icon of the Bancho, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the face-length icon BCHO, which has been added to the timer notice display TM1R, moves to the Amida field and is shown in the middle of the three options. In other words, the display of the face-length face icon BCHO that has been added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that a mini-game by Amidakuji is to be started. In addition, below the Amida field, a character “Choose” is displayed, which prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three choices for the face-length face icon BCHO. . In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “21:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28) has the head of the number that was located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “18:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (28).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, and the operation valid period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 350 (29) is reached. Production begins. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either “◯” indicating success or “X” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, among the three end points, “×” is displayed at the left end point, “×” is displayed at the center end point, and “○” is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of “◯” displayed may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all end points. Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1R continues to count down, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (29).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (30), the decoration symbol display device 208 shows that the face-length face icon BCHO is moving on the line according to the rules of the lottery. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “17:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (30).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (31), the state that the face-length icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points is shown. In other words, a state in which the result of the mini game by Amidaku is derived is shown. In this production example, the Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where “○” is displayed, and “strong cut-in confirmation” is displayed, the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image It is informed that it is determined that the CI 1a is displayed. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R continues to count down, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (31).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. A character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, it is shown that the display mode of the timer preview display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer preview display TM1RA), and that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Yes. In addition, the timer notice display TM1RA continues to count down, and “9:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (32).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (33), the button notice effect is started and the state where the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM1RA indicates that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. That is, the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RA is a timer notice effect related to this button effect, and can be said to be a timer notice effect regarding the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a result of the button effect. . The timer notice display TM1RA that has become “0:00” is maintained until the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is maintained. It may be deleted before is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (34), as shown in FIG. 350 (35), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350 (36), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (37) following FIG. 350 (36), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Note that the display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are made visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (38), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this effect example, a timer notice effect is performed and a pseudo-ream starts, and further, a timer notice effect is performed and a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed and a big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it is configured so that it may be lost.

  FIG. 352 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect continued from FIG. 350 (24). In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIGS. 352 (25a) to (28a) are the same as FIGS. 350 (25) to (28). In this example, the countdown display is performed in the blackout effect in FIG. 352 (26a). The difference is that the timer notice display TM1R in the inside is temporarily hidden.

  When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, and the operation valid period elapses, the production of the lottery is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a). Be started. In this production example, at this time, three icons are respectively displayed at the three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the left end of the three end points, and a bancho icon indicating that the mini game has been successful is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and a Sabohani icon indicating that the mini-game is very successful is displayed at the end of the right side. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. Further, there may be no number-length icon, two numbers, or all length-length icons. Further, there may be no Sabohani icon, two may be present, or all may be Sabohani icons. Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1R continues to count down, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the face-length face icon BCHO is moving on the line according to the rules of the lottery. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “17:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (30a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (31a), the state that the face-length icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points is shown. In other words, a state in which the result of the mini game by Amidaku is derived is shown. In this production example, Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Sabohani icon is displayed, and the word “strongest cut-in confirmation” is displayed, and the mission is very successful. It is notified that the cut-in image CI1v is confirmed to be displayed. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (31a).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 352 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. A character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, it is shown that the display mode of the timer preview display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer preview display TM1RA), and that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Yes. Further, in this effect example, the character “Shortest Cut-In Preparation” is displayed together with the Sabohani character at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in advance. We are reporting. In addition, the timer notice display TM1RA continues to count down, and “9:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (32a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (33a), a state in which the button notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM1RA indicates that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 352 (35a). At this time, the display of the Sabohani character and the character “Preparing the strongest cut-in” is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the characters “game” are arranged in a balloon together with an image of Tono-sama's character up, and is surrounded by a number of Sabohani characters. It is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. In this effect example, as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a more advantageous notice effect than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain notice effect, or may be displayed as a notice effect different from a certain notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (36a), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (37a), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Note that the display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are made visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (38a), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 353 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 353 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 starts when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (4), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains “10:00”. The timer notice effect in this effect example is a timer notice effect indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (5), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (7) displays the character “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. A character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert attention to the contents of the treasure chest. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and the characters “pseudo-ream stock” are displayed, the mini-game mission is achieved, and the pseudo-reams are displayed. Will be announced in advance. As a result, in the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a certain notice effect is promised when the countdown of the timer display is completed. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started. In this effect example, a state in which the result of the mini-game is derived and displayed before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started is shown.

  Thereafter, the mini-game is ended, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (10), the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer preview display TM1A). It is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. That is, in this effect example, the state that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game is shown. In addition, a princess character HME as a notice item is displayed in the lower left of the display screen, and a notice that a pseudo-ream will be performed is made. That is, in this production example, a state in which the notice item is displayed by the success of the mini game is shown. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains “10:00” and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 353 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 353 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In this example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the symbol fixed display, and the princess character HME as the notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays are displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1A and the display of the princess character HME are displayed as pre-read notices of pseudo-continuous effects. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains “10:00” and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (13), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains “10:00” and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (14), “06:44” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1A. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (16), the second stop is performed and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00”, and the replay as a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed on the middle symbol. A state in which the symbol RP is stopped and displayed is shown. After that, the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started in the manner described above.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 354 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 354 (1) to FIG. 8 (8) are the same as FIG. 353 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (9), a spear character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character “Uhihi” is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. . Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to timer notice display TM1 was a fake timer notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (10), the disappearance animation is started in the timer preview display TM1 and the timer preview display TM1 is deleted. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed was a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, and it can be said that a certain effect is not performed.

  Thereafter, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above. As shown in FIG. -Temporary stop due to fluctuation of shaking is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 354 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Thus, in this production example, since the mini-game failed, the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 was a false notice, so that the pre-reading notice was not performed. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (13), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, the display is finalized with the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 6”

  In this effect example, even if the mini-game is failed and the pre-reading notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be a big hit.

  FIG. 355 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 355 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (3), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), a state in which a timer notice effect is started in a period in which a mini-game is started and a selection operation by a player is accepted is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 starts when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. On the other hand, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains “10:00”.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (6) displays the character “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. A character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert attention to the contents of the treasure chest. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (8), the face-length icon BCF appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and the character “strong cut-in confirmation” is displayed, and the mini-game mission is achieved. The advance notice is given that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 355 (9), a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily A stop is made. At this time, the face-length icon BCF of the bancho is reduced and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The pre-reading notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a is performed by the stock of the face-length face icon BCF. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 355 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the fixed display of the symbol, and the face length BCF as the notice item is also displayed. . That is, these displays are displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 and the watch face icon BCF are displayed as a pre-read notice. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (11), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special figure display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the display mode of the notice. Note that the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 is performed by, for example, the hold change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without the hold change animation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 355 (13), the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “10:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), “9:95” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer preview display TM1, and the timer preview display TM1 is deleted. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed was a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect is not performed. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. It should be noted that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect relating to the fact that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain notice effect, that is, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, It may be recognized that this is not done. In addition, before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, a gaze effect that produces that effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (16), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. The On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong scallop group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which can be developed into super reach. Informed. Here, since the Banchou face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of “SP development” is overlapped with the Banchou face icon BCF, and the Banchou face icon BCF is displayed. It is more difficult to see than if not.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (23), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 356 (25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to that the advance notice is given by the face-length face icon BCF displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In other words, it can be said that the result of the mini game is a pre-reading notice of a notice effect to be executed in a symbol change display performed later. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is irrelevant to the timer notice effect started at the same time. That is, it is shown that the mini game and the timer notice effect are related to each other, and in fact, only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is a true notice effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 356 (26), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (27), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (28), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this production example, when the Bancho face icon BCF appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the Bancho face icon BCF appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a. The jackpot symbol is configured to be displayed more easily than when no symbol is displayed, but even if the face-length icon BCF appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost. Also good.

  FIG. 357 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 357 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 337 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the face-length face icon BCHO is added to the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be displayed.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and “0:24” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 357 (4). . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the display of “hold change”, and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM being performed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), the state in which the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00” is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (6), the character “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1. In addition, a “first hot” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display to be started next.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the “first hot” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 358 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 357 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In addition, this effect example differs from the effect shown in FIG. 357 (3) in that no watch face icon BCHO is added to the timer notice display TM1. Thereby, it is suggested that there is a low possibility that a certain notice effect is displayed, compared with the case where the face length BCHO icon BCHO is added.

  Thereafter, a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and “0:24” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the display of “hold change”, and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM being performed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), the state in which the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “0:00” is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (6), a character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  However, as shown in FIG. 358 (7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is indicated that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is not performed, and is a fake timer notice effect. ing. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the timer notice effect was a fake effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. At this time, the character of “sorry” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (10), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the “first hot” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 359 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 359 (1) to FIG. 6 (6) are the same as FIG. 341 (1) to FIG.

  After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 359 (6), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (7). It is shown. Further, at this time, the face length icon BCHO is added, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream as a certain notice effect is displayed. That is, it is indicated that the disappeared timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 related to the fake timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer notice display TM1 is redisplayed. From another point of view, it can also be said that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed for the same certain effect. Here, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again, execution of a certain notice effect (pseudo-continuous) performed as a result of the timer notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, a “pseudo-ream” character is also displayed near the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 359 (7), “03:00” is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may be performed after 3 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “02:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:23” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (9).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “00:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (10). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 359 (11), a “continuation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (11).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 359 (12), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and “Ikuze” near the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. Is displayed, and the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 359 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “x” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream. “2” is displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 360 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. 360 (1) to (2) are the same as FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “25:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. This effect example shows a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “chance by SP development” is displayed, and the mission effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the big hit is dramatically increased by developing to super reach has been started. It is also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, there is a case where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and “23:00” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (4). . That is, it shows that 2 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the lower center of the display screen to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 360 (8) to (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and the middle symbols are changing at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11), a state is shown in which a strong scallop group notice is performed. The strong Sabohani group notice is a notice with high reliability of the jackpot, and transitions to super reach with high probability. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong Sabohani group notice may dramatically increase expectations for mission achievement. In this production example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In the production example shown in FIG. 360 (11), the savohani character SBHN constituting the strong savory group notice overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the savohani character SBHN. May be. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (12), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed. This may recognize that the mission is accomplished. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 360 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, a character “timer attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to prompt attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. Note that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), a timer display step-up animation is performed in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Thereby, it is notified that the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot or the execution probability of a certain preview effect is improved. Note that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may change (degrade) to a display form in which the reliability of the jackpot or the execution probability of a certain notice effect decreases.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer preview display). TM1B) is changed and stepped up is shown, and the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved. This timer display TM1B in the special display mode is a display mode having a higher jackpot reliability than the timer display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer display in the special display mode is displayed, The jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. Note that when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with a face-length face icon BCHO, and a notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “4:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (15).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved is shown. Furthermore, the timing at which this strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display, and therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 360 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (18), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 362 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 360 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the decoration of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is lost without shifting to super reach. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the shift to the super reach is not made. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (11), since it does not shift to super reach, it is indicated that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Is done. That is, it is informed that the notice that a certain notice effect is performed is false (gase) as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. In other words, since the mission notice was not achieved before the timer notice display TM1 became “00:00”, it was erased in the middle of the countdown, and it was shown that a certain effect was not performed. it can. In addition, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect related to displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer notice display TM1. It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 362 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 362 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. ”Is temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuations, and then, as shown in FIG. 362 (14), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern of“ decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5 ”. The combination is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  It should be noted that in this production example, it does not develop into super reach, and even if the timer notice production is finished, it may be a big hit.

  FIG. 363 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361, and FIG. 364 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 363 in a stepwise manner. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 363 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 360 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “5:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. This production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 360 (3) in this respect. This effect example shows a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “chance by SP development” is displayed, and the mission effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the big hit is dramatically increased by developing to super reach has been started. It is also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, there is a case where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (4) to (13) are performed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 363 (4) to (14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 360 (4) to 360 (4) except that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “5:00”. Since it is the same as FIG. (14), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer preview display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with a face-length face icon BCHO, and a notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 does not yet start the countdown, and remains “5:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (15).

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (16), “4:11” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1B. . Thus, the timer notice effect in this effect example does not start the timer display countdown when started, and starts the timer display countdown when the mission is achieved.

  When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (17) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved is shown. Furthermore, the timing at which this strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display, and therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 363 (18), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (19) following FIG. 363 (18), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 364 (20), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 365 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 363 to 364. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 365 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 363 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” during the normal reach, and the transition to the super-reach is not performed, and the decoration of “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5” is lost. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the shift to the super reach is not made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (11), since it does not shift to the super reach, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Is done. That is, it is informed that the notice that a certain notice effect is performed is false (gase) as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. In other words, the display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but the mission is not achieved before the countdown is started, so that it is erased before the countdown is started and a certain effect is not performed. It can be said that it is shown. In addition, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect related to displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer notice display TM1. It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 365 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. ”Is temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuations, and then, as shown in FIG. 365 (14), in the decorative design display device 208, the decorative pattern of the loss“ decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 ”is displayed. The combination is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 366 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 361, and FIG. 367 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 366 (1) to FIG. 14 (14) are the same as FIG. 360 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer preview display TM1B). The state that the step-up is shown is shown, and the state that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically improved is shown. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with a face-length face icon BCHO, and a notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In addition, this effect example differs from the effect shown in FIG. 360 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to “5:00”. At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of “5:00” is maintained. As described above, in this production example, the change in the display mode of the timer notice display is made easier to understand by resetting the time in the timer display at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display form of the timer notice display is changed. ing. In addition, after the mission is achieved, it is shown how to reset the timer display in the timer notice display to an appropriate time again while displaying the timer notice display step up to a highly reliable display form. It can also be said.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 366 (16), “4:32” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1B. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (17) to 367 (20) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (17) to 367 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 360 (16) to 361 (19), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 368 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 369 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 368 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 339 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 341 (5). The disappearance animation is shown.

  However, as shown in FIG. 368 (11), the timer preview display TM1 is not erased, but the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 is added, and “22:35” is displayed in the timer preview display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 368 (10) is actually not a disappearing animation but a timer notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect is started using the same timer notice display TM1. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation to which the timer display is added in the timer notice display and a part of the animation to delete the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed indicating that the second variation of the decorative symbols is being displayed by the pseudo-ream. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (13), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 368 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the lower center of the display screen to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 368 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows normal reach and the middle symbol changing at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (17).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (18), a state is shown in which a strong scallop group notice is performed. In this production example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (19) following FIG. 368 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into a super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (19).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 369 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, a character “timer attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to prompt attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (21), a timer display step-up animation is performed in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as the above-described disappearance animation. That is, it can be said that the part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and the part of the animation that deletes the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 369 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. The mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer preview display TM1B), and the state of stepping up is shown, and the state of greatly improving the reliability of the jackpot is shown. In addition, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with a face-length face icon BCHO to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the timer notice display TM1 is counting down, and “4:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (22).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B is “0:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (23) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 369 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (25), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (26), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, and further, the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed and finally the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. A timer notice effect may be performed to start the pseudo-ream, and even if the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

  370 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369, and FIG. 371 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 370 in a stepwise manner. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 370 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 368 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (10), it is shown that the disappearing animation described above is performed to erase the timer preview display TM1 when the countdown in the timer preview display TM1 is completed. Yes. The disappearing animation is displayed in the same manner as at least a part of the disappearing animation shown in FIG. Thereby, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 370 (11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed indicating that the second variation of the decorative symbols is being displayed by the pseudo-ream.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (13), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 370 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach and shows that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (18), a state in which the weak scallop group notice is performed is shown. In this production example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (19) following FIG. 370 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into a super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 371 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character “swordsman reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 369 (20).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (22), a screen in which the main character Tosama defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Yes. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 372 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 372 (1) to FIG. 4 (4) are the same as FIG. 341 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (5), the timer preview addition animation, which is the same effect as the disappearing animation, is started during the countdown display in the timer preview display TM1, and the timer preview display TM1 is similar to the disappearing animation. The effect is displayed. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the possibility that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice is notified. Thereby, the player may be able to make the timer notice display TM1 be erased and make it appear that it is a false notice.

  However, as shown in FIG. 372 (6), the timer preview display TM1 is not erased, and the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 is added, and “20:00” is displayed in the timer preview display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 372 (5) is not actually a disappearing animation but a timer notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. In this way, in this effect example, there is a case where it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation to which the timer display is added in the timer notice display and a part of the animation to delete the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Hot!” Is displayed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (8), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the lower center of the display screen to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (9).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 372 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the weak savory group notice is being performed. In this production example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “13:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “10:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (11).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 372 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Note that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and “4:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (12).

  When the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (13) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect regarding the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a certain notice effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this example, the timer display is added, the timer notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed and lost, but there is a case where it is a big hit. May be.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (14), the main character's lord lost the enemy swordsman and the defeated screen is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops at the middle symbol in the approximate center. The “decoration 6” scheduled to be displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. As described above, even when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect as a result of the timer notice effect, the display result may be lost.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Yes. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 372 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 373 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 374 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 373 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 373 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. These three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are all displayed in a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. Moved and displayed as a fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. Displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1RB are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer preview displays are started simultaneously. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display form, but the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is a special display form. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side display “03:00” as the timer display, and a certain notice will be given when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. This suggests that the production will start. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added with a face-length face icon BCHO, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L and TM1RB are not started to count down the timer display, and the timer display is maintained at “03:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (4), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters “Activate the strong timer when the princess appears” are displayed, and the princess character appears from the treasure box, so that an advantageous timer notice among the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is informed that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is the display is performed. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini-game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (6) displays a character “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. A character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert attention to the contents of the treasure chest. In addition, the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (8), a spear character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character of “bad spear” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has failed. ing. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini game mission has failed. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (9), the character “Kotchija” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. The timer display selection animation for erasing the timer preview display TM1RB displayed in (1) is started, and the timer preview display TM1RB is deleted. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is not performed. . It should be noted that both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be erased so that the timer notice effect relating to any timer notice display is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (10), the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 373 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 373 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In this example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even during the symbol fixed display. That is, the timer notice display TM1L is displayed across the next symbol variation display. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (13), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (14), the disappearance animation for the timer notice display TM1L is started and the timer notice display TM1L is deleted. That is, in this effect example, a failure in the mini game is shown, so that a notice notice effect is not performed for any of the two timer notice displays, which is a false notice.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (15) shows a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 374 (19) following FIG. 373 (18). Then, a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of the shaking, and then, as shown in FIG. 374 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms the display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this example, the mini-game is failed and any timer notice effect is ended in the middle and finally a losing symbol is displayed. However, there may be a big hit.

  FIG. 375 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 to 374, and FIG. 376 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 375 (1) to FIG. 7 (7) are the same as FIG. 373 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (8), a princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character “Expect” is displayed to show that the mini-game mission has been achieved. This is different from the effect shown in FIG. 373 (8). In addition, a character “chance” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is both “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (9), the character “Kotchija” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer notice that is not an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. A timer display selection animation in which the timer preview display TM1L displayed on the left side as a display is deleted is started, and the timer preview display TM1L is deleted. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is performed. Therefore, compared with the effect shown in FIG. 373 (9), the expectation for execution of a certain effect is improved by executing a timer notice effect that is highly likely to be performed. May be possible. Note that both timer preview displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and a timer preview effect related to any timer preview display may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 375 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 375 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In this example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the symbol fixed display. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed across the next symbol variation display. Note that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (13), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Note that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not deleted, and the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (14), “02:76” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, a character “focus on hold” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (15).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (16), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. It changes and becomes a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, the timer display on the timer preview display TM1RB may be “00:00”, or the timer display on the timer preview display TM1RB may be “ The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode at the time when “00:00” is reached. It should be noted that the hold icon in the Sabohan display mode is more reliable than the panda hold icon described above. Further, when the hold icon in the display mode of savory is displayed, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a look-ahead notice for determining the jackpot.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is deleted when the countdown is completed, and then the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. . In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (19) following FIG. 375 (18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 376 (20). Then, a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of the shaking, and then, as shown in FIG. 376 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the confirmation with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 377 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376, and FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 377 in a stepwise manner. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 377 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 375 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. This production example is different from that shown in FIG. 375 (3) except that the timer display in the timer preview display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1RB is “18:00”. It is the same as the production shown in FIG. In this way, by changing the time indicated by the timer display between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it becomes difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect, and the game is monotonized. May be suppressed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (4) to (7) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (4) to (7) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 375 (4) to (7) and the time indicated by the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Are the same except that they are different from each other, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the characters “Look forward” are displayed, and the mini-game mission is achieved. It is shown. In addition, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 375 (8) in that it indicates that a special privilege is given by the character display “Please expect it super”. In addition, a character “chance” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. Of the timer indications in the two timer announcement indications TM1L and TM1RB, the timer announcement indication TM1L displayed on the left side remains “03:00”, and the timer announcement indication TM1RB displayed on the right side is “18:00” remains unchanged, and no countdown has been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (9), “two” characters are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is not an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. A timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side which is the timer notice display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is performed.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (10), the timer preview display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer preview display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. The display mode is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and the state of stepping up is shown, and the possibility that a certain performance is performed is improved. Has been. Further, the characters “both expect” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, which suggests that both timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have expectation. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started to count down.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 377 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 377 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 and the character display displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even during the symbol fixed display. That is, these timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are displayed across the next symbol variation display. Of the timer indications in the two timer announcement indications TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer announcement indication TM1LA displayed on the left side remains “03:00”, and the timer announcement indication TM1RB displayed on the right side is “18:00” remains unchanged, and no countdown has been started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (13), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Further, in this effect example, the characters “attention to the left” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. This suggests that the countdown will begin. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started to count down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is performed on the timer preview display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer preview displays TM1LA and TM1RB. Be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (14), “02:76” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down. In addition, a character “focus on hold” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues to count down, and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (15). Yes. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. It changes to the display mode of Sabohani and becomes the display mode of prefetching. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”, After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, the timer display on the timer preview display TM1LA may be “00:00”, or the timer display on the timer preview display TM1LA is “ The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode at the time when “00:00” is reached. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased when the countdown is completed. Thereafter, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (19) following FIG. 377 (18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378 (20). Then, a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of the swing, and then, as shown in FIG. 378 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the confirmation with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In this example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the symbol fixed display. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over three symbol fluctuation displays. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB remains “18:00” and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (22), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the special special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the savory. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and remains “18:00”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (26), normal reach is performed, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. Note that in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and remains “18:00”.

  Thereafter, a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer preview display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (27), “17:75” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1RB. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (28), a state in which the strong scallop group notice is performed is shown. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, the timer notice display TM1RB continues to count down, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (29), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that super-reach can be developed. Informed. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB continues to count down, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (29).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 378 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, a character “timer attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to prompt attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1RB. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (30).

  When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “0:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (31) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a certain notice effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378 (32), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (33), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (34), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this effect example, a plurality of timer notice effects are performed, and examples corresponding to different effects are shown.

  FIG. 379 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 380 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 379 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 379 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 373 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (4), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (6) displays the characters “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and the character “activate activation” is displayed to show that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been. Further, the character “Yataze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Focus on hold” is displayed to prompt attention to change in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (11), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Changes to the pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1. Note that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. After the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 may be “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the time when becomes “00:00”. Thus, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is first displayed, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. If the result of the mini game is successful, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and then the countdown is completed (that is, “00:00”). It can be said that a pending change effect is performed as an effect. In addition, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the mini game is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and after the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started. The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, a “button hold” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to a button hold display mode.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 379 (13), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 379 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Note that the second hold icon h12, which is the button hold display mode, does not change the display mode and remains in the button hold display mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (15), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (16), the mini-game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the letters “Pending change chance” are displayed together with the face-length icon of the Bancho, indicating that the mini game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the Bancho face icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is shown in the middle of the three options. In addition, below the Amida field, a character “Choose” is displayed, which prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three choices for the face-length face icon BCHO. . In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Gambare” is displayed, indicating that the player is encouraged.

  Thereafter, after the mini game by Amidakuji is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (17) shows that a new timer notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when a new timer notice display TM1N is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (18), “04:77” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1N. .

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (19) following FIG. 379 (18) displays the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The chief face icon BCHO located at the position moves to the right of the three options. In the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (19).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, and the operation valid period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 380 (20) is reached. Production begins. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either “push” at which the button hold operation effect is started or “x” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, “Push” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “X” is displayed at the center end point, and “Push” is displayed at the right end point. ing. Note that the number of “push” displayed may be one, or “push” may be displayed at all end points. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1N continues to count down, and “03:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (20).

  After that, the Banchou face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 380 (21), the Banchou face icon BCHO is one of the three end points. The state of reaching the end point on the left side of is shown. In other words, a state in which the result of the mini game by Amidaku is derived is shown. In this production example, the state that the face length icon BCHO has reached the end point on the right side where “push” is displayed is shown, the mission is successful, and the operation effect of holding the button is started. It has been reported that this has been confirmed. In addition, the timer notice display TM1N continues to count down, and “00:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (21).

  As shown in FIG. 380 (22), when the result of the mini game is received and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the first hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode is displayed with “ The word “push” is added, and it is notified that the operation effect of button hold is started. In addition, a character “Yoshisha” is displayed near the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. It should be noted that after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, a character “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11, or “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11. After the character is added, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be “00:00”, or at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00” The character “push” may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which a timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times and a certain notice effect that is performed as a result is performed for the same hold icon is shown.

  FIG. 380 (23) shows that the operation valid period related to the operation effect of holding the button is started when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, and the decorative symbol display is shown. In the device 208, the timer notice display TM1N is not erased, but the characters “change on hold when the button is pressed” are displayed to explain the game.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 380 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the display mode of the savory. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1N, the characters “Super Hot Hold” are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has become a highly reliable display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “next hot ze” is displayed, which suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the next symbol variation display is high.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is not started. In the variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 380 (25), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” temporarily A stop is made. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 380 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 381 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect that continues from FIG. 379 (18). In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (19a) following FIG. 379 (18) shows that the face-length face icon BCHO is positioned on the right of the three options in the Amida field. Yes. In the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (19a).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, and the operation valid period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a) is reached. Production begins. At this time, “×” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “×” is displayed at the center end point, and “push” is displayed at the right end point. . Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1N continues to count down, and “03:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a).

  After that, the Banchou face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 381 (21a), the ornamental symbol display device 208 has the Banchou face icon BCHO out of the three end points. The state of reaching the end point on the left side of is shown. In other words, a state in which the result of the mini game by Amidaku is derived is shown. In this production example, the watch face icon BCHO has reached the right end point where “x” is displayed, the mission has failed, and the button hold operation production is not started Is notified. In addition, the timer notice display TM1N continues to count down, and “00:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (21a).

  As shown in FIG. 381 (22a), in response to the result of the mini-game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearing animation during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button hold operation effect is not performed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N, it is notified that the notice that the button holding operation effect is performed was a false notice. In other words, before the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, it is erased in the middle of the countdown, and a state in which a certain effect (button holding operation effect) is not performed is shown. it can.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (23a), the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (24a), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this production example, since the mini game has failed, the button holding operation production is not performed, and it is shown that the operation has not been performed. When the button hold operation effect is not performed and the operation is not successful, the symbol variation display based on the hold of the target of the button hold tends to be lost, but it may be a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 381 (26a), a temporary combination due to fluctuation of fluctuation is produced by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 381 (27a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 382 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 379 to 380. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 382 (1) to FIG. 7 (7) are the same as FIG. 379 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (8), a spear character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character “Uhihi” is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. . In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 is a false timer notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains “03:00”, and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (9), the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed was a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, and it can be said that a certain effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and, as shown in FIG. 382 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” temporarily A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 382 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (13), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (14), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, and becomes a pre-reading display mode. In this production example, the result of the mini game is unsuccessful, and the display state of the hold icon as a certain advance notice effect has not been changed by the timer advance notice effect. Even if the result of the mini game is unsuccessful, the result of the production (the hold icon changes to the Sabohani hold icon) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 379 to 380 and described above, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed as a result of the success of the mini game, the mini game is changed as shown in FIG. 382 and described above. Although it is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the display mode of the hold icon has changed, but it is not limited to this.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. As shown in FIG. 382 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” temporarily A stop is made. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “next hot z” is displayed, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the next symbol variation display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 382 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 383 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 383 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 373 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (4), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size at the upper center, a character with a bancho appears, and a display indicating the outcome of the dice “1”. When the message “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini game is started, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this mini game, the result is derived without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (5), a state is shown in which the dice symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 383 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol indicating “3”, indicating that the mission was not achieved. ing. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the mini game has failed. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed was a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown starts, and a state in which a certain effect is not performed is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 383 (7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearing animation of the timer preview display TM1 and shows that the timer preview display TM1 is erased. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (8), a state in which the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased is shown.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 383 (9), a temporary combination due to fluctuations of fluctuation is produced by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. A stop is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 383 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this example, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. When a result is derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed, compared to when the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, and the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

  FIG. 384 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 384 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. These three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are all displayed in a default display mode. Further, in this effect example, a 7-segment display device SEG consisting of 4-digit 7-segments is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full color LED for each segment, and is configured to emit light in full color for each segment. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided on the front frame door 106, for example, but may be provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray or the game board 200. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. Moved and displayed as a fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. Displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Also in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer notice display is started and “0300” is displayed in a white light emission mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (4), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (6) displays the characters “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at “03:00”, and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the character “activate activation” is displayed, showing that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been. Further, the character “Yataze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby informing that the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG are started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (9), a timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the timer display countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 384 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and “0275” is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which a timer notice effect is performed by a plurality of devices is shown. Here, when timer preview effects by a plurality of devices are performed simultaneously, a certain effect may be started more easily than when a timer preview effect is displayed by one timer preview display, and the reliability of the big hit The degree may be high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Focus on hold” is displayed to prompt attention to change in the display mode of the hold icon. Note that the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10), “01:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In the segment display device SEG, “0175” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. Changes to a button hold display mode, and a pre-read display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. . Note that after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. It may change. In this production example, two timer notices are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, but only on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the 7-segment display device SEG. You may do. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are provided. When the timer notice display is performed only in any one of them, a certain notice effect may not be performed. Also, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the greater the number of timer notice displays displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, when there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and when there are two timer notice indications, the strong cut-in image CI1a is provided as a certain notice effect. When it is easy to be displayed and there are three or more timer notice displays, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is completed. In addition, a “button hold” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to a button hold display mode.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  FIG. 385 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 386 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 385 stepwise. FIG. 387 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 step by step. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 385 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 384 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (3), the state after the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and the timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer preview display TM1 is a default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (3), “09:75” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1. In this production example, the time set in the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, “10:00”. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer notice display is not started and is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (4), the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed, and “09:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (4).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed, and “06:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (5). At this time, the timer notice display is started in the 7-segment display device SEG, and “3000” is displayed in a red light emission mode. Here, when the light emission mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, it is easier to start a certain notice effect as a result of the timer notice effect being performed than when it is white. In this effect example, the timer notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a pre-read notice, and the subject of a certain notice effect is different from the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (6) displays the character “open right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counted down, and “04:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. In addition, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counted down, and “03:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and the character “activate activation” is displayed to show that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Yataze” is displayed, thereby notifying that a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started. . Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counted down, and “03:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (9) shows that the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (10), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Focus on hold” is displayed to prompt attention to change in the display mode of the hold icon. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counted down, and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (11), at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. It changes and becomes a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “hot” character is displayed, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the next symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 386 (13) following FIG. 385 (12), the decorative symbol “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. With this combination, a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in shaking. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the display of the character displayed near the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are also deleted. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (15), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at “3000”.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (16), “2978” is displayed as the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (17), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol small at the upper center. Specifically, a character “strong cut-in-chance” is displayed together with the face-length icon of the Bancho, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the Bancho face icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is shown to be located on the right side of the three options. In addition, below the Amida field, a character “Choose” is displayed, which prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three choices for the face-length face icon BCHO. . Note that the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2833” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (17).

  After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (18) has the bancho length located on the right of the three choices in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. Note that the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2580” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (18).

  After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, and the operation valid period elapses, the Amida lottery effect is started. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either “◯” indicating success or “X” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, among the three end points, “×” is displayed at the left end point, “×” is displayed at the center end point, and “○” is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of “◯” displayed may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all end points. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the face-length face icon BCHO is moving on the line according to the rules of the lottery. Note that the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is still being counted down, and “2411” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (19).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (20), the state that the face-length face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points is shown. In other words, a state in which the result of the mini game by Amidaku is derived is shown. In this example, the Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where “O” is displayed, and the character “Yataze” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission is successful. Then, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is confirmed to be displayed. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “2236” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (20).

  Thereafter, the mini game is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Waiting for intense heat” is displayed, and it is informed that a strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “2185” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (21).

  Thereafter, “decoration 5” is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 386 (22), the ornament symbol display device 208 has a lower center of the display screen. “REACH” is displayed on the screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “2005” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (22).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong savory group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “1927” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (23).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (24), the savory group notice is continuously performed. In this effect example, the display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from a red display mode to a multi-colored rainbow display mode. In the rainbow display mode timer display, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the red display mode timer display, and a certain effect is easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be surely displayed, or a certain effect may be started. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “1737” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (24).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 387 (25) following FIG. 386 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other. Is done. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “1010” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (26), it is shown that the button repeated striking effect has been started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “0500” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (26). Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button stroke effect. The strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to success as a result of the mini game by Amidakuji. In this production example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a, is displayed. It is displayed and it is notified that the expectation of jackpot is increasing dramatically. Even at this time, the player continuously performs the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously performed, and “0200” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (27).

  After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “0000”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The premiere notice is shown. This notifies the player that the big hit has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, a certain target notice effect is different between the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is performed twice. It is shown that it is performed across the display. It should be noted that the target symbol change display may be different between the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Also, the timer notice effect may be performed across the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed after the jackpot game ends. Also, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect being performed by the 7-segment display device SEG, a premier notice is given as a certain notice effect. A fake timer notice effect may be performed. Further, a fake timer notice effect may be performed in which a certain notice effect is not performed.

  Thus, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display is performed) than when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. Display), it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 387 (29), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”. At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to congratulate that it was a big hit. Further, a character “Premier Appearance” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the premiere notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (30), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 387 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final display with the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

  FIG. 388 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect in the big hit game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 388 (1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 387 (31). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” continues. The state of being confirmed and displayed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (2), a state where a big hit game is started and a big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a copanda character with a fan congratulates the jackpot in the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decoration effect in the big hit game, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all segments. At this time, a special effect display by the 7-segment display device SEG may be performed. For example, “7777” may be displayed, or a number string of word alignment may be displayed. Such a display may be performed so that, for example, a reserved villa where a big hit occurs within the hold is notified in advance, or a probability change state is predicted after the big hit game ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (3), a state in which the third round is started is shown. Then, on the right side of the co-panda character, the characters “LED attention” are displayed, suggesting that a notice effect will be performed.

  Then, in FIG. 388 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off in front, and then, as shown in FIG. A mini game is started. In this mini-game, the result according to the game state after the big hit game can be displayed, and if the game state after the big hit game becomes a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, there may be an effect that the mini-game is successful due to tearing of the dressmaster's clothes. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for receiving the button stroke effect is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, “1000” is displayed, and it is informed that it is possible to accept repeated hits of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) starts. When the timer display shifts to the fourth round and the operation valid period starts, the countdown starts. Note that the display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, but a mode in which light is emitted in other colors may be used. It may be different. Further, for example, instead of “1000” indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period, a timer display indicating another time (for example, display of a combination of specific numbers such as “9999” and “7777”) is performed. Therefore, a premier notice that a mini-game must succeed can be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (6), a state of shifting to the fourth round is shown. When the fourth round is reached, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “continuous hit” together with the button image 136a to prompt the effect button 136 to be hit repeatedly. In addition, an operation effective period for accepting continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started, and timer display countdown (timer subtraction) in the 7-segment display device SEG is started. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (6), “0800” is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period started. Thus, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer notice effect, indicating that the timer notice effect and the mini game are started simultaneously. Note that the timer notice effect and the mini game need not be started at the same time.

  FIG. 388 (7) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is “0500”, and it is reported that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8), characters “sorry” and “short time next time” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. Thereby, after the jackpot game is over, it is informed that the transition to the short-time state (special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state) does not proceed to the probability variation state.

  FIG. 388 (5a) to FIG. 8 (8a) show another production example following FIG. 388 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (5a) shows a state in which the above-described mini game is started. In this production example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is reported that there is a high possibility of success in the mini game. When the mini game is started, a timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting the button stroke effect is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (6a) to (7a) are performed. In addition, since FIG. 388 (6a)-the figure (7a) are the same as that of FIG. 388 (6)-the figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8 a), the dress of the Bancho character is broken, and characters “Bancho Awakening” and “Next Probability” are displayed, indicating that the mini-game has been successful. Thereby, after the big hit game is finished, it is notified that the state will shift to the probability changing state.

  FIG. 389 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner a display example in a case where an error display is displayed in the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 389 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a hold state of FIG. A hold icon representing is displayed. Two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. And a white display mode). On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In this example, an error message “please remove the ball” (lower pan full error display ERR1) is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. In addition, when the cancellation of the error that is the target of error notification is detected (for example, when the lower pan full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower pan full tank error is resolved), the lower pan full tank error display ERR1 Is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the subject of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (2), the lower pan full tank error is not eliminated, and the lower pan full tank error display ERR1 is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer preview display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer preview effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (3), the lower pan full tank error has not yet been resolved, and the lower pan full tank error display ERR1 is continuously displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower pan full error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer advance notice display TM1 is lowered. For this reason, the player may hurry to remove the ball from the lower plate while seeing this display state.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), “04:25” is displayed on the timer preview display TM1. . In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo ream may” are displayed, and it is suggested that a pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM being performed. Yes. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), the lower pan full tank error is still not resolved, the lower pan full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower pan full tank error display ERR1. Has been.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5). Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5), the lower pan full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower pan full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower pan full tank error display ERR1. Has been.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6). Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (6), since the player has removed the ball from the lower plate, the lower plate full tank error has been eliminated, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 has been erased. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (7) to (12) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (7) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (7) to (12), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timer notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed by the countdown of the timer display is displayed. For example, when the timer notice effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display is displayed as “ Start from 0:00, for example, display “May be held change when“ 03:00 ”” or “Strong cut-in occurs when“ 25:00 ””, and count up the timer display. A certain effect may be performed when the designated time is reached.

  Further, in the timer notice effect described above, as an example, a hold change effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a cut-in image display, and a jackpot confirmation notification have been described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be an effect to enter a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice effect, or the like.

  In the timer notice effect described above, the expected degree of jackpot is changed by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, red> green> yellow> blue> white. When the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be confirmed. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect may be always performed. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, the expectation of jackpot is obtained because blue <white. If the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is larger. The reliability of may be increased.

  Also, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit symbol is larger than when the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. There may be a combination of the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG, which greatly improves the reliability of the big hit, such as easy confirmation display. In addition, the timer notice display color on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked, and the sum of ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the rank of white is 1, the rank of yellow is 3, and the rank of red is 5, the color of the timer notice display in the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. In the case of the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display is not performed, but only in the 7-segment display device SEG, and the emission color is red (the latter). You may make it the reliability of jackpot higher.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390, an example of a display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect starts will be described. Here, FIG. 390 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the timer notice display.

  FIG. 390 (a) shows an example in which “7:77” is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of jackpot decoration symbols, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) starts the timer notice effect. If it is displayed sometimes, it can be used as a preliminary timer display as a notice that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) is displayed, it may be displayed as a notice for deriving the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur.

  FIG. 390 (b) shows an example in which “99:99” is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shorter than the symbol variation time. However, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. The time is longer than the time from the display start time to the symbol stop display time, and the time is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the fluctuation. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a preliminary timer display as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur.

  Also, the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) is the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in decimal numbers, but the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in hexadecimal numbers is displayed as shown in FIG. 390 (c). You may do it. Even in this case, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) may be expected.

  FIG. 390 (d) shows an example in which “7:58” is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of the wording of “Nagoya” which is the prefectural office of Aichi Prefecture. When the timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (d) is displayed when the timer preview effect starts. Can be used as a preliminary timer display as a notice that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur.

  Further, FIG. 390 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) reminiscent of “Mt. Fuji”, the highest altitude mountain in Japan, and this also shows the timer shown in FIG. 390 (d). In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In this embodiment, the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 displayed when the timer notification effect is started displays “0” for all digits less than 1 second. The timer display is characterized in that digits less than 1 second are also displayed. Note that the timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various types can be used as appropriate.

  FIG. 390 (f) shows an example in which “win” is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that the big hit is confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a preliminary timer display as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur.

  FIG. 390 (g) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be changed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (g) is a rainbow display mode displayed while changing in multiple colors. When the timer preview display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premium timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

  FIG. 390 (h) shows the timer notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (h) is a display mode in which Sabohani characters SBHN are added to the four corners. When the timer preview display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, the character to add is not limited to this, It can set arbitrarily. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is determined that the jackpot game will be shifted to after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved resort will occur.

  In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display a timer display in a square frame, the timer notice display TM1 having a display mode with a different frame shape may be displayed as the premium timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 that displays the timer display in a circular frame may be used as the premium timer display.

  In addition, the timer notice display TM1 of the premier timer display listed above may be counted down after the display is started, or the timer notice effect may be terminated without performing the countdown, The jackpot symbol may be determined and displayed in the middle of the countdown, and the timer notice effect may end. Further, when the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain notice effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed even when the countdown of the timer display is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game for notifying whether the timer notice effect is true or false based on the derivation result has been described. However, this mini game is applicable to any of the timer notice effects described above. Can do.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 424. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 391 to FIG. 424 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 391 to 424, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 is not shown. 391 to 424 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices. However, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 391 to 424, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, FIGS. 391 to 424 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 have a rectangular shape. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights up in the lighting mode of loss or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of FIG. Further, the special figure 2 4th symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and lights up the losing state during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights in the lighting mode of jackpot. In addition, in FIGS. 391 to 424, the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z are shown.

  FIG. 391 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 391 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord's character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the character that appears, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree may be notified according to a display mode of the tutorial display (for example, displayed in blue or displayed in red). In this case, this tutorial display may be a notice display of a position in the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display is described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display part TT1 in this effect example is an area for displaying something. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display region, the variable icon display region, and the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 391 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), the number of receptions 850 of the character string image “0 more” is displayed, and the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This Tono-sama character may be called a navigation character. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of Tono-sama may be configured to be displayed in the UI part UI3, or at least partially overlapped with the front part of the UI part UI3.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move up and down and rotate according to the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 391 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. That is, a display (shutter image display) is performed before another display (display of “in preparation”) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). It can be said. Note that at least part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a pre-preparation image preview display that is displayed before the display of the pre-preparation image RDY, which will be described later, is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes so that the big hit expectation varies depending on the display mode of the shutter image. The display mode of the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured not to show the big hit expectation degree only.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (d), the state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preparing image RDY on which characters “preparing” are displayed. In other words, the image RDY in preparation is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1, and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (d), the background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 391 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the image RDY under preparation can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the image RDY under preparation is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the image RDY under preparation is started. It may be possible to change to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. In the case where the shutter image described above can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image being prepared RDY. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). This effect example is configured such that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice, a mini game, or the like) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (e), the UI unit UI3 is shown changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon is easily changed by setting the display mode of the UI unit UI3 to the golden display mode. That is, the UI part UI3 in the golden display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. Note that the UI part UI3 in the gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, or function as a direct pre-read notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. There may be cases. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be in a default mode before the hold icon (pre-read target hold icon) whose display mode has changed is digested, or whether or not the pre-read target change has been determined. It may be configured so as to be in a default mode after a display (for example, display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right part of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (g), the hold change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11. A state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, and is in a state of difficulty in visual recognition as compared with a state where the effect EF4 is not covered. Note that the effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 391 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change prior effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from when the display of the hold icon is changed after the display of the ninja character NJ4 is started. May be used as a pending change prior effect display. Moreover, it is good also as a pending | holding change prior effect display only with the display of ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change prior effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Moreover, the structure by which the display of the image RDY in preparation is started after the effect display regarding Ninja character NJ4 may be sufficient. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Moreover, it may be configured such that the image RDY being prepared is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the pre-read mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon has changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the image RDY being prepared. It may function as a prior notification of a different object, such as an icon change and a ready image RDY, or a subject change different from the pre-reading notice and the notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (h), a state is shown in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the display mode changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 391 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the crest character 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the crest character 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 391 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the on-hold change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. Opportunities are easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read display mode, but the chances are displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, it may be configured such that when the chance eyes are displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be performed sequentially, or after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be erased. Further, the decorative symbols may be sequentially stopped and displayed at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Note that the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 391 (i), but the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 391 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the display of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (j), the decorative symbol variable display is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (k), the state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively and the reach state is formed is shown. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are each swaying fluctuation, and the middle symbol is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, until the super reach is started, the UI unit UI3 is basically It is not hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 391 (l) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that the operation of the crest character 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the crest character 224E is started. The operation of the family crest character 224E may be started at the timing when the reach shift display is started. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this effect example, when shifting to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. Moreover, the structure which displays the reach name (title) of SP reach may be sufficient, and you may comprise so that UI part UI3 may be non-displayed in the state in which the reach name of SP reach is displayed at least. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image being prepared RDY, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI part UI3 after the super reach transition is different depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain aspect of the effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even when the swordsman reach is reached.

  FIG. 391 (m) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the image RDY in preparation, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same position. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the crestman 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the swordsman reach, the swordsman reach may start after the crestman 224E returns to the initial position, or the crestman 224E. The swordsman reach may be started at the timing when returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (n), the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this effect example, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed (hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (o), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display of the image being prepared RDY is ended and the mini game is started. However, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed without the mini game or the timer notice effect. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is configured by a region divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four regions (the upper region in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 (o)) is the winning region. In addition, when the hit area hits an arrow, a high-reliability advance notice is made. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area. In a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini games and timer notices, a certain type of mini game and timer notice may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (p), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area around the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown. In addition, you may comprise so that the display which shows the result of a mini game may be displayed by the cut different from the cut shown in FIG.391 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display part of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or a second certain effect may be performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes zero. In addition, when a timer notice effect is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the start of another notice immediately before it reaches 0).

  FIG. 392 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of a plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 392 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the exemplification is illustrated as a continuation of the example of FIG. 391, but may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the example of FIG. Also good. The same applies to the following drawings. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (a4), it is shown that the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini-game as the notice display has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the iron plate image TP, and shows that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between failure or success of the mini game is made, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, a false timer notice effect that displays nothing even when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be displayed. When the countdown is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, a character “chance” is displayed somewhere small) may be performed.

  FIG. 392 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (b4), the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 hits the target TGT but shows a state where it is stuck in the non-contact area. In other words, this production example shows that the mini-game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed on a horizontal stripe background. ing. In this production example, if you compare the success of the mini-game or the great success, it will be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when it is a great success than when it is a success. .

  FIG. 392 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (n), and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is also an example of a notice display that starts after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is started more easily than the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o). The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. In addition, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol on which the characters “iron plate” are displayed is derived, and a state in which the mini-game is very successful is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and a state in which a notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed is shown.

  It should be noted that, compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the mini game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 391. However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 392, the timer notice effect may be performed or vice versa. . In addition, both timer notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

  FIG. 393 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 393 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 391 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 393 (a1), the change icon h0 is displayed in red, and accordingly, the crest character 224E is also set in red.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a2), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. This effect example shows a state in which the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a3), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  As described above, in this production example, the example in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY in preparation is shown, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be configured to be executed even during the super reach. Further, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. Also good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display is finished in the first state may extend over the next change. And after a 3rd display is complete | finished in a 2nd state, a certain notice display (especially a certain production | presentation) may start at least in this 2nd state, and may be complete | finished.

  FIG. 393 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started instead of the mini game is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 393 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. Here, as other examples of the timer notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 337 to 390 can be appropriately combined. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. Note that the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after “0:00” indicating 0 second is obtained as a result of the countdown. , The iron plate image TP) is performed, but after “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, another effect display (for example, “iron plate” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed). Display in a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as “chance”. You may comprise so that effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Further, the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but displays up to “1” indicating 1 second, or , “00:01” may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as “iron plate” can be specified in the display area where the timer display has been performed, or “chance” is displayed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until “1” is displayed, until just before another effect display is displayed, or until another effect display is displayed. ). The time from when “1” is displayed until the display of another effect display is started is the same (substantially the same) as the time from when “2” is displayed until the display of “1” is started. (That is, it is displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”) or may be different. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating “NEXT” or “continuation” may be displayed as another effect display. In addition, a timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, but after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, another display is displayed. (For example, a display indicating that the timer display is counted up from 0 or a display related to the timer display such as “until the next chance increases, after”) is displayed. You may comprise so that another display may not be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect is a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In each effect example shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIGS. 393 (c1) to (c3) are effects following FIG. 393 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (c1), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 393 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in a region different from the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed is shown by the display by numbers in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numbers. Note that only a decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is first performed, and for example, when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds, a countdown by a timer display may be started. In this case, the decrease rate of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. In addition, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided, each of which may be displayed in a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decrease rate of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decrease rate of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the decreasing speeds thereof are different.

  Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed. For example, when the effect is extended, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer notice time. Moreover, the decreasing speed of the meter may not be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long. For example, the rate of decrease may be increased from the middle, so that it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Moreover, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant. For example, the rate of decrease may be faster or slower in a state where numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 394 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 394 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 391 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 394 (a2) to (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (a4) performs the combined animation and displays A pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as button production introduction animation or fade-in animation (IN animation). This semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started by being combined. Here, the introduction animation may be included in the button notice effect. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button images 136q are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which the four translucent button images 136q are combined may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are displayed. The button image 136a is instantiated and the button notice effect is more easily started when the effect that the four translucent button images 136q are combined is performed than when the effect that the image 136q is combined is performed. It may be. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation. In addition, when a deca button image 136aL, which will be described later, is displayed and a button notice effect is started, a merge animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by a translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalesced animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are shown closer together.

  When the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 394 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a character “press” is displayed together with an animation indicating that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is further left below. A time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button notice effect may be started after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation reception period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button notice effect is started.

  FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 394 (b4) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation starts when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced. In addition, even if the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the timer display may be counted down in accordance with the start of the combined animation. According to this, there is a case where the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed can be easily specified. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the display of the image being prepared RDY may be terminated and the timer notice effect may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (b5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be “0:00” after the merge animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the merge animation is completed.

  FIG. 394 (b6) shows a state in which the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed when both the timer notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer notice effect and the united animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 394 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (b3) to (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 394 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  If the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 394 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 394 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 394 (b6), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 394 is also shown for an example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and the timer notice starts while the introductory animation is displayed.

  FIG. 395 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 395 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a). In this preparing image RDY, the background color is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 395 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 395 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a red light emission mode is set in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (b), the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY in preparation is started. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation other than the super reach is finished.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (c), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 395 (c), “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. The background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, a state in which the timer notice production is started before the super reach is developed is shown. The timer display that is displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of “90:00”, and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, so that the expectation for the big hit may be improved. Thus, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as “90:00”, the time is relatively short such as “10:00”. It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed with (short time). In this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to be started in a long time in the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 395 (d) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. For this reason, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to view because the family crest member 224E is overlapped. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (d), the timer display is “30:00”.

  FIG. 395 (e) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation starts when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be the same when the timer notice display is the default background color and when it is the red background color.

  FIG. 395 (g) shows that the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed to start the operation acceptance state. Yes. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it is to win.

  FIG. 396 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 396 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and a ready image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1). This preparing image RDY has a green background and is in a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 396 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 396 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and the hit hit area is hit with an arrow to increase the reliability of the big hit High notice is being made. In this production example, a state in which a mini game is being performed before the transition to super reach is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a4), a state in which an arrow emitted by Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the change icon h0. The notice by is ranked up. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Note that the crest character 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the family crest character 224E emits red light. The change icon h0 may change from a red display mode to a gold display mode after changing to a mode or a gold light emission mode, or the timing at which the change icon h0 changes from a red display mode to a gold display mode Thus, the family crest member 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation using the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to a state where it cannot be visually recognized using the shutter image. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game. However, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a6), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image shows a state in which the shutter image is opened. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini-game may be started. Alternatively, a grayed-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 396 (b1) to (b8), an example will be described in which a mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b1), since one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is in a red display mode and is displayed as a notice. The hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord of the character is described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 396 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b2), a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b3), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of a mini-game to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b4), the shutter image is shown open in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game starts is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game starts without displaying the image RDY in preparation. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (a3) to (a7), and thus the description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game is over, explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or grayed out display may be performed.

  FIG. 397 is a diagram showing stepwise display examples in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 397 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 397 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 397 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. That is, it can be said that display (shutter image display) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain region (tutorial display section TT1). . Note that at least part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display that is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a4), the shutter image is shown open in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display made up of the characters “Intense heat” is displayed instead of the image RDY being prepared, the mini game, and the timer notice effect. The notice display of “Intense heat” may be displayed as a result of a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, if the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed as a result, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed. Good. In addition, the notice display of “extreme heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform an effect of closing the tutorial display portion TT1 with a shutter image before performing a notice display such as “Intense heat”.

  FIGS. 397 (b1) to (b8) show an example of an effect showing how a notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (a1) to (a3), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 shows a state in which a timer notice notice icon I81 appears to notify that the timer notice effect is performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is foretold that the timer notice effect is performed. Other notice icons may appear, for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81 and 135 (d) may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b5), the timer notice notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 jumps out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b6), the closing operation using the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b7), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the state in which the timer notice notice icon I81 is displayed is informed that the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. The image may be deleted when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a ready image RDY when the shutter image is released. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the image RDY being prepared is in a default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed when the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer notice effect is notified by displaying the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display mode of the image being prepared RDY for notifying the start of the timer preview effect is the same as the display mode of the image RDY being prepared for notifying the start of the mini game. It may be. In addition, a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started without displaying the in-preparation image RDY.

  FIG. 398 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timing of a certain notice display, and the start and end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

  FIG. 398 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 392 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391 (m), and a description thereof will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 398 (a1), display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has been developed to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a2), the duel scene animation continues, and then, as shown in FIG. A combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is still displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is being made. In order to congratulate that it is a big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display manner that emits light in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the timer notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed, and a notice effect is started. Yes. The display of the character “Go” may or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a8), a state where the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot symbol promotion effect may not be started, and when the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer notice effect. Further, even when the timer notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (a9), the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained from the combination of the ornamental symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. It is notified that the probabilistic big hit has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIGS. 398 (b1) to (b4) show a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started during the continuation of the duel scene animation in the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b1), a state in which the duel scene animation continues is shown. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b1), “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Note that the time when the countdown is started may be before the development of super reach, after the development of super reach, or at the timing of development of super reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b2), a button notice effect is started, and a state in which a button image 136a in a default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. . That is, a state in which the final judge effect is started is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b2), the timer display indicates “9:00”. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is performed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is shown. Here, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b4), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continued, that is, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may be performed after that. In this effect example, the timer display is not set to “0:00” even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Conversely, the count may be zero when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect.

  FIG. 399 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 399 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 397 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY in preparation. In the preparation example image RDY in this effect example, only one type of display mode is prepared, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . In this effect example, one of the background colors in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 399 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In addition, before or after the timer display countdown starts, an effect may be performed in which the background color of the timer notice display changes and the reliability is improved in the middle.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer preview display is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (d) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. It should be noted that the reach state may be reached after the timer display becomes “0:00”, the timer display may become “0:00” after the reach state is reached, or the timer display is “ The reach state may be reached at the time of “0:00”. In this production example, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a corresponding relationship with the display indicating that the timer display is developed to super reach, and the display always develops to super reach.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display section TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display portion TT1 is in a non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there is a case where the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 399 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 399 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (k) shows a state in which the princess cut-in image HCI is displayed. This princess cut-in image HCI is displayed suddenly without going through the button notice effect, timer notice effect, or mini-game, and has low reliability, but the button notice effect or timer notice effect or You may make it display as a result of having played the mini game. Further, instead of the princess cut-in image HCI, for example, an iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 400 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 400A to 400C are the same as those in FIGS. 399A to 399C, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 400 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which a Tono-sama character as a navigation character throws a bomb is performed. Specifically, the character of Tono-sama displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming “not yet”, and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol display. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb heads to the tutorial display portion TT1 where the timer display is being counted down, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (e), the state in which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY in preparation is displayed again is shown. At the time when the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is “10:00”, and the timing at which the button notice effect is started is notified, but when the timer notice effect is interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is performed than when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is not performed. When an effect that interrupts the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time until the timer counts up by extending the timer display time instead of displaying the image RDY in preparation may be extended. Good or the countdown speed may be slow. In addition, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future is determined by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (f), a state in which the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 400 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect is successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 400 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden.

  FIG. 400 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (k), a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the image RDY in preparation to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the restart is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 400 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start timing of the timer notice effect is set to an appropriate timing. For example, before the start of super reach, after the start of super reach, before reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the super reach starts. May also be started at the previous timing. In addition, the timer display when the timer notice effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and may be started from “9:00” indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (n), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 399, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not developed to super reach, and the cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good location in super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher as the end timing of the image RDY in preparation (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain fluctuation.

  FIG. 401 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 401 (a) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY in preparation. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image being prepared RDY, or may be displayed after the image being prepared RDY is displayed. You may make it produce that it is performed twice, thinking that it will be performed once. Instead of displaying “TIMER × 2”, for example, two images RDY in preparation may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the default display mode in which the background color of the timer notice display is green may be used. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (d) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been consumed and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER × 2” may be left without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed may be provided.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (e) displays “Go” in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and displays a certain notice display. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative design. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock for the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing. At this time, the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started. However, when the ready image RDY is displayed again, the first ready image RDY is displayed. It is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the decorative design may be overlapped by the preparing image RDY. In this way, there is a case where the image RDY being prepared is temporarily hidden and further overlapped, thereby causing more attention.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 401 (i), shifts to super reach. Display is made and it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the family crest member 224E overlaps with a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to see than a state where it is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E. Note that the image RDY in preparation may be overlapped with the family crest actor 224E only when it is enlarged and not overlapped when it is not enlarged. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 401 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the preparation-in-progress image RDY that is enlarged may be displayed even during execution of super reach. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (k), a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the preparatory image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 401 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “3:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer preview display is set to be the same as the size of the preparatory image RDY that is displayed in an enlarged manner. The symbols are easy to confirm. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Moreover, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed enlarged. Also, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer for the second timer notice effect than for the first timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, there may be a case where it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by informing in advance that the timer notice effect will be performed twice.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY is digested, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variation display. Shown to be digested.

  FIG. 402 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 402 (a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 398 (a1) to (a2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a3), a state is shown in which the display of the long press effect by the long press effect display is started. In the long press effect display, an area where the Tono-sama character is drawn is arranged above, and an area where the swordsman character is drawn below is arranged. According to the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136 , The size of both areas is displayed so as to change relatively. The ready image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 402 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display coincide. Note that they do not have to match completely. The timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 402 (a5) shows a state where the player has performed a long press operation on the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is “4:00”.

  FIG. 402 (a6) shows a state in which the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is reduced accordingly, This character is shown to be dominant. This has been suggested to tend to produce advantageous results. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a7), the timer display is “0:00”, the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Also, in the effect display for long press, the area where the Tono-sama character arranged above is further expanded, and the area where the swordsman character arranged below is further reduced, It has been shown that Tonosama's character is by far the dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or “Go” may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character “is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a8), the character “Blow” is displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is started, and the operation is effective. It shows how the period has been set again. That is, this button notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the set operation valid period may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously after the operation valid period in the long press effect. May be.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a10), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light-emitting manner so as to congratulate that it is a big hit.

  Thus, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the preparation display and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Thus, “0:00” is shown, and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

  FIGS. 402 (b1) to (b5) show a state in which a long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but a timer notice effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed. A state in which a long press operation is performed is shown. In this example, the timer notice effect is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 402 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, a Tono-like character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged, indicating that Tono-sama's character is inferior (adversary character swordsman character dominance) . This suggests that it is difficult to achieve advantageous results.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b3), the character “Blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, thereby providing a button notice effect. It is shown that the operation valid period has been set again. As described above, when the timer notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL is not easily displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b5), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman. The combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration “decoration 5—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. Note that the flow may be a case where it does not go through the mini game or the timer notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 403 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of button striking effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of “set the meter to MAX within the time by button striking” is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the letters “preparation”, and an operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), before the start of receiving the continuous operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is a display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button striking effect). When the button repeated striking effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been subjected to the variable display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced manner. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 403 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (b), a state in which the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started is shown. Specifically, the character “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is changed to the character “start”, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, so that the operation effective period is started. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can also be said that the button repeated effect (the main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed as the time from the operation effective period decreases, and on the right side of the button image 136a, A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (c), “5” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. When the countdown in the countdown display is completed, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 403 (d) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (d), “4” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (e), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the operation amount meter MT11 has one red memory according to the number of repeated striking operations. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (e), “3” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (f), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 403 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 403 (g) shows a state in which the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, the operation valid period is over, and the player has repeatedly performed the effect button 136. In addition, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red three, that is, it is indicated that the button striking effect has failed. The effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, but the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation effective period ends, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button repeated strike effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (h) displays "Sorry ..." to notify that the button repeated strike effect has failed. In this example, in a pachinko machine that can execute a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display.

  FIG. 404 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 404 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 404 (a), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The function of the first image RDY being prepared is the same as that of the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 404 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In this example, the second image RDY is displayed above the first image RDY1, and a plurality of images are displayed at the same time. The first preparation image RDY1 and the second preparation image RDY2 are each provided with a corresponding effect (such as a timer notice effect or a mini game). These images in preparation (the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2) function as pre-reading notices. In addition, any of the images being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed after the other image is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 404 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 404 (b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 404 (a) is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. Note that the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these images being prepared are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. Note that the background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display is “5:00”, and it is reported that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this effect example, when one of a plurality of images in preparation is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all other images in preparation are digested. Note that the images in preparation are all digested in one symbol variation display, but the notice icon may be carried over until the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 404 (d) shows a state in which the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 404 (e), the characters “Go” are displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (f), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, and the second image RDY2 is slid downward and moved to the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. Image moving animation is being made in preparation. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 391 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In addition, in this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may start after the preceding start notice effect starts, or the advance start notice effect may start after the image moving animation in preparation starts, The image moving animation in preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice effect starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 404 (f) overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared, but may be overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (g), the pending change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 has thrown a shuriken toward the change icon h0 and hit the change icon h0. Has been. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the state is difficult to visually recognize compared to the state where the effect EF4 is not covered.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display form to a red display form, and the change notice is started.

  FIG. 404 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and then the state shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the second image RDY2 in preparation. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  FIG. 404 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is continuously maintained. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (k), the second notice image RDY2 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 404 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. Note that the timer notice display is a default display mode at the start of display, and there is a case where a promotion display such as a change to a golden background color is performed after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). Also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 405 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects by explanation display applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 405 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Tono-sama's master” to “Tosama is Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the above-described opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variation display, when the explanation display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed.

  FIG. 405 (b1) to FIG. 405 (b3) show a state in which opening / closing display using a shutter image is performed when the explanation display is switched. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display portion TT1 based on the shutter image is completely closed, and an explanation display of “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. The state of being done is shown. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preview display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Although it was expected that the notice display would be started by such an effect, the display of the shutter image could be opened and closed by disappointing the player because the explanation display was made without the notice display being started. You may be able to have expectations.

  FIG. 406 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 406 (a1) to FIG. 406 (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 391 (e). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (a1) to (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to (g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 406 (a3), the effect EF4 is deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the default display mode. . In this way, a failure effect that does not change the display mode even when the pending change animation described above with reference to FIG. 391 may be performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the pending change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the pending icon changes varies depending on the characters appearing in the pending change animation.

  In the above-described pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI part UI3 to display the UI. The portion UI3 may not overlap. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

  FIG. 407 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 407 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 407 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a2), a state in which a roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal sections. A cocoon region is arranged above the three sections, a princess region is arranged at the lower left, and a little princess region is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, each region is displayed in a flashing manner by blinking in red, and a notice display corresponding to the region that is finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation-in-progress display or the like ends may be the same or different. In a configuration in which a display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed may be the same as the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a prefetch notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, a state in which all areas are lit in red is shown. That is, it is informed that a notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, a notice display corresponding to the princess character, and a notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparatory image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a5), the princess Chibi character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. Thereby, it is informed that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Chibi princess starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a6), a state is shown in which an animation in which the little girl character CHM casts an object toward the variation icon h0 is performed. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH is a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a7), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a8), display is started in a manner in which the frog character GII vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a9), the mini-game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a10), the drum DRM is displayed in a stopped state, and the symbol displaying the characters “Intense heat” is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit. Yes. In other words, the change notice is made by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that makes a big hit announcement.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a11), display is started in such a manner that the princess character HME vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3, the display of the UI part UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a12), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed in the area where the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. When the result of the countdown is “0:00”, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a13), as a result of the countdown being performed, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that an effect similar to the display of “Go” shown in FIG. 404 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a14), the super reach transition display is performed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach. However, at least one image may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, an iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 407 (b1) shows a state in which only the eyelid area of the three areas is lit in red in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 407 (a2). In other words, only the notice display corresponding to the frog character is prepared among the notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character. Informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only a mini game by the drum DRM is performed.

  FIG. 408 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 408 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and below the third preparing image RDY3, two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed. Note that when a plurality of effects by the samurai character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed on one image being prepared. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess characters HME. Conversely, a single character may be used to display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 moves upward and appears in the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. The overlapping state is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the princess Chibi character CHM1 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a4), a state is shown in which an animation in which the little girl character CHM1 casts an object toward the variation icon h0 is performed. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display is started due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of the princess Chibi.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a5), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It shows how it overlaps with the part. Thereby, it is informed that the second notice display corresponding to Princess Chibi character CHM2 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a7), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the Princess Chibi character CHM2 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variation icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a8), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display form of the gold notice, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIG. 408 (b1) to FIG. 408 (b4) show another example of effects following FIG. 408 (a3). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 408 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b2), after the object cast by the princess Chibi character CHM1 reaches the variation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the dark display BL in which the entire display screen is darkened is displayed. The portion where the effect EF7 was displayed shines in white, and the display in such a manner that the light extends horizontally from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some images in preparation are temporarily hidden. You may make it do. As described above, the state where the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. In this production example, the first state where the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state where the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are referred to as the first state. From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after becoming the first state again, may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b3), a state is shown in which the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 408 (b4), the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 408 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408 (a5), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 408 (c1) to (c3) show another example of effects following FIG. 407 (a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 408 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c2), the display in a manner in which the character GII of the heel is vibrating is started, and “Go” is displayed in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. A character is displayed to notify that a mini game is started. It should be noted that the display of “Go” may start after the heel character GII starts vibrating, or the heel character GII may start vibrating after the display of “Go” starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the samurai character GII starts to vibrate. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the region where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect due to the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after “Go” is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without displaying “Go”. . Further, it may be more likely that the mini game will be a big hit than the case where the mini game is enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same region, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There may be an effect.

  FIG. 409 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on the right effect display may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 409 (a), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), an image RDY being prepared is displayed. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 409 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into left and right parts, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, “Chibi princess is in SP reach with annihilation” is displayed, and Chibi princess Musou directing is performed with the mission of annihilating a large number of children. In the display area CUR, “Tono is going to SP reach with victory” is displayed, and the drinking comparison is performed between the niece and Tono-sama and the mission is that Ton-sama wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, it is configured to shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. Has been. In addition, after the Chibi Hime Musou production is started, the drinking comparison production may be started, after the Drinking Comparison production is started, the Chibi Hime Musou production may be started, or both productions start simultaneously May be. Further, in this production example, when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, it may be a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (c), a state in which a mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 is shown during the execution of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect. Yes. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (d), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI on which the character “chance” is displayed in the left-hand notice display area CUL in which the Chibi princess Musou effect is performed is displayed. Thus, it is notified that the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed has been easily achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area in which the notice display is performed do not coincide with each other, and it may be possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of incongruity. . The chance up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance is increased in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. A cut-in image WUI may be displayed. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed when the mini game is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (f), a state is shown in which the child is completely annihilated and the mission is achieved in the Chibi Hime Musou effect displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (g), the character “completely annihilated” is displayed together with the indication of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission of the Princess Chibi Musou effect has been achieved. Is informed. In the right notice display area CUR, the drinking comparison effect continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (h), the state that the lord won the bowl and the mission was achieved in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (i), the word “Victory” is displayed together with the display of Tono-sama in the right-hand notice display area CUR to notify that the mission of the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (j), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, so Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of Tonama. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it shifts to Swordsman Reach, but Princess Chibi does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If you fail to complete the mission, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be developed afterwards differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed is displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. As a result, although the reliability of the jackpot is improved, it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not a notice display started via a mini-game or timer notice effect that was started from the image RDY being prepared. ing.

  410 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 409 (a) to (b), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (c), a state is shown in which the effects of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect are performed. In this effect example, the display of the image RDY in preparation is continued, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 410 (c) to FIG. In FIG. 410 (e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 410 (f) to (j) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 410 (f) to (j) show that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in contrast to the effects shown in FIGS. 409 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except for it, explanation is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (k), the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is terminated, and a notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that it will start.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (l), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (m), a state in which an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

  FIG. 411 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 411 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a2), a “reach when caught” display is performed, and a state in which a chase effect with the mission of catching Echigoya is started is shown. Yes. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a3), the state that Tono-sama is close to Echigoya is shown. On the other hand, in the sub-window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a4), the state that Tono-sama caught Echigoya and the mission was achieved is shown. Thereby, it will be notified that it will reach. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that the reach is being prepared. Thereby, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a5), the chasing effect is ended, the main display displayed in the sub-window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and thereafter, the “decoration 4” is reached. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is indicated that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase production. In addition, when displaying the main display in full screen, it may be performed by enlarging the subwindow WP3 (wipe display), or may be switched and displayed. Further, when the main display becomes a full screen display, the image RDY in preparation may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2) show another effect example related to the display of the subwindow during the execution of the chasing effects shown in FIGS. 411 (a1) to (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 411 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. Further, the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 411 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, there are cases where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

  FIGS. 411 (c1) to (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 411 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (c2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, among the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first image RDY1 displayed at the position where it has been displayed is deleted.

  FIGS. 411 (d1) to (d2) show the display mode of the image under preparation when the background display is displayed with an inclination. The effect example shown in FIG. 411 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees counterclockwise. The situation is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display.

  FIG. 412 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 412 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and a character “A” indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a3), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini-game is started, “Striking” is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display indicating that the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is performed. In other words, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a4), a state in which the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a6), the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIG. 412 (b1) to FIG. 4 (b8) illustrate another effect example of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and raises the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. In this way, the display is shown. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter “B” indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this production example, it is easier for the mission to succeed when the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, when the mini game succeeds in the second step-up display unit SUB, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed, rather than in the case where the mini game succeeds in the first step-up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b4), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, the message “Cup in” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of Tono is putting is performed. In other words, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a pad.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b5), a state where the Tono-sama character puts and the golf ball moves toward the cup is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b6), the golf ball is cupped in and the state where the mission is achieved is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . It is reported that the image RDY in preparation has a red background color and high reliability of the big hit.

  When the bowling chance game is finished, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, the example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins have not collapsed is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a mission failure may be notified by displaying a state in which the player has not cuped in. Also, in this production example, the Tono-sama character appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when a princess character appears, the Tono-sama character appeared. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

  FIG. 413 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 412. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 413 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 412 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain item in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is erased, The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA starts to be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (a3) to (a5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (a3) to (a5) are not shown on the tutorial display section TT1 and the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (a3) to (a5). The description is omitted because it is the same except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a6), it is continuously shown that the mission has been achieved.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. Note that the explanation display and the change icon h0 remain hidden.

  Then, in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown to FIG. 413 (a8), a mode that the fluctuation | variation icon h0 is redisplayed in the display mode of red is shown. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. Note that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be routed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

  FIGS. 413 (b1) to (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 413 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 413 (a1), but differs in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (b2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed in spite of the hold icon h11 moving upward in the UI part UI3. Therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display part SUA. The situation is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

  In FIG. 413 (b3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “Make Strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 414 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 414 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 414 (a). Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 414 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Moreover, in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown to Fig.414 (a), a mode that it transfers to a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 414 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 414 (b) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 frames out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 414 (d) to (f), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 is not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 414 (f).

  FIG. 414 (g) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (i) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (j), a state where the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and goes toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (l), it is notified that the image RDY being prepared appears in the lower right corner of the display screen and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is done. Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Further, FIG. 414 (l) shows a state where the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and goes out of the frame. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 414 (m), at least one image is displayed until the frame out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

  FIG. 415 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 415 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1), the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 415 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 415 (a2) shows a state in which the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a3), a state in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is out of the display screen is started is shown. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 415 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variation icon h0 and the first image RDY1 in preparation are not out of frame together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state of the variation icon h0 is lowered and the display position is lowered as shown in FIG. The first display image RDY1 is maintained, and the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  FIG. 415 (a7) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. Note that the first image RDY1 in preparation may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be lifted, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a9), a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first image RDY1 being prepared, and is more difficult to see than when not overlapped. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a10), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and goes toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of images in preparation are displayed in a certain area and a new image in preparation is displayed, the new image in preparation is displayed in another area. Can do. Note that the third preparatory image RDY3 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Also, as shown in FIGS. 415 (a12) to (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIGS. 415 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing other display modes of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 415 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 415 (a3). Further, the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 415 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (b2), a state in which the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed is shown. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the change icon h0 is placed is maintained in a manner in which the display position is lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 416 is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-continuous effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 416 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 416 (a1), an image RDY in preparation is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 416 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, with “decoration 6” on the left symbol and “decoration 7” on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. In addition, the middle symbol is in the variable display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a3), the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of Tono-sama's symbols is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a4), a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a5), the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation that produces whether or not the pseudo-ream starts is started. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI part UI3 leaves the frame by the UI part FO animation, leaving the change icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol design is started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Moreover, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo-continuous production or when a pseudo-series is established. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol expands in the horizontal direction as shown in FIGS. 416 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to visually recognize. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbols are further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. The pseudo-continuous symbols are also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the Tono-sama character displayed at 208N and the second reserved number display. At this time, the family crest character 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 416 (a8), the family crest member 224E rotates, and a sound “don” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 416 (a9) shows that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been. It should be noted that the UI part FI animation may be started after the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation has ended, the UI part FI animation may be started before the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. Note that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-pseudo-continuous symbols-decoration 7”, and then the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. The

  FIGS. 416 (b1) to (b3) show an example of display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 416 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 416 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 416 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are dark-displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It shows a state in which the approximate center shines and light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during the dark display by the stechen effect. In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the image RDY being prepared is not displayed in the dark display by the stechen effect is also shown. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may end and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

  In FIG. 416 (b3), the state where the Stechen effect is finished is shown. In this effect example, after the stechen effect is ended, the same display as before the start of the stechen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

  FIG. 417 is a diagram showing an example of a button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), the UI part UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part UI3. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 417 (a), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 417 (a). Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 417 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI part UI3 is displayed even during execution of the swordsman reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen. Is moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of the semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 417 (c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. FIG. 417 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. It should be noted that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, or the effect at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (d), the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance state. It shows how it started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during a period in which the button notice effect is performed by at least the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

  FIG. 418 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Also, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Stopped display with a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern 284a1 is also lit in a display mode of loss. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 416 (a1) has a notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 418 (a2) shows a state in which the symbol is being stopped and displayed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI decorative wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a3). , The Tono-like character riding on the motorcycle enters the frame from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 418 (a3) to (a5), is shown to run toward the right end. . That is, in this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the preview display mode to the default display mode, and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 displays the production. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be naturally changed. For example, when the display is lost due to the super reach effect and the display is returned to the original display, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a6), the appearance by the Tono-sama character in the UI part wipe display part WP4 is finished, and the UI part wipe display part WP4 is deleted. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is deleted and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the base on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes h1 and becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In this example, the UI part wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the image RDY being prepared is displayed, the image RDY being prepared is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the image RDY being prepared is displayed soon. The mini-game or timer notice effect may be started after finishing.

  FIGS. 418 (b1) to (b4) show examples of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (b1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 418 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, a family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 418 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves his line of sight from the top of the head to the feet. It shows how the swordsman character is scrolled. Also, as shown in FIG. 418 (b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the crown. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling.

  In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or when only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display using the UI unit UI3 is used. It can be said that an example of performing is shown.

  FIG. 419 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 100 to which the example of production shown in FIG. 419 can be applied can be assigned, for example, to a first special figure start opening and a second special figure start opening per start opening, and in a normal gaming state. There are so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) that can hold 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given using a MAX8 machine as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. Four hold icons are arranged in front and back in a staggered arrangement so that eight hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), a total of seven variable displays in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are held, so seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is provided. It has been broken. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 419 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

  In addition, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 419 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight special figure 1 and special figure 2 holds have been put on hold. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon h0 that are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the heel imitating the face of the heel. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, an example of an effect that changes the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 all at once when the reserve is full is shown. In this example effect, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the bag may be notified.

  FIG. 419 (b1) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 419 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (b1). It is informed that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 419 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight special figure and special figure 2 holds have been put on hold. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held, four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a voice “Pong” to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 419 (b3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the production of the swordsman reach is terminated, and the display is returned to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the swordsman reach became full during the performance of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are displayed. Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bag. In this production example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden by the super reach, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed. The example of the effect which changes a display mode is shown.

  FIGS. 419 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effects shown in FIGS. 419 (b1) to (b3). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 419 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 419 (b1) to (b2), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 419 (c3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Moreover, in this production example, while the execution of the production of the swordsman reach has become full, the display of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full fill is achieved. A character “MAX” indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the change icon h0. Thereafter, the symbols are fixedly displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are not changed.

  After that, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 419 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the bag display mode. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (c4), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation is displayed.

  FIG. 420 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 420 (a1) to FIG. 420 (a3) and FIG. 420 (b1) to FIG. 420 (b2) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 420 (a1) to FIG. 420 (a3) and FIG. 420 (b1) to FIG. 420 (b2), the UI part UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display part TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 420 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 420 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224F and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a2) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a3) shows a state where the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth image RDY4 being prepared. The fourth preparatory image RDY4 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which an image in preparation is displayed in each of a plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

  FIG. 420 (b1) to FIG. 420 (b2) are diagrams showing another example of effects following FIG. 420 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 420 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 420 (a2), the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (b2), the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. A state of being displayed at a position shifted upward is shown. That is, a state where the image being prepared overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed is shown. Such a display mode can also be applied to the tutorial display unit TT4.

  420 (c1) to FIG. 420 (c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 420 (c1) is an effect following FIG. 140 (c). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 420 (c1) to (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (d) to (g), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 420 (c5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 420 (c6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, and the effect EF2 is displayed in which a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 explodes. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. Thereby, a notice may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and the player may have a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . This in-preparation image RDY has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY in preparation, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. .

  FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 154 (b-1) to (b-5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are set as default display modes. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT7. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display section ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the family crest member 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the hold icon display area is shown being enlarged. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the image RDY being prepared displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display part TT7 is separated and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY in preparation may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 421 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 421 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the ready image RDY is displayed in a manner in which it is accommodated in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

  FIGS. 421 (b1) to (b2) show other forms of the production examples shown in FIGS. 421 (a1) to (a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 421 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 421 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (b2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 421 (a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 421 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 to 424. Here, FIG. 422 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 424 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. FIG. The display position of the warning message for the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is a fixed location, but it is possible to appropriately set which position is the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. Note that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower pan full state is eliminated and the ball removal error is eliminated. Moreover, although the example of an effect shown below shows about the example of a ball removal error display, it is applicable also to the door open error etc. which generate | occur | produce when the front frame door 106 is opened, for example. Further, when a ball removal error display is being performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 422 (a1) to (a2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 391 (c) to (d). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a1), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping the part of the tutorial display portion TT1 that is closed by the shutter image is shown. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed, and it is urged to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate and cancel the full state of the lower plate.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY in preparation is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image RDY in preparation are simultaneously viewed and the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 422 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 393 (c1) to (c2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 shows a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is easily visible. Thereby, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 are viewed at the same time, the display of the remaining time meter MT4 may be finished to give a chance to remove the ball.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 422 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but does not overlap the translucent button image 136q related to the combined animation. No appearance is shown. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the combined animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q approaches, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the united animation by looking at the display without the ball. In some cases, it is possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation are viewed at the same time, and when the combined animation is displayed, a chance to remove the ball is given.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 422 (d1) to (d2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 401 (f) to (g). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (d2), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started, but the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed again. Sometimes, the enlarged image RDY is displayed compared to when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparatory image RDY is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped the tutorial display portion TT1 until now. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the enlarged image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, a chance to remove the ball may be given.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 422 (e1) to (e2) are display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 402 (a5) to (a6). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the character of Tono is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (e2), as a result of the player's long pressing operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character who see the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by observing the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority and inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character are simultaneously observed. May be possible.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 422 (f1) to (f2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 404 (e) to (f). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the display area in which the characters “Go” are displayed (the display area in which the first image RDY being prepared is displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f2), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, the second image RDY2 being slid downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. An image moving animation is being prepared. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second image being prepared RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. Accordingly, it may be possible to notice the display of the second ready image RDY2 and the display of the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1, the second image RDY2 being prepared, and the ninja character NJ4 can be simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the second image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball can be given. There is a case.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 423 (a1) to (a2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 407 (a3) to (a4). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps a part of the plurality of images in preparation. Thereby, it may be possible to notice at least one of a plurality of images in preparation (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images in preparation are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image in preparation is finished, a ball removal is given.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 423 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 407 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. In this case, unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 423 (a2), since the image being prepared corresponding to the effect (Chibi princess character CHM) is not displayed, the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed as any display. There is no overlap.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 423 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 409 (b) to (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the approximate center of the left notice display area CUL in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (b). Yes. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished, the ball removal is given.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (d1) to (d2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 411 (b1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 423 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 423 (e1) to (e2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 411 (d1) to (d2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. 411 (d1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise, and a shake vision effect is performed. The state of being broken is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display position or tilting even when the shake vision effect is performed. At this time, since the background image is inclined, the blank portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the sphere removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with this blank portion. For example, when the sphere removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the blank portion, and a part thereof It may be difficult to see.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 423 (f1) to (f2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 412 (a1) to (a2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 412 (a1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as being lifted up from the UI unit UI3. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI part UI3 is enlarged, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part UI3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the UI unit UI3 rise. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 424 (a1) to (a2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 414 (d) to (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 414 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI part UI3 is out of frame by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the UI part UI3.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a2), the UI unit UI3 is shown out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. In this effect example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 to the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is out of the frame by the UI part FO animation.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 424 (b1) to (b2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 418 (a3) to (a5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b1), a state in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4 in the effect example shown in FIG. 418 (a3). It is shown. At this time, the character does not overlap the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI part wipe display part WP4.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b2), a state where the character on the motorcycle moves to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is shown. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI part wipe display part WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 can be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI portion wipe display portion WP3. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball display error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI part wipe display unit WP3 are simultaneously viewed and the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is finished.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 424 (c1) to (c2) are display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 421 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part thereof is over the decorative symbol. The wrapping is shown. Note that there is no overlap with other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c2), a state where the hold icon display area is displayed in an enlarged manner is shown. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 424 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, which relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 424 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the sub-window WP3, and the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. Note that the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the display position is maintained. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area change effect in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display form in the hold icon display area is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball is given. May be possible.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 424 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1) is a display mode in which the display “please remove the ball” is surrounded by a square frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2), and the display of “Please remove the ball” is outlined on a black background. It is set as the aspect represented by these.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described. Needless to say, even the pachinko machine 100 having only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 425 to FIG. 462 are diagrams showing staged effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 425 to 462, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. 425 to 462 show the pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208, but with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the embodiment described above. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 425 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 426 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 427 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 426 step by step. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 425 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 425 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 425 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. It is displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 425 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), and thus it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232 This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 425 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the object of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal fraction less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 425 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a “timer activation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (5) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “09: 0” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (5). In addition, the word “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (6), “01:25” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “07:25” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , The word “attention on hold” is displayed to alert the change on hold, and the hold change animation is started on the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It is notified that there is sex. Note that the hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be “00:00”, or the hold-change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. The countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “06: 00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 425 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “change on hold” is displayed, and it is informed that a pre-reading notice has been made due to the change in hold. In addition, after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, the character display of “hold change” may be performed, or after the character display of “hold change” is performed, the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. Alternatively, the character display of “hold change” may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is still continued, and “05:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (8). The second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display form of the hold icon h11 is changed after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode) than the case where it is not performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (9) shows that the timer display countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11. At the timing shown in FIG. 425 (9), “05: 11 "is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Pending change completed” is displayed together with a panda icon PND indicating that a change in hold has been made. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which an effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer notice effect being notified is indicated by an icon. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “I'm still there” is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that further notice display by the timer notice effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “What”, and the expectation of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed is expressed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (12), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “pseudo-ream!” Is displayed, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. However, after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped.

  Thus, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and one timer notice display (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a prefetch notice. Also, in this effect example, the timing at which the timer notice display starts to be displayed for each of the plurality of timer notice effects is shown differently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 425 (13), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous may be started, or after the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous is started. Then, the first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (14), it is shown that the second variation of the decorative symbol is displayed by the pseudo-ream. Then, a replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that a pseudo-continuous effect has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 425 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 425 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach and shows that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Timer advance notice by SP development” are displayed, and the mission effect indicating that the timer advance notice effect is started by developing to super reach is started. Is also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the timer notice effect is started and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, there is a case where it can be expected that the timer notice effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (19) following FIG. 425 (18), a state in which normal reach is continuously performed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” during the normal reach, and the transition of the “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is not achieved. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the shift to the super reach is not made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 426 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuations of fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased, and the “sorry” character displayed near the navigation character YM is also erased. Note that the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative pattern shake fluctuation starts, or the decorative pattern shake fluctuation occurs after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased. The panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts. Also, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased simultaneously or sequentially one by one.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 426 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (23), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (24) shows that two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. In this effect example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. In the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, “30:00” is displayed as a timer display, and an effect starts when 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. It suggests. The fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen displays “10:00” as the timer display, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, a certain effect is started. Suggests that In this example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start counting down at the same time, there are certain effects both when 10 seconds have elapsed and when 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Has been suggested to start. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have passed may be the same as a certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed, or differently. Also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer notice display each start countdown (subtraction display). At the timing shown in FIG. 426 (25), the third timer notice display TM13 “29:45” is displayed, and “09:45” is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “attention to the timer” is displayed to alert the timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (26), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (26), “28:02” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, “08:02” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Note that the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (27), “27:75” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, “06:75” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 426 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (28), “25:23” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, “05:23” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (29), normal reach is started and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. In addition, the character “Sooner” is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 may be counted up and the notice effect may be started soon. Has been. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (29), “23:16” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, “03:16” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (30), the normal reach is continuously performed. Note that the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (30), “21:80” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, “01:80” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 426 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, a large amount of Sabohani characters SBHN crosses in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan group notice will be held. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a great expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is performed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (31), a strong scallop group notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a strong savory group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong savory group notice is an example of a certain effect. The Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (31).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (32), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which develops to super reach. Is informed. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and “18:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (32).

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (33), the screen is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a savory icon SBH is displayed to notify that the savory group notice has been executed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “12:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (33).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “timer attention” is displayed to alert the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and “11:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (34).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (35) shows that the timer notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display in the third timer notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 426 (36), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is decreased, and “03:00” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

  After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong design image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (37) following FIG. 426 (36). . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is an example of a certain effect.

  Thus, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both of the timer notice displays (the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14) are being executed. A state of functioning as a notice regarding display (the notice of change) is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 427 (38), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character, Mr. Tono, defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”. In this example of the effect, an example in which an effect (notice effect) executed as a result of performing the timer notice effect may not be notified by an icon is shown. Here, an icon may be used to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (39) shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 427 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final display with the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 428 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 429 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. is there. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 428 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Is done. Three or more timer notice effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, “16:00” is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. ing. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side displays “03:00” as the timer display, and a certain effect starts when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Suggests. In this example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start to count down simultaneously, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds have elapsed and when 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Suggested to be started. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 3 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 16 seconds have elapsed may or may not be the same. Also good.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM11, TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (4), “14:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. In addition, “01:75” is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state where 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 428 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. Thus, a character “pre-reading mode entry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a state in which the pre-reading mode is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the pre-reading mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the second timer notice display TM12 being performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 428 (6), the second timer notice display TM 12 is deleted, and “prefetch mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It has been reported that it has entered. At this time, the “prefetch mode entry” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is deleted. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “12:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “08:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “07: 0” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 428 (10). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4”. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “05:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (11), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. The hold icon that has moved and displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 and was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (11). Note that the look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (12), the characters “attention on hold” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started on the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:80” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 428 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11. Further, a character “change on hold” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. Thus, in this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, a pre-reading notice according to a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the target of the pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice effect An example is shown for display purposes. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, but the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 is changed. After the display becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change, or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the first timer notice display TM11. The timer display at may be “00:00”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 428 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. In addition, the “suspended change” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of shaking. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (19) following FIG. 428 (18), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change. Note that the look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 429 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (23), a state in which the strong scallop group notice is performed is shown. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “group occurrence” character is displayed to notify that the savory group notice has been made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (24), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach is developed. Is informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 429 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the Tono-sama character. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the head is not arranged around the character “game” in the speech balloon, and the hit is larger than the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with “chance”, which indicates that the degree of expectation of the big hit is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 429 (27), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 429 (27), a special ball is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special balls 1 is increased by one, and the special figure 1 hold in the second hold number display is shown. The number display is “1”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (28), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is shown by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 429 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is started simultaneously, and both timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) function as prefetch notices. The state of doing is shown. Further, it is also shown that both timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) function as a pre-read notice for the same symbol variation display.

  Further, in this production example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes “00:00”, but “00:00” when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

  In this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects is started at the same time, but the start timing of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed in the symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. You may make it start after starting. That is, the display start timing of the timer notification display of the plurality of timer notification effects is the same, but the timing of starting the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

  Further, in this effect example, pre-reading notice as a certain effect is started for each different symbol variation display (pre-reading mode, display of the hold icon in the pre-reading display mode), but each pre-reading in the same symbol variation display A notice may be started.

  FIG. 430 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 431 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430 stepwise. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 430 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Is done. Three or more timer notice effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, “06: 00” is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 6 seconds have passed since the countdown started. ing. In addition, the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side displays “10:00” as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. ing. In this example, the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, so that there is a certain effect both when 6 seconds have elapsed and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Suggested to be started. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 6 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed may or may not be the same. Also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 and the second timer preview display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (5), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, in the center of the display screen, the characters “get the item when the princess appears” are displayed. When the princess character appears from the treasure box, a notice item (sometimes called a “notice icon”) may be acquired. It has been suggested that it can be done. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “select with the cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display for selecting the treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL is performed. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (5), “05:60” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “09:60” is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM11. At the timing shown in FIG. 430 (6), “04:37” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “08:37” is displayed.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (7) displays the character “determine right” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the treasure chest image BXR is determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 430 (7), “03:00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “07:00” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “I will open” is displayed to alert attention to the contents of the treasure chest. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 430 (8), “02:50” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “06:50” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, the characters “item get” are displayed, and “nice” is also displayed near the navigation character YM. The word “taze” is displayed, and it is notified that the mini-game has succeeded and the advance notice item has been acquired. This suggests that in the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11, it is guaranteed that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, when the princess character HME appears, the advancement of the notice item is announced as a certain production. At this time, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 430 (9), “01:50” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In the second timer notice display TM12, “05:50” is displayed. In the present embodiment, the countdown by the timer notice effect is performed in this way, and there is a case where the effect can be boosted by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until “00:00”).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as a super reach notice item. The swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. As described above, when the notice item for super reach is displayed, it may be visually easy to understand that super reach is executed. In this example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this example of the effect, an example in which the notice item is displayed as a certain result as a result of the timer notice effect being shown is shown. The swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or after the swordsman character KNG is displayed, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed. The timer display may be “00:00”. Note that the countdown continues in the second timer notice display TM12, and “04:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from “00:00” to “SP waiting”, and this display is started for super reach. Continue until In other words, whether the super reach corresponding to the display of “waiting for SP” in the first timer notice display TM11 and the display of the swordsman character KNG as the notice item occurs at this time in the symbol variation display. It is difficult to determine whether it occurs in the symbol variation display after the next time. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “03:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (12), the characters “Focus on hold” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started on the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “01:80” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 430 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. Further, a character “change on hold” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “hold change”, and a panda character PND is further added. A state of notifying that the display mode has changed is shown. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display shows a state in which the contents of a certain effect that has been executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed are notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, the “suspended change” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 430 (18). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (19) following FIG. 430 (18), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change. The second timer notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer notice display TM11 in which the character “NG on standby” is displayed with the swordsman character KNG added is displayed. Has been continued. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 was a pre-read notice that super reach will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the characters “hot” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 431 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 informs that the digest animation is started and the swordsman character KNG as the notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. The digest animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digest animation of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Then, the digest animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (23), a state in which the strong savory group notice is performed is shown. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “group occurrence” character is displayed to notify that the savory group notice has been made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (24), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which develops to super reach. Is informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 431 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It is informing that the CI 1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 431 (27), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (28), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 431 (29), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the final display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this way, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a plurality of timer notice effects are all executed as a pre-read notice, and there is a certain effect that is executed as a result of performing at least one timer notice effect. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice. In addition, in this production example, since it is determined when any of the timer notice effects is a pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed, the same symbol variation display is displayed. A combination of pre-reading notices that are targeted may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  FIG. 432 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 433 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 432 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 432 (1) to FIG. 15 (15) are the same as FIG. 430 (1) to FIG.

  After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The Then, as shown in FIG. 432 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (18), in the first timer notice display TM11, the digest animation is started, and it is informed that the swordsman character KNG as the notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Is done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example functions as a notice that the super reach is executed in the symbol variation display. In addition, in this effect example, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer notice effects functions as a prefetch notice. In this example, it is shown that it is difficult to discriminate whether a certain effect executed as a result of each of the plurality of timer notice effects is a pre-read notice or a notice in the symbol variation display. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (19) following FIG. 432 (18), “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it will develop into super reach. Yes. In this production example, no savory group notice is given.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 433 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 is silently erased while shifting to super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added along with “chance” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so It suggests that it is up.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (22), a screen in which the main character Tosama defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 433 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Yes. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 433 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, one of a plurality of timer notice effects is executed as a prefetch notice, and the other is designated as a notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display subject to the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, there is a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced for any of the symbol variation displays that are the targets of the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 434 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 434 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Is done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, “06: 00” is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 6 seconds have passed since the countdown started. ing. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side displays “02:00” as the timer display, and a certain effect starts when two seconds have passed since the countdown started. Suggests. In this example, the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, so that there is an effect both when 2 seconds have elapsed and when 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Suggested to be started.

  Thereafter, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer preview display TM11, TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (4), “05:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. In addition, “01:75” is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (5), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 434 (5), “05:20” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “01:20” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (6), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 434 (7), in the second timer notice display TM12, “HOLD + 1 UP” is displayed instead of “00:00”, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It is notified that the display mode of the pre-reading notice has been changed. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “03:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (8), it is notified that the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11 and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. The Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (9), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display of the number length. It changes to a mode and becomes a pre-reading display mode stepped up from the panda display mode. That is, in this example of the effect, an example is shown in which an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer preview display by the first timer preview display TM11. Has been. Also, this effect example shows that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer notice effects being performed is performed on the same symbol variation display. In this production example, the display mode of the hold icon that has changed from the default display mode is further changed as a result of the timer preliminary time display for the first timer preview display TM11. There may be. In addition, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of the timer preview effect applied to the first timer preview display TM11 and the display mode is changed as the result of the timer preview effect applied to the second timer preview display TM12. The hold icon may be different. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 434 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, “HOLD + 1UP” is displayed instead of “00:00”, and the second timer notice display TM12 is combined with the notification. In short, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 434 (14). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In addition, in this production example, a change production of the display mode of the hold icon for the same symbol variation display was performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8 (8 ′) following FIG. 434 (7), The hold change animation is started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (9 ′), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the panda display mode to the longest. While changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and further, another display mode of the hold icon is displayed. An example in which an effect of changing is performed is shown.

  In this production example, the change display of the hold icon display mode is performed in two stages as a result of each of the two timer notice effects in the same symbol variation display. You may make it perform the change effect of a display mode.

  FIG. 435 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 436 shows a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 435 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect starts when the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started as a certain effect. In this way, in this effect example, by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display, the contents of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect are suggested.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 435 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a “timer activation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (5) shows a state in which the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 displays “04:00”, suggesting that a certain effect will be started after 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “09: 0” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (5). In addition, the word “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 435 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “08:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (7), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” on the dice, and a display “change on hold”. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the result of “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “mini game start” are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (7), “08:60” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “03:60” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (8), the dice symbol variation display is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. This is notified and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (8), “08:12” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “03:12” is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (9), as shown in FIG. 435 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 435 (10), the dice symbol is “stopped” in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and the word “success” is displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved in the mini game. Is informed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Yataze” is displayed to notify that the mini game is successful. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed based on the result of the mini game. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (10), “06: 00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “02:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (11), the characters “attention on hold” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started on the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (11), “05:88” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “01:88” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 435 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the number length display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Hot Ze” is displayed, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with high reliability. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “05:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “Gekiatsu Hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot reliability. A state in which the change to the high display mode is informed is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “04:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (14), the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (14). . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “right timer attention” is displayed, and attention is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (15), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. ing. In the upper center of the display screen, the characters “Select with cross key” are displayed, and a navigation display for selecting a treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL is performed. In addition, a character “Put out a princess” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a possibility that a notice is displayed when a princess character appears from the treasure box. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (15).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (16), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR. A state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “02:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (16).

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (17) displays the character “right selection” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right treasure box. It is reported that the image BXR has been selected as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is erased. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains “02:50”, but the countdown may be continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (18), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the characters “Pseudo Ren” are displayed. The word “success” is displayed, indicating that the mini-game has been successful. That is, based on the result of this mini game, it is determined that a pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and “01:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (19) following FIG. 435 (18), the character “Pseudo-ream” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and the pseudo-ream starts. . At this time, the decorative design is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “00:78” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (19).

  Then, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (20) and “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time. The combination of decorative symbols “Replay symbol RP-decoration 6” is displayed. The decoration symbol may be stopped after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, and the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. As described above, in this production example, for example, when it is determined that the pseudo-ream is performed, the game is smoothly performed by stopping and displaying the three symbols at the same time without stopping and displaying the decorative symbols one by one. May be able to proceed. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 436 (21), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, in place of “00:00”, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (22), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (23), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 436 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 436 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (26), the normal reach is continuously performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (27), during normal reach, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is caused by fluctuation fluctuation. A temporary stop has been made. At this time, a character of “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it will be lost.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 436 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 that has been informed that the pseudo-ream has been performed is also deleted. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the watch length, the display of “super hot hold” is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

  Thus, in this effect example, a state in which a timer notice is performed according to the result (success) of the mini game is shown.

  FIG. 437 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 438 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 437 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 437 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 435 (1) to FIG.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (9), as shown in FIG. 437 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 437 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the outcome of “3”, and the word “dull” is displayed, and the mission achievement in the mini game was not achieved. It has been reported. That is, it is notified that the mission has failed. In addition, a “ugly” character is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, depending on the result of the mini game, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed. Give different results. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (10), “06: 00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “02:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (11), the characters “Focus on hold” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started on the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (11), “05:88” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “01:88” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 437 (12), when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. In addition, the character “little fever” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a little higher reliability. That is, it can be said that although the reliability is lower than the display mode of the number length, it is suggested that the reliability is higher than the default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “05:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “chance hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. A state in which the change to the display mode of the prefetch notice is informed is shown. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (14), the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (14). . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “right timer attention” is displayed, and attention is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (15), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In addition, the example of production shown in FIGS. 437 (15) to (17) is different from the example of production shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (17) in the display mode of the first hold icon h11. The second timer notice display TM12 is the same except that the display content is different, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (18), a spear character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR and a character “Uhihi” is displayed. Characters are displayed to notify that the mini game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 435, the failure of the mini-game indicates that the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 was a false notice effect, or It is suggested that pseudo-continuous production as a production is not performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and “01:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (18). When the mini game fails, the reach effect may be performed in a reach state instead of performing the pseudo-continuous effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 438 (19) following FIG. 437 (18), the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in a moving manner in the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “00:78” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 438 (19).

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 438 (20) and “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time. A combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is displayed and a temporary stop due to fluctuation of shaking is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 328 (21), the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5—decoration 4”. -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss of “decoration 4”. The decoration symbol may be stopped after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, and the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Thus, in this production example, for example, in the case where it is determined that the false reaming is not performed and the loss is established, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. In some cases, the game can proceed smoothly. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  FIG. 439 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 440 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 439 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 439 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect starts when the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “08:00” is displayed, which suggests that an effect starts when 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (4), “07:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a “timer activation” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (5) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 displays “04:00”, suggesting that a certain effect will be started after 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “07: 00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (5). In addition, the word “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “06:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (7), a state in which a dice mini-game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol on the upper center, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” on the dice, and a display “change on hold”. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the result of “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “mini game start” are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (7), “06:60” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “03:60” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (8), the change display of the dice symbol is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is notified, and the game The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the person. In this production example, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (8), “06:12” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, “03:12” is displayed.

  FIGS. 439 (9) to (10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the dice minigame is continuing. That is, it is shown that the dice mini-game has been started but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (10), “04:35” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, “01:35” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (11), the state of the dice symbol and the button image 136a being displayed in a variable display are shown moving to the lower left of the display screen. Thereby, it is suggested that other effects are performed overlapping with the dice mini-game being executed. Note that the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (11), “04:22” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “01:22” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (12), another mini game (a treasure chest mini game) starts during the execution of the dice mini game. When the treasure chest minigame is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the upper center of the display screen, the characters “Select with cross key” are displayed, and a navigation display for selecting a treasure box by operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL is performed. In addition, a character “Put out a princess” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a possibility that a notice is displayed when a princess character appears from the treasure box. Note that the dice mini-game continues and the operation of the effect button 136 is also valid. Further, the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (12), “04:00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “01:00” is displayed.

  Thus, in this effect example, in a period in which one minigame related to one timer notice effect of two timer notice effects is being performed, one minigame related to another timer notice effect is As a result, it is shown that there is a period in which a plurality of mini-games are performed simultaneously. That is, at least a period during which one mini game related to one timer notice effect is performed among a plurality of timer notice effects and a period during which one mini game related to another timer notice effect is performed It is shown that some overlap.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (13), the design of the dice is stopped and displayed on the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG. 439 (14). In the example shown in FIG. 439 (14), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and it is informed that the mission achievement in the dice minigame has been achieved. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed based on the result of the mini game. In this production example, the result of the mission is notified only by the stop display of the dice symbol. However, the “success” is displayed in the manner described above in FIG. "May be displayed. On the other hand, the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (14), “03:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “00:75” is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is also continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown is interrupted in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains “03:75” and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “00:75” is maintained. Even at this time, the treasure chest minigame continues and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the two timer preview displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted, and when the timer display in the second timer preview display TM12 becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the number-long display mode, and the prefetch display mode with high reliability is obtained. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (16), “03:00” is set. Even at this time, the treasure chest minigame continues and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM 12 is changed from “00:00” to “Gekiatsu Hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot reliability. A state in which the change to the high display mode is informed is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (17). At this time, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are moved to the left side as the dice mini-game ends. In addition, the treasure chest minigame continues and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 439 (18) to 440 (26) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 439 (18) to 440 (26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 435 (16) to 436 (24), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 440 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “group occurrence” character is displayed to notify that the savory group notice has been made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (28), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which develops into super reach. Is informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 440 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the character “strong cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 440 (31), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (32), a state in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 440 (33), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 441 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 442 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 441 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “04:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo-ream”, and the expectation that a pseudo-ream effect will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed is enshrined.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (11), the second stop is performed and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “02:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (11). Further, the character “No!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is denied that the pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11. It is suggested that

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (12), a timer notice change animation (timer notice addition animation) is started during the countdown display in the first timer notice display TM11, and an effect is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. The state where is displayed is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “group notice”, and as an effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 being performed, It is suggested that there is a possibility that a Sabohani group notice may be given instead of a pseudo-ream. Thus, in this effect example, the possibility that a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is not a pseudo-continuous effect but another effect is notified. Thereby, the player may be able to have an expectation that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is completed will be an effect with higher reliability than the pseudo-ream.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 441 (13), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added, and “15:03” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added to both of the characters “group notice”, which suggests the possibility of a savory group notice. In this way, in this effect example, there is a case where it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect. is there. Even if the timer notice change animation is performed, there is no change in the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display, and the pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain effect after all. Further, in this effect example, the example in which the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 may be added. In addition, the timer display may be subtracted as well as added.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this example, the pseudo-continuous effect that is started when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed is an effect different from a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It is said that. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “soda!” Are displayed so as to respond to the display of “group notice” in FIG. 441 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is informed that a certain effect executed as a result of the above is a Sabohani group notice. In this production example, although a certain production is not a pseudo-continuous production, a pseudo-continuous production is performed. ), And a pseudo-continuous production may be always performed. In addition, a certain effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, and by adding a timer display, another effect (savohani group notice) may be a certain effect, corresponding to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “14:60” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 441 (15), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “14:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “06:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:13” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (18).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 442 (19) following FIG. 441 (18), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 Sabohan group notice will be held. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a strong crawfish group notice is performed instead of a pseudo-ream as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11. The Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the savory group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Further, as shown in FIG. 442 (19), when the savory group notice is started, the display of the panda icon PND is ended.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (20), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which develops into super reach. Is informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 442 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, a savory icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to notify that a savory group notice has occurred.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It is informing that the CI 1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 442 (23), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (24), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 442 (25), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 443 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 443 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Is done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, “60:00” is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect starts when 60 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. ing. In this effect example, “60:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 to indicate the occurrence of super reach. For example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is a display of a cut-in image. It is suggested that. That is, the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 appears to function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side displays “02:00” as the timer display, and a certain effect starts when two seconds have passed since the countdown started. Suggests. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (7) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 434 (4) to (7) in the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 by 54 seconds. Except for, the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (8), the characters “timer attention” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the first timer notice display TM11. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “56:85” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (8).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (9), the timer notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display in the first timer notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 443 (10), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is decreased, and “02:00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, a panda icon PND is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. In this way, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is assumed that the timer notice effect is being executed as a pre-reading notice. There is an effect that turns out to have been performed as a notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (11), it is notified that the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11 and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. The Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “01:20” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (11).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 443 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display of the number length. It changes to a mode and becomes a pre-reading display mode stepped up from the panda display mode. That is, in this example of the effect, an example is shown in which an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer preview display by the first timer preview display TM11. Has been. Also, this effect example shows that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer notice effects being performed is performed on the same symbol variation display. In this effect example, the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect relating to the second timer notice display TM12 are executed as notice effects for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. After that, a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM12 performed first and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM11 are targeted for the same symbol variation display. Since it is proved to be a thing, it may be possible to give the game an unexpectedness. In other words, from the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, it was suggested at the beginning of the display that a notice to be given during the super reach was generated, but the timer display was shortened. Moreover, the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 is performed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, so that the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display is performed in combination. In some cases, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be dramatically improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 443 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, “HOLD + 1 + 1” is displayed instead of “00:00”, and the second timer notice display TM12 is combined with the notification. In short, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (14) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 434 (11) to (14), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, both the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 function as a pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display. Either of them may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In either case, since the combined announcement for the same symbol variation display is performed, the reliability of the jackpot may be further enhanced.

  In addition, there may be a case where symbol change display in which the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 are different is executed as a target. It may function as a look-ahead notice and may function as a notice regarding the symbol change display while the other timer notice effect is being executed. In this case, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the case where the same symbol change display is combined. May be dispersed. In addition, one of the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12 may be a false timer notice effect.

  FIG. 444 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 444 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 425 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (3), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center portion is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (4), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right of the display screen by the frame-in animation and displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “60:00” is displayed as a timer display, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 60 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 444 (5), “58:12” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it shows that 1.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb effect is started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is made more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb production is started, a display for igniting the squib that extends from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is performed, and a display in which the squib is shortened according to an elapsed time after the bomb production starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (7), a state in which the bomb effect continues is shown. The timing shown in FIG. 444 (7) shows a state immediately before the lead wire reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM. In addition, a question mark is added together with the character “What” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that some kind of production starts as a result of the bomb production.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (8), the bomb image BOM is exploded and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. . In this case as well, the first timer notice display TM11 is difficult to visually recognize because it is overlapped by the effect image.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and two timer notice effects are started. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “timer increase” is displayed, and it is notified that two timer notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display in the first timer preview display TM11 is reset to “60:00”, and the second timer preview display TM12 displays “02:00” as the timer display. The first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed while the timer notice effect is being executed, and a new timer notice effect is started. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (10) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 425 (9) to FIG. 426 (36), the symbol variation display ends, the next symbol variation display starts, and then the super reach is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 444 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain notice effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (14) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (14) to (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 427 (38) to (40), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 445 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 446 shows a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 445 (1) to FIG. 3 (3) are the same as FIG. 444 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (4), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right of the display screen by the frame-in animation and displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “03:00” is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 445 (5), “02:12” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb effect starts. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is made more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb production is started, a display for igniting the squib that extends from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is performed, and a display in which the squib is shortened according to an elapsed time after the bomb production starts.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. In the timing shown in FIG. 445 (7), a state immediately before the lead wire reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added together with the character “What” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that some kind of production starts as a result of the bomb production. In the first timer notice display TM11, although it is difficult to visually recognize the bomb image BOM, the timer display is “00:00”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (8) shows a state in which the bomb image BOM explodes.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed to show that two timer notice effects are started. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “timer increase” is displayed, and it is notified that two timer notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display in the first timer preview display TM11 is reset to “60:00”, and the second timer preview display TM12 displays “02:00” as the timer display. The first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 being shown, the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect and two timer notice effects are newly started. Yes.

  In this production example, after the bomb image BOM has exploded, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ′), the letters “SP standby” are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the super reach notice is displayed. An effect of adding a swordsman character KNG as an item and an effect of starting a new timer notice effect in the second timer notice display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “item get” are displayed, and it is informed that the notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11, two notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which a notice item is displayed, and the other is a new timer notice effect. May be started.

  As described above, when a lower pan full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM has exploded and two timer notice effects have started, a new display is displayed as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″). A ball removal error message “please remove the ball” may be displayed so that it overlaps the front side of the started first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 (so as to overlap). Good. According to this, in order to make it easy to visually recognize the timer notice display, it may be possible to quickly eliminate the ball removal error. The ball removal error display may be overlapped with the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12.

  In addition to the ball removal error display, for example, another error display such as a door opening display may be overlapped with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is important notification content for the player, and it may be noted that an error has occurred by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (10) following FIG. 445 (9), the second timer preview display TM12 is displayed. , “01:50” is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the timer display countdown is not started and the display of “60:00” remains. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is started only for one timer notice effect of the two timer notice effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “attention” is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM12 is alerted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (11), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “01:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains “60:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (12), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, a “hot” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is increased. Suggests improvement. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, but the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 changes. After the display becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change, or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the second timer notice display TM12. The timer display at may be “00:00”. Thereafter, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains “60:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. The state of the confirmation display is shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains “60:00”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (14), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 446 (15), “59:75” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays is shown.

  FIG. 447 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 448 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 447. It is. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 447 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 447 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 447 (1), one hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is consumed and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed in the lower center part and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 447 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is in a display form composed of one bomb, and a character “TIMER” is added above. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Timer pending” is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the notice display of the timer notice effect is performed is shown by displaying the hold icon in the bomb display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 447 (7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (8), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and the change icon h0 that is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect regarding the symbol change is displayed. Become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (9), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “07:00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 7 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the change icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb deletes the display of “TIMER” and shows that the top of the lead wire is ignited. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “something after 7 seconds” ... ”Is displayed, and it is suggested that there is a possibility that an effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed after 7 seconds may be performed. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, or the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (10), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the lead wire of the fluctuation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (11). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “What”, and the expectation of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed is expressed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (12). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo ream”, suggesting that a pseudo ream effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (13), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0 which is a display mode of a bomb explodes, and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “pseudo-ream” character is displayed, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. However, after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 447 (14), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed to be a default display mode, and the variation icon h0 indicates “2” indicating the number of times the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. "Is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, when the pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect, the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed with the change icon h0 is notified. The situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 447 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (19) following FIG. 447 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 448 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informing that the CI 1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 448 (22), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (23), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is shown by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 448 (24), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this example, the timer notice effect is executed only once for each display of the bomb. However, even if one bomb is displayed, the timer notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. Also good. Also, a plurality of types of bomb display modes (for example, color and shape) may be prepared, and the number of timer notice effects to be executed may be varied depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer notice effect of the number of times for the display mode may not be performed. For example, the configuration may be such that it is executed only once when executed up to three times.

  FIG. 449 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 450 shows a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 449 in a stepwise manner. FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 449 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 449 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (2), the reservation (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the subject of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (3), a mini game is also started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” of the dice and a display of “change on hold” are performed, and the mini game is displayed. After the start, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “mini game start” are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. Note that the mini game may start after the timer notice effect starts, the timer notice effect may start after the mini game starts, and the timing and timing when the timer notice effect starts. The timing to perform may be the same.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (4), the variation display of the dice symbol is started, the big button image 136aL is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In addition, a “press” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the normal size button image 136a is displayed, that is, the big hit symbol is easily displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 449 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 shows “04: 37 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (5), as shown in FIG. 449 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 449 (6), the dice symbol is stopped in a manner that shows the outcome of “1”, and the letters “Yoshi” are displayed, which is the outcome of mission achievement in the mini game. Is informed. That is, based on the result of this mini game, it is determined that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “02:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (7), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “01:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 449 (8), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the bomb display. A character “TIMER” is added above the character, a character “TIMER HOLD” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first HOLD icon h11 is displayed in the bomb display mode. It has been reported that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 being performed, the hold icon that changes to the hold icon of the bomb display mode for notifying the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect is displayed. A state in which an aspect change effect is performed is shown. Also, in this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 447, the bomb display mode is not displayed during the winning prize, but the bomb display mode is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example of changing the display mode to the hold icon is shown. The replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode, and the result of the timer notice effect executed in relation to the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode is performed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous production is performed as a certain production. That is, it can be said that a preliminary announcement (prefetching advance notice) of pseudo-continuous production is being performed. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the display of the bomb at the timing when the timer display becomes “00:00”, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. Later, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change to the bomb display mode, or the timer display may change to “00:00” after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the bomb display mode. It may be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in shaking. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (12), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and the change icon h0 that is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect regarding the symbol change is displayed. Become. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 447 (9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variation icon h0. Since it is the same, description is abbreviate | omitted. Here, the timer notice effect executed in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) is the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (18), after the fluctuation icon h0 that is the bomb display mode has exploded, the display mode is changed to the replay display mode. Thus, in this effect example, when the pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is specified as a specific display mode (replay display mode). The state of notifying that the pseudo-continuous performance has been performed is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (19) following FIG. 449 (18), the second variation display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character making up the strong savohani group notice hits the variation icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variation icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the savory group notice.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (24), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of replay to the display mode of the bomb displayed greatly. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “new timer!” Is displayed. That is, a notice display that the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is started is performed by the change icon h0. In addition, the letters “Atsuatsu” are displayed on the upper part of the changed icon h0 after the change, which suggests that there is a possibility that an effect with a high degree of reliability can be executed as a certain effect. . In addition, a cut-in icon is displayed on the change icon h0, and as a result of the timer notice effect that is predicted to be executed, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. And in this production example, since the character “Atsuatsu” is displayed, it can be said that it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 450 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (26) shows a state in which the timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. The third timer notice display TM13 displays “03:00”, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer preview display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 450 (27), “01:25” is displayed on the third timer preview display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “0:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (28) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain notice effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 450 (29), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (30), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, when the change icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notification effect related to the third timer notification display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 450 (31), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 451 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 451 (1) to FIG. 12 (12) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 451 (13), the third stop is performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In the middle symbol, “decoration 6”, not the replay symbol RP, is stopped and displayed, and the character “not fired” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer applied to the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. A state in which the notice effect is a fake timer notice effect is shown. The timer display may be “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display becomes “00:00”. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 451 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. The change icon h0 is changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 451 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this production example, the hold icon is displayed in a bomb display mode, but an example in which a fake timer notice effect is performed is shown, but a fake timer notice effect may not be performed, That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the bomb display mode, the timer notice effect may be always performed.

  FIG. 452 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 453 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 452. It is. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. 452 (1) to FIG. 45 (2) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 452 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 1 has a display form in which three bombs are represented in a lump, and a character “TIMER × 3” is added above. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Timer pending” is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which a notice display indicating that three timer notice effects are executed is performed by displaying a hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are gathered in a lump is shown. . Note that the display mode of the bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are combined, or a display mode in which four or more bombs are combined. May be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (4), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of shaking, and then in FIG. 452 (7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (8), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode in which the three bombs are gathered together moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer notice effects relating to the symbol change are executed. The change icon h0 is a notice display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (9), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “07:00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 7 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the change icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are gathered together, the display of “TIMER × 3” is erased and the tip of the bomb lead arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “What is 7 seconds later ...” is displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed 7 seconds later. It is suggested that there is sex. Further, in this effect example, the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center portion is shown. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, or the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decoration symbol is changed, or the display position of the decoration symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (10), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the bomb lead wire arranged on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (11), the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in this effect example, a savory icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a savory group notice will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the change icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are gathered together shows a state in which the tip of the bomb lead wire arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the bomb lead wire arranged on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (11). Further, the word “attention” is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (12), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:95” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (12), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a character of “group notice confirmation when it appears” is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with a Sabohani character. It is reported that when a savory character SBHN appears from the treasure chest, a savory group advance notice is performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “notice the mini game” is displayed, and a warning is given to the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (13) shows a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and a Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the character “Success!” Is displayed in the vicinity thereof. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, indicating that the mini-game has been successful. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (13), “03:51” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “17:76” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 452 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display form to the high reliability display form, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in an increasing manner to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. In addition, when changing to the high reliability display mode, the strong savory group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak savory group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with “pseudo ream”, and as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, a pseudo ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It is suggested that there is sex. The countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (14), “01:37” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “15:62” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (15) and “00:00” is displayed, the right side of the change icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are gathered together. Bomb explodes and effects appear. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-ornament 6” is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-ream!” Are displayed to notify that a pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decoration symbol may be stopped after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, and the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (15).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 452 (16), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted and a replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that a pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. The display of the replay icon RPL may be started after the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the display of the replay icon RPL is started. The change display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the second change display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is deleted. Thus, in this effect example, each time the timer notice effect is performed once, the bombs are displayed one by one. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (19) following FIG. 452 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that it has reached the reach state. The On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues and “02:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (19).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 453 (20), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 of the display mode in which two bombs are gathered together is displayed. The bomb on the left side explodes and the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong cactus group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Moreover, in this production example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the state where the variable icon display area is displayed is maintained. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a strong savory group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. The Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the second timer notice display TM12 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the savory group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (21) shows a state in which the savory group notice is continuously performed. At this time, a savory icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that a savory group advance notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, since the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, the variation icon h0 displayed in the variation icon display area is deleted. The change icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the change icon h0 is deleted, or the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted. The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is erased and the timing at which the change icon h0 is erased may be the same.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 453 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, “waiting” is displayed along with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in correspondence with the change icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb which is the remaining one of the three. Is displayed, and it is reported that the third timer notice effect is scheduled to start. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a display indicating that the timer notice effect is waiting is being performed during the decorative symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (23), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. The third timer notice display TM13 displays “03:00”, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is erased. Note that the replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is more difficult to view than the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer preview display TM13 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 453 (24), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer preview display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (25) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is an example of a certain effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 453 (26), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (27), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, when the change icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notification effect related to the third timer notification display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (28), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a final display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, the timer notice effect is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon, but not the same number of times as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times that the timer notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum possible number of times.

  In addition, when a timer notice effect is executed as many times as the mission, corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon (that is, when the mission is achieved), the jackpot symbol is surely displayed. May be configured.

  FIG. 454 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 454 (1) to FIG. 10 (10) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  At the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “06:36”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (11) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Has been. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 displays “02:00”, suggesting that a certain effect will be started when 2 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12), “01:00” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which one second has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “05:36” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12), the explosion icon h0 of the bomb display mode starts the explosion effect even though the timer display in any timer notice display is not “00:00”. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 454 (13), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the bomb display mode to the panda display mode at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. In addition, the pre-read display mode is obtained. Further, a character “icon change” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the variation icon h0 has changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 454 (14), the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. In addition, the “suspended change” character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (15). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “What”, and the expectation of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed is expressed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (16). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo ream”, suggesting that a pseudo ream effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “pseudo-ream!” Is displayed, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. However, after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped.

  Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times with the hold icon of the bomb display mode that suggests one timer notice effect.

  FIG. 455 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 456 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 455 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 455 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. “1”. Here, the first hold icon h11 is a bomb display mode, but is a large bomb display mode that is larger than that shown in FIG. 447 (3). In addition, a replay icon, a Sabohani icon, and a bancho icon are displayed on the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb. As a result of the timer notice effect executed in connection with the above, it is suggested that a pseudo-ream effect, a savory group notice, and a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that a pseudo-continuous effect, a savory group notice, and a cut-in image notice (pre-read notice) are performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Large timer hold” is displayed. In this effect example, three icons indicating effects to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, thereby displaying a notice that three timer notice effects will be executed. Is shown. In addition, the number of icons displayed on the hold icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four. There may be a case where the above icons are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Oni heat” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol change display relating to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the large bomb is extremely high. doing.

  FIG. 455 (5) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. “2”. Here, the second hold icon h12 is partially overlapped with the first hold icon h11, which is a display form of a large bomb, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped. Yes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Waiting for Demon Heat” is displayed, and the symbol variation display for the first hold icon h11, which is suggested to have a very high reliability of the jackpot, is started. It is informing that it is waiting.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (7), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of shaking, and then in FIG. 455 (8). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (9), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, so that a notice display that the timer preview effect relating to the symbol change is executed three times is performed. It becomes the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb which is the mode. Also, in response to the start of the symbol variation display for the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “devil fluctuating” are displayed, and the jackpot notice is displayed. Has been made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (10), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “07:00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 7 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb shows that the tip of the lead wire is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “What is 7 seconds later” is displayed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this effect example, the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center portion is shown. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decoration symbol is changed, or the display position of the decoration symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (11), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the lead wire in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the replay icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 may be displayed in a blinking manner or the like to change the display mode so as to notify that the timer notice effect corresponding to the replay icon has started. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (12) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the second timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in this effect example, a savory icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a savory group notice will be started as a certain effect. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (12). Further, the word “attention” is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the timer notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the Sabohani icon displayed on the variation icon h0 may be changed by blinking or the like to notify that the timer notice effect corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. .

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer preview display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (13), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer preview display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 has started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:95” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (13), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a character of “group notice confirmation when it appears” is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with a Sabohani character. It is reported that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. Here, the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the character display of “group notice confirmation when it appears”, but the character display may overlap with the variation icon h0. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “notice the mini game” is displayed, and a warning is given to the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (14) shows a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, a Sabohani character appears from the inside, and a character of “Success!” Is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yataze” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has been successfully completed. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 455 (14), “03:51” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “17:76” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 455 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer preview display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer preview display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in an increasing manner to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. In addition, when changing to the high reliability display mode, the strong savory group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak savory group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. In addition, in the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the execution of the savohani group notice is confirmed after the mini-game is successful, the “done” mark is displayed so as to overlap the savohani icon. Note that the “done” mark may be displayed after the savory group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with “pseudo ream”, and as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, a pseudo ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It is suggested that there is sex. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 455 (15), “01:37” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “15:62” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (16) and “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped simultaneously. The combination of decorative symbols “Replay symbol RP-decoration 6” is displayed. Note that the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the replay symbol RP, but the replay symbol RP may be overlapped with the variation icon h0. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-ream!” Are displayed to notify that a pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decoration symbol may be stopped after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, and the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (16).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 455 (17), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted and a replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that a pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. Further, in this effect example, since the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a result of the timer notice effect, the “replayed” icon is displayed so as to overlap the replay icon displayed on the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. The mark is displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (19) following FIG. 455 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “02:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (20).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong crawfish group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Moreover, in this production example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the state where the variable icon display area is displayed is maintained. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a strong savory group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (22), the state that the savory group notice is continuously performed is shown. At this time, a savory icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that a savory group advance notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the effect display is then switched to the super reach display. However, if the change icon h0 is a display form of a large bomb, the change icon h0 is not erased, and even if the change is made to super reach. Although the displayed state is maintained, the fluctuation icon may be deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 456 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach) and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (24), the timer notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. The third timer notice display TM13 displays “03:00”, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Note that the replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is more difficult to view than the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer preview display TM13 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 456 (27). As shown, the third timer notice display TM13 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer notice effect, it is overlapped with the number-long icon displayed on the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. The “done” mark is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (28), since the corresponding effects are performed for all the icons shown in the variation icon h0 of the large bomb display mode, the effect that the variation icon h0 explodes starts. Has been. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (29), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the notice display by the change icon h0 is performed. Here, the change icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the display mode of the panda. For example, when the display changes to the display mode of the buncho, the jackpot symbol is changed compared to the change to the display mode of the panda. May be easily displayed. Further, there may be a case where the display mode changes to the default display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 456 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”. At this time, the variation icon h0 is erased together with the variation icon display area, but may not be erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (31), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 456 (32), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 457 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 457 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 457 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 in FIG. 1 is a display form of Yoshimune hold, and is a display form of a prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of this Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to confirm and stop than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “I like you!” Is displayed, and it is informed that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started, the display of the characters “I like you!” May be started, or the display of the characters “I like you!” Will be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may start to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold starts to be displayed, “I like you! "" May be displayed. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode representing Tono-sama's character, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the trap hold representing the character of the spear or the display mode of the spear hold representing the character of the spear. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the character type.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “expectation of next change” is displayed, and the expectation degree of jackpot in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold is high. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. Further, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 457 (7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (8), the special symbol 1 hold is digested and the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display form of Yoshimune hold, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display form, thereby becoming a change icon h0 which is a notice display form related to the symbol change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “SP confirmed!” Is displayed, and a notice of advance to super reach is given. Thus, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a jackpot look-ahead notice and also functions as a pre-fetch notice for super reach. The display of the characters “SP confirmed!” May be started after the symbol variation display has started, or the characters “SP confirmed!” May be displayed at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 457 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 457 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak savory group notice is performed in which the number of savory SBHNs is smaller than the strong savory group notice described above. The weak savohani group notice is more reliable than when the savohani group notice is not made, but is less reliable than when the strong savohani group notice is made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (13), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super-reach can be developed. Informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 457 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (15), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (16), a screen in which the main character Tosama defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Yes. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed again, and the change icon h0 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 458 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 459 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 458 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 447 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 458 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 in FIG. 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold representing the Tono-sama character described above, but the Ton-sama character holding the bomb is displayed. The display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown is the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character “Group” is displayed on the bomb held by Tono-sama's character, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice may be performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect. It suggests. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “I like you!” Is displayed, and it is informed that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold starts, the display of the characters “I like you!” May start, or the display of the characters “I like you!” Display of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started after the start of the display, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. The display of the characters “Sama appeared!” May be started. In addition to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold representing Tono-sama's character, for example, a hold icon in a display mode of 爺 bomb hold representing a spear character or a display mode of 婆 bomb hold representing a spear character May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer notice effect may vary depending on the type of character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Expectation of Next Change” is displayed, and the expectation of jackpot in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “something” is displayed, and a state in which the display of a certain message is started is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 457 (7). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of “something” is switched to the character display of “I have it”, that is, the message “I have something” is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (8), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, moves to the change icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Oni heat” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the characters “Onitsu” may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the characters “Onihi” may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (9), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right of the display screen by the frame-in animation and displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “12:00” is displayed as a timer display, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 12 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (11), the first timer notice display TM11 shows a state where the timer display is switched to the character display “waiting for group generation”. At this time, a Sabohani icon is added on the left side of the character display of “Waiting for group generation”, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this effect example, a state in which an explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer preview display while the timer display countdown in the timer preview display is being performed (during subtraction) is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 458 (12), the character display of “waiting for group generation” is switched to the timer display again. In this example, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 and the character display of “waiting for group generation” are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). This is performed from the start of the countdown until reaching a reach state to be described later. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “10:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (13), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the alternate display described above also continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 458 (13), “04:35” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (14), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 458 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (16), the alternate display in the first timer notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (16).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 458 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM 11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs strong crawfish group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a savory group notice is performed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (18), the state that the savory group notice is continuously performed is shown. And the fluctuation icon h0 which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in the mode in which the bomb has been deleted. In other words, in this effect example, the change icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the advance notice (pre-read notice) and the timer notice effect notice (pre-read notice), is executed by the timer notice effect. Then, after fulfilling the function, an example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the display mode of Yoshimune Suspension having the function of only the advance notice (prefetch notice). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (18), the first timer notice display TM11 is also deleted. The first timer notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes may be the same as the timing at which the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 459 (19) following FIG. 458 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other. Is done. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted together with the variation icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the change icon h0 may be transferred to the super reach after the change icon h0 is deleted. It may be erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 459 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informing that the CI 1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 459 (21), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 459 (22), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is shown for a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Further, the fluctuation icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the change icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display form of Yoshimune hold. After that, as shown in FIG. 459 (23), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 460 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 461 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 460 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 460 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the subject of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 460 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display form in which three bombs are represented as a lump, and a character “TIMER × 3” is added above. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Timer pending” is displayed. In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 452, the display of the hold icon of the display mode in which three bombs are gathered is displayed, so that a notice display that three timer notice effects are executed is performed. Is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (4), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed due to fluctuation of shaking. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (8), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon which was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (9), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In this effect example, a savohani icon SBH is added to the first timer notice display TM11. In this effect example, as described later, the result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 being performed. This suggests that a sabotani character may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in the mini game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are gathered together shows that the tip of the bomb lead wire arranged in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM In the vicinity of, a character “what is 5 seconds later” is displayed, and it is suggested that there is a possibility that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed after 5 seconds. Further, in this effect example, the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center portion is shown. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon is displayed after the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. The display mode of h11 may be changed, and the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decoration symbol is changed, or the display position of the decoration symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. In this production example, the character display of “TIMER × 3” that is additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer preview display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (10), “04:06” is displayed in the first timer preview display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.94 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, the length of the bomb lead wire arranged at the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (11), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a character “Short notice when gutters” is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with a Sabohani character. It has been reported that when a Sabohani character appears from a treasure chest, a notice with a very high reliability of the jackpot is executed. In addition, a character “mini game” is displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (12) and “00:00” is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened after moving to the center, and the Sabohani character SBHN appears in a large size from the inside, and a “ The characters “group notice confirmed” are displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters “Yataze” are displayed, and it is notified that the mini-game is successful and the savohani group notice is executed. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 is shown. In addition, it can be said that a pre-notification notice is given that a savohani group notice is performed as a certain result as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (13), the character “Preparing” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the Sabohani icon SBH, and a notice is given that the Sabohani group notice will be performed. Yes. At this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is deleted and two bombs are displayed as a lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of “in preparation” are started, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. After that, the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the text “Preparing” may be started, or at the timing when the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the text “Preparing” is started, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode may change. If the mini-game is successful, the strong savohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak savohani group notice may be executed. A group notice is always executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 5”. It shows what is happening. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 460 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (16), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode is changed as described above moves to the change icon display area in the state of the display mode after the change, so that the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are displayed. The change icon h0 is a notice display mode of the effect being executed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (17) shows that two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are both default display modes. A replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. In the second timer notice display TM12, “07:00” is displayed as a timer display, and it is suggested that an effect starts when 7 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. That is, it is suggested that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started after 7 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display is started. In addition, the third timer notice display TM13 displays “08:00” as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect starts when 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Note that it is not clear which effect is a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the third timer notice display TM13. In this example, the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start counting down at the same time, so that an effect starts both when 7 seconds have elapsed and when 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. It has been suggested that In addition, the change icon h0 of the display mode in which two bombs are gathered together shows a state in which the heads of the two lead wires of the two bombs are ignited in accordance with the start of the two timer notice effects.

  Thereafter, the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 each start counting down (subtraction display). At the timing shown in FIG. , “04:27” is displayed, and “05:27” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, it shows that 0.73 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19) following FIG. Both bombs in the variation icon h0 of the mode explode and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-ornament 6” is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and “01:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 461 (20), the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream is started. In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted and a replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that a pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues and “00:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (20).

  Thereafter, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (21), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is a group of two bombs. The display mode changes from the display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes a display mode for a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the third timer notice display TM13. Also, in this production example, the content of a certain production, which was not clear by the question mark icon QST, becomes clear for the first time after the countdown is completed and a certain production is performed. The situation is shown. Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon started to be displayed in a display mode in which three bombs are gathered together is displayed as the hold icon, the timer notice effect is performed as the pre-reading notice and the change icon is displayed. After that, a timer notice effect is also shown as a notice related to the symbol variation display. That is, it is shown that when a hold icon having a display mode for notifying that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed is displayed, the timer notice effects are respectively executed with a plurality of symbol variation displays. Specifically, it is shown that the savohani group notice, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the change effect of the change icon h0, which are performed as a result of executing the timer notice effect, are performed in different symbol change displays. Furthermore, in this effect example, the look-ahead notice given as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the notice subject related to the symbol change display given as a result of another timer notice effect are performed for the same symbol change display. An example is shown. Also, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are started at the same time, but it is shown that the contents of the effects performed as a result of the respective timer notice effects being executed are different.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is deleted, and the panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and the notice by the change icon h0 is given. It is informed that notification has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the upper center of the display screen to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In addition, the Sabohani icon SBH and “Preparing” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (26), the strong savory group announcement is performed so as to correspond to the SBH icon SBH displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and the display of “in preparation”. . At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Moreover, in this production example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the state where the variable icon display area is displayed is maintained. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed. Further, in this effect example, one savory character SBHN constituting the strong savohani group advance notice hits the variation icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variation icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the savory group notice.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (27), the savory group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the large display of the number length. In addition, the state in which the notice display mode by the change icon h0 is stepped up to a higher reliability is shown.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 461 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (29) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 461 (30), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (31), a state in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. In addition, a state is also shown in which the variation icon h0 is re-displayed in a display mode with a large size. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 461 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 462 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. Note that FIG. 462 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 449 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 462 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 is in a button hold display mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (4), the character “PUSH” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of button hold. A state in which a timer display is displayed is shown above the second hold icon h12 whose display mode has changed from the display mode to the bomb display mode. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (6), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect starts when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Yes. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is specified by the hold icon so as to be specified. In this example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in a state of being held, that is, a state displayed as a hold icon. In this case, for example, when the timing at which a certain effect is started, such as the timing after the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is started again. You may make it do. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo ream”, and as a result of the timer notice effect, a pseudo ream effect may be executed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (6), a lower pan full tank error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps (overlaps) with a part of the front side of the second hold icon h12. ), "Please remove the ball" error display is displayed. According to this, in order to make it easy to visually recognize the timer notice display, it may be possible to quickly eliminate the ball removal error.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6), and the hold on the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The state that the change display of the symbol is started after being digested is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7), the timer display countdown is started in the timer notice display displayed on the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. : 32 ”is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display is performed by the variation icon h0 is shown. It can also be said that the variation icon display area in which the variation icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “notice” character is displayed, and a warning is given to the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed in the variation icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (8) and “00:00” is displayed, “decoration 5—replay symbol RP—decoration 6” The combination of the decorative symbols is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  Also, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (5), “30:00” may be displayed as the timer display as shown in FIG. 462 (6 ′). Has been. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (6 ′), it is suggested that a certain effect starts when 30 seconds elapse after the countdown starts. Further, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “group notice”, and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the savohani group notice may be executed as a certain effect. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7 ′), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6 ′), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The state that the hold concerning is digested is shown and the change display of the symbol is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (7 ′), the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the variation icon h0 is continuously displayed as “30:00” that is the timer display at the start of the countdown. When the timer display countdown is started, after the first timer preview display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer display countdown is performed on the first timer preview display TM11. Is called. In other words, in this production example, the hold icon (fluctuation icon) displays the timer display countdown time (initial value) in the timer notice display so that it can be specified, and separately displays the timer notice display. A state in which the timer display counts down in the timer notice display is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (7 ′), “27:32” is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a certain effect will be performed after 27.32 seconds. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “notice” character is displayed, and a warning is given to the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (8 ′) and “00:00” is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong cactus group notice. The situation is shown. In this production example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed without being erased. Further, a character “group occurrence” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the savory group notice is being performed.

  In this way, the hold icon may be displayed in the button hold display mode first, and changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

  In addition, in the effects described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 462, the types of certain effects performed as a result of execution of the timer notice effect, the contents of the effect of the timer notice effect, and the contents of the mini game are the same as those before FIG. 425. It goes without saying that various effects described with reference to the drawings can be applied.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 310 (1), etc.]
The first display is a certain effect [e.g., a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 308 (11) to (12) or a notice display by a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 309 (a5), Lever effect shown in FIG. 309 (c2), notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 311 (9fa ′), etc., decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect display using the mini display device 208P] is a display for informing the timing.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5)],
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, the navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5). “Increase” and “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the character YM]
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5), a timer preview effect is performed in the timer preview display TM1. Etc., when a timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is informed by the first display, it is informed that the time informed by the second display will change. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain stage to start, there is an expectation that the time may change, and enjoy the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when the certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may necessarily notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  Further, the second display may be for notifying only that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or notifying that the timing at which a certain effect is started is not changed. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change, or may not notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change. It may be a thing.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

  The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). The countdown display countdown may be started. The end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). Display state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and display displayed on the first display after countdown is completed (For example, the character display of “attention”) may be hidden.

In addition, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time in the timer display is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where attention can be paid to a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, after the second display is displayed, only the display mode of the first display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of other displays may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not change.

  Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may be changed, and the display mode of the first display is changed only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means also displays the second display. In some cases, attention can be focused on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight only on the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be constituted only by the first display means and the second display means, or may be constituted by including display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . The display means may be configured to include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed only on the first display unit, or may be displayed other than the first display unit. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the first display unit.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on a screen other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the second display unit.

In addition, “the second display unit is disposed on the front side of the first display unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the sub display unit 208S has a front side of the decorative symbol display unit 208. Etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 314 (A2) to (A3)] The decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it can be made easier to recognize that there is a possibility that the time until the change will occur.

  Here, only the first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displaying the second display. Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped by the display means. Further, the first display means may be necessarily overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed. One display means may not overlap.

  Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed. The first display means may be overlapped by display means other than the means.

In addition, the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B3) are used as the decorative symbol display device. 208, the second display means is configured to be movable between positions substantially overlapping the front side of 208 and the like,
The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative design display device 208, etc. at a position overlapping the front surface of approximately the center of 208]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be configured to be movable. In addition, the second display unit may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display unit may be disposed between the first position and the second position. You may be comprised so that it may not move.

  In addition, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be provided in addition to between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may be overlapped with the first display means at a position other than the second position. It may be anything. In addition, the second display means may necessarily overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Also good.

The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 308 (2) to (7)],
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (2) to (7), the timer notice display TM1 timer The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may include only a countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed by counting down timings other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed, or may not be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed. Good.

In addition, the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued without fail, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. Also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in a state other than the state where the second display is displayed. Also good.

Further, during the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the second display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 308 (8), etc.]
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. When the display becomes 0, the word “attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail. When the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display is not the case where the first display is a display indicating 0. Three displays may be displayed.

In addition, in the case where the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the second display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation due to the display of the second display.

  When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, pseudo continuous effects shown in FIGS. 308 (9) to (12)],
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, a production moving means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest member 224E, a Thousand box accessory 224H, a first large board behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd shown in FIG. 309 (d3), etc.]
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. In addition, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. Further, the effect moving means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

In addition, “when a certain effect is performed, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 308 (11) to FIG. 12) The case where the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 12 is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-ream is not started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a sense of expectation can be given to a certain performance.

  When a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a final state. Even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. Also good.

“One of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 304 (9) to (14) or FIGS. 308 (9) to (12). Quasi-continuous production shown in FIG. 317 (4) and the chance-up notice display shown in FIG.
In a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
When the fifth display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 304 (9) to (14). If the conversation notice shown in is more likely to be a big hit than if no conversation notice is given]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the fifth display is displayed in the period from when the first display starts to display until the second display starts. is there.

  Here, only the fifth display may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. In the period from when the display is started until the second display is started, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

  In addition, the fifth display may be displayed only during the period from when the first display is started until the second display is started, or the first display is displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started even in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finalized without fail, or when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finalized. There may be.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 317, the chance up meter CMT is operated by the swordsman reach. Etc. may be displayed during the
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first effect display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying a first timing [for example, a timing indicated by a check point CP3 at which a notice by lever production starts as shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.]
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,
The period display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the period display starts [for example, check as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2)] If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 321 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, so there is a possibility that the display means may not be seen until the first timing is close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing. Even when the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to see the period display. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game during the period from when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. In addition, a plurality of types of displays may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the period display and the first effect display. The display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be one that may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the period display starts, or before the first timing after the period display starts. The display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

  Note that the display period of the period display may be during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, etc., regardless of the reach.

  Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed for long reach but may be displayed for SP reach. Further, it may be displayed not in the first half of SP reach but in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the second half of the SP reach.

  Also, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. In addition, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. The start of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is completed. There may be. In addition, when the operation means is configured to be able to display / hide the chance up meter, the start of the period display is the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  Also, the start of the period display refers to the period display effect until the period display effect ends (for example, the chance up meter) (for example, the chance up meter is displayed indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed). Or until the display suggesting that it can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden.

  The period display includes not only the display until the first timing is reached, but also the display that is erased before the first timing is reached.

  Further, there may be two or more certain periods during the period in which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, when the second certain period starts while the period display itself continues to be displayed, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in of cocoon shown in FIG. 321 (A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), etc.]] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and 321 (A2b), a chance up meter]. In the production by the CMT, before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the cut-in display of the eyelid shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) may be performed. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b)) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the eyelid shown in FIG. 321 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) are not notified]
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 321 (A2) as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b)). The chance up meter CMT is deleted when the heel cut-in display or the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes There are cases where you can also have expectations.

  Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or the second effect display is displayed in addition to before the first timing. There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. May be. The period display may not necessarily notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Further, only the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display, and displays other than the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may be necessarily deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

  Further, the period display may be deleted only during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may be deleted in addition to the display of the second effect display.

  Instead of the effect display, notifications other than errors, such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing a prepaid card from being forgotten to be removed, may be used. In addition, the display of the effect display may be a display that appears by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect moving means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

  Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 2nd production display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying a cut-in of a moth shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or an effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b)]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. There may be a case where the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, in the case where the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed and displayed more easily than the case where the second effect display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, a production moving means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest member 224E, a Thousand box accessory 224H, a first large board behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [e.g., operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd shown in FIG. 321 (A3b), etc.]
The second operation is a production operation,
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect moving means may necessarily execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be necessarily performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

“One of the plural types of operations is a first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 303 (E1) to (E2) or the operation shown in FIG. 303 (F1). The operation of the Thousand box accessory 224H, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A2a) to (A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where expectation can be given for the redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display is also displayed again. It may be configured. The period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

  The period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again other than after the period display is erased. Also good.

Further, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A2) to (A5)]. In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the samurai character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or until a certain period elapses after the period display is erased. A display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period display is not performed until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, only after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

  If there are a plurality of periods in the period during which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period after the first certain period is started. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [e.g., a champ-up notice by displaying a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317 (4), and a lord shown in FIG. 317 (13). Of the chance-up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.]
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display is a second timing [for example, a timing indicated by a check point CP1 at which a champ-up notice is displayed by displaying a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317 (4), and a state shown in FIG. 317 (13). The timing indicated by the check point CP2 at which the advance notice of the chance increase by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started may also be notified,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timing than the second timing. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

  In addition, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be the one in which the display of the third effect display is not started.

  The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

  In addition, it is possible to fix the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to reach, such that the effect display is always performed three times when a certain reach occurs and the effect display is always performed twice when another reach occurs. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed such that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once in some cases. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, and conversely, it may be easily shifted. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win.

  Also, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing The two timings may be the same timing.

Further, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “One type of display of multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display is difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means,
The first display means is a means that may display the period display,
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
There may be a case where at least part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be constituted by only a plurality of display means, or may be constituted by other than the plurality of display means. In addition, the display means may be necessarily constituted by a plurality of display means, or may not be constituted by a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other displays than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

  In addition, the second display unit may perform only the production operation, or may perform an operation other than the production operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the production operation or may not perform the production operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or a case where the second display means overlaps other than at least a part of the period display. There may be. In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is necessarily overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. Also good.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A1) to FIG.
One of the plural types of displays is a second display [e.g., display of a conversation image CI2 of a bag in a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A9), etc.]
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. It may change with the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds]
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the bag conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 326 (A4)] is the second speed [for example, the gauge at 5 seconds May change depending on the speed at which
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, a large number of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with a game or a player who plays a game for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming machine, the first speed and the second speed are made different to cause the player to naturally guide his / her line of sight to a display with a fast (slow) speed at which the display mode changes. May also be able to entertain the production.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be erased before the first timing after the period display starts, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before, the period display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

In addition, the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A1), etc.]
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 326 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display whose display mode changes in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation effective period] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A1) or FIG. In the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the display mode change speed can be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. The first display may necessarily include a time display or may not include a time display.

  Further, the second display may include only a time display, or may include a display other than the time display. The second display may necessarily include a time display, or may not include a time display.

  Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes depending on other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. The time display may be such that the display mode always changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

In addition, “both the first display and the second display may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display in which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag in the conversation preview are displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the production can be lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or there may be a display other than both the first display and the second display. Also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A9), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [e.g., a character display of “It is hot” in the conversation image CI2 of moth shown in FIG. 326 (A9), etc.]
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a first time [e.g., 10 seconds] elapses,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds or the like] has elapsed.
When the first time has elapsed since the first display started, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time has elapsed since the second display started displaying, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses. Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. You may not do it.

  Further, the second display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses. The display mode may be changeable. In addition, at least a part of the display mode may change until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. You may not do it.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start after the first display starts. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts displaying. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time elapses after the second display starts, only the fourth display may be displayed, or after the second display starts the second display. When time elapses, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started, the fourth display may be always displayed, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started displaying. The fourth display may not be displayed.

  The third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode, or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have higher or lower jackpot reliability. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same between the third display and the fourth display.

The first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), etc.]
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying a timing until a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 informs by a countdown display of the time until the pseudo-ream occurs],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Moreover, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first display is an operation valid period display,
The second display is the operation valid period display,
The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may have a trap that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may indicate other than the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may not indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

Further, the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 323 (A1), etc.]
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (A1)],
The period display is a display for notifying a first timing [for example, a timing at which a chance-up notice is started by the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 323 (A2), etc.]
The first timing is a certain effect [for example, FIG. 323] in a first period [for example, a period during which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 323 (A1) to (A2)]. (A2) is a timing at which a chance-up notice display by the boy character BOY may be performed,
Between the start of the first period and the end thereof, the first timing is notified,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, the first timing may be one in which only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, and display other than the sixth display is also started to display in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be. The first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be.

  Further, only the first timing may be notified during the period from the start of the first period to the end, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. In addition, the first timing may be always notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start of the first period to the end, and in addition to the period from the start of the first period to the end, One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed as time elapses.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may be changed at the first speed as time passes, or at least part of the second display is changed as time passes. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, according to the passage of time, only at least a part of the display form of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display There may be cases where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, “when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, rather than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed. In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to confirm and display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 326 (A1) to (A9)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display is an effect display [for example, display of the conversation image CI2 of the frog in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A9)],”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), etc.]
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a timer display countdown display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [For example, as shown in FIG. 329 (A1) to FIG. The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the timer display of TM1, etc.]
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display changes from the first display mode [for example, the small-size display mode of the timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)] to the second display. May change to a mode [for example, a large size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A3), etc.]
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect increases by changing the display mode of the countdown display, the player may be able to be entertained until a certain effect is performed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where attention can be paid to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may include only a countdown display or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may notify only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by other than performing the countdown. You may do. In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be.

  Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, “the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is completed before the symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (1) to (7) The countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and is ended during the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, and therefore the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be completed by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended by the time the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. There may be a case where the countdown display does not end before the change display ends.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be completed only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition to the end of the variable display, the countdown display may end.

In addition, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size, etc.]
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size, etc.]
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display size of the countdown display may be increased, whereby the degree of expectation for the countdown display may be changed (attention is paid to the countdown display having an increased display size).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

  Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is also displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

  Note that the display sizes may be the same, for example, the same display size, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.

  Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. A display mode other than one display mode may be displayed. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode. When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. If it is not displayed in the display mode, there may be a gap.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display is displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame preview of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 308 (2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. As described above, when the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining three seconds are displayed during the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1, the timer preview display TM1 is displayed. Is changing from small size to large size etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where it can be expected that the display mode changes during the countdown display.

  Here, the first display may be changed only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the first display is the first display during the display of the countdown display. The display mode may always be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. You may change from the one display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it will be easier to finalize the jackpot symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be a case where an expectation for changing the first display to the second display mode can be provided.

  When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or the first display is the first display mode. Even if the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

The first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen 208 to approximately the center, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display position of the first display may change, thereby giving a visual change and improving the effect.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position is changed, or may be one other than the display position. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

“When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. As shown in (), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the substantially center,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the first display.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. If it changes to the 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of the 1st display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  Moreover, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change even in cases other than the case where the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer preview display TM1 or the like] may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display is changed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3), the timer preview display TM1 is displayed by an enlarged display animation. Etc.], and the display position changes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of production may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only moving display is performed, or may be one in which display other than the moving display is also performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the moving display is always performed, or the movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the moving display, and the display position of other than the display position of the first display is also changed by performing the moving display. Also good. In addition, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, and the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. .

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even if the display position of the first display changes due to something other than the movement display being performed. Good.

In addition, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds while the moving display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued in addition to the display of the movement display.

Further, during the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the movement display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the movement display.

Further, “the countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A7), the timer notice display TM1 The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may be performed only for counting down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed other than counting down the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the display of “0” is displayed in the countdown display, so that it is informed that the timing of performing the certain effect is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A7) to (A8)] As described above, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the “notice” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition, it is also possible to notify other than the timing at which a certain performance is performed. Further, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

  In addition, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has been reached only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

In addition, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A7) to (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the presentation is not made redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display The display may also be deleted. Further, the countdown display may be erased after the display indicating 0 in the countdown display is displayed, or the countdown display is erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A8), etc.]
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIG. 329 (A7) to FIG. As shown in the figure (A11), after the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 becomes 0, the timer preview display TM1 displays the word “attention” instead of the timer display, and then the timer preview display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, thereby improving the effect of rendering the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in effects other than a certain effect. The second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. The second display may be included in a certain effect.

  Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display May be configured such that displays other than the countdown display are also deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may not be deleted after the second display is displayed.

  Further, only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted even after the second display is displayed.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [For example, as shown in FIG. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode May be displayed on the display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. In other cases, the first display may be displayed on the first display means.

Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 330 (A2) to (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed as a decorative symbol. Displayed on the display device 208, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the display means to be displayed is changed when the display mode of the first display is changed, there may be a case where it is possible to visually enhance the presentation effect.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display unit. There may be cases, and when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display unit. It may be displayed on other display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display unit. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is changed to the second display unit. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display form displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display form. The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display mode. May be displayed on the display means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a pre-reading notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display or may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a prefetch notice.

  Further, when the countdown display is performed as a pre-reading notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display to be performed next. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped, interrupted, or canceled during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the symbol fixed stop timing is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown It may be possible to stop the time display, or to continue the time notification by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally during the symbol stop display.

  In addition, when displaying a countdown display as a pre-reading notice, if a hold whose change time varies depending on the number of hold (for example, a hold whose change time is indefinite) is on hold, the countdown display should not be performed. Also good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown will become 0. For example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo-ream, reach of the reach) In the case of development, etc., it is preferable to perform only with the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when a suspension with an indefinite variation time is in the suspension. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, or a telop display such as “In the midst of a hot attack”) For example, it is sufficient if the countdown of the timer is completed before the subject's suspension of digestion is completed. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that forcibly adjusts the time at the same timing (for example, the start of a suspended symbol fluctuation display that has been subject to prefetching) even when an effect that needs to be synchronized occurs. Also good.

  The countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, during the jackpot game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final When the big hit end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book end is forcibly The combined time may be displayed (for example, “00:00” is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, and an effect is generated).

  Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the countdown display the time until the production by a simultaneous production, the effect by RTC, etc. starts.

  Further, the display device may be composed of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as rendering movable means and decorative members, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, It may be configured such that these can be visually recognized. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state where the back side can be visually recognized and a state where it is difficult to visually confirm with the liquid crystal shutter.

  Further, the operation mode of the effect moving means such as an accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the time notification by the countdown display.

  In addition, a display for notifying that an effect may be exerted on the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as inciting that something may be generated by a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen on the countdown display (when you do nothing or when you do something), and when another character appears, you will always do something It is also possible to perform an effect such that something is always performed when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters that appear, the easier it may be to win.

  In addition, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to finally become a big hit, or when a chance up notice is given, it may be easy to finally become a big hit.

  Moreover, even if the chance up meter is enlarged / reduced in part or in whole, or promoted (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes), etc. Good.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 339 (3), etc.]
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (3), etc.]
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 330 (9), the strong sabhaani group notice shown in FIG. 343 (9), and the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 347 (30). In addition, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35) and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346 (6) to (7) may start. Is composed of
Even after the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 341 (5) to (6), Although the notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and a certain effect is not performed.
The display of the timer is started and the display of the time is started for a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” or the like]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 339 (9), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. Etc.]
When the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the display of the timer display is not performed and the certain effect is not performed. Easy to be,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects on display means tend to be diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

  Further, according to this game machine, there may be a case where the start of a certain effect can be expected by the start of the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. The display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

  Further, the timer display may include only time display, or may include display other than time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include a time display, or may not include a time display.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect is started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than the certain effect is started after the display of the timer display is started. You may be comprised so that it may be carried out. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

  Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  Moreover, even after the display of the timer display is started, it may be configured such that only a certain effect does not start, or even after the display of the timer display is started. Other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect does not always start even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that there is a case.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started in response to the time display being started and the time display having reached a certain time, or the timer display display being started. Thus, it may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect may be started in response to the display of time reaching a certain time. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started and the time is displayed. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even when the display of is a certain time.

  Further, it may be configured such that a certain presentation may be started only when the display of the timer is started and the display of the time has reached a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. Thus, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to a time other than the display of a certain time.

  Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed. May be configured.

In addition, “the display of the time may be started after the display of the timer is started and the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” after the timer notice effect is started, the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-continuous is started. etc],
If the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. As shown in (3) to (6) in the figure, if the timer display on the timer preview display TM1 is erased before “00:00” after the start of the false timer preview effect, The second time the display of decorative symbols will not start, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be noted that the timer display reaches a certain time.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started and when the time display reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the display of the timer display is started and when the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may always be started, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, there may be a case where an effect is started only when the display of time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is started even when the time display is after a certain time.

  In addition, when the display of the timer display is ended after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started. When the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, an effect other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display is ended after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not necessarily be started. If the display of the timer display is ended after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started.

  In addition, after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started only when the display of the timer display is finished before the time display reaches a certain time. A certain effect may not be started even when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time has ended, and before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 353 (3) to (9)],
When the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure chest image shown in FIG. 353 (9)] is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time is the certain result. It is configured such that the certain effect is started upon reaching the time [For example, as shown in FIG. 353 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image, it is shown in FIG. 353 (17). Thus, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the trend of the timer notice can be raised by the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the mini game display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the mini game display. Further, the display means may always display the mini game display or may not display the mini game display.

  Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or the mini game display may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started. As a result, even when the first result is not derived, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

In addition, “the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a preview item [for example, the princess character HME displayed in the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 353 (10)],
The notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini-game [for example, from the treasure chest image in the mini-game shown in FIGS. 353 (5) to (9), When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 353 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item in the lower left of the display screen.
The advance notice item includes a display that suggests that the certain effect is executed [for example, the princess character HME is displayed as the advance notice item, and a notice is made that a pseudo-ream will be performed, etc.] ,
After the notice item starts to be displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 353 (10) After the princess character HME is displayed as the advance notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts at the timing when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A becomes “0:00”. ,
When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is not started [for example, in FIGS. 354 (5) to (9) When the spear character BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini game shown, the notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to focus attention on the display of the notice item.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where a notice icon can be recognized as a result display while paying attention to the mini game that a certain effect by the timer display starts.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to excite the production during a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice item, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice item. Further, the display means may always display the notice item, or may not display the notice item.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the notice item is displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or other than the notice item may be displayed depending on the result of the display of the mini game. It may be configured to be. Further, the notification item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or the notification item may not be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. Good.

  In addition, the notice item may include only a display that suggests that a certain effect is executed, or may include a display other than a display that indicates that a certain effect is executed. The notice item may necessarily include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display indicating that a certain effect is executed.

  Further, after the notice item starts to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or after the notice item starts to be displayed, It may be configured such that the time display reaches a certain time and an effect other than the certain effect is also started. In addition, after the notice item starts to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started. After the notice item starts to be displayed, There may be a case where the display of time reaches a certain time and a certain effect is not started.

  Further, it may be configured such that the display of time reaches a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the display of the preview item is started, or other than after the display of the preview item is started. Alternatively, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

  In addition, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is not started. When the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be performed. It may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect is not started after reaching a certain time. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect is not necessarily started. When the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be performed. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started after reaching a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts changing [for example, FIG. 353 (3 As shown in FIG. 353 (9), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts, as shown in FIG. 353 (14). , The results of the mini-game display are derived, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to focus attention on the result of the mini game display.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where the relevance between the timer display and the mini game can be impressed.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, it may be configured such that only the result of the mini game display is derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. Then, before the display of the time display starts to change, other than the display result of the mini game may be derived. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the display result of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the display result of the mini game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

  Further, the display result of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the display result of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

  Further, the display result of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. Other than the above, the display result of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

In addition, after the display of the time display starts to change, the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in 349 (4), after the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L becomes “0:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12) and counts down. , The result of the mini-game display is derived as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, there are cases where it is possible to focus attention on the result of voting a mini game.

  Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the mini game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time. After the display starts to change, it may be configured such that other than the result of the mini game display is derived before the time display reaches a certain time. In addition, after the display of the time display starts to change, the display result of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display After the start of change, the display result of the mini game may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

  Further, after the display of the time display starts changing, the display result of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display After the start of change, the display result of the mini game may be derived other than before the time display reaches a certain time.

  Further, the display result of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the time display starts to change, before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time Other than after the start of change, the mini-game display result may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

In addition, the display of the mini-game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. Etc., a mini-game has started before the start of]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, at the time when the display of the mini game is started, it is not known whether or not the timer display is started, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the trend of the mini game.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started, or other than the display of the mini game before the display of the timer display is started. Display may also be started. In addition, the mini-game display may be started before the timer display is started, or the mini-game display may not be started before the timer display is started. Also good.

  In addition, the mini game display may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be displayed other than before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

  In addition, the mini game display may be started before only the timer display display is started, or the mini game display may be started before the display other than the timer display display is started. May be started.

In addition, as a result of displaying the mini-game, a second result [for example, a result of appearance of a face-length face icon BCF from a treasure chest image shown in FIG. 355 (8), etc.] may be derived.
The second result is a result that is not related to the certain performance [for example, as shown in FIG. 355 (8), when a result of appearance of the face-length face icon BCF from the treasure box image is derived, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 356 (25) is displayed which is not related to the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 355 (4)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where attention can be paid to whether or not the display result of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

  Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of the mini game display, or a result other than the second result may be derived as the result of the mini game display. Good. Further, the second result may be necessarily derived as a result of the mini game display, or the second result may not be derived as the result of the mini game display.

  The second result may be not related only to a certain effect, or may not be related to an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

In addition, a first notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346 (6) to (7), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect.
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where expectation can be given that a timer display is displayed and a pre-reading notice is given.

  Here, only a first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the first notice may be always executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, a second notice [for example, pseudo-relation shown in FIG. 330 (9)] may be executed as the certain effect.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where a timer display is displayed and the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes longer, thereby giving a sense of expectation to the big hit.

  Here, only a second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the second notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the second notice may be a case where only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be longer. In addition, the second notice may always be longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. There may be a case where the execution time of the symbol variation display does not become long.

In addition, “a third notice [for example, display of strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35)] may be executed as the certain effect,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a timer display is displayed and a big hit announcement is made.

  Here, only a third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the third notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the third notice may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. In the symbol variation display, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed. In addition, the third notice may be a case where the big hit symbol is surely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. However, there may be cases where the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the third notice may be one in which the jackpot symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when executed, or the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed in the symbol variation display in the third notice. There may be.

In addition, a fourth notice [for example, a revival effect shown in FIG. 347 (30)] may be executed as the certain effect.
The fourth notice is a notice that informs that it will be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where a timer display is displayed and a sense of expectation can be given to a big hit.

  Here, only the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the fourth notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the fourth notice may be a notification that only a big hit is given, or may be notified in addition to a big hit. In addition, the fourth notice may always notify that it will be a big hit, or may not notify that it will be a big hit.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, lower pan full error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 389 (1)],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full tank error state [for example, a state in which the lower plate full tank error etc.],
The timer display may be overlapped with the ball removal error display [For example, as shown in FIG. 389 (3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the lower pan full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where it is possible to motivate the player to quickly release the dish full tank error state in order to see the effect of the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the ball removal error display. The display means may always display a ball removal error display or may not display a ball removal error display.

  Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may always be displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

  In addition, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with displays other than the ball removal error display. May be. Further, the timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball removal error display, or the timer display may not be overlapped with the ball removal error display.

In addition, the timer display is a display that is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of types of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 348 (3), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 346 (3), etc.]
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
When the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect is more easily started than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where expectation can be given for the start of a certain effect depending on the mode of timer display.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when a mini game is played, there is a case where the possibility of success of the mini game can be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first, the player expects a certain effect to be executed by expecting the success of the mini game, but the timer display mode that has been started in the middle is indirectly started first. There are cases where expectations can be given to the results of the game display. That is, there are cases where an effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of an effect (mini game or the like) started earlier, and the player can be made interesting.

  Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

  In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different, or may be all different.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect is easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode rather than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started. When the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect is displayed. May not be started.

  The timer display may change to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or may be changed to the first mode after the timer display is started to display in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started to be displayed in the second mode, You may be comprised so that it may not change to a 1st aspect.

“One of the plural types of modes is the third mode [for example, the timer display of“ 7:77 ”shown in FIG. 390 (a) or the“ 99:99 ”shown in FIG. 390 (b)]. Timer display, rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 390 (g), etc.]
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the player can be expected at the time of starting display of the timer display.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a sense of expectation for being displayed in the third mode.

  Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be entirely different from the first aspect.

  The third aspect may be partly different from the second aspect, or may be entirely different from the second aspect.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. In the symbol variation display, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be displayed in a fixed manner. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be surely displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed.

  Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, or other than when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the jackpot game performed in response to the jackpot symbol being confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a player). "First state") is configured to be granted,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the timer display may be able to enhance the expectation for the third mode.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured to give only the first state. When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, A state other than one state may also be provided. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be always given. When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state is always displayed. This state may not be provided.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that the first state is given only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or in cases other than when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Alternatively, the first state may be provided.

In addition, “the first state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The probability variation state may be given an electric support state or may not be given an electric support state. The probability variation state may be a probability variation state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or may be a probability variation state (ST) in which the state ends when a certain number of symbol variation displays are performed. Good.

  In addition, an electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) may be used instead of the probability variation state.

In addition, “the first state is a reserved villa,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the reserved consecutive villa may be a reserved consecutive cottage in which a probable big hit is determined, or a reserved extended villa in which a big hit that is not a probable big hit is fixed.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the player can be expected even when the timer display does not reach a certain time.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and only the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display other than the timer display is also deleted before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, there is a case where the timer display is not erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the timer display is deleted only before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased in addition to before the big win symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  Also, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  Note that the timer display may be erased before the time display changes to reach a certain time.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is determined. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if a certain effect is not started, it may be possible to expect an advantageous development.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. You may comprise so that a fixed display may be carried out. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is always displayed in a definite manner. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. May be. Even when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, it may be configured such that the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is started, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the “first mode is a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, timer display of“ 5:00 ”or the like]
The second mode is a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a second time [for example, timer display of “20:00”, etc.]
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a third time [for example, a timer display of “7:77” or the like]
In the first time and the second time, the second time is longer.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

  Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the first time display in the timer display is only the first time, or the first time display in the timer display is the first time display. It is also possible to use a time other than the above time. Further, the first mode may be a mode in which the first time display in the timer display is always the first time, or the first time display in the timer display is the first time display. There may be a mode in which time may not be reached.

  Further, the second mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is only the second time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time. It may be an aspect that may be a time other than the time. The second mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time. There may be a mode in which time may not be reached.

  Further, the third mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is only the third time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time. It may be an aspect that may be a time other than the time. Further, the third mode may be a mode in which the display of the first time displayed in the timer display is always the third time, or the display of the first time displayed in the timer display is the third time. There may be a mode in which time may not be reached.

  In addition, the first time and the second time may always be longer, or the second time may not be longer.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from a time other than the first time. The third time may be a time that is necessarily different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from a time other than the second time. Further, the third time may be a time that is always different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

  In addition, the third time may be a time that is displayed in cases other than the case where the first state is given, or the time that is always given when the first state is given. It may also be a time that may not be given when the first state is given.

In addition, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and the display of the decimal part [for example, the timer notice display shown in FIG. 339 (3)] The timer display in TM1 can also display decimal places]
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

  Here, the display of the time initially displayed in the timer display may be configured so that only the display after the decimal point can be displayed in the number of seconds, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be a display of the number of seconds and a display other than the display after the decimal point. In addition, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be a display of the number of seconds and may not display a display after the decimal point.

In addition, the display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time that is first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice
The display of the third time as the display of the time that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display that is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and the display of the decimal part is also possible [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 339 (3)] In the timer display in the display TM1, it is possible to display the decimal point etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
The display of the first time as the display of the time that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time that is first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice
The display of the third time as the display of the time that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display that is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, it includes an effect display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG.
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying the timer display,
When the timer display is displayed on one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “first case [for example, one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG) Etc.) ”)))), and is configured so that
When displaying the timer display on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 384 (3) to (12), a decorative symbol display device 208 In the case where both the timer announcement effect by 7 and the timer announcement display in the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] ”),
The first case is configured such that the certain performance may not start,
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to start.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where the start of a certain effect can be expected depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

  Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the effect display. The effect display means may always execute the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

  Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only timer display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

  Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Also good. In the first case, a certain effect may not be started, or a certain effect may be started.

  Further, in the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In the second case, a certain effect may be always started, or a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, in the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means, than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means of the effect display means and the display means, Eventually, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, it is finally a big hit rather than when the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. You may comprise so that a symbol may be fixedly displayed easily.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either the effect display means or the display means may end in the middle.

  Further, the display is different in time between the effect display means and the display means, and a certain effect is started when a certain time is reached in the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means. May be.

The timer display is a display in which the time display is counted down [For example, as shown in FIGS. 339 (3) to (9), the timer notice display TM1 counts down the timer display. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, a timer display of “00:00” shown in FIG. 339 (9), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easily recognized that a certain time has been reached.

  Note that the certain time may include zero including the decimal point, for example, “0.00” or “00.00” may be displayed, “0:00” or “ “00:00” may be displayed.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One display among the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a change effect display display (hold change) by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to (g). Etc.)
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a red display mode hold icon shown in FIG. 391 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a ready image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d),
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that a display of a certain advance notice [for example, the display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to (h), a ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), preparation is being performed in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.]
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d) to FIG. The preparation-in-progress image RDY that has been displayed in the state in which the part UI3 is displayed has been displayed in the state in which the UI part UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 391 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q) is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed, etc.]
The first state may be followed by the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (l) to FIG. UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.]
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping the third display [for example, FIG. 391 ( As shown in d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3, etc.]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 391 (d) , And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 391 (m) are the same],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is easy to start [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, “at least a part of the first display overlaps with the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is placed in the UI unit UI3. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

“The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI part UI3. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q)). The state before) is started]
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q) is being executed). ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.]
The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to (p), an arrow released by Tono-sama mini character MC1. Etc. foreseeing the display of the iron plate image TP by piercing the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain notice display may be for notifying only that a certain effect is started, or may be for notifying that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

  Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

  In addition, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. i) to the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

Further, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted only before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display may be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The first display that is started may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display that is started. In addition, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, “the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), the letters“ hot ”in the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.) may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, a big button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is prepared. The middle image RDY is displayed after the display is started, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate is displayed. Image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY in preparation Is displayed before the display of the big button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a change icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
In some cases, two of the third displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 404 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 in preparation may be displayed]
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the image RDY in preparation is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the enlarged image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 401 (b) to FIG. As shown, the two images in preparation RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [for example,“ Panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a)”. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [characters related to the change icon display mode of the hold icon display (hold change prior effect display), for example, FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 391 (h),
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparing display, for example, a ready image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d)],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice such as the mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to (p), or FIGS. 393 (b3) to (b4). Is a display indicating that it is waiting for the start of display of the timer notice effect, etc.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [the hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.]
The third display may be started in the first state. [Preparation display starts in the state where the hold icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 391 (d) As shown, the display of the image RDY in preparation is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed]
The third display that has started displaying in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state in which the hold icon is displayed. The display is completed when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (d) to (n), the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The ready image RDY has been displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display in the display state is finished, the mini game and the timer notice are started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (n) to (o), the preparation image RDY is displayed. After finishing, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (c4), etc.] [When the mini-game display result is a great success or the countdown is completed with the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. As shown, when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 394 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button announcement effect by deca button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be entered after the first state [the transition from a state where the hold icon can be displayed to a state where the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391 As shown in (l) to (m) in the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon can be displayed to the hidden state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed (for example, the state where the UI unit UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed),
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states where the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, “the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the third state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, “a certain presentation may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  A certain notice display is not limited to a true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  The character is not limited to a person but may be a mini-item display such as a notice item.

  In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is described as “the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started”. In some cases, the display for starting the display of “is sometimes made”. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Further, “it is configured to be in the second state after the first state” means “may be in the second state following the first state” It may be configured as described above.

  Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through another state (for example, a 3rd state or a 3rd state) after a 1st state, you may transfer to a 2nd state. Moreover, in the state where one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  In addition, a certain effect may fade in while a certain notice display fades out.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, such as the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is enabled to be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed. The hold icon can be displayed while the UI unit UI3 is displayed.]
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [the hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (m ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern being changed.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, a part of the display different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative design. May be.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a holding icon.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [the hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. Etc. displayed on the display unit TT1]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [the display of the ready display in the state where the hold icon is displayed The position and the display position of the ready display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same. For example, the display position of the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) and the ready image shown in FIG. 391 (m) The display position of RDY is the same, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plural types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [a display form of a notice or a prefetch notice, such as a gold display form shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easier to start [the display of the hold icon than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetching notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetching notice is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. If it is displayed in a golden display mode, a red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that display of the second display is easier to start ”means that in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plural types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [a display form of a notice or a prefetch notice, such as a gold display form shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily [the hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, it is more likely to be a big hit, for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. There, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display ”means“ in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode. The case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth mode is not changed. It may be.

Further, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display [at least part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. Overlapping with the character related to the change effect display display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), a part of the UI part UI3 overlies the ninja character NJ4 Wrapped etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be overlapped and displayed also on displays other than a 1st display. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that it may be overlapped with one display and not displayed.

  In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display.

  Further, a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be changed to the first display. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed by overlapping.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In the state where both the configured image [character including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the UI part UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, which is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. Or, in the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the display other than the first display. May be configured. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In addition, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. May be. Further, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. In addition, even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [specific super reach production, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect [the state before the start of a specific super reach effect, for example, FIG. The state before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q)). Reach) is being executed etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

  Note that the first state may be a reach state before developing to SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state during execution of SP reach in the certain change.

  In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain fluctuation and further reaches a reach state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 394 (b3) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, a certain kind of timer notice display may be used.

Further, the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini-games, it may be a certain type of mini-game.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a button notice effect display by the big button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed more easily than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed.

  In addition, when the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, it is displayed only when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is a certain mode There may be.

Further, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [Preparation display in which display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (i) to (j). In addition, the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display to be started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon that has been displayed in the variable display is deleted before the next symbol variable display is started. For example, FIG. 391 (f ) To Ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be deleted only before the next symbol variation display to be started, The first display that has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display that is started in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, In the display, the first display that has started to be displayed may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [the notice is executed in the area where the display in preparation is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), there may be a case where a warning display made up of characters “hot” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, it comprises “operating means [buttons and levers, for example, production buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One of the plural types of displays is a seventh display [display of images of buttons and levers, for example, a decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), etc.]
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of images of buttons and levers is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is displayed after the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed.
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [When the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. For example, when the production button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed.
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [Preparation display is completed before the button or lever image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

  The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the case where the big button image is displayed may make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, the special color button image is displayed more easily when the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed is the jackpot symbol. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a change icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 404 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes, and after the display of one of the two preparation displays is finished, the other display is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the image RDY under preparation is enlarged and displayed]
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [the preparation display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the fluctuation icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g). The displayed image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, “when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [two displays in preparation are displayed. In the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 401 (b) to (k), the two images RDY in preparation are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display [explanation display, for example,“ Panda is a master of the lord ”displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a)”. Displayed explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [the preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed. For example, FIG. The ready image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 where the explanation display is displayed as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting” is “character display being prepared [for example,“ preparing ”in the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 391 (d)]. Character display etc.] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eleventh display [ball-free display such as a ball-free error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 422 (a1)],
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display “Please remove the ball” prompts removal of the ball, etc.]
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. [In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps the ball removal display. For example, as shown in FIG. 422 (a2) In addition, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or may be a display prompting anything other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to discharge the game ball, or a display that may not prompt the user to discharge the game ball.

  In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that prompts the player to discharge only the game ball, or a display that prompts the player to discharge other than the game ball.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and timer notice is overlapped with the ball removal display. As shown in 422 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. And may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is surely overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, “the game stand is a pachinko machine [a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a slot machine [rotating-type game machine].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is being held, but this can be realized according to this game machine.

In the above description,
“Production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208];
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 447 (9) to (13), when the timer display becomes “00:00” after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, the hold icon of the bomb display mode shown in FIG. 447 (3), etc.]
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon is a hold icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, in FIG. 447 (3) to FIG. 9 (9)]. As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer notice effect will be started in the symbol variation display to be started next],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to know the contents of the effect (timer effect is performed) with the hold icon.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the production means may necessarily execute the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of on-hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of on-hold icons. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  The timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Then, after the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display is started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain presentation may be started even when the timer display is not at a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Further, the second hold icon may indicate only that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be displayed during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than that the production may start. In addition, the second hold icon may always indicate that a timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a timer may be displayed during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it may not suggest that the production may start.

  Hereinafter, “at least suggestion” includes not only implicit suggestion but also explicit notification.

  Further, when the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may be started without fail. For example, the timer effect may not be started even when the second hold icon is displayed. For example, a false second hold icon that does not start the timer effect may be displayed, or after the second hold icon is displayed, it becomes a big hit before the timer effect starts, After the jackpot game is over, there may be a case in which the timer display is not performed due to the hold icon of the default display mode.

In addition, the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the contents of the certain effect [For example, the hold icon in the bomb display mode is a certain effect as shown in FIG. Suggesting that there may be a pseudo-ream production],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to be interested in the contents of the effect executed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

  Here, the second hold icon may indicate only the contents of a certain effect, or may indicate other contents than the certain effect. In addition, the second hold icon may necessarily suggest the contents of a certain effect, or may not suggest the contents of a certain effect.

In addition, the “second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are grouped as shown in FIG. 452 (3), etc.]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 452 (3) to FIG. 453 (23). As shown in the figure, the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs are gathered together suggests that the timer notice effect is started three times in the symbol variation display to be started next],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a sense of expectation that a timer effect is performed a plurality of times by displaying one hold icon.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be. In addition, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  Further, the second display mode may suggest only that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be plural during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the second display mode may always suggest that a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of second display modes may be performed during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it is not suggested that the timer effect is started.

  Further, the second display mode may suggest that only a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be suggested that the production other than the timer production of times is also started.

  Further, the second display mode may suggest that a timer effect is started a plurality of times only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode including one bomb shown in FIG.
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started at least once before the certain symbol variation display is ended [for example, FIG. 447 (3) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (9), the hold icon of the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer notice effect is started in the next symbol variation display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where expectation can be given to the number of timer effects by the hold icon.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. In addition, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display mode may indicate that only one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display is performed. It may also indicate something other than starting one timer effect until the end. Further, the first display mode may always suggest that one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display is performed. There may be a case where it is not suggested that one timer effect is started before the end.

  In addition, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display is performed. It may be suggested that an effect other than a single timer effect is also started before the end.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that the frequency | count of the timer effect in which the 2nd display mode is performed may be larger than the 1st display mode.

  In addition, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) that suggest a timer effect for one time. It may be configured to be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

  In addition, even in the first display mode, a plurality of timer effects may be started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3), etc.],
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for displaying a certain character [for example, Tono-sama character, etc.]
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 457 (3) Like, the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a pre-fetch notice of jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.]
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 458 (3), etc.]
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes Tono-sama's character suggests that the timer notice effect will start in the symbol change display to be started next. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where the reliability of the pre-reading notice can be expected.

  Here, only a certain character may be displayed as a 3rd holding | maintenance icon, and things other than a certain character may be displayed. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or may be one in which a certain character is not displayed.

  Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display suggesting that a timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display. A display other than a display suggesting that a timer effect may be started during execution may be included. Further, the third hold icon may not necessarily include a display suggesting that a timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where a display suggesting that a timer effect may be started during the execution is included.

  In addition, the third hold icon may not include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display that suggests anything other than the fact that a timer effect may be started during execution.

  Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

  Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Also good. In addition, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or includes a certain character. Other than starting the timer effect during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition, the third display mode may necessarily indicate that a timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or includes a certain character. There may be a case where the timer effect is not suggested to be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, the third display mode may indicate that only a timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or includes a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is also started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  The third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or includes a certain character. It may be suggested that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Note that the timer effect may be started in a symbol variation display before a certain symbol variation display is started. For example, the timer effect that the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display before a certain symbol variation display. According to this, there is a case where it is possible to focus on the game while expecting timer effects to be performed collectively in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect is configured to be executable [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc.)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and thereafter, the player may be able to see the timer effect while imagining the contents of the certain effect.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to execute only a notification related to a certain effect performed by a timer effect, or may be configured to execute a notification other than a notification related to a certain effect performed by a timer effect. It may be. Moreover, it may be configured to always execute notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured such that notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect may not be performed. It may be what was done.

“The display means is a means capable of displaying a fluctuation icon [for example, a fluctuation icon h0, etc.]
The second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may start to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter referred to as “first change icon”) in association with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 452 (7) to FIG. 8 (8), the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are gathered together has the following symbol variation display. When it starts, it is displayed as a variation icon h0 of the same display mode]
A display in which the display mode of the first variation icon changes in relation to the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, FIG. 452 (9) to (16) in the figure, a display of a change icon h0 that changes from a display mode in which three bombs are gathered to a display mode in which two bombs are gathered in a lump, etc.] ”. [For example, as shown in FIG. 452 (8) to FIG. 16 (16), when one timer notice effect is executed, three bombs are grouped together. The change icon h0 changes to a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together],
The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon that can suggest the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, As shown in FIG. 452 (16), the change icon h0 changed to a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together suggests that the timer notice effect will be executed two more times, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there are cases where the variable icon can function as a means for notifying the number of times of timer effects.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variation icon. Further, the display means may always display the variation icon, or may not display the variation icon.

  Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying only as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be displayed. The icon may be configured to start displaying even if it is other than the first variable icon. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start to be displayed as the first variation icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon You may be comprised so that a display may not be started as a 1st fluctuation | variation icon.

  Further, only the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be displayed. A thing other than the icon may be configured to start displaying as the first variation icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the first display is displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display is performed. A display other than the first display may be displayed in association with the execution of one timer effect. Further, the first display may be always displayed in association with the execution of one timer effect during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be performed. It may be configured such that the first display may not be displayed in association with the execution of one timer effect.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in association with only one timer effect being performed during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be performed. It may be configured such that the first display is displayed in connection with things other than the execution of one timer effect.

  Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be able to suggest only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display may be possible. Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may necessarily indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, There may be cases where the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display may not be suggested.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner capable of suggesting a time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIG. 462 (6) The timer display is displayed above the hold icon of the bomb display mode shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where the contents of a certain effect to be executed can be imagined by suggesting the display of the initial time value in the timer display.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display may be It may be displayed in a mode other than a mode in which the time displayed when it is started can be suggested. Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time that is displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed on the screen may not be displayed in a suggestive manner.

  In addition, the second hold icon may be displayed in a manner that can suggest only the time displayed when the timer display is started, or the timer display starts to be displayed. It may be displayed in such a manner that it is possible to suggest a time other than the time displayed at the time of being displayed.

In addition, “a plurality of timer effects (hereinafter referred to as“ a plurality of timer effects ”) may be started simultaneously during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. Two timer notice effects are started at the same time, etc.]
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like according to the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIG.
Displayed when display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display [for example, second timer notice display TM12 etc. shown in FIG. 460 (17)]”) is started. Time [for example, 7 seconds (“07:00”), etc.] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display [for example, the third timer shown in FIG. 460 (17)]”. The timer [preliminary display TM13, etc.] ") is displayed for a time [for example, 8 seconds (" 08:00 ", etc.)] is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 461 (19), etc.] may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 461 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (notices) are performed by combining the timer effects.

  Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. In addition, a plurality of timer effects may always be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects are also simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

  Note that the start times of the plurality of timer effects may be shifted, and at least some of the execution periods of the timer effects may overlap.

  Also, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different times. It may be the same time.

  In addition, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time. An effect other than the first effect may also be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the first presentation may always be performed as a certain presentation when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or a certain presentation when the first timer display reaches a certain time. There may be cases where the first performance is not performed.

  In addition, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or other than when the first timer display reaches a certain time. Alternatively, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. An effect other than the second effect may be performed as a certain effect. Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may be always performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time, There may be cases where the second performance is not performed.

  Further, there may be a case where the second effect is performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display reaches a certain time, or other than when the second timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the first effect and the second effect may be different from each other, or may be the same.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), etc.]
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), when a lower plate full error occurs, a ball removal error is displayed. Display, etc.],
One of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be overlapped with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″) The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer preview display TM11 and the second timer preview display TM12, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the ball removal operation can be accelerated by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the ball removal error display. The display means may always display a ball removal error display or may not display a ball removal error display.

  Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

  In addition, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be displayed. May be overlapped with a display other than the other display. In addition, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to be overlapped with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be the other display. You may be comprised so that it may not overlap with a display.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a plurality of types of timer productions,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like according to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 425 (3) to (12)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like according to the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to (7)]. ,
The first timer effect is the first timer display after the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 425 (3)] is started. A first effect [e.g., pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 425 (13), etc.] may be started in response to the display of time [e.g., “00:00”, etc.]. It is a structured production,
The second timer effect is displayed after the second timer display [for example, the second timer preview display TM12 shown in FIG. 425 (5)] is started. In response to the display indicating the time [for example, “00:00” or the like], the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 425 (8) or the like] is started. It is a production that is structured so that there may be cases,
During display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, the period during which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 425 (3) to (12)] and the second timer display are displayed. The displayed period [eg, the period shown in FIG. 425 (5) to FIG. 7 (7)] overlaps (hereinafter referred to as “first period [eg, FIG. 425 (5) to FIG. 7 (7)]”. The period shown, etc.] ”) may occur.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means. According to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display can be raised by overlapping the timer effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of timer effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of timer effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer effects.

  In addition, the first timer effect may be the case where only the first effect is started in response to the first timer display having reached the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as such, and after the display of the first timer display is started, the first timer display becomes the first time according to the first time, It may be configured such that an effect may also be started. In addition, the first timer effect is always started in response to the first timer display having reached the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first presentation may not be started in response to the first timer display having reached the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as such.

  In addition, the first timer effect may be started only when the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first timer display may be configured in accordance with the first timer display after the first timer display is started and after the first timer display has reached the first time. It may be configured such that the production of may start.

  In addition, the first timer effect may start in response to the first timer display having reached the first time only after the display of the first timer display is started. The first effect may be configured in response to the first timer display having reached the first time even after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

  In addition, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display becoming the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured such that an effect may also be started. In addition, the second timer effect is always started in response to the second timer display having reached the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second presentation may not be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the second timer display display is started. It may be configured as such.

  In addition, the second timer effect may be started only when the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may be configured in accordance with the second timer display after the second timer display is started, after the second timer display is started. It may be configured such that the production of may start.

  In addition, the second timer effect may start in response to the second timer display having reached the second time only after the display of the second timer display is started. The second presentation may be performed in response to the second timer display reaching the second time even after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

  Further, it may be configured so that only the first period may occur during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or during a display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period other than the first period. May also occur. Further, the first period may be generated during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, the first period may be generated only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may be displayed even when a certain decorative symbol variation display is not displayed. It may be configured to occur.

In addition, “at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a pre-reading notice [ For example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to (8), the second timer notice display TM12 among the timer notice effects related to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effects related to the second timer notice display TM12. The timer notice effect related to is an effect executed as a prefetch notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the display form of the prefetch notice, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where a certain decorative symbol variation display effect can be excited by using the timer effect as a pre-reading notice.

  Here, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed only as a pre-reading notice. In addition, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as a thing other than the pre-reading notice. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is always executed as a pre-reading notice, It may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed during the period may not be executed as a pre-reading notice.

  In addition, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a prefetch notice. In addition, an effect other than the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as a prefetch notice. .

  Further, it may be configured such that one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a pre-reading notice. You may comprise so that the timer presentation of both the 1st timer presentation currently performed in the period and the 2nd timer presentation may be performed as a prefetch notice.

In addition, “one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a look-ahead notice. [For example, as shown in FIG. 425 (3) to FIG. 13 (13), of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12, The timer notice effect relating to the 1 timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing a pseudo-continuous effect that is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect relating to the second timer notice display TM12 is a display mode of the hold icon. Etc., etc.]
In some cases, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 427 (37), of the timer notice effect on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer notice effect on the fourth timer notice display TM14, the timer notice effect on the third timer notice display TM13 is This is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as the notice effect, and the timer notice effect according to the fourth timer notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group notice as the notice effect, etc. ],
There are cases where both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed as pre-reading notices (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, As shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to (13), out of the timer advance notice effect relating to the first timer advance notice TM11 and the timer advance notice effect relating to the second timer advance notice TM12, the first timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. The timer notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12 is an effect executed to start the prefetch mode, and the like. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where an expectation can be given that the effect started later is the same decorative symbol variation display as the target of the effect started earlier.

  Here, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a prefetch notice. One of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed other than the notice related to a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is prefetched. It may be executed as something other than a notice. In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be necessarily executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be always executed as a prefetch notice. However, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may not be executed as a prefetch notice. Also good.

  Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice relating to a certain decorative symbol variation display. There may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period are executed as other than the notice regarding the decorative symbol variation display. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or are being executed in the first period. There may be a case where both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect are not executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed only as a pre-reading notice, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed. There may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed as other than the pre-reading notice. In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be always executed as the pre-reading notice, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period And the second timer effect may not be executed as pre-reading notices.

In addition, in the first case, the first effect [for example, the prefetching mode shown in FIG. 428 (6), etc.] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. Has been
In the first case, the decorative design starting after the certain decorative design variation display [for example, the decorative design variation display executed in the period shown in FIGS. 428 (2) to (10)]. During the display of the fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “first decoration symbol fluctuation display [for example, decoration symbol fluctuation display executed during the period shown in FIG. 428 (11) to FIG. 18 (18)]”). The second production [for example, the production of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 428 (13), etc.] may be started.
In the first case, in the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer notice effect relating to the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer preview effect or the like related to the first timer preview display TM11 shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display [ For example, the effect is executed as a pre-reading notice for the decorative symbol variation display etc. executed in the period shown in FIG. 429 (19) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where a first decorative symbol variation display can be expected as a pre-reading notice while a certain ornamental symbol variation display is swelled by a timer effect.

  Here, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be started during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, a certain decorative symbol may be started. You may be comprised so that effects other than a 1st effect may also be started during the display of a variable display. In the first case, the first effect may be always started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. It may be configured so that the first presentation may not be started.

  In the first case, the first effect may be started only during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, a certain decorative symbol variation may be started. You may be comprised so that a 1st effect may be started other than during the display of a display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in cases other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the first decoration You may be comprised so that effects other than a 2nd effect may also be started during the display of a symbol fluctuation display. In the first case, the second effect may be always started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display is performed. It may be configured such that the second effect may not be started during the display of.

  In the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the first decoration may be started. You may be comprised so that a 2nd effect may be started besides during the display of a symbol fluctuation display. Also, only in the first case, the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in cases other than the first case, You may be comprised so that a 2nd effect may be started during the display of a 1st decoration design fluctuation display.

  Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be a thing other than the pre-reading notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be a thing, and it may not be performed as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative design variation display started after the first decorative design variation display.

Further, in the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed [for example, FIG. A certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 13 (13) is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the panda display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since one effect is a change on hold, it can be expected that the other effect is performed on the decorative symbol variation display that is the target of the change on hold.

  Here, in the first case, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and in the first case, the first effect The production of both the production and the second production may be an production in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  Note that a pre-reading notice other than the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon may be performed.

In addition, the “first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, a change effect in the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 434 (9), etc.]
The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG.
The hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one of the first effect and the second effect may further change due to the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. As a result of the timer notice effect relating to the one timer notice display TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon in the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the head length is performed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where a plurality of stages of rank increase of the hold icon can be raised by the timer effect.

  Here, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed only by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by an effect other than the other effect. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effects and the second effect may be changed by the other effects. There may be a case where the hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one effect does not change due to the other effect.

  In addition, only the hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one of the first effects and the second effect may be further changed according to the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect. Other than the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects, the other effect may be further changed by the other effect. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode is changed only by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or among the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by an effect other than one of the effects may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, “the timing at which the first effect relating to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second timer effect being executed in the first period The timing at which the second effect is started may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to (13), the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 is provided. The timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect executed by the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is different from the timing at which the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be variations in the start timing of the production related to the timer production.

  Here, the timing at which the first effect relating to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect relating to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. May be configured such that only the timing to be performed may be different, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period is started and the first period is executed in the first period. It may be configured such that the timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect is started may be different. In addition, a timing at which the first effect relating to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and a second effect relating to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. The timing may be configured to be different from each other, the timing at which the first effect relating to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect being executed in the first period It may be configured such that the timing at which the second effect relating to the timer effect is started may be the same.

In addition, the first notice icon [for example, the swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 430 (10)] may be displayed as the first effect [for example, FIG. 430 (3 ) To (10) (FIG. 432 (3) to (10)) As a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11, as a certain effect, the swordsman character KNG Etc.],
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer notice effect or the like according to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 432 (3) to (10)] is executed as a notice related to the certain decorative symbol variation display. Is displayed after the first notice icon is displayed during display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 432 (2) to 433 (24)]. Thus, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 433 (20) to FIG. 22 (22), etc.]] Configured to get started,
When the first timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like according to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 430 (3) to (10)] is executed as a prefetch notice, the certain decorative design is used. After the first notice icon is displayed during display of a variable display [for example, a decorative pattern variable display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 430 (2) to (18)], the certain decorative pattern is displayed. In response to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display started after the variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIG. 431 (19) to (29)]. The production [for example, production of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 431 (25) to FIG. 27 (27)] is started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where it can be noted whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is given as a notice or a look-ahead notice.

  In addition, when the second effect is started first, the notice effect corresponding to the first notice icon is the same target as the second effect depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with a decorative symbol variation display.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or a thing other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect without fail, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

  Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the certain decorative symbol variation is displayed. It may be configured so that only an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started while the display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice related to a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display, an effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the certain decorative symbol variation is displayed. It may be configured such that an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started while the display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice related to a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the presentation corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. May be.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the certain decorative symbol variation is displayed. An effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only while the display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice related to a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started in addition to the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. May be. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured such that an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started while the variable display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice related to a certain decorative symbol change display, or In addition to the display of the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the presentation corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. May be.

  Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and then is started after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that only an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, during the display of the decoration symbol variation display started after a certain decoration symbol variation display, other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon You may comprise so that an effect may also be started. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and then is started after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured that an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decoration symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and then is started after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured such that an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started only during display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed in addition to the display of the decoration symbol variation display started after a certain decoration symbol variation display. May be configured to be initiated. When the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, it starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display only after the first notice icon is displayed while the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. An effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display to be performed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-read notice, a certain decoration In addition to the display of the first notice icon during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the decoration symbol variation display started after a certain decoration symbol variation display. May be configured to be initiated.

It should be noted that “the second notice icon may be displayed as the second performance,
When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, An effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during display of the decorative symbol variation display,
When the second timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, after the certain decorative symbol variation display. An effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variation display to be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

  In addition, when one of the first effect and the second effect is a notice related to a certain decorative pattern change display, and the other is a prefetch notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second effect The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

In addition, it is configured to run multiple types of mini-games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18)],
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10)],
In the first mini game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 435 (3)] becomes the first time [for example, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game for which the result is derived previously [For example, in the treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is “00:00”. The results have been derived before]
In the second mini game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 435 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game for which the result is derived previously [For example, in the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. The results have been derived before]
The first effect is configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the first mini-game [for example, the result of the mini-game of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18) is successful. , The pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, etc.]
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini game [For example, the result of the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10) is successful. When the result is, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 435 (12) changes to the display mode of the watch length is executed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it is possible not only to wait for the timer display time but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

  Here, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or a configuration other than a plurality of types of mini games can be executed. Further, a plurality of types of mini-games may be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed.

  Further, the first mini game may be one in which only the result is derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. The first mini game may be one in which the result is always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived.

  Further, the first mini game may be one in which a result is derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Besides, the result may be derived.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the result is derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, the second mini game may be one in which the result is always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived.

  Further, the second mini game may be one in which the result is derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Besides, the result may be derived.

  In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding only to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the first mini game. You may be comprised so that it may become. In addition, the first presentation may be configured so as to be a presentation that always corresponds to the result of the first mini game, or the first presentation may not be a presentation according to the result of the first mini game. It may be configured to be.

  Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding only to the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the second mini game. You may be comprised so that it may become. In addition, the second presentation may be configured so as to be a presentation that always corresponds to the result of the second mini game, or the second presentation may not be a presentation according to the result of the second mini game. It may be configured to be.

  Note that the type of the mini game may be the same or different between the first timer effect and the second timer effect. Moreover, you may comprise so that the start order and type of a mini game may be matched.

  Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during the execution of the mini game. For example, when the mini game is successful, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed. An effect such as suggesting may be performed.

In addition, when the result of the first mini game becomes the first result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 435 (15) to FIG. When the result of the treasure chest minigame shown in (18) is a successful result, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. Etc.)
When the result of the first mini game becomes the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third mode [for example, FIG. 437 (15) to FIG. 18 (18)]. When the result of the mini-game of the treasure box shown in FIG. 5 is a failure result, the effect of losing shown in FIG. Etc.]
When the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second mode [for example, FIG. 435 (7) to FIG. 10 (10)]. When the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 4 is a successful result, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 435 (12) changes to the display mode of the watch length is the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. As a result that is performed as a result, etc.]
When the result of the second mini game becomes the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth mode [for example, FIG. 437 (7) to FIG. 10 (10). When the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 4 is a failure result, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 437 (12) changes to the display mode of the panda As a result that is performed as a result, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the variation of the effect by the combination of the mini game and the timer effect is increased and the interest can be enhanced.

  Here, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. When the first result is obtained, the first effect may be performed in a mode other than the first mode. Further, when the result of the first mini game becomes the first result, the first presentation may be performed in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. When the result is, the first effect may not be performed in the first mode.

  Moreover, when the result of a 1st mini game turns into a 1st result, it may be comprised so that only a 1st effect may be performed in a 1st aspect, and the result of a 1st mini game is 1st. When it becomes the result of the above, it may be configured such that an effect other than the first effect is also performed in the first mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode even in cases other than the case where the result is obtained.

  Moreover, when the result of a 1st mini game turns into a 3rd result, you may comprise so that a 1st presentation may be performed only in a 3rd aspect, and the result of a 1st mini game is a 3rd result. When the result is, the first effect may be performed in a mode other than the third mode. Further, when the result of the first mini game becomes the third result, the first performance may be always performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. When the result is, the first effect may not be performed in the third mode.

  Moreover, when the result of a 1st mini game turns into a 3rd result, it may be comprised so that only a 1st effect may be performed in a 3rd aspect, and the result of a 1st mini game is a 3rd result. When the result is, the effects other than the first effect may be performed in the third aspect. In addition, the first presentation may be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game is the third result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode even in cases other than the case where the result is obtained.

  Moreover, when the result of a 2nd mini game turns into a 2nd result, it may be comprised so that a 2nd production may be performed only in a 2nd aspect, and the result of a 2nd mini game may be 2nd. When the result is, the second effect may be performed in a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the result of the second mini game becomes the second result, the second presentation may be necessarily performed in the second mode, and the result of the second mini game is the second result. When the result is, the second performance may not be performed in the second mode.

  Moreover, when the result of a 2nd mini game turns into a 2nd result, it may be comprised so that only a 2nd effect may be performed in a 2nd aspect, and the result of a 2nd mini game is 2nd. When it becomes the result of the above, it may be configured such that an effect other than the second effect is also performed in the second mode. Further, the second presentation may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode even in a case other than the case where the above result is obtained.

  Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second presentation may be performed only in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. When the result is, the second presentation may be performed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect. Further, when the result of the second mini game becomes the fourth result, the second presentation may be necessarily performed in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. When the result is, the second effect may not be performed in the fourth mode.

  Moreover, when the result of a 2nd mini game turns into a 4th result, it may be comprised so that only a 2nd effect may be performed in a 4th aspect, and the result of a 2nd mini game is a 4th result. When the result is, an effect other than the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode. Further, the second presentation may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode only when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode even in a case other than the case where the result is obtained.

“One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a third mini-game,
When the result of the third mini game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth aspect,
When the result of the third mini game is the sixth result, the third performance is configured to be performed in the sixth aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the time display [for example, “10:00” or the like] of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 441 (3)] becomes the first time. Is a display indicating the time until [for example, 10 seconds]
The time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is reached [for example, the first time displayed as “10:00” in FIG. 441 (3). 1 timer notice display TM11, as shown in FIG. 441 (12) to FIG. 13 (13), the time shown in the timer display is added before “00:00”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may function as an effect that changes the aspect of the first timer effect, and may give the player expectations.

  Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time is reached, or may indicate a time other than the time until the first time is reached. May be. The time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the first time. May be.

  The time display of the first timer display may be changed only before the first time is reached, or the time display of the first timer display is the first time. You may be comprised so that it may change in addition to before. The time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is changed, or the time display of the first timer display is changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  In addition, only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is reached, and time display other than the time display of the first timer display may also be changed. It may be configured to be changed before the time is reached.

In addition, the time display of the second timer display is a display showing the time until the second time is reached,
The time display of the second timer display is configured to be changed before the second time,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may function as an effect that changes the mode of the second timer effect, and may give the player expectations.

  Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time is reached, or may indicate a time other than the time until the second time is reached. May be. The time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the second time is reached. May be.

  The time display of the second timer display may be changed only before the second time is reached, or the time display of the second timer display is the second time. You may be comprised so that it may change in addition to before. The time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time is reached, or the time display of the second timer display is changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time is reached, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display may be changed to the second time display. It may be configured to be changed before the time is reached.

In addition, the first timer display [e.g., the diagram is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [e.g., the decorative symbol variation display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 425 (2) to 426 (22)]. The first timer notice display TM11 etc. shown in 425 (3) may be the first time [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 425 (5)] may be the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. [For example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 425 (5) displays “00:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (7)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the first time. Further, the first timer display may be always set to the first time during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be displayed during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The first time may not be configured.

  In addition, the first timer display may be set to the first time only during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured such that one timer display may be the first time.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the second timer display may become the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time. The second timer display may be always set to the second time during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be displayed during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. You may be comprised so that it may not become 2nd time.

  In addition, the second timer display may be set to the second time only during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

In addition, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed in FIG. ), And the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (5).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the start timing of the timer display is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

  Here, only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing other than the timing and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different. The timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. The timing at which the timer display is started may be the same.

In addition, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, As shown in FIG. 425 (3), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as “10:00” when the display is started, and the second timer notice display TM12 is shown in FIG. 425 (5). As shown, when the display starts, “03:00” is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

  Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. The time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. . Also, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. There may be a case where the time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started are the same.

In addition, “the first time and the second time are the same time [for example,“ 00:00 ”, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the start timing of the production may be easily recognized.

  The first time and the second time may be different times.

In addition, the first time is 0,
The second time is zero;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the start timing of the production can be grasped more easily.

  The first time may be other than zero. The second time may be other than zero.

In addition, “ball removal error display [for example, ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″)” can be displayed,
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), when a lower plate full error occurs, a ball removal error is displayed. Display, etc.],
At least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with the ball removal error display [for example, FIG. 445 (9 ″) As shown, the ball removal error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the ball removal operation can be accelerated by the timer display.

  Here, only the ball removal error display may be displayed, or a display other than the ball removal error display may be displayed. Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed without fail, or the ball removal error display may not be displayed.

  Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

  Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped only with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. It may be configured such that at least one of the two timer displays may be overlapped with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display. The display may be configured such that at least one of the displays may not overlap the ball removal error display.

  In addition, only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. It may be configured such that both displays of the timer display may overlap with the ball removal error display.

In addition, “the effect means is a display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208];
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is generated when the timer display is changed to a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect [for example, a strong effect shown in FIG. 458 (17)”). The first timer notice display TM11 is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 458 (9) to (17). After the timer display becomes “00:00”, a strong savory group notice will be started, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 458 (3), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3), etc.]
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon includes a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character [e.g., Tono-sama character]. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 458 (3) to (7), the hold icon in the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes Tono-sama characters is displayed in the symbol variation display to be started next. Suggests that the timer notice will begin, etc.]
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which the certain character is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may start during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 457 (3). On the other hand, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a look-ahead notice of jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the contents of the certain effect [for example, the hold icon in the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a bomb as shown in FIG. 458 (3). "Group" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that a strong Sabohan group notice may be given as a certain effect, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon having a default display mode illustrated in FIG.
The first hold icon is a default hold icon;
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 458 (3 in FIG. 458) is displayed rather than the case where the third hold icon [for example, the hold icon in the display form of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3)] is displayed. ) Is displayed, the certain effect is more likely to be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect is configured to be executable [for example, as shown in FIG. 456 (22), a Sabohani icon indicating that a strong Sabohan group notice has been performed. Etc., informing by displaying SBH],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 458 (3 in FIG. 458) is displayed rather than the case where the third hold icon [for example, the hold icon in the display form of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3)] is displayed. The timer effect is easier to be executed when the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time that is displayed when the display of the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a plurality of timer effects (hereinafter referred to as“ multiple timer effects ”) may be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (17), Two timer notice effects are started at the same time, etc.]
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like according to the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIG.
Displayed when display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display [for example, second timer notice display TM12 etc. shown in FIG. 460 (17)]”) is started. Time [for example, 7 seconds (“07:00”), etc.] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display [for example, the third timer shown in FIG. 460 (17)]”. The timer [preliminary display TM13, etc.] ") is displayed for a time [for example, 8 seconds (" 08:00 ", etc.)] is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 461 (19), etc.] may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 461 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), etc.]
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), when a lower plate full error occurs, a ball removal error is displayed. Display, etc.],
One of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be overlapped with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″) The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer preview display TM11 and the second timer preview display TM12, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208];
Display means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, the first timer preview display TM11, the second timer preview display TM12, etc. shown in FIG.
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is a certain effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time [for example, display of “00:00” or the like] after the display of the timer display is started. SP reach production shown in 431 (25) to FIG. 27 (27), hold change production shown in FIG. 430 (12) to FIG. 13 (13), pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 436 (20) to FIG. Etc.] [for example, as shown in FIGS. 430 (3) to 431 (27), the timer display is displayed after the first timer notice display TM 11 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 430 (3) to 431 (13), the SP display is started when the second timer notice display TM12 is started. When it becomes 0:00, the production of the hold change starts As shown in FIGS. 435 (3) to 436 (21), the pseudo continuous effect is started when the timer display becomes “00:00” after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Etc.],
The display means provides an indication regarding the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as “first display [hereinafter referred to as“ first display ”) in at least a part of the area where the timer display is displayed after the timer display indicates the certain time. For example, “SP waiting” display in the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 430 (11), “hold change” display in the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 430 (14), FIG. 21)) ”may be displayed.”) May be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, the first display can be continuously displayed at least until the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, as a result of the countdown of the timer display being performed, the timer display is configured to display the certain time [for example, as shown in FIG. 430 (3) to FIG. 10 (10)] In addition, the timer display “06:00:00” is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11, and as a result of the countdown, the timer display on the first timer preview display TM11 becomes “00:00”, etc.]
The timer display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 336 (A8) to (A9), the timer notice display TM1 may display movement],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display is changed [For example, as shown in FIG. 336 (A8) to (A9), when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed, the display is performed. Position changes],
The movement display is started after the display of the timer display is started and before the countdown of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 336 (A8) to (A10)]. In addition, the timer display countdown has started after the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 has been performed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started and before the movement display started before the countdown of the timer display is started, the countdown of the timer display is started [ For example, as shown in FIGS. 336 (A8) to (A10), the timer display countdown is started after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed by the movement display of the timer preview display TM1. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 458 (3), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3), etc.]
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon is a hold icon including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 458 (3) to FIG. As shown in 7), the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold indicates that the timer notice effect will be started in the next symbol change display to be started],
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may start during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 457 (3). On the other hand, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a look-ahead notice of jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the contents of the certain effect [for example, the hold icon in the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a bomb as shown in FIG. 458 (3). "Group" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that a strong Sabohan group notice may be given as a certain effect, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon having a default display mode illustrated in FIG.
The first hold icon is a default hold icon;
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display ends.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 458 (3 in FIG. 458) is displayed rather than the case where the third hold icon [for example, the hold icon in the display form of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. ) Is displayed, the certain effect is more likely to be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect is configured to be executable [for example, as shown in FIG. 456 (22), a Sabohani icon indicating that a strong Sabohan group notice has been performed. Etc., informing by displaying SBH],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the display of the timer display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time until the symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (10), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed from the start of the symbol fluctuation display to the end of the symbol fluctuation display, and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is “ 0:00 ”, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display indicating the certain time is a display indicating 0 [for example, display of“ 00:00 ”, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is a pseudo-continuous effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (20) to FIG. 21 (21), etc.]
The first display is a suggestion display related to the pseudo-continuous effect [for example, a display of “× 2” in the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 436 (21), etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is a super reach effect [for example, an SP reach effect or the like shown in FIG. 431 (25) to FIG. 27 (27)],
The first display is a display suggesting that the super reach production is started [for example, “SP waiting” display in the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 430 (11), etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 15 or 16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The game stand, wherein the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine according to appendix 34,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to appendix 45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 45 or 46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
48. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons indicated by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming machine according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game stand according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the animation display position in the middle. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
“The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” as described in Supplementary Note 71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game stand according to appendix 81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming machine according to appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to appendix 91, wherein
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first notice icon”),
The second display is a display including a display representing the first notice icon in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 93,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game stand according to appendix 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 95,
The first display is a display displayed in a hold display frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix 98)
A gaming machine according to appendix 97,
The second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game stand according to appendix 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
A gaming machine according to attachment 100,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion expanded from the first display of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “expanded portion”), the fourth display can be displayed.
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101 or appendix 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 100 to 103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game stand according to appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game stand according to appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game stand according to appendix 106 or appendix 107,
The effect display is a display that changes a display mode of the icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 108,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of lines,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 110,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
A gaming machine according to attachment 112, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 114,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means;
The first area,
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as “the number of times of acceptance”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
A display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
In the first button effect, the display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”) in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area of the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b6,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) after the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first variation icon”) can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display,
The area where the notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area where the first variation icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation icon”) can be displayed.
Both the second variation icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
The icon that was displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c5,
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the fluctuation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
An animation including movement of the notice icon can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
The display means includes an image display device.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c8,
In the non-electric support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means for emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that emits light in a second light emitting mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d3,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first display is configured so that the first display can be started as the operation means is repeatedly hit when the operation means is pressed for a long time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
In the second display, a second number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, compared to a case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. The display is easier to start,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a light emitting state,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a non-light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
A gaming machine according to appendix d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d11,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d13,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
A game machine according to appendix d14,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated in the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
A game machine according to appendix d18,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
A gaming machine according to appendix d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
A gaming machine according to appendix d20,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
A game machine according to appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d23 to d26,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plural types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode in the first operation mode more than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. Is the image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
A game machine according to appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
A gaming machine according to appendix d29 or d30,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
A gaming machine according to appendix d31,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that enters a light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d32,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d33,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d34,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game stand described in appendix d35,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the operation means is assumed to have been operated the first number of times in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed by means,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
A game machine according to appendix d39,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
A game machine according to appendix d39 or d40,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d41,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
A game machine according to appendix d42,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The game stand according to appendix d42 or d43,
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is being operated is maintained for the first time or longer, the operation means has been operated once. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d44,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d45,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
A game machine according to appendix d46,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d47,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
A gaming machine according to appendix d50,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may start when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operation means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
A game machine according to appendix d54,
Equipped with light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emission states
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d56)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
The light emitting means is in the lighting state, indicating that it is in a state of accepting the operation of the operating means,
The light emitting means is in the extinguished state, and represents that the operation means is not accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d57,
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d58,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one option from the plurality of options.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) displayed when a first option of the plurality of options is selected.
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
A game machine according to appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a first number after the display of the selection display is started,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d60,
When the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d62)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d61,
Long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d62,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
A game machine according to appendix d63,
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
A gaming machine according to appendix d63 or d64,
The second state is a state of receiving an operation for starting display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d63 to d65,
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d66,
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d67,
The second display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d68,
The third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
A game machine according to appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
A game machine according to appendix d70,
The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d71,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
A first operating means;
A second directing means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d73 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73 or d74,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d73 to d75,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
A game machine according to appendix d76,
The third rendering means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
A gaming machine according to appendices d73 to d77,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d79 is “effects executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A gaming machine according to appendix d81,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d82,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
A game machine according to appendix d83,
With a fourth directing means,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth presentation means is a means provided in the third presentation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 79 to 84,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may start during display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d85,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d86,
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is “multiple operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d87,
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
A game machine according to appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second production is a back button production,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A game machine according to appendix d80,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note d80 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the first display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to appendix 82,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note 82 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the second display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
A second directing means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
A game machine according to appendix d84,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d84 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to execute multiple types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming table according to appendix d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) includes a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display”) is a display including a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in the first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period,
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part overlaps (hereinafter referred to as “third period”);
The result of the first effect display is performed as a notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”),
The result of the second effect display is performed as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If the operation means is operated during the third period, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is made after the second notice is made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If there is an operation of the operating means in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is performed,
The first notice may change according to the second notice after the second notice has been made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e3,
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e5,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second aspect rather than in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol is configured to be easily displayed in a final manner.
When the mini-game is started, the first notice is more easily performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
The second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is executed in the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
The first case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized and displayed in the first case than the second case,
The second case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the second case than the third case,
The third case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the third case than the fourth case.
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily. Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the second case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the third case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times that the operation means required for the result of the first effect display is performed and the number of times the operation means required for the result of the second effect display are operated Is different,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the event that the mini-game is performed and the first notice is performed, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized more easily than the case where the first notice is performed without the mini-game. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of performing decorative symbol variation display,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
A gaming machine according to appendix e12,
Provide notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) indicating that the second notice is to be performed.
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
A gaming table according to appendix e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is performed, the first production is configured more easily than the second production,
When the second mini game is performed, the second effect is configured more easily than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rate of the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the non-electric support state and the electric support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e15,
The first mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e13,
The first mini game is a game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The first mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a third character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a fourth character,
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears,
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display”) is performed.
When the mini game is started, the third effect display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The certain display area is partitioned by a frame,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a preset display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e20,
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in connection with the start of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
Provided with a display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is performed rather than the first notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed easily.
The mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is a first result;
One of the plurality of results is a second result;
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini-game,
The second notice is more easily performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e24,
Before the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game becomes the second result, which suggests that the second notice is likely to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
A game machine according to appendix e24 or e25,
Providing directing means that can execute the first directing,
The effect means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect performed in relation to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of performance results is a first performance result,
One of the plurality of performance results is a second performance result,
Before the result of the first effect is derived, it is suggested that the result of the first effect becomes an advantageous development by becoming the second effect result,
Benefits that are more advantageous to the player than the second result is more likely to be given to the player,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
A game machine according to appendix e26,
When the second performance result is derived, a big hit is given,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The game stand according to appendix e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be executed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed in the second period,
The first period and the second period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In one decorative symbol variation display, the mini game is started before the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived,
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is easier to perform than the second notice,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e24 to e30,
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is not changed. Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display starting after the change display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e34,
The mini-game starts before reaching,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a mini game,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The mini game results change depending on the operation status of the operation means,
The result of the mini game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) that is not related to the result of the determination of success or failure.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
A gaming machine according to appendix e36,
The mini-game is a game aimed at achieving a certain problem,
Whether or not the certain problem is achieved depends on the operation status of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The game stand according to appendix e36 or e37,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The mini-game is a game that may be started in a first period (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
A gaming machine according to appendix e38,
An automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable,
In the mini game in the first case, the auto operation is configured to be impossible to execute,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The game stand according to appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in a second period (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game,
In the first case, the first result is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The game stand according to appendix e40,
The second period is a period not including the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The game stand according to appendix e40 or e41,
In the second case, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the first case. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e43)
A gaming machine according to appendix e42,
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-read notice,
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The type of mini game is different between the first case and the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e40 to e44,
In the mini game in the first case, an effective period display (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display”) of the operating means is configured to be displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”) is displayed.
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
The speed at which the meter decreases is different between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game in the first case, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”) is displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, a display for urging the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”) is displayed.
The first operation promotion display includes a first number of display patterns,
The second operation promotion display includes a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is a mini game effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”) may be executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”) may be derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display will increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first production can be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first effect may be a notice effect. The second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a small operating means.

(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The first state is a state in the entire period in which the first effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f3)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix f1 or f2,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
When the second operation means is operated within the second period, the second effect is started, and when the second operation device is operated, the second effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The second operating means may be an operating means that always vibrates when the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
A gaming machine according to appendix f3,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate even in at least a part of the state in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The first state is a state where the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
When the first effect is started when the first operation means is operated within the first period, and when the first effect is not started even when the first operation means is operated, Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate or configured to vibrate without fail.

(Appendix f6)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated in a state where the first notification is being executed, It may be an operating means.

(Appendix f7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, it is configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect can be started,
In the state where the third effect is being executed, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is configured such that a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g2)
The game stand according to appendix g1,
The first notice display is a display including a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g3)
A gaming table according to the appendix g1 or g2,
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of an effect,
The certain performance is configured to develop after the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g4)
A gaming machine according to appendix g3,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third notice display”),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display starts to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g5)
The game stand according to appendix g4,
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period,
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g7)
The game stand according to appendix g6,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a second display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fourth display mode,
The case in which the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form is more in accordance with the third display form than the case in which the second notice display is displayed in the second display form. It ’s designed to make it easier to display the first notice.
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g6,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display;
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The first advance notice according to the third display mode is more effective when the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode. The display is organized to make it easier to see,
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices g1 to g8,
The first notice display is a display that is displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period is a third period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g10)
The game stand according to appendix g9,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g11)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying the first display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display is a display including a display relating to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The first display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation means being operated,
The first notice display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g12)
A gaming machine according to appendix g11,
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of an effect,
The certain performance is configured to develop after the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g13)
A gaming machine according to appendix g12,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third notice display”),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display starts to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g14)
A gaming machine according to appendix g13,
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period,
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g14,
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g15,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display;
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
In the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than in the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first display by the third display body sulfur is performed. Is configured to make it easier to display
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g16,
The first notice display is a display that is displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period is a third period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g18)
A gaming machine according to appendix g17,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g19)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display related to a certain effect,
The second display is a display related to the certain effect,
The first display is a display that may be temporarily displayed as a display constituting at least part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g20)
A gaming machine according to appendix g19,
The certain effect is an effect that starts after the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g21)
A gaming machine according to appendix g19 or g20,
The first display is a display provided with a first number of patterns,
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns,
The second number is greater than the first number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g22)
The game stand according to appendix g21,
The first number is one;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative designs is three,
The certain effect is an effect that starts when the three first displays are once displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the display modes of the three first displays may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative designs is three,
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence,
The certain effect is an effect that starts when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol that is temporarily displayed once in the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g25)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g24,
The display means may be a means for displaying a notice display for notifying that the first display may be displayed once during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is configured to be easier to display once when the notice display is displayed than when the notice display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g25,
The decorative symbol variation display is configured so that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is confirmed and displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started.
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The certain effect is an effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The first display is a display that does not include a display relating to the operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means in the certain performance.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g28)
A gaming machine according to appendix g27,
The first display is a display that is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state;
One of the plurality of states is a second state;
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display having a display pattern corresponding to the operation means in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “first display pattern”),
The second display is a display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as the operation means in the second state).
This is called “second display pattern”. )
The second display is a display having the first display pattern,
The second display is a display having the second display pattern,
When the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect after the first display is displayed in the first display pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). )
The operation means in the first case is configured to be more easily in the second state than in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix h1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain performance is performed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started changes,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect moving means (including image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versatile lighter, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix h2)
A game machine according to appendix h1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Moreover, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
A gaming machine according to appendix h1 or h2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h4)
A game machine according to appendix h3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h5,
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a big hit than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
One type of display of multiple types is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of the plurality of types of operations is a production operation,
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, an operation other than the presentation operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the presentation operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to that provided on the game board, and may be provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix h10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
The case where the certain effect occurs is easier to hit than the case where it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
A hot production display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h14)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or during big hit. Even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
A game machine according to appendix h14,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing at which the third effect display is displayed by the period display may not be notified,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a prepaid card removal forgetting prevention notification, light emission by an LED, an effect operation by an accessory May be performed. Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 3rd display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
A game machine according to appendix h15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation in which the determination result is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “big hit symbol variation”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h17)
A game machine according to appendix h16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation”) in which the result of the determination of success or failure is out of place.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured such that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the loss symbol variation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h15 to h17,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
During the display of the third effect display, the electricity output movable means may perform the effect operation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h18,
After the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is hidden until a certain period in the reach ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period in the reach.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h21,
The period display is a display for notifying the timing for displaying the second effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second timing”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance increase is notified may be fixed in correspondence with the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. In such a case, the location where the chance up is notified may be changed such that the notification is made three times and the notification is made only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, or may be easier to miss. Also, the likelihood of being a big hit does not have to vary depending on the number of timing notifications. Also, the larger the number of chance ups, the more likely it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances up, the easier it will be to win.

(Appendix h23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display;
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation,
There may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h23,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h25)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h26)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
The first speed is different from the second speed;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h27)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h26,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which a display mode of at least a part of the time display changes with the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h28)
A game stand according to appendix h26 or h27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h26 to h28,
The first display is a display whose display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display whose display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. In addition, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there are the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Appendix h31)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h32)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
With operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display.
The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h33)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Between the start of the first period and the end thereof, the first timing is notified,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h26 to h33,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h35)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h36)
A gaming machine according to appendix h35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h37)
The game stand according to appendix h35 or h36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h37,
When the countdown display is displayed, it always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
Rather than being displayed in the first display mode, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
The countdown display starts and ends within one symbol variation display period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h41)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h42)
A gaming machine according to appendix h41,
The time notification by the countdown display is continued even during the movement of the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h43)
A gaming machine according to appendix h41,
During the movement of the countdown display, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h45)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h44,
When the time until the certain performance is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h45,
In some cases, the second display mode does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h47)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h48)
A gaming machine according to appendix h47,
In some cases, the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h49)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h50)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h51)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display;
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed,
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the first display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h52)
A game machine according to appendix h51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display starts to be displayed,
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h53)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h54)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix h53,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h52 to h54,
Providing production movable means that can perform multiple types of actions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h56)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h57)
A gaming machine according to appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured not to be displayed until the certain period has elapsed after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h58)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again before the certain period elapses.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h58,
The certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h60)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h61)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h60,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h62)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h63)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h64)
A gaming machine according to appendix h63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size.
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h66)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It ’s easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h68)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h67,
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h69)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h68,
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h70)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table.

(Appendix h71)
A game stand according to appendix h69 or h70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
The display position of the first display is changed by the moving display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h72)
A gaming machine according to appendix h71,
While the moving display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h73)
A gaming machine according to appendix h71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h74)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h75)
A gaming machine according to appendix h74,
The timing notification is a notification for notifying that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h76)
A game stand according to appendix h74 or h75,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h77)
A gaming machine according to appendix h76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h62 to h77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h79)
A gaming machine according to appendix h78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h80)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h82)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a time display,
A certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started,
Even after the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started,
The certain presentation may be started in response to the timer display being started and the time display having reached a certain time.
When the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, it is easier to confirm the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h83)
A gaming machine according to appendix h82,
If the time display reaches the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is started.
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h84)
A game stand according to appendix h82 or h83,
The certain performance is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
One of the plurality of types of notice is a third notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a fourth notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first notice may be a pending change notice, a pre-reading mode, or a continuous notice.

  Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-ream or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

  The third notice may be a cut-in notice or the next notice.

  The fourth notice may be a jackpot notification.

(Appendix h85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h82 to h84,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a mini game,
The time display reaches the certain time according to the display result of the mini game, and the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h86)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h85,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice item,
The notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game,
The advance notice item includes a display suggesting that the timer display starts to be displayed,
After the notice item is displayed, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
When the notice item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h87)
A gaming machine according to appendix h85 or h86,
The mini-game display result is derived before the time display change starts and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h88)
A gaming machine according to appendix h85 or h86,
The mini-game display result is derived after the time display change is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h89)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h85 to h88,
As a result of displaying the mini game, a result not related to the certain performance may be derived.
The display of the mini game is configured to start before the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h89,
The timer display when the certain performance is not started is configured such that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h90,
The timer display is a display that starts to be displayed in any one of a plurality of aspects,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
When the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect is more easily started than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h92)
A gaming machine according to appendix h91,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed.
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the jackpot game that is performed in response to the jackpot symbol being confirmed and displayed, so that an advantageous state is given to the player. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h93)
A gaming machine according to appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is configured to be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h94)
A gaming machine according to appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is displayed in a definite manner. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h95)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h92 to h94,
The first aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a first time,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the second time,
The third aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the third time,
In the first time and the second time, the second time is longer.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the advantageous state is given.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h96)
A gaming machine according to appendix h95,
The time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and can be displayed after the decimal point,
The display of the first time as the time display that is first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
In the timer display, the display of the second time as the first time display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h97)
A gaming table according to appendix h95 or h96,
The display of the first time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the third time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display that is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display provides a notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h98)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h97,
Providing production display means capable of performing production display,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying the timer display,
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The first case is configured such that the certain performance may not start,
In the case of the Tsubaki, it is configured so that the certain performance is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h99)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h98,
The timer display is a display in which the time display is displayed by the source,
The certain time is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The first display is one of the displays related to the notice,
The second display is a pre-reading notice display performed by displaying a hold icon in a certain mode,
The third display is one display among displays for displaying that execution of the production is started (display indicating that execution of the production is waiting),
The fourth display is a notice display of one of the notice displays different from the second display,
Before the display of the second display starts, the display of the first display may start,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
Configured to be in the second state after the first state,
The first state is one of states in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The second state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h101)
A gaming machine according to appendix h100,
In some cases, the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may end in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h102)
A game machine according to appendix h100 or h102,
The position display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a background in the hold icon,
In the first state, the fifth display is configured to be displayable,
The fifth display is configured not to be displayed in the second state,
The first state is a state where a certain reach effect is not executed,
The second state is a state where a certain reach effect is being executed,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h103)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain manner.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h104)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102 or h103,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h105)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102 or h103,
The area where the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h106)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h107)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h108)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The first display is a display that at least suggests that the second display may be started,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display for notifying that execution of a certain effect is started,
The fourth display is a notice display relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
The fifth display is a display indicating that at least a holding icon is displayed.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The display of the third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
The second state may be after the first state,
The first state is a state where a certain reach effect is not executed,
The second state is a state where the certain reach effect is being executed,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon,
In the second state, the fifth display is configured not to be displayed together with the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h109)
A game machine according to appendix h108,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h110)
The game stand according to appendix h108 or h109,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h112)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h113)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h114)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
The first display and the fifth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h115)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h114,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h116)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h117)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The sixth display is a display whose display is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during display of the sixth display, display of the fourth display is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the sixth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h118)
A game machine according to appendix h117,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display for notifying that the display of the sixth display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the seventh display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h119)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h118,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the eighth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h120)
The game stand according to appendix 119,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h121)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h120,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is an explanatory display;
The ninth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed,
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h122)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 108 to h121,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h123)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display,
The fourth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state,
After the certain notice display is displayed, an effect may be started.
The second state may be after the first state,
The hold icon can be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed,
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
The first state is one of the states in which the sixth display can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the sixth display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h124)
A game machine according to appendix h123,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h125)
The game stand according to appendix h123 or h124,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach production,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h126)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h125,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h127)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h126,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h128)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h129)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h130)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h129,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h131)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to h130,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h132)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h131,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h133)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h132,
The certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h134)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h133,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts displaying after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h135)
A gaming machine according to appendix h134,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h136)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h135,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h137)
A game machine according to appendix h136,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h138)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h137,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display;
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h139)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h138,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h140)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state,
After the certain notice display is displayed, an effect may be started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be after the first state,
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h141)
A game machine according to appendix h140,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed,
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h142)
A gaming machine according to appendix h141,
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display is configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h143)
The game stand according to appendix h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h144)
The game stand according to appendix h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h145)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h146)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h147)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h146,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach production,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h148)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h147,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect is started,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h149)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h140 to h148,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h150)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h149,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h151)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h150,
The certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h152)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h151,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts displaying after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h153)
A game machine according to appendix h152,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h154)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h153,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h155)
A game machine according to appendix h154,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h156)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h155,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display;
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h157)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h156,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h158)
Production means capable of executing timer production,
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of hold icons;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is configured such that a certain effect can be started when the timer display is started and the timer display reaches a certain time.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h159)
A game machine according to appendix h158,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain performance.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h160)
The game stand according to appendix h158 or h159,
The second hold icon is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h161)
A game machine according to appendix h160,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started once before the certain symbol variation display is ended.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h162)
The game stand according to appendix h160 or h161,

One of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode,
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h163)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h162,
It is configured to be able to execute a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h164)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h163,
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation icon,
The second hold icon may be displayed as the variation icon in association with the start of the certain symbol variation display,
The mode of the variation icon is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first change”) in association with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display. And
The variation icon displayed by the first change is an icon that can suggest the remaining number of times that the timer effect can be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h165)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h164,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time that is initially displayed as the timer display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h166)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h165,
A plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect,
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect,
The time initially displayed as the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display”). ”)), The first time displayed is a different time,
An effect performed in response to the first timer display at the certain time and an effect performed in response to the second timer display at the certain time are different effects. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h167)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h166,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting a ball removal operation (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal display”),
One display of the timer display and the ball removal display may be overlapped with the other display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h168)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h158 to h167,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h169)
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of timer production,
One of the multiple types of timer effects is a first timer effect,
One of the multiple types of timer effects is a second timer effect,
The first timer effect is an effect in which the first effect is started in response to the first timer display being started and the first timer display being at the first time,
The second timer effect is an effect in which the second effect is started in response to the second timer display being started and the second timer display being at the second time,
During execution of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period in which the first timer display is displayed overlaps a period in which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). )
It is configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h170)
A game machine according to appendix h169,
In the first case, there is a case where the first timer effect is executed as a notice and the second timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice (hereinafter referred to as “second case”).
In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a notice (hereinafter referred to as “third case”).
In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice (hereinafter referred to as “fourth case”).
The time when the first effect is started and the time when the second effect is started may be different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h171)
A game stand according to appendix h169 or h170,
The first notice item may be displayed as the first performance,
When the first effect is executed as a notice, a notice corresponding to the first notice item is started during the execution of the certain decorative symbol variation display,
When the first effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first decorative symbol variation display”) started after the certain decorative symbol variation display is being executed. Configured to start a pre-reading notice according to the first notice item,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h172)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h170,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be started during the execution of the certain decorative symbol variation display,
In the fourth case, the second effect is started during execution of a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first decorative symbol variation display”) that starts after the certain decorative symbol variation display. Is configured to be

The first effect is an effect of a pre-reading notice intended for the first decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes,
The second effect is an effect of a pre-reading notice intended for the first decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h173)
A game machine according to appendix h172,
The second effect is an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h174)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h173,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game in which a result is derived before the first timer display reaches the first time,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a result is derived before the second timer display reaches the second time,
The first production according to the result of the first mini-game is configured to be performed,
The second production according to the result of the second mini game is configured to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h175)
A game machine according to appendix h174,
When the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the first mode,
When the result of the first mini game becomes the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third aspect,
When the result of the second mini game becomes the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second mode,
When the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h176)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h175,
The timer display changes over time and becomes a timer display with another certain aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h177)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h176,
The first timer display may be the first time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display,
The second timer display may be the second time during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h178)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h177,
The start time of the first timer display and the second timer display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h179)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h178,
The time displayed as the initial display of the first timer display and the time displayed as the initial display of the second timer display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h180)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h179,
The first time and the second time are the same time,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h181)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h180,
A display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting a ball removal operation (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal display”),
One display of the first timer display and the ball removal display may be overlapped with the other display,
One display of the second timer display and the ball removal display may be overlapped with the other display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h182)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h180,
A display means,
The rendering means is the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h183)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h169 to h182,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-1)
Production means capable of executing timer production,
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of hold icons;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon is a hold icon including a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character,
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which the certain character is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix R1-1,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain performance.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix R1-1 or R1-2,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a default hold icon;
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-3,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-4,
When the second hold icon is displayed than when the third hold icon is displayed, the certain effect is more easily started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-5,
It is configured to be able to execute a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-6,
The timer effect is more easily executed when the second hold icon is displayed than when the third hold icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-7,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-8,
A plurality of timer effects (hereinafter referred to as “multiple timer effects”) may be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect,
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect,
The time displayed when the display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) is started, and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, The time displayed when "second timer display" is started is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, a second effect may be performed as the certain effect.
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-9,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display,
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state,
One of the timer display and the ball removal error display is configured to be overlapped with the other display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1-1 to R1-10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  FIG. 463 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 463, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  Note that a mode in which the display unit 903 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 described above with reference to FIG. 289 may be employed, and a touch panel may be provided on the display unit 903. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 463 encloses a sphere, circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Next, a slot machine (cylinder gaming machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 464 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 464 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 464), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display device 1025, the game information display device 1026, and the payout number display device 1027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operations of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Under the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 465 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decoration symbol display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Shielding device 300 Main control part 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Lamp for game board 542 Lamp for game stand frame

Claims (15)

Production means capable of executing timer production,
Display means capable of displaying a timer display;
A game machine equipped with
The timer effect is an effect configured to start a certain effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
The display means provides an indication regarding the certain effect (hereinafter, “first display”) in at least a part of the area where the timer display is displayed after the timer display indicates the certain time. May be displayed),
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first display can be continuously displayed at least until the certain performance is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
As a result of the timer display countdown being performed, the timer display is configured to be a display indicating the certain time,
The timer display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
The movement display is started after the display of the timer display is started and before the countdown of the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
After the display of the timer display is started and after the movement display started before the countdown of the timer display is started, the countdown of the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The third hold icon is a hold icon for a prefetch notice,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon is a hold icon including a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain performance.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 5 or 6,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a default hold icon;
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 5 to 7,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display ends.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 5 to 8,
When the second hold icon is displayed than when the third hold icon is displayed, the certain effect is more easily started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
It is configured to be able to execute a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
The display of the timer display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time until the symbol variation display ends.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating 0.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The certain performance is a pseudo-continuous production,
The first display is a suggestion display related to the pseudo-continuous production,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The certain performance is a super reach production.
The first display is a display suggesting that the super reach production is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.